Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCAG2022-279 - Original - Green Tech Excavation, Inc. - Kherson Park Redevelopment - 07/01/2022FOR CITV OF KENT OFFICIAL USE ONLY Agreement Routing Form For Approvals, Signatures and Records Management This form combines & replaces the Request for Mayor's Signature and Contract Cover Sheet forms. (Print on pink or cherry colored paper) Dir/Dep: /f Sup/Mgr: Dir Asst: -6 (Optional)KENT WaSHTNGToN f oL CLa. Originator: Lynn Osborn Department: Parks, Recreation & Community Services Date Sent: 06/30/2022 Date Required: Earliest opportunity please Authorized to Sign Muuyor or Designee Date of Council Approval 06/07 /2022 Budqet Account Number: p21035 Budset? fvesfl*o Grant? Yes Type: l\/{ co +t lE ELorh E Pco EooL EN Vendor Name: Green Tech Excavation, Inc Category: Contract Vendor Number: 2487442 Sub-Category: Original Project Name: 66srson Park Redevelopment ll ProjectDetails: Redevelopment of park including space-themed play elements, video projection system, new pavements and site furnishings Agreement Amount: $I,627,27 8.00 start Date: 0710512022 Basis for Selection of Contractor: 316* Memo to Mayot must be ottached Termination Date: 1213112022 Local Busin lf meets requirements per KCC 3.70.100, please complete "Vendor Purchase-Locol Exceptions" form on Cityspace. Business License Verification:fl v"rfl rn-Processl-l Exempt (KCC s.0 1 .o4s) Notice required prior to disclosure? E*oes Contract Number: UIoL)vGulECut.5 3E .g ocl Comments: Date Received: City AttorneY:Date Routed: Mayor's Office City Clerk's Office adccw22373*l_20 Visit Documents.KentWA.gov to obtain copies of all agreements rev. 2021 051 3 7/1/22 CAG2022-279 7/1/227/1/22 PROJECT MANUAL KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT PK20-01 PROJECT SITE LOCATION 307 West Gowe Street, Kent, WA 98032 DELIVER BIDS TO City Clerk’s Office, Kent City Hall 220 Fourth Ave. South, Kent, WA 98032 BIDS ACCEPTED UNTIL Bid Submittal Date and Time Friday, May 13, 2022 2:00 PM BID OPENING Immediately After Bid Submittal Time Kent City Hall OWNER City of Kent Parks, Recreation & Community Services 220 Fourth Ave. South, Kent, WA 98032 Julie Parascondola CPRE, Director PROJECT MANAGER Terry Jungman Parks Planning & Development Division ARCHITECT/CONSULTANT J.A. Brennan Associates PROJECT MANUAL CONTENTS 1.PROJECT LOCATION 2.CONTRACT, BOND and INSURANCE 3.INVITATION TO BID and INFORMATION 4.BIDDER PACKET 5.KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS 6.KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS 7.KENT STANDARD PLANS 8.PREVAILING WAGE RATES 9.APPENDICES A. GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION B. FABRICATION DRAWINGS C. KENT STANDARD PLANS D. PRODUCT CUT SHEETS (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT PK20-01 PROJECT LOCATION 307 West Gowe Street, Kent, WA 98032 KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT PK20-01 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, made in duplicate, is entered into between the CITY OF KENT, a Washington municipal corporation ("City"), and Green Tech Excavation Inc., organized under the laws of the State of Washington, located and doing business at 9812 Coral Drive SW, Lakewood WA 98498 ("Contractor"). WITNESS: In consideration of the terms and conditions contained in this Contract and in the project documents, plans, and specifications, all of which are made a part of this Agreement, the parties agree as follows: 1. The Contractor shall do all work and furnish all tools, materials, and equipment for the KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT in accordance with and as described in the Contract and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided under the Contract and every part thereof. The Contract shall include all project specifications, provisions, and plans; the Kent Parks Special Provisions; the Kent Special Provisions; the current Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, including all published amendments issued by those organizations, if applicable ("Standard Specifications"); the City's bid documents; and the Contractor's response to the City's bid; collectively "the Contract." The Contractor is responsible to obtain copies of the current Specifications including the latest amendments as of the date of bid opening. Unless otherwise directed by the City, work shall start within ten (10) working days after the City issues its Notice to Proceed and physical work shall be substantially completed within 125 working days* (*defined as Monday through Friday). The term of this Contract shall continue until all work has been completed, final acceptance has occurred, and all Contractor obligations have been fulfilled. The Contractor shall provide and bear all expense of all equipment, work, and labor of any sort whatsoever that may be required for the transfer of materials and for constructing and completing the work provided for in the Contract and every part thereof, except where the specifications may allocate that responsibility to the City. The total contract amount for all Work performed under this Contract, including Washington State Sales Tax, is $1.627.278.00. 2. City hereby promises and agrees with the Contractor to employ, and does employ, the Contractor to provide the materials and to do and cause to be done the above described work and to complete and finish the same according to the Contract and the terms and conditions herein contained and hereby contracts to pay for the same according to the Contract and the schedule of unit or itemized prices provided by Contractor in its response to the City's bid, at the time and in the manner and upon the conditions provided for in the Contract. 3. Contractor for itself, and for its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, does hereby agree to the full performance of all covenants herein contained upon the part of the Contractor. 4. It is further provided that no liability shall attach to the City by reason of entering into this contract, except as expressly provided herein. 5. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, officials, employees, agents, volunteers and assigns harmless from any and all claims, injuries, damages, losses or suits, including all legal costs and attorney fees, arising out of or in connection with the performance of this contract, except for injuries and damages caused by the sole negligence of the City. The City's inspection or acceptance of any of Contractor's work when completed shall not be grounds to avoid any of these covenants of indemnification. Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this contract is subject to RCW 4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the Contractor and the City, its officers, officials, employees, agents and volunteers, the Contractor's liability hereunder shall be only to the extent of the Contractor's negligence. IT IS FURTHER SPECIFICALLY AND EXPRESSLY UNDERSTOOD THAT THE INDEMNIFICATION PROVIDED HEREIN CONSTITUTES THE CONTRACTOR'S WAIVER OF IMMUNITY UNDER INDUSTRIAL INSURANCE, TITLE 51 RCW, SOLELY FOR THE PURPOSES OF THIS INDEMNIFICATION. THE PARTIES FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE MUTUALLY NEGOTIATED THIS WAIVER. The provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this contract. 5. Contractor agrees, upon the City's written demand, to make all books and records available to the City for inspection, review, photocopying, and audit in the event of a contract related dispute, claim, modification, or other contract related action at reasonable times (not to exceed three (3) business days) and at places designated by the City. 7. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the term of construction and throughout the specified term of maintenance, insurance of the types and in the amounts described in Exhibit A attached and incorporated by this reference. 8. Contractor is responsible for locating any underground utilities affected by the work and is deemed to be an excavator for purposes of RCW Ch. 19.122, as amended. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with RCW Ch. 19.122, including utilization of the "one call" locator service before commencing any excavation activities. 9. Contractor shall fully cover any and all loads of loose construction materials, including but not limited to sand, dirt, gravel, asphalt, excavated materials, construction debris, etc. to protect said materials from air exposure and to minimize emission of airborne particles to the ambient air environment within the City. 07/01/2022 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) Bond #0766045 KENT PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND TO CITY OF KENTWasHrNGloN KNOW ALL MEN BYTHESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned,Green Tech Excavation, lnc. as Principal, and Harco National lnsurance ComPanY a Corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Washington, as a Surety Corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become Surety upon bonds of Contractors with Municipal Corporations, as Surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the CIry OF KENT in the penal sum of $t,azz,zza.oo together with any adjustments, up or down, in the total contract price because of changes in the contract work, for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington, and the Codes and Ordinances of the CITY OF KENT. Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to a motion, duly made, seconded and passed by the City Council of the City of Kent, King County, Washington, the Mayor of the City of Kent has let or is about to let to the above bounden Principal, a certain contract, the said contract providing for construction of KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT (which contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and WHEREAS, the Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth: NOW, THEREFORE, for non-FHWA projects only, if the Principal shall faithfully perform all the provisions of said contract in the manner and within the time herein set forth, or within such extensions of time as may be granted under the said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanicsi subcontractors and material men, and all persons who shall supply the Principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work and shall indemnify and hold the CITY OF KENT harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in said contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or performed under said contract, then and in that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden parties have executed this instrument under their separate seals. The name and corporate seal (if required by law) of each corporate party is hereto affixed and duly signed by its undersigned representatives pursuant to authority of its governing body. PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND Page 1 of 2 TWO WITNESSES r Green Tech Excavation, Inc, PRINCIPAL (enter principal's name above) BY TITLE; DATE: O 30 2022 CORPORATE SEAL: Harco National Insurance ComPanY SURETYrc, IG RE 1' PRIN AME DATE: PRI ME o SI il'? DATE t/t /pnp> CORPORATE SEAL BY j. DATE : 06/30/2O22 TITLE : Emma C. Doleshel, Attorney-in-Fact ADDRESS:P.O. Box 3018 Bothell, WA 98041-3018 CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE SEAL Assistant) 9gcrgta Corporation named asrYoft gnature thereto is genuine, and nd in behalf of said .... a ,. , I hereby certify that I am the ( Principal in the within Bond; that Who signed the said bond on behalf of the Principal of the said Corporation; that I know his/her/their si that said Bond was duly signed, sealed, and atte Corporation by authority of its governing body PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BOND Page 2 of 2 a Vrt ;J,rn AS STANT SEC POWER OF ATTORNEY HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY Bond# OlGGty\S Member companies of IAT lnsurance Group, Headquartered: 4200 Six Forks Rd, Suite 1400, Raleigh, NC 27609 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of lllinois, and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New Jersey, and having their principal offices located respectively in the cities of Rolling Meadows, lllinois and Newark, New Jersey, do hereby constitute and appoini JIM S. KUICH, SARAH H. BEHRENS, EMMA C. DOLESHEL, NATALIE C. CHAU, HEATHER L. ALLEN, ANDY PRILL, THERESA A. LAMB, STEVE WAGNER, MICHAEL A. MURPHY, JIM W. DOYLE, CHAD M. EPPLE Bothell, WA their true and laMul attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereol which are or may be allowed, required or permitted by law, statute, rule, regulation, contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presenls, shall be as binding upon the said HARCO NATIONAL TNSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANGE COMPANY, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by their regularly elected officers at their principal offices. This Power of Attorney is executed, and may be revoked, pursuant to and by authority of the By-Laws of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and TNTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY and is granted under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly held on the 13th day of December, 201 8 and by the Board of Directors of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting held on the 13th day of December, 2018. 'RESOLVED, that (1) the Chief Executive Officer, President, Executive Vice President, Senior Vice President, Vice President, or Secretary of the Corporation shall have the power to appoint, and to revoke the appointments of, Attorneys-in-Fact or agents with power and authority as defined or limited in their respective powers of attorney, and to execute on behalf of the Corporation and affix the Corporation's seal thereto, bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and other written obligations in the nature thereof or related thereto; and (2) any such Officers of the Corporation may appoint and revoke the appointments of joint-conhol custodians, agents for acceptance of process, and Attorneys-in-fact with authority to execute waivers and consents on behalf of the Corporation; and (3) the signature of any such Officer of the Corporation and the Corporation's seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or certification given for the execution of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, contract of indemnity or other written obligation in the nature thereof or related thereto, such signature and seals when so used whether heretofore or hereafter, being hereby adopted by the Corporation as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Corporation, to be valid and binding upon the Corporation with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." lN WTNESS WHEREOF, HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY have each executed and attested these presents on this 31st day of December,2021 STATE OF NEW JERSEY County of Essex STATE OF ILLINOIS County of Cook * Executive Vice President, Harco National lnsurance Company and lnternational Fidelity lnsurance Company On this 31st day of December, 2021 , before me came the individual who executed the preceding instrument, to me personally known, and, being by me duly sworn, said he is the therein described and authorized officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE GOMPANY; that the seals affixed to said instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies; that the said Corporate Seals and his signature were duly affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies. llll lN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand affixed my Official Seal, at the City of Newark, New Jersey the day and year firsi above written. A, <9,' )" A. Shirelle A. Outley a Notary Public of New Jersey My Commission Expires April 4, 2023 CERTIFICATION l, the undersigned officer of HARCO NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and INTERNATIONAL FIDELITY INSURANCE COMPANY do hereby certifo that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit, and the copy of the Sections of the By-liaW.3-'o1'99i0 qompanies as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the originals on file in the home office of said companies, and that the same are.boribcttraliscripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full force a4d eff.ect, lN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand on this day, T\:C,C- 3)nb , JO)a ''fr^,ffu; rEtt t904 $EAL1tt. A01 083 lrene Martins', Asgistant Secrqtdry INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT Insurance The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, their agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. A. Minimum Scope of Insurance Contractor shall obtain insurance of the types described below: 1. Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written on ISO occurrence form CG 00 01 or its equivalent, with minimum limits of $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate for each 1-year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of primary, umbrella or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and Completed Operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial Completion of the work. The Commercial General Liability insurance shall be endorsed to provide the Aggregate per Project Endorsement ISO form CG 25 03 11 85. The City shall be named as an Additional Insured under the Contactor’s Commercial General Liability insurance policy with respect to the work performed for the City. All endorsements adding Additional Insureds shall be issued on form CG 20 10 11 85 or a form deemed equivalent, providing the Additional Insureds with all policies and endorsements set forth in this section. 2. Automobile Liability insurance covering all owned, non-owned, hired and leased vehicles. Coverage shall be written on Insurance Services Office (ISO) form CA 00 01 or a substitute form providing equivalent liability coverage. If necessary, the policy shall be endorsed to provide contractual liability coverage. 3. Workers’ Compensation coverage as required by the Industrial Insurance laws of the State of Washington. B. Minimum Amounts of Insurance Contractor shall maintain the following insurance limits: 1. Commercial General Liability insurance shall be written with minimum limits of $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate for each 1 year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of primary, umbrella or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and Completed Operations coverage shall be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial Completion of the work. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) 2. Automobile Liability insurance with a minimum combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage of $1,000,000 per accident. C. Other Insurance Provisions The insurance policies are to contain, or be endorsed to contain, the following provisions for Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability: 1. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respect the City. Any insurance, self-insurance, or insurance pool coverage maintained by the City shall be excess of the Contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it. 2. The Contractor’s insurance shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be cancelled by either party, except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the City. 3. The City of Kent shall be named as an additional insured on all policies (except Professional Liability) as respects work performed by or on behalf of the contractor and a copy of the endorsement naming the City as additional insured shall be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. The City reserves the right to receive a certified copy of all required insurance policies. The Contractor’s Commercial General Liability insurance shall also contain a clause stating that coverage shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respects to the limits of the insurer’s liability. D. Contractor’s Insurance for Other Losses The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause whatsoever to any tools, Contractor’s employee-owned tools, machinery, equipment, or motor vehicles owned or rented by the Contractor, or the Contractor’s agents, suppliers or contractors as well as to any temporary structures, scaffolding and protective fences. E. Waiver of Subrogation The Contractor and the City waive all rights against each other any of their Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extend covered by Builders Risk insurance or other property insurance obtained pursuant to the Insurance Requirements Section of this Contract or other property insurance applicable to the work. The policies shall provide such waivers by endorsement or otherwise. F. Acceptability of Insurers Insurance is to be placed with insurers with a current A.M. Best rating of not less than A:VII. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) G. Verification of Coverage Contractor shall furnish the City with original certificates and a copy of the amendatory endorsements, including but not necessarily limited to the additional insured endorsement, evidencing the Automobile Liability and Commercial General Liability insurance of the Contractor before commencement of the work. H. Subcontractors Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insureds under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. All coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the same insurance requirements as stated herein for the Contractor. (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 20220517 1 443297 85 REVISION NUMBER: bpi>'CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/OD/YYYY) 511712022 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: lf the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed, lf SUBROGATION lS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Hartley And Hartley lnsurance, lnc. 3803 Bridgepo( Way W., Suite B University Place WA 98466 CONTACT NAME:253-565-8700 | raA *",. 253-566-0863PHONE (A/C. No. E: E-MAIL ANNRFSS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # ;NSURERA. Liberty Mutual INSURED Green Tech Excavation lnc 9812 Coral Dr SW Lakewood WA 98498 INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER E: INSURER F THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWTHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WTH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES, LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDT INSD WN POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF IMI\/l/DD/YYYYI POLICY EXP IMM/DD/YYYY}LIMITS A x COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILIry-l ".o,rr-roo, [X o..u* BKS 54597990 08t08t2021 08t08t2022 EACH OCCURRENCE s 1,000,000 quh IURLNILL) r'llSES lEa occurrence)s 1,000,000 IVIED EXP (AnV one person)s 15,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY s 1,000,000 GEI.l .I'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER] ,or,"rlXffi [].o. GENERAL AGGREGATE E 2,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 $ A lx .OIVIOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO owNED lrz] scseoulro AUToS oNLY I,\ I AUToSH|RED l\-/ I NoN-owNEDAurosoNLY l l eurosotrlv tt BAS 54597990 0510412022 0810812022 COI\i]BINED SINGLE LIIVIIT lFa accidenl)$ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person)$ BODILY INJURY (Per accident)$ PROPERTY DAMAGE lPer eccidentl $ $ X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB Xl o."u*-l "ro,r.-roo. uso 54597990 05t04t2022 08t08t2022 EACH OCCURRENCE s 2,000,000 AGGREGATE s 2,000,000 DED I o.rr*r,on s $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND E|\TPLOYERS'LtABtLtTY Y/ N ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE f---lOFFICERiMEI\,lBEREXCLUDED? LI(Mandatory in NH) lf yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N/A PER I I OTH-srarlrrF I I trR E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E,L, DISEASE - EA EI\iIPLOYET $ E,L, DISEASE - POLICY LIIVIIT A WA STOP GAP COVERAGE BKS 54597990 08t08t2021 08t08t2022 $1,000.000 $1,000,000 Aggregate Accident & Employee Each DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 10 1, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached lf more space is required) The City of Kent is named as "Additional lnsured" included Primary and Non-Contributory, waiver of subrogation per CG 88 10 04 13 (see attached) with respect to the work performed for the City of Kent. Project: Kherson Park Redevelopment CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Kent Attn: City Clerk 220 4th Ave S Kent, WA 98032-5895 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBEO POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THEPOLICY PROVISIONS.,ln AUrHoRrzEo REPREFTNTA' K*ffi ACORD 25 (2016/03) The ACORD name and logo ar \trr".:CORPORATION. All rights reserved. IMPORTANT lf the certificate holder is an ADDITIoNAL INSUR:Dr the poricy(ies) must be endorsed, A statementon this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holderin tieu orsucrr endorsement(s), lf suBRoGATloN ls wAlvED, subiect to the terms and conditions of the poricy, certain poricies mayrequire an endorsement' A statement on tris ce rtificate does not confer rights to the certificateholder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The certificate of lnsurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract betweenthe issuing insurer(s), authorized ,.pr.r"ntrtiru or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does itaffirmatively or negatively amend, uriunJ-orlrter the coverage afforJeo by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25(2001t081 : con'lrvr]nclAl GENERAL LrABrLrry cc 88 10 04 13THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THEPOLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. COMMERCIAL GENERT.L LIABILITY EXTENSIONThis endorsementmodifieq insurance provided under the forbwing; COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART NON.OWNED AIRCRAFT NON.OWNED WATERCRAFT PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY - ELEVATORS EXTENDED DAMAGE TO PROPERTY RENTED TO YOU (TENANt,S PTOPETtY DAMAgC)MEDICAL PAYMENTS EXTENSION EXTENSION OF SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS - COVERAGES A AND BADDITIONAL INSUREDS - BY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT o* PERMIT PRIIVIARY AND NON.CONTRIBUTORY - ADDITIONAL INSURED EXTENSIONADDITIONAL INSUREDS - EXTENDED PROTECTION OF YGUR "LIMITS OF INSURANCE"WHO IS AN TNSUREFELLow;'#6?EB;llEi,?r:511^f^1?j:th,E[T?1,?yj+pRA.ncE AND wHo ,s AN ,NsuRED - NEWLY FORMED OR ADDITIONALLY ACQUIRED ENTITIES FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS AND PRIOR OCCURRENDES KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE, OFFENSE, CLAIM OR SUIT LIBERALIZATION CLAUSE BODILY INJURY REDEFINED EXTENDED PROPERTY DAMAGE Wfi L'^i[.T,]X3]?$nBi,it^H'""JffiS.".',fi EIr,f; #il.rli,,ERsrous- Includes copyrighted ,r,u?'0" Liberty Mu ual lnsurance al of lnsurance Services Offlce, lnc., with its permission PAGE 2 , 2 2 3 3 5 o 6 7 7 7 7 7 I 8 cG 88 10 04 13 Page 1 of 8 With respect to coveraoo atFa")^-r rendorsemeni.._ __vdrage afforded by this e _ _,,v,v(,u rJy tnts endorsernent, the provi . A. NoN_owNED ATR.RAFT t' rc provrsrons of the poricy appry unless modified by the ylfll; f :li i**, :fi 1:,fT;, 3l J : :l Lg n r _ c o rre ra s e1 ,,,. ;[;j:#j::::atercrart;;"';il;o',;,3;,il,iJll'i?ffi,fl1 Propertv Damase Liabi,itv,2. ,,,.ni1ffi:::':,'*", 3. rrr" pir.t i, ";:"::::aned with a trained paid crew; ,,,," l' BlI"i."IH$,:: :i I ::t,: n,,, erre ci ve ce4 ,, ,, ,j,oo'j,l,"j;jfl:ffir canada, ie! ,;i;;#Sl':"1h T:;flP"i:ti:y#Hitutedarthority or the However, ,nu ,r, Ou,n, used to cany persons or prope-ty for a charge. ;#ii**;il.1r*#;[ff liil]fr :i.;d#":H'jffi fu :[["i#[::iirrfi [:.,"",,i:r.,3ir#.B' NoN-owNED *ATER.RAFT rru' tnar would aso appry to til i"J] l"ilrTJ rnou, this provision. Under parag raph 2. Exclusions of Srsubparasrap h (2) o'fexcrusion , ^,.:]::ll;t;ffi-A - Bodirv rnjury And r ,n,, *.,l,il;-;":: ,:o:"1;::, Auto or w,tercrart is repraced by the;;ffi Damase Liabirity, (2) 'iT:::H;::TJJ":wn that,., '" "' (a) Less than 52 feet long; and(b) Not being useO toPRoPERTY DAMAGE LrAB,Lrry - aaarffirsor:s or property for a charge, 1, Under parao ,lHry;t'*Hff rft rillri,i'ffi If ffi ll"#",ffi [:ri*;*HiirH[:", tnctude vehicl 2. The foilowino ]:^T9.g to S""tion tV _ Commerctat Gener l"ffi;i:rasraph 6. il;;;.,',frrr.n"", --"-,'al Llabirity conditions, condition 4. other *r'"th;ii]ffij;-:#:3J[:ffi,iJ:xfj?H:Tf,33r[.,"#:,,is excess over anv propertv insurance,EXTENDED DAMAGE TO pROpERr, *a*raD To ycU (Tenanrlf Damage To premises Rented ro you is not othenvise excruded ,1's property Damage)1' g,n9:r parasraph 2. Excrusron" or r"l,,]"1:"""1::::t rrom this coverase parr: Liabrity: " - rawrsDrur-rs or section r 'c:verage A - Bodiry lnjury and property Damagea' H,ilHrln from the last paragraph of exc usion j. Damase To property is repraced by the ffi:J:'il:,f lJ:l|31,,?l,lJ.l,"J,ffi ;::i::i1x;,::l:3:,1,1";,#:igf :l[ee,,(otherthanto: ' v"-""'v' e^Pleururr' smohe, or leakage rrom'"n'irtJ;;ii" f; rli"if",[[]v.,"rl(i) lrelises rented to you for a period of 7 or fe( I I ) ;"",fl :H ff 'Jl^:li',"#;':.,# ;: i:il ::: iliillll i;31; oJg,.. m " n t ro,., I'mru:s[Jl]i?ff',!1)Jl$iio"x?,i:r"*""i:f3gy,li;ri:ieny damase,,to contents or flffHxE limit of insurance applies to thie coverage as described in section ilr - Limits of D. lncludes copyrighted ,r,u?'0" Liberty Mutual lnsurance al of lnsurance Servi:es Office, Inc., with its permission. cG 88 10 04 13 Page 2 of 8 E. . b' The last paragraph of subsection 2 Exclusions is replaced by the following:Exclusionsc'throught't?^:"]i?tlytodamageb_vfir: tightning,exptosion,smokeorleakagefrom automatic fireirotection sysr#s top.r.rlr.r,rniie ri,nlejjJ;il g, temporarily or.rpLO Oyyou with permission of the owner. A sepaiate ririrot r.r,;;;#r1H to Damage ro premisesRented ro you as described in seaioilii_ rir,," of rnsurance.2' Paragraph 6' under section lll - Limits of lnsurance is replaced by the following;6" subject to Paragraph 5' above, the )amage To premises Rented ro you Limit is the most we willpay under Coverage A for damag..l..Jr".",o"f :,property damage,,to:a. Any one premise: (1) White rented to you or(2) while rented to.you or temporarily occupied by you with permission of the owner l?:,lffif : iJ J[;, 5,.n'''', i' ex-p tb' i o n ,, s'; k ; ;; ;"; k u g u f ,o, a u to m a t i c b' contents that you rent or leese as part of a premises rentar or rease agreement.3' As regards coverage provided by this provisirn D. EXTENDED DAMAGE To pRopERTy RENTED ToYoU (Tenant's Propertv o',rL"r - narasr;;;;.;:;f D"rinitions is'ie-prali wi,r the forowing:9'a' A contract for a lease of premises. H:wever, that portion of the contract for a lease of premisesthat indemnifies any put'on or organ zation for o"T.1nj,!y ,ire,.rightning, exprosion, smoke, ori".X1,XY:J,.r"flr#';illflfJ[: proteltio, .vrt"r. iJ p,.un,,ir". whirirentei to you. or remporariryu* t a ie in "i,i; ili ; J ; ffi ilI'""J?.*i i1 ?J1?' ;3 i Jilin ffi :: * lkl$"t : fifuiil .; g. MEDICAL PAYMENTS EXTENSION Xf""r'rt#:: rt,[;ti"'' Pavments is not othenvise e>cruded, the Medicar payments provided by this poricy are Under Paraglup,h. 1.-lnsuring Agreement of Section I _ Coverage C _ Medical payments,Subparagraph (b) of nur"gr;p;.;,-is reptaceo by the foltowing:(b) The expenses are incurred and reporbd within three years of the date of the accident; andEXTENSION OF SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS - COVERAGES A AND B1' Under supplementary Payments - coverag -'s A and B, paragraph 1.b. is repiaced by the folrowing:b' Up to $3'000 for cost of bail bonds recuired because of accidents or traffic law violations arisino,"Jlflli;,H::fil[:ehicle to wr'i.r', -t-,"-soffiTfi" Liabirity coverage appries. we do not haize2. Paragraph 1.d. is replaced by the following: d' All reasonable expenses incurred by tie insured at our request to assist us in the investigation or3,u'tiltr;:ihe claim or "suii", inctuolns ;i;;ii*]'or uu,.ni'nJ. ,p-," ftU, day because or time ADDITI.NAL lNsuREDs - BY coNTRACT, AGREEtl, ENT oR pERMtr1' Paragraph 2' under section ll- who ls An lns ured is ,ru!j^"11? incrude as an insured any person ororganization whom,you h"u "g'u"i'to add as., "Jiiiorrlinsured in a written contract, writtenil?':,"J:ilfili,?:ql#fi,i,,*:::,,ffir;il:H.#fii**,*tl"r'J;jg rtnpJ,::,J:Jf;],,,a' Your acts or omissions, or the acts or orissions of those acting on your beharf, in theperformance of your on going operatiors ro, ir'," uojitionrr ,.r'rj',triLiJ the subject of thewritten contract or writtei "gi""munt pr:vided tnaitrre oooiry injury,, or ;pioperty damage,, occurs::l?;:i:iTlili,.*:i#ti 6j;;;i;;H;,',?Jii ,,u,"quent to the signins or such written G. F. @ 2013 Liberty Mu ual lnsurancelncludes copyrighted materiar of rnsurance ,"r,.a- *,*, rnc., with its permission. cc 88 10 04 13 Page 3 of g .b,Premises or facilities rented by you or used by you; orc. fftefllt;ffi'ce' operation or ut e by you of equipment rented or reased to you by such persond' 3s;fi'fl:ff[:xxj:1i,:1;: iJ,,,r,"J:ffil,,il[[I#iJJrs state or po,iticarsubdivision has(1) This insuranc S',i[i: flfl ;:; 'i? ], ff | ?X, : I ?; I :i,y,i?,, JII ; J,tifi :t ff ,ff S :,;?J jH tilg,,,.(2) -This insurancr.;;i;i; ffii;,H:irf,.lv,to "bodiry iniu ry,, or,,properry damase,, incruded with in the(3) Insurance app folrowing n"r5/!rl to premise s you own, rent, or contror but oniy with respect to thea) The existence, mair tenanceadvefiir ni*:Iffi #; i';,l *tq;;ki*:f fftnr *s, ". ,",:::,(b) The construction, erection, or removal of elevators; or However: (c) The ownership' maintenance' or use of any elevators covered by this insurance. 1, The insurance afforded to such a2. rr-coverase;r;;,"::t:,:" tional insu.ed onry appries to the extent permitted by raw; and :x,";51ff.iTffi[tt[?*ilhtfil]]i!:,ril:::r?i,?,,;.:";ttilf;,i:isirlr,,he nsurance with respect to paraoranh . ^ ^,_-' ' qvvr(rurl€l tnsured vvu dre required by the contract or tnootttmlni't*.'i,?*iln 1'a' above' a person's ororganization's status as an additionalinsured underthis(1) Ail work, includino p!, th s ;i"j ;;; i;ix# il:li:,J; I:;: i.::r::nt ru rnis h ed in cc fffiL;il?:,..i"o',11o,,, in.,,"Ji,-)';[tJ",J.J1tX"i;',HJ;ijH:i:T"":,ffiT;:::X"'n operations has been(2) L?fi{ifil+T;:x1i#?5,"J,.' I#I[:JH ?tJI;:xT:?;j'1i !:: been pu,,.,sengaged in perforn with respect to pr,"orrnr., ; ^:^. :=rrormrns operations ror a principal ,; ; p;;;H::lTt;;iJ.subcontractor unoo,.r",i,unl ;r: ;i:iiiri;i;?i3l:;3Jt,"#:lI ol o,g, nization's.status as an additionar insured under this with respect, to pu,.ro,",";; "'":^' ."::*'' or written asreement with vou ;; ;;;h;";rses or facirities ends,re equipme;;""ffi',:1'ff.1J,';,.?i#3;lT:lxffiH""?";ii:,":rgy to afv,,occurrence,,lv!i*r takes prace arterThe insurance provided bv thic an^,^-^-.- . - t ev vr rJL.r nave returned such equipment to the lessor prior to ih; [#ir;;ffiX PJJf|',"":J"1Ti#g":oo,ies onrv ir the written contract or written i we have no duty to defenri ":::;,,1-:rnage ' -vrr'uv'l vr vvrrrren agreement is signed S1#,XTti,,",HB.S#3}^?":.,!?,.Ui,l?"?:;::','Idui this endorsement unti, we receive r u n der s u"tion il :,J3il,f ,.".f , i3lfl rl*:,l;; ; jxiffi:i JI 8:UiH"":f a s u t lncludes copyrighted ,r,u? 'o' ' Liberty Mutud lnsurance al of lnsurance Sepices Offlce, lnc., with its permission. cG 88 10 04 13 Page 4 of 8 2' with respect to the insurance provided by this endorsement, ihe foilowing are added to paragraph 2.Exclusions under Section t -'coverag"'a -E;airv rniurv inJpi"p"rtv Damage Liabirity:This insurance does not apply to: a' "Bodily iniury" or "propedy damage" arising from the sole negligence of the additional insured,b' "Bodily injury" or "p,roperty- damage" that occurs .prior to you commencing operations at thetocation where subn ,;uooity inlrif;oi ;iroperty damage,, occurs,c' "Bodily iniury', "property damage" or "personal and advertising inju.ry, arrsing out of the rendering lrt;,illXi,t''lure to render, unv"p,"otutJonat architectr,.rl ingin"uring or surveying services, (1) The preparing, approving, or fairing to prepare or approve, maps, shop drawings,opinions' reports, surveyl, field oriers, .r,.ngl ;,d!fs"or drawings and specifications; or(2) supervisory, inspection,architecturarorengineeringactivities. This exclusion applies even if the,claims againstliy-i.yr99 ailege negrigence.or_otherwrongdoing in thesupervision' hiring, emolovment, training oi ronioring of others 5y tnai insured, if the ,,occurrence,, whichcausedthe,,boditviniuiv,,tr p,;p;t;;;";;;; "i,rJ"rr*."*n[iiiir."othe,,personaiandaovertisinggfl;r1"3:fo ttre renleii'sj-"i"*i'r-.";;ifY;to"iende,, ,nv p.i"..iJlar arcrritecturar, ensineering or d.,,Bodilyinjury,,or,,propdrtydamage,,occurringafter: (1) All work' including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work,on the project (o1her than i"ruice, maintbnance oi"iep"irsl to be performed by or on::[?L|JJT,additional in'u'"01'1'at ilre -iocaiiln"'oiinu covered operations has been (21 That porlion of "your work" out "fjll:ll^I:.1njur,y or damage arises has been put to itsintended use by iny person oiJilanization other than another contractor or subcontractorengaged in performing operationJfoilpii..iirr ,. z'pz'n of the same project.e' Any person or oroanization specifically des.ignated as an additional insured for ongoing operationsbv a s e p a rat e a o'o r i r o r.r a i ii; fi iL :ow r,r r n s, r- i s! i='i o n c o N r RA c ro RS-endorsement issued by us and ,rOu , parl of this policy3' "rylf,ffff:t;ry;"'J,tutt"e afforded to these additionat insureds, the folowing is added to section ,t- I.';5:if:ri;"':1T,l3Jifi,i,11,l,;?.,ltr:ffisJ;,':iiil:,ljJ.l,.",tract or asreement, the most we wiil pay a. Required by the contract or agreement; ortt' Available under the applicable Limits of lnsurance shown in the Declarations;whichever is less. This endorsement shall not increase the applicable Limits of lnsurance shown in the Decrarations,H' PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTORY ADDITIONAL INSURED EXTENSION lll'"iJ:il:;i;iJJffi,t:r11lf,"""' or orsanization who qualifies as an additionat insured under any form or :;::HX X;?"l?"TJl"urance or sECrloN lv - coMMERcTAL GEi'TERAL LrABrLrry coNDrroNS is a. The following is added to paragraph a, primary lnsurance: lf an additional insured's policy has an-oth9y lnsurance provision Tpklng its poricy excess, andyou have agreed in a writien .'";tr;; or written ugiuurJnito provide the additionat insuredcoverage on a primary and noncontributory basiliinrs p.f ify shall be primary and we will not seekcontribution f rom th e ioo itionu r i* ;;il;pJ.y ;;r';;"#r"l;;; we cover. O 2013 Liberty Mutual lnsurance lncludes copyrighted materiar of rnsurance services office, rnc., wilh its permission. cc 88 10 04 13 Page 5 of B :l . b. The following is added to paragraph b, Excess lnsurance:When a written contract o' uo'":3]::ct or written agrr . t, tu oi poritr;;i:XtJlidin.; :,roflX [f ig ff ffi ii :lses reas e, racii ities re n ta r j:-0" orilrv Jr prmary and non-con;?j T9 ,, ,ooit.nriut or a$reeffient' or permit issued by aror which t[J,"iaition,ii,,,i.Ji, o."J,;H[?,,3: ffiHtffft#"1"."il?,ff:lr""IfijffJ#d" 5-"""x3'ffi ' "J'lHYl :l's'" e m u n t b' _;ff :::,r^ll:'::1l'*l'f ::}':"##rtkf*;,Tfffi;:il;,,r.*:*, unooi'tt'#;TJi",i,'JffLflu"on or orsanization who quarifies as an add*ionar insured under any forrn or1' Thefoilowing is added to condition 2. Duties rn The Event of occurrence, offense, craim orsuit:An additional insured under this endorsement wilr as soon as practicab/e;a. Give_-written notice of an ,,occurrence,,or insurance to us; -" vvvurrcrroe oran offense that may resurt in a claim or,,suit,,underthisb. Tender the defens available ,. ui" ",i0",,#iiffil:ll;janv claim or "suit" to alr insurers whom also have insurancec. Agree to make available any other insurarunder this coverage part, - -' -'lce which the additional insured has for a ross we coverd. W^e-have no duty to defend or indemnify arreceive written notice or a "suitii ;;il; J,,il i:i:iTffiill:rred under this endorsement untjr we2' The limits-of insurance applicable to the additional ,written asreement oil;I;.;#il:J[.::rj,:"i:ifff:g are those .pu.lr,:,q in a written contracr orSectic ,, .00,,?.ll'; ul,',H-ry,,I,.,i:":'#ffi$:,11:fl",i^'J,*',ril:::,r"ffJr,tnis poricv a-noi"ii,""o ,. J. wHo ts or,*aro"; -;,:,^::]:t""ttu available underthis policy. "ooe lrrnits are inclusive of and nor ffi ff i,};t";:,.-i,"'m.#:?srtri5,"$sivfi hi,xt?'J?i,,.,,,-o,u.. (1),,Bodiryinjury,, or,,personar ;:ilJj;;;:r,cedwith the roirowins: (a) ]o you, to your partnt (ir vou are ; ri,ii"r'ii.'['riiJfiruli,i :i:f ffiffflx::pJffi"Tji,I] y:ry*) .to vour membersiliJ;H:Tfi 5,"J"#lrlis[:ffi ,d#f# j:[r#]ff ;*'.,"""tf tJl;iffi iil;,:,rffi i(b) l;::::l;iill;5flii'i,i'iiiil;:ister or that co-"emproyee,, or ,,vorunteer worker,, as a(c) 5il:i:'l J:::il:ilfjiii:[::u,?f,: f [ffi#[: il i?5ir:,",T ilffi": :: wh. m us, pay(d) Arising out of his ot hu:,llo^Yiling or failing toprovide professional hearth care services. However, rt you are not in the buprofessionai h""lth .r,t'ness of providing professionai r'',"rrir-', ."* ."ruices or providino ;:lm;;i=;ll:,ffi ::,?11::::fi :$"i,';,:'Jl;:*';,mrkfi T#ilU+ll:,;lr:: In crudes copyris hted rr,"ff '.1;ff :lJ.y::fl ::rffi ".ce, lnc., with its permission cG 66 10 04 13 Page 6 of 8 K. ' Paragraphs (a) and (b) above oo nJi-aooty- to "bodily injury"-or "personal ano aoveriising injury,, caused bv an"employee" who is aitiirg in " t'p"ri"J,!. capacity f'or voul supSrvisory capacity as used herein means the"emplovee's" job responiibiliti;;;;sig;'o oy vor,'in.i'iJul tlnJji,.uct sipeivsron;;i;., ,,employees,, of yours,However' none of these "employJ.r;rr.indri - r.i;u.li['i^[vi, o,. ;;p"i.on.r'#o-aovertising injury,, arising outof their willful conduct, which d lj;fi;; ;r the purposefui or'*riiriint"nib;;rJ;f"iirv injgry,, or ,,personar andadvertising' injury"' or caused in wnoie oiin part.ny tir"lrlnioxicaiion ry riquor or contioiteo substances,The coverage-provided by provision J' is excess over any other valid and coflectabre insurance avairable to your"employee',, NEWLY FORMED OR ADDIT]ONALLY ACQUIRED ENTITIES Paragraph 3. of section , - who ts An rnsured is repraced by the forowing: ,' 3' Any organization.you newly acquire or form and over which you maintain ownership or majority interest,fil'ffi,jl as a Named rn'u,eiirinere is nolti',J;;i;;;' iniri"n." "i"ir"irijf that organization, a' t"',:l?.g: :!9el this provision,is afforded only untit the expiratiqn of the poticy period in which theentity was acquired or formed by you; - - -...r r' b' 3""r';::""1r3ffi:J?,f:?y"i:;j,fjyjltry" or "propertv damase" that occurred berore you c' coverage B does not aooly.to "personal and advertising injury,, arising out of an offense /,committed before vou aciuireo;;f#;il";ilanization. ,rd' Records and descriptions of operations must be maintained by the first Named lnsured.No person or organization is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership, joint venture;ll}',"rfr'F,Illll,3ilo?', tt'it i. noi .io*n ,. a Nameo ins;,Ji, in" d"lil,"ii"i. [iqrr,,ries as an insured FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS AND PRIOR OCCURRENCES H:ff:i.tt!fl3,1Y,- t"Tercial General Liabilitv conditions, the fonowins is added to condition 6. Your failure to disclose all hazards or prior "occurrences" existing as of the inception date of the policy ;|,3l],t:'JJ,?tXi::,11"ff];i3i,i,"X'ii;ff;v"ilIilli'Jv'i,.i,,d;"d;h r,ii;;"'tl1i,.ro," a, hazards oi KNOWLEDGE OF OCCURRENCE, OFFENSE, CLAIM OR SUIT yil:?',S.:ir:?ty;,.,"[T,%?l3l.,3j:si;,'*'s:,{y,conditions, the fouowins is added to condition 2. duties rn Knowledge of an "occurrence", offense, claim or "suit" by an agent, servant or ,,employee,, of any insuredshall not in itself constitute r,no*reJqe 611rr"'inir,"l;fiffi an insureo ii;i;i'u;", parasraph 1. orsection tt - who ts An lnsurla oil p"r.on who has ueen oesilna-A ilil#lo receive reports of;ntj[r""',it"' offenses, .t"irt *;.;its" snait trav. L."ir"o such notice from the agent, servant or LIBERALIZATION CLAUSE lf we revise this commercial General Liability Extension Endorsement to provide more coverage without additionarPremium charge, your policv *irr "rto,rli""riv prouio" ih;;;;"rrg; ,. or ti,J J"v ir.,"i""irion is effective in your BODILY INJURY REDEFINED Under secaon V - Definitions, Definition 3. is repraced by the forowing: I 3' "Bodilv lniurv" ff:::,plPri iniyry, 1igkngs9. or disease ]ustaineo by a person, This incrudes mentaranguish' mental iniury' sirock, rtighi or death ir',"t i".i,it. r[i suctr physicar injury, sickness or disease. O 2013 Liberty Mutual lnsuranceIncludes copyrighted materiar of Insurance "ur'.u. **, rnc,, with its permission L. N. o. M,. cc 88 10 04 13 Page 7 of 8 P. EXTENDED PROPERTY DAMAGE o, t:i:ffi;' a' of covERAGE A' BoDILY INJURY AND pRopERTy DAMAGE LtABtLtry is reptaced by the a, Expected Or lntended lnjury ' "Lodil]:liry' or "property dama.ge" expected or intended from the standpoint of the insured. Thisi;*il:iSff;:ilp,B,,[:?;::gtly[#il1;a;;;;;;j,;;=Jitil;r."", ir," r.";;,__ ,,, *,i'f#3i l[xLT6=5r"J-?'ftffiir"j,iEcovERy AGArNsr oTHERS ro us - wHEN REeSIRED rN A 3iffiS3?fiil;"c;i1ff;JitffJr:'1r Liabiritv conditions, the rorowins is added to condition 8. rransrer we waive any right of rgcorlery we may have ?-gai19t a person or organization because of payments we make forXIJ;'#:$3,T;ffifl:iJtHil l,{ry,l"ii::lt*iffi::T,T",,,H'Hl5,:fu"{iF.X'f3nll"**nn tri.ridilriiJ,1' ffi,3:ti[i,ffi:i'r}J"',it"?Tffj'|ljilf :flf'o in writins in a contract or asreement that you waive such 2' The injury or damage occurs subsequent to the execution of the written contract or written agreement. O 2013 Liberty Mutual lnsurancelncrudes copyrighted materiar of Insurance services offlce, lnc., with its permission. cG 88 10 04 13 Page 8 of 8 INVITATION TO BID Notice is hereby given that the City of Kent, Washington, will receive sealed bids at the City Clerk's office through Friday, May 13, 2022 up to 2:OO PM as shown on the clock on the east wall of the City Clerk's Office on the first floor of City Hall,22O 4th Avenue South, Kent, Washington 98032. All bids must be properly marked and sealed in accordance with this "Invitation to Bid." Bids must be delivered and received at the City Clerk's office by the above-stated time, regardless of delivery method, including U.S. Mail All bids will be opened and read publicly aloud immediately following opening for the City of Kent project named: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT PK20-O1 This project is a redevelopment of Kherson Park. The construction of the new park will include many new child friendly features to capture the imagination and historical ties to Kent's legacy in the aerospace industry. The new park will have interactive play features, a 4O'image wall, picnic areas and video projection system. This project will also include some right of way improvements. Should a contract be executed, it is the contractor's responsibility to comply with all COVID-19 workplace health and safety measures established by the state Department of Labor & Industries or otherwise imposed by the Governor, the state Department of Health, or the Local Health Officer of Seattle-King County Public Health, or subsequent modifications to such health and safety measures as those authorities may issue, including providing all needed personal protective equipment. The Engineer's estimated range for this project is $950,000 - $1,150,000. For questions please email Michael Espenan MEspenan@kentwa.gov. The email Subject line should read "Kherson Park Bidder Inquiry." Michael can also be reached by phone at 253-856-5058' All questions must be receivedbV 4:00 pm on May 5,2022. A Pre-Bid Meeting will be held at 9:00 AM on Thursday, May 5,2022 on site at 307 West Gowe Street, Kent, WA 98032, Bids must be clearly marked *Bid' with the name of the project on the outside of the envelope, addressed to the City Clerk,220 4th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032-5895' Only sealed bids will be accepted, No facsimiles or electronic submittals will be considered. Each bid shall be in accordance with the plans and specifications and other contract documents now on file in the office of Parks Planning and Development, City of Kent, Washington. Plans and specifications can be downloaded at no charge at KentWA.gov .'ocurement. Copies of the WSDOT Standard Specifications are available for perusal only. Apprentice Utilization Requirements are mandatory for all public works estimated to cost one million dollars or more, in which case no less than Llo/o of the labor hours must be performed by apprentices. KCC 6,01'030. A cashier's check, cash or surety bond in the amount of 5olo of the bid must be included with the bid. The City of Kent reserves the right to reject any and all bids on any or all schedules or alternates or to waive any informalities in the bidding and shall determine which bid or bidders is the most responsive, satisfactory and responsible bidder and shall be the sole judge thereof. No plea of mistake in the bid shall be available to the bidder for the recovery of his/her deposit or as a defense to any action based upon the neglect or refusal to execute a contract. Bidders must submit with their initial bid a signed statement as to whether they have previously performed work subject to the President's Executive Order No. 1t246. No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of sixty (60) days after the day of bid openrng, Dated April 21, 2022 BY: KimberleY Published in Daily Journal of Commerce on April 22, 2022 Komoto, City INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS  Bidders shall be qualified by ability, experience, financing, equipment, and organization to do the work called for in the contract documents. The City reserves the right to take whatever action it deems necessary to ascertain the ability of the Bidder to perform the work satisfactorily. This action includes the City’s review of the qualification information in the bid documents. o The City will use this qualification data in its decision to determine whether the lowest responsive bidder is also responsible and able to perform the contract work. If the City determines that the lowest bidder is not the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, the City reserves its unqualified right to reject that bid and award the contract to the next lowest bidder that the City, in its sole judgment, determines is also responsible and able to perform the contract work (the “lowest responsive and responsible bidder”).  All blanks in the proposal forms must be appropriately filled in. Bid documents must contain original signature pages. Facsimiles are not acceptable and are considered non-responsive submittals.  All bids must be sealed and delivered in accordance with the “Invitation to Bid.” Bids must be received at the City Clerk’s office by the stated time, regardless of delivery method, including U.S. Mail.  The City also reserves the right to include or omit any or all schedules or alternates of the Proposal and will award the contract to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder based on the total bid amount, including schedules or alternates selected by the City.  A Bidder who wishes to claim error after the bids have been opened and tabulated shall submit a notarized affidavit signed by the Bidder, accompanied by original work sheets used in the preparation of the bid, requesting relief from the responsibilities of award. In such event. o The affidavit shall describe the specific error(s) and certify that the work sheets are the originals used in the preparation of the bid. o The affidavit and the work sheets shall be submitted to the City’s Representative no later than 5:00 p.m. on the first business day after bid opening, or the claim will not be considered. o The City’s Representative will review the certified work sheets to determine the validity of Bidder’s claimed error and make a recommendation to the City. If the City concurs in the claim of error, the Bidder will be relieved of responsibility, and the Bid Deposit of the Bidder will be returned. Thereafter, at the discretion of the City, all bids may be rejected or award made to the next lowest responsive, responsible Bidder.  The form of contract that the successful bidder, as the Contractor, will be required to execute, and the forms and the amount of surety bonds that it will be required to furnish at the time of execution of the contract are included in the bid documents and should be carefully examined.  Within 10 calendar days after the award date, the successful bidder shall return the signed City prepared contract, insurance certification as required by the contract, and a satisfactory bond as required by law. If the successful bidder fails to provide these documents within the 10-day period, the City may, at its sole discretion, reduce the time for completion of the contract work by one calendar day for each calendar day after this 10-day period that the successful bidder fails to provide all required documents.  Successful bidder (Contractor) shall hold a valid City of Kent Business License. Visit https://www.kentwa.gov/doing-business/city-taxes/business-licenses for details and instructions.  Until the City executes a contract, no proposal shall bind the City nor shall any work begin within the project limits or within City-furnished sites. The successful bidder, as the Contractor, shall bear all risks for any work begun outside such areas and for any materials ordered before the contract is executed by the City.  No claim for delay shall be granted to the successful bidder, as the Contractor, due to its failure to submit the required documents to the City in accordance with this schedule.  The “Payment and Performance Bond” shall comply with Ch. 39.08 of the Revised Code of Washington, be in the form provided for in the bid packet, and be conditioned upon contractor’s faithful performance of the work free of defects and the payment of all taxes and wages owed to laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, and material men.  Any decision made by the City regarding the award and execution of the contract or bid rejection shall be conclusive subject to the scope of judicial review permitted under Washington State Law. Such review, if any, shall be timely filed in the Superior Court of King County, located in Kent, Washington.  Bidders shall include all costs of doing the work within the bid item prices. In the contract plans, contract provisions, addenda, or any other part of the contract require work that has no bid item price in the proposal form, the entire cost of labor and material required to perform the work shall be incidental and included with the bid item prices in the contract. 
  Bidders shall refer to the insurance requirements in the bid packet, which constitute the insurance the successful bidder will be required to carry for this project. Submittal of a bid affirms a bidder’s ability to maintain such insurance.  All bids must be submitted with the current COVID-19 pandemic in mind and include the costs the successful bidder, as Contractor, will incur in timely performing the work while complying with all federal, state, and local job site requirements, including social distancing, sanitation measures, and required personal protective equipment. Contractor shall not be excused for delay, and no change order will issue for increased costs or additional time, due to Contractor’s requirement to meet COVID-19 mitigation measures established by any federal or state agency or official and required as of the date of bid opening. Should a federal or state agency or official impose subsequent mitigation measures that are not reasonably foreseeable, the parties agree to negotiate in good faith the impact those measures have on the contract work. BID BOND FORM KNOW ALL MEN BYTHESE PRESENTS: That we. Green Tech Excavation, lnc. , as Principal, andl l 19l ltv, Merchants National Bonding, lnc.as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITy OF KENT, as the Obligated, in the penal sum of $FivePercent(5olo)of TotalAmountBid Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bond themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligated shall make any award to the Principal for KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT According to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal thereof, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligated in accordance with the terms of said proposat or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligated; or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the Obligated the penal amount of the deposit specified in the invitation to bid, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligated, as penalty and liquidated damaged, the amount of this bond. SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS 13th DAY OF Green Tech on lnc. CIP Merchants Bond lng' SU Heather L. Al rney-in-Fact May 2022 Received return of deposit in the sum of BIDDER FORMS PAGE 1 DATE: 20- MrncHANiS\\ BONDING COMPANY* POWER OF ATTORNEY KnowAll Persons By These Presents, that MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING, lNC., both being corporations of the State of lowa (herein collectively called the "Companies") do hereby make, constitute and appoint, individually, Andy D Prill; Benjamin Wells; Chad M Epple; Dean R Young; Emma C Doleshel; Heather L Allen; Jeff Barrom; Jennifer Schultz; Jim S Kuich; Jim W Doyle; ijulie M Glover; Michael A Murphy; S M Scott; Steve Wagner; Theresa A Lamb their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, to sign its name as surety(ies) and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undedakings, contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof, on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitied in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. This Power-of-Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by authority of the following By-Laws adopted by ihe Board of Directors of Merchants Eonding Company (Mutual) on April 23,2011 and amended August 14, 2015 and adopted by the Board of Directors of MerchantsNational Bonding, lnc., on October 16,2015. ',The President, Secretary, Treasurer, or any Assistant Treasurer or any Assistant Secretary or any Vice President shall have power and authority to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact, and to authorize them to execute on behalf of the Company, and attach the seal of the Company thereio, bonds ind undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity and oiher writings obligatory in the nature thereof." ,,The signature of any authorized officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile or electronic transmission to any Power of Attorney or Certification thereof authorizing the execution and delivery of any bond, undertaking, recognizance, or other suretyship obligations of the Company, and such signature and seal when so used shall have the same force and effect as though manually fixed." ln connection with obligations in favor of the Florida Depadment of Transportation only, it is agreed that the power and aut hority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact includls any and all consents for the release of retained percentages and/or final estimates on engineering and construction contracis required by the State of Florida Department of Transportation. lt is fully understood that consenting to the State of Florida Department of Transportation making payment of the final estimate to the Contractor and/or its assignee, shall not relieve this surety company of any of its obligations under its bond. ln connection with obligations in favor of the Kentucky Depariment of Highways only, it is agreed that the power and authority hereby given to the Attorney-in-Fact cannot be modified or revoked unless prior written personal notice of such intent has been given to the Commissioner- Department of Highways of the Commonwealth of Kentucky at least thirty (30) days prior to the modification or revocation. In Witness Whereof, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed this 26th day of January , 2022 MERCHANTS BONDTNG COMPANY (MUTUAL) NDING, INC STATE OF IOWA COUNry OF DALLAS ss On this 26th day of January 2022 , before me appeared Larry Taylor, to me personally known, who being by me duly sworn did say that he is President of MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING, INC.; and that the seals iffixed to the foregoing instrument are the Corporate Seals of ihe Companies; and that the said instrument was signed and sealed in behalf of the Companies by authority of their respective Boards of Directors. o POLLY MASON Commission Number 750576 My Commission Expiresz t 07,2023 (Expiration of notary's commission does not invalidate this instrument) t, Wittiam Warner, Jr., Secretary of MERCHANTS BONDING COMPANY (MUTUAL) and MERCHANTS NATIONAL BONDING, lNC., do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the POWER-OF-ATTORNEY executed by said Companies,which is still in full . ,'ffL Fioul;is: fo'llt""ruLso-- Q Notary Public force and effect and has not been amended or revoked. ln Witness \Mrereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seal of the Companies on Vis /3 /, day of A)zL tl ZLat-^*'lry0 -:z; POA 0018 (1t20) lo ..'ro ,tl$i|b% :Pi-i -o- {: i "%).ir',.,.rf-1' Secretary BIDDER FORMS: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT PK20-O1 BIDDER FORMS PAGE 1 (TNTENTIONAL BI-ANK PAGE) BIDDER FORMS PAGE 2 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE STATEMENT (Presidential Executive Order # tL246) This statement relates to a proposed contract with the City of Kent named KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT I am the undersigned bidder or prospective contractor. I represent that - I have X- I have not- participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to preside{tial Executive Order #IL246 (regarding equal employment oppoftunity) or a preceding similar Executive Order. ltc NAME OF BIDDER I DATE B SIGNATURE PRINT NAME TITLE {om I De S-) ADDRESS /,40/*,"4.Do ?s{f A CITY, STATE ZIP (Note to Bidders: The information required in this Compliance Statement is informational only) BIDDER FORMS PAGE 3 DECLARATION CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY The City of Kent is committed to conform to Federal and State laws regarding equal opportunity. As such, all contractors, subcontractors and suppliers who peform work with relation to this contract shall comply with the regulations of the City's equal employment oppoftunity policies. The following questions specifically identify the requirements the City deems necessary for any contractor, subcontractor or supplier on this specific contract to adhere to. An affirmative response is required on all of the following questions for this contract to be valid and binding. If any contractor, subcontractor or supplier willfully misrepresents themselves with regard to the directives outlined, it will be considered a breach of contract and it will be at the City's sole determination regarding suspension or termination for all or part of the contract; The questions are as follows: 1. I have read the attached City of Kent administrative policy number 1.2 2. During the time of this contract I will not discriminate in employment on the basis of sex, race, color, national origin, age, or the presence of all sensory, mental or physical disability. 3. During the time of this contract the prime contractor will provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 4. During the time of the contract I, the prime contractor, will actively consider hiring and promotion of women and minorities. 5. Before acceptance of this contract, an adherence statement will be signed by me, the Prime Contractor, that the Prime Contractor complied with the requirements as set fotth above. By signing below, I agree to fulfill the five requirements referenced above By For: /Title:Frn. Date 3 BIDDER FORMS PAGE 5 CITY OF KENT ADMINISTRATIVE POLICY NUMBER: L.2 EFFECTIVE DATE: January 1, 1998 SUBJECT: POLICY: Equal employment opportunity requirements for the City of Kent will conform to federal and state laws. All contractors, subcontractors, consultants and suppliers of the City mustguarantee equal employment opportunity within their organization and, if holding Agreements with the City amounting to $10,000 or more within any given year, must take the following affirmative steps: 1 Provide a written statement to all new employees and subcontractors indicating commitment as an equal opportunity employer. 2. Actively consider for promotion and advancement available minorities and women. Any contractor, subcontractor, consultant or supplier who willfully disregards the City's nondiscrimination and equal opportunity requirements shall be considered in breach of contract and subject to suspension or termination for all or part of the Agreement. Contract Compliance Officers will be appointed by the Directors of Planning, Parks, and Public Works Depaftments to assume the following duties for their respective departments. Ensuring that contractors, subcontractors, consultants, and suppliers subject to these regulations are familiar with the regulations and the City's equal employment opportunity policy. 2. Monitoring to assure adherence to federal, state and local laws, policies and guidelines. BIDDER FORMS PAGE 6 MINORIry AND WOMEN CONTRACTORS SUPERSEDES: April 1, 1996 APPROVED BY Jim White, Mayor 1 CITY OF KENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This form shall be filled out AFTER COMPLETION of this project by the Prime Contractor and RETURNED TO THE KENT PARKS PROJECT MANAGER. I, the undersigned, a duly represented agent of rc Company, hereby acknowledge and declare that the before-mentioned company was the prime contract for the contract known as REDEVELOPMENT that was entered into on ,n" 6rXuy between the firm I represent and the City of Kent. s://< / sos * KHERSON PARK of /%.,20ae I declare that I complied fully with all of the requirements and obligations as outlined in the City of Kent Administrative Policy 1.2 and the Declaration City of Kent Equal Employment Oppoftunity Policy that was paft of the before-mentioned contract. Title: By For Date: BIDDER FORMS PAGE 7 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (Contracts over $ 100,000) List each subcontractor, from any tier of subcontractors, that shall perform subcontract work amounting to more than 10o/o of the total bid contract price. List each bid item to be performed by each designated subcontractor in numerical sequence. If no subcontractors will be performing AOo/o or more of the work, indicate this by writing "None" and signing this form at the bottom of the page. Failure to submit a fully completed and signed subcontractor list after the time set for bid opening may disqualify your bid. Project Name: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT Project Number: PK2O-O1 Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: LL Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: Subcontractor Name Item Numbers: BIDDER FORMS PAGE 9 BIDDER'S SIGNATURE SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (Contracts over $1 Million) HVAC, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL Name of Bidder: Project Name: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT Project Number: PK2O-O1 pursuant to RCW 39.30.060, Bidder shall list the names of the subcontractors with whom the Bidder, if awarded the contract, will subcontract for performance of the work of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning; plumbing; and electrical, or to name itself for the work. Failure of the Bidder to submit, within one hour after the published bid submittal time, the names of such subcontractors or to name itself to peform such work or the naming of two or more subcontractors to peform the same work shall render the Bidder's Bid non-responsive and, therefore, void. Heating, Ventilation and Air Cond itioning Subcontractor Name: Plumbing Subcontractor Name : Electrical Subcontractor Name:LLO OC f A)E 7tw7 a Bidder's Signature Date rl BIDDER FORMS PAGE 11 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST (Contracts over $1 Million) STRUCTURAL STEEL INSTALLATION AND REBAR INSTALLATION (tf,,-t ot /ur/l*ro,uh, C.Name of Bidder: Project Name: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT Project Number: PKzO-Ol Pursuant to RCW 39.30.060, Bidder shall list the names of the subcontractors with whom the Bidder, if awarded the contract, will subcontract for performance of the work of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning; plumbing; and electrical, or to name itself for the work. Failure of the Bidder to submit, within 48 hours after the published bid submittal time, the names of such subcontractors or to name itself to perform such work or the naming of two or more subcontractors to perform the same work shall render the Bidder's Bid non-responsive and, therefore, void. Structural Steel Installation Subcontractor Name:Scl,F Rebar Installation Subcontractor Name: .---4 Bidder's Signature a0a Date BIDDER FORMS PAGE 13 CoNTRACTOR'S QUALTFTCATTON STATEMENT (RCW 39.O4'35O) for KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT THE CITY WILL REVIEW THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPO'IISES TO THIS FORM TO DETERMINE WHETHER THE BIDDING CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PERFORM THE CONTRACT WORK. THIS FORM REQUIRES CRITERIA ESTABLISHED BY STATE LAW AS WELL AS SUPPLEMENTAL CRITERIA ESTABLISHED BY THE CITY THAT ARE APPLICABLE TO THIS PUBLIC WORKS PROJECT, THE BIDDER SHOULD READ AND RESPOND TO THIS FORM CAREFULLY. Indicators of contractor responsibility inherently involve subjective determinations as to the contractor's ability to perform and complete the contract work responsibly and to the owner city's satisfaction. The city has an obligation and a duty to its citizens and its taxpayers to administer its budgets and complete its projects in a businesslike manner. Accordingly, it has a duty to exercise the type of inquiry and discretion a business would conduct when selecting a contractor who will be responsible to peform the contract work. The city's supplemental criteria are based, in large paft, on the qualification statement form used by the American Institute of Architects. The city provides these criteria to provide the most objective framework possible within which the city will make its decision regarding the bidder's ability to be responsible to peform the contract work. These criteria, taken together, will form the basis for the city's decision that a bidder is or is not responsible to perform the contract work. Any bidder may make a formal written request to the city to modify the criteria set fotth in this qualification statement, but that request may only be made within 48 hours of the date and time that the bidder first obtains the bid documents or three (3) business days prior to the scheduled bid opening date, whichever occurs first. If the city receives a modification request, it will consider any information submitted in the request and will respond before the bid submittal deadline. If the city's evaluation results in changed criteria, the city will issue an addendum establishing the new or modified criteria. If the city determines that, based on the criteria established in this statement, a bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work, the city will provide written notice of its determination that will include the city's reason for its decision. The bidder has 24 hours from the time the city delivers written notice to the bidder that the bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work to appeal the city's determination. No appeals will be received after the expiration of this 24-hour appeal period. The city may deliver this notice by hand delivery, email, facsimile, or regular mail. In the event the city uses postal mail, the delivery will be deemed complete three days after being placed in the U.S. Mail. The bidder's right to appeal is limited to the single remedy of providing the city with additional information to be considered before the city issues a final determination. Bidder acknowledges and understands that, as provided by RCW 39.04.350, no other appeal is allowed and no other remedy of any kind or nature is available to the bidding contractor if the City determines that the bidder is not responsible to perform the contract work. BIDDER FORMS PAGE 15 If the bidder fails to request a modification within the time allowed or fails to appeal a determination that the bidder is not responsible within the time allowed, the city will make its determination of bidder responsibility based on the information submitted. COMPLETE AND SIGN THIS FORM AS PART OF YOUR BID, FAILURE TO PROPERLY COMPLETE THIS FORM MAY ALSO RESULT IN A DETERMINATION THAT YOUR BTD IS NON-RESPONSIVE AN D TH EREFORE VOID. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCEST CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. The undersigned ceftifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading. BIDDER NAME: NAME OF PRINCIPAL: PHYSICAL ADDRESS OF PRIMARY OFFICE: 1l / '(MAILING ADDRESS PRIMARY PHONE:,5'3- A)? - // STATUTORY REQUIREM ENTS 1. MINIMUM CRITERIA REQUIRED BY WA STATE LAW 1.1 Provide a copy of your Depaftment of Labor and Industries certificate of registration in complia.nce with -chppte; L8.27 RCW.Uc fr 6nEENr&2ll/AL.2 Provide your current state unifie.d busingsg lderitifier number.t"oa /q7 Of7 1.3 Provide proof of applicable industrial insurance coverage for your employees working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW, together with an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW, and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW. Providing a copy of a state of Washington "Master License Service Registration and Licenses" form is typicalfy sufficlent gvidence o.f the requirements of this subsection. L.4 provide ^ ,r"&t"rt ,,rt"!Pt 1"2f;!dith authority ro act and speak for your company, that your company, including any subsidiary companies or affiliated companies under majority ownership or under control by the owners of BIDDER FORMS PAGE 16 the bidder's company, are not and have not been in the past three (3) years, disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065 (3). xForm included with Bidder's Package. 1.5 Provide a signed statement*, signed under penalty of perjury by a person with authority to act and speak for your company, that within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date, your company is not a "willful" violator as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of any provisions of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction. xForm included with Bidder's Package. 1.6 Provide proof that a designated person or persons with your company has either received training from the department of labor and industries or an approved training provider on the requirements related to public works and prevailing wages under chapter 39.04 RCW and 39.L2 RCW or provide proof that your company has completed three or more public works projects and have had a valid business license in Washington for three or-more yFars an{ are exempt, from this training requirement. 6ran Dk tZarnfhrt /g Cxo*ylf s u p p LE M E NrAL c Rrr E RrA - E sta b rr'[?d[, ffi L{/ZilI!ffi. r"d ete rm i n e b i d aL r responsibility 2. ORGANIZATION 2.L 2,2 2.3 2.4 If your organization is a paftnership, 2.4,1 Date of organization: the following: 2.4.2 Type of paftnership (if applicable): 2.4,3 Name(s) of general partner(s): 2.5 If your organization is individually owned, answer the following: How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor? How many years n"t (6, {;tn\Il=non been in business under its present business name? B fcltfS 2,2.t Under what other o/forr"r. namesfils your orqanization operated?ame)ffrYour organization oPeratt If your organization is a corporation, answer the following: z.s.LDate of incorporation: Z/ 1{/ Uo{ 2.3.2 State of incorporation: ryQ 2.3.3 President't;;;;';- a:r,ql B,ofr/p^ , . 2.9.4 Vi ce - p resi d ent's name(s).: CltA/ tJtit/, lO 2.3.5 Secretary's name: ("lr6d .13;Al:10,2.s.6 rreasurer's name: Clrad B\A/:/O 2.5.1 Date of organization: 2.5.2 Name of owner: BIDDER FORMS PAGE 17 tafr 2.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals:Nfu 3. LICENSING 3.1 3.2 4. EXPERIENCE 4.1 List the forces 4.5 categories of worX th Cid Ar5h"o/,ar, List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate license numbers, if applicable.' 60ilr,thl Lnltl'lttlnr . tn't, t ("f?e ENfEqil ilO List jurisdictions in which your organization's partnership or tradd name is filed. at your 4.2 Claims and Suits. (If a attach details.) 4.2.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? 4,2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers? 4.2.3 Has your organization filed any lawsuits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? 4.3 Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach detatls.) f1/Q 4.4 On a separate sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name of project, owner, architect or design engineer, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion date.'tut *'t,hhgq) 4.4.L State total worth of work in oroqress and under contract: on a separate sheet ,,,"rn{{#!tg9"?r::tyour orsanization has the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect o engineer, contract amount, date of completion and percentage work performed with your own forces. kO 4.5,1 State average annual amount of completed in r design rmed during the e BIDDER FORMS PAGE 18 past five years: /, (m, 4,6 On a separate sheet, list the construction experien of the key individuals of your organization. fu. 4,7 On a separate sheet, list your major equipment. ce and present commitments PB,u'/ {Ana4, r Qrvmrt" Ff,1ccl' Fefaon4 //i:'rt 5to 4,fr/ t,it 5. QUALIFIED BY EXPERIENCE AND CERTIFICATION Identify whether: 5.1 Bidder is q By submitting a Bid, Bi Parks Special Provision the KHERSON LOPMENT work and the Kent possess, the BIDDER FORMS PAGE 19 No ual 5.2 Bidder will retain subcontractors qualified to perform the KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT work who possess the certifications required by Kent Parks speciar provisions: groan T*h u|l/ 5"6 //op frfl 5.1.1 11 68 13 PlaY Area EquiPment possesses the req uired Parks Special Provisions: 5.1.1 11 68 13 Equipment 5.1.2 32 L .13 Synthetic Safety -Place EPDM 5.1.2 32 18 16.13 Synthetic Safety Surfacing - Poured-in-Place EPDM er work will be n acco nce wit s and it either possesses, or will retain subcontractors who technical certifications required for the particular work identified therein. 6. REFERENCES: On a separate piece of paper, please provide the following reference information. 6.1 Municipal or Public Agency References: Five (5) references for work performed for a municipal or other public agency. In providing,references, please provide the following information for each, 5q-. ttfpiCul /%n^aU t |OroZrt 6.r.1 Asency name; l2"pjXt,t /7"tfuoVu5 6.1,.2 Agency address (including city, stateXnd zip code); 6.1.3 Name and phone number for a contact at the agency; 6,L.4 Name of project; 6.1.5 Briefly describe the project's scope; and 6.1.5 Contract amount (approximately). 6.2 Trade References: 6.4 surety: 'tfrjd 7i-lo,/nr/ &o/t5 /{otrylo/ 1t, GL,w tlA 767ot lan L,g SuP - df 5 - 67 | '7lD 6.3 Bank References: 6,4.1 Name of bonding company: 6.4.2 Name and address of agent: Ithb J"hr"o/ iona f flu,fho. Allc, tJ too lvt 'lq{^ 6/reol, 5^,/c Ao0 Bolhl I //A lto // ' 7, FINANCING 7.1 FinancialStatement. After bid opening, the City may require the following financial information from any of the three apparent low bidders. If so required, the selected bidder(s) must respond with this financial information within 24 hours of the City's request for that information. The City's request for this information shall not be construed as an award or as intent to award the contract. A bidder's failure or refusal to provide this information may result in rejection of that bidder's bid. 7,L.L Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization's latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items: Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials inventory and prepaid expenses); Net Fixed Assets; Other Assets; Current Liabilities (e.9., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes);Other Liabilities (e.9., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings). 7.L.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and date thereof: 7,L.3Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one? 7.L.4If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.9., parent- subsidiary). 7.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for construction? BIDDER FORMS PAGE 20 8.SIGNATURE 8.1 Dated tnis t3 day of 20 zz-- Name of Organization:1o-'-*'1;L 61J^^^;-*- Signed By: Name: Title: l/^.VI a.2 information provided herein is true and misleading. being duly sworn, states that the sufficiently complete so as not to be Subscribed and sworn before 1." vh this lD day of A 207?. Notary Public My Commission Expires DIANA MOSER Notary Public State of Washington Commission # 114528 My Comm. Expires Aug 10' 2025 BIDDER FORMS PAGE 21 BIDDER RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA Statement that Bidder Has Not Been Disqualified KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT This statement is required by state law (RCW 39.04.350(1)(d)) to be submitted to the City before the contract can be awarded. The bidder hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date (412212022), the bidder has not been disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3). 6 -)l/a,r/^ ?-x/trn t,D, Bidder's Business Name Signature of Autho Officialx Printed Name I Title ils/aoaai;aT{City State x If a corporation, proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice- president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign)- It a co-partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner. BIDDER FORMS PAGE 23 BIDDER RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT This certification is required by state law (RCW 39.04,350(2)) to be submitted to the City before the contract can be awarded- The bidder hereby ceftifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the bid solicitation date (4t22t2022), the bidder is not a "willful" violator, as defined in RCW 49.4g.OgZ, of any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction' I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the foregoing is true and correct. Bidder's Business Name si n ature of Officialx Printed Name C ,,Jn f Title s/s/ aosa un //r4 -Daft /City State x If a corporationt proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice- president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner' BIDDER FORMS PAGE 25 CITV OF KENT COMBINED DECLARATION FORM: NON.COLLUSION DECLARATION I, by signing the proposal, hereby declare, under penalty of perjury under the laws of the United States that the following statements are true and correct: 1. That the undersigned person(s), firm, association or corporation has (have) not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the project for which this proposal is submitted. 2. That by signing the signature page of this proposal, I am deemed to have signed and to have agreed to the provisions of this declaration. AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT I, the undersigned, having duly sworn, deposed, say and ceftify that in connection with the pedormance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or mechanic employed in the performance of such work not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than the minimum rate of wage as specified in the principal contract; that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT NAME OF PROJECT (, NAME OF BIDDER'S FIRM OF AU ORIZED REPRESENTATIVE BI E, SIG BIDDER FORMS PAGE 27 PROPOSAL To the City Clerk City Hall City of Kent, Washington 98032 rhe undersisned hereby ceftifies m* 6rUn D) ffCa,ntior, JnC has examined the job site and construction details of the work as outlined on the plans and described in the special provisions and specifications for the project named KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT for the City of Kent, Washington, and has read and thoroughly understands the plans, special provisions and specifications, and contract governing the work embraced in this improvement and the method by which payment will be made for that work and hereby proposes to undeftake and complete the work embraced in this improvement in accordance with the bid and contract, and at the following schedule of rates and prices: NOTE TO BIDDERS: 1) All bid items are described in the plans, Kent Parks Special Provisions, Kent Special Provisions, Kent Standard Plans or WSDOT Standard Specifications. Reference the Section in this proposal document where the bid item is described. 2) Proposal items are numbered in sequence but are non-continuous. 3) Unit prices for all items, all extensions, and total amount of bid must be shown. 4) Should bid items with identically worded bid item descriptions appear in more than one schedule of the proposal, the bidder must bid the same unit price. The City shall use the lowest unit price submitted by the bidder for the items in question in each schedule where identical bid item description appears. Bid items with identically worded descriptions which appear in more than one schedule are denoted with an asterisk (*). BIDDER FORMS PAGE 29 BID SCHEDULE: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT Include all labor, materials, equipment and overhead necessary to complete each item. ALL ENTRIES SHALL BE WRITTEN IN INK OR TYPED TO VALIDATE BID. UNit PTiCCS fOT AII itCMS, AII extensions, and total amount of bid shall be shown. Enter unit prices in numerical figures only in dollars and cents to two (2) decimal places (including whole dollar amounts). DO NOT INCLUDE TAX IN THE UNIT PRICES. All figures must be clearly legible, Bids with illegible figures in the Unit Price column will be regarded nonresponsive and rejected. Where conflict occurs between the unit price and the total amount specified for any item, the unit price shall prevail, and totals shall be corrected to conform thereto. BIDDER FORMS PAGE 30 Item Section Description Qtv Unit Unit Price Amount Base Bid - Schedule A: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT A1 All Divisions Minor Contract Change 1 LS $ 75,000.00 $ 75,000.00 A2 Division 1 General Terms and Conditions 1 LS i Topo\r70,fuP A3 Division 2 Existing Conditions 1 LS i7o,M!r Sqno b A4 Division 3 Concrete L LS rttt,noP i tl{,ooo,q A5 Division 4 Masonry 1 LS '?o,ao!o rfo,0n0,q A6 Division 5 Metal Fabrications 1 LS r?{w9 i q|,rlor.f A7 Division B Plastic Glazing 1 LS s57,w?r {l,ooo9 A8 Division 9 Painting and Coatings L LS #4/q0009 tlo,Mo,4 A9 Division 11 Play Equipment Installation 1 LS r ?orw!"r7qo0,o9 A10 Division 12 Site Furnishings Installation 1 LS r fo,omP r{o,ob.Q A11 Division 26 Electrical I LS f dp0,M1 r )eotno!' Al2 Division 31 Earthwork 1 LS f 80,W?iBqxa.ry A13 Division 32 Asphalt and Concrete Paving 1 ts 560 w3 #/eqw,o9 At4 Division 32 Synthetic Safety Surfacing I LS rTSm?,76m.4 A15 Division 32 Irrigation 1 LS t 7$wy s 7{pnP A16 Division 32 Landscaping 1 LS r 70,000,09 Jq0m,g AL7 Division 33 Storm Drainage 1 LS F 70rwr t70p00.4 ooSchedule A Subtotal Item Section Description Qtv Unit Unit Price Amount Alternate - Schedule B: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT B1 Division 5 Aluminum Truss Posts Shall include all material, labor, and equipment to fabricate and install the proposed aluminum truss posts at each end of the polycarbonate screenwall as shown on the drawings. The work shall include but may not be limited to providing shop drawings, welding, aluminum steel framework, horizontal steel flat bar connection from screen wall post to truss framework, baseplate, anchor bolts and non- shrink grout. The base bid shall include the construction and installation of concrete plinth footing associated with the truss posts - see structural drawings. 1 LS $ A6,MY I d6w o Schedule B Subtotal oo Schedule A + Schedule B Subtotal $ tO.to/o WA State Sales Tax $ TOTAL BID AMOUNT $ oo Q The undersigned Bidder hereby verifies that these listed bid prices are true and correct in all respects BIDDER:DATE:t3 re) Frcs,b/enLTitleBy (Print Company Name 6,ucn Dt" {,*cn,tofrb. ^T" Address:?fta Coral Dr Stl City/State/Zip:h/ronoo[ wlt q/4? Phone:)f3'dAs - //a0 BIDDER FORMS PAGE 31 PROPOSAL SIGNATURE PAGE PROJECT: KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT The undersigned bidder hereby proposes and agrees to start construction work on the Contract, if iwarded to him/her, on or before ten (10) calendar days from the date of the Notice to proceed and agrees to complete the Contract within filE working daysx (xdefined as Monday through Friday) after issuance of the City's Notice to Proceed. The undersigned bidder hereby agrees to submit all insurance documents, peformance bonds and signed iontracts within ten (10) calendar days after City awards the Contract. The City anticipltes issuance of the Notice to Proceed on the day of the preconstruction meeting. No bidder may withdraw his/her bid for a period of sixty (60) calendar days after the day of bid opening. The required bid security consisting of a bid bond, cashier's check or cash in an amount equal to 5olo of the total amount is hereto attached. Notice of acceptance of this bid or request for additional information shall be addressed to the undersigned at the address stated below. Receipt of Addendum No.'s 4'l , -t -, to the plans and/or specifications is hereby acknowledged. Failure to acknowledge receipt of the addenda may be considered an irregularity in this ProPosal. By signing this proposal Signature Page, the undersigned bidder agrees to accept all contract formi anJ documents included within the bid packet, acknowledges and accepts the provisions contained within the "Information for Bidders" section of the bid packet, and agrees to ne bound by all terms, requirements and representations listed in the bid documents whether set forth by the City or by the Bidder. DATE Jro sig nature of Authorized Representative Print me NAME OF-BIDDz.44\ER':Z-) t,r,v6l r (n.^/ /2r 5u I Busin Address 7 BIDDER FORMS PAGE 33 City, ca ztP SITE DEVELOPMENT REFERENCES A5 PROJECT MANAGER FOR GREEN TECH EXCAVATION 1. Loyal Heights Playground Renovation Project Start: 1 I 11 12A21 Project Completion : 5 / 25 I 2021 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amount: 5555,999.83 Owner Name: Seattle Parks and Rec Owner Contact: Shannon Glass/PM 206 519 4107 JAY SCHUTZ - PROJECT MANAGER Green Tech Excavation lnc 9812 Coral Drive SW Lakewood WA 98498 Cetl 206 265 1000 Email jayschutzgreentech@gmail.com Project Description: lmprovements on Loyat Heights Playground. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controt. Demotition of hardscapes and PlaY equiPment. Stormwater utitity instattation. lnstaltation of new ADA sidewalks and curbing. lnstattation of new ptay equipment and site furnishings. lrrigation modification and landscaping. 2. First Hill Park DeveloPment Project Start: 3 I I I 2020 Project Completion: 1 12112021 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amount: 5791,846.61 Owner Name: Seattle Parks and Rec Owner Contact: KettY Gootd / PM 206-484-6077 Project Description: Redevelopment of First Hitt Park. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controt. Demolition of hardscapes. Excavation and export of soit. Stormwater improvements. New concrete hardscapes, sidewatks and staircases. lrrigation and Landscaping. lnstatlation of new park furnishings. 3. Greenwood Park2017 Landbanked Site Addition Project Start: 9 125,2019 Project Comptetion : 7 I 29 / 2020 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amount: 5432,012.25 Owner Name: Seattte Parks and Rec Owner Contact: David Bader / LA 206 6847035 4. Spanaway Lake Park LID Retrofit Phase 3 Project Start: 9 I 18 12018 Project Comptetion : 1 I 1 6 I 2019 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amount: 5579,173.00 Owner Name: Pierce County Owner Contact: Mike Stoan / Engineer 253 625 3098 Project Description: Completed Addition to Greenwood Park. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. Tree removat. Demotition of hardscapes. Excavation and export of soi[. lnstatlation of concrete sidewatk, ramps and stairs. lnstattation of Pervious Concrete. lrrigation and Landscaping. lnstallation of wood fencing and custom arbor entry. lnstaltation of new park furnishings. Project Description: Stormwater lmprovements to Spanaway Lake Park. Site Responsibitities inctuded TESC, demotition Work, Traffic Control, instattation of Storm utitities, catch basins, piping, bioretention pond and cetts, restoration of concrete paving and asphatt, plantings and landscaping. 5. Washington State Fair - Sillyville Site Work Project Start: 21 1 12018 Project Completion:. 6/ 1 /2018 Contract Amount: 5342,207 .00 Prime Contractor: Absher Construction lnc Owner Name: Washington State Fair Owner Contact: David MantY/ PM 360 867 3780 6. Mossyrock Swim Beach lmprovements Project Start: 419 12018 Project Completion : 5 I 15 / 2018 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Owner Name: City of Tacoma Owner Contact: Mathew Witson/PE 253-307-8568 7. Viewlands Elementary Playground lmprovements Project Start: 6 I 27 I 201 6 Project Comptetion: 9 I 1 /2016 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Owner Name: Viewtands Etementary PTSA - Seattte School District Owner Contact: Gretchen DeDecker 206 255 2783 8. Habitat For Humanity Project Start: Ongoing Projects Project Comptetion: Owner Name: Habitat For Humanity Owner Contact: Gomer Roseman 2532619812 JAY SCHUTZ. PROJECT MANAGER Street Address, CitY, ST ZIP Code 9812 Coral Drive SW Lakewood WA 98498 Cell 206 265 1000 Email jayschutzgreentech@gmail.com Project Description: Site improvements for an exhibit at the Washington State Fair. Site responsibitities inctuded TESC, demotition, Storm utitity instaltation and reconfiguring. Sewer utitity instatlation and reconfiguring. Water utititY instattation, rough and finat grade work. Project Description: TESC, Ctearing and grubbing, rough grade work, final grade work, asphatt paving and striping, and landscape restoration for an access improvement at Mossyrock Park. Project Description: TESC, Ctearing and grubbing, rough grade work, final grade work, curbing, ftatwork, speciattY flatwork and stairs, handrail instatlation, Log and boutder placement, and general [andscaping. Project Description: Ongoing projects/contracts consisting of general site devetopment work inctuding, site utitity installation, grade work, concrete ftatwork, asphalt paving, and incidentat landscaping and restoration. 2 PAULINO LOPEZ - SUPERINTENDENT/SITE FOREMAN Green Tech Excavation lnc 9812 Coral Drive SW Lakewood WA 98498 Cell 253 442 5350 Email Paulinolopezgreentech@gmail.com SITE DEVELOPMENT REFERENCES AS SITE SUPERINTENDENT/FOREMAN FOR GREEN TECH EXCAVATION 1 Loyal Heights Playground Renovation Project Start: 1 I 11 12021 Project Comptetion : 5 / 25 I 2021 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amount: 5555,999.83 Owner Name: Seattte Parks and Recreation Owner Contact: Shannon Gtass/PM 206 519 4107 2. First Hill Park Development Project Start: 3 I 9 I 2020 Project Comptetion : 1 / 21 / 2021 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amount: 5791,846.61 Owner Name: Seattte Parks and Recreation Owner Contact: Ketty Gootd / PM 206-484-6077 3. Greenwood Park 2017 Landbanked Site Addition Project Start: 9 I 25,2019 Project Completion ; 7 / 29 I 2020 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amou nt : 5432,017.25 Owner Name: Seattle Parks and Recreation Owner Contact: David Bader / A 206 6847035 4. Spanaway Lake Park LID Retrofit Phase 3 Project Start: 9 / 18 12018 Project Completion : 1 / 1 6 /2019 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Contract Amount: 5579,173.00 Owner Name: Pierce County Project Description: lmprovements on Loyal Heights Ptayground. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controt. Demotition of hardscapes and ptay equipment. Stormwater utitity instatlation. Instaltation of new ADA sidewatks and curbing. lnstattation of new ptay equipment and site furnishings. lrrigation modification and [andscaping. Project Description: Redevelopment of First Hitt Park. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controt. Demotition of hardscapes. Excavation and export of soil. Stormwater improvements. New concrete hardscapes, sidewalks and staircases. lrrigation and Landscaping. lnstaltation of new park furnishings. Project Description: Compteted Addition to Greenwood Park. Temporary Erosion and Sediment Controt. Tree removal. Demolition of hardscapes. Excavation and export of soit. lnstattation of concrete sidewalk, ramps and stairs. lnstaltation of Pervious Concrete. lrrigation and Landscaping. lnstallation of wood fencing and custom arbor entry. lnstallation of new park furnishings. Project Description : Stormwater I mprovements to Spanaway Lake Park. Site Responsibitities inctuded TESC, demotition Work, Traffic Controt, instattation of Storm utilities, catch basins, piping, bioretention pond and cetls, restoration Owner Contact: Mike Stoan / Engineer 253 625 3098 5. Washington State Fair - Sillyville Site Work Project Start: 21 1 I 2018 Project Completion: 6 I 1 /2018 Contract Amount: 5342,207 .00 Prime Contractor: Absher Construction lnc Owner Name: Washington State Fair Owner Contact: David Manty/ PM 360 867 3780 6. Mossyrock Swim Beach lmprovements Project Start: 419 12018 Project Comptetion : 5 I 15 I 2018 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Owner Name: City of Tacoma Owner Contact: Mathew Witson/PE 253-307-8568 7. Viewlands Elementary Playground lmprovements Project Start: 6 I 27 I 201 6 Project Completion : 9 / 1 I 201 6 Prime Contractor: Green Tech Excavation Owner Name: Viewlands Etementary PTSA Seattle School District Owner Contact: Gretchen DeDecker 206 255 2783 8. Habitat For Humanity Project Start: Ongoing Projects Project Comptetion: Owner Name: Habitat For Humanity Owner Contact: Gomer Roseman 253261 9812 PAULINO LOPEZ - SUPERINTENDENT/SITE FOREMAN Street Address, City, 5T ZIP Code 9812 Coral Drive SW Lakewood WA 98498 Cell 253 442 5350 Email Paulinolopezgreentech@gmail.com of concrete paving and asphatt, ptantings and [andscaping. Project Description: Site improvements for an exhibit at the Washington State Fair. Site responsibitities inctuded TESC, demolition, Storm utitity instattation and reconfiguring. Sewer utitity instal[ation and reconfiguring. Water utitity instaltation, rough and finat grade work. Project Description: TESC, Clearing and grubbing, rough grade work, final grade work, asphatt paving and striping, and landscape restoration for an access improvement at Mossyrock Park. Project Description: TESC, Clearing and grubbing, rough grade work, finat grade work, curbing, flatwork, speciatty ftatwork and stairs, handrail instatlation, Log and boulder ptacement, and general tandscaping. Proj ect Descri ption : Ongoing proj ects / contracts consisting of general site devetopment work including, site utitity installation, grade work, concrete ftatwork, asphalt paving, and incidental landscaping and restoration. 2 Project Name: Description: Customer: Contract Amount: Percentage Complete: Project Name Description: customer: contract Amount: Percentage Complete Project Name: Description: Customer: Contract Amount: Percentage Complete: Project Name: Description: Customer: Contract Amount: Percentage Complete: Green Tech Excavation Work ln Progress 5lL3/2O22 Alta Narrows Urban Village Civil Work, Excavation, Trenching, WP Builders LLC s327,000.00 LOYo CalAnderson Park AMP pathways lnstallation of utilities, landscaping, hardscapes and pathways for Art lnstallation City of Seattle Parks and Recreation s12o,o0o 95% Friday Harbor Head Start CivilWork, Demolition, Excavation and Grading, Storm Drainage, Walkways, Parking Lot, Hardscapes and Landscapes Williams Scotsman s19o,o0o 95% Hooker Nuygen Residence CivilWork, Demolition, Excavation and Grading, Storm Drainage, Retaining Walls Dan DiZazzo Landscape Architect SSo,ooo 95% PROPOSED EQUIPMENT AND MANPOWER SCHEDULE (Use additional sheets, if required) to be used Manpower schedule DESCRIPTION/TYPE YEAR CONDITION OWNIRENT cqt+lo1?.C4r 2ozo /V€W Oti^/ CAT SoL g,s1-pyvanr(L 7oz1 .tteal O aa) y,4rufLC*r 3 lo Znzo Met4 O.^/7.J chT 30 FxL*u,+nlL a-t)O9 Frua Oht"\)c+r 7\P ,LO Ll NThJ oru4J cff ?5q KtO lortl 6oa p dtu4) €'5>o OvrnrP {oeo .L0L/t\,/eA)Au-'^J T-3oa {tt}P zoCI I 6odQ OL,J\) 55O )€p'tca /ift,rox 20t6 boo D oar*) {'sso aznt L€?^O {t CtadO Our?\J 4 n-a zor/Goc:Q ourrJ F- 3s^o t oof (ea a't)A'a'r7\t FIRM NAME 6'"u*,'E;,?EX C4-yqru* BIDDER FORMS PAGE 34 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) BIDDER FORMS PAGE 35 This Change Order form is for example purposes only. By submitting a bid, the bidder agrees to be bound by the terms of this Change Order form for any changes to the project should it be awarded the contract. CHANGE ORDER NO. ___ NAME OF CONTRACTOR: _______________(“Contractor”) CONTRACT NAME & PROJECT NUMBER: __________________________ ORIGINAL CONTRACT DATE: __________________________ This Change Order amends the above-referenced contract; all other provisions of the contract that are not inconsistent with this Change Order shall remain in effect. For valuable consideration and by mutual consent of the parties, the project contract is modified as follows: 1.Section I of the Agreement, entitled “Description of Work,” is hereby modified to add additional work or revise existing work as follows: In addition to work required under the original Agreement and any prior Amendments, Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to: [Insert detailed description of additional materials, services, etc., that are needed which necessitate this change order - Be as detailed as possible. You may also refer to an attached exhibit, but clearly identify the exhibit by title and date] 2.The contract amount and time for performance provisions of Section II “Time of Completion,” and Section III, “Compensation,” are hereby modified as follows: Original Contract Sum, (including applicable alternates and WSST) $ Net Change by Previous Change Orders (incl. applicable WSST) $ Current Contract Amount (incl. Previous Change Orders) $ Current Change Order $ Applicable WSST Tax on this Change Order $ Revised Contract Sum $ BIDDER FORMS PAGE 36 Original Time for Completion (insert date) Revised Time for Completion under prior Change Orders (insert date) Days Required (±) for this Change Order working days Revised Time for Completion (insert date) In accordance with Sections 1-04.4 and 1-04.5 of the Kent Standard Specifications, and Section VII of the Agreement, the Contractor accepts all requirements of this Change Order by signing below. Also, pursuant to the above-referenced contract, Contractor agrees to waive any protest it may have regarding this Change Order and acknowledges and accepts that this Change Order constitutes final settlement of all claims of any kind or nature arising from or connected with any work either covered or affected by this Change Order, including, without limitation, claims related to contract time, contract acceleration, onsite or home office overhead, or lost profits. This Change Order, unless otherwise provided, does not relieve the Contractor from strict compliance with the guarantee and warranty provisions of the original contract, particularly those pertaining to substantial completion date. All acts consistent with the authority of the Agreement, previous Change Orders (if any), and this Change Order, prior to the effective date of this Change Order, are hereby ratified and affirmed, and the terms of the Agreement, previous Change Orders (if any), and this Change Order shall be deemed to have applied. The parties whose names appear below swear under penalty of perjury that they are authorized to enter into this contract modification, which is binding on the parties of this contract. 3.The Contractor will adjust the amount of its performance bond (if any) for this project to be consistent with the revised contract sum shown in section 2, above. IN WITNESS, the parties below have executed this Agreement, which will become effective on the last date written below. CONTRACTOR: By: (signature) Print Name: Its (title) DATE: CITY OF KENT: By: (signature) Print Name: Its (title) DATE: BIDDER FORMS PAGE 37 This Request for Information Form is for example purposes only. By submitting a bid, the bidder agrees to use this form to request information in accordance with the Kent Parks Special Provisions, should the Bidder be awarded the contract. REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM City of Kent Parks, Recreation & Community Services Julie Parascondola, Director RFI #: DATE SENT: DATE NEEDED BY: TO: PROJECT #: COMPANY: PROJECT NAME: RFI DESCRIPTION (Enter description here) ATTACHMENTS: SUBMITTED BY: (Name, Title, Company) RESPONSE TO RFI ATTACHMENTS: RESPONSE BY: DATE: (Name, Title, Company) BIDDER FORMS PAGE 38 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARK SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 11 00 PAGE 1 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS The Kent Parks Special Provisions (“Parks Special Provisions”) modify and supersede any conflicting provisions of the Kent Special Provisions, prepared by the City of Kent Public Works Department, including all subsequent amendments, and the current Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, including all published amendments issued by those organizations (“WSDOT Standard Specifications”). Unless the context clearly intends otherwise, references to “Specifications” or “Technical Specifications” is intended to refer to these Parks Special Provisions. If any provision of these Parks Special Provisions conflicts with the Kent Special Provisions, Kent Standard Plans or the WSDOT Standard Specifications, the provisions should be interpreted to provide harmony to the extent reasonably possible. If the provisions cannot be harmonized, the more specific provision will control over the more general, and the more recent provision will control over a provision adopted earlier in time. If the Parks Special Provisions and the Kent Special Provisions are silent on an issue, the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall apply. All references in the WSDOT Standard Specifications to the State of Washington, its various departments or directors, and in the Kent Special Provisions and the WSDOT Standard Specifications to the Contracting Agency and Engineer, shall be revised to include the City and/or City Representative, except for references to State statutes or regulations. Finally, all of these documents—the Parks Special Provisions, the Kent Special Provisions, the Kent Standard Plans and the WSDOT Standard Specifications, are a part of the contract documents. SECTION 01 11 00 – SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section of the Parks Special Provisions describes construction-related activities that will occur at the Project site and is part of the Scope of Work included in the Contract Documents. In addition to those additional documents provided for by the Kent Special Provisions and the WSDOT Standard Specifications, the “Contract Documents” include the Contract, the Project Manual and its identified contents, Project drawings and plans, and these Parks Special Provisions. B. All terms used in these Parks Special Provisions shall have the definitions attributed to them by the Kent Special Provisions or the WSDOT Standard Specifications, unless these Parks Special Provisions specifically provide otherwise. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Contract includes work which is described below. The descriptions provided summarize the work and may not include specific reference to all work required to complete the Contract. The Base Bid includes all labor, materials, and equipment required to complete the work as shown in the drawings and specified herein. 1. The Project Scope of Work includes but is not limited to the following areas. See the identified Division Sections of these Specifications for details. KENT PARK SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 11 00 PAGE 2 a.01 11 00 Summary of Work b.01 25 00 Substitutions c.01 26 13 Requests for Information d.01 26 63 Change Orders e.01 29 00 Payment Procedures f.01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination g.01 33 00 Submittals h.01 35 00 Special Procedures i.01 35 29 Health, Safety and Emergency Response Procedures j.01 45 00 Quality Control k.01 52 00 Construction Facilities l.01 56 26 Temporary Fencing m.01 73 23 Field Engineering n.01 73 29 Cutting and Patching o.01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal p.01 74 23 Final Cleaning q.01 77 00 Close Out Procedures B. The Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, noted or scheduled in the Project Manual, these Specifications, and the Project drawings, including all labor, equipment and incidentals necessary and required for proper and timely completion of the work. The Contractor shall use new materials unless specifically noted or directed. C. All changes in Scope of Work shall be executed on the City’s Change Order Form shown in the Bidder Packet. 1.03 CONTRACTS A. There will be one Contract for the Project which includes all work described in the Project Manual, the Parks Special Provisions, and the Project drawings and plans. 1.04 USE OF DOCUMENTS A. Work not specifically covered in the Project Manual, the Parks Special Provisions, or the Project drawings and plans shall be performed in accordance with the current Kent Special Provisions, the City of Kent’s 2021 Design and Construction Standards Manual, the WSDOT Standard Specifications, and/or county, state, or national reference standards. 1.05 COPIES FURNISHED A. The Contractor shall be furnished one (1) copy of the Project Manual, the Parks Special Provisions, the Kent Special Provisions, and the Project drawings and plans without charge. PDF copies can be obtained at no charge. The WSDOT Standard Specifications can be obtained through WSDOT or are available online at: https://www.wsdot.gov/publications/manuals/fulltext/M41-10/SS2020.pdf 1.06 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS KENT PARK SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 11 00 PAGE 3 A. The City reserves the right to contract for other work or to conduct work with its own forces should the need arise. B. Contractor must cooperate fully with separate contractors or the City’s forces performing work at or near the Project site and carry out its work under this Project in a way that minimizes interference and delay for all forces involved. 1.07 ORDERING LONG LEAD EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall schedule and prioritize the ordering and delivery of material as required to ensure the work can be completed within the contract duration. The Contractor will produce a schedule for all long lead items that shows anticipated date for their order and arrival on the Project Site. 1.08 EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall meet with the City Project Manager on the Project site prior to the start of construction. The purpose of this meeting shall be to review and document the existing site conditions of the Project site and immediate vicinity. Areas outside of the scope of work of the contract such as driveways, curbs, sidewalks, landscape elements, lawns, signs, utility boxes and all other related improvements shall be documented by the Contractor with digital photos and a written description of existing conditions. This record will be submitted to the City Project Manager for acceptance and agreement. B. Should damage occur to existing improvements as a result of the work’s execution, the Contractor agrees to repair or replace the improvement at the Contractor’s expense as described by the City of Kent’s 2009 Design and Construction Standards Manual and/or the City of Kent’s Parks and Recreation Design Standards, as applicable. 1.09 CONTRACTOR USE OF PROJECT SITE A. Work shall comply with City of Kent permitted work hours. Permitted work hours are between 7 a.m. and 7 p.m. Work will not be allowed on Saturdays, Sundays, or federal holidays without prior approval. The Contractor shall plan and schedule work to allow time for notifications, approvals, reviews and other conditions of the Contract. B. The City Project Manager will coordinate the issuing of keys. All keys must be returned to the City Project Manager at completion. No contract retainage will be paid until all keys are returned. Charges for unreturned/lost keys shall be based on the actual costs necessary to re-key the affected locks. C. Limited use of the Project Site is granted to work in areas indicated and only when work is occurring. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the Project Site beyond the areas in which the work is indicated. Use of the Project Site does not cover use of adjacent right of ways or public or private property except as noted. Consult local jurisdictions or landowners where use of property under their control is considered necessary and conform to their requirements for use thereof. KENT PARK SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 11 00 PAGE 4 The Contractor and subcontractors will be allowed on site only during their working periods. The Contractor shall access the Project Site using the designated access and comply with the requirements below: 1.Parking a.Use available parking on site as designated by the City Project Manager. b.Keep all fire lanes clear. c.Store no materials in parking area unless indicated in Project Manual and Drawings. d.Do not store or place any material in ADA parking stalls. e.Parking is not allowed within the critical root zone of any tree or on any park lawn. 2.The Contractor shall prepare a staging plan to show locations of materials, trailers and fencing within the Project Site. This plan must be approved by the City Project Manager and becomes a part of the Contract Documents. Contractor's use of the Project Site shall be limited to purposes directly related to the construction of this Project. D. Contractor’s additional responsibilities while using the Project Site may include, as determined by the City’s Project Manager during the preconstruction or weekly construction meetings: 1.Maintaining pedestrian and vehicular access to and around existing facilities. 2.Not unreasonably encumbering the site with materials and equipment. 3.Keeping roads and parking lots clear of dirt and debris. 4.Obtaining and paying for additional storage or work areas as needed. 1.10 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS, PRODUCTS, AND EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor’s responsibilities for storage and protection of materials, products, and equipment shall include: 1.Use of the designated staging location on the Project Site for storage of materials, products and equipment under reasonable security measures as the contractor determines necessary. The contractor assumes responsibility for security of the staging location and the City will not be responsible for any missing, damaged, vandalized or stolen materials, products, or equipment. 2.Store products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3.Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight enclosures. 4.Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer instructions. KENT PARK SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 11 00 PAGE 5 5.Storage of hazardous materials and wastes shall be in accordance with local, state and federal codes. B. Exterior Storage 1.Store fabricated products above ground. Store on blocking to prevent staining or soiling of products. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious coverings and provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 2.Store loose granular materials in well drained areas on a solid surface. Employ methods to avoid run off. Protect all surface drains with an insert sock to prevent material from washing down drain. 3.Do not store materials for other Projects on site. 4.Stockpile materials and equipment only on approved areas of the site. Stockpile areas may not endanger or inhibit the public users of the site, outside the work area, in any way. 1.11 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. Contractor shall salvage only those items that are noted in the Contract Documents and identified for salvage, or as otherwise directed by the City. The City retains first right of refusal to salvage all materials, equipment, and/or products identified or not identified in the Contract Documents that are affected as part of the work. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS A. The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of all debris resulting from the work, unless specifically allocated to another scope of work. This includes scheduling, containers, trucks, etc. Contractor is responsible for the awareness of, understanding of and compliance with all local, state and federal regulations regarding the disposal of any hazardous and non-hazardous wastes. 1.13 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. The City reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the Project prior to Substantial Completion. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy does not constitute Substantial Completion or acceptance of the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable KENT PARK SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 11 00 PAGE 6 END OF SECTION 01 11 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 25 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 25 00 – Substitutions PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents and proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the City or its Engineer. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents. 3. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Due to the short duration of the bid period, Substitution Requests will not be considered during the bid. B. Requests for substitution may be considered or rejected at the sole discretion of the City. C. Submit two copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests with procedures required for Change Order proposals. D. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request; include the related specification section and drawings; provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions; and provide the following information, as appropriate: 1. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. 2. Samples, where applicable or requested. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 25 00 PAGE 2 3. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect. 1.05 Within one week of receipt of the request for substitution, the City’s Representative will request any additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. 1.06 Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the additional information or documentation, whichever is later, the City’s Representative will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. 1.07 If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the City’s Representative when the substitution is in the best interests of the City, as determined by the City, and when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied as determined by the City’s Representative; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Proposed changes must be in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents. The request must be timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 2. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents must not be required. The request is directly related to an "or equal" or similar clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 3. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. Written documentation of such unavailability and the cause shall be provided on the original manufacturer’s, fabricator’s or supplier's letterhead with a signature and contact telephone number for the company. Documentation only by the Contractor, sub- contractor, local sales representative or distributor is not acceptable. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority; meet governing codes, ordinances, laws, utility standards or insurance requirements, and the requested substitution can be approved. 5. A substantial advantage is offered the City, in terms of cost, time, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the City may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the City may include additional compensation to the City’s Representative for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of maintenance or other construction by the City or separate Contractors, and similar considerations. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 25 00 PAGE 3 6. Field verification or other information disclosed after the bid indicates the specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 7. Field verification or other information disclosed after the bid indicates the specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 8.The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty. 9.The manufacturer, fabricator or supplier of the specified product is unable or unwilling to certify or guarantee the performance of specified product/ system as specified or the specified product fails UL, ICBO, ASTM or similar standard certification testing required by the specifications. 2.02 The Contractor's submittal and City’s Representative’s acceptance of shop drawings, product data or samples that relate to construction activities that do not comply with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01 25 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 25 00 PAGE 4 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 26 13 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 26 13 – REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section describes the procedural requirement for submitting a Request For Information (RFI). 1.02 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PROCEDURE A. The Contractor shall submit an RFI to the City’s Representative and Project Manager any time clarification is needed or discrepancies exist in the Project Manual and Drawings. 1.The Contractor shall use the provided City form. 2.The Contractor shall submit the RFI at the earliest possible time when any questions arise related to the Project Manual and Drawings. 3.The Contractor shall describe in enough detail the nature of the clarification needed and note the related specification section and Project drawing page. RFI’s lacking sufficient detail will be returned to the contractor without action. 4.If the Contractor performs any construction activity and the Contractor knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission, the Contractor will be responsible for the performance and bear the cost of correction. 5.The Contractor should allow up to 10 days for a response. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01 26 13 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 26 13 PAGE 2 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 26 63 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 26 63 – CHANGE ORDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the administrative and procedural requirements for executing a change in the work. 1.02 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. City’s Representative or City Project Manager Changes: Changes may be initiated by the City’s Representative or the City’s Project Manager. Any such change request is for information and pricing only, and is not an instruction to execute the change, nor to stop work in progress unless issued as a Field Order. A field order results when time is of the essence or an emergency condition exists. In such event, the City Representative or the City’s Project Manager may issue a field order directly ordering a change to the work. In such event, Contractor will submit via email a brief written statement describing the problem and solution with a “not-to-exceed” price to the City Project Manager and the City Representative. All Field Orders shall be followed by a Change Order Proposal form completed by the Contractor within 5 working days. Supplementary drawings and specifications will be provided if required. Contractor shall provide a proposal that includes all information listed in “C” below. B. Contractor Change Order Proposal: Changes may be initiated by the Contractor by submitting a Change Order Proposal to the City’s Representative and the City’s Project Manager. Contractor is bound to use of the City’s Change Order Proposal form shown in the Bidder’s Package C. For all Change Order Proposals, use the provided form and include all information listed below. 1.Description of proposed changes. 2.Related RFI. 3.Reason for making changes and a statement of why proposed work is not covered in the Contract Documents. 4.A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. 5.Effect on contract sum and contract time. 6.Documentation supporting any change in contract sum or contract time, as appropriate. D. Contractor shall provide all back up pricing documentation for a Change Order Proposal to include the following. 1.General Contractor Breakdown Summary. 2. Subcontractors Breakdown Summary. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 26 63 PAGE 2 3.Cost Estimate Detail Sheet. 4.All other supporting documentation as required to substantiate the requested costs such as invoices for rental equipment, freight cost, etc. 5.Total cost and time shall be brought forward to the Change Order Proposal form and signed and dated by Contractor. 1.03 CHANGE ORDER AUTHORIZATION A. Any work completed on a Change Order Proposal, prior to having a fully signed Change Order from the City will be at the Contractor’s sole risk. B. No Change Order Proposal will be processed for acceptance and payment after contract expiration. C. Upon signature and execution by the City, the Change Order Proposal becomes a Change Order altering the contract time and contract sum, as indicated. D. Contractor may request payment for the work only against an approved Change Order. E. If either the City’s Representative or the City’s Project Manager disapproves the Change Order Proposal, the reason for disapproval will be stated. 1.04 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS A. Application of Payment forms shall record each Change Order as a separate item of work. Do not include a Change Order on the applications until the fully executed Change Order is received from the City with the adjusted contract sum. B. The Construction Schedule shall be revised to reflect any agreed changes in contract time. C. Upon completion of Change Order work, enter pertinent modifications in Project Record As- Built documents. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01 26 63 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 29 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 29 00 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. 1.A single Schedule of Values shall be required for the Project, including any alternate bid items as provided for in section 1.03. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the City’s Project Manager no later than 15 calendar days after the date of award or prior to the pre-construction meeting, whichever comes first. B. The format and content of the Schedule of Values shall be approved by the City’s Project Manager and the City’s Representative. Provide at least one line-item for each specification section and each logically distinct area of work. Include the following Project identification information on the Schedule of Values: 1.Project name and location 2.City’s Name (City’s Project Manager unless otherwise specified) 3.Contractor’s name and address 4.Date Original submitted 5.Date Revision submitted, if applicable C. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular format with separate columns to indicate the following for each bid item: 1.Related specification section. 2.Description of work. 3.Name of subcontractor. 4.Name of manufacturer. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 29 00 PAGE 2 5.Dollar value. 6.Current contract value. 7.Previous percent complete. 8.Value of previous estimates. 9.Value of current estimates. 10.Current percent complete. 11.Total percent complete. 12.Value earned to date. 13.Value of contract balance. D. Provide a breakdown of the contract sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of applications for payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. E. Round amounts to the nearest whole dollar. The total shall equal the contract sum. F. Mobilization, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct costs of a work in place may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values. G. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values prior to the next Application for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the contract sum. Such items shall be itemized separately at the end of the Schedule. H. The City’s Project Manager or the City’s Representative reserves the right to reject the Schedule of Values if they determine that it is front-loaded, does not reasonably approximate the anticipated cost of identified line items, or does not provide sufficient detail for the complexity of the Project. 1.04 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Each application for payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the City’s Representative and/or the City’s Project Manager. B. For each progress payment cycle, the City’s Project Manager, City’s Representative and Contractor shall agree on the percentage of work completed on each line item. This shall be the basis for the total amount payable identified on the pay estimate. C. The date for each progress payment will be scheduled approximately on a monthly basis. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends on the day prior to the current application date. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 29 00 PAGE 3 D. Complete every entry on the form. Include execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Contractor. The City’s Project Manager or City’s Representative will return incomplete applications without action. Responsibility for delay of payment due to incomplete, inaccurate or incorrect forms shall be the Contractor’s. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include approved Change Orders issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. Show such amounts separately from other work already included in the Schedule of Values. E. Submit one signed original copy of each Application for Payment to the City Project Manager. All copies shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments. F. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to the City Project Manager. G. Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or be submitted to the City’s Representative and City Project Manager prior to the initial Application for Payment include the following. Failure to submit any of the following is sufficient grounds to withhold processing of Application for Payment. 1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Approved Schedule of Values. 4. Approved Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Schedule of principal products and submittals. 6. Schedule of unit prices. 7. Copies of any building permits, authorizations and licenses to be obtained by the Contractor from governing authorities for performance of the work. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies not previously required or filed. 9. Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages filed with and approved by WA Labor & Industries. H. Allow up to 30 days for approval of an Application of Payment and processing. All payments to the Contractor are remitted via U.S. Postal Service First-Class Mail. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that mailing addresses for payment are up to date. Payment cannot be picked up or delivered in person. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 29 00 PAGE 4 I. Administrative actions and documentation that must precede or be submitted to the City Project Manager prior to the final Application for Payment include the following. Failure to complete and/or provide any of the following is sufficient grounds to withhold processing of Application for Payment. 1.Completion of all requirements noted in previous section item 1.02.C, "Project Closeout." 2.Property survey if required by Contract Documents. 3.Removal of temporary facilities and services. 4.Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements; 5.Project Permit Drawings and related documents including copies of the signed off permit sheets. 6.Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid filed with and approved by WA Department of Labor & Industries. 7.All final submittals shall be submitted at the same time. Partial submittals will not be processed. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01 29 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 31 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 31 00 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section contains administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations, including but not limited to: 1. General Project coordination procedures. 2. Pre-construction conferences. 3. Pre-installation conferences. 4. Progress meetings. 1.03 RECORDING A. The City has the right to record all events and actions related to the work by the most convenient means necessary. Such recording may include, but is not limited to, the electronic collection of voice and images by digital cameras and recorders. Such recording may occur at any time and at any location where work, including component storage, manufacture or fabrication, or meetings related to the Project are occurring, on or off the site. This right shall be included in all subcontractor and supplier agreements with the Contractor. 1.04 GENERAL PROJECT COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordinate construction operations included in the various sections of these Specifications and in other Contract Documents to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the work. Effectively coordinate construction operations under different sections that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection and operation. B. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the work depends on installation of other components before or after its own installation. C. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. D. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. E. At all times that work is underway the Contractor's superintendent or a fully knowledgeable and qualified foreman shall be on the Project site to assure proper coordination of the work. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 31 00 PAGE 2 F. Require the installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed. Work should not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. G. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. H. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration until Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. J. Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. K. Where necessary, prepare memoranda outlining special procedures required for coordination, and distribute to the City or the City’s Representative, the City’s Project Manager, all Contractors and any other involved parties. Include such items as required notices, reports and meeting attendance. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES A. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the work. Such administrative activities include but are not limited to: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Delivery and processing of submittals. 3. Progress meetings. 4. Requests for Information. 5. Architects Supplemental Instructions. 6. Change Order Proposal. 7. Change Order. 8. All inspections. 9. Project closeout activities. 1.06 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 31 00 PAGE 3 A. The City will schedule a pre-construction conference before the start of construction at a time convenient to the City Project Manager, Contractor and City’s Representative, but no later than 15 days after execution of the contract or unless otherwise agreed upon. The conference will be held at the Project Site or other convenient location. The meeting shall be conducted to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. The City Project Manager, City’s Representative, the Contractor and its superintendent, major subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to make decisions relating to the work. C. Agenda shall include items of significance that could affect progress, including but not limited to: 1.Outstanding contract issues, if any, to include the contract, bonds, insurance or other requirements. 2. Designation of responsible personnel to include City’s Representative; City Project Manager; Contractor's City Project Manager and superintendent; major sub-contractors and City's on-site staff/ occupant representative. 3.Tentative construction schedule. 4. Critical work sequencing. 5.Long lead items. 6.Review of concurrent work by City or others. 7.Status of outstanding permits. 8.Coordination issues relative to on-going City occupancy and site use, if any. 9.Coordination issues relative to maintaining good neighborhood relations and achieving noise, storm water run-off and dust control. 10.Procedures and routing of communications for processing Field Orders and Change Orders. 11.Procedures and routing of communications for processing Applications for Payment. 12. Distribution of Contract Documents. 13.Procedures and routing of communications for Shop Drawings, product data and samples. 14. Special inspections, testing and quality control. 15.Preparation of record documents including daily logs. 16.Use of the Project Site. 17. Establishment of regular progress meeting schedule. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 31 00 PAGE 4 18. Site access and parking availability. 19. On-site office, work and storage areas. 20. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 21. Safety procedures. 22. Security. 23. Housekeeping and sanitary facilities. 24. Working hours. 25. Review of Contract Documents and outstanding questions related thereto. 26. Review of City-furnished items. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity that requires coordination with any other construction activity. B. The representatives of manufacturers, sub-contractors, Contractor, City Project Manager, City’s Representative, and any special inspector involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. C. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration at each pre-installation conference, including but not limited to requirements for: 1. Contract Documents 2. Deliveries 3. Shop Drawings, product data and quality-control samples 4. Possible conflicts 5. Time schedules 6. Weather limitations 7. Manufacturer's recommendations 8. Acceptability of substrates 9. Temporary facilities 10. Space and access limitations KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 31 00 PAGE 5 11. Safety 12. Inspecting and testing requirements 13. Protection D. Meetings shall be held on-site. The City’s Representative or City Project Manager will record significant discussions, agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to all attendees including the City Project Manager, within 2 days. E. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of work and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date. 1.08 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Attend progress meetings at the Project Site on a weekly basis. The schedule of the meetings shall be established by mutual consent of the City, City’s Representative and Contractor. No changes to this schedule shall be made without mutual consent of all parties. The progress meetings will be conducted by the City’s Representative with participation by the Contractor. Meeting agenda and meeting minutes will be documented and distributed by the City’s Representative. The Contractor is required to provide timely and accurate information to the City’s Representative, including but not limited to items listed in 1.08 F below. B. The City Project Manager, City’s Representative, each subcontractor, supplier, special inspector or other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to make decisions relating to the work. C. Agenda shall include review and correction or approval minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project. D. Review construction progress since the last meeting. Distribute Contractor's next 3 weeks’ projected schedule. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of or behind the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited. Secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the contract time frame. E. Review unresolved issues previously discussed or reported (Old Business). F. Review the present and future needs (New Business) of each Party present including but not limited to: KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 31 00 PAGE 6 1. Time 2.Sequences 3.Status of submittals 4.Status of Requests for Information 5.Deliveries 6.Architect’s Supplemental Instructions 7.Off-site fabrication and/or delivery problems 8.Access 9. Site utilization 10.Temporary facilities and services 11.Hours of work 12.Hazards and risks 13.Housekeeping 14. Quality and work standards 15.Consultants Field Reports 16.Status of Field Directives and Change Orders 17.Documentation of information for payment requests 18.Problems from or affecting Occupants 19.Problems from or affecting Neighbors G. The City’s Representative shall, no later than 7 days after each meeting, distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. H. Contractor shall revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule in advance of the next meeting. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01 31 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary for submittals including but not limited to the following: 1. Submittal Schedule 2. Shop Drawings 3. Product Data 4. Samples 5. Quality Control Submittals 6. Administrative Submittals B. The Submittal Schedule shall document the Contractor’s planning for the timely execution of the Work, in accordance with the contract and submittal requirements set forth in this Section. C. Shop Drawings include but are not limited to the following: (Note: standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not Shop Drawings). 1. Fabrication drawings 2. Installation drawings 3. Setting diagrams 4. Shop work manufacturing instructions 5. Templates and patterns 6. Schedules D. Product Data include but are not limited to the following: 1. Manufacturer’s product data 2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions 3. Standard color charts KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 2 4. Catalogue cuts 5. Roughing-in diagrams and templates 6. Standard wiring diagrams 7. Printed performance curves 8. Operational range diagrams 9. Mill reports 10. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals E. Samples include but are not limited to the following: 1. Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components 2. Small cuts or containers of materials 3. Complete units of repetitively used materials 4. Swatches showing color, texture, and pattern 5. Color range sets 6. Components used for independent inspection and testing a. Field samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials. Field samples will be maintained on site for the duration of the Project and will be used to establish the standard by which the work will be judged. F. Quality control submittals include but are not limited to the following: 1. Design data 2. Certifications 3. Manufacturer’s instructions 4. Manufacturer’s field reports G. Administrative submittals include but are not limited to the following: 1. Permits 2. Contractor’s employee safety plan 3. Applications for Payment KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 3 4.Performance and payment bonds 5.Insurance certificates 6.Listing of subcontractors 1.03 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit copies of schedule at the pre-construction meeting for City’s and City’s Representative’s review. B. Prepare the schedule in a chronological order, providing the following information: 1.Scheduled date for the first submittal. 2.Specification Section number and title. 3.Submittal category (action or informational). 4.Name of subcontractor. 5.Description of work covered. 6.Scheduled date for City Representative’s final release or approval. C. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontractors, Schedule of Values, and the list of material suppliers, as the well as the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. D. Incorporate submittal schedule in Contractor’s construction schedule. E. Revise the submittal schedule after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule prior to the next regular Project meeting. 1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal to the City’s Representative sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1.Shop, catalog, and other appropriate drawings and information shall be submitted to the City’s Representative for review prior to fabrication or ordering of all equipment and materials specified. 2.No extension of contract time will be authorized because of the Contractor’s failure to transmit submittals to the City’s Representative sufficiently in advance of the work to permit processing. 3.The Contractor shall submit PDF copies of all submitted information, unless otherwise identified. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 4 4. All submittal information shall be sent to the City’s Representative through the General Contractor. 5. All submittals shall bear the Contractor’s certification that he/she has reviewed, checked and approved the submittal information prior to transmitting to the City’s Representative. The submittal number and related specification sections shall be marked on each submittal. B. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of the firm or entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. C. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken: 1. Project name 2. Date 3. Name of the Contractor 4. Name of the subcontractor 5. Name of the supplier 6. Name of the manufacturer 7. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate 9. Similar definitive information as necessary D. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the City Project Manager and City’s Representative and to other destinations by use of a transmittal form. The City’s Representative will return submittals received from sources other than the Contractor. 1. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal showing the date of transmittal, specification section or drawing number to which the submittal pertains, submittal number, and a brief description of the material submitted. 2. Record deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. 3. Include the Contractor’s certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. When material is resubmitted for any reason, it shall be submitted under a new letter of transmittal and referenced to the previous submittal. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 5 E. Do not place orders for materials or components before receipt of reviewed and accepted submittal for same from City’s Representative. F. Allow 10 business days for City Representative’s review. Allow 10 business days for submittals that are returned marked ‘Revise and Resubmit.’ PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit PDF copies to City’s Representative and City Project Manager for review. Submit newly prepared information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard printed information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Include the following information on Shop Drawings: 1. Identification of products and materials included 2. Compliance with specified standards 3. Notation of coordination requirements 4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement taken by the Contractor 5. Correlation of shop drawings to Contract Documents by reference to sheet number, details, schedule or room number B. Shop Drawings will not be reviewed without the Contractor’s signed review stamp affixed. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify dimensions and verify the number of each item required to complete the Work. C. If Shop Drawings show variations from contract requirements, make specific mention of such variations in your submittal. 1. If indicated departures affect a correlated function, item, article, work, installation or construction of other trades, make note of it in transmittal. If extra cost is involved in related changes, Contractor assumes all such costs. 2. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in PDF format unless otherwise requested. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect product data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to the Project. Submit PDF copies unless otherwise requested. B. Identify applicable products, models, options, and other data; supplement manufacturers’ standard data to provide information unique to the work. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions when required by the Specification Section. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 6 C. Provide copies of final product data submittal to the manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and others as required for performance of the construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1.Do not proceed with installation of materials, products, and systems until a copy of reviewed and accepted product data applicable to the installation is in the installer’s possession. 2.Do not permit use of unmarked copies of product data in connection with construction. D. For each and any chemical which is known to be present in the workplace, submit Safety Data Sheets. 1.Attach to each copy of product data above. 2.Copies submitted to City’s Representative are for their information and use and will not be reviewed for completeness or appropriateness on Project site. 2.03 SAMPLES A. Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of the characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1.Transmit samples that contain multiple related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2.Label on unexposed side of samples. Include the following: a.Generic description of the sample. b.Sample source. c.Product name or name of manufacturer. d.Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3.Disposition: Maintain sets of approved samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 4.Samples for initial selection: Submit manufacturer’s color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 5.Submit 3 full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer’s product line. City’s Representative will return submittal with options selected. 2.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, manufacturer’s field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other sections of the Specifications. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 7 B. Where other sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with stated requirements. 1.Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other work of the contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to the City’s Representative. B. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor’s responsibility and not considered part of the City’s Representative’s review and indication of action taken. 3.02 CITY’S REPRESENTATIVE’S REVIEW A. The City’s Representative shall review all submittals for general conformance with the design and other requirements of the Contract Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. Submittals may be rejected based on inadequate information and/or not meeting the requirements of the Specifications or drawings. If a submittal is rejected, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections noted. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes and for techniques of assembly and installation. B. The City’s Representative will stamp each submittal with a uniform action stamp as follows: 1.Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN”, the work covered by the submittal may proceed, provided it complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 2.Final-but-Restricted Release: Where submittals are marked “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”, the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with both the City Representative’s notations and corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3.Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked “REVISE AND RESUBMIT”, do not proceed with the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the City Representative’s notations. Resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain an action mark that will allow the work to proceed. a.Do not permit submittals marked “REVISE AND RESUBMIT” or “REJECTED-SEE REMARKS” to be used at the Project site or elsewhere where construction is in progress. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 33 00 PAGE 8 4.Rejected: Where submittals are marked “REJECTED-SEE REMARKS”, do not proceed with the work covered by the submittal until a new submittal is made and returned marked either “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”. C. Where a submittal is primarily for informational or record purposes or for special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked “ACTION NOT REQUIRED” or “NOT REVIEWED”. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 35 00 – SPECIAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The work to be done under this contract includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for or incidental to the construction and completion of all work indicated in the contract. 1.02 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND THE SITE A. Contractor represents that they have carefully examined all Contract Documents and site conditions including ingress and egress routes and understands the character, quality and quantity of work called for and all conditions of the contract. Contractor shall carefully compare and check all documents for omissions and discrepancies. B. Should it appear that the work or any of the matters relative thereto are not sufficiently detailed or explained in the contract, the Contractor shall apply to the City’s Representative and City Project Manager for such further explanations as may be necessary and shall conform to them as part of the contract. In the event of any doubt or questions arising regarding the true meaning of the contract, Contractor must inquire with the City’s Representative whose decision thereon shall be final. C. The intent of the Project Manual, these Parks Special Provisions, and the Project Drawings is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the contract. Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials, tools, transportation, permits, and supplies, and perform the work required in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents is binding as if required by all. Anything mentioned in the Project Manual and not shown on the Drawings or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Project Manual, is of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. In the case of any conflict, the more stringent conditions shall apply. E. Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the City. If, during the performance of the work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor must promptly and before proceeding with the work affected thereby, report such conflict, error, inconsistency or omission to the City Project Manager and City’s Representative in writing and seek clarification if required. F. Contractor may do no work without applicable drawings, specifications or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where required, unless instructed in writing to do so by the City’s Representative. If Contractor performs any construction activity, and Contractor knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents contain a conflict, error, inconsistency or omission, Contractor will be responsible for the performance and bear the cost of correction. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 00 PAGE 2 1.03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES A. Concealed utilities of record are shown on the drawings. The City does not warrant the exact location of them or the completeness of the records. B. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES WITH ALL UTILITIES, DISTRICTS AND CONTRACTORS PRIOR TO AND THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. This includes calling in requests to connect or disconnect service for all utilities as may be necessary to complete the Project. C. The Contractor is responsible for calling for all utility locates for the Project and is deemed to be an excavator for purposes of Chapter 19.122 RCW. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with Chapter 19.122 RCW, including utilization of the “one call” locator service before commencing any excavation activities. If a private locate is necessary, it will be at the Contractor’s expense. D. In the event utilities are damaged during construction, temporary services and/or repairs must be made immediately to maintain continuity of services at the Contractor’s sole expense. 1.04 EXISTING MANHOLES, VALVE BOXES AND MONUMENTS A. The Contractor is responsible for adjusting all facilities to finished pavement grade. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating this work with the utilities involved. 1.05 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR REGARDING WORK BY OTHERS A. If any part of the work under this Contract depends on the results of work by others, prior to beginning its work, the Contractor shall inspect and report to the City’s Representative any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work by others that will impact the Contractor’s work. Failure of the Contractor to do so constitutes an acceptance of the work of others as fit and proper, except as to latent defects which may develop in the work performed by others after commencement of the work by the Contractor. The City is contracting with Contractor. If Contractor retains the services of any subcontractor to perform any portion of the Contract work, that subcontractor is an agent of Contractor and Contractor accepts responsibility for the subcontractor’s work. 1.06 WARRANTY OF TITLE A. No materials, supplies or equipment for the work under this Contract may be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest therein or any part thereof is retained by the seller or suppliers. The Contractor warrants clear and marketable title to all materials, supplies, and equipment installed and incorporated in the work and agree upon completion of all work to deliver the premises together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by the Contractor to the City free from any claims, liens, encumbrances, or charges. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 00 PAGE 3 B. The Contractor further agrees that neither the Contractor nor any person, firm or corporation furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by the Contractor has any right to a lien upon the premises or any improvement or appurtenance thereon; however, this limitation does not preclude the Contractor from installing metering devices or other equipment of utility companies or of municipalities, the title of which is commonly retained by the utility company or the municipality. C. Nothing contained in this article may defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor in the hands of the City. The provisions of this section must be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts, and notices of its provisions must be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. 1.07 PROPERTY RIGHTS IN MATERIALS A. Nothing in the Project Manual or Contract Documents vests in the Contractor any property right in the materials used after they have been attached or affixed to the work or the soil, or after payment has been made by the City for materials delivered to the site of the work or stored subject to or under the control of the City. B. All such materials become the property of the City upon being so attached or affixed or upon payment for materials delivered to the site of the work or stored subject to or under the control of the City. Soil, stone, gravel and other materials found at the site of the work and which conform to the specifications for incorporation into the work may be used in the work. No other use may be made of such materials except as may be otherwise described in the plans and specifications. 1.08 CITY’S REPRESENTATIVE A. Reference to Construction Observer, City, Contracting Officer, Landscape Architect, Engineer, Architect and City’s Representative equate to the Agent for the City. One individual from the City or designated by the City will serve as the City’s Representative. All correspondence, pay requests, change orders, field directives, etc. will be directed to and/or originated from the City’s Representative. 1.09 INSTRUCTIONS A. All instructions will be given to the Contractor or to his/her authorized agent by the City’s Representative for distribution to subcontractors or tradesmen on the work. In like manner all communication from subcontractors and tradesmen on the work to the City’s Representative will be given through the Contractor. No subcontractors or tradesmen may contact the City or City’s Representative to discuss the work, except as the Contractor may arrange with the City. 1.10 AUTHORITY OF THE CITY AND CITY’S REPRESENTATIVE KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 00 PAGE 4 A. All the work shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the City. The Contract gives the City, with the assistance of the City’s Representative, authority over the work. Notices to the City shall be submitted to the City’s Representative, who after any necessary investigation and analysis will recommend action which he/she deems appropriate and propose and prepare any necessary written decisions, determinations, interpretations and notices for review. Action by the City will be in sufficient time to meet the requirements of the situation and of the Contract. The City shall have the final say on the following items: 1.Quality and acceptability of materials and work; 2.Measurement of unit price and lump sum work; 3.Acceptability of rates of progress on the work; 4.Interpretation of plans and specifications; 5.Determinations as to the existence of changed or differing site conditions; 6.Fulfillment of the contract by the Contractor; 7.Payments under the contract, including equitable adjustments; 8.Suspension(s) of work; 9.Termination of the contract for default or public convenience; 10.Determination as to non-working days; and 11.Approval of working drawings. B. The City’s Representative represents the City on the Project, with full authority to enforce Contract requirements and carry out the City’s orders. If the Contractor fails to respond promptly to the requirements of the Contract or orders from the City, the City may use City resources, other contractors or other means to accomplish the work. C. The City will not be obligated to pay Contractor, and will deduct from the Contractor’s payment, any costs that result when any other means are used to carry out the Contract requirements or City’s Representative’s orders. 1.At the Contractor’s risk, the City may suspend all or part of the work if: a.The Contractor fails to fulfill contract terms to carry out the City’s orders, or b.The weather or other conditions are unsuitable, or c.It is in the public interest. 1.11 SUPERINTENDENTS, LABOR AND EQUIPMENT OF CONTRACTOR KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 00 PAGE 5 A. At all times, the Contractor shall keep at the Project Site a complete set of the plans, specifications, Contract Documents, an updated schedule and all addenda. The Contractor shall devote the attention required to make reasonable progress on the work and cooperate fully with the City’s Representative. B. Either the Contractor in person or an authorized representative shall remain on the Project Site whenever the work is underway. Before the work begins, the Contractor shall name in writing an experienced superintendent who understands the contract and is able to supervise the work. This superintendent must have full authority to represent and act for the Contractor. Any superintendent who repeatedly fails to follow the City’s written and oral orders, directions, instructions or determinations is subject to removal from the Project. Upon written request of the City, the Contractor shall immediately remove such superintendent and name a replacement in writing. C. The Contractor must employ competent supervisors experienced in the task being performed to continuously oversee the work and all Subcontractors. At the City’s request, the Contractor shall immediately remove and replace any incompetent, careless or negligent employee. D. The Contractor shall keep all machinery and equipment in good workable condition. The equipment must be adequate for its purpose and used by competent operators. 1.12 APPARENT CONTRADICTIONS A. It is mutually agreed and understood between the City and the Contractor that in any instance of contradiction between drawings of different scale, or between drawings and specifications, or between sections of the specifications, the more stringent requirements shall be interpreted as being in the Contract sum. 1.13 PARK CLOSURE A. The Project Site shall be partly closed to the public to allow for the work to be completed. Areas closed shall be limited to areas within Contract limits indicated in the Project Manual and Drawings. Closed areas shall be approved by the City and limit impact to existing trails, parking, amenities and athletic fields. Contractor is required to install signage approved by the City at the fenced perimeter to inform the public of areas closed on the site. The Contractor is responsible for damage to the property, materials and site while the Project Site is under the control of the Contractor. Contractor shall maintain signage until Final Acceptance. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 00 PAGE 6 END OF SECTION 01 35 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 29 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 35 29 – HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section covers the requirements for compliance with health and safety precautions and controls for the project. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals 1.03 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN A. Within Ten (10) days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, and before commencing any work on the Project site, the Contractor shall submit a site specific Health and Safety Plan addressing health and safety management methods specific to the project. The Plan shall, at a minimum, include: 1.The name of the individual at the jobsite responsible for implementation and compliance with this Plan. 2.If applicable, the Plan shall include the name and qualifications of any electrical safety observer to be provided by the Contractor. 3.A description of tasks to be undertaken, and equipment mobilized for this project. 4.A list of all known safety or health hazards, problems, and proposed control mechanisms. 5.Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of and procedures for using, disposing of, or storing for all chemicals, products, or materials regulated by WAC 296-62 to be used by the Contractor. 6.A list of personal protective equipment, monitoring devices, and hazard-specific plans or permits as appropriate and required by State and Federal regulations. 7.A description of emergency response measures, equipment available for emergency response to address accidents and releases of materials, including, but not limited to, first aid, eye wash/showers, and fire extinguishing equipment, and location of this equipment at the jobsite. 8.Emergency phone numbers contacts, and location of the nearest medical facility. 9.A monitoring and inspection plan and record keeping measures to ensure that equipment and work practices comply with this Plan. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 29 PAGE 2 10. Personnel names, training and notification procedures as appropriate to ensure that all jobsite personnel are familiar with the Plan elements. Include copies of training certificates. 11. Procedures for safe storage and handling of flammable liquids, in accordance with WAC 296-24-330. 12. If applicable the Contractor shall include procedures for safe storage and handling of compressed gasses in accordance with WAC 296-24-295, Compressed Gas General Requirement. 13. Other issues which the Contractor determines are appropriate and necessary to protect worker safety and health. 1.04 COVID-19 JOB SITE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall comply with all COVID-19 workplace health and safety measures established by the state Department of Labor & Industries or otherwise imposed by the Governor, the state Department of Health, or the Local Health Officer of Seattle-King County Public Health, or subsequent modifications to such health and safety measures as those authorities may issue, including providing all needed personal protective equipment. 1.05 ACCIDENT REPORTING A. Serious accidents such as those resulting in treatment of an injury at a medical facility, response to the site by emergency medical personnel or damage to property other than that of the Contractor shall be reported to the City’s representative and project manager within twenty-four (24) hours of the occurrence. B. A copy of each accident report, which the Contractor or subcontractors have submitted to their insurance carriers, shall be forwarded to the City’s Representative as soon as possible, but in no event later than seven (7) calendar days after the accident occurred. 1.06 HEALTH AND SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall designate a Health and Safety Representative and shall ensure that each Subcontractor designates a Subcontractor's Health and Safety Representative. The Health and Safety Representative shall be capable of identifying all hazards and have the authority to stop work and take immediate action to correct the hazard. B. The Contractor shall authorize each such Health and Safety Representative to resolve safety- related issues raised by the City Representative or Project Manager. C. The Health and Safety Representative shall verify that all work is performed in accordance with the Health and Safety Plan. D. The Contractor shall provide all safety equipment required for the Work. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 29 PAGE 3 E. At a minimum, Contractor and subcontractor personnel directly involved in the Work shall have training in: F. First aid, for each Contractor's and Subcontractor's Health and Safety Representative; G. Confined space work, if the employees will be working in or around confined spaces; H. Shoring and trenching, if work will be in excavations; and I. The Contractor's procedures for confined space rescues. 1.07 Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as imposing any duty upon the City or any of its employees with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied assumption of control or responsibility over, Project Site safety, or over any other safety conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the public. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01 35 29 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 35 29 PAGE 4 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 45 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality- control services. B. Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by City Project Manager. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with contract document requirements. D. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. E. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with contract document requirements. F. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by City Project Manager, City or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 1 Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching specifies requirements for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by inspection and testing activities. 1.04 RESPONSIBILITIES A. Unless otherwise indicated as another identified entity’s responsibility, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are the City's responsibility, the City will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform those services. The Contractor will coordinate all scheduling with the testing agency. C. The City reserves the right to employ independent inspectors and observers for any and all aspects of the work. These inspectors and observers may be assigned or reassigned at any KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 45 00 PAGE 2 time during the Project. Items of the work frequently subject to City's special inspection include but are not limited to: 1.Earthwork & Soil Compaction 2.Imported Granular Materials 3.Asphaltic Concrete Paving 4.Concrete and Reinforcing Steel (site & pre-cast shop, if any) 1.05 RE-TESTING A. The Contractor is responsible for re-testing where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with contract document requirements. B. The cost and time of re-testing construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with contract document requirements. 1.06 ASSOCIATED SERVICES A. Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Contractor shall also notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. B. The auxiliary services required include but are not limited to the following: 1.Provide access to the work. 2.Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 3.Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples. 4.Provide facilities for protective storage and curing of test samples. 5.Deliver samples to testing laboratories. 6.Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. 7.Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. 1.07 DUTIES OF THE TESTING AGENCY A. The testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the City’s Representative and KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 45 00 PAGE 3 the Contractor in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. B. The testing agency shall perform whatever inspections, tests and sampling necessary to reasonably ensure that the work is in conformance with the Contract Documents, industry standards and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, whichever is the most stringent. Inspection and testing methods shall be of the highest quality in conformance with appropriate recognized standards such as those published by ACI, ASTM, ANSI, ICBO, etc. as specified in the technical sections of this manual and as required by the authority having jurisdiction. C. The testing agency shall notify the City’s Representative, City Project Manager and the Contractor promptly of any irregularities or deficiencies observed in the work during performance of its services. Notification shall consist of direct verbal conversation in person or by email. 1.The testing agency shall deliver a formal neatly printed report by emailed to all parties specified in this Section C within 48 hours. A final, fully reviewed and edited report shall be delivered to all parties within five working days. 2.The testing agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the work. 3.The testing agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. The Contractor shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. B. Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. C. The City will provide contact information for on-call testing agency. 1.09 NOTIFICATION A. Contractor shall notify City’s Representative at least 48 hours in advance before an inspection will be conducted. B. Contractor shall notify testing laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations (not less than 48 hours) to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. C. Contractor shall be responsible for costs incurred when testing agency is notified for services, but work is not ready or complete for inspection, testing, taking samples and/or similar activities. 1.10 SUBMITTALS KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 45 00 PAGE 4 A. The testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service to the City’s Representative with copies to the City Project Manager and Contractor. B. The testing agency shall submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority when the authority so directs. C. Written reports of each inspection, test or similar activities must include the following information: 1. Date of issue 2. Project title, address and number 3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections 5. Names of individuals making the inspection or test 6. Designation of the work and test method 7. Identification of product and specification section 8. Complete inspection or test data 9. Test results and an interpretation of test results 10. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested work complies with contract document requirements 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector 13. Recommendations on re-testing PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with contract document requirements for Division 1 Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities and protect repaired construction. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 45 00 PAGE 5 C. Repair and protection are the Contractor's responsibility regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services. END OF SECTION 01 45 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 45 00 PAGE 6 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 52 00 – CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Arrange for and provide temporary facilities and controls as specified herein and as required for the proper and expeditious prosecution of the work. Pay all costs, except as otherwise specified, until Final Completion. B. Make all needed temporary connections to utilities and services in locations acceptable to the City and local authorities having jurisdiction thereof. Furnish all necessary labor and material and make all installations in a manner subject to the acceptance of such authorities and the City’s Representative. Remove such connections when no longer required. Restore the services and sources of supply to proper operating conditions. C. Pay all costs for temporary facilities and controls. 1.03 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. This section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. Contractor shall pay all costs associated with items listed. B. Temporary utilities include but are not limited to the following: 1. Water service and distribution 2. Temporary electrical power and light 3. Telephone 4. Sanitary facilities and services, including drinking water C. Support facilities include but are not limited to the following: 1. Field offices 2. Temporary storage containers 3. Dewatering facilities and drains 4. Temporary enclosures 5. Temporary Project identification signs KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 2 6.Waste disposal services 7.Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities D. Security and protection services include but are not limited to the following: 1.Barricades 2.Secure enclosure fence for the site or work areas 3.Landscape protection 4.Environmental protection 5.Security guards 6. Lighting 7.Video surveillance 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including but not limited to: 1.Building code requirements 2.Health and safety regulations 3.Utility company regulations 4.Police and fire department 5.Environmental protection regulations including but not limited to control of storm water runoff, dust and noise 6.State and OSHA Safety requirements B. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.05 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 3 B. The Contractor shall provide free, safe and unencumbered access on or across the Project site for personnel, vehicles and equipment authorized to use the site by the City but not under contract of the Contractor. C. The Contractor shall maintain streets, trails and sidewalks around the Project site in a clean condition. By means of a regular monitoring and maintenance program of sweeping and hosing, minimize the accumulation of dirt and dust on these areas. D. The Contractor shall protect all adjoining private or municipal property and shall provide barricades, temporary fences and covered walkways to protect the safety of passers-by, as required by prudent construction practice, local building codes, ordinances, other laws or the Contract Documents. E. The Contractor shall, as its sole cost and expense, promptly repair any damage or disturbance to walls, fences, utilities, sidewalks, curbs, landscaping and any other property of third parties (including municipalities) or work already existing resulting from the performance of the work, whether by it, or by its subcontractors at any tier. The Contractor shall maintain streets in good repair and traversable condition. F. The Contractor shall maintain both new and existing work, materials and equipment free from injury or damage from rain, wind, storms, dust or heat at all times. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the City’s Representative, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. The City’s Representative may reject equipment that repeatedly breaks down or fails to produce results. The Contractor shall have no claim for additional payment or for extension of time due to rejection and replacement of any equipment. B. Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC, dry- chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service if necessary. Where the utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. 1. Arrange with utility company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. 3. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 4 4.Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where City’s easements cannot be used for that purpose. 5.Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the City or the City’s Representative. Neither the City nor City’s Representative will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. B. Include temporary toilets. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Use of permanent facilities existing or provided under this contract is not permitted unless explicitly noted. C. Provide containerized, tap-dispenser or bottled-water. D. Filter site runoff and employ further purification as required by local jurisdiction prior to discharging into storm drainage system. Provide drainage ditches, erosion control, pumping and similar facilities as required by local jurisdiction and as required to prevent all uncontrolled or unacceptable run-off from reaching neighboring properties, drainage ways, streams, rivers, ponds, lakes or wetlands, City occupied portions of the site or public right of ways. 1.Filter out soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and all contaminants that might clog sewers and drainage ways, or pollute waterways or soils, before discharge. 2.Maintain temporary storm sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary and fully functioning condition. Following use, restore to clean fully functioning conditions promptly. Assign responsible personnel and monitor facilities during storms and similar events to ensure full function of facilities and protections noted above. This monitoring shall take place around the clock and over weekends and holidays as events warrant. 3.Damage to neighboring properties, waterways, public right of ways, the City’s property, or the work of this contract due to failure to monitor or maintain is solely the responsibility of the Contractor. Damage shall be promptly repaired to original or better condition. 4.Provide and maintain any temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures required by the local jurisdiction and the Contract Documents and any additional measures prudent to prevent uncontrolled or unacceptable storm water runoff from leaving the Project site. E. Provide earthen embankments, solid covers and similar barriers sufficient to prevent flooding by rain or runoff of storm water in and around excavations and subgrade construction and any additional measures prudent to allow maximally production pursuit of the work. Provide flashing marker lights, barricades, solid covers and other devices as necessary to keep workers or passersby from falling in excavations or tripping/falling over hazards. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 5 3.02 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. Refer to the Project Manual and Drawings for guidance on placement of support facilities. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion if possible. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, where conditions acceptable to the City can be met. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide water, water trucks, sprinklers, hoses, piping and all related materials and equipment as needed to control dust. Re-apply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Comply with traffic control requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. E. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over dewatering facilities and drains. Maintain Project site, excavations and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulation. F. Collection and Disposal of Waste 1. Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 degrees Fahrenheit. Handle hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary waste material separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. 2. Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction site, storage area or along access roads and haul routes. 3. Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris to legal off-site location. If periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent excess accumulation of waste, schedule additional collection. 4. Clean interior areas daily and prior to the start of finish work. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 6 3.03 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion or longer, as requested by the City’s Representative. B. Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades, warning signs and lights. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. C. Before starting work, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose the entire Project site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs and other animals from easily entering the site except by the entrance gates. Maintain strict accounting and control of keys and locks. If keys are lost or unaccounted for, the locks must be immediately changed. Refer to Section 01 56 26 for fencing requirements. D. Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. 1. Where materials and equipment must be stored and are of value or attractive for theft or usable for vandalism, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. Maintain strict accounting and control of keys and locks. If keys are lost or unaccounted for, the locks shall be immediately changed. E. Protect existing trees, shrubs, landscaping and lawns within and adjacent to the area of the work where not scheduled for demolition or replacement. Where minor limb or root pruning is necessary to avoid interference with construction, employ a certified arborist recognized by the International Society of Arboriculture. Any pruning shall be approved by the City’s Representative and the City’s park maintenance staff prior to executing the work. F. Provide environmental protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 3.04 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONSTRUCTION A. Unless the City’s Representative requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. B. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been damaged because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 7 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor’s property. The City reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt, other chemical compounds and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, landscaping and sidewalks at the temporary entrances as required by the governing authority. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period. END OF SECTION 01 52 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 52 00 PAGE 8 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 56 26 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 56 26 – TEMPORARY FENCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes all Temporary Fencing work as indicated in the Contract Documents. If no Temporary Fencing is described in the Contract Documents, assume that the Project site will need to be fenced for the duration of construction unless otherwise approved by the City Project Manager or City’s Representative. B. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1.Installation of temporary fencing 2.Maintenance of temporary fencing during the Project 3.Removal of temporary fencing PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Prefabricated portable galvanized chain link fence panels including fabric, posts, top and bottom rails: 1.Prefabricated portable fence panels shall be a minimum of 6 feet high by a maximum of 10 feet wide. Post bases shall be concrete or other solid foundation blocks specifically designed for use with temporary fencing. 2.All fence panels shall be in good condition and free of sharp edges or major defects. B. Provide additional bracing of panels and/or outriggers as necessary to provide a rigid, stable run of fence. 1.Fencing shall be securely bolted or chained against unauthorized entry at all section joints corners and gates. C. Provide signs every 50 feet of fence line. Signage shall be a minimum of 18 inches square and shall with brightly contrasting lettering read as follows: “WARNING: CONSTRUCTION. KEEP OUT.” D. Use 4-foot orange temporary PVC web fencing for low security applications and approved tree protection applications. Secure fence with deformed steel bar and provide safety caps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULE KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 56 26 PAGE 2 A. Fencing may be installed any time after Notice To Proceed has been received. 1. Provide 24 hours’ notice to the City Project Manager and City’s Representative prior to installing temporary fencing. 3.02 STABILITY A. Temporary chain link fence panels shall be connected mechanically by means of pre- fabricated, bolted brackets manufactured specifically for the purpose. Fencing shall not be wired together. Where long straight runs result in an unstable condition, sufficient out-rigging shall be incorporated to maintain fencing upright. Use only pre-manufactured outriggers or additional fence panels. Out-riggers shall be placed on the interior side of the fence unless approved by the City Project Manager or City’s Representative. Alternatively, and where appropriate, a “zig-zag” arrangement of panels for stability may be used. B. Where Projects are phased or otherwise have multiple stages or steps, or where City occupancy will change over the course of a Project, presume that fencing will have to be reconfigured accordingly as many times as necessary to safely and securely accommodate such phases, stages and changes at no additional cost to the city. C. At no time shall fencing be allowed to become a safety hazard to anyone or be unsecured or unmaintained so that it does not afford reasonable security protection. END OF SECTION 01 56 26 KHERSON PARK SECTION 01 57 13 PAGE 1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BID SET 4/15/2022 SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. Install and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation control facilities through project completion. 2. Review, manage, coordinate, and maintain SWPPP. 3. Work includes staging and stockpiling areas. B. Related sections include but is not limited to: 1. Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork 1.2 REFERENCES A. City of Kent Surface Water Design Manual, 2017. B. 2021 King County Surface Water Design Manual C. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. D. WSDOT - Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, current edition; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition. E. GeoEngineers- Geotechnical Engineering Services Report, City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements, Kent, Washington, March 29,2021 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00. B. Submit the following: 1. Catch basin insert product information. 2. Manufacturer’s product cut sheet for triangular silt dike. 3. Manufacturer’s product cut sheet for geotextile fabric for stabilized construction access. 4. Gradation/sieve analysis for stabilized construction access material. KHERSON PARK SECTION 01 57 13 PAGE 2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CATCH BASIN INSERTS A. Provide catch basin inserts for inlet protection in all existing and proposed catch basins, including existing catch basins to be removed, for the duration of construction or until the existing catch basin to be removed has been removed. Inserts shall be appropriately sized for the structure in which it is installed per manufacturer’s recommendation. 2.2 TRIANGULAR SILT DIKE A. Provide Triangular silt dike in accordance with the Project Documents. 2.3 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ACCESS A. Geotextile fabric shall be woven polypropylene geotextile, Mirafi 500X or approved equivalent. B. Quarry spalls per WSDOT Section 9-13.1(5). 2.4 PLASTIC SHEETING A. In accordance with WSDOT Section 9-14.6(3) for 6 mil clear plastic covering. 2.5 SAND BAGS A. Provide ½ to 1 cubic foot capacity sand bags constructed of UV stabilized synthetic woven material of sufficient strength to support the weight of the bag capacity in mineral aggregate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The implementation of the Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control (TESC) plans and the construction, maintenance, replacement and upgrading of these facilities is the responsibility of the Contractor until all construction is approved. All work shall be in accordance with the King County Surface Water Engineering Standards as adopted by the City of Kent and the plans. The TESC facilities shown on the plan must be constructed in conjunction with all clearing and grading activities, and in such a manner as to ensure that sediment laden water does not enter the drainage system or violate applicable water standards. B. The TESC facilities shown are the minimum requirements for anticipated site conditions. During the construction period, the erosion control facilities shall be upgraded (e.g. KHERSON PARK SECTION 01 57 13 PAGE 3 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BID SET 4/15/2022 additional sumps, construction of ditches, additional site stabilization measures, construction accesses, laydown areas, and silt fences, etc.) as needed. Contractor shall pay for all costs associated with the construction, maintenance, upgrading, removal and restoration of the erosion control system throughout project duration as part of the base bid. C. The Contractor shall provide ground-cover measures, access roads, and staging areas to maintain a workable site. To the maximum extent possible the Contractor shall use the parking area, as noted on the Project Documents, for construction staging. The contractor shall be prepared to implement and maintain the required measures to reduce the amount of exposed ground. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall provide a site maintenance plan in the event storm water turbidity measurements are greater than the Ecology standards. D. All TESC measures for a given area to be graded or otherwise worked should be installed prior to any activity within that area. The contractor shall sequence construction within a given area to install sediment storage facilities and establish perimeter flow control prior to starting clearing and grading. E. During the wetter months of the year, or when large storm events are predicted during the summer months, each work area should be stabilized such that if showers occur the work area can receive the rainfall without excessive erosion or sediment transport. During the winter months, areas that are to be left un-worked for more than 2 days shall be mulched or covered with plastic. During the summer months, minimum stabilization measures shall be to seal-rolling the subgrade. The Contractor shall create and maintain temporary storm water conveyance channels through work areas to route runoff to the approved treatment facilities. F. All disturbed areas shall be revegetated as soon as possible or covered with straw mulch treated with a tackifier if outside of the growing season. G. Soils that are to be reused around the site shall be stored in such a manner as to reduce erosion from the stockpile. Protective measures should include, but are not limited to, covering with plastic sheeting, the use of low stockpiles in flat areas, or the use of straw bales/silt fences around pile perimeters. During the period between October 1st and March 31st, these measures are required. H. Provide wheel cleaning stations to clean wheels and undercarriage of trucks before leaving site, as necessary to prevent dirt from being carried onto public roads. If roads are fouled, they must be cleaned immediately in conformance with City of Kent requirements. I. Provide catch basin insert in all existing catch basins in and adjacent to work area. Provide catch basin insert in all new catch basins and area drains immediately following installation, until site is stabilized. J. Keep streets and site drains open for drainage at all times. TESC facilities shall be inspected daily during periods of rain, otherwise inspected weekly. Clean streets KHERSON PARK SECTION 01 57 13 PAGE 4 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BID SET 4/15/2022 thoroughly at the end of each day. Remove sediment with a method approved by the Owner’s Representative, and transport sediment to an approved sediment disposal area. Street washing will be allowed only as a last resort, and after the above method has been completed. K. Clean out catch basin sumps prior to placement of catch basin inserts. Conform to manufacturer’s recommendations regarding maximum allowable amount of sediment in catch basin insert. Remove sediment buildup or replace the catch basin insert. Clean out catch basins after completion of construction. Do not flush sediment-laden water into the downstream system with cleaning operation. L. Inspect and repair erosion control measures weekly at a minimum and daily if necessary. Contractor shall be aware of the weather forecasts and shall inspect before, during and after storms and prior to weekend and holidays. Contractor shall inspect the entire system to ensure proper operation. M. Refer to TESC notes in drawings for additional information. 3.2 NPDES PERMIT A. An NPDES permit is not anticipated for this project. Although not required, upon execution of the Construction contract, the Contractor shall be responsible to provide all Construction Stormwater responsibilities with this contract work for the duration of the contract work. As part of the responsibilities, the Contractor shall take full responsibility and shall be responsible to provide the required source control measure, Best Management Practices and stormwater treatment measures such that the stormwater discharge from the site complies with the DOE construction discharge requirements. The minimum source control measures are identified within the project plans. Best Management Practices (BMP) and stormwater protection measures are described on the contract documents. The contractor responsibilities include but are not limited to: 1. Execution of Plan and Specification required source control, BMP and stormwater treatment measures. 2. Coordinating, conducting and submitting City of Kent inspections, monitoring, testing and recording, if required. 3. Maintain and have available onsite for review a log that indicates dates and times of inspections, monitoring, and testing as well as all results and mitigation if required. 4. Performing maintenance work to keep the required protection operational and functional. 5. Maintain TESC measures and continue monitoring until site stabilization. KHERSON PARK SECTION 01 57 13 PAGE 5 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BID SET 4/15/2022 3.3 TURBIDITY MONITORING A. On-site erosion control inspections and turbidity monitoring shall be performed in accordance with DOE standards and City of Kent requirements. TESC monitoring report and review of the checklists shall be part of the weekly construction team meetings. Temporary and permanent erosion control and drainage measures shall be adjusted and maintained as necessary. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting the turbidity requirements per the DOE standards and the City of Kent requirements. The Turbidity Monitoring Plan as required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain. Additional measures may be required to achieve discharge requirements of less than 25 NTU. These measures shall be at no additional expense to the Kent Parks Department. C. The Contractor shall implement a turbidity monitoring program in compliance with the City of Kent requirements and the DOE. The Contractor shall perform turbidity monitoring using an approved turbidity monitoring device. The person providing the Turbidity monitoring shall be familiar with monitoring the monitoring equipment, and the regulations and requirements associated with the turbidity monitoring program. The Contractor shall record the monitoring results and shall provide a copy of the record to the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall have these results posted immediately after tests are performed. The Contractor shall report to the Owner’s Representatives any monitored turbidity exceeding 250 NTU within 24 hours including corrective actions that have been taken. D. If during construction, the monitoring reports show that the turbidity threshold of less than 25 NTU has been exceeded, the Contractor shall take immediate corrective action to bring the threshold within compliance. The Contractor shall pay for all additional testing required beyond the weekly testing to bring determine if the site is in compliance. 3.4 pH MONITORING A. On-site erosion control inspections and pH monitoring shall be performed in accordance with DOE standards and City of Kent requirements. pH monitoring report shall be part of the weekly construction team meetings. Temporary and permanent erosion control and drainage measures shall be adjusted and maintained as necessary. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting the pH requirements per DOE standards and the City of Kent Requirements. Additional measures may be required to achieve pH discharge requirements of between 6.5 and 8.0. These measures shall be at no additional expense to the Kent Parks Department. C. Samples will be collected weekly at stormwater structures located upstream of the discharge to the municipal stormwater system in the right-of-way. Samples will be analyzed for pH using a calibrated pH meter and recorded in the site log book. KHERSON PARK SECTION 01 57 13 PAGE 6 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BID SET 4/15/2022 D. The key benchmark pH value for stormwater is a maximum of 8.0. If a pH greater than 8.0 is measured in the sedimentation pond or detention vault used for sediment settling, the following steps will be conducted: 1. Assess whether additional BMPs should be implemented and whether associated revisions to the SWPPP are necessary. 2. Stop (detain) all discharges from leaving the site and entering surface waters or storm drains if the pH is greater than 8.5. 3. Collect sample from sedimentation pond and/or detention vault used for settling the following day, and if the pH exceeds 8.0 for the second consecutive day, implement CO2 sparging treatment. 4. Sample and measure pH daily until there are 3 consecutive pH measurements less than 8.0. 5. If there are 3 consecutive pH measurements greater than 8.0, notify Ecology by phone within 24 hours of the 3rd measurement exceeding a pH of 8.0 (contact the Northwest Regional Office at 425-649-7000) and initiate discussions with Ecology regarding additional treatment BMPs. 6. Describe inspection results and remedial actions that are taken in the site log book and in monthly discharge monitoring reports. E. If during construction, the monitoring reports show that the PH threshold of greater than 8.0 has been exceeded, the Contractor shall take immediate corrective action to bring the threshold within compliance. The Contractor shall pay for all additional testing required beyond the weekly testing to bring determine if the site is in compliance. 3.5 DRAINAGE COLLECTION AND CONVEYANCE A. Surface runoff and discharge shall be controlled at all times during and following development. Under no circumstances shall the contractor allow concentrated discharges over slopes. B. Provide temporary collection sump structures as necessary to collect and route stormwater to sediment control facilities. Structures shall be installed as necessitated by the land clearing activities to ensure that sediment laden water does not enter the natural or public drainage system. Contractor to provide sumps and pumps as necessary. C. Storm drains shall be installed in accordance with Section 02720. 3.6 PHASED CLEARING AND STRIPPING A. Phased clearing, grubbing and stripping of the site shall be utilized to minimize disturbance to soil and minimize erosion potential. B. Topsoil layers shall be retained and protected to the maximum extent feasible. Any topsoil that is stockpiled onsite shall be covered to prevent erosion and saturation. KHERSON PARK SECTION 01 57 13 PAGE 7 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BID SET 4/15/2022 3.7 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ACCESS A.Install as shown on the plans. The access(es) shall be installed at the beginning of construction and maintained to meet applicable standards for the duration of the project. Additional measures may be required to ensure that all paved areas are kept clean for the duration of the project. Provide protection for existing improvements to remain. Any damaged improvements will be replaced by the Contractor, at no expense to the Owner, to an equal or better condition. B.Install stabilizing geotextile with a minimum 12” overlap at each joint. Extend geotextile 24” beyond limits of construction access. C.Place quarry spall material to compacted depth of 12 inches. 3.8 PLASTIC SHEETING A.Overlap joints minimum of 24”. Overlap joints in the direction of drainage and to prevent water from draining onto material being protected. B.Secure plastic sheeting as necessary to prevent movement and damage. C.Provide sandbags at 2.5 foot spacing and tie sandbags together with rope on slopes greater than 3:1. 3.9 STOCKPILING A.Stockpiling aggregates shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 3-02. 3.10 PROTECTION OF STOCKPILES A.Protect stockpile areas from release of sediment. Cover stockpiles at all times while not in use to keep stored material dry. Surround materials stockpiled on pavement by two rows compost filter sock or triangular silt dike with joints staggered. 3.11 REMOVAL A.Remove stabilized construction access as quickly as possible following the conclusion of transport of bulk materials and demobilization of heavy equipment, with prior approval of the Owner’s Representative. B.Complete site restoration as directed by the Owner’s Representative as part of removal operation. C. Remove all catch basin inserts once site has been fully restored and stabilized. END OF TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL SECTION © LPD ENGINEERING PLLC 2022 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 73 23 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 73 23 – FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field-engineering services including but not limited to land survey and construction layout work. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The Project Drawings will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes where known. Where not identified in the documents, Surveyor to locate and identify. B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks before proceeding to lay out the work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. All work to replace lost or destroyed control points will be at the expense of the Contractor. C. Establish and maintain not less than 2 permanent benchmarks on the Project site as required by the work, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations with horizontal and vertical data on Project Record Documents. D. The indication of the existence and location of underground and other utilities is not guaranteed. Before beginning Project site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities. 1. Prior to beginning Project site work, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping. 3.02 PERFORMANCE KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 73 23 PAGE 2 A. Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each elevation of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb. B. Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log legible and available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Advise the City Project Manager and City’s Representative when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. 2. On the As-Built, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected. C. Locate and lay out site improvements including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations. D. Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, protect or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 01 73 23 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 73 29 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 73 29 – CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for all cutting and patching necessary to complete the work. 1.03 PLANNING / ENGINEERING A. Prepare a plan describing the procedures at least 5 days in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information, as applicable: 1.Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2.Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3.List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform work. 4.Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed. 5.Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6.Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to or shoring of structural elements, have details and calculations prepared by a licensed engineer showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. 7.Planning and engineering of the Contractor's cutting and patching does not waive the City or Engineer's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 73 29 PAGE 2 B. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the City Project Managers or City’s Representatives opinion, reduce the building's or park’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Replace, patch and repair cut or damaged material and surfaces by methods and with materials in such a manner and with certified specialists when required, so as not to void any existing or required warranties. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. If matching material is not available, consult with City Project Manager or City’s Representative for appropriate material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that demolition is complete and that existing surfaces are ready for patching. B. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding and notify the City Project Manager and City’s Representative. C. The beginning of restoration work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary support and bracing of work to be cut. B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Contact the City Project Manager and City’s Representative when unsuitable material not marked for removal (such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete and masonry) is discovered. D. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 3.03 PERFORMANCE KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 73 29 PAGE 3 A. Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Where original work required specialists or used a specific trade, the same specialist and/or trade shall execute the cutting and patching unless another specialist/trade is better suited due to conditions present. B. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. C. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original installer and comply with the original installer's recommendations. 1.Where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2.To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Use conventional drills, not roto- hammers. 3.Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 specifications where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 4.Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit before cutting. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and cutting. 5.Where concrete or asphalt will be cut, take cut back to nearest joint to ensure a smooth transition. Consult with City Project Manager or City’s Representative prior to cutting or patching concrete or asphalt. D. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1.Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2.Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, solder, oils, putty, sealant and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 73 29 PAGE 4 END OF SECTION 01 73 29 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 74 19 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 74 19 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Kent Parks Special Provisions and Kent Special Provisions, apply to this Section 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes requirement for waste management and disposal during construction. 1.03 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Salvage, recycle and reuse construction and demolition waste material generated by the Project to the greatest extent possible. B. Minimize the creation of construction and demolition waste on the job site. Minimize factors that contribute to waste such as excess packaging, improper storage, ordering errors, poor planning, breakage and mishandling. C. The following material should be diverted from the landfill to the greatest extent possible. 1. Clean wood, pallet wood, plywood, OSB, and particle board 2. Asphalt 3. Concrete 4. Brick 5. Metals 6. Gypsum products 7. Glass 8. Plastics 9. Cardboard 10. Insulation D. Hazardous materials such as paints, solvents, adhesives, batteries and fluorescent lightbulbs and ballasts which cannot be re-used shall be disposed of at authorized hazardous waste disposal sites. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 74 19 PAGE 2 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with applicable requirements of the jurisdictional authorities, local ordinances and regulations concerning management of construction waste. B. Discuss waste management at the preconstruction meeting. C. Waste management shall be discussed at regularly scheduled weekly progress meetings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WASTE CONTAINERS A. Use a durable, covered, secured, re-usable container for each waste category. B. All recycling containers shall be clearly marked and shall list materials which can be recycled, as well as material which cannot be recycled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Use construction methods that reduce waste. When possible: 1.Order material pre-cut to required size. 2.Order exact quantity required. 3.Use temporary materials and facilities that can be re-used on other Projects. B. Contractor to verify that field measurements are as indicated on construction and or Shop Drawings before confirming product order or proceeding with work in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials. C. Protect products from damage during storage, installation and in-place. Replacement and disposal of materials that become wet, damp or unusable for any reason due to improper storage shall be at the Contractor’s expense. D. Request or require products to be delivered to the site with packing materials that can be returned to the sender or easily recycled. E. Use detailed take-offs to identify location and uses in structure to reduce risk of unplanned and wasteful cuts. END OF SECTION 01 74 19 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 74 23 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 74 23 – FINAL CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for final cleaning at Substantial Completion. A. Conduct cleaning and waste disposal operations in compliance with local laws and ordinances. Comply fully with federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations. B. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. C. Burning or burying of debris, rubbish or other waste material on the premises is not permitted. 1.02 Should the Contractor fail in any of its duties described in this section, the City may, at its sole discretion, have the Project site cleaned thoroughly to its standards. The cost of this cleaning shall be deducted from the Contractor's final payment or retainage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING AGENTS A. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or that might damage finished surfaces. Pay special attention to easily marred surfaces and reactive metals such as aluminum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a typical commercial building/site cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion for the entire Project or a portion of the Project. 1. Clean the Project site, yard and grounds in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape areas. Remove rubbish, waste materials, litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas clean. 2. Remove petrochemical spills, stains and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth even-textured surface. 3. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus material from the site. 4. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Pay special attention to corners and other hard to clean areas. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 74 23 PAGE 2 5.Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. 6.Pressure-wash concrete surfaces to remove any dirt built up during construction. 7.Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. 8.Broom clean and shop vacuum concrete floors in unoccupied spaces. 9.Remove all visible labels that are not permanent labels and are not related to a product’s fire, mechanical or electrical rating. 10.Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes and surfaces. 11.Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that show evidence of repair or restoration. 12.Wipe surfaces of equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint, sealant and mortar droppings and all other foreign substances. 13.Locate all metal objects, nails, etc. that may pose a hazard. Sweep all non-hard surface areas that were within or adjacent to any construction area or over which any construction related traffic traveled. 14.Leave the Project site clean and ready for occupancy. 3.02 REMOVAL OF PROTECTION A. Unless requested otherwise by the City, remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to protect previously completed installations during the remainder of the construction period. B. Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. C. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated construction, such materials shall become the City's property. At the City's direction, relocate these materials on site. END OF SECTION 01 74 23 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 77 00 PAGE 1 SECTION 01 77 00 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Closeout Procedures B. Final Cleaning C. Project Record Documents D. Operation and Maintenance Data E. Operation Instruction F. Manufacturers’ Warranties G. Guaranties H. Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials 1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Comply with procedures stated in the Contract Documents for Substantial and Final Completion. B. Submit all certificates of approval issued by the governing authorities. C. Submit building permit documents and building inspection signoff sheets to the City. D. Submit final application for payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Refer to Section 01 74 23 for final cleaning requirements 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a complete set of record documents that clearly indicate all changes for the Contract Documents and all uncovered existing conditions which will be subsequently concealed. B. Record documents shall include: 1. Project drawings 2. Specifications 3. Reviewed Shop Drawings, product data, and samples. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 77 00 PAGE 2 C. Keep record documents current; do not conceal any work until required information has been recorded. D. Mark specifications legibly and record at each product section a description of actual products installed. Include the manufactures name and product model number. E. As-Built Drawings shall include the location of all concealed work, including without limitation, conduit, piping, ducts, mechanical and electrical equipment and foundations. Indicate all changes to details which involve concealed construction. Contractor shall provide red-line drawings to City’s Representative, who shall create a final, consolidated set of As-Built Drawings and deliver them to the City. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Furnish published operation and maintenance information covering all equipment and finish materials installed on the Project. Whether specified or not, furnish published information whenever special maintenance procedures are required to assure the proper operation and durability of Project material, equipment and finishes. B. Provide one, consolidated hard copy and digital copies of all operation and maintenance data, including maintenance data or documentation that is requested in any technical specifications. C. Submit hard copy of operation and maintenance data in a three-ring binder. Included divider tabs to separate data for each component. Include Project name, Contractor and City’s representative. D. Submit electronic copies of operation and maintenance data for City’s Representative to review. 1.06 OPERATION INSTRUCTION A. Prior to Final Completion, instruct the City’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Provide instruction at mutually agreed upon time. B. Use experienced personnel trained and experienced in the operation and maintenance of systems, buildings, or equipment involved in the Project. C. Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment as the basis of instruction. Review content in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Provide a one-year warranty on all workmanship and materials from the date of final completion. Provide additional warranties as required in the specifications. KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 77 00 PAGE 3 B. By its execution of the Contract, Contractor agrees to comply with these specifications and warrants it will faithfully and satisfactorily perform all work as provided for, and in accordance with, the provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall promptly correct all defects in workmanship and materials: (1) when Contractor knows or should have known of the defect, or (2) upon Contractor’s receipt of notification from the City of the existence or discovery of the defect. C. In the event any parts are repaired or replaced, only original replacement parts shall be used—rebuilt or used parts will not be acceptable. When defects are corrected, the warranty for that portion of the work shall extend for an additional year beyond the original warranty period applicable to the overall work. The Contractor shall begin to correct any defects within seven (7) calendar days of its receipt of notice from the City of the defect. If the Contractor does not accomplish the corrections within a reasonable time as determined by the City, the City may complete the corrections and the Contractor shall pay all costs incurred by the City in order to accomplish the correction. D. The Contractor shall furnish the City any guarantee or warranty furnished as a customary trade practice in connection with the purchase of any equipment, materials, or items incorporated into the project. E. Furnish original and duplicate copies of each manufacturer’s warranty executed to the City. F. Submit all material prior to application for final payment. For equipment put into use with City’s permission during construction, submit warranty within 10 days after first operation. 1.08 SPARE PARTS A. Provide all spare parts to City Project Manager. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01 77 00 KENT PARKS SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 01 77 00 PAGE 4 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE KHERSON PARK IMPROVEMENTS   Bid Set   Date: 04‐15‐2022  TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS.   PREPARED FOR:   City of Kent ‐ Park Planning and Development | Parks, Recreation and Community Services  PREPARED BY:   KHERSON DESIGN CONSULTANT TEAM   Prime:   J.A. Brennan Associates, PLLC.  Landscape Architects and Planners  Subconsultant Team:    LPD Engineering ‐ Civil Engineering ‐  Cross Engineers ‐ Electrical Engineering ‐  Chudgar Engineering Company ‐ Structural Engineering –   Geoengineers, Inc. – Geotechnical   Parametrix – Site Survey   TABLE OF CONTENTS.  a.02 01 00 Maintenance of Existing Conditions b.02 41 13 Selective Demolition c.03 11 00 Concrete Forming d.03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement e.03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete f.03 34 50 Concrete Finishing g.04 22 00 Masonry Unit Paver h.05 50 00 Metal Fabrications i.08 84 00 Plastic Glazing j.09 90 00 Paintings and Coatings k.11 68 13 Playground Equipment l.12 93 00 Site Furnishings m.26 05 00 Electrical General Work n.26 56 00 Exterior Lighting o.31 10 00 Site Preparation p.31 20 00 Earthwork q.31 41 00 Trench Safety r.32 12 16 Asphalt Paving s.32 13 00 Concrete paving t.32 17 23 Pavement Markings and Signage u.32 18 16.13 Synthetic Safety Surfacing – Poured-in-Place EPDM v.32 80 00 Irrigation w. 32 90 00 Landscaping x. 32 92 00 Sod Lawn y. 33 41 00 Storm Drainage z. Appendix: A. Geotechnical Report and Addendum B. Stormwater TIR Report C. Cre8tePlay Fabrication Drawings D. City of Kent Standard Plans Kherson Park Improvement Specification Seal Page  4/15/2022 Jim Brennan, ASLA Samir Chudgar, P.E., S.E.   Laurie Pfarr P.E., LEED AP, CESCL  Steven L. Hubbs, P.E.   KHERSON PARK DIV 02 01 00 PAGE 1 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL A. The Contractor shall protect from damage private and public utilities encountered during the work. Utilities shall include, but are not limited to, sewer and storm drain systems; water distribution systems; electrical distribution systems; natural gas distribution systems; telephone, telegraph, and CATV systems; fire alarm systems; and similar facilities and systems. B. Public and private utilities, or their contractors, will furnish all work necessary to adjust, relocate, repair, or construct their facilities unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents. C. The Contractor shall, before any excavation begins, call the Utilities Underground Location Center 1-800-424-5555. D. Where it is necessary to remove or relocate private utilities to accommodate the work, the removal or relocation will normally be accomplished in advance of construction. However, under some circumstances, this removal or relocation may have to be performed concurrent with the work. In this case, the Contractor shall coordinate the Contract Work with that of the utilities to cause the least possible interference with both kinds of work. Where a private utility should have been removed or relocated before the Contractor beginning the work at the point affected, and such work by the utility was not accomplished, the Contractor shall note the presence of the facility and immediately notify the Owner’s Representative in writing. E. The right is reserved to the Owner’s Representative and the owners of utilities, or their authorized agents, to enter upon the right-of-way or property for the purpose of making changes, connections, or repairs to their facilities. The Contractor shall cooperate with forces engaged in this work and shall avoid any unnecessary delay or hindrance to work being performed by other forces. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make whatever notifications and applications necessary in coordinating utility and Contractor work. F. Should the Contractor desire to have any adjustments in line or grade made on any utility, or other improvements, for the Contractor's convenience to facilitate the work, and rearrangement is in addition to or different from the rearrangements indicated in the Contract Document, the Contractor shall make whatever notifications and applications as are necessary with the owners of the utility for such rearrangement and bear all expenses in connection to that work. G. Locations and dimensions shown in the Drawings for existing facilities are per available information obtained without uncovering, measuring, or other verification. H. Attention is directed to the possible existence of underground facilities which are not shown in the Contract Documents. When the relocation of these facilities is necessary to accommodate the work, the Owner’s Representative will provide for the relocations of these KHERSON PARK DIV 02 01 00 PAGE 2 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 facilities by other forces, or the relocations shall be performed by the Contractor as extra work pursuant to a Change Order. I. It is anticipated that the Contractor may encounter private water service utilities (water service lines running between meters and private residences) during work operations. The city does not maintain records of these utilities. Therefore, they do not appear on the Drawings and will not be field located by the Water Department. These private utilities' locations can usually be ascertained by relative meter location, residence location, or discussion with various private property owners. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to locate and protect these private water services from damage. J. If it is necessary to provide temporary water supply connections due to conflict with existing private water service pipes during construction, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to do so. K. In all cases, private water service lines damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative immediately of any such damage and shall begin repairs immediately and work continuously until water service is restored. Repair of damaged private water service lines shall be inspected by the Water Department or applicable water utility before backfilling. L. The Contractor is alerted to the existence of RCW 19.122, an act relating to underground utilities and prescribing penalties. The Contractor shall bear any cost or scheduling impact incurred by the Contractor because of Contractor's required compliance with these statutory provisions. M. No excavation shall begin until all known facilities in the excavation area's vicinity have been located and marked. N. Except as otherwise provided herein, all costs incurred by the Contractor in complying with requirements of this Section shall be included in the lump sum Bid or the unit prices for the various items of work listed in the Bid Form. O. Geotechnical investigation revealed potential for an underground layer of brick, the extent of this layer is unknown. As excavation work occurs in this area, a force account will be used to pay for the removal of this underground layer, to the extent required to allow for the installation of paving, drainage, landscaping and irrigation. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner. P. Existing Easements: 1. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to verify existing easements. 2. Owner has established a temporary construction easement with the adjacent property owner for the site improvements that will occur up to the exiting building envelope, verify extents with the Owner before commencing work. 3. Access to building entry points will be maintained at all times during the construction period. KHERSON PARK DIV 02 01 00 PAGE 3 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 1.2 CLEARANCES FROM WATER MAIN - SEWERS A. Where possible, sewers shall be laid at a lower invert elevation than water mains. B. Water mains and sewers shall be spaced apart horizontally a minimum of 10 feet, measured center to center, except the spacing may be reduced to the following "nearest point measurements: 1. 5 feet horizontal when the water main is a ductile iron water main. 2. Less than 5 feet when the water main is ductile iron, when a. the sewer is constructed of materials and with joints that are equivalent to water main standards; and b. the bottom of the water main is at least 18 inches above the top of the sewer. C. Water mains crossing over sewers shall be constructed of ductile iron. It shall be spaced to provide a minimum separation of 18 inches between the bottom of the water main and the top of the sewer. Water mains passing under sewers shall, in addition to the requirements above, be protected by providing: 1. A minimum vertical spacing of 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer and the top of the water main. 2. Adequate support for the sewer to prevent excessive deflection of joints and settling on and breaking the water main; and 3. The point of crossing centered between two successive joints of the water main pipe. D. When the water main is existing and new side sewers are being installed or reconnected, the following requirements pursuant to Kent Municipal Code shall apply: 1. Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all side sewers over water mains for a distance of at least 5 feet from the center of the water main. Side sewers laid below water mains shall be laid at least 6 inches below and 12 inches horizontal, from all water mains and water service lines as measured from the "nearest points," unless the cast iron pipe is used for the side sewer. 2. Exceptions to the above requirements must be approved by the City of Kent Public Works. 1.3 CLEARANCES FROM WATER MAIN - GAS MAINS AND OTHER UTILITIES A. A minimum of 1 foot vertical and 6-inch horizontal clearance shall be provided between existing gas mains or gas service lines and new ductile iron water lines. If relocation of either utility is not practical, a protective wrap shall be provided for the entire distance where KHERSON PARK DIV 02 01 00 PAGE 4 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 clearance is less than required. Wrapping material shall consist of either a split PVC pipe or PVC wrapping of at least 0.04-inch thickness and shall be applied to either one of the pipes. B. A clearance of 6 inches or more is desired between water mains and all other utilities except gas mains, gas service lines, and sewers. If the separation is less than 6 inches, a separation of at least 2 inches shall be maintained. A sheet of 2-inch-thick polyethylene plastic foam material shall be placed in the separation between the water main and the other utility (except gas lines and sewer lines). END SECTION 02 01 00 KHERSON PARK 02 41 13 PAGE 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes removal of surface debris, removal of paving, curbs, sidewalks, abandonment of utilities, and all other demolition required to construct the work. Refer Division 1and section 31 10 00 for additional information. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The Contractor shall verify the exact extent of constructed facilities and vegetation with the Owner to remain undisturbed at the work boundaries before clearing and grubbing or demolition. 3.2 PROTECTION & SALVAGE A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities, vegetation, and structures indicated to remain from damage. Not specified otherwise, all existing site improvements shall be salvaged and reinstalled or replaced at the completion of the work. B. Protect benchmarks, survey control points, and existing structures from damage or displacement. Any benchmarks or survey control points that will be disturbed by the work shall be surveyed by a Licensed Professional Land Surveyor before disturbance. Said benchmark or control point shall be restored by said Licensed Professional Land Surveyor following professional standards of practice. 3.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide, erect, and maintain fencing and barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing pavements, walls, structures, utilities, or other existing site improvements indicated to remain in place. Restore any improvements damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to the Engineer. KHERSON PARK 02 41 13 PAGE 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION BID SET 4/15/2022 B. The Contractor is responsible for the verification of all utility locations. The Contractor shall locate all known utilities. C. Verify that all appropriate services have been disconnected. The Contractor shall pay for all fees and costs associated with utility disconnects, capping, line, and meter removal. D. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice. Coordinate work with Division 1 requirements. Maintain street and site drains and sewers open for free drainage. Provide catch basin protection. E. Objectionable Noises: Limit the use of air hammers and other noisy equipment as much as possible. Conform with local governing requirements regarding Noise Control. F. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes: 1. Ensure minimum interference with access, paths, streets, parking lots, adjacent facilities, and walls. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, paths, easements, or passageways without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3. If required by governing authorities, provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. G. Protection of Existing Elements: 1. Protect all existing utilities to remain. 2. Monuments: Carefully maintain benchmarks, monuments, and other reference points. If disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed at no cost to the Engineer. 3.4 SITE ACCESS A. Access route for construction shall be from as shown on the drawings, as approved by the Owner. B. Provide a project staging, access, and material storage plan within ten (10) days of notice to proceed. C. Ensure access to the adjacent building to the north of the project is maintained at all times. KHERSON PARK 02 41 13 PAGE 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION BID SET 4/15/2022 3.5 REMOVAL A. Remove paving, curbs, sidewalks, and gravel base for all structures and hard-surfaced areas required to perform the work. Neatly saw cut cement concrete, asphalt concrete, and sidewalk edges at right angle to surface or as directed by the Engineer. B. Remove existing irrigation system and all appurtenances, including existing doublecheck valve assembly. Maintain existing irrigation water meter, coordinate with Owner. Refer to irrigation spec. 3.6 ABANDON UTILITIES A. Abandon existing manholes, utility vaults, and catch basins as required following Standard Specification 7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes, except where abandonment creates a conflict with other proposed utilities. B. Pipes to be abandoned in place shall be plugged with a poured in place 5-foot-long plug of Controlled Density Fill (CDF) or commercial concrete except where abandonment creates a conflict with other proposed utilities. C. Where abandonment of pipes or utility structures creates a conflict with proposed utilities, remove existing pipe or utility to provide a minimum 5-foot clearance on all sides of the proposed utility and 1-foot clearance below. END OF SECTION 02 41 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 11 00 PAGE 1 CONCRETE FORMING BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Design and construct all formwork systems to provide only those lines and delineations indicated, unless otherwise approved by the Owner, to construct formwork to allow erection in proper sequence and permit removal without damage to the finished concrete surfaces. Construct all formwork to the shapes, lines, and dimensions of concrete members with specified tolerances. B. See Drawings for concrete footings and reinforcement. Where conflicts exist between this specification section and the drawings, the drawings take precedence. 1.2 REGULATIONS A. Conform to requirements of the City of Kent building code for concrete. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Conform to requirements of the following Reference Standards as the Owner judges them applicable and as modified and supplemented herein. B. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301, or latest edition. C. ACI Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork, ACI 347, or latest edition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special Inspection: It is required to notify the Owner at least 48 hours before the inspection of forms. B. Inspection by Other Trades: Where items, such as anchors, fastenings, conduit, piping, and other items are supplied by other trades and specified elsewhere in these specifications, in the forms, obtain approval of their placement before placing any concrete. 1.5 HANDLING A. Protection of Forms: Design, construct, and erect all forms for reuse; withdraw projecting nails or other objects from contact surfaces before reusing; clean and completely recondition all forms before reuse; repair any damage to forming surfaces caused during previous usage. Obtain approval for each reuse; not permitted is formwork with patches or repairs affecting the concrete surfaces’ appearance. B. Reused forms will not contain patches resulting from alterations. Reuse forms on identical sections only. Reuse no forms showing excessive surface wear or other imperfections impairing the quality of finish of concrete surface. C. Precautions: The Contractor is responsible for the strength and suitability of the formwork. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 11 00 PAGE 2 CONCRETE FORMING BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. For footings and concrete slabs: Fabricate forms of MDO plywood, metal, or plastic as judged best suited for shapes. Construct with a minimum of joints, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. 2.2 INSERTS/SLEEVES A. As required by Manufacturer’s specifications 2.3 FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Use release agent with non-staining and non-interference characteristics with bonding capabilities of paints, plasters, adhesives, other surface coatings or materials. The Contractor shall guarantee proper bonding of such subsequent coatings or materials applied over concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION A. Erect forms to conform accurately to the shapes, dimensions, locations, and profiles indicated. Fit joints between adjacent assembled panels and components, tightly seal with gasket material. Inspect all contact surfaces before concrete placement; verify that surfaces are clean, smooth, and free from foreign matter or imperfections affecting the appearance of finished concrete. Construct all formwork to provide the following dimensional tolerances in finished concrete construction: TYPE MEASUREMENT Footing and Foundation Depth: Minus 1/2", plus 2" Slab Thickness: Minus 1/8”, plus 1/2” Curb, walls: Minus 1/8”, plus 1/4” Variations from Levels and Conspicuous Lines: Plus or minus 1/8” with 1/4” maximum allowable in any direction, except where other tolerances are specified. B. Camber: Design and erect formwork for anticipated deflection due to weight and pressure of fresh concrete such that they will support the maximum pressure exerted by fluid concrete with an actual deflection not to exceed 1/32” or 0.0025 times the support spacing, whichever is the larger, at the midpoint between supports. Provide positive means for adjustment of shores and struts to take up settlement during placement. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 11 00 PAGE 3 CONCRETE FORMING BID SET 4/15/2022 3.2 FORM TREATMENT A. Before the erection of the forming, plug and seal all cracks, holes, slits, gaps, and other “telegraphing” imperfections in contact surfaces. Apply bond-breaking coating in amounts which will leave surfaces in proper condition to receive subsequent material application. The Contractor will ensure that bond release coatings are applied only in amounts that will leave surfaces in proper condition to receive subsequent material application. 3.3 FORM REMOVAL A. Apply adequate release agent to form to ensure clean ease of removal from cured concrete. B. Formwork used must be designed for easy removal without damaging or marring finished surfaces of the concrete. Prying against the concrete face is not permitted, where mechanical means are necessary to release forms, use wood wedges only, and then only if approved by the Owner. C. Removal Strength: Formwork for footings shall remain in place until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from the removal operations. Determine concrete removal strength based on test cylinders, field cured under the most unfavorable conditions prevailing for any portion of the work represented. END OF SECTION 03 11 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 20 00 PAGE 1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Regulations A. Conform to City of Kent codes and requirements for concrete reinforcement, as supplemented and modified on plans or herein. 1.02 Reference Standards A. Conform to requirements of the following Reference Standards as the Engineer judges them applicable and as modified and supplanted herein. i.City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. ii.ACI Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318, or latest edition. iii.ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301, or latest edition. iv.ACI Detailing Manual, ACI 315, or latest edition. v.Washington State Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edition. 1.03 Quality Assurance A. Special Inspection: Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours before placing any concrete. 1.04 Submittals KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 20 00 PAGE 2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' published literature for specified products and accessories as applicable, including manufacturers' specifications, physical characteristics and performance data. Submit as a supplement, manufacturers' instructions and directions for application if not included in manufacturers' published literature. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Bars: ASTM A615; types, sizes and grades as indicated and noted on the plans; all bars shall be free from rust and loose scale at time of delivery. B. Tie wire: 16-gauge double annealed wire. Provide galvanized tie wire for exposed concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Fabrication and Detailing A. Fabricate steel bar reinforcement to shapes and dimensions as shown and place as indicated. B. Bending and Straightening: Form bars accurately to detail, other kinks or bends will not be permitted; conform to requirements of ACI 318. Make bends cold around pin with diameter at least 6 times bar dimension; heating of reinforcement will be permitted only if entire operation is approved. No bending of reinforcement after partial embedment in concrete will be permitted, except for Grade 40 dowels. C. Splices: Obtain approval from the Engineer for all splices not indicated on the plans. In general avoid splices at points of maximum stress. Saw, shear or flame-cut bar ends; straighten ends of sheared bars; chip and wire brush ends of flame-cut bars. Wire brush splice area to remove burrs, paint, oil, and other foreign matter before splicing. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 20 00 PAGE 3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 3.02 Placement A. Clean reinforcing bars free from loose rust, mud, oil and other foreign matter affecting or reducing bond using approved portable sandblasting equipment. Accurately position bars in accordance with approved placement drawings and secure against displacement. Overlap at intersections as indicated or as directed; extend reinforcement through, and overlap beyond, construction joints. B. Displacement: If bars are displaced, or if it is necessary to move bars to avoid interference with other reinforcing or embedded items, and if bars are moved to exceed tolerances, obtain approval from the Engineer of resulting arrangement prior to placing concrete. C. Miscellaneous: After cutting tie-wire, turn wires to the inside of the section and bend in such manner that concrete placement will not force ends to exposed concrete surfaces. END OF SECTION 03200 KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 30 00 PAGE 1 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Description: For all structural concrete work including seat walls in this project. 1.02 Related Work Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing Section 03 34 50 – Concrete Finishing Section 32 13 00 – Concrete Paving 1.03 Regulations A. Conform to all City of Kent codes and requirements and the Washington State Department of Transportation, Standard Specification for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, current edition. 1.04 Reference Standards A. Conform to requirements of the following Reference Standards or as modified and supplemented hereinafter. 1. Washington State Department of Transportation, Standard Specification for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, or latest edition. 2. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301, or latest edition. 3. ACI Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete, ACI 613, or latest edition. 4. ACI Recommended practice for Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306, or latest edition. 5. ACI Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 605, or latest edition. 6. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. 1.05 Quality Assurance A. Special Inspection: Notify the Inspection Agency at least 48 hours before inspection will be required; inspection will be required immediately prior to any intended pours or placement of concrete. B. Concrete Work: Concrete work where indicated to be exposed is finished concrete; special care must be taken to provide specified, finished surfaces without gravel pockets, and other defacements. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 30 00 PAGE 2 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE BID SET 4/15/2022 1.06 Submittals A. Records: Maintain record of all concrete placement, indicate exact mix proportions, list time, date, location in the project, weather conditions at the time of placement and the source of the concrete supply. Make records available to the Owner at any time during the course of construction and submit at end of concrete placement phase of project for the purposes of preparing record documents. B. Certificates: Submit certification of previously tested mix designs. C. The Owner will select concrete testing agency as required; the costs of testing and inspection shall be borne by the Contractor as defined in the General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Concrete strength shall be as noted in the Structural notes on the drawings and mix design shall conform to Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, (WSDOT) latest edition. 2.02 Portland Cement A. Use only Type II Portland Cement, per Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, (WSDOT), Section 9-01, latest edition. B. Provide cements obtained from same source or of same brand for concrete in same element or portion of the work. 2.03 Aggregates A. Fine Aggregates Generally, Fine Aggregate Class 1 per Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction (WSDOT), latest edition, 9-03.1(2). Fine Aggregates shall consist of sand or other inert materials, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong, durable particles free from an adherent coating. Fine Aggregate shall be washed thoroughly to remove clay, loam, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious matter. Sieve Size % Passing #4 95 - 100 #6 82 - 98 #8 68 - 86 #16 47 - 65 #30 27 - 42 #50 9 - 20 #100 0 - 7 KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 30 00 PAGE 3 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE BID SET 4/15/2022 #200 (wet) 0 - 2 B. Coarse Aggregates Generally, Coarse Aggregate #5 per, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction (WSDOT), latest edition. Coarse Aggregate shall consist of gravel, crushed stone, or other inert material or combination thereof having hard, strong, and durable pieces free from adherent coatings. Coarse Aggregate shall be washed to thoroughly remove clay, silt, bark, sticks, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious material. Sieve Size % Passing 1-1/2" Square 100 3/4" Square 80 - 100 3/8" Square 10 - 40 #4 0 - 4 2.04 Bonding Agents and Adhesives A. Bonding Agents as required. B. Primers and Sealers: As recommended by the adhesive and bonding agent manufacturers. C. Cementious Materials: Fly ash, ASTM C618 type F, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition shall be 0.75%. Use for all concrete. D. Admixtures 1. Use only one brand of admixtures. 2. Water-Reducing Admixture: Master Builders Pozzolith 300-N, or approved. Chemical admixture conforming to requirements of ASTM C494, Type A. 3. Retarder-Densifying Admixture: Master Builders Retarding Pozzolith, or approved equal; ASTM C494, Type B. 4. Accelerator: Chemical admixture designed to accelerate set on concrete but not corrode reinforcing steel; ASTM C494, Type C. 5. Air Entraining Agent: Conform to requirements of ASTM C260 E. Other Ingredients: Provide other ingredients as indicated or as required by Code or Reference Standards. 2.05 Concrete Mixes A. Quality of Concrete: Concrete mix shall be as noted in the Structural notes on the drawings and shall conform to Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, (WSDOT) latest edition. B. The fly ash content shall not exceed 7% by weight of the total cementitious material. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 30 00 PAGE 4 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE BID SET 4/15/2022 2.06 Mixing Concrete A. Standard Concrete: Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and transport in accordance with ASTM C94. 2.07 Anti-Graffiti Treatment A. Provide anti-graffiti treatment: Provide Sherwin Williams anti-graffiti coating or approved equal. Submit product sample for approval, install per manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Concrete Placement A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete any unfinished formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit and accommodate installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete", and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1.Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. E. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing action, or low temperatures. F. When air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall, below 40 degrees F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 degrees F (27 deg C) at point of placement. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 30 00 PAGE 5 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE BID SET 4/15/2022 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix formulations. G. Hot Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 degrees F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. 4. Use water reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Owner. 3.02 Anti-Graffitti 1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to all exposed concrete, except for flat work; protect adjacent finished surfaces and plants from overspray. 2. Concrete must be allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days, and patching materials, caulking, grout, and sealing materials must be fully cured before application 3.03 Cleaning A. Leave premises clean and free of all residue and debris from work in this section. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 34 50 PAGE 1 CONCRETE FINISHING BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 Reference Standards A. Conform to requirements of the following Reference Standards or as modified and supplemented hereinafter. 1. ACI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301, or latest edition. 2. ACI Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306, or latest edition. 3. ACI Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 605, or latest edition. 4. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Concrete Work: Concrete work where indicated to be exposed is architecturally finished concrete; special care must be taken to provide specified, finished surfaces without gravel pockets, and other defacements. B. Job Mock-up: Provide a mock-up of concrete seat wall. The Owner shall approve the location of the mock up panel. Notify the Owner when a sample concrete seat wall, 36” long x 15” wide x 18” high, formed cast in place sample block is prepared for viewing, so that a meeting can be arranged at the job site with the sandblasting equipment and the operator in attendance. The depth, appearance and quality of sandblasting shall be determined at this meeting. 1.03 Protection A. Protect persons and adjacent materials and finishes from dust, dirt and other surface or physical damage during finishing operations, including materials driven by wind. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Repairs A. Immediately after removal of forms, cut back ties; inspect surfaces for defects; repair or patch defects only after defects are inspected by the Owner and then only with permission. Do all cutting and repair within 48 hours after removal of forms; cure repairs same as new concrete. B. Defective Areas: Where patches are allowed, repair and patch areas; must match surrounding areas in color and texture so as to be indistinguishable after completion, including curing and finishing. Determine mix for color by trial mixes before patching; after initial cure, dress patch or repair area mechanically or by hand for texture match. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 34 50 PAGE 2 CONCRETE FINISHING BID SET 4/15/2022 3.02 Finishes for Formed Surfaces A. Rough Form Finish: Provide for surface of walls and footings adjacent to grade or below grade. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material use with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Light Sandblast Finish: Provide light sandblast finish to all surfaces of seat walls, 75% strength or after concrete has reached a minimum of 2000 psi. Owner shall approve sample sandblasted area. Once the time of sandblasting is determined through testing, all subsequent blasting shall be done at the same concrete age for uniformity of appearance. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Provide for face surface of seat walls adjacent to plaza, and walks. 3.03 Finishes for Unformed Surfaces A. Troweled Finish: Provide for top surfaces or fence footings where exposed. B. Defective Work: Remove and replace when directed by the Owner, surfaces which show excessive shrinkage cracks. 3.04 Curing A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures; maintain minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for necessary hydration time and proper relatively constant temperature for necessary hydration time and proper hardening of concrete. B. Duration of Curing: In addition to overnight initial curing, continue final curing operations until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which the temperature of the air in contact with concrete is above 50 degrees F. equals a total of 7 days; if high-early strength concrete has been used, continue final curing operation for 3 days total calculated as stated above. Take care to prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period. If early removal of forms is approved and forms are removed during the curing period apply one of the curing methods specified in Reference Standards (most recent edition) and continue curing for the remainder of the required curing period. 3.05 Inspection A. Contractor shall notify Owner that they are starting concrete finish repair work at least 48 hours prior to the beginning of work. 3.06 3.06 Cleaning A. Leave premises clean and free of all residue and debris from work in this section. KHERSON PARK SECTION 03 34 50 PAGE 3 CONCRETE FINISHING BID SET 4/15/2022 END OF SECTION 03 34 50 KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 1 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1. DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all material, labor, services and related items required to complete masonry unit paving work indicated on drawings and/or specifications. The items of work to be performed shall include but are not necessarily limited to: subgrade preparation, base material, masonry unit paving, sealer application, and edging. 1.2. REFERENCES A. This section references the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C 136, Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate. c. C 140, Sampling and Testing Masonry Units. d. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. e. C 936, Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. f. C 979, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. g. D 698, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop. D 1557, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop. h. D 2940, Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of granite or brick pavers for a minimum of three (3) years. B. Installation shall be by a contractor and crew with at least one (1) year of experience in placing granite and brick on projects of similar nature or dollar cost. C. Installation Contractor shall conform to all local and state licensing and bonding requirements. D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, type, and variety of unit pavers from a single source. Materials shall be available and be consistent in quality, appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of Work. KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 2 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 E. Prior to commencing the work of this Section, verify the accuracy of layout and grading. Verify that all subgrade and base course aggregate conditions are as specified. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies and coordinate the correction of those discrepancies with other trades as necessary. 1.4. SUBMITTALS A. Procedures to be used in the construction under this Section with regard to the division of labor and the responsibilities of the Contractor and all sub-contractors involved Submit product drawings and data. B. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” paragraph to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of landscape architects and engineers. C. Submit full size sample sets of paving units to indicate color and shape selections. Color will be selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s available colors. D. Submit sieve analysis for grading of bedding and joint sand. E. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit requirements to ASTM C 936. F. Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of paving joints to fixtures and project formed details. 1.5. MOCK-UPS A. Install a 7 ft. x 7 ft. (2 m x 2 m) paver area as described in Article 3.6. This area will be used to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), color(s), and texture of the job. This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged. 1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. B. Protect unit pavers and aggregate during storage and construction against soilage or contamination from earth and other materials. C. Builder’s Sand shall be covered with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal by wind. The covering shall be secured in place. 1.7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall. B. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials. C. Do not install frozen sand. KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 3 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 D. Protect previous paver subgrade areas from accumulation of fine sediments. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1. CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS (PERVIOUS AND IMPERVIOUS AREAS): A. Concrete Unit pavers shall be Stepstone Hexagonal paver or approved equal. B. Composition & Materials Hexagonal Pavers shall be hand-made, wet-cast from 5000 PSI hard rock concrete using Type III cement. C. Hexagonal Pavers sizes shall be. 16”x 2” thickness. Corner and Starter shall be used as required. D. Finish: Hexagonal Pavers finish shall be light sandblast E. Pavers shall meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C936, Standard Specification for Concrete Units Pavers: 1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). 2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. F. Material shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. G. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid homogeneous matrix in the produced unit. H. Colors shall be as specified on the plans. 2.2. VISUAL INSPECTION A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. B. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for rejection. KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 4 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 2.3. SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Manufacturer shall provide access to lots ready for delivery to the Engineer or his authorized representative for testing in accordance with ASTM 936-82 for sampling of material prior to commencement of paver placement. B. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) years testing backup data showing manufactured products that meet and exceed ASTM 936-82 when tested in compliance with ASTM C-140. C. Sampling shall be random with a minimum of five (5) specimens per 4,000 sq. ft. per product shape and size with repeated samples taken every additional 2,000 sq. ft. or a fraction thereof. D. Test units in accordance with ASTM for compressive strength, absorption and dimensional tolerance. A minimum of three (3) specimens per test required for an average value. Testing of full units is required. 2.4. REJECTION A. In the event the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may sort it and new test units shall be selected at random by the Engineer from the retained lot and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second set of test units fails to conform to the specified requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. 2.5. EXPENSE OF TESTS A. The expense of testing shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Inspection by Project Engineer for acceptance shall be borne by the City. 2.6. EDGE RESTRAINT MATERIAL A. Concrete edging and paving as shown on the plans. 2.7. JOINT FILL PERVIOUS PAVER AREAS A. Paver joint or opening fill aggregate shall use the No. 8 material as described below in the table. Smaller aggregates (Nos. 8, 9, or 10 per ASTM D448) may be substituted if required to fill narrower joints or openings. B. Aggregates shall also meet the following criteria: 1. Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40 per ASTM C131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D1883. Do not use rounded river gravel. 2. All stone materials shall be washed with less than 2% passing the No. 200 sieve. Table 1 Grading Requirements for ASTM No. 8 Bedding and Joint/Opening Filler KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 5 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 Sieve Size Percent Passing 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) 100 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 85 to 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 10 to 30 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 0 to 10 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 0 to 5 2.8. BEDDING FILL PERVIOUS PAVER AREAS A. Bedding and joint stone shall be clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter. B. Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40 per ASTM C 131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883. C. Do not use rounded river gravel. D. All stone materials shall be washed with less than 1% passing the No. 200 sieve. E. Bedding shall conform to ASTM D 448 gradation as shown in Table 1 above. 2.9. BASE FOR PERVIOUS PAVER AREAS A. No. 57 Stone: Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40 per ASTM C 131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883. B. Do not use rounded river gravel. C. All stone materials shall be washed with less than 1% passing the No. 200 sieve. D. Base shall conform to ASTM D 448 gradation as shown in Table 2. Table 2 Grading Requirements for ASTM No. 57 Stone Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 1/2 inch (37.5 mm) 100 1 inch (25 mm) 95 to 100 1/2 (12.5 mm) 25 to 60 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0 to 10 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 0 to 5 2.1. SUBBASE FOR PERVIOUS PAVER AREAS A. No. 2 Stone: Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40 per ASTM C 131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883. KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 6 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 B. Do not use rounded river gravel. C. All stone materials shall be washed with less than 1% passing the No. 200 sieve. D. Base and subbase shall conform to ASTM D 448 gradation as shown in Table 2 and 3 below. Table 3 Grading Requirements for ASTM No. 2 Stone Sieve Size Percent Passing 3” inch 100 2 1/2” inch 90 to 100 2” inch 35-70 1” inch 0-15 ¾” 0 to 5 2.2. JOINT FILL IMPERVIOUS PAVER AREAS A. Provide polymeric joint sand as follows: B. Polymeric sand shall be Polymeric Sand HP as manufactured by Techniseal, or approved equal. C. Polymeric sand shall be comprised of graded sand (ASTM C 144) and polymer binders in sealed and labeled containers. D. Provide color of polymeric sand to best match colors of paver for each paving pattern. E. Join Sand Material Requirements: Conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as shown with modifications in Table 1 below: TABLE 1 GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR JOINT SAND ASTM C 144 Sieve Size ASTM C 144 Natural Sand Percent Passing ASTM C 144 Manufactured Sand Percent Passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 100 No. 8 (2.35 mm) 95 to 100 95 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 to 100 70 to 100 No. 30 (0.600 mm) 40 to 75 40 to 100 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 35 20 to 40 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 15 10 to 25 No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0 to 1 0 to 10 KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 7 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 2.3. BEDDING FILL IMPERVIOUS PAVER AREAS A. Bedding and joint sand shall be clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter. The sand shall be natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Limestone screenings or stone dust shall not be used. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sands shall be as hard as practically available. B. Grading of sand samples for the bedding course and joints shall be done according to ASTM C 136. Under no circumstances should masonry mortar sand, limestone screenings or stone dust be used as a leveling course. C. The bedding sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 85 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (600 µm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (300 µm) 10 to 30 No. 100 (150 µm) 2 to 10 2.4. BASE FOR IMPERVIOUS PAVER AREAS A. Base material for impervious paver areas shall be base course as specified in Division 32 13 00 Concrete paving. KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 8 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 2.5. SEALER FOR PAVERS A. As specified in concrete section 32 13 00. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. The Contractor shall examine surfaces indicated to receive paving for compliance with requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit pavers for pervious and impervious areas. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Prior to excavation, the area to receive unit pavers shall be staked and grade elevation established to ensure proper grades. B. Compaction of the soil subgrade to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 1557. The Contractor shall conduct density tests as required by the Engineer for inspection and acceptance of subgrade preparation, elevations, and for conformance to specifications. C. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the specifications. D. Aggregate base materials shall conform to ASTM D 2940. Compaction shall not be less than 98% Modified Proctor Density in accordance with ASTM D 1557. The aggregate base shall be spread and compacted in uniform layers not exceeding 6 in. (150 mm) thickness. The contractor shall assure conformance to specifications of base preparation, surface tolerances, and elevations for inspection and acceptance by the Project Engineer. The Contractor shall conduct and pay for random density tests as required by the Engineer to verify conformance. E. The Contractor shall employ mechanical tampers for compaction of soil subgrade and aggregate base around lamp standards, utility structures, edges, curbs, and other protrusions. In areas not accessible to roller compaction equipment, compact to specified density with mechanical tampers. F. Verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter area to be paved. G. Verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed loads. 3.2. PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Immediately following excavation, the area should be inspected to be sure that no unacceptable subbase material is present. Remove all organic material, roots, oversize rocks or debris remaining in the soil. Wet areas must be drained or stabilized with crushed rock. KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 9 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 B. Proof roll prepared subgrade surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Do not proceed with installation until deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase for unit pavers. Compact subgrade to at least to manufacturer recommendation for permeable paver product. 3.3. EDGE RESTRAINT INSTALLATION A. Install concrete band edge restraint per the Plans & Specifications. 3.4. LEVELING COURSE PLACEMENT A. For Pervious Paver area: Place No 8 aggregate leveling course over compacted base material to a depth shown on drawings, taking care that the moisture content remains constant, and the density is loose and constant until permeable unit pavers are set and compacted. Do not use frozen or No.8 aggregate for leveling. Do not use No. 8 aggregate to fill in irregularities in the base material; base material must be added and compacted. B. Screed No.8 aggregates with a straight, true strike board. Once No. 8 aggregate has been screeded, it shall not be disturbed, or the procedure shall be repeated. C. For Impervious Paver area: Place bedding leveling course over compacted base material to a depth shown on drawings, taking care that the moisture content remains constant, and the density is loose and constant until unit pavers are set and compacted. Do not use frozen or saturated sand for leveling. Do not use sand to fill in irregularities in the base material; base material must be added and compacted. D. Screed sand with a straight, true strike board. Once sand has been screeded, it shall not be disturbed, or the procedure shall be repeated. 3.5. CONCRETE UNIT PAVER INSTALLATION A. Lay the pavers in the pattern(s) as shown on the Plans. Random pattern shall mean no diagonal or repeat pattern visually detectable. Maintain curved, plumb & true pattern lines with the use of staking and other means. Place pavers with specified joints, being careful not to disturb the leveling course. B. The joints between pavers shall be as shown on plans. To achieve the arc forms some pavers may need to be cut. Units shall be cut with a masonry saw no smaller than one-third of a whole paver along pavement edges. C. Once an area is installed, vibrate the pavers into the base materials with a plate vibrator capable of a 3,500-to-5,000-pound compaction force. Perform at least 3 passes across paving with the vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain. KHERSON PARK 04 22 00 – PAGE 10 MASONRY UNIT PAVER BID SET 4/15/2022 2. Before ending each day’s work, fully compact installed concrete pavers within 3 feet of the laying face. Cover the open layers with nonstaining plastic sheets overlapped 4 feet on each side of laying face to protect it from rain. D. For Pervious Paver Area: The pavers shall be compacted and No 8 Aggregate, per manufacturer’s recommendation, shall be swept into the joints until the joints are full, approximately two or three passes with the compactor. Do not compact within 3-feet of the unrestrained edges of the paving units. E. For Impervious Paver Area: The pavers shall be compacted and polymeric joint sand, per manufacturer’s recommendation, shall be swept into the joints until the joints are full, approximately two or three passes with the compactor. Do not compact within 3-feet of the unrestrained edges of the paving units. F. Final Surfacing: The final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 3/8 inch under a 10 feet long straight edge. The top surface of the pavers shall be 1/8 to 1/4 inch above the final elevations and above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels to compensate for possible minor settling. G. For Pervious Paver Area: The additional application of No. 8 aggregate to paver joints shall be accomplished by contractor, as necessary and/or as requested by the Owner for a period of 90 days after completion of work without additional expense to the Owner. Work shall be guaranteed for one year after final project approval. H. For Impervious Paver Area: The additional application of polymeric sand to paver joints shall be accomplished by contractor, as necessary and/or as requested by the Owner for a period of 90 days after completion of work without additional expense to the Owner. Work shall be guaranteed for one year after final project approval. 3.6. SEALER APPLICATION A. All pavers shall be cleaned prior to sealing. Apply paver sealer per manufacturer’s instructions. Apply two coats of sealer to all pavers, per manufacturer’s instructions. 3.7. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After removal of excess sand, check final elevations for conformance to the Plans and Specifications. B. Repair and replace defective unit pavers which are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged, or as directed by Engineer. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in the same manner as original units, with same joint treatment to eliminate evidence of replacement. C. Protect paving from damage until Physical Completion. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least fourteen (14) days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. END OF SECTION 04 22 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 1 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. This Section includes specifications for but is not limited to all miscellaneous shop- fabricated ferrous metal, and aluminum work indicated or otherwise required to complete the Work, except as otherwise indicated. Work in this Section includes delegated engineering design for individual components of products where structural loads will exist. B. Shop-fabricated steel, aluminum, and other miscellaneous metal items, including: 1. Loose bearing and leveling plates 2. Miscellaneous steel trim, embeds, tabs, ties, and anchor plates for Work provided on other Sections. 3. Screen wall, including framing, support members and connections. 4. Aluminum truss and attachments. 5. Projector Pole and attachments. 1.2 REFERENCES A. This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) a. ASTM A 27/A 27M – Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application b. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. c. ASTM A 47/A 47M – Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings d. ASTM A 48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. e. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless f. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. g. ASTM A 276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. h. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. i. ASTM A501 – Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. j. ASTM A572 – Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Allow Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 2 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 k. ASTM A615 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. l. ASTM A 653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. m. ASTM B 680-80 - Standard Method for Seal Quality of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum by Acid Dissolution n. ASTM A992 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes o. ASTM A1008 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. p. ASTM A 1101 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. q. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. r. ASTM D 4894 - Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials. s. ASTM D 4895 - Standard Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Resin Produced from Dispersion. 2. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code – Steel b. AWS D1.2 – Structural Welding Code - Aluminum c. AWS D1.6 – Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel 3. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) a. AAMA 2605 – Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 4. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) a. SSPC-SP32 – Cold-Tar Emulsion Coating 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on manufactured products; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. B. Bearing Material and Assemblies: Provide manufacturer’s data demonstrating conformance with these Specifications. Provide manufacturer’s written directions for fabricating, shipping, storing and protecting bearing assemblies. KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 3 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 C. The submission of metal product data is to be in conjunction with the painting and coating or high-performance coating submittals that are to be used to paint or coat the metal. Confirm that the shop-applied steel primer is compatible with the intermediate coat and final paint coats. This submittal will not be considered complete and acceptable if either product is not compatible with the other. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections. 1.Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. E. Certifications: 1.Welders and welding procedures: Submit certifications for welders. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator: Use a company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this Section, with a minimum of five years of documented experience. B. Installer: Use a company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with a minimum of four years of experience. C. Design Metal Fabrications under the direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in the design of this Work and licensed in the State of Washington. Include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the engineer. D. Mock-ups: 1.Screen Walls: a.Install a minimum of 1 complete unit for acceptance by Resident Engineer. Include all typical materials, finishes, connections, and fasteners. b.Maintain area for review and inspection during construction. c.Mock-up installation can remain intact as part of the final installation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction work that metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate the fabrication, delivery, and installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. 1.Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate construction with the Work of other trades to ensure that actual KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 4 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for fitting and trimming. 1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle manufactured items in compliance with the manufacturer’s written instructions PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces 1. For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. B. Steel 1. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. Primed and painted at exterior locations, see 09 90 00 paintings and coatings. 2. Steel Columns, Plates, and Shapes: ASTM A36/A-36M. Primed and painted at exterior locations. See 09 90 00 paintings and coatings. 3. Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786 4. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM A 510 5. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. Primed and painted in exterior locations, see 09 90 00 paintings and coatings. 6. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality, cold-rolled sheet in accordance with ASTM A 366. Hot-rolled sheet in accordance with ASTM A 569. 7. Galvanized Steel Sheet: a. Structural Quality: ASTM A 446, Grade A with G90 coating unless noted otherwise b. Commercial Quality: ASTM A 526, G90 coating unless noted otherwise 8. Plates: ASTM A 283. 9. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40 (typical), black finish at interior locations. 10. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40 (typical), galvanized finish at exterior locations. KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 5 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 11. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48 Class 30 12. Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 13. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed of the same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 14. Concrete inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron (ASTM A 47) or cast steel (ASTM A 27). Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required, hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153. 15. Fasteners: As indicated and specified herein. 16. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. 17. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials welded 18. Aluminum Design Manual C. Stainless Steel 1. Bar Stock: ASTM A 276, Type 316. Type 316 Active for exterior applications. 2. Plate: ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 316 Type 316 active for exterior applications. 3. Rolled Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316. Type 316 Active for exterior applications. 4. Pipes: ASTM A 312, Type 316. 5. Finishes: All exposed stainless steel to be No. 4: Random orbital finish. D. Aluminum 1. All Aluminum: 6061-T6, Minimum Yield Stress Fy = 35 Ksi. 2. Anodized architectural aluminum for exterior applications. E. Grout and Anchoring Cement 1. Non-shrink-non-metallic Grout: Specified in Section 03 62 00, Non-Shrink Grouting. 2. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Use factory prepackaged, non-shrink, non- staining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at the project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without the need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and recommended for exterior use by manufacturer. a. Interior Anchoring Cement: 1) Bonsal Anchor Cement, W. R. Bonsal Co. 2) Por Rok, Minwax Construction Products Division 3) Thorogrip, Thoro Systems Products. b. Erosion Resistant Anchoring Cement: KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 6 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 1) Bonsal Anchor Cement, W. R. Bonsal Co. 2) Super Por Rok. Minwax Construction Products Division 3) Thorogrip, Thoro Systems Products. F. Fasteners 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required. 2. Provide stainless steel fasteners for use at exterior Screen Walls. 3. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type ASTM A 307 Grade A. 4. Lag Bolts: Square Head type: FS FF-B-561. 5. Spider brackets: Stainless steel, by 3Form or approved equal 6. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92 7. Wood Screws: Flathead carbon steel FS FF-S-111 8. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel FS FF W 92 9. Neoprene Washers: Round, neoprene, thickness as required for separation of dissimilar materials 10. Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors to concrete shall meet the requirements as noted in structural drawings. G. Concrete Fill and Reinforcing 1. Comply with Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for normal-weight ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch. 2. Non-slip aggregate finishes: Use factory graded, packaged material containing fused aluminum oxide grits or crushed emery as abrasive aggregate; rust-proof and non- glazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials. 3. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60. Reinforcing bars shall meet the requirements of Section 03 20 00. H. Fabricated Items. 1. Screen Walls: a. Steel columns, rails, tee sections, and angle frame: per Landscape and Structural Contract Drawings. b. Infill Panels: see Landscape Contract Drawings and Section 2. Other fabricated items as required or detailed on Drawings: See Schedule at the end of this Section. I. Cold-Formed Channel 1. Material: ASTM A 1101 SS Grade 33 or ASTM A 653 SS, Grade 33, mill galvanized KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 7 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 in conformance with coating designation G90. 2. Shape: 1 5/8” x 1 5/8” x 12 gauge. J. Bearing Materials 1. PTFE: ASTM D 4894 or ASTM D 4895, 100% virgin (unfilled) polytetrafluoroethylene 2. Elastomeric Bearing Pad: MIL-C-882E 3. Stainless Steel: Type 316 ASTM A 167 or A 264 4. Mounting Plates: ASTM A 36 5. Neoprene Bearing Pad: ASTM D 4014, Shore A Durometer hardness of 70 2.2 FABRICATION A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than sizes required to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed Work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight, sharp edges. C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 degrees F D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 8 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. 5. On all steel members exposed to the exterior, weld all joints and seams continuously to prevent moisture penetration of joints or seams. H. Fit and shop assemble items in the largest practical sections for delivery to the site. Minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain the structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. I. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. J. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. K. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to a small uniform radius. L. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with the component’s design, except where expressly noted otherwise. M. Supply components required for the anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of the same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. N. Fabrication Tolerances 1. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. 2. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. 3. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. 4. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. 5. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. 2.3 BEARING ASSEMBLIES A. PTFE: Bond to the recessed mounting plate in conformance with the manufacturer’s written directions. B. Stainless Steel: Provide an 8 microinch RMS finish on the face in contact with PTFE. Bond to mounting plate in conformance with manufacturer’s written directions. C. Elastomeric Bearing Pad: Bond to mounting plates in conformance with manufacturer’s written directions. D. Finish: Finish bearing assemblies in conformance with the manufacturer’s written directions. 2.4 FINISHES A. Steel: KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 9 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 1.Hot-dip galvanize all steel fabrications not scheduled for a paint finish unless noted otherwise. 2.As specified in Section 09 90 00, a Primer paint finish is required on all other steel surfaces. 3.Bituminous paint: Use cold-applied asphalt mastic that complies with SSPC-Paint 32 except containing no asbestos fibers. B. Aluminum: A natural matte anodized aluminum with an Architectural Class I finish that meets AAMA 611-12 standards for high performance anodic finishes [min 18-micron film thickness] and can be used in exterior applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work. 1.Check elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after correcting unsatisfactory conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items that must be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.3 ERECTION A. Tolerances 1.Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative 2.Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 3.Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch in 12 feet. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 10 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connections as required. C. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot dip galvanized after fabrication and intended for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. G. Coat concealed aluminum, steel and stainless-steel surfaces that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. H. Provide for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. I. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of all bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve the bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of bearing plates. 1. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use non-metallic non-shrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. J. Overhead supports: Anchor supports securely to and rigidly brace from the overhead building structure. K. Provide for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. KHERSON PARK SECTION 05 50 00 PAGE 11 METAL FABRICATIONS BID SET 4/15/2022 L. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. M. Bearing Assemblies: 1. Install bearing assemblies in conformance with the manufacturer’s written directions. 2. Protect bearing assemblies until all Work is complete in conformance with the manufacturer’s written directions. N. Obtain written approval from Resident Engineer before site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.6 CLEANING A. After erection, clean field welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop-primed or galvanized, in accordance with AWS recommendations and as specified in 2.2 Fabrication, herein. 3.7 SCHEDULES A. The following list of metal fabrications and finishes are examples found in this Section: B. Steel columns, channels, rails, angles, projector pole, gussets, mounting plate, base plate and tee-sections: Shop primed and painted finish. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 08 84 00 PAGE 1 PLASTIC GLAZING BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Polycarbonate Panel - Enhanced UV-resistant laminated polycarbonate plastic glazing and connection system as part of screenwall fabrication. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z 97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings — Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. B. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics. C. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. D. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. E. ASTM D 1929 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics. F. ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Building and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials H. CAN/ULC 102.2 - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings, and Miscellaneous Materials and Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data; including product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified performance requirements. B. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent 3rd party testing agency indication each type and class of panel system complies with the project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project. KHERSON PARK SECTION 08 84 00 PAGE 2 PLASTIC GLAZING BID SET 4/15/2022 1. Test reports required are: a. Rate of Burning (ASTM D 635) b. Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929) c. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (ASTM E 84) d. Impact Strength (ASTM D 3763) e. Safety Glazing and Impact Strength (ANSI Z97.1-2004) C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Submit minimum 2-inch by 2-inch samples. Indicate full color. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Submit a minimum 4-inch by 4-inch sample for each type and color of solid plastic fabrication. E. Mockups: 1. Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 2. Build a temporary mockup of color Plastic Fabrication with digital inlay image as required for Screen Wall. 3. Include lighting with screen wall mockup. F. Transmit: Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including care, repair, and cleaning instructions. Include in Project closeout documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Materials and systems shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least five (5) consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactory used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope, and location. 2. Manufactured panels must be produced from a minimum of 40 percent post-industrial recycled content. 3. Manufacturers must have documented training and qualification programs for the fabrication and installation of plastic fabrications. KHERSON PARK SECTION 08 84 00 PAGE 3 PLASTIC GLAZING BID SET 4/15/2022 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver Plastic Fabrication, systems, and specified items in the manufacturer's standard protective masking. B. Store materials in a flat orientation in a dry place not exposed to exterior elements. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. D. Before installing Plastic Fabrications, permit them to reach room temperature. E. Do not deliver Plastic Fabrications, systems, components, and accessories to the Project site until areas are ready for installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Plastic Fabrications: Manufacturer's standard form agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in material or workmanship within the specified warranty period. B. Warranty Period: Five years from ship date. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under provisions of the Contract Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrently with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 3form, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah, USA / telephone 801-649-2500 http://www.3-form.com or approved equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Product: 3form Koda XT produced from polycarbonate sheet 1. Engineered polycarbonate 2. Sheet Size: Maximum 4' x 10' 3. Thickness: Minimum 1/2" KHERSON PARK SECTION 08 84 00 PAGE 4 PLASTIC GLAZING BID SET 4/15/2022 4. Color: clear (Crystal Clear. Clear, uncolored Koda XT.) 5. Finish: Sandstone, both sides. 6. The design of Plastic Glazing is based on Koda XT as provided by 3form, Inc. Products from other manufacturers, must be approved by the Owner prior to bidding in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. 7. Digital layup: the digital print interlayer will be encapsulated in the middle of two lites of resin with a diffusion layer occurring behind, as specified by manufacturer. 8. Owner will provide high resolution digital print. B. Sheet Minimum Performance Attributes: 1. Flame spread (ASTM D 635). The material must attain CC1Rating for a nominal thickness of 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) and greater. 2. Self-Ignition Temperature (ASTM D 1929). The material must have a Self-Ignition Temperature greater than 650°F. 3. Flame Spread and Smoke developed testing (ASTM E 84-03). The material must be able to meet a level of Class B (Flame spread 26-75 and smoke less than 450) at a thickness of 1/4". 4. Impact Strength. Minimum impact strength test as measured by ASTM D 3763 of 20 ft. lbs. (for durability, shipping, installation, and use). 5. Safety Glazing. The material must attain a Class A impact rating in accordance with ANSI Z97.1-2004. C. Interlayer Materials: Must be compatible with polycarbonates and bonding process to create a monolithic sheet of material when complete. Bonding process must ensure moisture cannot penetrate the layers. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate Plastic Fabrications to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes, profiles, and other characteristics are indicated on the drawings. B. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for fabrication. C. Machining: Acceptable means of machining are listed below. Ensure that material is not chipped or warped by machining operations. 1. Sawing: Select equipment and blades suitable for the type of cut required. 2. Drilling: Use drills specifically designed for use with plastic products. 3. Milling: Climb cut where possible. 4. Routing 5. Tapping KHERSON PARK SECTION 08 84 00 PAGE 5 PLASTIC GLAZING BID SET 4/15/2022 D. Forming: Form products to shapes indicated using the appropriate method listed below. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Cold Bending 2. Hot Bending E. Laminating: Laminate to substrates indicated using adhesives and techniques recommended by the manufacturer. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets shall be as per the manufacturer's standards to meet performance criteria. B. Fasteners shall be per the manufacturer's standards to meet performance requirements. C. Spider bracket single arm and double arm attachment, per the manufacturer's standards to meet performance requirements 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape required for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaner: Type recommended by the manufacturer. C. Anti-graffiti: Type recommended by the manufacturer. D. Fasteners: Use screws, washers, and spacers designed specifically for plastics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of Plastic Fabrications will occur, with the Installer present, for compliance with the manufacturer's requirements. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with requirements specified. 3.2 INSTALLATION KHERSON PARK SECTION 08 84 00 PAGE 6 PLASTIC GLAZING BID SET 4/15/2022 A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for the installation of Plastic Fabrications. B. Manufacturer's shop is to fabricate items to the greatest degree possible. C. Utilize all fasteners recommended by the manufacturer for the type of installation indicated. Material that is chipped, warped, hazed, or discolored due to installation or fabrication methods will be rejected. D. Holes and fasteners must allow the panel to expand and contract as per the manufacturer’s requirements. E. Where panels overlap as shown in the drawings, join panels per manufacturer recommendation. F. Install components plumb, level, and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect surfaces from damage until the date of substantial completion. Repair work, or replace damaged work, which cannot be repaired to Resident Engineer’s satisfaction. END OF SECTION 08 84 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 09 90 00 PAGE 1 PAINTINGS AND COATINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. 1.02 Reference Standards A. Conform with requirements of the following Reference Standards or as modified and supplemented hereinafter. 1.ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms in Relation to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. 2.Section 6-07 Painting, WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edition. 3.Section 8-22, Pavement Marking, WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edition. 4. Section 9-08, Paints, WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edition. 1.03 Definitions A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.04 Quality Assurance KHERSON PARK SECTION 09 90 00 PAGE 2 PAINTINGS AND COATINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. 1.05 Submittals A. Provide product data on all finishing products for approval of Engineer. B. Submit two samples 12” x 12” in size illustrating each of the colors selected for the work. 1.06 Field Samples A. Provide field samples where directed. 1.07 Delivery, Storage and Handling A. Deliver, store, and protect products following manufacturer’s directions. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer’s name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. E. Provide Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all products used on site. 1.08 Environmental Requirements KHERSON PARK SECTION 09 90 00 PAGE 3 PAINTINGS AND COATINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers - Paint and Other Coating Products A. Parker, Preservative, Miller, Daly’s, or approved equal; use only professional quality paint systems. 2.02 Materials A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Materials to be lead free. D. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, or commercial quality. 2.03 Finishes A. Metal picnic table supports 1. Touch up galvanizing or rust proofing 2. One coat zinc chromate primer 3. Two coats alkyd enamel, or color to match owner supplied picnic table. KHERSON PARK SECTION 09 90 00 PAGE 4 PAINTINGS AND COATINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 2.04 Primers and Undercoats – (Screenwall metal frame post and horizontal member, projection pole, base plates, gusset, and mounting plates) A. Factory Applied Anti-Corrosive Metal Primer (Includes Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metals): ICI Devoe Devflex 4020 PF DTM, Tnemec “Uni-Bond DF” “Series 115”, or approved equal acrylic, rust-inhibitive primer recommended by manufacturer for use on both ferrous and non-ferrous metals. 1. VOC limit: 91 g/l. 2. Dry Film Thickness DFT: 2.2 – 3.5 mils. 3. Adhesion: Minimum rating of 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Method B on all of the following surfaces: a. Steel prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-10. b. Aluminum prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-1. c. Galvanized steel prepared in accordance with SSPC SP-1. 2.05 Intermediate and Finish Coats - (Screenwall metal frame Post and horizontal member projection pole, base plates, gusset, and mounting plates) A. High-Performance Acrylic Semi-Gloss 1. Acceptable products include: a. Kelly Moore “Dura Poxy+ Acrylic Enamel” 1685. b. Benjamin Moore “Moorcraft Super-Spec 100 Percent Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel” 281. c. ICI Devoe "Devflex" 4205. d. Tnemec "Enduratone" Series 1029. e. Or approved equal 2. VOC limit: 20 g/l (with colorants). 3. Dry Film Thickness DFM: 1.4 mils. KHERSON PARK SECTION 09 90 00 PAGE 5 PAINTINGS AND COATINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 3. EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Beginning of application means approval of substrate. 3.02 Preparation A. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. B. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. C. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. 3.03 Protection A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.04 Application KHERSON PARK SECTION 09 90 00 PAGE 6 PAINTINGS AND COATINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 3.05 Cleaning A. As work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed or spattered. B. During progress of work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 Schedule - Exterior Surfaces A. Steel - Shop Primed (Picnic table supports and Screen Wall, Projection pole – mounting plate and gussets) 1. Touch-up with zinc rich primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, black semi-gloss. 3. Picnic table supports: Two coats alkyd enamel, color to match owner supplied picnic table. END OF SECTION 09 90 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 11 68 13 PAGE 1 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to install the play equipment and structures as indicated on the drawings or as approved and specified herein. Said work shall include any incidentals required to provide a finished job. B. The Owner has in storage play equipment pieces that will be installed as part of this project. The contractor will be responsible for coordinating the delivery of the item with the Owner to the project site. The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required to install the Owner provided play equipment as shown on the drawings. Said work shall include any incidentals required to provide a finished job. C. Owner provided play equipment (See Appendix for more information): 1.Lunar Lander D. Play Equipment is as follows: 1.Lunar Lander – by Cre8Play 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 12 93 00 – Site Furnishings Section 32 18 16.13 – Synthetic Safety Surfacing – Poured-in-Place EPDM Appendix: Lunar Lander Material Specification Drawing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to appendix for Owner provided product information. B. Construction Plans and Details: The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and manufacturer for: product delivery, a scaled drawing of the design, erection drawings, a dimensioned plan of the proposed layout, a list of components, color charts, installation details and technical data for correct assembly of all components, clamp details, and anchoring details. C. Owner and Manufacturer Provided Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating playground equipment installation with playground surfacing systems. Show playground equipment locations and extent of playground surfacing systems. KHERSON PARK SECTION 11 68 13 PAGE 2 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 1. Show equipment use zones and fall heights as defined in ASTM F 1487. 2. Show Critical Height of playground surfacing systems as defined in CPSC No. 325. D. Samples: For each exposed finish. E. Product test reports. F. Maintenance data. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor and Owner shall coordinate information on the manufacturer's guarantee with the submittals. 1.05 SAFETY GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS A. All materials and equipment shall conform to the current issue of the "Handbook for Public Playground Safety" published by the Consumer Product Safety Commission (C.P.S.C.) and ASTM F1487-93. The manufacturer will be responsible for correcting any product violations of the C.P.S.C. Guidelines and ASTM F1487-93, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, should they be found after installation. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor installing the play equipment and structures must be experienced in the installation of play equipment with the personnel, facilities, and equipment adequate for the work specified. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm whose playground equipment components have been certified by IPEMA's "3rd Party Certification" service. 1. Provide only playground equipment and play structure components bearing the IPEMA Certification Seal. C. Standards and Guidelines: Provide playground equipment complying with or exceeding requirements in the following: 1. ASTM F 1487. 2. CPSC No. 325, "Handbook for Public Playground Safety." 3. ADA – Current American with Disabilities Act. 4. Label play structures with warning label and manufacturer's identification per ASTM F 1487. D. Playground Equipment Inventory: Playground equipment manufacturer’s representative shall be present at time of product delivery to inspect and inventory all parts delivered. Representative shall be responsible for obtaining and/or replacing missing and damaged parts prior to product installation. KHERSON PARK SECTION 11 68 13 PAGE 3 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Lunar Lander is provided by the Owner and shall be installed by the contractor. Coordinate with the Owner for pick up and delivery to the site. 2.02 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT A. Owner provided Lunar Lander as Manufactured by Cre8Play and supplied by Northwest Playground. FINISHES B. Polyester Coating The polyester coating shall be uniformly applied by the electrostatic method to a thickness of three to five mils. Promptly after application of the powder, the coating shall be oven- cured at 400 degrees Fahrenheit. The color(s) of the polyester coating shall be as selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's standard and/or custom color selection charts. C. Vinyl The vinyl coating shall be oven-cured poly-vinyl chloride plasticsol with a minimum thickness of 1/8". The coating shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and mold resistors. The color(s) of the vinyl-coating shall be as selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard and/or custom color selection charts. D. Galvanized Finish All components calling for a galvanized finish shall be hot-dipped galvanized to the manufacturer's standard after fabrication. All galvanized surfaces shall be free of burs, splinters, and sharp edges. 2.03 ADDITIONAL HARDWARE A. Additional hardware shall be provided in sufficient quantity to complete assembly of the play equipment. All hardware shall be non-ferrous or if ferrous material is used shall be galvanized, electrostatic zinc plated, or polyester powder coated in accordance with the manufacturer's standard. 2.04 POSTS A. Shall be installed with Concrete Footings per manufacturer’s recommendation and as shown on the drawings. KHERSON PARK SECTION 11 68 13 PAGE 4 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Do not proceed until conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work have been satisfactorily corrected and thus meet the manufacturer's instructions. B. Beginning work constitutes your acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. C. Arrange for playground equipment manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect playground and playground equipment and components during installation and at final completion and to certify compliance with the following requirements. Notify Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of final inspection. 1.ASTM F 1487. 2.CPSC No. 325. D. Following Owner inspection of the completed play equipment, provide repairs as necessary to meet or exceed the Owners requirement for fit and finish and the specifications and guidelines as referenced in Safety Guidelines and Standards, above. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Conform strictly to manufacturer's instructions using all appropriate accessories as required. B. Install Playground equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s directions. C. Do not begin installation before final grading required for placing protective surfacing is completed. D. Contractor is responsible for concrete footings, and running electrical connection to the Lunar Lander, see electrical plans. E. Contractor shall coordinate sequencing and timing of the installation of footings, electrical connections and associated anchors for the Lunar Lander. F. Anchor playground equipment securely, positioned at locations and elevations indicated on Shop Drawings. G. Post and Footing Excavation: Excavate holes for posts and footings in firm, undisturbed or compacted subgrade soil. Level bearing surfaces with Post Hole Backfill to required elevation. H. Post Setting: Set main-frame equipment posts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Verify that posts are set plumb or at the correct angle and are aligned and at KHERSON PARK SECTION 11 68 13 PAGE 5 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT BID SET 4/15/2022 the correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. I. Concrete Footings: Smooth top, and shape to shed water. Top of footings shall be coordinated with poured in place safety surfacing to ensure adequate cover of the safety surfacing. See drawings. J. Adjust movable playground equipment components to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free from binding, warp, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. 3.03 PROTECTION A. During construction of the play equipment structure, provide PVC Web Fence material in sufficient quantities and wrap the structure to prevent public access onto the equipment. Maintain the fencing wrap after completion of the play equipment installation through completion of the project. END OF SECTION 11 68 13 KHERSON PARK SECTION 12 93 00 – PAGE 1 SITE FURNISHINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Provide all labor, materials and equipment to furnish and install the following: 1. Picnic Tables (provided by Owner) 2. Trash Receptacles 3. Bike Rack 4. Interactive Mission Control (provided by Owner) 5. Lunar Rover Vehicle (provided by Owner) 6. Interactive Astronaut Figure (provided by Owner) 7. Basalt Column with Memorial Plaque (Memorial plaque provided by owner) 8. Projector Enclosure 9. Area Drain Grate 10. All other items noted on the plans B. Lead time on products orders shall be considered into the construction schedule. C. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with the Owner and Cre8Play for the installation of three interactive elements: the Lunar Rover Vehicle, Interactive Mission Control, and the Interactive Astronaut figure, as shown on the plans. (See Appendix for more information): 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Adhere to manufacturer's instructions for product handling, installation and operations. 1.03 RELATED SECTOINS: A. 03 11 00 Concrete Forming B. 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement C. 03 30 00 Cast in Place Concrete D. 03 34 50 Concrete Finishing E. 32 18 16.13 – Synthetic Safety Surfacing – Poured-in-Place EPDM KHERSON PARK SECTION 12 93 00 – PAGE 2 SITE FURNISHINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for all products: 1. Manufacturer's product data 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comply with Specifications and manufacturer's data. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. 2.02 PICNIC TABLES A. As supplied by Owner includes: 1. 6-Seater Picnic Table - Orbit LOB261 - ADA 2. 4-Seater Picnic Table - Orbit LOB240 3. Steel: Anchoring onto the pavement, as per manufacturers recommendation. 4. Finish: Powdercoat 5. Color: 6-Seater Table Orbit LOB261 - ADA Marine Blue 4-Seater Table Orbit LOB240 Cora Red. 2.03 TRASH RECEPTACLE A. Forms and Surfaces, Model: Disptach PDS - steel 30-gallon receptacle, or approved equal– submit color chart for approval by Owner B. Style: Side Opening. Surface mount as shown on the drawings and per manufacturer’s instructions. Finish: Powder coat color shall be silver. 1. Manufacturer: Forms and Surfaces Tel. 800.451.0410 or email: sales@forms-surfaces.com. Website https://www.forms-surfaces.com/twist-bike-rack Or approved equal. 2.04 BIKE RACK A. Landscapeforms, Model: Ring bike rack – or approved equal. B. Finish: electro polished stainless steel. Submit color chart for selection by Owner. KHERSON PARK SECTION 12 93 00 – PAGE 3 SITE FURNISHINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Mounting: Embed mount as shown on the drawings and per manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Manufacturer: landscape forms Tel. 269-3371321 or email: marcusr@landscapeforms.com Website: https://www.landscapeforms.com/en-US/product/Pages/Ring-Bike-Rack.aspx Or approved equal. 2.05 LUNAR ROVER VEHICLE A. Supplied by the Owner and manufactured by Cre8Play. B. See drawings for location. 2.06 INTERACTIVE MISSION CONTROL A. Supplied by the Owner and manufactured by Cre8Play. B. See drawings for location. 2.07 INTERACTIVE ASTRONAUT FIGURE A. Supplied by the Owner and manufactured by Cre8Play. B. See drawings for location. 2.08 BASALT COLUMN WITH MEMORIAL PLAQUE A. Miniature natural Columbia basalt column as supplied by Marenakos Rock Center. Stone column shall be of the size and dimensions shown on the plans. B. Provide Photo sample of stone column. C. See drawings for location. 2.09 AREA DRAIN GRATE A. Provide Urban Accessories Grate – 12” Rd Angle with bolt locking, frame suitable for light vehicular traffic, ADA compliant pedestrian grate or approved equal. 1. Contact: Danille Salzetti, Highwire ph. 253 677.9931, email: danille@highwireus.com B. 12” dia. for two area drains. C. Material: Ductile Cast Iron D. Finish: Rust Conditioner KHERSON PARK SECTION 12 93 00 – PAGE 4 SITE FURNISHINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 E. See drawings for location. 2.10 PROJECTOR ENCLOSURE A. Projector enclosure shall be a table top configuration with an ultra-strong lightweight aluminum chassis and tempered low-iron optical grade port glass for strength and perfect imaging. Enclosure system shall be in a landscape orientation with slide out tray, for easy installation and service access. B. Projector enclosure shall come with M10 threaded sockets — one at each corner — top and bottom. Stainless steel bolts are provided for attachment to any suitable support structure. Enclosure shall include a Unistrut bottom attachment kit for attachment to base plate on projection pole. C. Enclosure shall include a Digital Enclosure Control system (DEC4™), with optional remote monitoring over a TCP/IP network – ideal for mission-critical applications or larger systems. Enclosures can also be monitored remotely using JESE Agent. D. Enclosure shall include a thermal insulation kit. E. Provide Tempest Blizzard enclosure Model: 52.15 0.LS.US (dimensions -42”x 30” x 16.5” ), or approved equal Website: https://www.tempest.biz/products/outdoor-projector-enclosures/Contact: Felipe Hermosillo Tempest Lighting, Inc 11845 Wicks Street Los Angeles, CA 91352, USA c: +1 818 203 5397 www.tempest.biz felipe.hermosillo@tempest.biz PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this Section. Do not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. Verify location with Owner, prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all equipment true, plumb and in accordance with Specifications, Drawings and KHERSON PARK SECTION 12 93 00 – PAGE 5 SITE FURNISHINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 manufacturer's directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PICNIC TABLES A. Contractor is responsible for concrete footings, and installation of Owner supplied Picnic tables as shown on the drawings. B. Contractor shall coordinate sequencing and timing of the installation of footings, and associated anchors for the Picnic Tables.. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRASH RECEPTACLE Contractor is responsible for trash receptacle installation as shown on the drawings. Use stainless steel anchors bolts sized accordingly and as required by the manufacturer. Verify location with the Owner. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF BIKE RACK Contractor is responsible for Bike Rack installation as shown on the drawings. Install per manufacturers recommendation. Verify location with the Owner. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF LUNAR ROVER VEHICLE, INTERACIVE MISSION CONTROL AND INTERACTIVE ASTRONAUT FIGURE A. Contractor is responsible for concrete footings, and running electrical connection to the Lunar Rover Vehicle, the Interactive Mission Control and the Interactive Astronaut Figure B. Contractor shall coordinate sequencing and timing of the installation of footings, electrical connections and associated anchors for the Lunar Rover Vehicle, Interactive Mission Control Panel, and the Interactive Astronaut Figure. Install all items per manufacturers recommendation. C. Where required coordinate top of footings with poured in place surfacing as shown in the drawings. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF BASALT COLUMN WITH MEMORIAL PLAQUE A. Contractor is responsible for concrete footings and basalt column as shown in the plans. Memorial plaque shall be supplied by the Owner. B. Top of the column to be angular and core drilled to fix the memorial plaque with epoxy, as shown on the drawings. C. Install stone column true and plumb, coordinate with Owner for steel memorial plaques installation. KHERSON PARK SECTION 12 93 00 – PAGE 6 SITE FURNISHINGS BID SET 4/15/2022 3.08 INSTALLATION OF PROJECTOR ENCLOSURE A. Ensure enclosure has 3” clear from bottom of enclosure to the platform mounting plate for adequate air flow. Mount enclosure with minimum four tamper proof ½” dia. stainless bolts and spring nuts. Install projector enclosure with Unistrut system and thermal kit per manufacturers recommendation. B. Prune existing branches as directed by owner for adequate clearance to the projector enclosure. C. Coordinate with Owner as required for projector installation. Projector will be installed and supplied by others. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF AREA DRAIN COVER A. Install area drain with frame where shown on the plans. Refer to section 33 41 00. B. Install per manufacturer’s recommendation. END OF SECTION – 12 93 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Work included: 1. This work shall consist of furnishing, installing, testing, and placing in satisfactory and successful operation all equipment, materials, devices, and necessary appurtenances to provide electrical service and necessary power to all equipment hereinafter specified and/or shown on the Plans. 2. The work shall include all materials, equipment and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Plans, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all electrical systems shown on the Plans or described herein. 3. Provide all excavation, trenching and backfill required for the underground electrical work indicated by the contract documents. B. Work not included: 1. Motors, controllers and equipment as described in other Divisions of this specification shall be furnished under those divisions but shall be set and wired under this Section. 2. Telephone system wires and equipment are not a part of this contract. 1.2 RELATED WORK: Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork Section 26 56 00 - Exterior Lighting 1.3 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS: Definitions: Refer to Division 00. Abbreviations: ANSI American National Standards Institute NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. IES Illuminating Engineering Society 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the National Electrical Code, NFPA regulations, and all other applicable national, state, and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall undertake all work in strict accordance with the National Electrical Code and any Washington State WAC 296-45, “Safety Standards for Electrical Workers” and WAC 296- 46B, “Electrical Safety Standards, Administration, and Installation”. 1. Local Codes and Ordinances KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK 2. State and Federal Law 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) 4. Life Safety Code (NFPA-101) 5. State Fire Marshall 6. Underwriters' Laboratory 7. National Electric Safety Code (NESC) 8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 9. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) 10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineer (IEEE) 11. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) 12. The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 13. Federal, State and Local Building Codes B. Responsibilities of the Contractor: 1. Complete all work specified under these Specifications and Drawings. 2. Coordinating with other trades. 3. Referring to all of the Drawings, Specifications, and shop drawings pertaining to equipment containing electrical components. 4. Furnishing and installing all incidental items not specifically shown or specified which required by good practice to provide the complete systems specified. C. Nothing in these Drawings and Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to governing codes or regulations. D. Wherever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the governing codes and regulations, the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings shall govern. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications shall be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the Plans and Specifications which may be in excess of the requirements of governing codes or regulations. E. Inspection: All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the Engineer. The Contractor shall correct any work, materials, or equipment not in accordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or defective, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Protection During Construction: 1. Throughout this Contract, provide protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage. Protect everything from the effects of weather. Prior to installation, store items in indoor, dry locations. Store in indoor, heated, dry location items subject to corrosion under damp conditions, and items containing insulation, such as controllers, motors, etc. 2. Following installation, protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage and the effects of moisture on insulation. Cap conduit runs during construction with manufactured seals. Keep openings in boxes or equipment closed during construction. 3. All debris shall be removed from premises during work, as directed and at completion of job. KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK 4. The electrical subcontractor shall furnish and place on his portion of work proper guards for prevention of accidents. Provide and maintain construction required for the safety of life or property including the maintenance of sufficient light during night hours. B. Temporary Utilities: 1. Temporary or interim use of any and all portions of the electrical system shall be under the supervision of the Contractor. 2. Provide all temporary facilities as required in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities & Controls. 1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: A. Intent of Drawings: 1. Drawings are partly diagrammatic. Installation of conduit stub-ups shall be in accordance with field conditions and actual manufacturer’s shop drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all dimensions before proceeding with the work. 2. The electrical work shown on the Drawings do not indicate all fittings, hardware or appurtenances required for a complete operating installation. B. Departures from Contract Documents: Refer to Section 01 26 00 - Modification Procedures for any necessary, proposed departures from these Contract Documents, and the reasons therefore. Submit such requests as soon as practicable. Make no such departures without the written approval of the Engineer. 1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Provide red-lined as-builts and final record documents as directed in Section 01 78 39 - Record Documents. 1.8 WARRANTY: A. Refer to Division 00 for warranty information and requirements. 1.9 PERMITS AND FEES: A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection. 1.10 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit product data for each item specified in these Specifications. Product data shall include the following: 1. Voltage and continuous current rating. 2. Short circuit with stand rating of bus. 3. Main breaker frame current rating. KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 4 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK 4. Main breaker short circuit rating. 5. Main breaker trip rating. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT (GRS): A. Above Grade Raceways shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and out, UL listed as manufactured by Republic Steel, Triangle, Allied, Western, National or approved equal. Minimum size shall be 3/4 inch. Field cut threads shall be protected and damaged galvanizing shall be repaired per the conduit manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Steel Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or non-corrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson couplings and watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) are permitted. Running thread or set screw type fittings are not approved except as noted. C. Conduit used in underground runs shall be Scheduled 40 heavy wall rigid PVC, gray in color, UL labeled with fittings of the same materials. D. All conduits shall be capped during construction by means of manufactured seals to prevent entrance of water and debris. The conduits shall be cleaned before pulling of the wire. Spare conduits shall include a nylon pull rope. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE: A. Wire: 1. Above Grade: All wires shall be copper with insulation Type THW. Type THWN/THHN or XHHW wire may be utilized, subject to code requirements. Wire and cable shall be brought to the project site in original containers bearing the Underwriters Label. 2. Underground: All conductors shall be type USE. Increase raceway size when necessary to accommodate conductors per Code. Exception: Underground conductors completely contained in Code recognized raceway and boxes may be Type THW, THWN or XHHW. Type UF direct burial permitted for branch circuits only when noted on the drawings. 3. Aluminum conductors are not approved for use on this project. B. Splices: 1. Above Grade: Solderless type only. Pre-insulated "twist-on" type (limited to size #10 and smaller) shall be Scotch-Lok, Ideal wire nut, or approved equal. Bolt on compression type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape is acceptable for all sizes. 2. Below Grade: Splices below grade shall be in hand holes and shall be made watertight with epoxy resin type splicing kits, Scotchcast, or approved equal. C. Plastic Ties: Cable ties shall be nylon or equivalent, locking type. 2.3 JUNCTION BOXES AND HAND HOLES: KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 5 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK A. Junction boxes and hand holes for the underground circuit runs shall be composite material with bolt down cover designed to withstand a 20,000 pound static load. They shall be suitable for use in driveway, parking lot and road shoulder applications that may be subject to occasional, non-deliberate heavy vehicles. Covers shall be labeled “Electric”. They shall be as manufactured by Christy Concrete Products, Fogtite, or approved equal. The hand hole shall be similar in size to WSDOT J-11a, Type I, II or III and in accordance with the following table. WSDOT Type Composite Type Size I - (Christy) FL9/FL9T Box/Cover 10" x 16" x 12" II - (Christy) FL30BOX18/FL30T Box/Cover 14" x 24" x 18" III - (Christy) FL36BOX18/FL36T Box/Cover 17" x 31" x 18" B. Each conduit entering the box shall be neatly upswept and shall terminate not less than 5 inches or more than 10 inches below the lid. C. All hand holes shall be set on a 6 inch free draining, compacted pea gravel base and be leveled to match surrounding grades. The lid shall be set flush with finish grade. Conduits into the junction boxes and service cabinet foundations shall have bell ends installed. Sufficient slack wire shall be provided to enable the splice to be raised a minimum of 18 inches outside of the box. 2.4 PANELBOARDS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Square D, General Electric, I.T.E, or approved equal. B. Bussing Assembly: 1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedules. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests with maximum hot spot temperature, on any connector or bus bar that does not exceed 50 degrees C. rises above ambient. Heat rise tests shall be conducted in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The use of conductor dimensions will not be accepted in lieu of actual heat tests. 2. Panelboard bus shall be Copper sized at 1000 amps per square inch. 3. Provide 100% rated insulated neutral bus where shown. 4. Provide separate fully rated ground bus bonded to panelboard cabinet. C. Circuit Breakers: 1. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic trip equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Large permanent individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each breaker in a uniform position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between ON and OFF. Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. 2. Circuit breakers shall be bolted securely to the panelboard bus. "Push on" or "plug in" breakers are not acceptable. D. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating: KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 6 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK 1. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans or as specified. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. The short-circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying the specified panelboard short-circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short-circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short-circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. 2. Provide panelboards with short circuit rating as shown on the panelboard schedule. E. Cabinets and Fronts: 1. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel is to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. 2. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with latches and spring-loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall be adjustable indicating trim clamps, which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted with completely concealed steel hinges. Provide cabinets of sufficient dimensions to allow for future expansion and addition of circuit breakers within the panelboards as indicated on panel schedules. Panel fronts shall be of the door-in-door type so that opening the inner door can access breaker handles and opening the outer door can access panel wiring. Provide two keys for each panel. 3. Circuit Directory: A circuit directory frame and card with a transparent protective plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a writing space at least 1/4" high x 3" long or equivalent for each circuit. 4. Finish: Fronts shall be of code gauge, full finished steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish, ANSI 61 gray color. F. Barriers: The panel board interior assembly shall be dead in front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs and main breaker shall be barriered on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall be barriered. G. Panelboard Nameplate 1. Provide nameplates with the following information attached with screws to each panelboard front: a. Panel Name 1/2" high characters b. Voltage, Phase, Wire (i.e. 240/120, 3 phase, 4 wire) 3/8 inch high characters. c. Short circuit withstand capability rating (i.e. 22,000 AIC symmetrical) 3/8 inch high characters 2. Nameplate colors shall be white letters on black background. KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 7 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL: A. Install materials and equipment in a good workmanlike manner, utilizing craftsmen who are skilled in that particular trade. Provide work, which has a neat and finished appearance. B. Check the approximate locations of electrical system components shown on Drawings for conflicts with other systems and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, consult the Engineer. The Engineer's decision shall govern. Make necessary changes at no cost to Owner. C. Follow manufacturers' installation instructions explicitly, unless otherwise indicated. Wherever any conflict arise between manufacturers' instructions, codes and regulations, and these Contract Documents, follow Engineer's direction at no additional cost to Owner. Keep copy of manufacturers' installation instructions on the job site available for review at all times. 3.2 COORDINATION: A. The work of this section, if applicable, shall be coordinated with that of the other divisions and trades and all drawings shall be examined for construction details and necessary coordination. 3.3 EXISTING UTILITIES: A. Underground utilities and elements: The Contractor shall call Utility Notification Center at (811) or (800) 424-5555 or click www.callbeforeyoudig.org to locate all underground utilities (on or near Public Rights-of-Way / Property Lines) prior to digging and/or driving stakes. B. Existing utilities shown on the contract drawings have been plotted from available records. Contractor shall verify location of all existing utilities (dry and wet utilities) C. The Contractor shall protect shown, visible and located utilities from damage and promptly repair all active utilities damaged by construction. This repair shall be made solely at the expense of the Contractor. D. When, despite all care and caution, damage occurs to active utilities not visible, located or indicated on the contract documents, immediately obtain a decision from the Engineer as to repair. When so directed, the repair shall be made immediately by the Contractor whose trade is involved. The contract price shall not change when the conditions outlined above and utmost possible care and caution have not been followed. E. Adjust the depth of electrical utilities to avoid existing utilities with no change to contract price. 3.4 SECURING SITE WORK: A. The Contractor alone is solely responsible for securing all electrical site work with adequate barriers, warning indicators and shoring. KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 8 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK 3.5 ELECTRICAL TRENCHES: A. Trenching: 1. Trenching shall be to depths as required by code, the particular installation, or as shown on the drawings, whichever is deeper. All trenching for electrical conduit is to be done by pneumatic mole method. All holes and cavities are to be filled, compacted and reseeded with turf mix. 2. Trench bottom shall be free of debris and graded smooth. Where trench bottom is rock, or rocky, or contains debris larger than 1”, or material with sharp edges, Contractor shall over excavate 3" and fill with 3" of builder’s sand. 3. Separation between new electrical utilities and other utilities shall be 6" minimum except gas lines shall be 12" (vertical and horizontal) and shall be 36" (horizontal) for all water service lines. 4. All crossings of concrete or asphalt shall be performed only after the surface material has been saw cut to required width and removed. Conduit shall also be placed in a PVC sleeve that is at least 2 times the OD of the conduit. 5. Detect-A-Tape (red) marking ribbon shall be place in trenches 6” directly above all buried electrical conduit. B. Backfill and Compaction: 1. Backfill around vaults and hand holes to be free of debris larger than 2" in all directions to 6" from vault and free of debris larger than 2" for all directions to 12" from vault. 2. Bedding for vaults and hand holes shall be 6" of pea gravel or sand. 3. All other backfill shall be free of debris larger than 6" in diameter. 4. All backfill material shall be placed so as to obtain a minimum degree of compaction of 95 percent of the maximum density at optimum moisture content. Moisten backfill material as required to obtain proper compaction. 5. Broken pavement, concrete, sod, roots and debris shall not be used for backfill. 6. Contractor shall, within one-year guarantee period, refill and compact all settled areas to match adjacent grade. 3.6 RACEWAYS: A. General: 1. Cut raceway ends square, ream and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors. Tighten all fittings securely. 2. Provide and install manufactured end caps on all raceway ends during construction to prevent the entrance of water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, is not permitted. 3. After final assembly is in place, all raceways shall be thoroughly cleaned and a mandrel, correctly sized for each size of conduit, shall be pulled through all raceways, prior to installing wires or pull cords. Mandreling shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. 4. All elbows for GRS and PVC raceway shall be factory elbows. For all other raceway, use factory ells for bends of 1-1/4" and larger diameter. 5. Size all raceways per code unless specifically noted to be larger on the drawings. B. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 9 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK 1. All connections shall be watertight. Install for all raceways in concrete or where subject to damage. 2. Where hazardous areas are indicated, use GRS and seals to conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code. C. Raceways Underground: 1. Galvanized rigid steel conduit - painted with two coats of bitumastic paint -or galvanized rigid steel conduit with 15 mil. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) jacket (repair abrasions with PVC base paint or PVC). 2. PVC raceways may be used for underground runs when permitted by code. Field bends, when necessary, shall be formed only with factory recommended heater with radius not less than that noted in the NEC. Penetrations through slabs shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit. 3. Ground wires shall be provided in all PVC Raceway. D. Inserts, Shields and Sleeves: 1. Furnish and set in place, in advance of pouring slabs and walls, all inserts and sleeves needed to execute Division 26 equipment installation, if applicable to this project. 2. Where supports in slabs are required after wall has been poured, use a drilled-in threaded insert, installed as recommended by manufacturer. E. Raceways That Stub Up Through Concrete: 1. Install at such depth that the exposed raceway is vertical and no curved section of the elbow is visible. 2. PVC raceway shall not be stubbed through concrete. F. Sealing of Raceway Penetrations: Exterior surfaces below grade: Cast raceway into concrete or use manufactured seal assembly (such as o.z. type "FSK") cast in place. G. Raceway Supports: 1. Raceways, whether exposed or concealed, shall be securely supported and fastened. 2. When more than two raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented channel support system (such as Unistrut). 3.7 WIRING: A. General: Install all wiring in raceway unless shown or specifically authorized (in writing) otherwise. B. Wire Size: 1. Minimum wire size for power circuits shall be #12 AWG. 2. Provide stranded wire for all applications. C. Tests: Test all wiring connections for continuity and ground before any fixtures or other loads are connected. Test cable with a DC "Megger" type tester. If tests indicate faulty insulation (less than 2 megohms) such defects shall be corrected and tested again. Contractor shall KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 10 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK provide all apparatus and material required to make tests and shall bear all expense of required testing. Results of tests shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer. D. Conductor Sizes, Referenced on Plans: All conductors shall be copper with type THW insulation unless noted otherwise. For conductor sizes see equipment manufacturer's specifications. E. Splices: 1. Feeder, service and branch circuit conductors 8 AWG and larger shall not be spliced. 2. Branch circuits may be spliced in boxes where circuits divide. 3. All splices shall be made mechanically and electrically secure. F. Pulling: Use no mechanical means for pulling Number 8 AWG conductors and smaller. Use approved lubricants only. G. Termination: 1. Do not score the conductor when stripping insulation, always pare or pencil when using a blade. Use of a stripping tool is preferable. 2. Terminate all wires and cables at their assigned points of connection at panels, switches, equipment, etc. 3. All terminations shall be secure and tightened in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. H. Conductors in Panels and Switchboards: Conductors in panels, switchboards and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped, fastened and formed in a manner to "fan" into terminals with regular spacing. I. Cable Supports: Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs. J. Color Coding: 1. Conductor identification of each phase shall be by color-coded insulation. The color of the insulation of the underground conductors of different voltage systems shall be as follows: 120/240 volt, 1-phase: A-phase black, B-phase red. Neutral conductors shall be white. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 2. Control circuit conductor identification shall be made by sleeve type identifiers, sized for the conductor, or done by equivalent means, as approved by the Engineer. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Control circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. 3. Terminal and conductor identification shall match that shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or marking is not acceptable. Where insulation of the required color is not available, electrical tape of the required color shall be half-lapped for the entire length within the indicated enclosures. K. Underground Installation: 1. Wire and cable shall be inspected for damage during installation. 2. Wire and cable pulling equipment shall be equipped with an accurate gauge to allow continuous monitoring of pulling tension. Pulling tension shall not exceed the KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 11 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK manufacturers recommended values. A cable grip shall be used for pulling wire and cable. The pulling force shall be applied directly to the conductor. 3. A swivel shall be placed between the pulling rope and pulling grip. 4. The cable reel shall be mounted on the pulling side of the pay-off manhole to prevent any reverse bending when the cable pays off and be mounted so that it can turn freely. 5. The wire and cable shall be fed through a cable feeder or over sheaves in such a way that it never contacts the edge of the manhole or duct. Bending radius shall never be less than 10 times the conductor or cable diameter. The cable must be fed straight into the duct in the pay-off manhole or handhole and straight out of the duct at the pulling manhole or handhole. 6. Cable under tension shall not be pulled through sheaves (multiple roller or otherwise) without prior approval of the Engineer. 7. Wire and cable shall be adequately lubricated at pay-off end with approved Cable Lubricant. 8. The pay-off reel shall be tended throughout the pulling process. 9. The rate of pull shall be constant and shall not exceed 50 feet per minute. 10. Manholes, handholes and duct banks shall be free from water prior to cable pulling and shall be kept dry until the cable is spliced. 3.8 POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH: A. Install disconnect switch inside controller housing per code requirements. 3.9 PANELBOARD: A. Mounting: Secure in place, plumb and square. Firmly anchor cabinet to mounting panel inside enclosure per Details. B. Circuit Index: For each branch circuit panelboard: Provide a typewritten index listing each circuit in the panelboard by number with its proper load designation. Mount with a transparent protective cover in a metal frame inside the cabinet door. The listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements typically with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. C. Cabinet Painting: Clean and touch-up exposed surfaces with paint to match factory finish. D. Bolted Connections: Inspect all bolted connections after installation and retighten all connections not securely tightened. 3.10 MOTOR STARTER: A. Installation: 1. Motor starters shall be installed in an accessible location. 2. Install thermal units according to full load current of motors provided and the National Electrical Code. B. Tests: For each motor, record the name of the load served nameplate full load current, catalog number and ampere rating off the corresponding thermal element and submit to Engineer at the completion of work. 3.11 GROUNDING: KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 05 00 --- PAGE 12 ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORK A. General: Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as specified herein. B. Ground Rods: Provide as shown and/or required. Connect the grounding conductor to each rod. C. Grounding Conductor: 1. Provide as required by code and as shown on the drawings. 2. Run grounding conductors inside raceways. D. Ground Connection of Enclosure: Metal enclosure shall be grounded, as part of this Contract. E. Connection to the Ground Bus: Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to conduit system, switchboard frames, service neutral and electrically operated equipment and devices. No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or equipment. F. Method of Connection: Make all buried grounding connections by a (exothermic) welding process. Unless shown otherwise, make other connections brazing, thermite, welding, or with approved pressure terminals. When making thermite welds, wire brush or file the point of contact to a bare metal surface. Use thermite welding cartridges and molds in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. After welds have been made and cooled, brush slag from the weld area and thoroughly clean the joint. G. Controllers: Ground all irrigation controllers per manufacturer's specifications and as shown in Details on sheet E2.0. H. Testing: Measure the OHMIC value of the electric service entrance metallic "system ground" with reference to "earth ground" using the "multiple ground rod" method and suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 2 OHMS. If this resistance is not obtained, then add additional ground rods and retest until the resistance is below 2 OHMS. END OF SECTION - 26 05 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 56 00 ---PAGE 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing lighting fixtures, poles, mounting hardware and footings. Provide photoelectric controls, time clocks/switches and light fixture maintenance labels as required: 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 26 05 00 – Electrical – General Work 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. The installer shall be a licensed electrical contractor with a minimum of two years of experience in similar lighting fixture installations. B. Thoroughly inspect the site, electrical panels and other related work 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit Shop Drawings for approval by the Engineer, of all electrical lighting fixtures and associated hardware. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. All materials are to be new and delivered to the site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground and protect from damage. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 LIGHTING: A. Lighting and pole bases shall be per lighting fixture schedule and pole details on sheet E0.0 2.2 LED MODULES AND DRIVERS A. LED modules and drivers shall have minimum five (5) year parts and smarts warranty. 2.3 THERMAL PROTECTORS: A. Provide thermal protectors in fixtures where required by Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION KHERSON PARK SECTION 26 56 00 ---PAGE 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. For Lighting Fixtures, the installer must be a licensed electrical contractor, experienced in lighting fixture installations. B. Fixtures shall be neatly and firmly mounted, using mounting hardware as directed in manufacturer's specifications and the Plans and Details. C. Install a photo-cell bypass switch for all applications where photo-cells are specified for outdoor lighting installations. B. Exterior lighting fixtures shall be constructed and gasketed to prevent entry of dirt and insects and damp or wet labeled as required. C. Provide reinforced concrete pole bases as indicated. Coordinate with concrete work. Verify exact location of light poles with Engineer prior to placement. D. Adjust photoelectric controls and time clocks/switches as directed by the Engineer. END OF SECTION – 26 56 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 1 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 SECTION 31 10 00 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Provide pre-mobilization video (on USB thumb drive) of existing site conditions. 2. Locate and document existing utilities and controls. 3. Save and protect from harm any trees, structures, features, and facilities to remain. 4. Provide temporary chain link fencing to secure construction site. 5. Provide staging and stockpiling locations. 6. Remove and legally dispose of curbs, pavement, fencing, signs, topsoil, trees, bollards, benches and other items shown on plans and as required to install new improvements. 7. Remove and legally dispose of utility materials from below the ground surface as required. 8. Cap and abandon utilities where not required to be removed. 9. Identify, and coordinate with the Owner’s Representative and/or utility purveyor(s), the disconnection, capping, abandonment, and/or removal of utilities as required. 10. Clear and grub areas of the site as required and designated for new construction. Remove trees and plantings in such a manner to protect those that are to remain. 11. Salvage and stockpiling of existing materials for future use. 12. Legally dispose of material from the site. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to following: 1. Section 01 57 13 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 2. Section 02 41 13 – Selective Site Demolition 3. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork 4. Section 32 19 13 – Soil Preparation 1.3 REFERENCES A. City of Kent Surface Water Design Manual, 2017. B. 2021 King County Surface Water Design Manual C. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. D. WSDOT - Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, current edition; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 2 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 E. GeoEngineers- Geotechnical Engineering Services Report, City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements, Kent, Washington, March 29,2021 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00. B. Submit surveyor’s Certificate of Insurance C. Submit demolition procedures and operational sequence for review and acceptance by the Owner’s Representative. Include permits for transport and disposal of debris as required. D. Prior to mobilization to the site, submit to Owner’s Representative a copy of a USB thumb drive with video recording of existing conditions of fences, surfaces (including existing pavement to remain), equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to construction. E. Prior to mobilization, submit for review a complete site access, staging, and stockpiling plan using a copy of the basic site layout plan. Identify all areas to be used for access, staging, and stockpiling throughout various phases of the construction sequence. Provide a legend or key as appropriate where phasing affects location. F. Submit shop drawing of portable temporary fencing panels and connection hardware. G. Submit Record Drawings according to Section 01 33 00 identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical and mechanical conditions. 1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. All site demolition materials shall become the Contractor’s property unless otherwise noted in the project documents. 1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Protection of existing improvements: 1. Provide, erect, and maintain barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements. 2. Restore any existing on or off-site improvements damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner’s Representative. Restoration includes but is not limited to landscaping, pavement, walks, structures and fences. 3. Restore to original grades and conditions, areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as a result of site preparation and demolition work. B. Contact all necessary utility purveyors including City of Kent to coordinate utility cutoffs and removals. Verify that all appropriate services have been disconnected. C. Do not shut off or cap utilities without prior notice. Site utilities shall remain in service unless otherwise directed. Coordinate work with Division 01 requirements. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 3 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 D. Objectionable Noises: Limit use of air hammers and other noisy equipment. Conform to local governing requirements regarding Noise Control, refer to Kent Municipal Code (KMC). E. Maintain vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes: 1. Ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, alleys, sidewalks, parking and adjacent facilities for all areas of the park not under construction. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, fire lanes, sidewalks, alleys, or passageways without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3. If required by governing authorities, provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. F. Verify location and elevation of existing utilities at points of connection prior to commencing work on new utility that is to be connected to the existing utility. Coordinate with Owner’s Representative if actual conditions are at variance with plans. G. Verify location and elevation of existing utilities sufficiently in advance of construction to allow for coordination and mitigation of conflicts without down time or project delays. 1.7 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing, setting, and marking all line and location stakes including offsets and general construction staking. When work requiring control is required, all necessary related equipment and instruments shall be on site. A qualified layout engineer, surveyor, or technical specialist shall be assigned to the Contractor Crew for this work. The equipment and personnel must be available, at no additional cost to the Owner the purposes of verifying layout, conformance of grading, and certifying the accuracy of the work per the contract documents. B. The Contractor is responsible for preserving all benchmarks and stakes and is required to replace any stakes or benchmarks that are displaced or missing. C. The Contractor is responsible for review of all utility purveyor and City records relating to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and shall restore all utilities at Contractor's own expense. The Contractor is to notify the Owner's Representative immediately if underground utilities not shown on record documents are encountered. D. If any discrepancies are found by the surveyor between the drawings and actual field conditions, the contractor shall immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule the required pre-construction meeting with City of Kent and Owner/Architect. B. Comply with all applicable Federal, State, and Local codes and safety regulations. If there are any conflicts among referenced standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 4 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Coordinate demolition work with utility companies. D. Obtain all necessary permits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONSTRUCTION FENCING A. Provide galvanized chain link fencing a minimum of 6 feet high. B. Posts shall be minimum 1 5/8" diameter galvanized steel pipe. At contractor’s option, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipes may be driven into ground where fencing is placed on pervious and/or uneven surfaces and a continuous roll of fence fabric may be used; use minimum 9-guage aluminum wire ties to attach fabric to posts. On hard surfaces or where fences will be moved frequently, use fence panels supported with concrete blocks (min 80 lbs each) and strapped together with saddle clamps. Fence sections shall have top and bottom rails. C. Provide interwoven 2” by 2” diamond mesh steel wire fabric, 11 gauge minimum chain link. Knuckled or twisted selvage is acceptable. Barbed wire is not allowed. D. Provide prefabricated fence panel gates of an appropriate size and location for Contractor’s operations. Gates shall be double-padlocked. Owner will provide 1 lock keyed for City personnel for each entry, and Contractor will provide a lock for Contractor and Subcontractor entry at each gate. Hinged sides of each gate panel shall include double bracketing. Fencing system to allow for access by City of Kent, Police, and Fire; Contractor to confirm specific requirements with fire department. E. Bracing: provide additional panels or outriggers as necessary to provide a rigid, stable run of fence. F. Signage: 1. City shall provide and install signage informing the public of the project and site limitations. Contractor may post additional signage upon approval of the city. 2. Contractor to provide warning signage every 50 LF of fence running line. Signage shall be a minimum of 18 inches square, brightly colored, with contrasting lettering as follows: “WARNING CONSTRUCTION KEEP OUT.” G. Where approved within the project boundary, Temporary PVC Fencing may be used in low-security, short term applications. Provide 4-ft wide rolls of orange PVC web fencing, 6-ft lengths of #5 deformed steel reinforcing bar for posts, and safety caps for the #5 reinforcing bar. H. Contractor is responsible for all repairs to fencing including but not limited to damage due to vandalism and contractor actions. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 5 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 2.2 TREE PROTECTION FENCING A. In accordance with the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin work prior to receiving Notice to Proceed from Owner. B. Verify that site improvement removal may safely and appropriately begin. C. Obtain required permits and permission from local governing authorities and Owner prior to commencing work. D. Prior to beginning site removals and clearing, meet with the Owner’s Representative and review demolition plan. Indicate all existing vegetation that will be affected by construction, including any work proposed impacting root zones and intended pruning. Coordinate removals of landscape materials with the Owner’s Representative. 3.2 DOCUMENTATION OF UTILTIES AND CONTROLS A. Maintain a separate drawing to be stored on-site for identifying key utilities and controls. Identify and apply color-coded markings identifying shut-offs for domestic water, irrigation water, power, and gas. Identify sanitary sewerage, stormwater discharge, gas, fiber optics, and telephone (all as appropriate) lines, which are to be maintained in service during the work. Color-code emergency contact information for each utility directly on the drawing. B. Identify and accurately locate all capped utilities, utilities to be abandoned in place, other subsurface piping, and any other existing structural, electrical and mechanical improvements to remain. Maintain a separate drawing to be stored on-site documenting which existing utilities have been abandoned in place and which utilities have been removed. 3.3 GENERAL A. Install perimeter Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control (TESC) measures and flag or fence, as shown on plans, all clearing limits prior to c1eariug or grubbing of the site. B. Project Sequencing requirements are described in Division 1 and. Supplemental to these requirements the Contractor shall note that THE EXISTING SITE SOILS MAY BE MOISTURE SENSITIVE AND THE EROSION POTENTIAL OF THE SITE SOILS IS HIGH. See Section 31 20 00. The contractor shall expect to perform site Demolition work during the spring, summer, fall, and winter months. The Contractor shall implement and employ means and methods necessary to execute site demolition work in accordance with the Contract requirements and project schedule. The contractor shall schedule site KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 6 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 demolition work to minimize existing soil disturbances. The Contractor’s ability to perform site demolition work with moisture sensitive soils may be impossible during different periods of the work and may require the contractor to cease operations until some soil healing occurs. Inactive workdays or wet weather days shall be expected and planned for in the Contractor’s schedule and bid without extra cost to the Owner, except in abnormal wet weather cases. Abnormal wet weather cases shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. Time delays caused by the inability to perform work in existing saturated soils shall not be a basis for additional money or time claims. C. Prior to commencing site demolition and clearing, locate and flag all limits. Save and protect all areas to outside limits or existing improvements to remain. Contractor shall repair to equal or better condition areas outside limits impacted by Contractor’s work. Prior to site clearing and demolition, contact utility location service and have all underground utilities on the site and adjacent right of ways clearly marked. Locate, flag, and protect existing underground utilities to remain. D. Approximate locations of existing utilities have been obtained from available records and are shown for convenience. The contractor shall be responsible for verification of the locations shown and for discovery of possible additional utilities not shown so as to avoid damage or disturbance. The underground utility location service shall be contacted for field location prior to any construction. The Owner shall be contacted if a utility conflict exists. E. Protect from weather existing soils exposed by site clearing and demolition activities. Protect exposed soils from erosion by covering with straw mulch or plastic. Prevent disturbance from vehicular traffic. Coordinate with TESC requirements. F. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. G. The Contractor shall provide temporary barricades, barriers, guard railing, shoring etc. as necessary to protect personnel, structures, and utilities to remain intact during the operation of this contract. Conduct work in such a way to prevent damage to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities and injury to persons. The Contractor shall clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt or debris caused by demolition and clearing operations. Any damage to existing facilities to remain or to improvements on adjacent properties shall be repaired, replaced and/or reconstructed by the Contractor at their expense to its original condition or better as directed by the Owner’s Representative. H. Conduct site demolition and clearing in such a way to ensure minimum interference with roads and other adjacent properties. Do not close or obstruct streets or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 SALVAGING LANDSCAPE MATERIALS A. Identify and select landscape materials to be salvaged prior to or during or prior to clearing operations. Coordinate inspection and approval of identified materials as indicated in Section 2 above. Stockpile selected materials in such a manner that allows for review of condition by Landscape Architect. Any planting material salvaged shall be KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 7 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 stored in shade and have provisions for irrigation; temporary provisions for soil shall be coordinated with Owner’s Representative on a case by case basis. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 8 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 3.5 CLEARING A. Specifically locate and establish clearing limits by physical means as required by the documents. The chain link security fence shall also be allowed to establish the clearing limits. B. Confirm with Owner’s Representative prior to removal of any trees or shrubs. C. Notify Owner’s Representative a minimum of 14 days prior to removal of any trees or shrubs. D. Clear areas of the site as required and designated for new construction. Remove trees and plantings in such a manner to protect those that are to remain. Cut and remove entire stumps of trees designated to be removed. Completely remove all roots, stumps, vegetation and all other organic debris within the clearing limits as required for new construction and as indicated on the documents. Confirm any vegetation for removal with design team prior to commencement of construction activities. E. Save and protect trees indicated on plans to remain. Protect all off-site trees along adjacent roadways and on surrounding properties. F. Protect existing vegetation, unless explicitly designated for removal in the field by the design team, to maximum extent feasible given proposed grading revisions. G. Remove growth and underbrush within the clearing limits as required for new construction and as indicated. Perform removal operations in a manner to protect existing property and trees to remain. H. Do not drive heavy equipment outside of clearing limits to perform any clearing or tree removal. Replace all fencing and TESC features damaged by logging at no additional cost to the Owner. I. Dispose of clearing debris off site in a legal manner. Remove all debris and litter found on-site. 3.6 GRUBBING A. Grub or otherwise prepare areas where clearing has occurred to receive construction or other improvements. B. Excavate and remove all stumps to depth as necessary (assume 3 feet for bidding purposes) to remove all organic material and roots associated with the stumps. C. Excavate and remove roots larger than 1 inch in diameter, rocks, boulders and other unsuitable materials. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 9 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 D. Strip site to an average depth of 6 inches, with greater depth as required for stump and root removal listed above. Turf area strip depth to be as indicated in Section 32 19 13 Soil Preparation E. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside a 10-foot radius or the drip line (whichever is greater) of trees indicated to remain. F. Any stripping volumes required beyond the assumed depth listed above will be compensated for by the Owner only if documented, reviewed and measured prior to removal by the Geotechnical engineer. No additional compensation will be made for additional stripping done without Owner’s Representative and Geotechnical Engineer’s review and approval. G. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations as indicated for the respective areas of work in these specifications. Compact to the appropriate level indicated per Section 31 20 00. 3.7 DRAINAGE AND GROUNDWATER A. Control all surface and sub-surface water in order to prevent damage to the project site and adjacent properties. Provide all means necessary to immediately resolve surface water drainage problems generated on the construction site. Protect disturbed areas from inclement weather and surface runoff during construction process to provide a suitable working platform for all phases of the construction. Provide proper grading to prevent standing water. B. Keep natural drainage ways open for drainage at all times. Provide erosion control and stormwater turbidity control facilities as required according to the Plan, Section 01 57 13, and per the City inspector to prevent sediment transport and turbid stormwater discharge either downstream or offsite. TESC facilities shall be installed prior to clearing and demolition. At no time shall more than one foot of sediment be allowed to accumulate within a catch basin, ditch, or swale. All catch basins and conveyance ditches shall be cleaned prior to paving. Mud/sediment build-up shall be removed, and the cleaning operation shall not flush sediment-laden water into the downstream system. C. Keep open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition work free of standing water. All water shall be discharged in a stabilized manner to the site TESC system. D. Keep all trenches, holes and pits free of water during clearing, grubbing, excavation, construction of structures and installation of drains. Control surface run-off in order to prevent collection of water in areas not indicated to hold run-off. E. Prior to clearing and demolition, in the event dewatering is required, submit to the Owner’s Representative a statement of the method, installation, and details of the dewatering systems in accordance with Division 1. Provide, install, and operate all necessary equipment to keep excavations free from water during construction. Dewater and dispose of the water in order to not cause damage to public/private property or to cause a nuisance/menace to the public. The Contractor shall have at all times sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 10 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 emergencies, including power outages. Have available, at all times, competent workers for the operation of the pumping equipment. F. Control groundwater to prevent softening of the base of the excavation or formation of quick conditions or boils during excavation. Design and operate dewatering systems in order to prevent removal of natural soils and to eliminate turbidity of the discharge water. 3.8 SITE REMOVALS GENERAL A. Remove and dispose of fences, site furnishings, and foundations, landscaping, topsoil, piping, and other obstructions in areas to be cleared. Materials not designated for salvage shall be broken up, loaded, and legally disposed of by the Contractor. Care shall be taken removing items to ensure that damage does not occur to the existing trees and improvements which are to remain in place. B. Electrical: Demolish miscellaneous electrical furnishings including but not limited underground electrical conduit. All work shall be incidental to site demolition. C. Sprinkle excavated material and access roads as necessary to limit dust to the lowest practicable level. Do not use water to such an extent as to cause flooding, contaminated runoff, or icing. D. Explosive blasting is forbidden. E. Fill depressions caused by site removals as indicated for the respective areas of work in these specifications. Compact to the appropriate level indicated per Section 31 20 00. 3.9 PAVEMENT AND GRAVEL SURFACING DEMOLITION A. Raze, remove, and dispose of curb, concrete and asphalt pavements and appurtenances, gravel surfacing, concrete walls, concrete plaza and patios, concrete site stairs, and other pavements and surfacing as shown in the plans. Pavement removals adjacent to existing pavement to remain shall be accomplished by making a neat vertical sawcut at the limits of removal for asphalt and to the nearest joint on concrete. All concrete walk removals shall be sawcut at the next adjacent joint. Adjacent pavement and gravel surfacing materials designated to remain that are damaged by the Contractor during the work shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Recycled existing asphalt may not be used on site. C. Refer to Section 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition for additional direction. 3.10 UTILITY DEMOLITION A. Contractor shall coordinate with applicable utility owners, purveyors and Owner’s Representative to provide timely completion of utility removal work to be done by others. Installation of temporary utilities may be required to accomplish the required work and shall be considered incidental to the work. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 11 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 B. Locate all existing underground and above ground utilities in area of work. Save, support and protect utilities to remain. All utility piping and structures not designated for removal are to remain until new services are tested and in operation and shall be protected during construction unless indicated otherwise. Damage to existing utilities which are to remain shall be repaired immediately at the Contractor's expense. In the event the Contractor encounters utility lines not shown on the site plan or otherwise indicated to be saved, removed, or abandoned, the location of such lines shall be marked in the field and the Owner’s Representative notified. C. Do not interrupt existing utility service to facilities occupied and in use by the Owner or others except when permitted in writing by the Owner’s Representative. Provide a minimum of 5 days written notice and receive written authorization prior to proceeding with interruption. D. Locate, identify, disconnect, remove and dispose of utilities to be shown to be demolished. Arrange with utility owners and purveyors to shut off indicated utilities. Disconnect and/or remove existing utilities and/or structures as shown on plans and any additional utilities found in the construction area that conflict with improvements as part of this work. E. Asbestos piping: It is unknown at this time if the project contains existing asbestos cement utility piping. If asbestos piping is found during the demolition work, it shall be demolished or abandoned in place as necessary and in accordance with the local, State and federal regulations. F. The Contractor shall cap the end of the storm drainage pipe to remain in place. Storm drainage pipe demolition and any necessary inspections shall be coordinated with City of Kent Public Works Department To abandon existing storm pipe in accordance with City of Kent and WSDOT standards Removal of structures shall be completed only after the pipes have been removed or properly abandoned. Remove all utility piping as necessary to compete improvements, within the building and structure footprints, under bioretention areas and other drainage facilities, and where utility will be less than 3 feet below finished grade. Refer to Section 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition for existing playground drainage demolition. G. Abandon pipes to remain unless designated otherwise on plans or in specifications in accordance with WSDOT Section 7-08.3(4). H. Existing site irrigation facilities are present on site. The many locations of the existing irrigation facilities are unknown. The existing irrigation system demolition work shall include but is not limited to demolishing the irrigation control valves and boxes where in conflict with proposed Work and including the removal of underground piping, wiring and heads located upstream and downstream of the control valve such that no piping or wiring in the work are remaining. Where the contractor finds existing irrigation system within the work area not designated to remain, the contractor shall coordinate with the Landscape architect for removal. It shall be anticipated that the contractor will trace and remove all piping and wiring such that no further system facilities are remaining. Capping and abandoning existing irrigation system is not allowed. Removal and KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 12 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 demolition of the existing irrigation system work shall be incidental to the site demolition. Refer to Section 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition for existing irrigation demolition. 3.11 FILLING DEPRESSIONS A. Filling of depressions caused by clearing, grubbing, demolition and utility removal operations shall be accordance with Section 31 20 00 and shall meet all criteria specified for moisture and compaction with respect to the future conditions designated for that area. The Contractor is cautioned to the anticipated use of common backfill materials due to their moisture sensitivity. The contractor is responsible and shall install satisfactory soil materials to accomplish the work. The demolition excavation and backfill shall be incidental to the Site Demolition work. 3.12 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS A. All site demolition materials shall become the Contractor’s property unless otherwise noted in the project documents. B. The refuse resulting from site preparation shall be disposed of by the Contractor in a manner consistent with all government regulations. In no case shall refuse material be left on the project site, shoved onto abutting private properties, or be buried in embankments or trenches on the project site. Debris shall not be deposited in any stream or body of water, or in any public right-of-way or upon any private property except by written consent of the private property owner. On-site burning is not allowed. Maintain hauling routes clean and free of any debris resulting from work of this Section. C. The Owner encourages the salvage and recycling of materials from demolished structures. The Contractor shall salvage or recycle, in an acceptable manner to environmental agencies and the Owner, at his/her option any of the materials designated for disposal. D. Non-salvageable or non-recyclable demolition, contaminated soils, and creosote debris shall be transported to an approved lined landfill with a leachate collection system. E. The Contractor has the option to secure its own demolition debris, asphalt, concrete, and creosote materials disposal or recycle site(s) provided it has acquired all permits and approvals necessary from governing agencies and the Owner. F. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s Representative copies of trip tickets and receiver tickets for all material transported to approved landfills and/or recyclers to ensure disposal at proper facilities. Trip tickets will not be used to quantify materials. G. Leave the project area in a neat and orderly condition to meet the approval of the Owner/Owner's Representative. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 13 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 3.13 CONSTRUCTION FENCING A. Contractor shall install construction fencing including gates as necessary to secure site. Fence shall be inspected and maintained on a regular basis. B. Contractor may work outside construction fence and/or provide additional construction fencing as required to construct improvements. C. Secure the project site from trespass or unintentional entrance by unauthorized personnel. D. All disturbed ground stockpiles, staging and on-site transport routes shall be fully enclosed by a perimeter security fence. Areas either under construction or completed but not specifically accepted by the Owner’s Representative as Substantially Complete shall be completely enclosed. Areas included in the Contract but not yet under construction may be left open to public access at the discretion of the Owner’s Representative. E. Temporary chain link fence panels shall be connected mechanically by means of pre- fabricated, bolted brackets manufactured specifically for the purpose. Fence panels shall not be wired together. F. Where long straight runs result in an unstable condition, sufficient out-rigging shall be incorporated to maintain fencing upright. Use only pre-manufactured outriggers or additional fence panels. Out-riggers shall be placed on the interior side of the fence unless approved by the Owner’s Representative. Alternatively, and where appropriate, a “zig-zag” arrangement of panels for stability may be used. G. Uneven Terrain: Where uneven terrain will not allow the use of pre-manufactured portable fence panels, or where otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative, drive posts directly into the earth plumb and 8 ft on center along the approved alignment. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform a complete locates for underground utilities in any area to receive driven posts. Drive posts to sufficient depth to assure stability and durability for the life of the installation, maintaining a minimum of 6 ft above grade. Reset loose posts at the direction of the Owner’s Representative. Secure chain link fabric to posts using approved wire ties within 6 inches of the top and bottom of each post, and a minimum of 18 inches on center between. Provide posts at each end of each driven post installation at a point that is sufficiently level to clamp prefabricated portable fence panels directly to the driven post installation. H. Where approved, temporary PVC Fencing may be installed in low-security, short term applications. Attach 4-ft wide rolls of orange PVC web fencing with wire ties to driven 6- ft #5 deformed steel reinforcing bar posts located at 5 ft on center. Cap each reinforcing bar with a safety cap manufactured for the #5 reinforcing bar. 3.14 TREE PROTECTION FENCING A. Foot and vehicular traffic over root systems of existing trees to remain is not permitted. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 10 00 PAGE 14 SITE PREPARATION BID SET 4/15/2022 B. All trees in the construction area shall be protected with tree protection fencing as shown in the drawings. Stake the location of protection fencing. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 48 hours prior to commencing work for approval of flagging and fencing. C. Do not park any vehicles or equipment, store materials or stockpile soil, dispose of building materials, chemicals, or other detrimental substances within tree protection area or drip line of trees, whichever is more restrictive. D. If required, trimming or pruning of tree branches shall be executed by a qualified Arborist. Do not prune unless approved and directed by the Owner’s Representative. E. Excavate within the drip line of trees only where designated. Where trenching for utility lines within the drip line, hand dig around or tunnel under roots. If roots less than 2 inches in diameter are encountered and cannot be worked around, cut the roots with sharp pruners or saws. Notify Owner’s Representative before cutting any roots over 2 inches in diameter. 3.15 REMOVAL OF TREE PROTECTION AND SECURITY FENCING A. Remove Temporary Tree Protection and Security Fencing within 2 weeks of establishment of the Contract Work as Substantially Complete. The Owner reserves the right of transfer of any rental agreement or contract for Temporary Fence installations, with the cost of eventual removal to be borne by the Contractor upon transfer. 3.16 PROTECTION OF STOCKPILES A. Protect stockpile areas from release of sediment. Cover stockpiles at all times while not in use to keep stored material dry. Surround materials stockpiled on pavement by two rows of straw bales or compost filter sock with joints staggered. END OF SITE PREPARATION SECTION © LPD ENGINEERING PLLC 2022 KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 1 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 SECTION 31 20 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Accomplishing indicated and required excavation, filling, compaction, and rough grading as required for pathway, and playground areas, site grading, utility construction, and the construction of other miscellaneous improvements. 2. Protection and conditioning of on-site materials. 3. Removing and disposing of materials that are unsuitable for reuse from the site. 4. Importing any additional required materials. 5. Coordinating earthwork operations with the other work of the Project. B. Work shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, latest edition, Washington State Department of Transportation/APWA. C. Related sections include but are not limited to: 1. Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation 2. Section 31 41 00 – Trench Safety 3. Section 32 12 00 – Asphalt Paving 4. Section 32 15 40 – Crushed Stone Surfacing 5. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving 6. Section 32 84 00 – Irrigation Systems 7. Section 33 41 00 – Storm Drainage 1.2 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by use of the Sand Equivalent Test. B. ASTM D1556-90 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method. C. ASTM C136 Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate. D. ASTM D1557-91 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/cu ft). E. ASTM D2922-91 Standard Test methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). F. City of Kent Surface Water Design Manual, 2017. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 2 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 G. 2021 King County Surface Water Design Manual H. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. I. WSDOT - Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, current edition; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition. J. GeoEngineers- Geotechnical Engineering Services Report, City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements, Kent, Washington, March 29,2021 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00. B. Samples: 1. Submit sieve analysis of each type of material from an independent testing agency. Review and acceptance of a sieve analysis does not constitute approval of the actual product, which may be subject to additional testing at any time. 2. Submit to onsite Geotechnical Engineer a 50-pound sample of proposed fill material at least seven (7) days prior to importing material to the site. C. WSDOT pit certifications for each pit. D. Health and Safety Plan - Prepare and submit a Worker Health and Safety Plan. Although certain requirements are identified here and elsewhere in these specifications, it is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to provide a safe work environment and adequate protection to individuals under their employ. Maintain a copy of the Health and Safety Plan in a conspicuous location on the Job Site and reinforce the requirements of the document at weekly Job Site Safety Meetings. E. Safety Products - Submit for the Engineer’s approval manufacturer’s product data for each worker safety product specified. F. Provide current calibration certificates for each piece of mechanical monitoring equipment to be used in the work. Perform field testing of equipment for the Engineer’s approval prior to commencing excavation. G. Root Barrier production information. 1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Protection of existing improvements: 1. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage to existing vegetation and improvements not indicated for removal. Restore site improvements, including but not limited to landscaping, pavement, walks, structures, and fences, damaged by this work to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner’s Representative. Restore to original grades and conditions, areas adjacent to site disturbed or damaged as a result of site preparation and demolition work. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 3 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 2. Minimize the impact to the surrounding area during construction and installation of utilities and other improvements by using the minimum size of equipment required to perform the work. 1.5 DEWATERING A. Design, furnish, install, operate, maintain, and remove a dewatering system(s) to achieve proper completion of work performed under this Contract. Meet the requirements set forth by the City of Kent and the Minimum Standards for Construction and Maintenance of Wells, Chapter 173-160 WAC, specified by the Department of Ecology, State of Washington. B. Furnish, install, operate, and remove any additional machinery and equipment necessary to keep excavations free from water during construction. Dewater and dispose of the water so as not to cause injury to public or private property, or to cause a nuisance or a menace to the public. Maintain on site sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for emergencies, including power outage and flooding. Have available at all times competent workers for the continuous and successful operation of the dewatering systems. Do not shut down dewatering system between shifts, on holidays, on weekends, or during work stoppages without written permission from the Owner’s Representative. C. Control groundwater in a manner such that softening of the bottom of excavations or formation of “quick” conditions or “boils” during excavation does not occur. Design and operate dewatering systems so as to prevent removal of the natural soils. D. During excavation, installation of pipelines, placement of working base, and trench backfilling, and prior to the acceptance of the work or any portion of the work, keep excavations free of water. Control surface runoff so as to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations or in other isolated areas of the site. Design dewatering system using accepted and professional methods of design and engineering consistent with the best modern practice. Maintain groundwater levels at a depth of two feet below the base of excavation. Control dewatering operations so as to not cause subsidence of adjacent structures or utilities. E. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper design, installation, operation, and maintenance of any component of the dewatering system, as well as any failure of any component of the system for this Contract. F. For any method of dewatering, secure the area from unauthorized access. G. Discharge from dewatering operations must be to an approved location. Prior to initiating the dewatering operation, review the discharge point with the City of Kent’s erosion control inspector. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 4 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stockpile materials on site within clearing limits and at approved locations. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivery coordination, placement and protection of stockpiled material. B. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion and/or deterioration of materials. Place stockpile or grade site surface around stockpile to prevent ponding of surface water. C. Remove stockpile and construction debris, restore area as indicated on plans or to pre- existing state, leave area in a clean and neat condition. D. Trench spoils and stockpiles shall be located at least 6 feet from edges of trenches and excavations and shall be graded such that surface water is prevented from discharging into excavations or trenches. Large stock piles from site grading should not be located within 20 feet of utility trench excavations. 1.7 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. Furnish, set, and mark all line location stakes. Assign a qualified layout engineer, surveyor, or technical specialist for this work; this person shall be on site at all times when work requiring control is being performed, together with necessary equipment, supplies and instruments related thereto. This equipment and personnel must be available, at any time and at no additional cost to the Owner, for the purpose of verifying layout, grades, and certifying the accuracy of work on the site. Survey information provided by the Contractor for verification shall be provide at the project survey datum and locations. B. Preserve benchmarks and stakes and replace stakes or benchmarks that are displaced or missing. 1.8 MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall select materials that are products of firms that are regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified materials. 1.9 BASE BID REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall include in the base bid all costs of achieving final grades as shown on the Contract Documents including all excavation to suitable bearing soil, export, legal disposal, import, placement, compaction, and protection. The existing conditions are represented by the Project Survey. The Contractor accepts the provided information as existing condition upon commencing land disturbing clearing or earthwork activities. B. The Contractor has the option to perform, at their own expense, a topographic survey of existing conditions and submit their survey for Owner’s Review and approval for use for KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 5 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 earthwork calculations prior to Contractor’s land disturbing clearing or earthwork activities. C. The cost of excavation and off-site disposal of material and imported fill and its placement and compaction required to meet sub-grade elevations as defined in the Contract Documents shall be included in the base bid amount and shall not be compensated using unit prices. D. Subgrade: For the purpose of the Contractor Bid, the following shall define the required base bid subgrade elevations after stripping: 1. Paving: The elevation of bottom of paving section. 2. Play Area: The elevation of bottom of Play Area section. 3. Utilities Trenches: The elevation of the bottom of pipe bedding. 4. Fields/Lawns: The bottom of field or lawn section. 5. Landscape: The elevation below the stripping depth or the soil planting section. E. If the Contractor’s sequencing of the Work includes stock piling and double handling of materials, it shall be included within the base bid amount and shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Note the onsite soils may be moisture sensitive. The soil integrity will be influenced by weather conditions and by the Contractor’s sequencing, handling and protection of the material. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to protect the soils from wet weather conditions, and/or disturbance from construction activities. Failure by the Contractor to do so shall not be compensated. G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all unauthorized excavation and import and shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Unauthorized excavations shall be backfilled with structural fill and compacted as required. H. Removal, disposal, and placement of soils deemed unsuitable as a result of the Contractor’s sequencing, handling and protection of the materials will not be compensated. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Crew Foreman shall have a minimum of six years working experience and four years’ experience as foreman performing similar work. B. All work shall comply with WSDOT Standard Specifications and City of Kent Standards. Where in conflict the City of Kent Standards will prevail. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 6 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Testing: 1. The Owner may engage a qualified independent Geotechnical Engineer and/or testing agency to perform field quality-control testing including but not limited to, soil bearing verification, fill compaction testing, and laboratory gradation and other index testing of on-site and imported materials for compliance with these specifications. 2. If the material is found to be non-compliant with the Contract, the Contractor shall bear the cost of testing, removal of all non-compliant materials from the project site, and replacement of the materials with materials meeting the requirements of the Contract. D. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the accuracy of all survey information provided by the Owner prior to commencing excavations or filling operations. Commencement of these operations constitutes acceptance of the survey information as appropriate to meet the intent of the Contract. E. Grading Tolerance: Finished grade will match contours and elevation shown will be within 1/10 foot. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS A. Approval of Fill Material: All material which is proposed to be used as fill, bedding or backfill shall be graded and tested for moisture content and compactability. Gradation and test results shall be submitted for review and acceptance by the Owner’s Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement of fill. Materials shall be checked during the course of importation to ensure they continue to meet the Specifications. B. Material used in filling shall be appropriate to the site and the intended for use in that portion of the site. C. Topsoil shall not be used as a fill material. D. No frozen or thawing material shall be used as fill. E. Utility Trench Backfill: 1. Shall be Gravel Borrow onsite areas unless native material is suitable. Native material will be deemed suitable if it is: a. Capable of attaining the degree of compaction specified; b. Within a range of two percent of the optimum moisture content for compaction; c. Free of organic material, clay, frozen lumps, rocks or pavement chunks larger than 6 inches, or other deleterious matter. d. Less than 35% silt and clay. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 7 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 e. Imported gravel borrow containing recycled material is allowed to be used as trench backfill on-site as long as it meets the Gravel Borrow Specifications, hazardous materials testing in conformance with WSDOT 9-03.21(1) is provided, and the material conforms to City of Kent Standards. f. Recycled material generated on-site is not allowed for use as utility trench backfill. 2. Remove native material that is unsuitable for use as trench backfill from the site if it does not meet the requirements for use elsewhere on site, and use Gravel Borrow for trench backfill above the pipe zone bedding. 3. Backfill for perforated drain pipes shall be the same material as noted for bedding. F. Controlled Density Fill (CDF, aka flowable fill): 1. Shall be a mixture of Portland Cement, admixture (optional), Fly Ash, aggregates and water. It shall be proportioned to provide a non-segregating, free flowing, self-consolidating and excavatable material that will result in a non-settling fill which has measurable unconfined compressive strength. 2. Materials testing shall be with unconfined compressive test cylinders. Test data may be either laboratory trail batch test data or field test data of the same mix within the previous 6 months. Alternate mix designs may be required at the Engineer’s discretion. The unconfined compressive strength at 28 days shall be a minimum of 200 psi. Material shall be a sand/grout slurry proportioned to be hand-excavatable after long term strength gain. 3. Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Standard Specifications: Portland Cement 9-01 Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete 9-03.1(2) Admixture for Concrete 9-23.6 Fly Ash 9-23.9 Water 9-25 4. Controlled density fill shall meet the following requirements: INGREDIENTS AMOUNT PER CY Portland Cement 50 lb. Aggregates Class I or 2 3300 lb. Air Entrainment Admixture Per Manufacturer’s recommendations Fly Ash Class F 300 lb. Water 300 lb. (maximum) 5. The material consistency shall be flowable (approx. slump 3-10 inches). If requested by the Contractor, the proportions may be adjusted with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. G. Washed Rock: Washed rock shall be Gravel Backfill for Drywells in accordance with WSDOT 9-03.12(5). KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 8 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 H. Crushed Surfacing Top and Base Course shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 9- 03.9(3), except that the percent by weight passing the U.S. No, 200 sieve shall not exceed 5 percent and shall have a minimum of two mechanically fractured surfaces. I. Common Borrow: Common Borrow material shall consist of on-site excavated soils free of organic and deleterious or objectionable material and of such size and gradation that the specified compaction can be readily attained. Maximum particle size shall not exceed 6-inches. The moisture of Common Borrow material at the time of placement shall be within a range of two percent of the optimum moisture content for compaction. Common Borrow shall at meet the requirements of WSDOT Section 9-03.14(3) except that the percent by weight passing the U.S. 200 sieve shall be less than 35 percent unless authorized for use by Owner’s Representative J. Gravel Borrow: per WSDOT Section 9-03.14(1) except that the percent by weight passing the U.S. No, 200 sieve shall not exceed 5 percent. K. Structural Fill: 1. All fill placed under asphalt walkway, concrete walkway, concrete curb, and all other paved areas shall be “structural fill” unless otherwise authorized by Owner’s Representative. 2. Structural fill shall be imported well-graded sand and gravel material free of organic material, debris and other deleterious material, meeting the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specifications section 9-03.14(1), Gravel Borrow modified such that 100 percent passes the 1-1/2-inch sieve and the percent passing the U.S. Standard No.200 sieve is less than 5 percent. 3. On site material specified herein as Common Borrow may be considered for use as structural fill, if material is free of organic material and debris, has less than 35 percent passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 sieve, is within two (2) percent of the optimum moisture content, can meet the compaction requirements below and is approved by the Owner’s Representative or Owner’s Testing Agency as suitable for the intended application. It should not be taken for granted that the on-site soils may be used as the major source for structural fill especially during wet weather construction. During wet weather construction, the soils with higher silt content will be moisture sensitive, easily disturbed and will not likely be able to meet moisture requirements. 4. Structural fill placed in maximum 8-inch loose lifts, with each lift being compacted to at least 95% of the modified Proctor maximum density using ASTM D1557. Structural fill shall be placed and compacted within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. 5. The Contractor shall use best management practices to protect soils during construction and shall be familiar with wet weather and winter soil work. L. Stabilization Material: Site stabilization material shall consist of crushed rock meeting WSDOT Section 9-03.9(2) Permeable Ballast or 9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing Base Course. M. Quarry Spalls: Quarry Spalls shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 9-13.1(5) except maximum size shall be as noted on Plans. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 9 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 2.2 RECYCLED CRUSHED MATERIALS A. Recycled crushed materials are not allowed for use unless approved as an alternate through formal substitution process. 2.3 SAFETY, MONITORING, AND RESPONSE EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide barricades, safety guards, temporary fencing, signage and/or other methods to secure trenches, open excavations, and other unsafe conditions resulting from this construction. Undertake work in full compliance with all applicable regulatory requirements. 2.4 ROOT BARRIER A. Root barriers must be an injection molded or extruded modular component made of high- density polypropylene or polyethylene plastic with a minimum of 30 percent recycled materials. Panels must have a minimum thickness of 0.080 inches. Each panel must have a minimum of 4 molded vertical ribs and locking strips, integral male/female sliding locks, and an intergraded zipper joining system. Vertical root-deflecting ribs or channels must be between 1/2 inch and 0.008 inches high, perpendicular to the panel, and between 5.91 inches to 7.87 inches apart. Panels must be a minimum of 24 inches wide x 24 inches deep. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All earthwork shall conform to the Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155 requirements for Excavation, Trenching and Shoring as well as all other applicable local and Federal laws and regulations. B. Supplemental to these requirements the Contractor shall note that THE EXISTING SITE SOILS MAY BE MOISTURE SENSITIVE AND THE EROSION POTENTIAL OF THE SITE SOILS IS HIGH. The Contractor shall expect to perform site earthwork during the spring, summer, fall, and winter months. The Contractor shall implement and employ means and methods necessary to execute earthwork in accordance with the Contract requirements and project schedule. The Contractor shall execute earthwork to minimize existing soil disturbances. Inactive workdays or wet weather days shall be expected and planned for in the Contractor’s schedule and bid without extra cost to the Owner, except in abnormal wet weather cases. Abnormal wet weather cases shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. Time delays caused by the inability to perform work in existing saturated soils shall not be a basis for additional money or time claims. C. Permits: 1. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining permits required for work within the right of way. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 10 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 2. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any permits required for connection of private utilities to the City of Kent Public Utilities, including any storm drain, connection permits. 3.2 SAFETY MONITORING AND RESPONSE A. Maintain conformance to the Contractor’s Health and Safety Plan. 3.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Utilities: 1. The Contractor shall protect from damage private and public utilities in accordance with WSDOT Section 1-07.17. Contractor shall, before excavation begins, call the Utilities Underground Location Center 1-800-424-5555. Contractor shall pay for location of existing utilities. 2. The Contractor shall, at their own expense, make excavations and borings ahead of the work, as necessary, to determine the exact location of utilities and underground structures. 3. It is understood that there will be interfering utilities, service laterals and other underground pipes, drains, or structures encountered that are not shown or areas shown incorrectly on the plans or have not been previously discovered in the field. Contractor agrees this is a normal and usual occurrence in the construction of underground improvements. Furthermore, Contractor understands and agrees that work in some cases must be done in close proximity to said utilities and underground pipes, drains, and structures not shown or shown incorrectly on the plans which may require a change in operations and may cause sloughing of the trench, additional traffic control, additional pavement and backfill costs and time. The Contractor agrees that these occurrences are usual and ordinary, and are reflected in the Bid and plan of operation. B. Pavement: The Contractor shall protect from damage all pavement or paved areas including curbs intended to remain. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement if damage occurs to pavement or curbs to remain. 1. Access Streets and Roadways: Provide wheel cleaning stations per Section 01 57 13. 2. Repair and/or replacement of damaged facilities will be accomplished at the Contractor’s expense. 3. Minimize the creation of fugitive dust. 3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect all work in progress from damage due to extremes of cold, moisture, or drying, or mechanical damage from equipment traffic or foot traffic. Alert the Owner’s Representative to the presence or likelihood of conditions that may adversely affect the quality of the work, the physical structure of soils, or transport of site soils off-site. B. Do not work frozen soils. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 11 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Protect soils from excessive moisture. During periods of prolonged precipitation, take aggressive steps to avoid over-saturation, erosion, or homogenization of soils by covering with protective plastic sheeting, collection and controlled dewatering, detention for sediment removal, and not disturbing wet soils. It shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to manage soils that are too wet or too dry for use. D. Protect foundation subgrades as necessary from foot and equipment traffic and ponding of water during wet weather conditions. Typical measures of protection include compacted crushed rock or a lean-mix concrete mat placed over a properly prepared subgrade. Contractor should place foundation concrete and backfill excavations as soon as possible to protect the bearing surface. E. Apply supplemental moisture to overly dry soils, but not to the extent that would cause runoff, puddling, or erosion. F. Do not operate heavy equipment near excavations where trench wall or slope failure may result. 3.5 SITE GRADING A. Required contours and elevations are shown on the Drawings; if indicated information conflicts with actual conditions, notify Owner’s Representative and obtain direction before proceeding with grading of area in conflict. B. In areas to be graded, remove trees, brush, and other deleterious material. C. Remove organic topsoil and grub any remaining roots in accordance with Section 31 10 00. D. Provide subgrades required for various backfill soils and soil amendments as shown on Plans and Details. E. Following clearing, grubbing, stripping, excavations to reach subgrade and prior to placement of any fill, the exposed subgrade in areas to be occupied by paving, or structures shall be proof rolled and compacted to a dense, unyielding condition with a loaded dump truck, large vibrating roller or equivalent. Site clearing, proof rolling and compacting shall be observed by the Owner’s Representative. Overexcavate per the Owner’s Representative’s recommendations areas that cannot be reworked and/or compacted. Replace overexcavated material with imported structural fill unless otherwise directed. F. Scarify soils surfaces to receive compacted fill to a depth of at least eight (8) inches. Moisture condition scarified soil to obtain moisture to near optimum moisture content. Compact scarified soils to a minimum relative compaction as listed in this section. G. Place fill in controlled layers in thicknesses that are compatible with the type of equipment being used. Do not exceed a loose thickness of eight (8) inches for each fill layer. Compact each layer to a minimum relative compaction as listed in this Section. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 12 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 Determine the field density of the compacted soils by the ASTM D2922 and D3017 test method. H. All areas to receive compacted fill shall be field reviewed and tested by testing agency prior to the placement of new fill. I. Fill soils shall be granular and shall meet the specifications graduation requirements. The testing agency shall evaluate and/or test material for its conformance with specification prior to delivery to site. The Contractor shall notify the Owner’s Representative 72 hours (three working days) prior to importing fill to the site. J. The Owner’s Representative shall observe the placement of compacted fills and conduct in place field density tests on the compacted material to check for adequate moisture content and required relative compaction. Where less than required relative compaction or inadequate moisture is indicated, remove and replace the substandard fill or apply additional compactive effort and moisture conditioning as necessary until relative compaction, as specified in this section, is achieved. Additional testing (re-testing) is at the Contractor’s own expense. K. Provide a level testing pad for Testing Agency’s field density tests. L. The Contractor shall grade the site and control drainage at all times to prevent water from ponding in construction areas and/or flowing into excavations. Exposed grades shall be crowned, sloped, and smooth drum-rolled at the end of each day to facilitate drainage. Accumulated water must be removed from subgrades and work areas immediately prior to performing further work in the area. Soil deemed unfit due to Contractor’s inattention to drainage or lack of soil protection shall be replaced with imported structural fill at the Contractor’s own expense. M. Perched ground water could be encountered in excavations completed during construction. The Contractor shall be prepared to intercept any ground water seepage entering the excavations and route it to a suitable discharge location. N. Slope prepared surfaces to have positive drainage and direct flows to TESC facilities. O. Refer to Tree Protection in the Drawings and specifications for grading in the vicinity of trees to be protected. 3.6 SLOPES A. The Contractor is responsible for the stability and safety of all temporary slopes. 3.7 PREPARATION A. Subgrade preparation and protection shall be per Section 2-06 of WSDOT, except Contractor shall perform all staking. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 13 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 3.8 EXCAVATION, EMBANKMENT AND BACKFILLING A. General: 1. Exercise sound engineering and construction practices for excavations and trenches. Maintain trenches such that no damage will occur to any foundation, structure, pole, utility or other facility due to sloughs or any other cause. If as a result of trenching operation, there is disturbance of the ground which may endanger or damage other property and require repair, the Contractor shall take remedial action at no additional expense to the Owner. 2. Provide dewatering, shoring and other types of stabilization, in addition to shoring required for Safety by State codes to maintain the integrity of the trench or excavation and protect adjacent utilities or structures. All earthwork shall conform to the Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 296-155 requirements for excavation, trenching and Shoring. B. Excavation Material 1. Common Excavation: The naturally occurring sand, gravel, clays, or mixtures of the above, required to be moved for the construction of roadways and for the establishment of proposed site grades. Common excavation material shall be moved with the use of mechanical equipment, such as shovels, loaders, bulldozers, graders, rippers, etc., but shall not require drilling and blasting or drilling and line breaking. Excavation by sluicing method will not be permitted. 2. Unsuitable Excavation: Shall consist of unstable materials, such as topsoil, peat, muck, water-impregnated clays, yielding or wet soils, swampy or other undesirable materials, including buried logs, stumps, abandoned utility and product delivery lines, or trash. Excavated material shall be replaced with Structural Fill. a. Unsuitable materials beneath structures, roadways, or embankments shall be removed to the depth designated by the Owner’s Representative, and backfilled with Structural Fill. C. Catch basins, manholes and similar structures: Excavate to a distance necessary to allow required soil compaction between sides of excavation and outer surfaces of structure. Take care to excavate to exact depths required; fill over excavation with compacted backfill for utility trenches. D. Trench Excavation, bedding and backfill for Storm Drains: 1. Trench excavation, foundation bedding, and backfill for Storm Drains shall be in accordance with this Section, WSDOT Section 7-08.3(1) and City of Kent Road Design and Construction Standards. 2. Backfilling of trenches in the vicinity of structures shall not take place until the cement in the masonry has become thoroughly hardened. Walking on the pipe shall not be allowed until at least one foot of earth has been placed upon it. 3. Backfill shall be in accordance with the plans and WSDOT Section 7-08.3(3) of with the following exception: In-place density will be determined by ASTM D2922 - Test for Density of Soil in-place by the nuclear method. 4. Trench dams, shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations and per the project documents. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 14 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 E. Catch basins, manholes and similar structures: 1. Excavate to furnish a minimum of 12 inches between sides of excavation and outer surfaces of structure. Take care to excavate to exact depths required; fill over excavation with compacted backfill for utility trenches. 2. Excavation and backfill shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 2-09 and City of Kent Surface Water Engineering Standards unless otherwise noted in the Project Documents. F. Structural Fill: 1. Embankments shall be constructed in accordance with WSDOT Section 2-03 and City of Kent. 2. Placement of structural fill shall be in accordance with WSDOT 2-03.3(14)C, Method C. G. Moisture Conditioning and Temporary Stockpiling: 1. Where the Contractor excavates material which is over the allowable range of moisture content for placement as fill, the Contractor shall condition the material to allow placement as structural fill or common fill. 2. The Contractor shall stockpile excavated material when no fill material is required at the time of excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing the stockpiled material from becoming saturated beyond the critical moisture limits for fill placement. 3. Stockpiled selected material, which becomes saturated beyond allowable limits for placement as fill, shall be removed and disposed of and replaced with Gravel Borrow at the expense of the Contractor. 3.9 DISPOSAL OF EARTH MATERIALS A. Contractor shall remove all excavated material that is not acceptable for use as fill on site. Legally dispose of excess material off site, at Contractor’s expense. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for area classification. In landscape areas, do not allow equipment traffic to overly compact areas beyond specified percentages. Remediate over- compaction as directed by the Owner’s Representative including ripping, re-grading and re-compaction or over-excavation and in-kind replacement per plan. B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the percentages below for maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density. C. Compaction: 1. Compact all fill and backfill to prevent subsequent settlement. 2. Water settling or jetting will not be permitted as a means of compaction. 3. Furnish heavy rollers or compactors except as follows: KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 20 00 PAGE 15 EARTHWORK BID SET 4/15/2022 a. Use pneumatic hand tampers for trenches and areas not accessible to heavy equipment. b. Compact areas within 3-feet of footings, foundations and walls with hand equipment. 4. Required compaction: Compact fill and backfill to the following minimum relative compaction (percentage of maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557). Locations Required Minimum Relative Compaction Utility Trenches: (under non roadway) 90% Utility Trenches: (under walks, slabs and roadway) 95% Under Walks, Pedestrian Paving, and Gravel Paths 95% Subgrade in Planting and Landscape areas 90% Subgrade in lawn areas 90% Planting soils (not tested) 85% Structural fill 95% Fills on slopes steeper than 3:1 95% Parking, fire lanes, and vehicular drive lanes 95% D. Moisture Control: 1. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum content. Compact each layer to required percentages of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. 2. Do not perform compaction operations on excessively wetted soils. 3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND/OR WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove from the Owner's property, all waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material as determined by the Owner’s Representative, trash and debris, and dispose of it off site in a legal and timely manner. Provide dump receipts from an approved dump site if directed. 3.12 ROOT BARRIERS A. Vertical Root barriers shall be installed between proposed trees and curb as shown on the Drawings per manufacturer’s recommendations. The trench shall be no more than 4 inches wide. Any roots encountered shall be cleanly cut with a sharp saw. The top barrier must be installed 1/2 inch to 9/16 inch above finished grade. Panels must be joined with locking strips or integral male/female sliding locks. Locking mechanism must have a close tolerance to restrict slippage between panels. Barriers must be installed with root deflectors facing inward. END OF EARTHWORK SECTION © LPD ENGINEERING PLLC 2022 KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 41 00 PAGE 1 TRENCH SAFETY BID SET 4/15/2022 SECTION 31 41 00 TRENCH SAFETY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section specifies requirements for the safety systems to be used in all excavation activities, including but not limited to storm, sewer, water and electrical trench and structure excavation, and excavation for grading. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork 3. Section 33 41 00 – Storm Drainage 1.3 REFERENCES A. R.C.W. Chapter 49.17 WISHA. B. WAC 296-155 Safety Standards for Construction Work. C. WAC 296-155-660. D. R.C.W. Chapter 39.04.180 Public Works/Trench Excavations - Safety Systems Required. E. WSDOT - Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, 2016, Washington State Department of Transportation/American Public Works Association. F. City of Burien Road Design and Construction Standards, 2016 G. King County Surface Water Engineering Standards, 2016. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. KHERSON PARK SECTION 31 41 00 PAGE 2 TRENCH SAFETY BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEMS A. Protect all excavation in excess of four-feet in depth with a safety system conforming to the referenced requirements. B. The Contractor’s excavation safety system shall be designed by a qualified person and meet the referenced requirements. C. All excavation not requiring trench safety systems shall also meet the WISHA safety standards and the requirements of Section 31 20 00, Earthwork. END OF TRENCH SAFETY SECTION © LPD ENGINEERING PLLC 2022 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 12 16 PAGE 1 ASPHALT PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. For areas of existing asphalt impacted by project improvements. B. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt concrete paving, wearing, binder and base course. 2. Surface sealer. 3. Aggregate subbases C. Related Sections: 1. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork 2. Section 32 17 23 – Pavement Markings 1.02 REFERENCES A. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. B. WSDOT Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction (most recent Edition). C. Asphalt Institute: 1. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot- Mix Types. 2. AI MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual. D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. 2. ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product information and mix design. C. Document that products are on the WSDOT Qualified Products List. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 12 16 PAGE 2 ASPHALT PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications. B. Mixing Plant: Conform to WSDOT Standard Specifications. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to General Conditions B. Place materials in accordance with the weather limitations in WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(16). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBBASE A. Aggregate for Subbase: Crushed Surfacing Base Course (CSBC) conforming to WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9-03.9(3). B. All materials shall meet the material requirements specified in Section 5-04.2 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIX A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly. B. Binder Course: Asphalt Treated Base (ATB) in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 4-06. C. Wearing Course: Asphalt mix shall be HMA Class 1/2-inch in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications. Asphalt binder shall be PG 64-22 in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications. D. Mix Temperature: In accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 12 16 PAGE 3 ASPHALT PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022 2.03 SURFACE SEALER – SEAL COATS A. Cationic emulsified asphalt shall meet the requirements of ASTM D8099/D8099B-17. Seal coat products shall meet the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 9- 02.1(6) 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Submit proposed mix design of Binder Course and Wearing Course for review prior to beginning of Work. C. Supply products on WSDOT Qualified Products List. D. Test samples in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(8) A Acceptance Sampling and Testing – HMA Mixture. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads. C. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. Prepare aggregate subbase in accordance with Section 4-04.3 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. B. In areas used for vehicular access during phased construction, maintain and restore aggregate base as required to meet specified requirements. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from Work of this Section. 1. Protect subgrade and subbase materials for infiltration facilities, such as rain gardens, infiltration galleries and pervious pavements. B. Where new pavement is to abut existing pavement, sawcut existing pavement to provide a neat and straight edge at joint. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 12 16 PAGE 4 ASPHALT PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Level and compact subbase that may have been used for temporary driving surface. Provide and compact additional material as required to prepare subbase as required. 3.04 PREPARATION - PRIMER A. Apply primer in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications. 3.05 PREPARATION - TACK COAT A. Apply tack coat in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications. 3.06 PREPARATION – SEAL COAT A. Pavements surfaces shall be prepared for application of a seal coat in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-02.3(2)B and 5-02.3(2)C. B. Prior to application of seal coats all cracks shall be repaired in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-02.3(2)E C. Application of the emulsified asphalt seal coat shall be performed in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-02.3(3) 3.07 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT A. Work shall be in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification Division 5-04. B. If binder course specified, place to compacted thickness as indicated in Drawings. Place asphalt binder course with 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. C. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat, or within 24 hours of placing and compacting binder course. D. Place asphalt wearing course to compacted thickness as indicated in Drawings. E. Compact each course by rolling to specified density in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification 5-04.3(10) Compaction. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. F. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: In accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(13) Surface Smoothness. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 12 16 PAGE 5 ASPHALT PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022 B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch. C. Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/4 inch. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Take samples and perform tests in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specifications Section 5-04.3(10) B Control. 3.010 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury and do not permit vehicular traffic until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F, and in no case sooner than six hours after placing or per WSDOT Standard Specifications, whichever is more stringent. END OF SECTION 32 12 16 KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 1 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all material, labor, services, and related items required to complete decorative concrete paving work indicated on drawings and/or specifications. The items of work to be performed shall include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Concrete Banding 2. Decorative Concrete Paving 3. Concrete Paving Joint Sealants 4. Aggregate base course 5. Sitework: Including plazas, concrete walkways, cement concrete sidewalks, curbs, ramps, and associated work 1.02 REFERENCES A. This Section references the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In the case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. 1. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. 2. Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works Construction, Washington State Chapter, American Public Works Association, latest edition 3. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, ACI 301, or latest edition 4. ACI Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete, or latest edition 5. ACI Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306, or latest edition 6. ACI Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 605, or latest edition 7. ACI Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork, ACI 347, or latest edition. 8. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 9. Americans with Disabilities Act 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner materials containing the following information: 1. Procedures to be used in the construction regarding the responsibility of the Contractor and all sub-contractors involved 2. Submit concrete mix designs. Obtain approval before placing concrete. 3. Product data: a. Submit complete materials list of items proposed for the work. Identify materials source. b. Submit admixture, curing compound, and accessory item product data and test reports. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 2 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   c. Submit material certificates and product data for aggregates, joint fillers, sealants, etc. 4. Certificates: Provide written evidence that the concrete ready-mix plant is approved and certified by the NRMCA and other organizations. 5. Plaza Paving, Jointing, and Pour Sequence Plan. Submit six shop drawings indicating the following: a. Proposed layout of cold/construction, control/isolation, and hidden expansion joints. Delineate the three different joint types. Layout and type of steel reinforcement. b. Layout of paving types and finishes as indicated on the plans. Give overall dimensions of each paving type. c. Concrete pour sequence. Indicate sequence of paving pour installation. 6. Mockups: a. Mock-Ups. Prior to construction, provide (1) 4-foot by 4-foot by 4-inch sample of each paving type specified on Plans. Ensure that each mock-up contains joint types specified on project, i.e., cold (construction), control (contraction), and expansion (isolation). Locate mock-ups in a conveniently accessible and protected place. Several mock-ups and coordination meetings with Engineer may be required to attain approved mock-ups. b. Remove mock-ups from site upon completion of work and approval by Engineer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Division 1 requirements. B. Testing and inspection: Performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. C. Concrete Work: All concrete work shall conform to the durability provisions of ACI 318-14 and a minimum strength level of 3,000 psi, or strength as required for members exposed to cycles of freezing and thawing. D. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with the following standards: 1. Americans with Disabilities Act. 2. City of Kent Public Works Engineering Design and Development Standards. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 4. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 5. WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications, current edition. E. Concrete mix, design, and testing shall comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 for concrete mix design sampling and testing, and quality control, and as herein specified. F. Notify Engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to concrete pour, for inspection of forms, etc. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 3 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   G. Maintain field records of time, date of placing, curing, and removal of formwork in each portion of work. H. Do not change source or brands of cement and aggregate materials during the course of the work without prior written approval of the Engineer. I. Qualifications of Supplier: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. Ready-mixed concrete plants shall be approved and certified by the National Ready Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA) or qualified by WSDOT. J. Qualifications of Installer: A firm with minimum 5 years’ experience with concrete placing and finishing. Installer shall have minimum 5 years’ experience in green-sawing concrete joints. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Location of existing underground utilities are shown based upon best information available and are approximate only. Contractor shall locate and identify existing underground and overhead services and utilities within the Contract work area limits. Contact Utilities Underground Location Center (811), prior to construction, for aid in locating any existing underground utilities as applicable. Protect utilities and services designated to remain. Repair utilities damaged during site work operations at Contractor’s expense. B. Promptly notify the Engineer of unexpected sub-surface conditions. C. Prior to commencing any construction within the street right of ways, the Contractor shall notify WSDOT and present a traffic control plan and proposed work schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE A. Crushed rock base shall be 5/8” minus crushed rock. Gradation of the base course shall be: SIEVE SIZE % PASSING 5/8” square sieve 100 1/4” square sieve 50 - 75 US No. 40 sieve 8 - 24 US No. 200 sieve 10.0 maximum 2.02 DRAIN ROCK A. See landscaping section 32 90 00, or as noted on plans. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 4 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   2.03 FORMS A. Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement. Use straight forms, free of defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form curved edges. B. For footings and concrete slabs: Fabricate forms of MDO plywood, metal or plastic as judged best suited for shapes. Construct with a minimum of joints, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. 2.04 FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Release agent with non-staining and non-interference characteristic with bonding capabilities of paints, plasters, adhesives, other surface coatings or materials. Contractor shall guarantee proper bonding of such subsequent coatings or materials applied over concrete. 2.05 REINFORCEMENT 1. A. Reinforcing bars to be deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 40 (Use Grade 60 if pavement supports vehicles.) 2.06 EPOXY COATED STEEL REINFORCING BAR A. Coating of epoxy-coated rebar must be per AASHTO M284 B. Steel reinforcing bars 2.07 EPOXY GROUT A. Epoxy grout shall be a 2- component epoxy resin-based system, per ASTM C881 B. Shall be a Type I or Type IV bonding agent used for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete and other materials 2.08 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS A. Joint Filler: Preformed non-extruding resilient material; ASTM D1752, Type I, 1/4 inch wide by depth required to bring top surface within 3/4 inch of slab surface or as noted on the plans. B. Joint Sealer (at pavement to wall/vertical structure joint): Self-leveling polyurethane; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade SL, Class 25. Single component, self-leveling, sanded premium-grade polyurethane sealant with an accelerated curing capacity. Sealer can be used in concrete joint 24 hours after the concrete pour, and in damp concrete applications. Meet Federal Specification TT- S-00230C, Type 1, Class A. Color: match concrete color. – Provide sand to cover sealer. Manufacturer: Sika, https://usa.sika.com ; 1.800.227.8479; or approved equal. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 5 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   2.09 EXPANSION JOINT AND COLD JOINT DOWELS A. Construct Speed Dowel joints at modules not larger than 20’ -0” x 20’ -0” B. Dowel schedule to match rebar schedule and at a minimum spacing of 18” OC. Dowels shall be steel smooth and free of dirt, grease, and oils. Size per the drawings. Encase 50 percent of each dowel in a speed dowel plastic sleeve to allow the parallel movement of each dowel. Verify steel dowel to speed dowel tolerance to ensure a snug fit. 1. Provide and install Greenstreek speed dowel or approved equal. Contact Greenstreak at (800) 325-9504 or http://www.greenstreak.com 2.10 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Provide Class 3000 Ready-mixed concrete conforming to Section 6-02 of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications and according to ASTM C94 and ASTM C1116 and furnish batch ticket information. Batch mixing at site not acceptable. Slump range: per WSDOT and City standards for the use indicated. C. Concrete shall be 3000 PSI minimum compressive strength at 28 days D. See structural notes on drawings E. Portland cement: Shall be Type II conforming to the provisions of WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications Section 9-01.2(1). 1. Provide cements obtained from same source or of same brand for concrete in same element or portion of the Work. 2. Standard Portland Cement: Columbia, Ideal, Kaiser, Lone Star, Ash Grove, or approved equal. Standard gray Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M, Type II. F. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, graded, 3/4-inch nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size. G. Fine Aggregates: 1. Fine aggregates shall be free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 2. Fine aggregates shall consist of sand or other inert material or combination thereof having hard, strong, durable particles free from an adherent coating. 3. Fine aggregate shall be washed thoroughly to remove clay, loam, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious matter. 4. Fine aggregate shall meet the particle gradation requirements of WSDOT Standard Specifications, Section 9 03.1(2)B, for Class 1 fine aggregate. H. Coarse Aggregates 1. Coarse aggregates shall consist of gravel or other inert material or combination thereof having hard, strong, and durable pieces free from adherent coatings. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 6 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   2. Coarse aggregate shall be washed to thoroughly remove clay, silt, bark, sticks, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious material. 3. Coarse aggregate shall meet the particle gradation requirements of WSDOT Standard Specifications, Section 9 03.1(4)C, for AASHTO Grading No. 57. 4. Coarse Aggregates for Decorative Exposed Paving: Shall conform to Section 9-03.1 of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specification. a. 3/8- to 5/8-inch pea gravel: 45 percent of total mix, or as required for 3,000 psi concrete paving. I. Slip-Resistant Aggregate: Aluminum oxide grit (Use at exterior ramps and stairs). J. Water: Clean, fresh, and potable. K. Air-entraining admixture: Shall conform to WSDOT/APWA Standard Specification 9-23.6. 2.11 MIXES A. Provide Class 3000 Ready-mixed concrete conforming to Section 6-02 of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications. Batch mixing at site not acceptable. B. Provide an air-entraining admixture in all concrete exposed to weather in accordance with Section 6-02.3(3) of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications. C. Indicate water added to mix at job site on each delivery ticket. Show quantity of water added. Mixes exceeding specified slump range will be rejected as not complying with specification requirements. D. Exposed aggregate concrete paving areas shall have a 45 percent aggregate ratio of 3/8” – 5/8” dia. pea gravel as the coarse aggregate in the mix. 2.12 CONCRETE SEALER A. Clear non-yellowing, UV resistant, breathable, penetrating protective coating that provides a satin matte finish for exterior applications: provide and install Masco Masons Supply Mascoseal Matte or approved equal. 2.13 GLOW STONE A. Glow stone aggregate shall meet the following criteria as supplied by: 1. CORE Glow 2. Tel: 1.855.777.2673 (CORE) Email: info@coreglow.ca 3. P.O. Box 1545, Comox, BC, Canada V9M 8A2 4. Or approved equal. B. MATERIAL: Strontium Aluminate, Europium Doped C. COLOR: Standard: Blue, Aqua & Green KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 7 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   D. AGGREGATE SIZE: A blend with range from 1/8” – ½” 3-5 mm, E. AGGREGATE WEIGHT: Variable F. AGGREGATE SHAPES Chips: random G. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE: Excellent H. UV RESISTANCE: Excellent I. WATER RESISTANCE: Excellent can be used in outdoor and indoor applications J. LUMINESCENCE DURATION: Over 10 hours with 2 hours of daylight K. LUMINESCENCE LIFE: Over 20 years 2.14 SPARKLE STONE A. Sparkle Stone shall be “Sparkle Grain” an iridescent black sil-car abrasive grit, 9 to 10 on the Moh hardness scale Scale and Number 2480 on the Knoop hardness scale (next to diamond hardness). Grit size either 16 or 36. Other grit sizes on request. B. As manufactured and supplied by: 1. Sparkle Grain, by Pacific Palette based in Sand Diego California. 2. Tel (831) 457-4566 3. Website: https://pacificpalette.com/sparkle-grain 4. Or approved equal. 2.15 ADA RAMP DETECTABLE WARNING STRIP A. The warning strip shall be a vitrified polymer composite tile with epoxy polymer composition with an ultraviolet stabilized coating of aluminum oxide particles. The tactile warning tile shall be 2 feet long by 4 feet wide Armor Tile by Engineered Plastics Inc. (916) 549-9700 or approved equal. Color: Yellow. Refer to City of Kent Standard Details. 2.16 CURBING A. Provide full width and breadth of curbing. 2.17 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALK A. Provide cement concrete sidewalk as per Kent Public Works standard plan. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 8 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 BARRIERS A. The Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades, canopies, guards, lights, and warning signs to the extent required by law and as is prudent for the protection of the public and protection of the work 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Establish subgrade at elevations required to achieve the slopes and finish grade elevations designated on the drawings. The Contractor shall schedule the Owner for a subgrade inspection prior to the installation of the concrete. B. Compact subbase to 95 percent compaction using a mechanical roller or compactor. Remove loose material from the compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. Proof roll prepared subbase to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 3.03 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placement of concrete B. Prepare form surfaces by coating the contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before placement of reinforcement C. The form-coating compounds shall be thinned only with a thinning agent of type and in an amount and under conditions of the form-coating compound manufacturer’s directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions. D. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. E. Place and secure forms to the correct location, dimension, and profile. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging the concrete. F. Place joint fillers vertical in position, in straight lines, or as noted on the plans. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. G. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face on the longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4” in 10 feet. H. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. Release agents must be approved in writing by the manufacturer of concrete sealers specified herein. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 9 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   3.04 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. Install a sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet 2. Vertical face on the longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4” in 10 feet C. Apply adequate release agent to form to ensure clean ease of removal from cured concrete D. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. Release agents must be approved in writing by the manufacturer of concrete sealers specified herein. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing of flatwork shall include #4 bar typically spaced as shown on the plans. B. Locate and place reinforcement as indicated on the contract drawings. Support reinforcing steel with pre-cast concrete blocks at spacing that will ensure minimum deflection of the reinforcement. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete any unfinished formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Comply with ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete", and as specified. C. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing, placing, and curing. D. Do not place concrete until checking the subbase and forms for line and grade. Moisten sub-base, if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. E. Verify manholes or other structures are at required finish elevation and alignment before placing concrete. F. Place and spread concrete to the full depth of the forms. Use only square end shovels or concrete rakes for hand spreading and consolidating concrete. Exercise care during spreading and consolidating operations to prevent segregation of aggregate. G. Place concrete in a continuous operation between expansion joints. Provide construction joints when sections cannot be placed continuously and where required on the Plans. H. Place concrete in one course, monolithic construction, for the full width and depth of concrete work as required on the Plans. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 10 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   I. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. J. Strike off and bull float concrete after consolidating. Level ridges and fill voids. Check surface with a 10' 0" straightedge. Fill depressions and re-float repaired areas. Darby the concrete surface to provide a smooth level surface ready for finishing. K. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. L. Give notice of intention to place concrete to the Engineer at least 48 hours before an intended pour. 3.07 FORMWORK REMOVAL A. Remove all formwork after proper curing of concrete. Protect surfaces of concrete during removal operations. B. Formwork not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours after placing concrete. The concrete must be sufficiently hard so as not to be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 3.08 REUSE OF FORMWORK A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing materials will not be acceptable for reuse. Apply new form-coating material as necessary, as specified for new formwork. 3.09 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. General: Conform to ACI 301, Chapters 9 and 13. After removal of forms, repair or patch concrete not formed as shown, out of alignment or level beyond required tolerances or that shows surface defects, to condition as verified by Engineer. Immediately after form removal, patch all tie holes and repairable defective areas. B. Remove honeycombed areas to sound concrete, but not less than 1” minimum depth. Dampen area and to 6” width around same; let evaporate only to loss of sheen. Provide a bond of neat cement and water slurry well brushed into the area to be patched. Provide patching mixture of 1:2 (cement: sand) or verified proprietary patching mixture or color to match adjacent surfaces; use water quantity only as required for mixing and placing. Leave patched surface slightly high; after one hour, float to level with the adjacent surface. Keep patched areas damp for seven days. 3.10 JOINTS A. Refer to ACI 302 “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction,” most recent edition, for work under this Section. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 11 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   B. Construct expansion, control, and cold joints true to line with face perpendicular to the surface of the concrete C. Cold and Score Joints 1. Provide cold and score joints, dividing the concrete areas as indicated on the Drawings 2. Form control joints and cold joints in fresh concrete by grooving the top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. Place a tooled joint first. 3. Form control joints and cold joints in hardened concrete using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. Cut joints into curing concrete as soon as the surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. 4. Construction (cold) and sawcut contraction (control) joints in locations indicated on the plans. 5. Perform jointing with a new diamond tip circular saw. 6. Joint Width: Per plans. Do not exceed 3/16-inch in width. 7. Depth of sawcut: 1/4 depth of slab or as shown on plans. 8. Decorative Sawcut Joints: Per plans. 9. Sawcut joints in a straight line or as noted on the plans with no overcutting, and with face perpendicular to the concrete surface. 10. Use a hand tool to sawcut up to vertical edges such as walls, steps, curbs, and columns. No cutting into vertical surfaces will be allowed. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide pre-molded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locate expansion joints, as noted on drawings. 3. Groove top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. 4. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint and not less than ½ inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where the joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in one- piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Protect the top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal or plastic temporary strip. Remove protection after the concrete has been placed on both sides of the joint before sealant is applied. 5. Joint Sealer (where pavement meets vertical structures/walls): Install sealer per manufacturer recommendation. Seed sealer with sand to cover the surface. E. Hidden Expansion Joints: 1. Follow procedures for cold joint and install as shown on the drawings, use polypropylene foam or specified joint filler between concrete areas. Set joint filler low enough so that saw cut joint does not expose the joint filler. 2. Form hidden expansion joint in hardened concrete using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. Cut joints into curing concrete as soon as the surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 12 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   3.11 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening and floating, use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface irregularities and refloat repaired area to provide a continuous smooth finish. B. Sidewalk finish shall be as per City of Kent Public Works standards. C. After completion of floating and troweling when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete finishing as follows: 1. Install sawcut grid as indicated on the plan 2. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete placement. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by the Owner. 3. Light broom finish after the concrete has reached 75% strength or after the concrete has reached a minimum 2000 psi. Broom Finish on concrete bands shall be parallel to concrete band form. The Owner shall approve the sample broom finish area. 4. Provide specified finish after the concrete has reached 75% strength or after the concrete has reached a minimum 2000 psi. The Engineer shall approve the sample finish area. Once the time of finishing is determined through testing, all subsequent finish shall be done at the same concrete age for uniformity of appearance. D. Glow Stone Exposed Aggregate Finish: 1. Prepare and provide Mockup of glow stone finish for approval before proceeding with work. 2. Glow stone application: 1. Shall be a heavy exposed aggregate finish as shown on the plans. This section of concrete shall have the glow stone aggregate mix seeded into the uncured surface. 3. Glow stone seeding: a. Provide heavy exposed aggregate finish by seeding glow stone aggregate mix. Match approved mock-up. Use same glow stone source throughout entire project. The glow stone aggregate shall be 65%-75% of the visible exposed aggregate within the surface area of the circular form, after sandblasting (or retarder application and pressure washing) procedure. Of the glow stone heavy exposed aggregate mix, 25%-35% shall be 3/8” to 5/8” washed pea gravel. Use same aggregate from same source for each paving type specified throughout entire project. Application rate and density of glow stone and washed pea gravel shall be defined by manufacturer recommendation and determined by the approved mockup. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 13 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   b. The seeding operation shall start immediately after placement of concrete. The select aggregate and glow stone shall be carefully and uniformly seeded into the circular area of the template determined with the mockup. Stacked stones as well as slivery particles shall be removed at this time. Under no circumstances shall areas lacking in mortar be filled with small quantities of the base concrete mix. 4. Exposing the glow stone aggregate: a. Provide heavy exposed aggregate finish in circular patterned areas as shown on the plans. Layout regions to receive heavy exposed aggregate finish for approval by Owner. A circular template for each dimension on the plan shall be used for layout of the glow stone pattern. b. Provide 3 sample mockups of each circular form for the exposed glow stone area before proceeding with entire finish. The mockup will determine the preferred density for the exposed aggregate and glow stone as the level of exposure is revealed by sandblasting (or pressure washing of retardant treated areas). Mockup shall include the sealed finish. Engineer shall approve final exposed aggregate finish. c. Once the time of sandblasting (or pressure washing) is determined through testing, all subsequent blasting (or pressure washing) shall be done at the same concrete age for uniformity of appearance. Protect all areas that may be affected by sandblast work. d. Sealer: After the flatwork is completely dry, a clear, non-yellowing acrylic sealer shall be uniformly applied to the surface according to the manufacturer’s directions. Apply two coats of sealer. e. Protect and clean all landscape areas during and after completion of work E. Sparkle stone finish on Concrete Bands: 1. Concrete band surfaces shall be treated with the SPARKLE GRAIN FINISH SYSTEM. This system shall be installed in Shake Coat applications to newly placed and screeded concrete surfaces. 2. Apply following manufacturer directions: a. Concrete bands shall have a broom finish parallel to the form of the concrete band. b. Contractor shall prepare three 3-foot-long mockups of the concrete band with sparkle grain applied at 3 different densities to determine the preferred ratio of application. Engineer shall approve preferred application. Mockup shall include full width of band, broom finish, sparkle grain and sealer. KHERSON PARK 32 13 00 – PAGE 14 CONCRETE PAVING BID SET 4/15/2022   3.12 CURING A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections. Use curing and sealing compound or approved moisture curing method. B. Sealer: After the flatwork is completely dry, apply a clear, non-yellowing acrylic sealer to the surface uniformly according to the manufacturer’s recommendation. Submit sealer for approval by the Engineer. Apply two coats of approved sealer. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature. Maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. Protect from vandalism. B. Protect all concrete during the curing period from all damaging mechanical disturbances, especially load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. Protect finishes from all damage. 3.14 TOLERANCES A. The surface elevation, in the finished condition, shall not deviate more than 1/8” from specified elevations. Trueness measurement to be taken from 10’ long straight edge placed in all directions. 3.15 CLEAN-UP A. Repair and replace broken or defective concrete as directed by the Engineer. B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from the pavement for at least fourteen (14) days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. C. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION —32 13 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 17 23 – PAGE 1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND SIGNAGE BID SET 4/15/2022   PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work includes constructing pavement markings and traffic control signage impacted by work in the ROW area as indicated on the drawing, or as required by the owner. 1.02 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. B. All work shall conform with the current edition of Standard Specifications and Standard Plans for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, as published by the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT), unless otherwise indicated herein. C. The Contractor shall have one copy of the Standard Specifications and Standard Plans at the job site D. The Standard Specifications apply only to performance and materials and how they are to be incorporated into the work. The legal/contractual relationship sections and the measurement and payment sections do not apply to this document. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT A. Paint for pavement markings shall comply with Section 9-34 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. The paint shall be factory mixed, quick drying and nonbleeding. Colors shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.02 PLASTIC A. Plastic for pavement markings shall be one of the following: 1. Plastic - Pressure Sensitive Marking Material MANUFACTURER NAME BRAND QUANTITY Prismo Universal Co. Prismo Brand 60 mil Prismo Universal Co. Prismo Brand 90 mil 3M Company Stamark 5730 Series 60 mil 3M Company Stamark 350 Series 60 mil KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 17 23 – PAGE 2 PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND SIGNAGE BID SET 4/15/2022   3M Company Stamark 380 Series 60 mil a. Plastic pressure sensitive marking materials are not allowed on bituminous surface treatment (BST) pavement. 2. Plastic - Extruded Materials MANUFACTURER IDENTIFICATION QUANTITY Lafrentz Road Service Ltd. Lafrentz Thermoplastic 125 mil Pave-Mark Corporation Pave-Mark Hydrocarbon 125 mil Pave-Mark Corporation Pave-Mark Alkyd 125 mil * Swedish A.B. Cleanosol Cleanosol IT 125 mil * Approved for installation in Western Washington only B. Colors shall be white or as indicated on the drawings. 2.03 SIGNS A. Install signs as specified City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Pavement markings installation shall conform with Section 8-22.3 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except that the Contractor shall be responsible for all layout and control points, striping shall not deviate more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet from a straight line and striping shall not be more than 1-inch from the specified locations. Paint striping shall only be applied after the pavement has been allowed to cure 14 days minimum, when the pavement is clean and dry and when the temperature is above 50 degrees F. B. Signs shall be located and installed as shown on the plans. All signposts shall be plumb and all signs shall be level. END OF SECTION – 32 17 23 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 18 16.13 PAGE 1 SYNTHETIC SAFETY SURFACING – POURED IN PLACE EPDM BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish and install poured in place safety surfacing comprised of synthetic, resilient material of gradated rubber granules and polyurethane binding agents mixed and poured-in-place on site, as required by the drawings and specifications. 1.02 RELATED SECTION Section 11 68 13 – Playground Equipment Section 12 93 00 – Site Furnishings Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork Section 32 13 00 – Concrete Paving 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Strictly adhere to the manufacturer's instructions regarding product handling, subbase preparation, surfacing system application and all other aspects of the surfacing installation. B. Qualifications/References: The Contractor or subcontractor must have proven successful experience in the construction installation of poured-in-place resilient matting within the last three (3) years. The installation must be completed by certified factory installers from the location of the manufacturer. C. Special Requirements: 1. The safety surface products shall meet or exceed the current Consumer Products Safety Commission 200-g guideline and ASTM F1292-91. The Contractor shall submit two copies (2) of the manufacturer's independent test results showing conformance. Reports must be for the exact thickness to be installed. 2. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's three-year material warranty for all safety surface system materials. 3. Accessibility for Disabled Persons: comply with requirements for an accessible route as recommended by U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit charts or samples of available colors. B. Not less than 30 days prior to intended use of materials, submit full documentation of specific product literature illustrating its compliance with this Section. C. Submit list of recent installations of safety surface. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 18 16.13 PAGE 2 SYNTHETIC SAFETY SURFACING – POURED IN PLACE EPDM BID SET 4/15/2022 D. The Contractor shall submit the following samples to the Owner within ten (10) days after Notice to Proceed. 1. Material samples – two (2) 12”x12”x (thickness required for highest fall height), samples of each color of poured in place surfacing being poured on the project. The samples shall be submitted to the Owner for approval upon request. 2. Clean, washed, 5/8” crushed rock fractured all sides as base course to Poured in Place. E. The Contractor shall submit the following test reports to the Owner within ten (10) days after Notice to Proceed. 1. Test Reports – A copy of manufacturer’s test reports indicating compliance with the latest U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission’s Technical Guidelines for Public Playground Safety with regard to thickness of product beneath various equipment height ranges. IPEMA certification required – 1292-99 impact testing. In order to determine performance and longevity, the following test reports shall be required and tested by a certified laboratory. The tests must certify that each material item has been tested for the following physical properties: ASTM F-1292, Shock attenuation and HIC ASTM E-108, Flame Spread ASTM E-303, Skid Resistance ASTM D-412, Tensile Strength ASTM D-6421/86, Tear Resistance Permeability Proof that the product has been manufactured for at least 5 years Material safety data sheets Copy of a list of recommended maintenance procedures 1.05 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS All Material shall be delivered to the construction site in its original unopened containers clearly labeled with trade name and name of manufacturer. 1.06 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT Warranty and Guarantee: The manufacturer shall guarantee all materials to be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of ten (10) years. Defects include edge raveling, resistance to mildew, bacterial growth, bubbling, delaminating, peeling, loss of integrity, color fading, shedding, cracking, shrinkage and poor UV stability, temporary yellowing or discoloration. The manufacturer must warrant the product to perform in accordance with specifications and against material breakdowns caused by failure of chemical bond under normal use. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 18 16.13 PAGE 3 SYNTHETIC SAFETY SURFACING – POURED IN PLACE EPDM BID SET 4/15/2022 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING Deliver, store and handle all resilient matting materials to prevent damage and deterioration. All damage, cuts, tears to bags, etc., resulting from improper handing will be the responsibility of the Contractor, and will be replaced at the Contractor’s expense as deemed necessary by the Owner. Store and protect as required in cold weather conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Poured in place safety surfacing shall be a rubber resilient matting material as specified herein. B. The safety surfacing shall have fall or shock attenuation for an 11-foot (11') height as per ASTM F1292 and ASTM D3676 in the Lunar Lander area. Lunar Rover and Astronaut area shall be as specified in the drawings. C. The safety surface shall be free draining. D. The poured in place safety surfacing, non-slip surface finish. E. The poured in place safety surfacing shall be rubber or rubber like with maximum utilization of recycled material. F. The poured in place safety surfacing shall be set over compacted crushed aggregate base course. G. The poured in place safety surfacing shall be available in permanent colors. H. All materials shall be non-toxic under all conditions of normal use. 2.02 POURED IN PLACE SAFETY SURFACING A. New resilient matting material shall be a seamless, poured-in-place, hand-troweled application. The surfacing system shall consist of a rubber SBR cushion layer and a top EPDM rubber granule wearing course. All rubber granules shall be bound together with a polyurethane binder. The entire system is poured over a compacted aggregate base course or concrete slab. The thickness of the layers shall be from manufacturer’s recommendation based on possible fall height. B. The following manufacturers and products have been specified as those which are pre-approved and accepted as equal due to warranty, guarantee, and materials required for maximum strength and durability. 1.“No Fault Safety Surfacing” – as supplied by NW Playgrounds Contact: Chris McGarvey Parks Consultant – Southwest Washington Northwest Playground Equipment 425.681.5848 | Direct 425.313.9161 | Office KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 18 16.13 PAGE 4 SYNTHETIC SAFETY SURFACING – POURED IN PLACE EPDM BID SET 4/15/2022 http://www.nwplayground.com 2.“SpectraPour” by Spectrturf 3.“Surface America” by Tatonka Playgrounds 4.“Playbound” by Surface America 5.“GT Impax” by Gametime 6.“Tot turf” by Robertson Industries, Inc. 7.“Pebble Flex” by Landscape Structures C. Materials 1.Aliphatic Urethane Binder: Two component urethane. Binder shall contain no solvents, have a low odor, and be ultraviolet resistant 2.Wearing Course: Ethylene-Propylene-Dion-Monomere (EPDM) pigmented synthetic rubber granules chipped and graded to 1-3.5mm in size. Strand or shredded rubber is not acceptable. Binder for the wear course only shall be non-ambering and aliphatic. 3.Cushion Course: Styrene-Butadien-Rubber (SBR) processed rubber granules, cellular rubber granules, and polyurethane binder. The entire surface system shall be permeable to water at approximately 0.5 gal/sec. 4.Colors: a.Wearing course colors shall be as specified herein. b.Color A: 50% Light Gray with 50% Dark gray c.Color B: 100% Black d.Color C: 100% Dark Gray e.Color D: 100% Light Gray f.Color E: 100% Light Pearl g.Selection shall be made from the standard available colors. h.Submit samples as specified. Owner has the right to reject the material on the basis of color or mix consistency i.Impact course shall be all black – no color. 5.Shop drawings required for installation and layout of pattern shown on drawings. 6.Concrete: Install per plans and details and per section 32 13 00 Concrete Paving 2.03 CLEAN WASHED CRUSHED ROCK 1.Clean, washed, 5/8” crushed rock fractured all side for base course to Poured in Place (PIP) surfacing. Submit 1 pound bag. a.Sieve range SIEVE SIZE % PASSING 5/8” square sieve 95 - 100 3/8” square sieve 50 - 75 US No. 4 sieve 5-10 US No. 8 sieve 0-5 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 18 16.13 PAGE 5 SYNTHETIC SAFETY SURFACING – POURED IN PLACE EPDM BID SET 4/15/2022 2.04 FILTER FABRIC 1. See earthwork section 31 20 00 for filter fabric. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Do not proceed until conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work have been satisfactorily corrected and thus meet the manufacturer's instructions. Beginning work constitutes approval of conditions as satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION Conform strictly to manufacturer's instructions using all appropriate accessories as required. A. Poured in Place Safety Surfacing 1. Subbase and Surface Preparation: The entire area is to be cleaned of all trees, stumps, vegetation, and topsoil. Prepare the subbase by scarifying the existing surface, raking and conforming to a consistent level below top of existing concrete edger, and then to roll to a compacted state. The subbase shall be brought to required grades, stable, properly compacted, and frost free. Remove any existing topsoil, if too high, or fill and compact as needed. When fill is required, it shall be placed in six-inch lifts and compacted to a density of 95% proctor. Spray play surface area with water to achieve 95% proctor. 2. Install filter fabric as a separation layer where shown on the drawings. Filter fabric shall wrap up a minimum 4” of surrounding concrete surfaces 3. Place and compact clean washed crushed rock base prior to PIP surface installation to 90- 95% proctor. Depth shall be as shown in the drawings. Ensure slope of crushed rock conforms to slope of finish PIP installation. 4. Prior to installation of poured in place safety surfacing layout color regions in the field for approval by the Owner. 5. See Section 31 20 00 Earthwork for sub-base compaction requirements. 6. Slope: all play areas shall be sloped according to plans. All succeeding construction shall conform to the same slope. 7. Cushion Course: Contractor shall install thick cushion course (thickness required by manufacturer and as called out on the plans) over the aggregate base. The total thickness shall be recommended per ASTM-1292-99 a. The Contractor shall adhere to the following installation procedure: 1) Determine manageable batch size KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 18 16.13 PAGE 6 SYNTHETIC SAFETY SURFACING – POURED IN PLACE EPDM BID SET 4/15/2022 2)Thoroughly mix ingredients by mechanical drum mixer to ensure all granules are coated. Rubber granules, binder, and mixing additives must be mixed at least 2 minutes to ensure a complete coating of particles. 3)Establish reference points using screed strips to establish proper depth of poured-in-place cushion course. The cushion shall be poured-in-place by means of screeding and hand-troweled to maintain a seamless application. 4)Prior to placement of the cushion course, the Contractor shall prime the vertical edges of all existing concrete to ensure matting does not pull away from edges 5)Allow the cushion course to cure properly before installing the top wearing course surface. 8.Top Wearing Course: The poured cap material shall be composed of EPDM granular rubber and polyurethane resin. The thickness of the poured cap material shall be determined by manufacturer but shall not be less than ½" thick. The wearing course shall be screed, troweled, and compacted onto the cushion course. To maintain a seamless application, the top wearing course must be completed within one working day. All rubber shall remain consistent in gradation and size. Color tinted binder will not be allowed. a.The wearing course must be compacted manually by using hand trowels and light rollers b.All mixing shall be done by means of the mixmatic M 1200 D. Rubber granules, polyurethane binder, and mixing additives must be mixed at least 2 minutes to ensure a complete coating of the particles. 9.Curing time: Curing time in between the cushion course and top wearing course shall be approximately 12 hours. Curing time before use must be at least 48 hours after completion of wearing surface 10.Weather Limitations: The matting shall not be applied during adverse weather conditions, such as rain, sleet, or snowstorms. Based on specific manufacturer’s recommendations, resilient matting shall not be installed if temperature is below 50ºF. Should any additional cold weather curing ingredients be needed, it shall be at the contractor’s expense. 11.Protection: The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the resilient matting during the installation process. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the protection of the surface during the curing period following the completion of the installation. It is required that a temporary 6’ high chain link security fence be installed around the perimeter of all the playgrounds from the start of construction through project final acceptance, 12.Any damages to the surfacing during this curing period shall be paid for at the Contractor’s expense. B. Maintenance and Cleanup 1.Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall remove all containers and surplus material leaving the site in a clean and orderly condition acceptable to the Owner. 2.Contractor shall provide the Owner with a certificate of satisfactory workmanship and warranty application to Surfacing Manufacturer. 3.Contractor shall supply the Owner with surfacing maintenance guidelines at the completion of the project. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 18 16.13 PAGE 7 SYNTHETIC SAFETY SURFACING – POURED IN PLACE EPDM BID SET 4/15/2022 4. Contractor shall supply the Owner with two (2) fifty (50) pound bags of the identical color of EPDM granular rubber used for the project and a five (5) gallon pail of resin. 5. Contractor to provide shop drawings for patterns in poured-in-place surfacing. 3.03 GUARANTEES A. The Contractor shall further guarantee that all work performed under this section shall be free from defects in material and workmanship. Upon notice in writing from the Owner to the Contractor within one (1) year of Physical Completion of the project, the Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, make necessary repairs or replacements of the defective work in question. During this period of guarantee, the Owner shall perform normal maintenance, repairing damage and cleaning. END OF SECTION 32 18 16.13 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 1 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS See attached plans for layout and design. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK Remove and replace existing irrigation system and to furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to install a complete and operable new automatic irrigation system as indicated on the plans and as specified herein. Existing meter at point of connection will be maintained. Valve box and existing doublecheck valve and point of connection shall be replaced with new valve box and new doublecheck valve assembly as specified herein. Existing controller and cabinet will be replaced. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to establish and appropriate staging area. 1.03 STANDARDS AND QUALIFICATIONS Irrigation Subcontractor must be a state licensed landscape irrigation contractor. The irrigation system must be installed by a journeyman irrigation mechanic or journeyman plumber. Valve wiring of 24 volts shall be installed per local code requirements by the Irrigation Subcontractor or Electrical Subcontractor. 1.04 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND LAYOUT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a complete and current record of all equipment installed including catalogue cuts, and for recording any deviations to the plans by horizontal and vertical dimensions. As-built records shall be updated daily, and be available daily for review by the Owner’s Representative and/or Engineer. Any pipe not installed in accordance with the plans shall be dimensioned to a permanent structure sufficient for location after burial. B. Upon completion of the work and prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a neat and legible as-built plan, of the completed irrigation system. All quick couplers, automatic valves, manual valves, and electrical boxes shall be dimensioned on the as-built plan to two permanent monuments, such as scoreboard and light poles, sprinkler heads, etc. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 2 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Layout shall be done by the Contractor subject to the review and approval of the Owner. No 45-degree angles will be allowed at line connections. 1.05 SYSTEM PROTECTION As part of the one-year warranty under this contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for deactivating and draining of the system, in the presence of Owner's maintenance staff, prior to the onset of the freezing season, and for reactivating the system at the onset of the following spring growing season. Notify Owner 48 hours in advance so that maintenance staff can be present. 1.06 SYSTEM FAMILIARIZATION Prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall spend sufficient training time with the Owner to ensure that the irrigation system can be operated, maintained, winterized and reactivated properly after the departure of the Contractor. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of all manufacturer's data sheets, maintenance sheets, replacement part lists, winterization procedures, and equipment brochures. Composite sheets shall have the specific products used on this project highlighted. Provide a three ring binder with each set of documents, per Section 01700. 1.08 IRRIGATION SYSTEM COMPLETION A. The Contractor shall submit the following items to the Owner upon completion of the work: 1. Warranty Cards on all equipment warranted. 2. As-built plans electronically recorded and printed. 3. Maintenance manuals. 4. Four (4) complete sets of tools and two (2) sets of keys (cabinet keys, valve keys, valve box cover keys, quick coupler keys, etc.) necessary to operate/drain/activate the system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTIC PIPE, FITTINGS AND CEMENT KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 3 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 A. Mainline pipe: Sch 40, solvent weld B. Lateral piping: Sch 40, solvent weld. C. Pipe shall be marked with manufacturer's name, class of pipe, NSF seal and date of manufacturer run. PVC pipe shall be Pacific-Western or approved equal. Pipe shall bear no evidence of interior or exterior extrusion marks. Pipe walls shall be uniform, smooth, and glossy. Pipe may be pre-belled or with individual solvent-weld couplings. D. Fittings: Fittings shall be of the brand(s) recommended by manufacturer of the pipe. Fittings for solvent weld PVC lateral pipe shall be heavy wall Schedule 40 weight, full size PVC. PVC riser fittings for all swing joints and for solvent weld mainline shall be schedule 80 minimum. PVC fittings shall be Lasco or approved equal. D. Cement: PVC solvent compounds shall be IPS "Weld-On" P-70 purple primer and "Weld-On" P711 heavy-bodied blue cement or approved equal. 2.02 CONDUIT FOR IRRIGATION WIRING Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC, size noted on plans, are required under all paved areas, and at all maintenance vehicle access. 2.02 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL A. Approved native fill. B. Sand 1.Sand: the sand shall be a natural, washed sand of rounded particles, free of fines, clay, silt, stones, or other debris. . Sand shall meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 9.5 mm 100 6.7 mm 100 4.75 mm 99.9 2.36 mm 97-100 1.18 mm 70-90 600 um 25-60 300 um 5-25 150 um 0-3 75 um 0 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 4 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding shall meet the requirements of the WSDOT Standard Specifications most recent edition, Section 9-03.12(3) for Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding. 2.02 PIPE AND WIRE SLEEVES Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC, size noted on plans, are required under all paved areas, and at all maintenance vehicle access. 2.03 SPRINKLER HEADS Rainbird: Rainbird 1800 SAM. Van, MPR. Hunter: MP Rotator nozzles: MP1000, MP2000, MP3000, MP strips. MP Rotator nozzles will be installed on 1800 SAM. Rainbird 1806 -6” Riser shall be used in lawn areas. Rainbird 1812 - 12” Riser shall be used in planting bed areas. Sprinkler heads are called out on the Drawing Legend. 2.04 SPRINKLER AND QUICK COUPLING RISERS A. Risers for quick coupling valves: " Lasco swing joint kit G132-100 (MIPT inlet x MIPT outlet) or approved equal, rated for 315 psi minimum with Schedule 80 PVC lay length nipple. Length of nipple determined by depth of mainline pipe and 45 degree angle setting. B. Risers for Rainbird 1800 shall be SA Series 6”,12”,or 18” depending on spacing from lateral to head inlet. 2.05 QUICK COUPLING VALVES Quick Coupling Valves: Buckner QB5LRC10 1”, One piece, Double slot, brass, yellow rubber cover. Provide two Buckner QB55K10 quick coupler keys, two Buckner QHS10-10 I" mpt x I" hose swivel ells, and two lock-top cover keys. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 5 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 2.06 AUTOMATIC VALVES Automatic Valves: Rain Bird PESB Plastic Industrial Scrubber Valve with Flow Control FIPT x FIPT 24 VAC. Provide unions on both sides of valves. Install isolation gate valve on mainline immediately prior to union. If the isolation valve, unions, and automatic valve will not fit in the automatic valve box; then install isolation valve upstream of automatic valve in a separate Carson-Brooks round valve box (see 2.07 F). 2.07 VALVE BOXES A. Automatic Valve Boxes: NDS Standard Valve Box Rectangle 14 in. x 19 in. x 12 in. H Green Box/Green Lid Overlapping ICV. Box needs to be large enough to fit both unions inside the valve box. Provide extension NDS Standard Valve Box Extension Body (only) Rectangle 14 in. x 19 in. x 6 in. Green with each valve box. B. At Point-of-Connection assembly: Concrete utility vault 25 – TA. Backflow Prevention Device Assemblies (1-1/2” O.D. and larger) must be installed in a Fogtite #25-TA Concrete Vault, or approved equal, as shown on the Plans and Details. For backflow prevention devices (1-1/4 O.D. and smaller), use Fogtite #2 Meter Box or Christy Concrete Vault, or approved equal, with metal lid and extensions and/or bricks as required. C. Master valve: NDS Standard Valve Box Rectangle 14 in. x 19 in. x 12 in.H Green Box/Green Lid Overlapping ICV Box needs to be large enough to fit both unions inside the valve box. Provide extension NDS Standard Valve Box Extension Body (only) Rectangle 14 in. x 19 in. x 6 in. Green with each valve box. D. Quick coupling valve boxes: Carson-Brooks, green plastic, marked "Irrigation”, 910-12 with 910-3B bolt down cover, 10" diameter circular box or approved equal. E. Mainline gate valve boxes: Carson-Brooks, green plastic, marked "Irrigation", Model 1220-12 with 1220-4B bolt-down T cover, marked “irrigation” or approved equal with 6" diameter PVC sleeve below per detail. 2.08 GATE VALVES KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 6 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 Gate Valve: Class 150 brass or bronze body with cross handle in 10" diameter valve box with 6” diameter PVC sleeve. Valve size to match size of mainline or service line. Provide Owner with one 30" valve-operating key formed to fit the cross handle gate valves. Stem stock shall be 1/2" minimum. Quality equal to Nibco T-133. 2.09 BALL VALVES (Control Valve Shut-off) Ball Valve: brass or bronze body with steel plated handle for use in automatic control valve boxes. Valve size to match size of automatic control valve. Quality equal to Nibco. T-FP-600. 2.10 MASTER VALVE AND FLOW SENSOR/MONITOR Brass master valve: Rainbird. EFB-CP Series Calsense Flow Meters, FM series: Schedule 80 PVC One Red wire and One Black of 14 AWG wire from master valve and flow sensor to controller to be installed by contractor. Provide 2 spare wires to master valve and 2 spare wires to flow meter when 2-wire system is not used. 2.11 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY (POC) New FEBCO 850U double-check valve assembly, size as per drawing, to be installed and tested. This shall replace the existing unit. The unit shall include resilient seated gate valves, and unions on both ends of DCVA. Installed per code. Install 4 test cock adapters on DCVA. Point of connection will update and replace the existing DCVA and will be modified to accommodate master valve and flow sensor. The point of connection includes the following in order: Existing meter, inline shutoff valve, backflow preventer, system blowdown, master valve, and flow meter. Refer to City of Kent Standard Detail 3-13(b) for deduct meter installation requirements. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 7 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 2.12 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS Calsence CS3000. See irrigation and electrical plans for controller specifications. Coordinate with Calsense rep. for proper ordering of CS3000 controller. Automatic controller will be purchased by Contractor and installed by Contractor. Contractor responsible for wiring valves to controller. Contractor to coordinate location and installation of controller. Cabinet Enclosure: As shown and specified on electrical plans Decoders for 2-wire system: CS-2W   2-Wire cable 14-gauge (1.5 mm) solid copper, jacketed Paige P7354D or Regency’s Hunter® Decoder Cable Rain Bucket Model RB-1 Two-conductor cable (25-ft., included) • Paige® P7171D communication cable (200-ft.max run). wire splices: • 3M™ Scotchcast™ Connector Sealing Pack 3570G-N • Spears® DS-100 Dri-Splice Connectors with DS-300 Dri-Splice Sealant 2.13 REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE CONNECTION Calsense Command Center Online web application to manage resources from compatible internet connected devices including PCs, laptop, tablets and smart phones. 2.14 CONTROL WIRES FOR VALVES AND PIPE TRACER WIRE A. Calsense POC decoder, model CS-2W-POC Calsense 2-Station decoder, model CS-2W-2ST B. Tracer Wire: #12 bare copper locator wire. U.L. approved as UF, ASTM B-3 rated for all below grade piping. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 8 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 C. The last decoder of each wire run When using 2-wire system provide minimum ¾” conduit to run the 2-wire wiring from controller to each valve. 2.15 ELECTRICAL WIRE SPLICES AND TAPE Electrical splices for valve control wire: The 3M™ Scotchcast™ Connector Sealing Pack 3570G-N no substitutions. All-weather type electrical tape shall be black plastic, 3/4 inch wide and a minimum of 0.007 inches thick. 2.16 GROUNDING RODS A. Copper Ground rods to be installed at: The controller The decoder closest to every 300-ft. of wire run Use Pentek or NDS Pro Series 6-7-inch diameter round box, or approved equal, for grounding rods, green color. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING - LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A. Pipe shall be installed with a minimum of 12" and 16" maximum cover for all laterals, and 18" minimum and 24" maximum for all mainline. B. Irrigation pipe shall be installed in trenches sufficiently wide to permit tamping tools for backfilling alongside both sides of the pipe. However, in no case shall trench exceed the width necessary to satisfy this requirement without prior approval of Owner Representative. The pipe shall be laid on stable soil with trench bottom evenly graded. Ledge rock, boulders, large stones and cobbles 2" or larger in diameter shall be removed to provide no contact with the pipe. Excavations remaining from the removal of large rocks shall be refilled and compacted with select material. Where multiple pipes share common trench, trench shall be sufficiently wide, or piping shall be arranged to allow 2" minimum horizontal separation and 6" minimum vertical separation between pipes while maintaining specified minimum cover over piping. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 9 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 A. Where rock or other conditions are present and it is impossible to obtain the specified depth of mains, laterals or wire that is not accompanied by pipe, "Designated Authority" shall review each case and make a determination as to whether less cover depth is acceptable or whether rock removal or other solutions are required. Cut any roots encountered with a saw C. Trench bottoms with uniform slopes 1/2% standard minimum grade. Compact trench bottom prior to placing bedding material. Bottom of trenches shall be smooth and free of sharp rock and other objects that may damage pipe. D. Remove materials unsuitable for bedding of pipe to a depth of 4 inches below trench bottom and backfill with sand or suitable bedding material. Where backfill contains excessive rock and other material that may damage pipe, or in the opinion of Owner excavated material is not suitable for backfill, use sand acceptable to Owner. Keep construction gravel separate from topsoil. E. Provide trench of sufficient width to allow for proper tamping around pipe. F. Place backfill material in maximum 4 inch lifts (loose measurements) and compact to the dry density of adjacent undisturbed soil. G. Irrigation pipe shall not be installed in drainage trenches. 3.02 BACKFILLING A. Contractor will request open ditch inspection from owner’s representative 24-hours in advance prior to any backfilling. No acceptance will be given on an un-inspected pipe. B. Backfill when PVC pipe is not in an expanded condition due to heat or pressure. In refilling trenches, fill around pipe and fittings shall be free from large rocks and shall be well tamped. Where it is determined that insufficient bedding material exists in the pipe trenches, install sand bedding 3" above and below piping. Owner's Representative shall determine need for sand bedding. C. Backfilling of initial bedding material around irrigation lines shall be accomplished in a 4" lift followed by compaction. Backfill with 4" over the pipe, compacting to achieve adequate compaction alongside and under the pipe with appropriate compactors. Additional lifts shall be 6" maximum and compacted before adding the next loose lift. Top of trenches shall be backfilled even with subgrade, top layer shall be a 4” lift of topsoil for lawn restoration (or surrounding grade), raised to a slight mound and rolled with a 250 pound roller or approved compactor or vibrator. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 10 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 D. The trenches shall be thoroughly compacted to 90% density at optimum moisture content with an approved compactor or vibrator. Contractor shall not backfill with material determined to be of excessive or inadequate moisture content. All roots, rocks, and surplus excavations shall be removed from the site. Contractor is responsible for all trench settlement during the one-year warranty period of the Contract. Contractor will not mound the trenches to allow for compaction. 3.03 GALVANIZED PIPE AND FITTINGS All galvanized pipe above grade shall be painted with one coat each galvanized metal primer and matte alkyd oil enamel. 3.04 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Plastic Pipe: Plastic pipe shall be solvent welded. All solvent weld plastic pipe and fittings shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions at all times. Great care shall be taken to ensure that the inside of the pipe is absolutely clean. Any pipe ends not being worked must be protected and not left open. Cleaning of cutting burrs is mandatory. All stored piping material shall be covered and adequately protected from sunlight per manufacturer recommendations. B. Prior to construction of this project, Contractor shall provide written evidence that all Contractor staff assigned to solvent welding duties of PVC pipe or fittings are in possession of a current and up-to-date certification card issued by manufacturer representative of specified solvent cement. If Contractor’s staff are not in possession of current certification cards, Contractor shall schedule and complete a training seminar (conducted by solvent cement manufacturer representative) ultimately providing written evidence of certified staff to "Designated Authority" prior to construction. Only staff who are certified shall be permitted to solvent weld pipe and fittings. C. For solvent weld pipe, PVC pipe ends shall be cut at 90 degree to the pipe length and cleaned of all burrs prior to cementing. Use approved reaming tool. Pipe ends shall be wiped clean with a rag lightly wetted with PVC thinner. Prospective joints shall be completely free from any moisture or condensation. Cement shall be applied with a light coat on the inside of the fitting and a heavier coat on the outside of the pipe (no further back from the end of pipe than the fitting would slip). Application of cement on the interior of the fittings shall be quantified to ensure no cement shall be pushed into the flow stream of the pipe. Pipe shall be inserted into the fitting and given a quarter turn to seat the cement. Excess cement shall be wiped from the outside of the pipe. Cement that becomes unduly thick or heavy shall not be thinned and re-used. CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF CEMENT PROPERLY, OFF SITE. Pipe will be pressure tested as indicated elsewhere in these specifications. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 11 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 D. Solvent weld joints shall be given at least 15 minutes set-up time before moving or handling. Pipe shall be partially center-loaded to prevent arching or slipping. No water shall be permitted in the pipe until a period of at least 10 hours has elapsed for solvent weld set and cure. E. Backfilling shall be done when the pipe is not in an expanded condition due to heat or pressure. Cooling of the pipe can be accomplished by operating the system for a short period of time before backfilling, or by backfilling in the early part of the morning before the heat of the day. Before pressure testing, solvent weld joints shall be given at least 24 hours cure time. 3.05 PIPE AND WIRE SLEEVES Provide pipe sleeves as shown on plans under paved areas, maintenance access, or as required. Sleeves shall be Sch 40 pipe, at least twice the size of the protected pipe. Provide 2 parallel pipe sleeves where shown on plans or as required. Second sleeve is to provide additional room/space for 24-volt wiring. 3.06 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Sprinklers shall not be installed until all mains and lateral lines have been thoroughly flushed. When flushing, ensure adequate pressure and water velocity at any head location being flushed. If Owner determines that any portion of system has significant contamination, Contractor may be required to flush the affected mains with high volume flushing through a discharge point other than sprinkler laterals and risers. Contractor shall install temporary flushing valves, if required to meet the aforementioned corrective measure. B. The pre-fabricated swing joints shall be snug and free from leaks. Any threaded joint that leak shall be removed, and re-installed. Where leaking exists on a swing joint, the faulty swing joint shall be removed from the joint and not re-used elsewhere on the project. 3.07 SETTING OF SPRINKLER HEADS Sprinklers in turf shall be set to finish grade such that a mower may pass over the head without touching the casing with the blades (1/4" clear). Heads shall be installed true with finish grade without interference of the sprinkler performance. Sprinklers shall be KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 12 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 thoroughly backfilled with native soil at optimum moisture content. Contractor shall adjust arc on part circle sprinkler heads to Owner's satisfaction. 3.08 QUICK COUPLING VALVE RISERS Triple swing joint with threaded outlet connection to quick coupling valves as well as quick coupling valve swing joint inlet connection to irrigation mainline tap (TOE fitting) shall be assembled with two wraps of "Teflon" tape; all other fittings solvent weld. Anytime a nipple has been removed, the threaded joint shall be re-wrapped with new tape. Threaded connections shall be watertight. 3.09 QUICK COUPLING VALVES Owner shall approve all locations prior to construction. All quick coupling valves shall be installed with triple swing joints and valve boxes per detail. Install Dura anti-rotation device on the valve. 3.10 AUTOMATIC VALVES Install one Automatic Valve per valve box. Flush supply lines before installing automatic valves. Use valve box extensions to ensure that the box extends completely below bottom of valve. For pressure regulating valves, set downstream pressure with Owner approval. 3.11 DECODERS Install decoders per manufacturer recommendation at automatic control valves. Attach decoders to upper side of value box using self-tapping stainless steel screws. 3.12 VALVE BOXES A. Install all automatic valve boxes flush with finish grade such that if applicable, a reel type mower may pass over without interference. Set plumb. Install pipe sleeve per Detail Drawing. Valve box archway shall not rest on piping. B. All automatic valve boxes shall be set on a continuous foundation of brick as detailed and left with a clean layer of gravel in the bottom. Quick coupling valve boxes shall be left with a clean layer of gravel in the bottom. See details. If construction debris washes into the automatic valve or quick coupling valve boxes prior to project completion, remove existing gravel and replace with new gravel. 3.13 GATE VALVES KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 13 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 Valve box and pipe sleeve and concrete thrust block shall be installed for all mainline gate valves. Coordinate location of gate valve on mainline with the Owner. Install up to two gate valves for each site. 3.14 BALL VALVES Valve box and pipe sleeve shall be installed for all mainline ball valves. Coordinate location of ball valve on mainline with the Owner. Install up to two ball valves for each site. 3.15 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION CONTROLLER Contractor shall install controller per drawing. Terminate auxiliary wires in controller. Label auxiliary wires with number of valve at the end of the auxiliary wire route. 3.16 MASTER VALVE/FLOW SENSOR 1. Install Master Valve/Flow Sensors per manufacturer's specifications. 2. Coordinate wiring with control equipment (blue and yellow wires required). 3. Coordinate with Owner preference of master valve in normally open or closed system. Designate terminal for master valve. 4. All Master Valves and Flow Sensors must be enclosed in valve boxes with valve box extensions as required, as shown on the Details. 3.17 PIPE TRACER WIRE AND SPLICES A. Tape one #14 bare copper tracer wire on top of all mains and laterals. Tie all bare copper wire together in one continuous web; locate common tie point in a 10" round gray valve box and dimension on the As-Built to two sprinkler heads. B. All splices must be encapsulated in a 3M Brand DBY Direct Burial Splice Kit. All splices must be contained in a plastic valve box. No splices are permitted between controller and the valves. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 14 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 3.18 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY A. New Backflow Prevention Devices are to be certified per local Health District requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging certification and providing one (1) copy to the Owner prior to Final Acceptance. 3.19 SYSTEM FLUSHING The entire system shall be flushed prior to the installation of the sprinkler heads. After capping all risers, Contractor shall remove the cap nearest the automatic valve, flush and recap. Repeat this process until the last head on the circuit is flushed. 3.20 PRESSURE TEST A. Mainline: Conduct a hydro-static pressure test of 150 psi for 30 minutes, by attaching a test pump to the PVC mainline at any leak-proof quick coupling valve (or at temporary connection at the Contractor's option). Cap at applicable points, if necessary. Leave all system joint, connections, etc., exposed until after completion and acceptance of pressure test. Fill the mainline from the connecting point until all air is removed from the mainline. Ensure that all automatic valves are manually closed with the flow control stem prior to starting the test. Apply 150-pound test to the mainline after the connecting point and hold for one hour. The maximum allowable pressure drop shall be limited to 5 psi in 30 minutes. At the end of the test, open the test pump valve and slowly remove the pressure from the pump and mainline. The test is complete at this point if the pressure drop is at or below that prescribed above. B. Laterals: Leave all system joint, connections, etc., exposed until after completion and acceptance of pressure test. Purge air from laterals and cap risers. Open valves and bring system to line pressure. Inspect lateral lines visually. Repair leaks, however minor. Re-test all rejected systems or portion. Test before installing "swing pipe" for spray heads. C. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, and labor for the test and any required or necessary re-testing. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 48 hours prior to the test so an Owner’s representative may witness the test. 3.21 PERFORMANCE TESTS KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 80 00 — PAGE 15 IRRIGATION BID SET 4/15/2022 A. Upon completion of the system installation and after the flushing and pressure tests have been completed, the Contractor shall operate the system in the presence of the Owner. Sprinklers shall be adjusted to provide complete coverage and proper operation of the system. B. System shall be tested for manual, semi-automatic and fully automatic operation. Failure of the system to function in any of the manners described will require re- scheduling of the test. Contractor is expected to have tested all electrical components of the system thoroughly prior to calling for an automation test. Check for proper operation of Owner-provided hand-held remote control device. Owner shall verify that transmitter and receiver are operational. C. After the system demonstration, the Owner may request up to five (5) percent of the total nozzles be substituted at no additional cost to the contract. 3.22 FINAL APPROVAL Upon completion of all tests, substantial completion approval for the system will be contingent upon Contractor providing signed and approved permits as may be applicable. 3.23 SYSTEM OPERATION A. The Contractor shall schedule a training session for the Owner's representatives for the operation/winterizing of the system. The Owner will be notified of this session at least 48 hours in advance. B. When using compressed air to winterize the system, do so in two short cycles at no more than 80 psi air pressure. Do not allow pipe to compressor to get hot to the touch. 3.24 CLEANUP A. Keep premises reasonably free from accumulation of debris. B. On completion of each division of Work, remove all debris, equipment and surplus materials and leave the project site in a neat and orderly fashion. C. Restore all disturbed lawn areas to condition prior to construction. END OF SECTION - 32 80 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 1 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section specifies Landscaping which comprises furnishing all materials, equipment, and labor necessary for the preparation and installment of soil, soil stabilization, plant materials, mulch, tree stakes, maintenance of plantings and the installation of rock. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. General: All work shall be in accordance with Uniform Building Code and City of Kent requirements. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard, such as commercial, federal specification, a trade association standard or other similar standard, shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof and any amendment with supplement thereto in effect on the date of invitation for bids, except as limited to type, class or grade, when modified in such reference. B. Plant Materials: All plant material shall meet the American Association of Nurserymen Standard ANSI 260.1-1990. Plant names shall conform to the latest edition of “Standardized Plant Names” as adopted by American Joint Committee of Horticulture Nomenclature. C. Agricultural Chemist: Qualified, experienced public or private soils testing laboratory, capable of providing test results as specified, and approved by the Engineer. 1.3 INSPECTION OF PLANT MATERIALS A. All plant material will be inspected by the Project Engineer before being planted and all plant material not meeting specification requirements will be rejected and separated from acceptable. B. Contractor shall at his/her own expense replace rejected trees, shrubs, and groundcovers with plant material of same species or variety that meet specification requirements. 1.4 TIME A. Place seed and plants during periods which are normal for such work as determined by the season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. B. Seed for lawn between March 15 and October 15 when weather conditions are favorable for proper working of the soil and seed germination. Any seeding must be approved in writing by the Project Engineer. Refer to Sod Lawn specifications. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Meet requirements of Contract Conditions KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 2 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 B. Submit within 20 days after contract date a list of all plant material indicating source of supply, order invoice, size sample of mulch, planting soil and quantity for each species or variety. C. Inspection certificates: D. All plant material shall meet requirements of State and Federal laws with respect to inspection for plant diseases and infestation. 1. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plant material and submitted to the Engineer. 2. Ground Dolomitic Limestone: Include guaranteed analysis and weight of packaging material 3. Topsoil: Include material content and moisture content by weight. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection and storage of plant material: 1. Protect at all times during handling, shipping, storage and planting from extreme weather conditions, wind drying of roots and root ball injury. 2. Plant material showing damage from shipping or while in storage or during planting may be rejected by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor at his/her own expense. B. Store fertilizers in dry place and protect from intrusion of moisture. C. Packaged materials: Deliver packaged materials in clearly marked containers showing net weight, guaranteed analysis, and name of manufacturer. Specified requirements for packaged materials apply to bulk shipments. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and during storage at site. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Work notification: Notify Engineer at least seven (7) working days before installing plant material. B. Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by planting operations. Confine work to designated areas. C. Prepare soil and place seed during periods normal for such work as determined by the season, weather conditions, and accepted procedures. D. Plant trees, shrubs, and groundcovers, only during periods normal for such work as determined by the season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. Do not install plant materials when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or above 80 degrees F. Do not install plants when wind velocity exceeds thirty (30) MPH. E. Coordinate planting work with installation of irrigation system and soil preparation. F. Existing conditions: KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 3 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 1.Carefully examine the site before submitting a bid. Be informed of the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions. Among the conditions are climate, adjacent properties and utilities, the ground's conformation, the nature of subsurface condition, the character of equipment and facilities needed before and during the work's execution. 2.Should Contractor, in the course of work, find any discrepancies between drawings and physical conditions or any omissions or errors in drawings, or in layout as furnished by the Owner, it will be the Contractor's duty to inform the Owner immediately in writing for clarification. Work done after such discovery, unless authorized by the Owner, shall be done at Contractor's risk. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Plant material guarantee: 1.Guarantee all plant material in accordance with Contract Conditions or for duration of one year, after final acceptance. 2.Plant material shall be alive and in satisfactory condition as determined by the Engineer at the end of the warranty period. B. Plant material replacement: 1.Replace, according to the drawings and specifications, all plants that are dead or, as determined by the Engineer, are in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, have lost their natural shape due to dead branches, or other causes due to Contractor's negligence. The cost of such replacements is at the Contractor's expense. All replacement plants shall be guaranteed for one (1) year after installation, unless otherwise specified. 2.Remove and immediately replace all plants, as determined by the Engineer, to be unsatisfactory during the initial planting installation. 3.Take extreme caution not to damage vegetation scheduled to remain, repair any damage to Owner’s satisfaction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANTING SOIL/ TOPSOIL A. Topsoil, which is prepared planting soil for use in plant beds and preparation of turf areas, shall consist of commercially prepared products from an established topsoil vendor. Provide Cedar Grove 2-way Topsoil for tree and shrub plantings. 1.Submit soil analysis from a soil testing laboratory to the Engineer. Indicate source and obtain the Engineer’s approval before hauling to site (analysis test with a 2-pound bag KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 4 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 sample is required). 2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Dolomitic Limestone: 1. A fine ground dolomite with a minimum of 88% of calcium and magnesium carbonates retained by Taylor Standard Sieves as follows: SCREEN SIZE PERCENT RETAINED #20 0% #100 25% 2. Packaged in new, waterproof, non-overlain bags clearly labeled as to weight, manufacturer, and content 2.3 FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES A. General: Use approved brands meeting requirements of applicable State fertilizer laws. Deliver to the site in original unopened containers, each bearing 'manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. B. Tree, Shrub, and Groundcover: 1. Planting Tablets: Agriform planting tablets; 20-10-5 2. Granular fertilizer for larger trees or shrub and ground cover bed preparation: Agro- Transplant Starter; 4-2-2 slow release 3. Liquid fertilizer for special transplanting conditions: Agro Transplanter; 3-12-4 with Vitamin B 4. Moisture Retention Agent: Terra-Sorb or approved equal. Apply per 'manufacturer's specifications for all plantings C. Mycorrhizae inoculant product options: 1. Mycogrow Gel as manufactured by Fungi Perfecti (Olympia, WA), 2. Mycorrhizal Landscape Inoculant as manufactured by BioOrganics (Santa Monica, CA), 3. Biovan manufactured by Brock Probiotics and available through T & J Enterprises (Spokane, WA) 4. Mychorrhizal _________ as manufactured by BioPlex email: bioplex2@earthlink.net (Mt Joy, PA) D. Plant materials: 1. At the time of planting, supplement all the new container plant materials with mycorrhiza inoculant. The mixture of mycorrhiza inoculant. shall be per the KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 5 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 manufacturer's recommendation and applied before removing plants from the container. Flood each container with the mycorrhiza solution to achieve a saturated root and soil mass. 2.Fertilize all-new container plants shall with a 21-5-12 slow-release pellet form fertilizer. The application rate shall be consistent with the manufacturer's recommendation and applied to the ground surface after the mulch placement. At minimum, the fertilizer shall supply additional micronutrients, iron manganese, and zinc. The fertilizer release period shall be a minimum of 6-7 months and shall be heat triggered. Fertilizer shall be APEX "Tree & Shrub" (or approved equal). 2.4 BACKFILL SOIL MIX A. Backfill soil mix for plantings shall be "Planting Soil " as indicated above. 2.5 BARK MULCH A. Description: Ground fir or hemlock bark, free from noxious weed seeds, sawdust, splinters, or other debris. Bark mulch shall not contain foreign material, chemicals, and substances detrimental to plant life, including resin, tannin, wood fiber, or other compounds. B. Fir and/or Hemlock bark, 1 inch minus size with less than 30% bark finer than 1/4-inch size. C. Submittals: Contractor shall notify Engineer of the source of supply and provide a two (2) pound sample for approval before installation. 2.6 TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVERS A. The genera, species, and variety, quantity, size, and conditions shall be as indicated on the Drawings and Plant Material Listing. B. Plant material shall be healthy nursery stock, well-branched, full foliage when in leaf, free from disease, injury, insects, all weeds, and weed roots. Tree groups shall match in appearance and form. C. Meet requirements of American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1-2004 published by the American Nursery and Landscape Association except as otherwise supplemented or modified under this Section D. Cold storage plants will not be permitted E. Balled and burlapped (B&B) stock shall have a natural root ball sufficient to ensure survival and healthy growth F. Bare root stock shall have a root system sufficient to ensure survival and healthy growth G. Potted and container stock shall be well-rooted and vigorous enough to ensure survival and healthy growth. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 6 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 H. Container plants shall have grown therein a minimum of six months and a maximum of two years, with roots filling the containers but not showing evidence of being or having been root- bound I. All grafts or budding on trees shall be at ground level except higher grafts of budding with compatible trunk, and the Engineer may approve branch growth characteristics. J. All collected native plant material shall be nursery-grown for a minimum of one year unless otherwise approved by the Engineer in writing. K. Trees: Provide untapped, straight, single leader trees except for multiple stem (clump) trees. Provide deciduous trees with more substantial than normal tops and balanced branching. L. Plant materials shall be free from disfiguring knots, swollen grafts, sunscald injuries, bark abrasions, evidence of improper pruning, and other objectionable disfigurements M. Trees and shrubs shall have well-developed branch systems; shrubs full foliage, not leggy N. The Engineer (Owner) will reject thin, weak, and leggy plants O. One plant of each group or massing of plants shall be tagged appropriately, giving the common and botanical plant name. Legibly print plant names on bright orange or yellow survey tape with a permanent marker. 2.7 TREE WATERING BAGS A. Tree "Gator Bags" or approved equal 2.8 WATER A. Suitable for irrigation, free from ingredients harmful to plant life 2.9 STAKING AND TYING MATERIALS A. Employ No. 5 steel reinforcing bar, ten feet (10') long, 14-gauge galvanized steel wire, and new 3/8" clear vinyl tubing for guying and staking purposes B. Turnbuckles, where required, are to be galvanized steel wire for guying and staking purposes. C. Chain Lock tree ties or approved equal 2.10 DRAIN ROCK A. Drain Rock: naturally, rounded rock with varying dimensions for landscape planter. 1.Size as follows: Min 1” to 2" diameter mix. 2.Mix shall be 60% 1" size drain rock and 40% 2" drain rock. a.Provide a 2-pound bag sample for approval KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 7 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 2.11 NOXIOUS WEED CONTROL A. Mandate: Noxious Weed and Pest Control is mandated by state weed control law, Chapter 17.10 RCW. Assistance and weed lists (Class A, B, C, Non-designated, and Weeds of concern) are available from the County Noxious Weed Control Programs. B. Weed Lists: Be current on all State, county, and local noxious weed lists and provide these to Sound Transit as requested. C. IPM Requirements: Identify and control Class A, B, or C Weeds upon identification and as indicated by the County (King, Pierce, and Snohomish) Noxious Weed Control Board and approved Landscape Maintenance Work Plan. Develop the Weed and Pest Control Plan for approval by the Owner. D. Control will follow non-chemical IPM control techniques outlined in the County's Best Management Practices, Alerts, and other documents posted on the Noxious Weed websites. E. Pesticide applications can only be considered as a last resort when non-chemical methods have proved ineffective. F. Weeds of Concern and Pest Vegetation: Control non-designated with ongoing IPM and healthy landscape management techniques. 2.12 ROOT BARRIER A. Root barrier must be an injection molded or extruded modular component made of high- density polypropylene or polyethylene plastic with a minimum of 30 percent recycled materials. Panels must have a minimum thickness of 0.080 inches. Each panel must have a minimum of 4 molded vertical ribs and locking strips, integral male/female sliding locks, and an intergraded zipper joining system. Vertical root-deflecting ribs or channels must be between 1/2 inch and 0.008 inches high, perpendicular to the panel, and between 5.91 inches to 7.87 inches apart. Panels must be a minimum of 24" wide x 18" or 24" deep, or as shown on Drawings. The Contractor must submit for approval a catalog cut for the material and installation. B. Root barrier shall be Deep root UB 18-2 or approved equal. 2.13 TREE GRATE A. Tree grate shall be City of Kent standard tree grate as supplied and manufactured by Olympic Foundry. B. Tree Grate Model shall be C605-2 and shall include 48” square style “CI” tree grate frame, installed per manufacturer’s recommendation. C. Coordinate with Owner as city may have supply in stock. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 8 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 D. Olympic Foundry Contact: Cari Moser SPG Division Operations Manager Olympic Foundry Inc. 5200 Airport Way South Seattle, WA 98108 Main: (206) 764-1200 x214 Direct: (206) 315-0514 Fax: (206) 763-1701 Email: cari.m@olympicfoundry.com PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TREE PROTECTION A. Refer to 31 10 00 Site Preparation B. Contractor to protect existing trees as noted with tree protection fencing at the commencement of site work. Fencing shall be placed around all existing trees to be saved as noted on drawings, a minimum of eight feet from the trunk of the tree. Construction material shall not be allowed within the tree protection fencing 3.2 INSPECTION A. Finish grading shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before planting. Verify that planting bed grades and layout are in accordance with those indicated on the Project Grading and Drainage, and Layout Drawings before proceeding with work. B. Plant material shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer at the nursery or project site before installation. Remove unsatisfactory material from the site immediately. C. Soil conditions: 1. Examine planting areas for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of work, and survival of plant material 2. Planting work shall not begin until soil and planting conditions are satisfactory and have been approved by the Engineer 3. Verify that rough finish grades, slopes of planting areas are acceptable to the Owner before commencing work of this Section 4. Work required under this Section will not begin until conditions are satisfactory 5. Owner to approve subgrade and fertilizer application D. Locate all utilities before the commencement of work. Take all necessary precautions to avoid disturbing or damaging sub-surface elements. If subsurface elements are uncovered, promptly notify the Owner. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 9 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 3.3 SOIL PREPARATION A. Establish finish grades and slopes per the finish grades indicated on project grading drawings as specified. B. Finish Topsoil Grade: bordering paving, curbs, walls, drains, etc., immediately adjacent to the same 1. Planting Beds: Establish grades to 2 inches below before application of mulch. C. Rototill/cultivate existing soil in all planting areas to a depth of 10” inches (10") before topsoil placement D. Soil preparation applications are described below and as shown on the drawings: 1. In planting bed areas place 4" of topsoil and rototill/cultivate to a depth of 8". Mix thoroughly with existing soil. 2. After cultivating imported topsoil into existing soil and achieving a thoroughly blended mix, verify PH of soil in planting areas. PH should be in a range of 6.0 to 6.5. Apply dolomite lime to reach desired PH. E. Grade all prepared planting bed areas removing all stones, clods of earth and sticks over 1" (one inch) in diameter and other deleterious matter which might be a hindrance to planting and maintenance F. Verify that planting bed and substrate grades are in accordance with those indicated on the Project Grading and Drainage Drawings before proceeding with work. Verify that soil conditions are satisfactory for construction. 1. Examine planting areas for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of work, and survival of plant material 2. Planting work shall not begin until soil and planting conditions are satisfactory 3.4 PLANT LAYOUT A. The Contractor shall locate plants by staking with stakes and flags as indicated on the drawings or as approved by the layout of plants in the field. If obstructions are encountered that are not shown on the drawings, do not proceed until the Engineer has selected alternate locations. 3.5 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVERS A. Plant trees and shrubs upright and face to give the best appearance or relationship to adjacent plants and structures B. Excavate all planting holes twice the spread of the tree, shrub, or groundcover root ball or root system KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 10 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Place 6" minimum lightly compacted layer of backfill soil mix under each tree's root system and shrub. Loosen planting hole subsurface to a depth of 4-6 inches before placement. D. Loosen and remove the burlap from around at least the upper 1/2 of the root ball; remove excess burlap. Pulling burlap from under balls will not be permitted on large and loose root balls. E. Cut off cleanly all broken or frayed roots F. Place and compact backfill soil mix carefully to avoid injury to roots; fill all voids. When the hole is nearly filled, fill with water, and allow water to soak away. Fill holes to finish grade and prepare for other work indicated. G. All new container plant materials shall be supplemented, at the time of planting, with mycorrhiza inoculant. The mycorrhiza inoculant shall be mixed per the manufacturer's recommendation and applied prior to removing plants from the container. Each container shall be flooded with the mycorrhiza solution to achieve a saturated root and soil mass. 3.6 FERTILIZER APPLICATION A. Provide for all trees, shrubs, and groundcover at time of planting fertilizer quantity per manufacturer's specifications 3.7 TREE STAKING A. Stake and tie trees immediately after planting, as indicated on the detailed drawings. B. Drive tree stakes vertically into the ground to a depth of 3 to 3 1/2 feet. Do not injure the ball or roots. C. Stake all trees except as indicated otherwise. 3.8 PRUNING OF TREES AND SHRUBS A. Prune all deciduous trees following standard horticultural practice. Prune evergreen trees and shrubs as may be directed by the Owner. 3.9 TREE WATERING BAGS A. Install tree watering bags on trees with a 1" caliper or larger 3.10 ROOT BARRIER A. Install root barrier in areas as shown on the plans. B. Install per the Drawings, and manufacturer recommendation KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 11 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 3.11 PLANT INSTALLATION A. Excavate circular plant pits with scarified vertical sides, except for plants specifically indicated for planting in beds. Provide planting pits at least twice the diameter of the root system or container. Depth of pit shall accommodate the entire root system. Scarify the bottom and sides of the pit to a depth of four inches. B. Place specified planting soil for use around the balls and roots of the plants C. Provide fertilizer for all trees, shrubs, and groundcover at the time of planting per manufacturer's specifications. D. Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set plants upright, plumb, and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. Set crown of plant material at the finish grade. Filling is not permitted around trunks or stems or above grafts on grafted trees. Backfill the pit with specified soil. Do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for backfilling. Form a ring of soil around the edge of each planting pit to retain water. E. After setting the balled and burlapped plants, water the soil mixture around the balls' bases and fill all voids 1. Remove all burlap, plastic wrapping materials, twine, wires, wire baskets from root balls, or lower ½ of the root ball as directed by the Engineer. 2. If burlap has been chemically treated (having a green color), remove it from the planting pit, if possible, without disturbing or breaking up rootball. F. Space ground cover plants using triangular spacing following indicated dimensions. Adjust spacing as necessary to evenly fill planting beds with the indicated quantity of plants. Plant within eighteen inches (18") of the trunks of trees and shrubs within the planting bed and to within twelve inches (12") of the bed edge. G. Spread and arrange the roots of bare-rooted plants in natural positions. Work within the specified planting soil, and do not mat roots together. Cut all broken and frayed roots before backfilling with the remaining specified planting soil. H. Bark Mulch: Cover shrub and groundcover planting beds with a 3-inch layer of bark mulch within two days after planting. Provide continuous coverage for the entire tree and shrub bed areas. Apply evenly, keeping all plant material free from coverage. Provide a minimum of 36" diameter mulch ring around each tree and shrub. I. Pruning: Prune all trees only to remove broken or damaged branches or for aesthetic purposes as directed by the Engineer. Prune branches at the branch collar, neither stubs nor flush cuts will be acceptable. J. Staking: Stake all deciduous and coniferous trees immediately after planting. K. Critical Planting Dates: 1. Complete all seeding during the growing season. Seeding can take place from March 1 through September 15. (It is best to plant native grasses and forbs from spring to early KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 12 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 summer and from fall until the ground freezes. This schedule allows for winter scarification of seeds.) 2. Bare root material can take place between December 1 and April 30. L. Planting Bed Grades: 1. Establish finish grades and slopes per finish grades indicated on project grading drawings as specified. 2. Establish grades 1-1/2 to 2 inches below bordering paving, curbs, walls, drains, etc., immediately adjacent to the same before application of mulch. 3.12 FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES A. Container Plant Materials: 1. All new container plant materials shall be supplemented, at the time of planting, with mycorrhiza inoculant. a. Apply inoculant per manufacturer recommendations. The mycorrhiza inoculant mixture must be either 1 ounce of product in 12 gallons of water or 1 pound of product to 200 gallons of water. For a soil drench application for ball & burlap plantings or container plantings, spray or pour on root balls just before backfilling using the following ratio: the container size in gallons divided by four will give the gallons of liquid needed to sufficiently drench the plant. For example: One-gallon and bare-root plants would receive 0.25 gallon of solution Two-gallon. plants would receive 0.50 gallon of solution Five-gallon plants would receive 1.25 gallons of solution 2. Fertilize all the new container plants with a slow-release pellet form fertilizer. a. The fertilizer application rate shall be consistent with the manufactures recommendation and applied to the ground surface after the mulch placement. The fertilizer shall supply, at a minimum, additional micronutrients, iron manganese, and zinc. The fertilizer release period shall be a minimum of 6-7 months and shall be heat triggered. 3. All new container plants shall receive a moisture retention agent. Apply per the manufacturer's recommendation. 3.13 TREE GRATE A. Prepare landscape areas per this specification to create suitable soil conditions for tree and as shown in City of Kent standard plan 6-55. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 90 00 — PAGE 13 LANDSCAPING BID SET 4/15/2022 B. Install tree grate per manufacturer’ recommendation and as shown in City of Kent Standard Plans 6-55 and 6-56. 3.14 CLEAN UP AND MAINTENANCE A. Keep premises free from accumulation of debris. B. At completion of each area of work, remove all debris, equipment, and surplus material. C. Furnish temporary equipment such as tools, hose or other water equipment, and other equipment required for performance of maintenance work. D. Use of underground irrigation system will be permitted. E. Maintenance of trees, shrubs, and ground cover plantings: F. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the maintenance of all newly installed landscaping in planting beds and individual trees until such time as the Contractor receives notice from the Engineer that such landscaping has reached physical completion. Contractor shall also maintain newly installed landscaping for 1 year from physical completion. See Sod Lawn section for lawn maintenance. G. Water, weed, cultivate, mulch, reset plants to proper grade or upright position, remove dead wood, repair beds, and do other necessary operations. H. Irrigate when necessary to avoid drying out of plant materials and as required to promote healthy growth. 3.15 ACCEPTANCE A. The Engineer will inspect to determine acceptance of planted areas upon the Contractor's request. Provide notification at least ten (10) working days before the requested inspection date. 1. Planted areas will be accepted, provided that all requirements, including the maintenance period, have been complied with and plant materials are alive and in a healthy, vigorous condition. B. Upon acceptance of maintenance period work, the Department of Parks and Recreation will assume plant maintenance. END OF SECTION - 32 90 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 92 00 PAGE 1 SOD LAWN BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work to include the installation of sod lawn in the main lawn area as shown on the plan. Primary lawn installation will be with sod, and with seed in the balance of the lawn restoration, as per the Drawings and specified herein. Work also includes the repair of lawn where damage may occur during construction. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Earthwork – Section 31 20 00 B. Landscaping – Section 32 90 00 C. Irrigation System - Section 32 80 00 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit seed vendor's certification for required grass or other seed mixture, indicating percentage by weight and percentages of purity, germination and weed seed for each grass species. B. Submit data sheet and sample of topsoil. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver seed and fertilizer materials in original unopened containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store seed in such a manner that will prevent wetting and deterioration. B. Ground Dolomitic Limestone: Include guaranteed analysis and weight of packaging material. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 92 00 PAGE 2 SOD LAWN BID SET 4/15/2022 1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Grading Inspection 1. Rough grading shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to organic amendment placement. 2. Finish grading shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to seed application. 1.6 INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall request a provisional inspection by the Engineer upon completion of the work. Upon completion of the punch list, the Engineer shall make provisional acceptance in writing. B. Final acceptance will be at the end of the one-year warranty period, and after all required repairs have been made. C. Place sod and seed during periods which are normal for such work as determined by the season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. 1.7 TIME A. Place sod during periods which are normal for such work as determined by the season, weather conditions, and accepted practice. All seeding shall be completed during the growing season. Seeding can take place from March 1st through October 15th. 1.8 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT: A. Seeded areas must have a relatively uniform stand of grass with no bare spots over 6" square at the time of provisional acceptance. Reseed at the original rate and fertilize with 15-22-15 at the rate of 1 lb. of Nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. All areas failing to vigorously establish within 60 days after germination for any reason whatsoever, shall be redone at the Contractor’s expense. B. Sodded areas must have a uniform stand of grass with no bare spots over 1" square at the time of provisional acceptance. Reseed or re-sod areas not fully established at the original KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 92 00 PAGE 3 SOD LAWN BID SET 4/15/2022 rate and fertilize with 15-22-15 at the rate of 1 lb. of Nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. All areas failing to vigorously establish within 30 days after placement for any reason whatsoever, shall be redone at the Contractor’s expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOD A. Sod shall contain 50% Manhattan Perennial Ryegrass and 30% Merion and/or Fylking Kentucky Bluegrass and 20% Fescue; or approved. B. Sod shall contain no more than 1% of other grasses none of which shall be coarse textured grass. C. One year old minimum, healthy, thick, even stand of grasses. D. Grown under intensive care and cultivation with rigid quality control. E. Cut sod from fields not more than 48 hours before delivery to Project Site. Place sod within 2 days of delivery to avoid any deterioration. Sod shall be health and green at the time of placement, yellow or brown patches will not be allowed. 2.2 SEEDED LAWN A. Seed mix shall be 98% pure with a pretested germination rate of 80%. B. Seed mix shall be composed of 50% Perennial Ryegrass, 30% Bluegrass and 20% Fescue. Apply at a rate of 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. 2.3 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil, which is prepared planting soil for use in preparation of turf areas, shall consist of commercially prepared products from an established topsoil vendor as specified herein. Provide Cedar Grove 60/40 Lawn Mix Topsoil or approved equal. Submit sample for approval. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 92 00 PAGE 4 SOD LAWN BID SET 4/15/2022 2.4 FERTILIZERS A. Brands meeting requirements of applicable State fertilizer laws. Uniform in composition, dry and free flowing. B. Deliver to the site in original unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. C. Commercial mix formula, 16-4-8 with 50 percent of slow-release nitrogen. D. Ammonium nitrate, 33-0-0. E. For seed use commercial mix formula, 16-16-16 with 50 percent of slow-release nitrogen. 2.5 ACCEPTABLE SOURCES: A. JB Instant Lawn B. Washington Sod and Turf C. County Green Turf Farms D. Or approved equal. 2.6 DOLOMITE LIME A. Fine ground dolomite with minimum of 88% of calcium and magnesium carbonates retained by Taylor Standard Sieves as follows: #20, sieve retains 0% #100, sieve retains 25% B. Packaged in new, waterproof, non-overlain bags clearly labeled as to weight, manufacturer, and content. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 92 00 PAGE 5 SOD LAWN BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SODDED LAWN PERFORMANCE AND INSTALLATION A. Sod bed preparation/finish grading: 1. Apply 4 inches of specified topsoil to finished subgrade and cultivate the top 8 inches. Cultivating to be done with roto-tilling or similar power equipment for a uniform mix of topsoil and at least 4 inches of subsoil. Remove all sticks, stones, and other debris 3/4 inch or larger be raking to a smooth, even surface. Roll area lightly and water area carefully to prevent erosion to at least 6-inch depth. Regrade topsoil, if necessary, if settling occurs. Finish grade for all lawn areas shall be a smooth even surface: rake, roll with a water filled roller, a minimum of three times to remove ridges, and fill depressions as required to drain as shown on plans. The maximum tolerance between ridge and dip to be +- 1 inch. See drainage spec for swale tolerances. 2. Finish grades for sod shall be 1/2 to 3/4 inch below adjacent walks, seat walls, seating stairs, aprons, and curbs. 3. Scarify surface to depth of 1/4 to 3/8 inch, establish friable fine textured sod bed prior to placing sod. B. Placing Sod: 1. Place and handle in accordance with standard and accepted practice. 2. Stagger joints and butt edges tightly. 3. Periodically water lightly as required to prevent drying of sod. 4. Roll lawn with a light roller diagonally, leveling irregularities and sealing joints. 5. Keep sod bed at optimum moisture content for placing sod. C. Apply evenly fertilizer, 16-4-8 mix, at 5 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft. immediately after placing sod. D. Water thoroughly, ample to wet the soil several inches beneath the sod immediately after placing sod and fertilizing. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 92 00 PAGE 6 SOD LAWN BID SET 4/15/2022 3.2 SEEDED LAWN A. Apply 4 inches of specified topsoil to finished subgrade and cultivate the top 8 inches. Cultivating to be done with roto-tilling or similar power equipment for a uniform mix of topsoil and at least 4 inches of subsoil. B. Remove all sticks, stones, and other debris 3/4 inch or larger be raking to a smooth, even surface. Roll area lightly and water area carefully to prevent erosion to at least 6-inch depth. Finish grade for all lawn areas shall be ½ to ¼ inch below paving and structures. C. Rake seed bed to a smooth even surface: rake, roll with a water filled roller, a minimum of three times to remove ridges, and fill depressions as required to drain as shown on plans. The maximum tolerance between ridge and dip to be +- 1 inch. See drainage spec for swale tolerances. D. Roll, rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions as required to drain. E. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 1 lb. of actual nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. Apply fertilizer by mechanical rotary or drop type distributor, thoroughly and evenly incorporated with soil to a depth of 3". F. Perform seeding operations when the soil is dry and when winds do not exceed 5 miles per hour velocity. G. Apply seed with a rotary or drop type distributor. Install seed evenly by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions, at right angles to each other. H. Sow grass seed at a rate of 5.0 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft as recommended by supplier. I. After seeding, rake or drag surface of soil lightly to incorporate seed into top 1/8" of soil. Cover with 1/8 - 1/4 inch of organic amendment. Roll with light lawn roller. 3.3 RECONDITIONING OF EXISTING LAWNS A. Recondition existing lawn areas damaged by contractor's operations, including storage of materials or equipment and movement of construction vehicles, and existing lawn areas as indicated on Drawings. B. Provide fertilizer, seed and soil amendments as specified for new lawns and as required to provide a satisfactorily reconditioned lawn. Provide topsoil as required to fill low areas and meet new finish grades and to insure proper drainage. KHERSON PARK SECTION 32 92 00 PAGE 7 SOD LAWN BID SET 4/15/2022 C. Cultivate bare and compacted areas thoroughly per spec. D. Remove diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas, do not bury into soil. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, stone, gravel, and other construction materials. E. Where substantial but thin lawn remains, rake, aerate if compacted, and cultivate soil; fertilize and seed. As specified above, mulch with 1/8 - 1/4 inch of organic amendment. F. Water newly seeded areas. Maintain adequate soil moisture until new grass is established. 3.4 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance of sodded and seeded lawn: 1. Protect and maintain by watering, mowing, resodding, reseeding, weeding, and repairing as required to establish thick, weed free, uniform stand of grass for 21 calendar days beginning after installation of sod and seed. The city will take over maintenance of seeded areas once the grass has reached 2 ½ inches, and 90% coverage has been achieved. END OF SECTION 32 92 00 KHERSON PARK SECTION 33 41 00 PAGE 1 STORM DRAINAGE BID SET 4/15/2022 SECTION 33 41 00 STORM DRAINAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install cleanouts, catch basins, underdrains, and storm drainage piping and fittings of the type and sizes designated. 2. Connect to existing storm drainage systems. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Coordinate related work specified in other parts of the Project Manual, including but not limited to the following: 1. Section 31 10 00 – Site Preparation 2. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork 3. Section 31 41 00 – Trench Safety 1.3 REFERENCES A. City of Kent Surface Water Design Manual, 2017. B. 2021 King County Surface Water Design Manual C. City of Kent 2021 Design and Construction Standards. D. WSDOT - Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, current edition; Washington State Department of Transportation. Standard Plans, current edition. E. GeoEngineers- Geotechnical Engineering Services Report, City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements, Kent, Washington, March 29, 2021. 1.4 PERMITS A. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining permits required for work within the right of way. B. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any permits and arranging any inspections required for connection of private storm drain to the City of Kent public storm drain, or other on-site private storm drain system(s). KHERSON PARK SECTION 33 41 00 PAGE 2 STORM DRAINAGE BID SET 4/15/2022 1.5 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUTS A. The Contractor will be responsible for furnishing, setting and marking all line location stakes. A qualified layout engineer, surveyor, or technical specialist must be assigned to the Contractor's crew for this work and shall be on site at all times when work requiring control is being performed, together with all necessary equipment, supplies and instruments related thereto. This equipment and personnel must be available, at no additional cost to the Owner, for the purpose of verifying layout and certifying the accuracy of work on the site. B. The Contractor is responsible for review of all City and other records relative to the existing underground utilities. The Contractor is responsible for avoiding damage to these facilities and restoring all active utilities at the Contractor's own expense. C. The Contractor is to notify the Owner’s Representative immediately of underground utilities encountered which are not shown on the drawings or Owner's survey or record drawings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00. B. No installation of material shall be made prior to until written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. Approval of material and equipment shall in no way preclude compliance with the plans and specifications. C. Submit material product information including pipe, fittings, structures, etc. D. Record Drawings: 1. One complete set of drawings shall be provided as record drawings which shall be separated, clean prints reserved for the purpose of showing a complete picture of the work as actually installed. The contractor shall coordinate the record drawing requirements with the Utility Inspector in accordance with the Developer Extension agreements. 2. Record drawings shall also serve as work progress plans and the Contractor shall maintain daily a daily record of work progress with neat, legible notations. These drawings shall be kept at the job site and shall be available for inspection at all times. 3. All buried piping and indicated future connections exterior to the building shall be located both by depth and by location with respect to the project benchmark. All notations on record drawings of buried pipes shall be made before backfilling of that section of pipe is started. E. At completion of the work, the Contractor shall sign, date, and provide the record drawings to the Architect, representing that it is an accurate depiction of the work completed. KHERSON PARK SECTION 33 41 00 PAGE 3 STORM DRAINAGE BID SET 4/15/2022 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STORM DRAIN PIPE A. Storm Drain Pipe: 1. Solid wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3034, SDR 35, or better with rubber gasket joints meeting COS Section 9-05.4. For PVC pipe fittings, provide injection molded tees or factory solvent cemented saddle tees with sufficient strength to withstand handling and load stresses normally encountered. 2. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) double walled smooth interior, Hancor Hi-Q or approved equal and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M252 Type S for pipes 8-inches in diameter or less or AASHTO M294 for pipes greater than 8- inches in diameter. Fittings and couplings for pipes shall be gasketed and silt- tight. 3. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP), Class 52. B. Footing drain and other perforated sub-surface drain pipes shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, SDR 35 with slotted perforations. Slots shall be cut perpendicular to the long axis of the pipe, slots are 0.04-0.069 inches wide by 1 inch long and spaced 0.25 inches apart (spaced longitudinally). Arrange slots in four rows spaced on 45-degree centers and cover ½ the circumference of the pipe. Pipe bends shall be made by a fitting or combination of multiple fittings of less than 90 degrees each. 2.2 MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS A. Manholes and catch basins and appurtenances shall be in accordance with the City of Kent Design and Construction Standards B. All covers and grates shall be bolt locking. Catch basins and area drains in pedestrian and lawn areas shall have ADA compliant pedestrian grates. Frame and grates in roadways or public ROW shall be per the City of Kent Design and Construction Standards, unless otherwise noted. C. Nyloplast drain basin shall be sized per plan with locking grate with 6” minimum sump per manufacturer recommendation. Grate shall be per plan. 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Shall be per project Documents. 2.4 TRENCH DRAINS A. Trench drains shall be per the plans or approved equal. Trench drains shall have ADA compliant, locking, slotted ductile iron grates and shall be rated for H-20 loading. KHERSON PARK SECTION 33 41 00 PAGE 4 STORM DRAINAGE BID SET 4/15/2022 2.5 THROUGH CURB INLET A. Through curb inlet shall be per City of Kent Design and Construction Standards. 2.6 BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Bedding material: 1. Solid wall pipe bedding shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 9-03.12(3) – Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding 2. Underdrain pipe bedding shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 9-03.12(4) – Gravel Backfill for Drains B. Backfill material for solid wall pipe shall be Gravel Borrow per section 31 20 00 unless native material is suitable. Native material is suitable if it is: 1. Capable of attaining the degree of compaction specified; 2. Within a range of two percent of optimum moisture content for compaction; 3. Free of organic clay, frozen lumps, rocks or pavement chunks larger than 6 inches or other deleterious matter; and 4. Less than 35% silt and clay. C. Backfill for underdrain pipe shall be the same material as noted for bedding. 2.7 FOAM BLOCKING A. Provide Ethafoam 220 plastic foam for pipe protection and separation between pipes, or approved equivalent. 2.8 CONDUCTIVE WARNING TAPE A. Conductive warning tape required over all drainage pipe (including downspout drain lines). Tape shall be manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous printed plastic tape, aluminum backed, intended for direct-burial service. Tape shall be not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Tape Schedule: Piping Color Wording Storm Sewer Green Caution Storm Sewer PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION WITH OTHER WORK A. Verify location from the records. B. Before installation Contractor shall make proper provisions for site storm lines to avoid interferences with installation of other work and/or other Contractors. Any changes KHERSON PARK SECTION 33 41 00 PAGE 5 STORM DRAINAGE BID SET 4/15/2022 caused by Contractor's neglect to coordinate work shall be made by Contractor at Contractor's expense. C. Site storm drain Drawings and Specifications shall be compared with Drawings and Specifications of other trades and any discrepancies between the documents shall be reported to the Owner’s Representative prior to installation of work. D. Abandoning Existing Storm Drainage System - Where shown on the Plans or where directed by the Owner’s Representative, existing storm sewer pipes and structures shall be abandoned by: 1. Plugging pipe ends. In addition to plugging pipe ends, fill pipes larger than 8 inches with controlled density fill or approved equal. 2. Removing the existing structure to two (2) feet below the finished subgrade and filling existing pipes and the remaining structure with controlled density fill or approved equal. 3. Removing existing pipes or structures - If the storm system is removed, unless otherwise directed by the Owner’s Representative, all trenches will be backfilled with the appropriate material. When native material has been determined as suitable backfill, backfill of the trench will be considered incidental to and included in the contract price for pipe. Excavated trench material that is not suitable as backfill shall be hauled to disposal in accordance with the special provisions at no additional cost to the Owner. Suitability of excavated material for trench backfill shall be at the sole discretion of the Owner’s Representative. 4. When filling existing storm sewer pipe or structures that are to be abandoned, care shall be used in placing the controlled density fill to ensure the pipe or structure is completely filled and no voids remain. 3.2 PIPE LAYING A. Pipe laying shall be in conformance with WSDOT Section 7-08.3(2). 3.3 PIPE CROSSINGS A. Where pipe crossings are separated by less than 6 inches, place foam blocking for separation and protection per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.4 CATCH BASIN AND STRUCTURE INSTALLATION OR MODIFICATION A. Structures shall be installed or modified in accordance with WSDOT Section 7-05.3 and City of Kent Standards. B. Adjustments to existing structures to remain shall be in accordance with WSDOT Section 7-05.3(1) and City of Kent Standards. 3.5 CLEANING AND TESTING A. Cleaning and testing shall be in conformance with WSDOT Section 7-04.3(1) with the following exceptions: KHERSON PARK SECTION 33 41 00 PAGE 6 STORM DRAINAGE BID SET 4/15/2022 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing DVDs of video inspection. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner’s Representative 48 hours in advance of the backfill of any storm drain line. 3. The minimum amount of testing required by these specifications shall be as follows: ITEM FREQUENCY OF TESTS Air Testing Storm Drains One (1) test from structure to structure 4. The frequency of tests shown above shall govern the actual quantity of tests. Any retesting that is required due to failure of initial testing to show compliance with these contract documents, shall be provided and paid for at the Contractor's sole expense. B. At project completion, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the onsite system to the offsite connection. 3.6 PERMANENT CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Where indicated on the plans, make permanent connections to existing storm drainage systems. B. Where existing pipe is to be connected to a new structure, replace existing pipe and/or add fittings and pipe as necessary to provide an approved connection per WSDOT and City of Kent Standards. END OF STORM DRAINAGE SECTION © LPD ENGINEERING PLLC 2022 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................... 1-1 1-01 Definitions and Terms ..................................................... 1-1 1-02 Bid Procedures and Conditions ......................................... 1-2 1-03 Award and Execution of Contract ...................................... 1-5 1-04 Scope of the Work ......................................................... 1-6 1-05 Control of Work ............................................................. 1-8 1-06 Control of Material ......................................................... 1-11 1-07 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public ................ 1-14 1-08 Prosecution and Progress ................................................ 1-20 1-09 Measurement and Payment ............................................. 1-24 1-10 Temporary Traffic Control ............................................... 1-26 DIVISION 2 EARTHWORK .......................................................... 2-1 2-02 Removal of Structures and Obstructions ............................ 2-1 2-03 Roadway Excavation and Embankment .............................. 2-5 2-06 Subgrade Preparation ..................................................... 2-5 2-07 Watering ...................................................................... 2-6 2-12 Construction Geosynthetic ............................................... 2-6 DIVISION 4 BASES .................................................................... 4-1 4-03 Gravel Borrow ............................................................... 4-1 4-04 Ballast and Crushed Surfacing .......................................... 4-1 4-06 Asphalt Treated Base ...................................................... 4-2 DIVISION 5 SURFACE TREATMENTS AND PAVEMENTS .............. 5-1 5-02 Bituminous Surface Treatment ......................................... 5-1 5-04 Hot Mix Asphalt ............................................................. 5-1 5-05 Cement Concrete Pavement............................................. 5-19 DIVISION 7 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, STORM SEWERS, SANITARY SEWERS, WATER MAINS, AND CONDUITS .............. 7-1 7-01 Drains .......................................................................... 7-1 7-02 Culverts ....................................................................... 7-1 7-04 Storm Sewers ............................................................... 7-2 7-05 Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells ..................... 7-3 7-08 General Pipe Installation Requirements ............................. 7-9 7-09 Water Mains .................................................................. 7-15 7-12 Valves for Water Mains ................................................... 7-21 7-13 Adjusting Water Mains .................................................... 7-24 7-14 Hydrants ...................................................................... 7-25 7-15 Service Connections ....................................................... 7-27 7-17 Sanitary Sewers ............................................................ 7-33 7-18 Side Sewers .................................................................. 7-39 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE DIVISION 8 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ......................... 8-1 8-01 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control ....................... 8-1 8-02 Roadside Restoration ...................................................... 8-6 8-04 Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways .......................................... 8-14 8-06 Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances ............................... 8-14 8-09 Raised Pavement Markers ............................................... 8-15 8-12 Chain Link Fence and Wire Fence ...................................... 8-17 8-13 Monument Cases ........................................................... 8-18 8-14 Cement Concrete Sidewalks............................................. 8-19 8-18 Mailbox Support ............................................................ 8-20 8-20 Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and Electrical .............................. 8-21 8-21 Permanent Signing ......................................................... 8-24 8-22 Pavement Marking ......................................................... 8-25 8-23 Temporary Pavement Markings ........................................ 8-28 8-26 Bollards ........................................................................ 8-28 8-27 Handrails ...................................................................... 8-29 8-28 Pothole Utilities ............................................................. 8-30 8-30 Project Signs ................................................................. 8-31 8-31 Bored or Jacked Crossings ............................................... 8-32 8-32 Undergrounding of Electrical Facilities ............................... 8-34 DIVISION 9 MATERIALS ............................................................ 9-1 9-03 Aggregates ................................................................... 9-1 9-13 Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection and Rock Walls ...................... 9-3 9-14 Erosion Control and Roadside Planting ............................... 9-3 9-16 Fence and Guardrail ....................................................... 9-9 9-28 Signing Materials and Fabrication ..................................... 9-9 9-29 Illumination, Signal, Electrical .......................................... 9-10 9-30 Water Distribution Materials ............................................ 9-20 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 1 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS The Kent Special Provisions (“Kent Special Provisions” or “KSP”) modify and supersede any conflicting provisions of the 2020 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association, including all published amendments issued by those organizations (“WSDOT Standard Specifications”). Otherwise all provisions of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall apply. All references in the WSDOT Standard Specifications to the State of Washington, its various departments or directors, or to the contracting agency, shall be revised to include the City and/or City Engineer, except for references to State statutes or regulations. Finally, all of these documents are a part of this contract. DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1-01 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS SECTION 1-01.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-01.1 General When these Kent Special Provisions make reference to a “Section,” for example, “in accordance with Section 1-01,” the reference is to the WSDOT Standard Specifications as modified by these Kent Special Provisions. SECTION 1-01.2(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-01.2(2) Items of Work and Units of Measurement EA Each Eq. Adj. Equitable Adjustment FA Force Account HR Hour M GAL Thousand gallons NIC Not In Contract SF Square Feet SECTION 1-01.3, “CONTRACT” DEFINITION, IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 2 1-01.3 Definitions Contract The written agreement between the Contracting Agency and the Contractor. It describes, among other things: 1. What work will be done, and by when; 2. Who provides labor and materials; and 3. How Contractors will be paid. The Contract includes the Contract (agreement) Form, Bidder’s completed Proposal Form, Kent Special Provisions, Contract Provisions, Contract Plans, WSDOT Standard Specifications (also including amendments to the Standard Specifications issued by WSDOT as of the later date of bid advertisement or any subsequent addenda), Kent Standard Plans, Addenda, various certifications and affidavits, supplemental agreements, change orders, and subsurface boring logs (if any). Also incorporated in the Contract by reference are: 1. Standard Plans (M21-01) for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction as prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the American Public Works Association, current edition; 2. Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, current edition, and; 3. American Water Works Association Standards, current edition; 4. The current edition of the “National Electrical Code.” Responsibility for obtaining these publications rests with the Contractor. SECTION 1-01.3, “DEFINITIONS” IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING DEFINITION: Incidental Work The terms “incidental to the project,” “incidental to the involved bid item(s),” etc., as used in the Contract shall mean that the Contractor is required to complete the specified work and the cost of such work shall be included in the unit contract prices of other bid items as specified in Section 1-04.1 (Intent of the Contract). No additional payment will be made. 1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS SECTION 1-02.1 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 3 1-02.1 Qualification of Bidders Bidders shall be qualified by ability, experience, financing, equipment, and organization to do the work called for in the Contract. The City reserves the right to take any action it deems necessary to ascertain the ability of the Bidder to perform the work satisfactorily. This action includes the City’s review of the qualification information in the bid documents. The City will use this qualification data in its decision to determine whether the lowest responsive bidder is also responsible and able to perform the contract work. If the City determines that the lowest bidder is not the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, the City reserves its unqualified right to reject that bid and award the contract to the next lowest bidder that the City, in its sole judgment, determines is also responsible and able to perform the contract work (the “lowest responsive and responsible bidder”). SECTION 1-02.2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.2 Plans and Specifications Upon awarding the Contract, the City shall supply to the Contractor, for its own use, up to ten (10) copies of the plans and specifications. If the Contractor requests more than ten (10) copies, the City may require the Contractor to purchase the additional sets. SECTION 1-02.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.5 Proposal Forms Prospective bidders may obtain Bid Documents including a “Bid Proposal” for the advertised project by downloading at no charge at KentWA.gov/Procurement; however, a prospective bidder remains responsible to obtain Bid Documents, even if unable to download all or any part of the documents, whether or not inability to access is caused by the bidder’s or the City’s technology. SECTION 1-02.6 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE THIRD PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal It is the Bidder’s sole responsibility to obtain and incorporate all issued addenda into the bid. In the space provided on the Proposal Signature Page, the Bidder shall confirm that all Addenda have been received. All blanks in the proposal forms must be appropriately filled in. SECTION 1-02.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE LAST PARAGRAPH: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 4 Proposals must contain original signature pages. FACSIMILES OR OTHER FORMS OF ELECTRONIC DELIVERY ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE AND ARE CONSIDERED NON-RESPONSIVE SUBMITTALS. SECTION 1-02.7 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.7 Bid Deposit A deposit of at least 5 percent of the total Bid shall accompany each Bid. This deposit may be cash, cashier’s check, or a proposal bond (Surety bond). Any proposal bond shall be on the City’s bond form and shall be signed by the Bidder and the Surety. A proposal bond shall not be conditioned in any way to modify the minimum 5-percent required. The Surety shall: (1) be registered with the Washington State Insurance Commissioner, and (2) appear on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington published by the Office of the Insurance Commissioner. The failure to furnish a Bid deposit of a minimum of 5 percent with the Bid shall make the Bid nonresponsive and shall cause the Bid to be rejected by the Contracting Agency. SECTION 1-02.9 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal All bids must be sealed and delivered in accordance with the “Invitation to Bid.” Bids must be received at the City Clerk’s office by the stated time, regardless of delivery method, including U.S. Mail. SECTION 1-02.10 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.10 Withdrawing, Revising, or Supplementing Proposal After submitting a Bid Proposal to the Contracting Agency, the Bidder may withdraw or revise it if: 1. The Bidder submits a written request signed by an authorized person, and 2. The Contracting Agency receives the request before the time for opening Bids. The original Bid Proposal may be revised and resubmitted as the official Bid Proposal if the Contracting Agency receives it before the time for opening Bids. SECTION 1-02.11 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.11 Combination and Multiple Proposals KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 5 No person, firm or corporation shall be allowed to make, file, or be interested in more than one bid for the same work unless alternate bids are specifically called for; however, a person, firm, or corporation that has submitted a subproposal to a bidder, or that has quoted prices of materials to a bidder is not disqualified from submitting a subproposal or quoting prices to other bidders or from making a prime proposal. SECTION 1-02.13 IS REVISED BY DELETING ITEM 1(a) AND REPLACING ITEM 1(a) WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.13 Irregular Proposals a. The bidder is not prequalified when so required. SECTION 1-02.14 IS REVISED BY DELETING ITEM 3 AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders 3. The bidder is not qualified for the work or to the full extent of the bid. 1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT SECTION 1-03.1 IS REVISED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IN THAT SECTION: 1-03.1 Consideration of Bids The City also reserves the right to include or omit any or all schedules or alternates of the Proposal and will award the Contract to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder based on the total bid amount, including schedules or alternates selected by the City. SECTION 1-03.2 IS REVISED BY REPLACING “45 CALENDAR DAYS” WITH “60 CALENDAR DAYS” RELATING TO CONTRACT AWARD OR BID REJECTION. 1-03.2 Award of Contract SECTION 1-03.3 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-03.3 Execution of Contract No claim for delay shall be granted to the Contractor due to its failure to submit the required documents to the City in accordance with the schedule provided in these Kent Special Provisions. SECTION 1-03.7 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-03.7 Judicial Review KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 6 Any decision made by the City regarding the award and execution of the contract or bid rejection shall be conclusive subject to the scope of judicial review permitted under Washington State Law. Such review, if any, shall be timely filed in the King County Superior Court, located in Kent, Washington. 1-04 SCOPE OF THE WORK 1-04.1 Intent of the Contract SECTION 1-04.1(2) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.1(2) Bid Items Not Included in the Proposal The Contractor shall include all costs of doing the work within the bid item prices. If the contract plans, contract provisions, addenda, or any other part of the contract require work that has no bid item price in the proposal form, the entire cost of labor and materials required to perform that work shall be incidental and included with the bid item prices in the contract. SECTION 1-04.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE WORDS, “KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS, KENT STANDARD PLANS” FOLLOWING THE WORDS, “CONTRACT PROVISIONS” IN THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH. SECTION 1-04.2 IS REVISED BY DELETING ITEMS 1 THROUGH 7 IN THE SECOND PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING 8 ITEMS: 1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions, Specifications, and Addenda 1. Approved Change Orders 2. The Contract Agreement 3. Kent Special Provisions 4. Contract Plans 5. Amendments to WSDOT Standard Specifications 6. WSDOT Standard Specifications 7. Kent Standard Plans 8. WSDOT Standard Plans SECTION 1-04.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE THIRD PARAGRAPH (INCLUDING SUBPARAGRAPHS A AND B). 1-04.4 Changes SECTION 1-04.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING IT WITH THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 7 For Item 2, increases or decreases in quantity for any bid item shall be paid at the appropriate bid item contract price, including any bid item increase or decrease by more than 25 percent from the original planned quantity. SECTION 1-04.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE EIGHTH PARAGRAPH (NEXT TO THE LAST PARAGRAPH) AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: Within 14 calendar days of delivery of the change order the Contractor shall endorse and return the change order, request an extension of time for endorsement or respond in accordance with Section 1-04.5. The Contracting Agency may unilaterally process the change order if the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements. Changes normally noted on field stakes or variations from estimated quantities, will not require a written change order. These changes shall be made at the unit prices that apply. The Contractor shall respond immediately to changes shown on field stakes without waiting for further notice. SECTION 1-04.6 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.6 Variation in Estimated Quantities Payment to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of Work performed and accepted in conformance with the Contract. SECTION 1-04.9 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.9 Use of Private Properties Staging and storage locations needed for the Project must be properly permitted for that use. Limits of construction are indicated or defined on the plans. The Contractor shall confine all construction activities within these limits. If a staging and storage area is shown on the plans, the City will obtain all permits and approvals necessary for the Contractor’s use. Whether the City does or does not provide a staging area, if the Contractor selects its own staging and storage area(s), it is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to obtain all necessary permits/approvals to use the private property, specifically including, without limitation, all permits or approvals subject to State Environmental Policy Act, Shoreline Management Act, and critical areas regulations. Before using any other property as a staging or storage area (or for any other use), the Contractor shall thoroughly investigate the property for the presence of critical areas, buffers of critical areas, or other regulatory restrictions as defined in Kent City Code, county, state or federal regulations, and the Contractor shall provide the City written documentation that the property is not subject to other regulatory requirements or that the Contractor has obtained all KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 8 necessary rights of entry, permits and approvals needed to use the property as the Contractor intends. Upon vacating the private property, the Contractor shall provide the City written verification that it has obtained all releases and/or performed all mitigation work as required by the conditions of the permit/approval and/or agreement with the property owner. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or an extension of the time of completion of the Contractor for any work associated with the permitting, mitigation or use of private property. SECTION 1-04.11 ITEM 2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-04.11 Final Cleanup 1. Remove from the project all unapproved and/or unneeded material left from grading, surfacing, paving, or temporary erosion control measures. 1-05 CONTROL OF WORK SECTION 1-05.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE LAST FOUR PARAGRAPHS. 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviations From Plans and Stakes SECTION 1-05.4 IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER PARAGRAPH 7: To the extent a conflict exists between the requirements of WSDOT Section 1-05.4 and Kent Special Provision Section 1-05.8, the requirements of KSP Section 1-05.8 will prevail. SECTION 1-05.7 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work If the Contractor fails to remedy defective or unauthorized work within the time specified by the Engineer, or fails to perform any part of the work required by the contract, the Engineer may provide the Contractor written notice establishing a date after which the City will correct and remedy that work by any means that the Engineer may deem necessary, including the use of City forces or other contractors. If the Engineer determines that the Contractor’s failure to promptly correct any defective or any unauthorized work creates a situation that could be potentially unsafe or might cause serious risk of loss or damage to the public, the Engineer may have the defective and unauthorized work corrected immediately, have the rejected work KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 9 removed and replaced, or have the work the Contractor refuses to perform completed by using City or other forces. Direct and indirect costs incurred by the City attributable to correcting and remedying defective or unauthorized work, or work the Contractor failed or refused to perform, shall be paid by the Contractor. Payment may be deducted by the Engineer from monies due, or to become due, the Contractor. Direct and indirect costs shall include, without limitation, compensation for additional professional services required, compensation and engineering and inspection services required, and costs for repair and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of the Contractor’s unauthorized work. No increase in contract time or compensation will be allowed because of the delay in the performance of the work attributable to the exercise of the City’s rights provided by this section nor shall the exercise of this right diminish the City’s right to pursue any other remedy available under law with respect to the Contractor’s failure to perform the work as required. SECTION 1-05.9 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SUBSECTION: 1-05.9 Equipment 1-05.9(1) Operational Testing It is the intent of the City to have at the Physical Completion Date a complete and operable system. Therefore when the work involves the installation of machinery or other mechanical equipment, street lighting, electrical distribution of signal systems, building or other similar work, it may be desirable for the Engineer to have the Contractor operate and test the work for a period of time after final inspection but prior to the Physical Completion Date. Whenever items of work are listed in the contract provisions for operational testing they shall be fully tested under operating conditions for the time period specified to ensure their acceptability prior to the Physical Completion Date. In the event the contract does not specify testing time periods, the default testing time period shall be twenty-one (21) calendar days. During and following the test period, the Contractor shall correct any items of workmanship, materials, or equipment that prove faulty or that are not in first class operating condition. Equipment, electrical controls, meters, or other devices and equipment to be tested during this period shall be tested under the observation of the Engineer, so that the Engineer may determine their suitability for the purpose for which they were installed. The Physical Completion Date cannot be established KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 10 until testing and corrections have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The costs for power, gas, labor, material, supplies, and everything else needed to successfully complete operational testing shall be included in the various contract bid item prices unless specifically set forth otherwise in the contract. Operational and test periods, when required by the Engineer, shall not affect a manufacturer’s guaranties or warranties furnished under the terms of the Contract. SECTION 1-05.10 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-05.10 Guarantees In addition to any other warranty or guarantee provided for at law or in the parties’ contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Agency any guarantee or warranty furnished as a customary trade practice in connection with the purchase of any equipment, materials, or items incorporated into the project. Upon receipt of written notice of any required corrective work, the Contractor shall pursue vigorously, diligently, and without disrupting city facilities, the work necessary to correct the items listed in the notice. Approximately sixty (60) calendar days prior to the one year anniversary of final acceptance, the Contractor shall be available to tour the project, with the Engineer, in support of the Engineer’s effort to establish a list of corrective work then known and discovered. SECTION 1-05.13 IS REVISED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE FIRST PARAGRAPH: 1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor, and Equipment of Contractor Within ten (10) days of contract award, the Contractor shall designate the Contractor's project manager and superintendent for the contract work. SECTION 1-05.13 IS REVISED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE THIRD PARAGRAPH (AS PRINTED IN THE 2020 WSDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS): If at any time during the contract work, the Contractor elects to replace the contract manager or superintendent, the Contractor shall only do so after obtaining the Engineer's prior written approval. THE LAST PARAGRAPH OF 1-05.13 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 11 Whenever the City evaluates the Contractor’s qualifications or pre- qualifications pursuant to Section 1-02.1 or RCW 47.28.070, the City may take these or other Contractor performance reports into account. SECTION 1-05.14 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-05.14 Cooperation With Other Contractors Details of known projects are as follows: N/A SECTION 1-05 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 1-05.16 Water and Power The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements, and shall bear the costs for power and water necessary for the performance of the work, unless the Contract includes power or water as bid items, or unless otherwise provided for in other bid items. 1-05.17 Oral Agreements No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after execution of the contract, shall affect or modify the terms or obligations contained in any of the documents comprising the contract. Such oral agreement or conversation shall be considered unofficial information and in no way binding upon the City, unless subsequently recorded and/or put in writing and signed by an authorized agent of the City. 1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL 1-06.2 Acceptance of Materials SECTION 1-06.2(2) IS DELETED IN ITS ENTIRETY. 1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance SECTION 1-06 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 1-06.7 Submittals 1-06.7(1) Submittal Procedures All information submitted by the Contractor shall be clear, sharp, high contrast copies. Contractor shall accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal containing the following information: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 12 1. Contractor’s name and the name of Subcontractor or supplier who prepared the submittal. 2. The project name and identifying number. 3. Each new submittal shall be sequentially numbered (1, 2, 3, etc.). Each resubmittal shall include the original number with a sequential alpha letter added (1A, 1B, 1C, etc.). 4. Description of the submittal and reference to the Contract requirement or technical specification section and paragraph number being addressed. 5. Bid item(s) where product will be used. 1-06.7(2) Schedule of Submittals The Contractor shall create and submit three (3) copies of a schedule of submittals showing the date by which each submittal required for product review or product information will be made. The schedule can be modified, deducted, or added to by the City. The schedule shall be available at the preconstruction conference (see 1-08.0 of the Kent Special Provisions). The schedule of submittals must be accepted prior to the City making the first progress payment. The schedule shall identify the items that will be included in each submittal by listing the item or group of items and the Specification Section and paragraph number and bid item under which they are specified. The schedule shall indicate whether the submittal is required for product review of proposed equivalents, shop drawings, product data or samples or required for product information only. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 21 days for the Engineer’s review of each submittal or resubmittal. All submittals shall be in accordance with the approved schedule of submittals. Submittals shall be made early enough to allow adequate time for manufacturing, delivery, labor issues, additional review due to inadequate or incomplete submittals, and any other reasonably foreseeable delay. 1-06.7(3) Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples The Contractor shall submit the following for the Engineer’s review: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit an electronic copy or three paper copies. Submittals will be marked, stamped and returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall make and distribute any required copies for its superintendent, subcontractors and suppliers. 2. Product Data: Submit an electronic copy or three paper copies. Submittals will be marked, stamped and returned to the Contractor. The Contractor shall make and distribute any required copies for its superintendent, subcontractors and suppliers. 3. Samples: Submit three labeled samples or three sets of samples of manufacturer’s full range of colors and finishes unless otherwise directed. One approved sample will be returned to the Contractor. Content of submittals: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 13 1. Each submittal shall include all of the items required for a complete assembly or system. 2. Submittals shall contain all of the physical, technical and performance data required to demonstrate conclusively that the items comply with the requirements of the Contract. 3. Each submittal shall verify that the physical characteristics of items submitted, including size, configurations, clearances, mounting points, utility connection points and service access points, are suitable for the space provided and are compatible with other interrelated items. 4. The Contractor shall label each Product Data submittal, Shop Drawing or Sample with the bid item number and, if a lump sum bid item, provide a reference to the applicable KSP paragraph. The Contractor shall highlight or mark every page of every copy of all Product Data submittals to show the specific items being submitted and all options included or choices offered. The City encourages a creative approach to complete a timely, economical, and quality project. Submittals that contain deviations from the requirements of the Contract shall be accompanied by a separate letter explaining the deviations. The Contractor’s letter shall: 1. Cite the specific Contract requirement including the Specification Section bid item number and paragraph number for which approval of a deviation is sought. 2. Describe the proposed alternate material, item or construction, explain its advantages, and explain how the proposed alternate meets or exceeds the Contract requirements. 3. State the reduction in Contract Price, if any, which is offered to the City. The Engineer retains the exclusive right, at his or her sole discretion, to accept or reject any proposed deviation with or without cause. The Engineer will stamp and mark each submittal prior to returning it to the Contractor. The stamps will indicate one of the following: 1. “APPROVED AS SUBMITTED” – Accepted subject to its compatibility with the work not covered in this submission. This response does not constitute approval or deletion of specified or required items not shown in the partial submission. 2. “APPROVED AS NOTED” – Accepted subject to minor corrections that shall be made by the Contractor and subject to its compatibility with the work not covered in this submission. This response does not constitute approval or deletion of specified or required items not shown in the partial submission. No resubmission is required. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 14 3. “AMEND AND RESUBMIT” – Rejected because of major inconsistencies, errors or insufficient information that shall be resolved or corrected by the Contractor prior to subsequent re- submittal. An amended resubmission is required. Re-submittals that contain changes that were not requested by the Engineer on the previous submittal shall note all changes and be accompanied by a letter explaining the changes. 1-06.7(4) Proposed Equivalents The Engineer retains the exclusive right, at his or her sole discretion, to accept or reject any proposed equivalent with or without cause. 1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC 1-07.2 State Taxes SECTION 1-07.2(1) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE SECOND PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.2(1) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-171—Use Tax Without waiving the Contractor’s obligation to understand and apply these tax rules correctly, the City has indicated those parts of the project that are subject to use tax under Section 1-07.2(1) in the proposal bid items. SECTION 1-07.2(2) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE SECOND PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-170—Retail Sales Tax Without waiving the Contractor’s obligation to understand and apply these tax rules correctly, the City has indicated those parts of the project that are subject to retail sales tax under Section 1-07.2(2) in the proposal bid items. SECTION 1-07.4(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH TO THE END OF THIS SECTION: 1-07.4(2) COVID-19 JOB SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Before commencing any work on the Project site, the Contractor shall develop and post at each job site a comprehensive COVID-19 exposure control, mitigation, and recovery plan that complies with the Phase 1 Construction Restart COVID-19 Job Site Requirements KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 15 issued by the Governor, or subsequent modifications or phase amendments as the Governor may issue. Contractor must further meet and maintain all requirements of the plan, including providing materials, schedules, and equipment required to comply with those job site requirements or any future adjustments that may be made to job site requirements by the Governor or any applicable federal or state agency during the COVID-19 emergency. B. A copy of the COVID-19 job site safety plan, along with the identification and contact information for the COVID-19 Supervisor, shall be provided to the Engineer. SECTION 1-07.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH BEFORE THE FIRST PARAGRAPH: 1-07.6 Permits and Licenses The City has obtained the following permits: None SECTION 1-07.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE LAST PARAGRAPH: A copy of each permit and/or license obtained by the Contractor shall be furnished to the City. Approved permits shall be furnished to the City upon completion of the project and prior to final acceptance. The Contractor shall promptly notify the City in writing of any variance in the contract work arising from the issuance of any permit. 1-07.9 Wages SECTION 1-07.9(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY INSERTING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE SIXTH PARAGRAPH: 1-07.9(1) General To the extent allowed by law, the wage rates that will be in effect during the entire contract work period are those in effect on the day of bid opening, unless the City does not award the Contract within six months of the bid opening. SECTION 1-07.9(3) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: FOLLOWING: 1-07.9(3) Apprentices All contracts with an estimated construction cost greater than $1,000,000 (one million dollars) shall require that no less than 15 percent of the labor hours performed by workers subject to prevailing KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 16 wages employed by the contractor or its subcontractors be performed by apprentices enrolled in a state-approved apprenticeship program. Definitions For the purposes of this specification, the following definitions apply: 1. Apprentice Utilization Requirement is expressed as a percentage of the project Labor Hours performed by Apprentices. 2. Labor Hours are the total hours performed by all workers receiving an hourly wage who are directly employed on the project site including hours performed by workers employed by the prime Contractor and all Subcontractors. Labor Hours do not include hours performed by foremen, superintendents, owners, and workers who are not subject to prevailing wage requirements. 3. Apprentice is a person enrolled in a State-approved Apprenticeship Training Program. 4. State-approved Apprenticeship Training Program is an apprenticeship training program approved by the Washington State Apprenticeship Council. 5. Good Faith Effort is a demonstration that the Contractor has strived to meet the Apprenticeship Utilization Requirement including but not necessarily limited to the specific steps as described elsewhere in this specification. Plan The Contractor shall submit an “Apprentice Utilization Plan” within 30 calendar days of Notice of Award, demonstrating how they intend to achieve the Apprentice Utilization Requirement. The plan shall be updated and resubmitted as appropriate as the Work progresses. The intent is to provide the City with enough information to track progress in meeting the utilization requirements. Reporting The Contractor shall submit a “Monthly Apprentice Reporting Form” on a monthly basis. The report shall be submitted to the City by the last working day of the subsequent month, until the Physical Completion Date. The date reported shall be cumulative to date and consolidated to include the Contractor and all Subcontractors. At the Contractor’s request, the Engineer may suspend this reporting requirement during periods of minimal or no applicable work activities on the project. The Contractor shall submit documentation of their Good Faith Effort if: (1) they are unable to provide a plan demonstrating how they intend to meet the Apprentice Utilization Requirement; or (2) the project has been completed without meeting the Apprentice Utilization Requirement. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 17 Contacts The Contractor may obtain information on State-approved Apprenticeship Training Programs by contacting the Department of Labor and Industries at: Specialty Compliance Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P.O. Box 44530, Olympia, WA 98504-4530 or by phone at (360) 902-5320. Compliance In the event that the Contractor is unable to accomplish the Apprentice Utilization Requirement, the Contractor shall demonstrate that a Good Faith Effort has been made as described within this specification. Failure to comply with the requirements as specified is subject to penalties for noncompliance as set forth in KCC 6.01.030(E). Good Faith Efforts In fulfilling the Good Faith Effort, the Contractor shall perform and, when appropriate, require its Subcontractors to perform the following steps: 1. Solicit Apprentice(s) from State-approved Apprenticeship Training Program(s). 2. Document the solicitation and, in the event Apprentice(s) are not available, obtain supporting documentation from the solicited program(s). 3. Demonstrate that the plan was updated as required within this specification. 4. Provide documentation demonstrating what efforts the Contractor has taken to require Subcontractors to solicit and employ Apprentice(s). In the event that the preceding steps have been followed, the Contractor may also supplement the Good Faith Efforts documentation with the following documentation: 5. Submit documentation demonstrating successful Apprentice utilization on previous contracts. 6. Submit documentation indicating company-wide Apprentice utilization efforts and percentages of attainment. Payment Compensation for all costs involved with complying with the conditions of this specification is included in payment for the associated Contract items of work. 1-07.13 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work SECTION 1-07.13(4) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE SECOND SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND DELETING THE LAST PARAGRAPH. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 18 1-07.13(4) Repair of Damage SECTION 1-07.14 IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE BEGINNING OF THAT SECTION: 1-07.14 Responsibility for Damage To the extent a conflict exists between the terms of this Section 1-07.14 and Section 5 of the Contract, the terms of the Contract will control. Any reference to the State, Governor, Commission, Secretary, or all officers and employees of the State also will include the City, its officers and employees. 1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution Prevention SECTION 1-07.15(1) IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AFTER THE LAST PARAGRAPH: 1-07.15(1) Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasures Plan When the proposal form includes multiple bid schedules and the “SPCC Plan” bid item is present in only one bid schedule, the lump sum payment item for the “SPCC Plan” in that one schedule will apply to all bid schedules for all costs associated with creating and updating the accepted SPCC Plan, and all costs associated with the setup of prevention measures and for implementing the current SPCC Plan as required by this Specifications. SECTION 1-07.17 IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING SENTENCE TO THE END OF THE SECOND PARAGRAPH: 1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities If a utility is known to have or suspected of having underground facilities within the area of the proposed excavation and that utility is not a subscriber to the utilities underground location center, the Contractor shall give individual notice to that utility within the same time frame prescribed in RCW 19.122.030 for subscriber utilities. SECTION 1-07.17 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 1-07.17(3) Utility Markings Once underground utilities are marked by the utility owner or its agent, and/or once new underground facilities have been installed by the Contractor, the Contractor/excavator is responsible to determine the precise location of underground facilities that may conflict with other KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 19 underground construction. The Contractor shall maintain the marks or a record of the location of buried facilities for the duration of time needed to avoid future damage until installation of all planned improvements at that location is complete. 1-07.17(4) Payment All costs to comply with subsection 1-07.17(3) and for the protection and repair of all identified or suspected underground utilities specified in RCW 19.122 are incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor/excavator. The Contractor shall include all related costs in the unit bid prices of the contract. No additional time or monetary compensation shall be made for delays caused by utility re- marking or repair of damaged utilities due to the Contractor’s failure to maintain marks or to locate utilities in accordance with this section. 1-07.17(5) Notification of Excavation Within ten business days but not less than two business days prior to the commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall provide written notice (or other form of notice acceptable to the Engineer) to all owners of underground facilities, whether public or private, that excavation will occur, and when excavation will occur. 1-07.17(6) Site Inspection Contractor warrants and represents that it has personally, or through its employees, agents and/or subcontractors, examined all property affected by this project and that it is knowledgeable of specific locations for water, gas, telephone, electric power and combined sewerage utilities within those areas. The following list of contacts is provided only as a convenience to the Contractor. It may not be accurate and may not constitute a complete list of all affected utilities. CenturyLink Gabrielle Skorupa 206-305-4395 Comcast Aaron Cantrel 206-510-4222 (cell) Aaron_Cantrel@comcast.com Puget Sound Energy Gas Glenn Helton 253-395-6926 425-559-4647 (cell) Puget Sound Energy Electric Hong Nguyen 425-449-6609 (cell) Hong.Nguyen@pse.com Verizon Scott Christenson 425-636-6046 425-471-1079 (cell) KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 20 SECTION 1-07.18 IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH BEFORE THE FIRST PARAGRAPH: 1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance To the extent a conflict exists between the terms of this Section 1-07.18 and the insurance requirements in Section 7 of the Contract, the terms of the Contract will control. Any reference to the State, Governor, Commission, Secretary, or all officers and employees of the State also will include the City, its officers and employees. SECTION 1-07.24 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.24 Rights of Way Street right of way lines, limits of easements and limits of construction are indicated or defined on the plans. The Contractor's construction activities shall be confined within these limits, unless arrangements for use of private property are made. It is anticipated that the City will have obtained all right of way, easements or right of entry agreements prior to the start of construction. Locations where these rights have not been obtained will be brought to the Contractor's attention prior to start of construction. The Contractor shall not proceed with any portion of the work in areas where right of way, easements or rights of entry have not been acquired until the Engineer certifies to the Contractor that the right of way or easement is available or that the right of entry has been received. SECTION 1-07.26 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-07.26 Personal Liability of Public Officers Neither the City, the Engineer, nor any other official, officer or employee of the City shall be personally liable for any acts or failure to act in connection with the contract, it being understood that, in these matters, they are acting solely as agents of the City. 1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS SECTION 1-08 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 1-08.0 Preconstruction and Preconstruction Conference The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with up to ten (10) copies of the plans and specifications. Additional documents may be purchased from the City at the price specified by the City or in the Invitation to KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 21 Bid. Prior to undertaking each part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract and check and verify all pertinent figures shown and all applicable field measurements. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy that the Contractor discovers. After the Contract has been executed, but prior to the Contractor beginning the work, a preconstruction conference will be held with the Contractor, the Engineer and any other interested parties that the City determines to invite. The purpose of the preconstruction conference will be: 1. To review the initial progress schedule. 2. To establish a working understanding among the various parties associated or affected by the work. 3. To establish and review procedures for progress payment, notifications, approvals, submittals, etc. 4. To verify normal working hours for the work. 5. To review safety standards and traffic control. 6. To discuss any other related items that may be pertinent to the work. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, at or prior to the preconstruction conference the following: 1. A price breakdown of all lump sum items. 2. A preliminary construction schedule. 3. A list of material sources for approval, if applicable. 4. Schedule of submittals. (See 1-06.6(2)) 5. Temporary Erosion/Sedimentation Control Plan (TESCP) for approval. 6. Traffic Control Plan (TCP) for approval. 7. Request to sublet, for approval by the Engineer, of all subcontractors. SECTION 1-08.4 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-08.4 Notice to Proceed, Prosecution and Hours of Work Notice to Proceed will be given after the contract has been executed and the contract bond and evidence of required insurance have been approved by and filed with the City. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall not commence the work until the Notice to Proceed has been given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall commence construction activities on the Project Site within ten working days of the Notice to Proceed Date. The Work thereafter shall be prosecuted diligently, vigorously, and without unauthorized interruption until physical completion of the work. Voluntary shutdown or slowing of operations by the Contractor shall not KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 22 relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to complete the work within the time(s) specified in the Contract. Except in the case of emergency or unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the normal straight time working hours for the Contractor shall be any consecutive 8 hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified in the Kent Special Provisions, with a 5-day work week, plus allowing a maximum one-hour lunch break in each working day. The normal straight time 8-hour working period for the contract shall be established at the preconstruction conference or prior to the Contractor commencing work. If a Contractor desires to perform work on holidays, Saturdays, Sundays, or before 7:00 a.m. or after 6:00 p.m. on any day, the Contractor shall apply in writing to the Engineer for permission to work those times. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance (72 hours in advance for weekend work) so that the Inspector's time may be scheduled. Permission to work longer than an 8-hour period between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. is not required. For any work outside of normal straight time working hours that requires city surveyors, all reasonable efforts shall be made by the Contractor to allow time for surveying to be completed during normal straight time hours. If city surveyors are required to work other than normal straight time hours at the convenience of the Contractor, all such work shall be reimbursed by the Contractor. Permission to work between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. during weekdays and between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 9:00 a.m. on weekends or holidays may also be subject to noise control requirements. Approval to continue work during these hours may be revoked at any time the Contractor exceeds the City’s noise control regulations or the city receives complaints from the public or adjoining property owners regarding noise from the Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall have no claim for damages or delays should this permission be revoked for these reasons. The Engineer may grant permission to work Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or other than the agreed upon normal straight time working hours, but may be subject to other conditions established by the City or Engineer. These conditions may include, but are not limited to the following: hours worked by City employees; impacts to the construction schedule; or accommodations to adjoining properties affected by the contract work. 1-08.4(A) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of City Employees Following is a non-exclusive list of work that may require Contractor reimbursement for overtime of City employees. The City will bill the Contractor at the OVERTIME RATE in order for locate crews to KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 23 complete other work. If the locate request is for nights, weekend, holidays or at other times when locate crews are not normally working, all locate work and expenses, including travel, minimum call out times, and/or Holiday premiums will be borne by the Contractor. 1. Locate work required to re-establish marks for City-owned underground facilities that were not maintained or recorded by the Contractor in accordance with RCW 19.122.030. 2. Work required by city survey crew(s) as the result of reestablishing survey stakes or markings that were not maintained or recorded by the Contractor or other work deemed to be for the convenience of the Contractor and not required of the City by the contract. 3. Work required by City personnel or independent testing laboratories to re-test project materials, utility pressure or vacuum tests, camera surveys or water purity tests as the result of initial test failure on the part of the Contractor. 1-08.4(B) General The City allocates its resources to a contract based on the total time allowed in the contract. The City will accept a progress schedule indicating an early physical completion date but cannot guarantee the City resources will be available to meet the accelerated schedule. No additional compensation will be allowed if the Contractor is not able to meet its accelerated schedule due to the unavailability of City resources or for other reasons beyond the City's control. Unless previously approved by the Engineer, the original and all supplemental progress schedules shall not conflict with any time and order-of-work requirements in the contract. If the Engineer deems that the original or any necessary supplemental progress schedule does not provide adequate information, the City may withhold progress payments until a schedule containing needed information has been submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Engineer's acceptance of any schedule shall not transfer any of the Contractor's responsibilities to the City. The Contractor alone shall remain responsible for adjusting forces, equipment, and work schedules to ensure completion of the work within the times specified in the contract. SECTION 1-08.5 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE THIRD PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-08.5 Time for Completion KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 24 Contract time shall begin on the day of the Notice to Proceed. The Contract Provisions may specify another starting date for Contract time, in which case, time will begin on the starting date specified. SECTION 1-08.6 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIFTH, SIXTH, AND SEVENTH PARAGRAPHS AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-08.6 Suspension of Work If the performance of all or any part of the Work is suspended for an unreasonable period of time by an act of the Contracting Agency in the administration of the Contract, or by failure to act within the time specified in the Contract (or if no time is specified, within a reasonable time), the Engineer will make an adjustment for any increase in the cost or time for the performance of the Contract (excluding profit) necessarily caused by the suspension. However, no adjustment will be made for any suspension if (1) the performance would have been suspended by any other cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor, or (2) an equitable adjustment is provided for or excluded under any other provision of the Contract. If the Contactor believes that the performance of the Work is suspended for an unreasonable period of time and such suspension is the responsibility of the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall immediately submit a written notice of protest to the Engineer as provided in Section 1-04.5. No adjustment shall be allowed for any costs incurred more than 10 calendar days before the date the Engineer receives the Contractor’s written notice to protest. In any event, no protest will be allowed later than the date of the Contractor’s signature on the Final Pay Estimate. The Contractor shall keep full and complete records of the costs and additional time of such suspension, and shall permit the Engineer to have access to those records and any other records as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer to assist in evaluating the protest. The Engineer will determine if an equitable adjustment in cost or time is due as provided in this Section. The equitable adjustment for increase in costs, if due, shall be subject to the limitations provided in Section 1-09.4, provided that no profit of any kind will be allowed on any increase in cost necessarily caused by the suspension. SECTION 1-08.7 MAINTENANCE DURING SUSPENSION IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FOURTH AND SIXTH PARAGRAPHS. 1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-09.9 Payments SECTION 1-09.9 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 25 1-09.9(2) City’s Right to Withhold Certain Amounts In addition to the amount that the City may otherwise retain under the Contract, the City may withhold a sufficient amount of any payments otherwise due to the Contractor, including nullifying the whole or part of any previous payment, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent inspections that, in the City's judgment, may be necessary to cover the following: 1.The cost of defective work not remedied. 2.Fees incurred for material inspection, and overtime engineering and inspection for which the Contractor is obligated under this Contract. 3.Fees and charges of public authorities or municipalities. 4.Liquidated damages. 5.Engineering and inspection fees beyond Completion Date. 6.Cost of City personnel to re-establish locate marks for City-owned facilities that were not maintained by the Contractor in accordance with RCW 19.122.030 (3). 7.Additional inspection, testing and lab fees for re-doing failed, water, other utility tests. 1-09.11 Disputes and Claims SECTION 1-09.11(3) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction This contract shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of Washington. The venue of any claims or causes of action arising from this contract shall be exclusively in the Superior Court of King County, located in Kent, Washington. For convenience of the parties to this contract, it is mutually agreed that any claims or causes of action which the Contractor has against the City arising from this contract shall be brought within 180 days from the date of Final Acceptance of the contract by the City. The parties understand and agree that the Contractor’s failure to bring suit within the time period provided shall be a complete bar to any such claims or causes of action. It is further mutually agreed by the parties that when any claims or causes of action that a Contractor asserts against the City arising from this contract are filed with the City or initiated in court, the Contractor shall permit the City to have timely access to any records deemed necessary by the City to assist in evaluating the claims or actions. SECTION 1-09.13 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 26 1-09.13 Final Decision and Appeal All disputes arising under this contract shall proceed pursuant to Section 1-04.5 and 1-09.11 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and any Kent Special Provisions provided for in the contract for claims and resolution of disputes. The provisions of these sections and the Kent Special Provisions must be complied with as a condition precedent to the Contractor’s right to seek an appeal of the City’s decision. The City’s decision under Section 1-09.11 will be final and conclusive. Thereafter, the exclusive means of Contractor’s right to appeal shall only be by filing suit exclusively under the venue, rules and jurisdiction of the Superior Court of King County, located in Kent, Washington, unless the parties agree in writing to an alternative dispute resolution process. 1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL 1-10.2 Traffic Control Management SECTION 1-10.2(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 1-10.2(1) General The TCS shall be certified as a work site traffic control supervisor by one of the following: Evergreen Safety Council 401 Pontius Avenue North Seattle, WA 98109 1-800-521-0778 or 206-382-4090 The Northwest Laborers-Employers Training Trust 27055 Ohio Avenue Kingston, WA 98346 360-297-3035 The American Traffic Safety Services Association 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite 100 Fredericksburg, VA 22406-1022 Training Dept. Toll Free (877) 642-4637 or (540) 368-1701 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 27 1-10.3 Traffic Control Labor, Procedures, and Devices 1-10.3(3) Traffic Control Devices SECTION 1-10.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 1-10.3(3)L Temporary Traffic Control Devices When the bid proposal includes an item for “Temporary Traffic Control Devices,” the work required for this item shall be furnishing barricades, flashers, cones, traffic safety drums, and other temporary traffic control devices, unless the contract provides for furnishing a specific temporary traffic control device under another item. The item “Temporary Traffic Control Devices” includes: 1. Initial delivery to the project site (or temporary storage) in good repair and in clean usable condition, 2. Repair or replacement when they are damaged and they are still needed on the project, and 3. Removal from the project site when they are no longer on the project. SECTION 1-10.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1-10.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price for “Traffic Control Labor” per hour shall be full pay for all costs for the labor provided for performing those construction operations described in Section 1-10.2(1)B, and Section 1-10.3(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, and as authorized by the Engineer. The hours eligible for “Traffic Control Labor” shall be limited to the hours the worker is actually performing the work as documented by traffic control forms provided by the Contractor’s TCM, and verified by the City Inspector’s records, and the Contractor’s Certified Payroll Records submitted to the City Inspector on a weekly basis. The unit contract price for “Traffic Control Supervisor” per hour shall be full pay for each hour a person performs the Traffic Control Supervisor duties described in Section 1-10.2(1)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Payment for traffic control labor performed by the Traffic Control Supervisor will be paid under the item for “Traffic Control Labor.” KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 28 The lump sum contract price for “Temporary Traffic Control Devices” shall be full pay for providing the work described in Section 1-10.3(3)L of the Kent Special Provisions. Progress payment for the lump sum item “Temporary Traffic Control Devices” will be made as follows: 1. When the initial temporary traffic control devices are set up, 50 percent of the amount bid for the item will be paid. 2. Payment for the remaining 50 percent of the amount bid for the item will be paid on a prorated basis in accordance with the total job progress as determined by progress payments. The unit contract price for “Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS)” per day shall be full pay for all costs for furnishing, transporting, initial installation within the project limits, maintaining and removing the PCMS, and associated work described in Section 1-10.3(3)C of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Relocation of the PCMS within the project limits will be paid under the item “Traffic Control Labor.” The unit contract price for “Sequential Arrow Sign (SAS)” per day shall be full pay for all costs for providing, maintaining and removing the SAS, and associated work and maintenance described in Section 1-10.3(3)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. The operator of this device will be paid under the item “Traffic Control Labor.” The unit contract price for “Traffic Safety Drum” per each shall be full pay for furnishing the drums, including the portable light if required, transporting them to the project, weighting them, and for transportation involved in removing the drums from the project. Drums damaged by the Contractor, due to the Contractor’s operation, shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All labor required to perform the work described in Section 1-10.3(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications for the drums will be paid under the item “Traffic Control Labor.” The unit contract price for “Transportable Attenuator” per each shall be full pay for furnishing a truck with transportable attenuator attached, transporting the transportable attenuator to and from the project, and when the transportable attenuator is in use but not manned. The unit contract price for “Operation of Transportable Attenuator” per day shall be full pay for each hour the transportable attenuator is manned and operated. All costs for repairing or replacing transportable attenuators damaged by the motoring public will be paid for by force account as specified in Section 1-09.6 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. To provide a common proposal for all bidders, the City has estimated the amount of force account for “Repair Transportable Attenuator” and has entered the amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total bid by the KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 29 Contractor. Transportable attenuators damaged due to the Contractor’s operation shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the City. The unit contract price for “Type III Barricade” per each will be full pay for performing the work specified, including when required, furnishing, installing, cleaning, maintaining, and removing the warning lights. All labor required for relocating barricades to a new location in accordance with the plans, approved Traffic Control Plans (TCP’s), or as ordered by the Engineer, or moving barricades to or from temporary storage, as approved by the Engineer, will be paid under the item “Traffic Control Labor”. The unit contract price for “Temporary Barrier” per linear foot will be full pay for performing the work specified, including when required, furnishing, installing, cleaning, maintaining, and removing the warning lights. All labor required for relocating barriers to a new location in accordance with the plans, approved Traffic Control Plans (TCP’s), or as ordered by the Engineer, or moving barriers to or from temporary storage, as approved by the Engineer, will be paid under the item “Traffic Control Labor.” All costs for providing, repairing or replacing temporary (static) “Impact Attenuator” damaged by the motoring public will be paid for by force account as specified in Section 1-09.6 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. To provide a common proposal for all bidders, the City has estimated the amount of force account for temporary “Impact Attenuator” and has entered the amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total bid by the Contractor. Impact Attenuators damaged due to the Contractor’s operation shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the City. When the proposal does not include a bid item for a specific bid item listed in the WSDOT Standard Specifications and/or the Kent Special Provisions, all costs for the work described for those traffic control bid items shall be included by the Contractor in the unit contract prices for the various other bid items contained within the proposal. The Contractor shall estimate these costs based on the Contractor’s contemplated work procedures. When traffic control bid items are included in the bid proposal, payment is limited to the following work areas: 1. The entire construction area under contract and for a distance to include the initial warning signs for the beginning of the project and the END OF CONSTRUCTION sign. Any warning signs for side streets on the approved TCP are also included. If the project consists of two or more sections, the limits will apply to each section individually. 2. A detour provided in the plans or approved by the City’s Traffic Control Supervisor for by-passing all or any portion of the KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 PAGE 30 construction, irrespective of whether or not the termini of the detour are within the limits of the Contract. No payment will be made to the Contractor for traffic control items required in connection with the movement of equipment or the hauling of materials outside of the limits of 1 and 2 above, or for temporary road closures subject to the provisions of Section 1-07.23(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 2 PAGE 1 DIVISION 2 – EARTHWORK 2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS SECTION 2-02.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-02.1 Description This work also includes the repair of adjacent improvements that were not designated for removal, but that were damaged by the Contractor’s operations. SECTION 2-02.3 IS REVISED BY REPLACING THE LAST THREE PARAGRAPHS WITH THE FOLLOWING: 2-02.3 Construction Requirements The City has identified the following materials that are marked for removal, but that will be salvaged as part of this project: 1. 2. The salvaged materials listed above shall be removed, hauled and stored at the following site(s): 1. 2. All improvements that are not designated for removal, but that are damaged by the Contractor’s operations shall be replaced, restored, or repaired at the Contractor’s sole expense. The Engineer’s determination regarding what replacement, restoration, or repair must be made by the Contractor to repair damage caused by the Contractor’s removal operations is final. SECTION 2-02.3(3) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters In removing pavement, sidewalks, and curbs the Contractor shall: 1. Haul broken-up pieces of concrete and asphalt pavement into the roadway embankment, or to some off-project site, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, or permitted by the Kent Special Provisions. 2. Material that is to be incorporated into the embankment shall be broken into pieces not exceeding 18 inches in any dimension, and no part of any piece shall be within three feet of the top, side or end surface of the embankment or any structure. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 2 PAGE 2 3. Make a vertical saw cut between any existing pavement, sidewalk, or curb that is to remain and the portion to be removed. When asphalt pavements are being widened, the vertical saw cut shall be made at least 1-foot from the edge of the existing pavement, and at least 2-feet from the closest edge of any cement concrete curb that will remain or be replaced, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 4. Replace at no expense to the City any existing pavement designated to remain that is damaged during the removal of other pavement, sidewalks, or curbs. 5. When cement concrete sidewalk, cement concrete pavement, or cement concrete curb is being removed, and the removal would result in a remaining strip of cement concrete less than 5 feet long, or where in the opinion of the Engineer the remaining portion of the sidewalk, pavement or curb would be damaged by the cutting required for the removal, then the entire sidewalk, pavement or curb shall be removed to the next expansion joint. SECTION 2-02.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 2-02.3(4) Removal of Traffic Islands, and/or Traffic Curbs When Pavement Surface Integrity is to be Maintained In removing traffic islands and/or traffic curbs the Contractor shall: 1. Haul broken-up pieces and complete sections of traffic curbs and all waste materials to an off-project site, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, or permitted by the Kent Special Provisions. 2. Completely remove all block traffic curbs, pre-cast traffic curbs, connecting dividers, nose pieces and remaining adhesive. 3. Remove all island materials, including asphalt pavement, crushed rock, and topsoil, between the traffic curbs to the depth of the compacted subgrade, or to the surface of the underlying pavement where such pavement exists under the island. 4. Take suitable care so as not to damage the underlying pavement surface more than necessary, clean all underlying pavement, and fill any surface voids caused by the removal work. 5. Repair any damage to adjacent traffic curbs that were designated to remain, but that was caused by the removal of the traffic curbs. 6. Remove and dispose of all waste materials deposited on the pavement, or within the City’s stormwater management system, as a result of the removal process selected by the Contractor. SECTION 2-02.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-02.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 2 PAGE 3 The unit contract price per square yard for “Remove Existing Asphalt Concrete Pavement” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment required to remove existing asphalt from sidewalk for a depth of 3 inches, and from roads for a depth of 6 inches. Included in this price is the cost of hauling and disposal of the asphalt pavement. Should the Contractor encounter pavement to be removed which is thicker than 6 inches it shall be paid according to the following formula: actual depth in inches (square yards) x 6 inches = quantity For example, if the Contractor encounters pavement to be removed which is 8 inches thick and 100 square yards then the quantity would be: 8 100’ x 6 = 133 S.Y. No other compensation shall be allowed. The unit contract price per square yard for “Remove Existing Cement Concrete Pavement” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment required to remove existing concrete pavement from roads for a depth of 6 inches. Included in this price is the cost of hauling and disposal of the concrete pavement. Should the Contractor encounter pavement to be removed which is thicker than 6 inches it shall be paid according to the following formula: actual depth in inches (square yards) x 6 inches = quantity For example, if the Contractor encounters pavement to be removed which is 8 inches thick and 100 square yards then the quantity would be: 8 100’ x 6 = 133 S.Y. No other compensation shall be allowed. The unit contract price per square yard for “Remove Cement Concrete Sidewalk” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to saw cut and remove, haul, and dispose of the cement concrete sidewalk as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit contract price per lineal foot for “Remove Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to saw cut and remove, haul, and dispose of the cement concrete curb and gutter as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit contract price per lineal foot for “Remove Cement Concrete Extruded Curb” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 2 PAGE 4 labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to saw cut and remove, haul, and dispose of the cement concrete extruded curb as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. “Removal of Traffic Islands and/or Traffic Curb,” lump sum. The unit contract price per lineal foot for “Remove Existing Storm Sewer Pipe or Culvert” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to remove the existing storm pipe or culvert as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit bid price shall also include but not be limited to excavation, concrete plugging any remaining pipes, removal, disposal, backfilling with gravel borrow, and compaction. The unit contract price per each for “Remove Existing Catch Basin or Manhole” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to remove the existing structure as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit price bid shall include but not be limited to excavation, concrete plugging any remaining pipes, removal, disposal, backfilling, with gravel borrow and compaction. Any frames, grates, or risers shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor unless deemed salvageable as determined by the Engineer. “Saw Cut Existing Asphalt Concrete Pavement” “Saw Cut Existing Cement Concrete Pavement” The unit price contract price per lineal foot for the above items constitutes complete compensation for all materials, labor and equipment required to saw cut existing pavement to a depth of 6 inches in accordance with the plans and specifications. Should the Contractor encounter pavement to be removed which is thicker than 6 inches, it shall be paid according to the following formula: actual depth in inches (length) x 6 inches = quantity For example, if the Contractor encounters pavement to be saw cut which is 8 inches thick and 100 linear feet then the quantity would be: 8 length x 6 = 133 LF. No other compensation shall be allowed. A vertical saw cut shall be required between any existing pavement, sidewalk, or curb that is to remain and the portion to be removed. The costs of other types of pavement cutting, such as “wheel cutting”, shall be considered incidental to other bid items and no payment will be allowed under this item unless the pavement is actually saw cut. 2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 2 PAGE 5 2-03.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 2-03.3(7)C IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-03.3(7)C Contractor-Provided Disposal Site The City has not provided a waste site. The Contractor shall arrange for disposal and provide any necessary disposal sites in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. The Contractor is responsible for determining which permits are required for the selected disposal sites. Within the City, wetlands are identified by using the Corps of Engineers Wetlands Delineation Manual dated January 1987. SECTION 2-03.3(14)D IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-03.3(14)D Compaction and Moisture Control Tests Maximum density will be determined by the Modified Proctor Method ASTM D-1557. All compaction tests if required will be performed by the City. 2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 2-06.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 2-06.3(1) ITEM 6 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 2-06.3(1) Subgrade for Surfacing 6. The prepared subgrade shall be compacted in the top 0.50 foot to 95 percent of maximum dry density per ASTM D-1557 for a cut section. If the underlying subgrade is too soft to permit compaction of the upper 0.5 foot layer, the Contractor shall loosen (or excavate and remove), and compact the subgrade until the top layer can meet compaction requirements. Fill sections shall be prepared in accordance with the Standard Specification Section 2-03.3(14)C, Method B except ASTM D-1557 shall determine the maximum density. SECTION 2-06.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-06.5 Measurement and Payment The cost for work required for compaction of the subgrade shall be included by the Contractor in the unit contract price of other bid items. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 2 PAGE 6 2-07 WATERING SECTION 2-07.4 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 2-07.4 Measurement The Contractor shall obtain a hydrant meter and permit from the City Maintenance Shop located at 5821 South 240th Street 253-856-5600 to measure the quantities of water used. Hydrant wrenches are also available at the City Maintenance Shops at the Contractors option. No additional deposit is required for the hydrant wrench. The City shall provide all water that comes from the City water system. Prior to issuance of the hydrant meter (and wrench if applicable) and permit, the Contractor shall make a hydrant meter deposit to the City Customer Service Division located on the first floor of the Centennial Center at 400 West Gowe Street 253-856-5200. The said deposit is refundable provided the Contractor returns the hydrant meter (and wrench if applicable) to the City Maintenance Shops undamaged. The Contractor shall provide his own gate valve on the hose side of the hydrant meter with which to control water flow. The hydrant meter permit duration is two (2) months. At the end of the permit duration, the Contractor shall deliver the hydrant meter (and wrench if applicable) to the City Maintenance Shops for reading. If the Contractor requires another hydrant meter and permit at the time a meter is returned to the City Maintenance Shops, he shall request a meter and one shall be provided. An additional meter deposit will not be required. The Contractors initial hydrant meter deposit shall be transferred to the new meter issued. 2-12 CONSTRUCTION GEOSYNTHETIC SECTION 2-12.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-12.1 Description This work shall consist of furnishing and installing non-woven geotextile fabric at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. SECTION 2-12.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-12.2 Materials Non-woven geotextile fabric shall meet the material requirements of Section 9-33 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications for high survivability, separation and soil stabilization, and underground KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 2 PAGE 7 drainage for each geotextile use as specified on the plans or in the Kent Special Provisions. SECTION 2-12.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-12.3 Construction Requirements The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to not tear or damage the fabric during installation. The fabric shall be laid down by hand. Folds or creases in the fabric shall be pulled flat. The fabric sides and ends shall be anchored or weighted sufficiently to prevent slouching. Joints or seams shall be overlapped a minimum of two (2) feet. SECTION 2-12.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-12.4 Measurement Non-woven geotextile fabric shall be measured per square yard of materials placed. SECTION 2-12.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 2-12.5 Payment The unit contract price per square yard for “Geotextile Fabric, Non- Woven” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to furnish and install the fabric at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 4 PAGE 1 DIVISION 4 – BASES DIVISION 4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 4-03 GRAVEL BORROW 4-03.1 Description This work shall consist of constructing one or more layers of gravel borrow upon a prepared subgrade in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, depths, and typical cross-section shown in the plans or as established by the Engineer. 4-03.2 Materials Materials shall meet the minimum requirements of the following section in the Kent Special Provisions: Gravel Borrow ................. 9-03.14(1) 4-03.3 Construction Requirements Gravel borrow shall be uniformly spread upon the prepared subgrade to the depth, width, and cross-sections shown in the plans. Construction methods used shall meet the appropriate requirements of Section 4-04.3. 4-03.4 Measurement Gravel borrow will be measured in the same manner prescribed for the measurement of crushed surfacing materials as set forth in Section 4-04.4. 4-03.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per ton for “Gravel Borrow, Including Haul and Compaction” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to haul, place, finish grade, and compact the gravel borrow as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This item shall be used for roadway subbase, backfill for water, storm sewer, electrical conduit trenches, and other excavation backfill and compaction unless otherwise noted. 4-04 BALLAST AND CRUSHED SURFACING 4-04.3 Construction Requirements KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 4 PAGE 2 SECTION 4-04.3(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 4-04.3(2) Subgrade The Contractor is responsible for any delays or costs incurred as a result of placing ballast or surface materials before approval is received from the Engineer. SECTION 4-04.3(5) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 4-04.3(5) Shaping and Compaction Surfacing shall be compacted in depths not to exceed 6 inches except top course shall not exceed 2 inches unless otherwise directed. Density shall be at least 95 percent of maximum density per ASTM D-1557 using a nuclear gauge. Compaction of each layer must be approved by the Engineer before the next succeeding layer of surfacing or pavement is placed thereon. SECTION 4-04.3(7) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 4-04.3(7) Miscellaneous Requirements The Contractor is solely responsible for any delays or additional costs incurred as a result of placing ballast or succeeding courses of surfacing materials before approval to proceed is received from the Engineer. SECTION 4-04.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 4-04.5 Payment “Crushed Surfacing Top Course, 5/8 Inch Minus” “Crushed Surfacing Base Course, 1-1/4 Inch Minus” The unit contract price per ton for the above items constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to haul, place, finish grade, and compact the material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. These items shall also be used for roadway or driveway remedial work or patching as requested by the Engineer. Quantities used for pipe zone bedding shall be measured and paid separately under the appropriate bid item. DIVISION 4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 4-06 ASPHALT TREATED BASE 4-06.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 4-06.3(6) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 4-06.3(6) Spreading and Finishing KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 4 PAGE 3 ATB shall be compacted in lifts not to exceed 4 inches unless otherwise directed. SECTION 4-06.3(7) IS REVISED BY REPLACING THE FIRST SENTENCE WITH THE FOLLOWING: 4-06.3(7) Density ATB shall be compacted to a density of at least 85 percent of maximum theoretical density (rice density). SECTION 4-06.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 4-06.5 Payment The unit contract price per ton for “Asphalt Treated Base” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to install the asphalt treated base as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 1 DIVISION 5 – SURFACE TREATMENTS AND PAVEMENTS NOTE: If the contract also includes underground utility construction, permanent surface treatments and pavements shall not be placed until an as-built survey and testing of the new underground utilities have been completed. Verification that utility construction conforms to the line and grade requirements of Section 7-08.3(2)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall be made by the Engineer prior to authorizing paving to begin. Also, each new utility must pass all appropriate tests specified herein for the type of utility prior to paving. 5-02 BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT SECTION 5-02.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 5-02.5 Payment Anti-stripping additive shall be included in the price of asphalt (grade) per ton. The quantity of asphalt material shall not be reduced by the quantity of anti-stripping additive. 5-04 HOT MIX ASPHALT SECTION 5-04 IS DELETED AND REPLACED IN ITS ENTIRETY WITH THE FOLLOWING: 5-04.1 Description This Work shall consist of providing and placing one or more layers of plant-mixed hot mix asphalt (HMA) on a prepared foundation or base in accordance with these Specifications and the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross-sections shown in the Plans. The manufacture of HMA may include warm mix asphalt (WMA) processes in accordance with these Specifications. WMA processes include organic additives, chemical additives, and foaming. HMA shall be composed of asphalt binder and mineral materials as may be required, mixed in the proportions specified to provide a homogeneous, stable, and workable mixture. 5-04.2 Materials Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections: Portland Cement 9-01 Asphalt Binder 9-02.1(4) Cationic Emulsified Asphalt 9-02.1(6) Anti-Stripping Additive 9-02.4 HMA Additive 9-02.5 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 2 Sand 9-03.1(2) (As noted in 5-04.3(5)C for crack sealing) Aggregates 9-03.8 Recycled Asphalt Pavement 9-03.8(3)B Mineral Filler 9-03.8(5) Recycled Material 9-03.21 Joint Sealant 9-04.2 Foam Backer Rod 9-04.2(3)A The Contract documents may establish that the various mineral materials required for the manufacture of HMA will be furnished in whole or in part by the Contracting Agency. If the documents do not establish the furnishing of any of these mineral materials by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall be required to furnish such materials in the amounts required for the designated mix. Mineral materials include coarse and fine aggregates, and mineral filler. The Contractor may choose to utilize recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) in the production of HMA. The RAP may be from pavements removed under the Contract, if any, or pavement material from an existing stockpile. The Contractor may use up to 20 percent RAP by total weight of HMA with no additional sampling or testing of the RAP. The RAP shall be sampled and tested at a frequency of one sample for every 1,000 tons produced and not less than ten samples per project. The asphalt content and gradation test data shall be reported to the Contracting Agency when submitting the mix design for approval on the QPL. The Contractor shall include the RAP as part of the mix design as defined in these Specifications. The grade of asphalt binder shall be as required by the Contract. Blending of asphalt binder from different sources is not permitted. The Contractor may only use warm mix asphalt (WMA) processes in the production of HMA with 20 percent or less RAP by total weight of HMA. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the process that is proposed and how it will be used in the manufacture of HMA. Production of aggregates shall comply with the requirements of Section 3-01. Preparation of stockpile site, the stockpiling of aggregates, and the removal of aggregates from stockpiles shall comply with the requirements of Section 3-02. ESAL's KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 3 The minimum number of ESAL's for the design and acceptance of the HMA in the contract shall be 11 million. 5-04.2(1) How to Get an HMA Mix Design on the QPL If the contractor wishes to submit a mix design for inclusion in the Qualified Products List (QPL), comply with each of the following: •Develop the mix design in accordance with WSDOT SOP 732. •Develop a mix design that complies with Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9- 03.8(6). •Develop a mix design no more than 6 months prior to submitting it for QPL evaluation. •Submit mix designs to the WSDOT State Materials Laboratory in Tumwater, including WSDOT Form 350-042. •Include representative samples of the materials that are to be used in the HMA production as part of the mix design submittal. •Identify the brand, type, and percentage of anti-stripping additive in the mix design submittal. •Include with the mix design submittal a certification from the asphalt binder supplier that the anti-stripping additive is compatible with the crude source and the formulation of asphalt binder proposed for use in the mix design. •Do not include warm mix asphalt (WMA) additives when developing a mix design or submitting a mix design for QPL evaluation. The use of warm mix asphalt (WMA) additives is not part of the process for obtaining approval for listing a mix design on the QPL. Refer to Section 5-04.2(2)B. The Contracting Agency’s basis for approving, testing, and evaluating HMA mix designs for approval on the QPL is dependent on the contractual basis for acceptance of the HMA mixture, shown in Table 1. Table 1 Basis for Contracting Agency Evaluation of HMA Mix Designs for Approval on the QPL Contractual Basis for Acceptance of HMA Mixture [see Section 5-04.3(9)] Basis for Contracting Agency Approval of Mix Design for Placement on QPL Contracting Agency Materials Testing for Evaluation of the Mix Design Statistical Evaluation WSDOT Standard Practice QC-8 The Contracting Agency will test the mix design materials for compliance with Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6). KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 4 Visual Evaluation Review of Form 350-042 for compliance with Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6) The Contracting Agency may elect to test the mix design materials, or evaluate in accordance with WSDOT Standard Practice QC-8, at its sole discretion. If the Contracting Agency approves the mix design, it will be listed on the QPL for 12 consecutive months. The Contracting Agency may extend the 12 month listing provided the Contractor submits a certification letter to the Qualified Products Engineer verifying that the aggregate source and job mix formula (JMF) gradation, and asphalt binder crude source and formulation have not changed. The Contractor may submit the certification no sooner than three months prior to expiration of the initial 12 month mix design approval. Within 7 calendar days of receipt of the Contractor’s certification, the Contracting Agency will update the QPL. The maximum duration for approval of a mix design and listing on the QPL will be 24 months from the date of initial approval or as approved by the Engineer. 5-04.2(1)A Vacant 5-04.2(2) Mix Design – Obtaining Project Approval No paving shall begin prior to the approval of the mix design by the Engineer. Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for all HMA not designated as Commercial HMA in the contract documents. Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA and for other classes of HMA in the following applications: sidewalks, road approaches, ditches, slopes, paths, trails, gores, prelevel, and pavement repair. Other nonstructural applications of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation shall be as approved by the Project Engineer. Sampling and testing of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Project Engineer. The Proposal quantity of HMA that is accepted by commercial evaluation will be excluded from the quantities used in the determination of nonstatistical evaluation. Nonstatistical Mix Design. Fifteen days prior to the first day of paving the contractor shall provide one of the following mix design verification certifications for Contracting Agency review; •The WSDOT Mix Design Evaluation Report from the current WSDOT QPL, or one of the mix design verification certifications listed below. •The proposed HMA mix design on WSDOT Form 350-042 with the seal and certification (stamp and signature) of a valid licensed Washington State Professional Engineer. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 5 • The Mix Design Report for the proposed HMA mix design developed by a qualified City or County laboratory that is within one year of the approval date. The mix design shall be performed by a lab accredited by a national authority such as Laboratory Accreditation Bureau, L-A-B for Construction Materials Testing, The Construction Materials Engineering Council (CMEC’s) ISO 17025 or AASHTO Accreditation Program (AAP) and shall supply evidence of participation in the AASHTO: resource proficiency sample program. Mix designs for HMA accepted by Nonstatistical evaluation shall; Have the aggregate structure and asphalt binder content determined in accordance with WSDOT Standard Operating Procedure 732 and meet the requirements of Sections 9-03.8(2), except that Hamburg testing for ruts and stripping are at the discretion of the Engineer, and Have anti-strip requirements, if any, for the proposed mix design determined in accordance with AASHTO T 283 or T 324, or based on historic anti-strip and aggregate source compatibility from previous WSDOT lab testing. At the discretion of the Engineer, agencies may accept verified mix designs older than 12 months from the original verification date with a certification from the Contractor that the materials and sources are the same as those shown on the original mix design. Commercial Evaluation Approval of a mix design for “Commercial Evaluation” will be based on a review of the Contractor’s submittal of WSDOT Form 350-042 (For commercial mixes, AASHTO T 324 evaluation is not required) or a Mix Design from the current WSDOT QPL or from one of the processes allowed by this section. Testing of the HMA by the Contracting Agency for mix design approval is not required. For the Bid Item Commercial HMA, the Contractor shall select a class of HMA and design level of Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL’s) specified herein. 5-04.2(2)B Using Warm Mix Asphalt Processes The Contractor may elect to use additives that reduce the optimum mixing temperature or serve as a compaction aid for producing HMA. Additives include organic additives, chemical additives and foaming processes. The use of Additives is subject to the following: • Do not use additives that reduce the mixing temperature more than allowed in Section 5-04.3(6) in the production of mixtures. • Before using additives, obtain the Engineer’s approval using WSDOT Form 350-076 to describe the proposed additive and process. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 6 5-04.3 Construction Requirements 5-04.3(1) Weather Limitations Do not place HMA for wearing course on any Traveled Way beginning October 1st through March 31st of the following year without written concurrence from the Engineer. Do not place HMA on any wet surface, or when the average surface temperatures are less than those specified below, or when weather conditions otherwise prevent the proper handling or finishing of the HMA. Minimum Surface Temperature for Paving Compacted Thickness (Feet) Wearing Course Other Courses Less than 0.10 55◦F 45◦F 0.10 to 0.20 45◦F 35◦F More than 0.20 35◦F 35◦F 5-04.3(2) Paving Under Traffic When the Roadway being paved is open to traffic, the requirements of this Section shall apply. The Contractor shall keep intersections open to traffic at all times except when paving the intersection or paving across the intersection. During such time, and provided that there has been an advance warning to the public, the intersection may be closed for the minimum time required to place and compact the mixture. In hot weather, the Engineer may require the application of water to the pavement to accelerate the finish rolling of the pavement and to shorten the time required before reopening to traffic. Before closing an intersection, advance warning signs shall be placed and signs shall also be placed marking the detour or alternate route. During paving operations, temporary pavement markings shall be maintained throughout the project. Temporary pavement markings shall be installed on the Roadway prior to opening to traffic. Temporary pavement markings shall be in accordance with Section 8-23. All costs in connection with performing the Work in accordance with these requirements, except the cost of temporary pavement markings, shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various Bid items involved in the Contract. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 7 5-04.3(3) Equipment 5-04.3(3)A Mixing Plant Plants used for the preparation of HMA shall conform to the following requirements: 1.Equipment for Preparation of Asphalt Binder – Tanks for the storage of asphalt binder shall be equipped to heat and hold the material at the required temperatures. The heating shall be accomplished by steam coils, electricity, or other approved means so that no flame shall be in contact with the storage tank. The circulating system for the asphalt binder shall be designed to ensure proper and continuous circulation during the operating period. A valve for the purpose of sampling the asphalt binder shall be placed in either the storage tank or in the supply line to the mixer. 2.Thermometric Equipment – An armored thermometer, capable of detecting temperature ranges expected in the HMA mix, shall be fixed in the asphalt binder feed line at a location near the charging valve at the mixer unit. The thermometer location shall be convenient and safe for access by Inspectors. The plant shall also be equipped with an approved dial-scale thermometer, a mercury actuated thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or another approved thermometric instrument placed at the discharge chute of the drier to automatically register or indicate the temperature of the heated aggregates. This device shall be in full view of the plant operator. 3.Heating of Asphalt Binder – The temperature of the asphalt binder shall not exceed the maximum recommended by the asphalt binder manufacturer nor shall it be below the minimum temperature required to maintain the asphalt binder in a homogeneous state. The asphalt binder shall be heated in a manner that will avoid local variations in heating. The heating method shall provide a continuous supply of asphalt binder to the mixer at a uniform average temperature with no individual variations exceeding 25°F. Also, when a WMA additive is included in the asphalt binder, the temperature of the asphalt binder shall not exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer of the WMA additive. 4.Sampling and Testing of Mineral Materials – The HMA plant shall be equipped with a mechanical sampler for the sampling of the mineral materials. The mechanical sampler shall meet the requirements of Section 1-05.6 for the crushing and screening operation. The Contractor shall provide for the setup and operation of the field testing facilities of the Contracting Agency as provided for in Section 3-01.2(2). 5.Sampling HMA – The HMA plant shall provide for sampling HMA by one of the following methods: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 8 a.A mechanical sampling device attached to the HMA plant. b.Platforms or devices to enable sampling from the hauling vehicle without entering the hauling vehicle. 5-04.3(3)B Hauling Equipment Trucks used for hauling HMA shall have tight, clean, smooth metal beds and shall have a cover of canvas or other suitable material of sufficient size to protect the mixture from adverse weather. Whenever the weather conditions during the work shift include, or are forecast to include, precipitation or an air temperature less than 45°F or when time from loading to unloading exceeds 30 minutes, the cover shall be securely attached to protect the HMA. The Contractor shall provide an environmentally benign means to prevent the HMA mixture from adhering to the hauling equipment. Excess release agent shall be drained prior to filling hauling equipment with HMA. Petroleum derivatives or other coating material that contaminate or alter the characteristics of the HMA shall not be used. For live bed trucks, the conveyer shall be in operation during the process of applying the release agent. 5-04.3(3)C Pavers HMA pavers shall be self-contained, power-propelled units, provided with an internally heated vibratory screed and shall be capable of spreading and finishing courses of HMA plant mix material in lane widths required by the paving section shown in the Plans. The HMA paver shall be in good condition and shall have the most current equipment available from the manufacturer for the prevention of segregation of the HMA mixture installed, in good condition, and in working order. The equipment certification shall list the make, model, and year of the paver and any equipment that has been retrofitted. The screed shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, segregating, or gouging the mixture. A copy of the manufacturer’s recommendations shall be provided upon request by the Contracting Agency. Extensions will be allowed provided they produce the same results, including ride, density, and surface texture as obtained by the primary screed. Extensions without augers and an internally heated vibratory screed shall not be used in the Traveled Way. When specified in the Contract, reference lines for vertical control will be required. Lines shall be placed on both outer edges of the Traveled Way of each Roadway. Horizontal control utilizing the reference line will be permitted. The grade and slope for intermediate lanes shall be controlled automatically from reference lines or by means of a mat referencing device and a slope control device. When the finish of the grade prepared for paving is superior to the established tolerances and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, further improvement to the line, KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 9 grade, cross-section, and smoothness can best be achieved without the use of the reference line, a mat referencing device may be substituted for the reference line. Substitution of the device will be subject to the continued approval of the Engineer. A joint matcher may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. The reference line may be removed after the completion of the first course of HMA when approved by the Engineer. Whenever the Engineer determines that any of these methods are failing to provide the necessary vertical control, the reference lines will be reinstalled by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pins, brackets, tensioning devices, wire, and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation of the automatic control equipment. If the paving machine in use is not providing the required finish, the Engineer may suspend Work as allowed by Section 1-08.6. Any cleaning or solvent type liquids spilled on the pavement shall be thoroughly removed before paving proceeds. 5-04.3(3)D Material Transfer Device or Material Transfer Vehicle Use a material transfer device or material transfer vehicle (MTD/V) to deliver the HMA from the hauling equipment to the paving machine for any lift in (or partially in) the top 0.30 feet of the pavement section used in traffic lanes. However, an MTD/V is not required for HMA placed in irregular shaped and minor areas such as tapers and turn lanes. The MTD/V shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to laydown by the paving machine. Mixing of the HMA shall be sufficient to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture. If a windrow elevator is used, the length of the windrow may be limited in urban areas or through intersections, at the discretion of the Engineer. To be approved for use, an MTV: 1.Shall be self-propelled vehicle, separate from the hauling vehicle or paver. 2.Shall not be connected to the hauling vehicle or paver. 3.May accept HMA directly from the haul vehicle or pick up HMA from a windrow. 4.Shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to placement into the paving machine. 5.Shall mix the HMA sufficiently to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture. To be approved for use, an MTD: 1.Shall be positively connected to the paver. 2.May accept HMA directly from the haul vehicle or pick up HMA from a windrow. 3.Shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to placement into the paving machine. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 10 4. Shall mix the HMA sufficiently to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture. Additionally, a material transfer device or vehicle (MTD/V) is not required at the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 5-04.3(3)E Rollers Rollers shall be of the steel wheel, vibratory, oscillatory, or pneumatic tire type, in good condition and capable of reversing without backlash. Operation of the roller shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. When ordered by the Engineer for any roller planned for use on the project, the Contractor shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s recommendation for the use of that roller for compaction of HMA. The number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture in compliance with the requirements of Section 5-04.3(10). The use of equipment that results in crushing of the aggregate will not be permitted. Rollers producing pickup, washboard, uneven compaction of the surface, displacement of the mixture or other undesirable results shall not be used. 5-04.3(4) Preparation of Existing Paved Surfaces When the surface of the existing pavement or old base is irregular, the Contractor shall bring it to a uniform grade and cross-section as shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Preleveling of uneven or broken surfaces over which HMA is to be placed may be accomplished by using an asphalt paver, a motor patrol grader, or by hand raking, as approved by the Engineer. Compaction of preleveling HMA shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer and may require the use of small steel wheel rollers, plate compactors, or pneumatic rollers to avoid bridging across preleveled areas by the compaction equipment. Equipment used for the compaction of preleveling HMA shall be approved by the Engineer. Before construction of HMA on an existing paved surface, the entire surface of the pavement shall be clean. All fatty asphalt patches, grease drippings, and other objectionable matter shall be entirely removed from the existing pavement. All pavements or bituminous surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, soil, pavement grindings, and other foreign matter. All holes and small depressions shall be filled with an appropriate class of HMA. The surface of the patched area shall be leveled and compacted thoroughly. Prior to the application of tack coat, or paving, the condition of the surface shall be approved by the Engineer. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 11 A tack coat of asphalt shall be applied to all paved surfaces on which any course of HMA is to be placed or abutted; except that tack coat may be omitted from clean, newly paved surfaces at the discretion of the Engineer. Tack coat shall be uniformly applied to cover the existing pavement with a thin film of residual asphalt free of streaks and bare spots at a rate between 0.02 and 0.10 gallons per square yard of retained asphalt. The rate of application shall be approved by the Engineer. A heavy application of tack coat shall be applied to all joints. For Roadways open to traffic, the application of tack coat shall be limited to surfaces that will be paved during the same working shift. The spreading equipment shall be equipped with a thermometer to indicate the temperature of the tack coat material. Equipment shall not operate on tacked surfaces until the tack has broken and cured. If the Contractor’s operation damages the tack coat it shall be repaired prior to placement of the HMA. The tack coat shall be CSS-1, or CSS-1h emulsified asphalt. The CSS-1 and CSS-1h emulsified asphalt may be diluted once with water at a rate not to exceed one part water to one part emulsified asphalt. The tack coat shall have sufficient temperature such that it may be applied uniformly at the specified rate of application and shall not exceed the maximum temperature recommended by the emulsified asphalt  manufacturer. 5-04.3(4)A Crack Sealing 5-04.3(4)A1 General When the Proposal includes a pay item for crack sealing, seal all cracks ¼ inch in width and greater. Cleaning: Ensure that cracks are thoroughly clean, dry and free of all loose and foreign material when filling with crack sealant material. Use a hot compressed air lance to dry and warm the pavement surfaces within the crack immediately prior to filling a crack with the sealant material. Do not overheat pavement. Do not use direct flame dryers. Routing cracks is not required. Sand Slurry: For cracks that are to be filled with sand slurry, thoroughly mix the components and pour the mixture into the cracks until full. Add additional CSS-1 cationic emulsified asphalt to the sand slurry as needed for workability to ensure the mixture will completely fill the cracks. Strike off the sand slurry flush with the existing pavement surface and allow the mixture to cure. Top off cracks that were not completely filled with additional sand slurry. Do not place the HMA overlay until the slurry has fully cured. The sand slurry shall consist of approximately 20 percent CSS-1 emulsified asphalt, approximately 2 percent Portland cement, water (if required), and the remainder clean Class 1 or 2 fine aggregate per Section 9-03.1(2). The components shall be thoroughly mixed and then poured into the cracks and joints until full. The following day, any KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 12 cracks or joints that are not completely filled shall be topped off with additional sand slurry. After the sand slurry is placed, the filler shall be struck off flush with the existing pavement surface and allowed to cure. The HMA overlay shall not be placed until the slurry has fully cured. The requirements of Section 1-06 will not apply to the Portland cement and sand used in the sand slurry. In areas where HMA will be placed, use sand slurry to fill the cracks. In areas where HMA will not be placed, fill the cracks as follows: 1. Cracks ¼ inch to 1 inch in width - fill with hot poured sealant. 2. Cracks greater than 1 inch in width – fill with sand slurry. Hot Poured Sealant: For cracks that are to be filled with hot poured sealant, apply the material in accordance with these requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations. Furnish a Type 1 Working Drawing of the manufacturer’s product information and recommendations to the Engineer prior to the start of work, including the manufacturer’s recommended heating time and temperatures, allowable storage time and temperatures after initial heating, allowable reheating criteria, and application temperature range. Confine hot poured sealant material within the crack. Clean any overflow of sealant from the pavement surface. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor’s method of sealing the cracks with hot poured sealant results in an excessive amount of material on the pavement surface, stop and correct the operation to eliminate the excess material. 5-04.3(4)A2 Crack Sealing Areas Prior to Paving In areas where HMA will be placed, use sand slurry to fill the cracks. 5-04.3(4)A3 Crack Sealing Areas Not to be Paved In areas where HMA will not be placed, fill the cracks as follows: a. Cracks ¼ inch to 1 inch in width - fill with hot poured sealant. b. Cracks greater than 1 inch in width – fill with sand slurry. 5-04.3(4)B Vacant 5-04.3(4)C Pavement Repair The Contractor shall excavate pavement repair areas and shall backfill these with HMA in accordance with the details shown in the Plans and as marked in the field. The Contractor shall conduct the excavation operations in a manner that will protect the pavement that is to remain. Pavement not designated to be removed that is damaged as a result of the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost to the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall excavate only within one lane at a time unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not excavate KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 13 more area than can be completely finished during the same shift, unless approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans or determined by the Engineer, excavate to a depth of 1.0 feet. The Engineer will make the final determination of the excavation depth required. The minimum width of any pavement repair area shall be 40 inches unless shown otherwise in the Plans. Before any excavation, the existing pavement shall be sawcut or shall be removed by a pavement grinder. Excavated materials will become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in a Contractor-provided site off the Right of Way or used in accordance with Sections 2-02.3(3) or 9-03.21. Asphalt for tack coat shall be required as specified in Section 5-04.3(4). A heavy application of tack coat shall be applied to all surfaces of existing pavement in the pavement repair area. Placement of the HMA backfill shall be accomplished in lifts not to exceed 0.35-foot compacted depth. Lifts that exceed 0.35-foot of compacted depth may be accomplished with the approval of the Engineer. Each lift shall be thoroughly compacted by a mechanical tamper or a roller. 5-04.3(5) Producing/Stockpiling Aggregates and RAP Aggregates and RAP shall be stockpiled according to the requirements of Section 3-02. Sufficient storage space shall be provided for each size of aggregate and RAP. Materials shall be removed from stockpile(s) in a manner to ensure minimal segregation when being moved to the HMA plant for processing into the final mixture. Different aggregate sizes shall be kept separated until they have been delivered to the HMA plant. 5-04.3(5)A Vacant 5-04.3(6) Mixing After the required amount of mineral materials, asphalt binder, recycling agent and anti-stripping additives have been introduced into the mixer the HMA shall be mixed until complete and uniform coating of the particles and thorough distribution of the asphalt binder throughout the mineral materials is ensured. When discharged, the temperature of the HMA shall not exceed the optimum mixing temperature by more than 25°F as shown on the reference mix design report or as approved by the Engineer. Also, when a WMA additive is included in the manufacture of HMA, the discharge temperature of the HMA shall not exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer of the WMA additive. A maximum water content of 2 percent in the mix, at discharge, will be allowed providing the water causes no problems with handling, stripping, or flushing. If the water in the HMA causes any of these problems, the moisture content shall be reduced as directed by the Engineer. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 14 Storing or holding of the HMA in approved storage facilities will be permitted with approval of the Engineer, but in no event shall the HMA be held for more than 24 hours. HMA held for more than 24 hours after mixing shall be rejected. Rejected HMA shall be disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency. The storage facility shall have an accessible device located at the top of the cone or about the third point. The device shall indicate the amount of material in storage. No HMA shall be accepted from the storage facility when the HMA in storage is below the top of the cone of the storage facility, except as the storage facility is being emptied at the end of the working shift. Recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) utilized in the production of HMA shall be sized prior to entering the mixer so that a uniform and thoroughly mixed HMA is produced. If there is evidence of the recycled asphalt pavement not breaking down during the heating and mixing of the HMA, the Contractor shall immediately suspend the use of the RAP until changes have been approved by the Engineer. After the required amount of mineral materials, RAP, new asphalt binder and asphalt rejuvenator have been introduced into the mixer the HMA shall be mixed until complete and uniform coating of the particles and thorough distribution of the asphalt binder throughout the mineral materials, and RAP is ensured. 5-04.3(7) Spreading and Finishing The mixture shall be laid upon an approved surface, spread, and struck off to the grade and elevation established. HMA pavers complying with Section 5-04.3(3) shall be used to distribute the mixture. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the nominal compacted depth of any layer of any course shall not exceed the following: HMA Class 1” wearing course/final lift 0.17 feet other courses 0.35 feet HMA Class ¾” and HMA Class ½” wearing course/final lift 0.17 feet other courses 0.25 feet HMA Class ⅜” 0.17 feet On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the paving may be done with other equipment or by hand. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 15 When more than one JMF is being utilized to produce HMA, the material produced for each JMF shall be placed by separate spreading and compacting equipment. The intermingling of HMA produced from more than one JMF is prohibited. Each strip of HMA placed during a work shift shall conform to a single JMF established for the class of HMA specified unless there is a need to make an adjustment in the JMF. Reference Section 8-20.3(14)C of the Kent Special Provisions for the placement of traffic signal detection loops. 5-04.3(8) Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA For HMA accepted by nonstatistical evaluation the aggregate properties of sand equivalent, uncompacted void content and fracture will be evaluated in accordance with Section 3-04. Sampling and testing of aggregates for HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Engineer. 5-04.3(9) HMA Mixture Acceptance Acceptance of HMA shall be as provided under nonstatistical, or commercial evaluation. Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for the acceptance of HMA unless Commercial Evaluation is specified. Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA and for other classes of HMA in the following applications: sidewalks, road approaches, ditches, slopes, paths, trails, gores, prelevel, temporary pavement, and pavement repair. Other nonstructural applications of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation shall be as approved by the Engineer. Sampling and testing of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the option of the Engineer. The mix design will be the initial JMF for the class of HMA. The Contractor may request a change in the JMF. Any adjustments to the JMF will require the approval of the Engineer and may be made in accordance with this section. HMA Tolerances and Adjustments 1. Job Mix Formula Tolerances – The constituents of the mixture at the time of acceptance shall be within tolerance. The tolerance limits will be established as follows: For Asphalt Binder and Air Voids (Va), the acceptance limits are determined by adding the tolerances below to the approved JMF values. These values will also be the Upper Specification Limit (USL) and Lower Specification Limit (LSL) required in Section 1-06.2(2)D2 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 16 Property Non-Statistical Evaluation Commercial Evaluation Asphalt Binder +/- 0.5% +/- 0.7% Air Voids, Va 2.5% min. and 5.5% max N/A For Aggregates in the mixture: a.First, determine preliminary upper and lower acceptance limits by applying the following tolerances to the approved JMF. Aggregate Percent Passing Non-Statistical Evaluation Commercial Evaluation 1”, ¾”, ½”, and 3/8” sieves +/- 6% +/- 8% No. 4 sieve +/-6% +/- 8% No. 8 Sieve +/- 6% +/-8% No. 200 sieve +/- 2.0% +/- 3.0% b.Second, adjust the preliminary upper and lower acceptance limits determined from step (a) the minimum amount necessary so that none of the aggregate properties are outside the control points in Section 9-03.8(6). The resulting values will be the upper and lower acceptance limits for aggregates, as well as the USL and LSL required in Section 1-06.2(2)D2. 2.Job Mix Formula Adjustments – An adjustment to the aggregate gradation or asphalt binder content of the JMF requires approval of the Engineer. Adjustments to the JMF will only be considered if the change produces material of equal or better quality and may require the development of a new mix design if the adjustment exceeds the amounts listed below. a.Aggregates –2 percent for the aggregate passing the 1½″, 1″, ¾″, ½″, ⅜″, and the No. 4 sieves, 1 percent for aggregate passing the No. 8 sieve, and 0.5 percent for the aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve. The adjusted JMF shall be within the range of the control points in Section 9-03.8(6). b.Asphalt Binder Content – The Engineer may order or approve changes to asphalt binder content. The maximum KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 17 adjustment from the approved mix design for the asphalt binder content shall be 0.3 percent 5-04.3(9)A Vacant 5-04.3(9)B Vacant 5-04.3(9)C Mixture Acceptance – Nonstatistical Evaluation HMA mixture which is accepted by Nonstatistical Evaluation will be evaluated by the Contracting Agency by dividing the HMA tonnage into lots. 5-04.3(9)C1 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation – Lots and Sublots A lot is represented by randomly selected samples of the same mix design that will be tested for acceptance. A lot is defined as the total quantity of material or work produced for each Job Mix Formula placed. Only one lot per JMF is expected. A sublot shall be equal to one day’s production or 800 tons, whichever is less except that the final sublot will be a minimum of 400 tons and may be increased to 1200 tons. All of the test results obtained from the acceptance samples from a given lot shall be evaluated collectively. If the Contractor requests a change to the JMF that is approved, the material produced after the change will be evaluated on the basis of the new JMF for the remaining sublots in the current lot and for acceptance of subsequent lots. For a lot in progress with a CPF less than 0.75, a new lot will begin at the Contractor’s request after the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced. Sampling and testing for evaluation shall be performed on the frequency of one sample per sublot. 5-04.3(9)C2 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation Sampling Samples for acceptance testing shall be obtained by the Contractor when ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall sample the HMA mixture in the presence of the Engineer and in accordance with AASHTO T 168. A minimum of three samples should be taken for each class of HMA placed on a project. If used in a structural application, at least one of the three samples shall to be tested. Sampling and testing HMA in a Structural application where quantities are less than 400 tons is at the discretion of the Engineer. For HMA used in a structural application and with a total project quantity less than 800 tons but more than 400 tons, a minimum of one acceptance test shall be performed. In all cases, a minimum of 3 samples will be obtained at the point of acceptance, a minimum of one of the three samples will be tested for conformance to the JMF: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 18 • If the test results are found to be within specification requirements, additional testing will be at the Engineer’s discretion. • If test results are found not to be within specification requirements, additional testing of the remaining samples to determine a Composite Pay Factor (CPF) shall be performed. 5-04.3(9)C3 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation – Acceptance Testing Testing of HMA for compliance of Va will be at the option of the Contracting Agency. If tested, compliance of Va will use WSDOT SOP 731. Testing for compliance of asphalt binder content will be by WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 308. Testing for compliance of gradation will be by FOP for WAQTC T 27/T 11. 5-04.3(9)C4 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation – Pay Factors For each lot of material falling outside the tolerance limits in 5-04.3(9), the Contracting Agency will determine a Composite Pay Factor (CPF) using the following price adjustment factors: Table of Price Adjustment Factors Constituent Factor “f” All aggregate passing: 1½″, 1″, ¾″, ½″, ⅜″ and No.4 sieves 2 All aggregate passing No. 8 sieve 15 All aggregate passing No. 200 sieve 20 Asphalt binder 40 Air Voids (Va) (where applicable) 20 Each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit Contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the nonstatistical tolerance limits in the Job Mix Formula shown in Table of Price Adjustment KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 19 Factors, the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The nonstatistical tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the Roadway shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. 5-04.3(9)C5 Vacant 5-04.3(9)C6 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation – Price Adjustments For each lot of HMA mix produced under Nonstatistical Evaluation when the calculated CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Mix Factor (NCMF) will be determined. The NCMF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 multiplied by 60 percent. The total job mix compliance price adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons, and the unit Contract price per ton of mix. If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay factor will be considered 1.00 in calculating the Composite Pay Factor (CPF). 5-04.3(9)C7 Mixture Nonstatistical Evaluation - Retests The Contractor may request a sublot be retested. To request a retest, the Contractor shall submit a written request within 7 calendar days after the specific test results have been received. A split of the original acceptance sample will be retested. The split of the sample will not be tested with the same tester that ran the original acceptance test. The sample will be tested for a complete gradation analysis, asphalt binder content, and, at the option of the agency, Va. The results of the retest will be used for the acceptance of the HMA in place of the original sublot sample test results. The cost of testing will be deducted from any monies due or that may come due the Contractor under the Contract at the rate of $500 per sample. 5-04.3 (9)D Mixture Acceptance – Commercial Evaluation If sampled and tested, HMA produced under Commercial Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be accepted at the unit Contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents fall outside the commercial tolerance limits in the Job Mix Formula shown in 5-04.3(9), the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The commercial tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist, backup samples of the existing sublots or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 20 For each lot of HMA mix produced and tested under Commercial Evaluation when the calculated CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Mix Factor (NCMF) will be determined. The NCMF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 multiplied by 60 percent. The Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF, the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons, and the unit Contract price per ton of mix. If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay factor will be considered 1.00 in calculating the Composite Pay Factor (CPF). 5-04.3(10) HMA Compaction Acceptance HMA mixture accepted by nonstatistical evaluation that is used in traffic lanes, including lanes for intersections, ramps, truck climbing, weaving, and speed change, and having a specified compacted course thickness greater than 0.10-foot, shall be compacted to a specified level of relative density. The specified level of relative density shall be a Composite Pay Factor (CPF) of not less than 0.75 when evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2, using a LSL of 92.0 (minimum of 92 percent of the maximum density). The maximum density shall be determined by WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 729. The specified level of density attained will be determined by the evaluation of the density of the pavement. The density of the pavement shall be determined in accordance with WSDOT FOP for WAQTC TM 8, except that gauge correlation will be at the discretion of the Engineer, when using the nuclear density gauge and WSDOT SOP 736 when using cores to determine density. Tests for the determination of the pavement density will be taken in accordance with the required procedures for measurement by a nuclear density gauge or roadway cores after completion of the finish rolling. If the Contracting Agency uses a nuclear density gauge to determine density the test procedures FOP for WAQTC TM 8 and WSDOT SOP T 729 will be used on the day the mix is placed and prior to opening to traffic. Roadway cores for density may be obtained by either the Contracting Agency or the Contractor in accordance with WSDOT SOP 734. The core diameter shall be 4-inches minimum, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Roadway cores will be tested by the Contracting Agency in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 166. If the Contract includes the Bid item “Roadway Core” the cores shall be obtained by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer on the same day the mix is placed and at locations designated by the Engineer. If the Contract does not include the Bid item “Roadway Core” the Contracting Agency may obtain the cores. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 21 For a lot in progress with a CPF less than 0.75, a new lot will begin at the Contractor’s request after the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced. HMA mixture accepted by commercial evaluation and HMA constructed under conditions other than those listed above shall be compacted on the basis of a test point evaluation of the compaction train. The test point evaluation shall be performed in accordance with instructions from the Engineer. The number of passes with an approved compaction train, required to attain the maximum test point density, shall be used on all subsequent paving. HMA for preleveling shall be thoroughly compacted. HMA that is used for preleveling wheel rutting shall be compacted with a pneumatic tire roller unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Test Results For a sublot that has been tested with a nuclear density gauge that did not meet the minimum of 92 percent of the reference maximum density in a compaction lot with a CPF below 1.00 and thus subject to a price reduction or rejection, the Contractor may request that a core be used for determination of the relative density of the sublot. The relative density of the core will replace the relative density determined by the nuclear density gauge for the sublot and will be used for calculation of the CPF and acceptance of HMA compaction lot. When cores are taken by the Contracting Agency at the request of the Contractor, they shall be requested by noon of the next workday after the test results for the sublot have been provided or made available to the Contractor. Core locations shall be outside of wheel paths and as determined by the Engineer. Traffic control shall be provided by the Contractor as requested by the Engineer. Failure by the Contractor to provide the requested traffic control will result in forfeiture of the request for cores. When the CPF for the lot based on the results of the HMA cores is less than 1.00, the cost for the coring will be deducted from any monies due or that may become due the Contractor under the Contract at the rate of $200 per core and the Contractor shall pay for the cost of the traffic control. 5-04.3(10)A HMA Compaction – General Compaction Requirements Compaction shall take place when the mixture is in the proper condition so that no undue displacement, cracking, or shoving occurs. Areas inaccessible to large compaction equipment shall be compacted by other mechanical means. Any HMA that becomes loose, broken, contaminated, shows an excess or deficiency of asphalt, or is in any way defective, shall be removed and replaced with new hot mix that shall be immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. The type of rollers to be used and their relative position in the compaction sequence shall generally be the Contractor’s option, provided the specified densities are attained. Unless the Engineer has KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 22 approved otherwise, rollers shall only be operated in the static mode when the internal temperature of the mix is less than 175°F. Regardless of mix temperature, a roller shall not be operated in a mode that results in checking or cracking of the mat. Rollers shall only be operated in static mode on bridge decks. 5-04.3(10)B HMA Compaction – Cyclic Density Low cyclic density areas are defined as spots or streaks in the pavement that are less than 90 percent of the theoretical maximum density. At the Engineer’s discretion, the Engineer may evaluate the HMA pavement for low cyclic density, and when doing so will follow WSDOT SOP 733. A $500 Cyclic Density Price Adjustment will be assessed for any 500-foot section with two or more density readings below 90 percent of the theoretical maximum density. 5-04.3(10)C Vacant 5-04.3(10)D HMA Nonstatistical Compaction 5-04.3(10)D1 HMA Nonstatistical Compaction – Lots and Sublots HMA compaction which is accepted by nonstatistical evaluation will be based on acceptance testing performed by the Contracting Agency dividing the project into compaction lots. A lot is represented by randomly selected samples of the same mix design that will be tested for acceptance. A lot is defined as the total quantity of material or work produced for each Job Mix Formula placed. Only one lot per JMF is expected. A sublot shall be equal to one day’s production or 400 tons, whichever is less except that the final sublot will be a minimum of 200 tons and may be increased to 800 tons. Testing for compaction will be at the rate of 5 tests per sublot per WSDOT T 738. The sublot locations within each density lot will be determined by the Engineer. For a lot in progress with a CPF less than 0.75, a new lot will begin at the Contractor’s request after the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced. HMA mixture accepted by commercial evaluation and HMA constructed under conditions other than those listed above shall be compacted on the basis of a test point evaluation of the compaction train. The test point evaluation shall be performed in accordance with instructions from the Engineer. The number of passes with an approved compaction train, required to attain the maximum test point density, shall be used on all subsequent paving. HMA for preleveling shall be thoroughly compacted. HMA that is used to prelevel wheel ruts shall be compacted with a pneumatic tire roller unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 23 5-04.3(10)D2 HMA Compaction Nonstatistical Evaluation – Acceptance Testing The location of the HMA compaction acceptance tests will be randomly selected by the Engineer from within each sublot, with one test per sublot. 5-04.3(10)D3 HMA Nonstatistical Compaction – Price Adjustments For each compaction lot with one or two sublots, having all sublots attain a relative density that is 92 percent of the reference maximum density the HMA shall be accepted at the unit Contract price with no further evaluation. When a sublot does not attain a relative density that is 92 percent of the reference maximum density, the lot shall be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The maximum CPF shall be 1.00, however, lots with a calculated CPF in excess of 1.00 will be used to offset lots with CPF values below 1.00 but greater than 0.90. Lots with CPF lower than 0.90 will be evaluated for compliance per 5-04.3(11). Additional testing by either a nuclear moisture-density gauge or cores will be completed as required to provide a minimum of three tests for evaluation. For compaction below the required 92% a Non-Conforming Compaction Factor (NCCF) will be determined. The NCCF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 multiplied by 40 percent. The Compaction Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of CPF, the quantity of HMA in the compaction control lot in tons, and the unit Contract price per ton of mix. 5-04.3(11) Reject Work 5-04.3(11)A Reject Work General Work that is defective or does not conform to Contract requirements shall be rejected. The Contractor may propose, in writing, alternatives to removal and replacement of rejected material. Acceptability of such alternative proposals will be determined at the sole discretion of the Engineer. HMA that has been rejected is subject to the requirements in Section 1-06.2(2) and this specification, and the Contractor shall submit a corrective action proposal to the Engineer for approval. 5-04.3(11)B Rejection by Contractor The Contractor may, prior to sampling, elect to remove any defective material and replace it with new material. Any such new material will be sampled, tested, and evaluated for acceptance. 5-04.3(11)C Rejection Without Testing (Mixture or Compaction) The Engineer may, without sampling, reject any batch, load, or section of Roadway that appears defective. Material rejected before placement shall not be incorporated into the pavement. Any rejected section of Roadway shall be removed. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 24 No payment will be made for the rejected materials or the removal of the materials unless the Contractor requests that the rejected material be tested. If the Contractor elects to have the rejected material tested, a minimum of three representative samples will be obtained and tested. Acceptance of rejected material will be based on conformance with the nonstatistical acceptance Specification. If the CPF for the rejected material is less than 0.75, no payment will be made for the rejected material; in addition, the cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor. If the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, the cost of sampling and testing will be borne by the Contracting Agency. If the material is rejected before placement and the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, compensation for the rejected material will be at a CPF of 0.75. If rejection occurs after placement and the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, compensation for the rejected material will be at the calculated CPF with an addition of 25 percent of the unit Contract price added for the cost of removal and disposal. 5-04.3(11)D Rejection - A Partial Sublot In addition to the random acceptance sampling and testing, the Engineer may also isolate from a normal sublot any material that is suspected of being defective in relative density, gradation or asphalt binder content. Such isolated material will not include an original sample location. A minimum of three random samples of the suspect material will be obtained and tested. The material will then be statistically evaluated as an independent lot in accordance with Section 1-06.2(2). 5-04.3(11)E Rejection - An Entire Sublot An entire sublot that is suspected of being defective may be rejected. When a sublot is rejected a minimum of two additional random samples from this sublot will be obtained. These additional samples and the original sublot will be evaluated as an independent lot in accordance with Section 1-06.2(2). 5-04.3(11)F Rejection - A Lot in Progress The Contractor shall shut down operations and shall not resume HMA placement until such time as the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced: 1. When the Composite Pay Factor (CPF) of a lot in progress drops below 1.00 and the Contractor is taking no corrective action, or 2. When the Pay Factor (PF) for any constituent of a lot in progress drops below 0.95 and the Contractor is taking no corrective action, or 3. When either the PFi for any constituent or the CPF of a lot in progress is less than 0.75. 5-04.3(11)G Rejection - An Entire Lot (Mixture or Compaction) KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 25 An entire lot with a CPF of less than 0.75 will be rejected. 5-04.3(12) Joints 5-04.3(12)A HMA Joints 5-04.3(12)A1 Transverse Joints The Contractor shall conduct operations such that the placing of the top or wearing course is a continuous operation or as close to continuous as possible. Unscheduled transverse joints will be allowed and the roller may pass over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture only when the placement of the course must be discontinued for such a length of time that the mixture will cool below compaction temperature. When the Work is resumed, the previously compacted mixture shall be cut back to produce a slightly beveled edge for the full thickness of the course. A temporary wedge of HMA constructed on a 20H:1V shall be constructed where a transverse joint as a result of paving or planing is open to traffic. The HMA in the temporary wedge shall be separated from the permanent HMA by strips of heavy wrapping paper or other methods approved by the Engineer. The wrapping paper shall be removed and the joint trimmed to a slightly beveled edge for the full thickness of the course prior to resumption of paving. The material that is cut away shall be wasted and new mix shall be laid against the cut. Rollers or tamping irons shall be used to seal the joint. 5-04.3(12)A2 Longitudinal Joints The longitudinal joint in any one course shall be offset from the course immediately below by not more than 6 inches nor less than 2 inches. All longitudinal joints constructed in the wearing course shall be located at a lane line or an edge line of the Traveled Way. A notched wedge joint shall be constructed along all longitudinal joints in the wearing surface of new HMA unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The notched wedge joint shall have a vertical edge of not less than the maximum aggregate size or more than ½ of the compacted lift thickness and then taper down on a slope not steeper than 4H:1V. The sloped portion of the HMA notched wedge joint shall be uniformly compacted. 5-04.3(12)B Bridge Paving Joint Seals 5-04.3(12)B1 HMA Sawcut and Seal Prior to placing HMA on the bridge deck, establish sawcut alignment points at both ends of the bridge paving joint seals to be placed at the bridge ends, and at interior joints within the bridge deck when and where shown in the Plans. Establish the sawcut alignment points in a manner that they remain functional for use in aligning the sawcut after placing the overlay. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 26 Submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the sealant manufacturer’s application procedure. Construct the bridge paving joint seal as specified on the Plans and in accordance with the detail shown in the Standard Plans. Construct the sawcut in accordance with the detail shown in the Standard Plan. Construct the sawcut in accordance with Section 5-05.3(8)B and the manufacturer’s application procedure. 5-04.3(12)B2 Paved Panel Joint Seal Construct the paved panel joint seal in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 5-04.3(12)B1 and the following requirement: Clean and seal the existing joint between concrete panels in accordance with Section 5-01.3(8) and the details shown in the Standard Plans. 5-04.3(13) Surface Smoothness The completed surface of all courses shall be of uniform texture, smooth, uniform as to crown and grade, and free from defects of all kinds. The completed surface of the wearing course shall not vary more than ⅛ inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed on the surface parallel to the centerline. The transverse slope of the completed surface of the wearing course shall vary not more than ¼ inch in 10 feet from the rate of transverse slope shown in the Plans. When deviations in excess of the above tolerances are found that result from a high place in the HMA, the pavement surface shall be corrected by one of the following methods: 1.Removal of material from high places by grinding with an approved grinding machine, or 2.Removal and replacement of the wearing course of HMA, or 3.By other method approved by the Engineer. Correction of defects shall be carried out until there are no deviations anywhere greater than the allowable tolerances. Deviations in excess of the above tolerances that result from a low place in the HMA and deviations resulting from a high place where corrective action, in the opinion of the Engineer, will not produce satisfactory results will be accepted with a price adjustment. The Engineer shall deduct from monies due or that may become due to the Contractor the sum of $500.00 for each and every section of single traffic lane 100 feet in length in which any excessive deviations described above are found. When utility appurtenances such as manhole covers and valve boxes are located in the traveled way, the utility appurtenances shall be adjusted to the finished grade prior to paving. This requirement may be waived when requested by the Contractor, at the discretion of the KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 27 Engineer or when the adjustment details provided in the project plan or specifications call for utility appurtenance adjustments after the completion of paving. Utility appurtenance adjustment discussions will be included in the Pre- Paving planning (5-04.3(14)B3). Submit a written request to waive this requirement to the Engineer prior to the start of paving. 5-04.3(14) Planing (Milling) Bituminous Pavement The planing plan must be approved by the Engineer and a pre planing meeting must be held prior to the start of any planing. See Section 5-04.3(14)B2 for information on planing submittals. Planing operations shall be performed no more than 7 calendar days ahead of the time the planed area is to be paved, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer in writing. Locations of existing surfacing to be planed are as shown in the Drawings. Where planing an existing pavement is specified in the Contract, the Contractor must remove existing surfacing material and to reshape the surface to remove irregularities. The finished product must be a prepared surface acceptable for receiving an HMA overlay. Use the cold milling method for planing unless otherwise specified in the Contract. Do not use the planer on the final wearing course of new HMA. Conduct planing operations in a manner that does not tear, break, burn, or otherwise damage the surface which is to remain. The finished planed surface must be slightly grooved or roughened and must be free from gouges, deep grooves, ridges, or other imperfections. The Contractor must repair any damage to the surface by the Contractor’s planing equipment, using an Engineer approved method. Repair or replace any metal castings and other surface improvements damaged by planing, as determined by the Engineer. A tapered wedge cut must be planed longitudinally along curb lines sufficient to provide a minimum of 4 inches of curb reveal after placement and compaction of the final wearing course. The dimensions of the wedge must be as shown on the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer. A tapered wedge cut must also be made at transitions to adjoining pavement surfaces (meet lines) where butt joints are shown on the Drawings. Cut butt joints in a straight line with vertical faces 2 inches or more in height, producing a smooth transition to the existing adjoining pavement. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 28 After planing is complete, planed surfaces must be swept, cleaned, and if required by the Contract, patched and preleveled. The Engineer may direct additional depth planing. Before performing this additional depth planing, the Contractor must conduct a hidden metal in pavement detection survey as specified in Section 5-04.3(14)A. 5-04.3(14)A Pre-Planing Metal Detection Check Before starting planing of pavements, and before any additional depth planing required by the Engineer, the Contractor must conduct a physical survey of existing pavement to be planed with equipment that can identify hidden metal objects. Should such metal be identified, promptly notify the Engineer. See Section 1-07.16(1) regarding the protection of survey monumentation that may be hidden in pavement. The Contractor is solely responsible for any damage to equipment resulting from the Contractor’s failure to conduct a pre-planing metal detection survey, or from the Contractor’s failure to notify the Engineer of any hidden metal that is detected. 5-04.3(14)B Paving and Planing Under Traffic 5-04.3(14)B1 General In addition the requirements of Section 1-07.23 and the traffic controls required in Section 1-10, and unless the Contract specifies otherwise or the Engineer approves, the Contractor must comply with the following: 1.Intersections: a.Keep intersections open to traffic at all times, except when paving or planing operations through an intersection requires closure. Such closure must be kept to the minimum time required to place and compact the HMA mixture, or plane as appropriate. For paving, schedule such closure to individual lanes or portions thereof that allows the traffic volumes and schedule of traffic volumes required in the approved traffic control plan. Schedule work so that adjacent intersections are not impacted at the same time and comply with the traffic control restrictions required by the Traffic Engineer. Each individual intersection closure or partial closure must be addressed in the traffic control plan, which must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer, see Section 1-10.2(2). b.When planing or paving and related construction must occur in an intersection, consider scheduling and sequencing such work into quarters of the intersection, or half or more of an intersection with side street detours. Be prepared to sequence the work to individual lanes or portions thereof. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 29 c. Should closure of the intersection in its entirety be necessary, and no trolley service is impacted, keep such closure to the minimum time required to place and compact the HMA mixture, plane, remove asphalt, tack coat, and as needed. d. Any work in an intersection requires advance warning in both signage and a number of Working Days advance notice as determined by the Engineer, to alert traffic and emergency services of the intersection closure or partial closure. e. Allow new compacted HMA asphalt to cool to ambient temperature before any traffic is allowed on it. Traffic is not allowed on newly placed asphalt until approval has been obtained from the Engineer. 2. Temporary centerline marking, post-paving temporary marking, temporary stop bars, and maintaining temporary pavement marking must comply with Section 8-23. 3. Permanent pavement marking must comply with Section 8-22. 5-04.3(14)B2 Submittals – Planing Plan and HMA Paving Plan The Contractor must submit a separate planing plan and a separate paving plan to the Engineer at least 5 Working Days in advance of each operation’s activity start date. These plans must show how the moving operation and traffic control are coordinated, as they will be discussed at the pre-planing briefing and pre-paving briefing. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor must provide each operation’s traffic control plan on 24 x 36 inch or larger size Shop Drawings with a scale showing both the area of operation and sufficient detail of traffic beyond the area of operation where detour traffic may be required. The scale on the Shop Drawings is 1 inch = 20 feet, which may be changed if the Engineer agrees sufficient detail is shown. The planing operation and the paving operation include, but are not limited to, metal detection, removal of asphalt and temporary asphalt of any kind, tack coat and drying, staging of supply trucks, paving trains, rolling, scheduling, and as may be discussed at the briefing. When intersections will be partially or totally blocked, provide adequately sized and noticeable signage alerting traffic of closures to come, a minimum 2 Working Days in advance. The traffic control plan must show where police officers will be stationed when signalization is or may be, countermanded, and show areas where flaggers are proposed. At a minimum, the planing and the paving plan must include: 1. A copy of the accepted traffic control plan, see Section 1-10.2(2), detailing each day’s traffic control as it relates to the specific requirements of that day’s planing and paving. Briefly describe the sequencing of traffic control consistent with the proposed planing and paving sequence, and scheduling of placement of temporary pavement markings and channelizing devices after each day’s planing, and paving. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 30 2.A copy of each intersection’s traffic control plan. 3.Haul routes from Supplier facilities, and locations of temporary parking and staging areas, including return routes. Describe the complete round trip as it relates to the sequencing of paving operations. 4.Names and locations of HMA Supplier facilities to be used. 5.List of all equipment to be used for paving. 6.List of personnel and associated job classification assigned to each piece of paving equipment. 7.Description (geometric or narrative) of the scheduled sequence of planing and of paving, and intended area of planing and of paving for each day’s work, must include the directions of proposed planing and of proposed paving, sequence of adjacent lane paving, sequence of skipped lane paving, intersection planing and paving scheduling and sequencing, and proposed notifications and coordination to be timely made. The plan must show HMA joints relative to the final pavement marking lane lines. 8.Names, job titles, and contact information for field, office, and plant supervisory personnel. 9.A copy of the approved Mix Designs. 10.Tonnage of HMA to be placed each day. 11.Approximate times and days for starting and ending daily operations. 5-04.3(14)B3 Pre-Paving and Pre-Planing Briefing At least 2 Working Days before the first paving operation and the first planing operation, or as scheduled by the Engineer for future paving and planing operations to ensure the Contractor has adequately prepared for notifying and coordinating as required in the Contract, the Contractor must be prepared to discuss that day’s operations as they relate to other entities and to public safety and convenience, including driveway and business access, garbage truck operations, Metro transit operations and working around energized overhead wires, school and nursing home and hospital and other accesses, other contractors who may be operating in the area, pedestrian and bicycle traffic, and emergency services. The Contractor, and Subcontractors that may be part of that day’s operations, must meet with the Engineer and discuss the proposed operation as it relates to the submitted planing plan and paving plan, approved traffic control plan, and public convenience and safety. Such discussion includes, but is not limited to: 1.General for both Paving Plan and for Planing Plan: a.The actual times of starting and ending daily operations. b.In intersections, how to break up the intersection, and address traffic control and signalization for that operation, including use of peace officers. c.The sequencing and scheduling of paving operations and of planing operations, as applicable, as it relates to traffic control, to public convenience and safety, and to other contractors who may operate in the Project Site. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 31 d. Notifications required of Contractor activities, and coordinating with other entities and the public as necessary. e. Description of the sequencing of installation and types of temporary pavement markings as it relates to planing and to paving. f. Description of the sequencing of installation of, and the removal of, temporary pavement patch material around exposed castings and as may be needed. g. Description of procedures and equipment to identify hidden metal in the pavement, such as survey monumentation, monitoring wells, street car rail, and castings, before planing, see Section 5-04.3(14)B2. h. Description of how flaggers will be coordinated with the planing, paving, and related operations. i. Description of sequencing of traffic controls for the process of rigid pavement base repairs. j. Other items the Engineer deems necessary to address. 2. Paving – additional topics: a. When to start applying tack and coordinating with paving. b. Types of equipment and numbers of each type of equipment to be used. If more pieces of equipment than personnel are proposed, describe the sequencing of the personnel operating the types of equipment. Discuss the continuance of operator personnel for each type of equipment as it relates to meeting Specification requirements. c. Number of JMFs to be placed, and if more than one JMF how the Contractor will ensure different JMFs are distinguished, how pavers and MTVs are distinguished if more than one JMF is being placed at the time, and how pavers and MTVs are cleaned so that one JMF does not adversely influence the other JMF. d. Description of contingency plans for that day’s operations such as equipment breakdown, rain out, and Supplier shutdown of operations. e. Number of sublots to be placed, sequencing of density testing, and other sampling and testing. 5-04.3(15) Sealing Pavement Surfaces Apply a fog seal where shown in the plans. Construct the fog seal in accordance with Section 5-02.3. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, apply the fog seal prior to opening to traffic. 5-04.3(16) HMA Road Approaches HMA approaches shall be constructed at the locations shown in the Plans or where staked by the Engineer. The Work shall be performed in accordance with Section 5-04. 5-04.3(17) Pavement Reinforcement KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 32 The Contractor shall install the asphalt interlay fabric at the locations and to the dimensions shown on the Plans and as directed by the Engineer. The interlay fabric shall be placed on existing asphalt or concrete pavement to be overlaid with HMA mix specified in the contract. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS All equipment, tools, and machines used in the performance of the work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be maintained in satisfactory working condition at all times. Equipment for surface cleaning shall be capable of effectively removing oil, grease, dust, dirt or other objectionable materials from the pavement. Application equipment shall consist of suitable brooms, distributor, and laydown machine as required. The distributor shall have a capacity of not less than 1,000 gallons and shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and operated that asphalt material of an even heat shall be uniformly applied at the required rate. It shall be insulated and equipped with an adequate heating device. It shall be equipped with a 10-foot spray bar with extensions, pressure pump and gauge, with a volume gauge so located as to be observed easily by the inspector from the ground, a tachometer to control accurately the speed and spread of asphalt, and two thermometers, one to be installed permanently in the tank to indicate temperature of the asphalt at all times. The power for operating the pressure pump shall be supplied by an independent power unit which will develop a minimum of 25 pounds per square inch pressure at the spray bar. The laydown machine shall consist of a small tractor with attachment for the fabric installation. Bucket loaders or backhoes are not permitted for installation. The Contractor shall not begin application of the interlay fabric until he has demonstrated, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to apply the interlay fabric are either on hand or readily available. MATERIALS The approved products are: 1.TenCate Mirafi MPM30 (PGM-30) 2.Tensar GlasPave 25 3.Roadmat RM35 The material properties of the asphalt interlay fabric shall conform to all design and nominal performance standards of TenCate Mirafi MPM30 (PGM-30), Tensar GlasPave 25, Roadmat RM35 or the properties listed KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 33 below in Table 2.01. Submittals shall include independent confirmation of the material properties. Table 2.01 – Physical Properties of the asphalt interlay fabric Property ASTM Test Method Units Min. Avg. Roll Value Tensile Strength @ 0º Tensile Strength @ 90º D5035 lbs/in 200 200 Tensile Elongation % < 5.0 Melting Point (glass) D276 °F (°C ) 450º (232º) Asphalt Retention D6140 gal/yd² 0.10 Mass per Unit Area D5261 oz/yd² 4.0 STORAGE The paving interlayer rolls shall be labeled, with a durable label indicating manufacturer, product name or style number, roll and lot number, and roll dimensions shall be attached to each roll. The paving interlayer rolls shall be delivered and handled in a manner to prevent damage and shall be inspected for defects and damage prior to use. The paving interlayer shall be stored in a dry covered condition, free from dust, dirt, off the ground, flat to prevent bowing, protected from precipitation, ultraviolet radiation, strong chemicals, sparks and flames, temperatures in excess 71 °C (160 °F) and other environmental condition that could cause damage. WEATHER AND MOISTURE LIMITATIONS Work shall not be done during wet weather conditions nor when the pavement and ambient air temperatures are below 50°F. The pavement shall be surface-dry at the time of the application of the asphalt. SURFACE PREPARATION All areas of base failure shall be removed and replaced to acceptable industry standards for the specific traffic loads and condition of the project. Pre-Leveling, if necessary, shall be done prior to placing paving interlayer. The pavement surface shall be free of all foreign materials such as dirt, grease, etc. Prior to applying the asphalt, all dust and loose material shall be removed from the pavement surface with KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 34 compressed air. Existing cracks shall be filled as specified elsewhere under “Crack Sealing.” In an overlay or milled surface application, repair all failed pavement areas prior to installation of the paving interlayer. Fill all cracks ¼” or greater with approved material. Immediately prior to placement of paving interlayer, the pavement surface shall be dry, cleaned of anything that would interfere with adhesion, for e.g., vegetation, moss, dirt, gravel or water. A leveling or "scratch" course is recommended when road surface is not acceptable and shall be of proper gradation and sufficient thickness to achieve a smooth, level surface with no gaps greater than ¼” depth and width or be acceptable to the project engineer. A finish grind may be used as an alternative to an asphalt leveling course being placed, when you can achieve the final surface texture has no cracks, gaps or vertical angles greater the ¼” depth and width or be acceptable to the project engineer. In all cases the surface must be clean and dry and the application rate of the Hot PG grade asphalt binder shall be increased to insure complete interlayer saturation and bonding. INSTALLATION A. Apply the asphalt interlay fabric in a hot PG graded asphalt binder. Asphalt Emulsion is NOT acceptable for placing paving interlayer due to time delay for it to break and the difficulty in insuring quality as installed. B. Asphalt Binder 1. A hot asphalt binder shall be applied to saturate the paving interlayer (min. to be the asphalt retention rate) plus amount needed to bond to existing surface and the new overlay. The asphalt binder to be used shall be PG58H –22 (PG64 -22) or higher. Sustained ambient temperatures (above 90º) may require a stiffer binder gradation like PG58V –22 (PG70 -22) or higher to improve set time and reduce risk of fabric pick-up under construction traffic. 2. The hot asphalt binder shall be applied per the paving interlayer manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. For TenCate Mirafi MPM30 the hot asphalt binder shall be applied at a rate of 0.10 Gal/SY on a new HMA leveling surface. On an old smooth surface or a clean fine milled surface apply hot asphalt binder shall be applied at a rate of 0.12 Gal/SY. For Tensar GlasPave 25 the hot asphalt binder shall be applied at a rate of 0.15 Gal/SY on a new pavement surface, 0.17 Gal/SY on an aged oxidized surface, and a rate of 0.2 Gal/SY on a milled surface. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 35 3.Spray application shall extend four (4) inches wider than width of paving interlayer on lap side. Hot asphalt binder application shall be wide enough to cover the entire width of engineered paving mat material overlaps. The hot asphalt binder shall be applied only as far in advance of the engineered paving mat material installation as is appropriate to ensure a tacky surface at the time of the engineered paving mat material placement. Traffic shall not be allowed on the hot asphalt binder. 4.The hot asphalt binder shall be applied by a distributor truck in a smooth uniform manner at as low a temperature as is possible to achieve the right application rate, depending on ambient and road surface temperatures and type of PG asphalt binder used. Temperature of the hot asphalt binder shall be sufficiently high enough to permit uniform spray pattern and shall be between 350º F and 400º F. The air temperature shall be 50º F and rising for placement of the hot asphalt binder coat. C. The paving interlayer shall be installed with equipment in good working order that is capable of installing the fabric without wrinkles or manually as needed and recommended by manufacturer. 1.Initial alignment of the interlay fabric is very important, since the fabric direction cannot be changed appreciably without causing wrinkles. If the alignment of the interlay fabric must be changed, the fabric shall be cut and realigned, overlapping the previous material and proceeding as before. 2.If manual lay-down methods are used, the paving fabric shall be unrolled, aligned, and placed in increments of approximately thirty (30) feet or as project engineer suggest. 3.The material shall be placed flat and wrinkle-free. The paving interlayer installation may require hand brooming as necessary to eliminate ripples that may occur during installation. 4.Brooming or squeegee of paving interlayer is required to insure adequate adhesion into the hot asphalt binder before the hot asphalt binder has cooled and lost tackiness. If the interlayer wrinkles more than 1” height during installation, the wrinkle shall be cut and lapped in the direction of paving. In these repaired areas, additional hot asphalt binder shall be KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 36 applied as needed to achieve a sound bond to the substrate. Damaged engineered paving mat shall be removed and replaced, per the manufacturer's recommendations, at the contractor's expense with the same type of material. 5.To ease installations around curves, the paving fabric can be placed in shortened lengths by mechanical equipment or by hand. 6.Paving interlayer shall be lapped two (2) to four (4) inches longitudinally and two (2) to four (4) inches transversely. Transverse laps shall be in the direction of the asphalt concrete overlay placement insuring hot asphalt binder is placed under the overlap. The interlay fabric shall be neatly cut and contoured at all joints. 7.Excess hot asphalt binder that bleeds through the engineered paving mat under normal construction traffic shall be countered by broadcasting clean sand or hot mix to create a bond break between the excess hot asphalt binder and the construction equipment tires. Excess blotting sand shall be removed from the interlayer prior to placing the HMA overlay. No other material, such as asphalt release agents or diesel, shall be used for this purpose. 8.No traffic, except necessary construction traffic or emergency vehicles, shall be driven on the engineered paving mat, unless approved by the engineer. If traffic on the interlayer is approved by the engineer, clean sand shall be lightly broadcasted over the engineered paving mat interlayer, and any loose sand shall be removed prior to paving. 9.Turning of construction equipment and other vehicles shall be gradual and kept to a minimum to avoid damage to the paving interlayer. Caution: Parking on the installed paving fabric prior to final overlay for extended periods could cause damage to the interlayer. 10.Placement of the first lift of the HMA overlay shall closely follow placement of the engineered paving mat. All areas in which the engineered paving mat has been placed shall be paved during the same day, unless approved otherwise by the engineer. In the event of rainfall on the engineered paving mat prior to the placement of the first HMA overlay lift, the engineered paving mat shall be allowed to dry before the HMA is placed. The compacted thickness of the first lift of the HMA overlay on the engineered paving mat shall not be less than KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 37 1.5 inches, and the temperature of the mix at placement shall not exceed the engineered paving mat melting point temperature. Where the total HMA overlay thickness is less than 1.5 inches, engineered paving mat shall not be placed. NOTE: Minimum lift thickness should be at least 3 times the nominal maximum aggregate size to ensure aggregate can align themselves during compaction to achieve required density and also to ensure mix is impermeable. 11. Paving interlayer should never be installed when it or the pavement surface is wet. 12. The Contractor shall not place more interlay fabric on the roadway than can be overlaid the same day with Hot Mix Asphalt. No fabric, except that which is required for normal lapped joints, shall be exposed to traffic. 13. In the event of breakdown of the paving operation, the interlay fabric which has not been overlaid shall be dusted with sand to break the tackiness of the sealant so traffic does not pick up the fabric. The application rate shall uniformly dust the roadway as approved by the Engineer. More than one application of sand may be required. Before placing the asphalt concrete, the fabric surface shall be broomed to remove the excess sand as directed by the Engineer. The sand shall meet the graduation requirements of the Section 9-03.1(2)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL A Technical Representative for the manufacturer of the paving interlayer shall be on the project to work with the Contractor’s personnel and to provide the necessary technical assistance to ensure the satisfactory placement of the interlay fabric and HMA overlay. The representative shall not leave the project until the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has a full understanding of what is required to place the interlay fabric satisfactorily. The installing contractor shall give sufficient notice of planned work schedule such that proper inspection of workmanship is accomplished. 1. Daily, the Contractor shall certify that interlayer was installed per plans and specifications and confirm, by weight tickets and measuring asphalt used, that the hot asphalt binder usage equates to the specified amount for proper interlayer saturation and bonding. 2. Hot asphalt binder application rate shall not be reduced without the Engineer’s approval. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 38 3.Certification of compliance from the binder supplier shall be provided for each load of hot asphalt binder delivered to the jobsite, showing the type and quality of material delivered. 4.The Contractor shall provide satisfactory confirmation to the Engineer, for each Street Section, showing the total quantity of asphalt binder installed, at the proper application rate as published by the manufacturer. 5-04.4 Measurement HMA Cl. ½” PG 58V-22, HMA for Pavement Repairs Cl. ½” PG 58V-22, and Commercial HMA will be measured by the ton in accordance with Section 1-09.2, with no deduction being made for the weight of asphalt binder, mineral filler, or any other component of the mixture. If the Contractor elects to remove and replace mix as allowed by Section  5-04.3(11), the material removed will not be measured. Asphalt Interlay Fabric will be measured by the square yard of asphalt surface area, which is satisfactorily covered, sealed and accepted. PG Tack for Pavement Reinforcement will be measured by the gallon of material for the installation of Asphalt Interlay Fabric, which is properly applied, satisfactorily confirmed proper application rate with required documentation, and accepted by the Engineer. Roadway cores will be measured per each for the number of cores taken. Preparation of untreated roadway will be measured by the mile once along the centerline of the main line Roadway. No additional measurement will be made for ramps, Auxiliary Lanes, service roads, Frontage Roads, or Shoulders. Measurement will be to the nearest 0.01 mile. Soil residual herbicide will be measured by the mile for the stated width to the nearest 0.01 mile or by the square yard, whichever is designated in the Proposal. Pavement repair excavation will be measured by the square yard of surface marked prior to excavation. Asphalt for prime coat will be measured by the ton in accordance with Section 1-09.2. Prime coat aggregate will be measured by the cubic yard, truck measure, or by the ton, whichever is designated in the Proposal. Asphalt for fog seal will be measured by the ton, as provided in Section 5-02.4. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 39 Longitudinal joint seals between the HMA and cement concrete pavement will be measured by the linear foot along the line and slope of the completed joint seal. Planing bituminous pavement will be measured by the square yard. Measurement shall be made upon actual square yards planed/grind, regardless of the full planing capacity of the equipment used. No measurement will be made for the installation, maintenance, and removal of temporary pavement markings. 5-04.5 Payment Payment will be made for each of the following Bid items that are included in the Proposal: “HMA Cl. ½” PG 58V-22”, per ton. “HMA for Pavement Repair Cl. ½” PG 58V-22”, per ton. “Commercial HMA”, per ton. The unit contract price per ton for the above items shall be full compensation for all costs incurred to carry out the requirements of Section 5-04 except for those costs included in other items which are included in the Subsection and which are included in the Proposal. This work shall include the cost to install an asphalt thickened edge and/or the pre-leveling work in the areas identified on the plans. The cost for anti-stripping additive and water shall be included in this bid item. No payment will be made for temporary pavement markings. Temporary pavement markings shall be incidental to the project and cost shall be included in the various items of the Contract. The unit contract price per square yard for “Asphalt Interlay Fabric” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for performing the work involved in cleaning the surface to be sealed, furnishing and placing the interlay fabric and sand, and sand removal, in accordance with the requirements of these specifications. The unit contract price per gallon for “PG Tack For Pavement Reinforcement” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for performing the work involved in furnishing, applying, and documenting application of the hot asphalt binder, in accordance with the requirements of these specifications. “Crack Sealing” will be paid for by force account as specified in Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 PAGE 40 The unit contract price per square yard for “Pavement Repair Excavation Incl. Haul” shall be full payment for all costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(4) with the exception, however, that all costs involved in the placement of HMA shall be included in the unit contract price per ton for “HMA for Pavement Repair Cl. ½” PG 58V-22”, per ton. “Asphalt for Fog Seal”, per ton. Payment for “Asphalt for Fog Seal” is described in Section 5-02.5. The unit contract price per square yard for “Planing Bituminous Pavement” shall be full payment for all costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(14). The unit contract price per square yards shall also include all costs incurred to stockpile or dispose of the bituminous pavement as specified on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. No additional cost compensation shall be made for cold mix material to provide a temporary transition from planed areas to existing pavement. “Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment”, by calculation. “Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in Section 5-04.3(9)C6. “Compaction Price Adjustment”, by calculation. “Compaction Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in Section 5-04.3(10)D3. “Roadway Core”, per each. The Contractor’s costs for all other Work associated with the coring (e.g., traffic control) shall be incidental and included within the unit Bid price per each and no additional payments will be made. “Cyclic Density Price Adjustment”, by calculation. “Cyclic Density Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in Section 5-04.3(10)B. 5-05 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT SECTION 5-05.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 5-05.5 Payment The unit contract price per cubic yard for “Cement Concrete Pavement - Including Dowels” shall include furnishing and installing epoxy coated dowel bars and tie bars, except those tie bars drilled into cement concrete pavement will be paid under the item “Epoxy-Coated Tie Bar with Drill Hole”. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 1 DIVISION 7 – DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, STORM SEWERS, SANITARY SEWERS, WATER MAINS, AND CONDUITS 7-01 DRAINS SECTION 7-01.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-01.2 Materials Materials for this project shall meet the requirements of the following sections: Geotextile Fabric ....................................................... 2-12.2 Gravel Backfill for Drains ............................................ 9-03.12(4) Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Underdrain Pipe ........ 9-05.2(6) SECTION 7-01.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-01.4 Measurement The linear foot measurement will include the length of the cleanouts. 7-02 CULVERTS SECTION 7-02.2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-02.2 Materials Pipe material for culverts shall be in accordance with Section 7-04.2 of the Kent Special Provisions except that PVC pipe cannot be used for culvert pipe. SECTION 7-02.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-02.5 Payment The unit contract price per lineal foot for “Culvert Pipe, Inch Diameter” shall be complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install the pipe at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The bid item price includes but is not limited to: trench excavation; unsuitable material excavation, hauling, dewatering; backfill and compaction (when native material is to be used), surface restoration, and cleanup. The bid price shall also include fittings, tees, couplings, gaskets, connection to new or existing storm pipes, catch basins, or ditches, testing, coordination for TV inspection, and additional costs for overtime work when working on weekends. Costs to furnish and install pipe grates or trash screens at the end of the culverts shall be included in the bid item price. Reference Kent Standard Plan 5-20. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 2 7-04 STORM SEWERS THE FIRST PARAGRAPH OF SECTION 7-04.2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-04.2 Materials The following pipe types and materials are accepted for drains, culverts, and storm sewers for this project. The Contractor has the option of choosing the material except for those pipes specified on the plans to be a specific material. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) Class IV ............ 9-05.7(2) PVC Pipe ....................................................... 9-05.12(1) Ductile Iron Pipe Class 50 (Unlined) ................... 9-05.13 7-04.3 Construction Requirements 7-04.3(1) Cleaning and Testing SECTION 7-04.3(1)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-04.3(1)A General All storm drain pipe including the downstream system shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove any solids or construction debris that may have entered the pipe system during construction. The Contractor shall be responsible to insure that materials flushed from the storm drain is trapped, removed, and does not enter the downstream drainage system. SECTION 7-04.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-04.3(1)G Television Inspection All new City storm drain extensions, 24-inch diameter and smaller shall be TV camera inspected by the City Utility Department and accepted prior to placing final crushed rock surfacing and pavement. All construction except final casting adjustments must be completed and approved by the Inspector prior to the TV inspection. The manholes and catch basins must be set to grade, channeled, and grade rings set in place prior to TV inspection. Castings must be removed for paving, and fully grouted in place after paving. SECTION 7-04.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-04.5 Payment KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 3 The unit contract price per lineal foot for “Storm Sewer Pipe, Inch Diameter” shall be complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install the pipe at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The bid item price includes but is not limited to: trench excavation; unsuitable material excavation, hauling, dewatering; backfill and compaction (when native material is to be used), surface restoration, and cleanup. The bid price shall also include fittings, tees, couplings, gaskets, connection to new or existing storm pipes, catch basins, or ditches, testing, coordination for TV inspection, and additional costs for overtime work when working on weekends. 7-05 MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS, AND DRYWELLS SECTION 7-05.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-05.3 Construction Requirements All manholes and catch basins shall be precast concrete units and shall conform to Kent Standard Plans 4-1, 4-2, 5-1 and 5-2 unless specified otherwise. Minimum height for Type 1-48 inch, 54 inch, and 60 inch manholes shall be 5 feet. Manholes under 5 feet in height shall conform to Kent Standard Plan 4-2. All manholes and Type II and III CB structures shall be equipped with the drop rung type manhole steps and ladders in accordance with Kent Standard Plan 4-5. The ladder shall be secured from top to bottom, inside the structure wall. No 4 foot hanging ladder sections are allowed. The sanitary sewer manholes shall be fully channeled to conform to the inside diameter of the sewer line from invert to spring line, then the channel shall be vertical to the top of the pipe. The top edge of the channel shall have a radius of 1/2 to 3/4 inch. The shelves shall slope at 2 percent to the top of the channel. All manhole section joints and pick holes shall be filled with grout and smooth finished outside and inside after installation. All manhole penetrations, lifting holes, barrel joints (interior or exterior), risers, frames, and any other location determined by the Engineer, shall be sealed to prevent infiltration. The Contractor shall submit proposed sealing product literature to the Engineer for acceptance, prior to use. Manhole frame and covers shall be cast gray or ductile iron and shall comply with the following Kent Standard Plans as applicable: 4-3 Standard Manhole Frame and Locking Cover KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 4 Catch basin grates and solid covers shall be ductile iron and of the locking type unless indicated otherwise on the plans and shall be in accordance with Kent Standard Plans 5-4 through 5-16 as applicable. Miscellaneous catch basin details shall be in accordance with Kent Standard Plan 5-3. Care must be taken to insure that pressures exerted on the soils beneath the manholes and the adjacent mains are approximately uniform. Unequal soil pressures may result in excessive settlement at manholes. A spread foundation or other measures may be required to reduce the unit load imposed by the manhole. PVC pipe adaptors shall be KOR-IN-SEAL type flex joints or sand collars or other materials as approved by the Engineer to permit slight differential movement. All pipe materials other than the above shall be mudded directly into the manholes and catch basins using a smooth forty five (45) degree bevel from the pipe to the structure meeting ASTM D-303-H-78 SDR35. The allowable protrusion is two (2) inches inside the structure unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. Block lettering is required on the top surfaces of storm drain castings, and shall read as follows: “OUTFALL TO STREAM, DUMP NO POLLUTANTS” SECTION 7-05.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade All construction in performing adjustments of existing or new utilities shall conform to the WSDOT Standard Specifications, Standard Plans, Kent Standard Plans and the Kent Special Provisions. Locating all new and existing utilities to be adjusted following the paving shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall mark or reference all affected utilities including traffic loops prior to paving. Should it be determined by City personnel upon inspection or by notification from other utility companies that the Contractor has failed to adjust existing utilities, the Contractor shall be responsible for completing the adjustments, at no additional cost to the utility company or the City, even if the Contractor has vacated the project site. If the Contractor neglects to reference utilities prior to paving, and for example causes conflicts with or damage to traffic loops, the Contractor shall be responsible to relocate or replace the traffic loops at no additional cost to the City. No less than 4 inches or greater than 16 inches shall be provided between the top of the cone and the underside of the manhole frame KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 5 for adjustment to street grade or ground surface. Final elevation and slope of the frame and cover shall conform to the final street surface. All joints in the brick or ring adjustment shall be filled with grout, and the castings shall be sealed in grout placed on the ring or brick. A 3/8 inch mortar lining shall be installed inside and out of the adjustment section to form a smooth watertight finish. NOTE: The use or presence of wood, asphalt, expansion joint material or other non-approved product for catch basin or manhole adjustment shall be cause for immediate rejection. On asphalt concrete paving and/or asphalt resurfacing projects, manholes, catch basins and similar structures shall not be adjusted until the pavement is completed, at which time the center of each structure shall be relocated from references previously established by the Contractor. The pavement shall be cut in a restricted area and base material removed to permit removal of the cover. The asphalt concrete pavement shall be cut and removed to a neat circle, the diameter of which shall be equal to the outside diameter of the frame plus two feet. The frame shall be placed on concrete blocks and fully mortared to the desired grade. The base materials and crushed rock shall be removed and Cement Concrete Class 3000 shall be placed so that the entire volume of the excavation and up to within, but not to exceed 1-1/2 inches of the finished pavement surface. Note: casting adjustments shall be made with cementatious materials only. Wood, plastic, iron, aluminum, bituminous or similar materials are prohibited. On the following day, the concrete, the edges of the asphalt concrete pavement, and the outer edge of the casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement. Asphalt concrete shall then be placed and compacted with hand tampers and a patching roller. The completed patch shall match the existing paved surface for texture, density, and uniformity of grade. The joint between the patch and the existing pavement shall then be painted with hot asphalt cement or asphalt emulsion and shall be immediately covered with dry paving sand before the asphalt cement solidifies. SECTION 7-05.3(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes Manholes being abandoned shall have the top four feet removed and the remainder of the structure filled with bankrun gravel for trench backfill or gravel borrow as included in the proposal and shall otherwise be in accordance with Section 7-05.3(2) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. SECTION 7-05.3(3) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 6 7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes It shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to protect the existing sewer system from any damage and/or debris resulting from the construction. Should any damage and/or debris occur, the Contractor shall, at no cost to the City, repair and/or clean said system to the satisfaction of the Engineer. NOTE: Cleaning shall include those existing lines downstream of the project in which debris has been deposited. SECTION 7-05.3(4) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-05.3(4) Drop Manhole Connection Drop manhole connections shall be in accordance with Kent Standard Plan 4-6. Inside drop connections are not allowed. SECTION 7-05.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 7-05.3(5) Manhole Installation on Existing Sewer The manhole will be placed on and channeled for the existing lines in their existing location. It shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility to protect the existing sewer from any damage and/or debris resulting from the construction. Should any damage and/or debris occur, the Contractor shall, at no cost to the City, repair and/or clean said system to the satisfaction of the Engineer. NOTE: Cleaning shall include those existing lines downstream of the project in which debris has been deposited. 7-05.3(6) Storm Drain Marking The pavement adjacent to all new catch basins shall be marked with the following standard pollution prevention button: The Contractor is responsible for installation of the buttons. Markers for publicly owned catch basins will be provided by the City. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 7 7-05.3(7) Relocate Existing Catch Basin The existing catch basin assemblies indicated to be relocated shall be carefully removed to avoid damage. The Contractor will then install the catch basin at the location indicated on the plans so that the assembly will function as shown on the plans. SECTION 7-05.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-05.5 Payment “Special Shallow Manhole, Inch Diameter” “Manhole Under 12 Feet, Type 1 Inch Diameter” “Manhole 12 Feet to 20 Feet, Type 1 Inch Diameter” “Manhole Over 20 Feet, Type 1 Inch Diameter” The unit contract price per each for the above items constitutes complete compensation to furnish all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to provide and install the sanitary sewer manhole to final finished grade as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit price bid shall include but not be limited to excavation, dewatering, installing the manhole, connecting new or existing pipes, backfilling, compacting, and surface restoration. The unit contract price per vertical feet for “Sewer Drop Connection, 8 Inch Diameter” constitutes complete compensation to install the complete outside non-encased drop connection (or inside drop when specified on the Drawings or special details), including, but not limited to: excavation, placing and compacting selected backfill materials; the concrete footing; the ductile iron pipe for the drop; ductile iron spool and fittings at the outside and inside drop connections; pipe supports; channeling; the ductile iron pipe to span to undisturbed soil; and cleanup and restoration. “Catch Basin, Type 1” “Catch Basin, Type 2 Inch Diameter” “Concrete Inlet” The unit contract price per each for the above items constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to install the specified structure to final finished grade as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This work includes but shall not be limited to: excavating; dewatering; installing; connecting new or existing pipes, backfilling; compacting; surface restoration; referencing for future locates prior to final overlay; and storm drain stenciling. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 8 The unit contract price per each for “Abandon Existing Catch Basin or Manhole” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to abandon the existing structure as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit price bid shall include but not be limited to concrete plugging any remaining pipes, backfilling with gravel borrow, and compaction. Any frames, grates, or risers shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor unless deemed salvageable as determined by the Engineer. “Adjust Existing Manhole Cover to Finished Grade” “Adjust Existing Catch Basin Grate or Curb Inlet Grate to Finished Grade” The unit contract price per each for the above items constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to adjust the specified structure to final finished grade as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This work includes but shall not be limited to: excavating; dewatering; installing; connecting new or existing pipes, backfilling; compacting; surface restoration; referencing for future locates prior to final overlay; and installing City provided storm drain markers. Adjusting the grade by adding or removing risers, grade rings, or sections as required will be included in this bid item. Any adjustments made prior to the final finished elevation shall be considered incidental. “Standard Manhole Frame and Cover” “Locking Manhole Frame and Cover” “Watertight Manhole Frame and Cover” The unit contract price per each for the above items constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install the new frame and cover or grate as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This price shall also include adjusting the new frame and cover or grate to match final grades. Any adjustments made prior to the final finished elevation shall be considered incidental. “Solid Locking Catch Basin Frame and Cover” “Bolt Down Catch Basin Frame and Grate” “Vaned Catch Basin Frame and Grate” “Thru-Curb Inlet Frame and Grate” The unit contract price per each for the above items constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install the new frame and cover or KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 9 grate as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This price shall also include adjusting the new frame and cover or grate to match final grades. Any adjustments made prior to the final finished elevation shall be considered incidental. The unit contract price per each for “Thermoplastic Storm Drain Stenciling” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, supplies and materials necessary or incidental to the installation of the thermoplastic storm drain pollution markers and other work as specified. Also see Section 7-05.3(6) and 8-22 of the Kent Special Provisions. 7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS SECTION 7-08.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.2 Materials All pipe shall be of the type and material specified in the bid proposal, shown on the plans or specified herein. All materials used for construction of sanitary sewer and storm drainage systems and appurtenances shall be new and undamaged. All materials used shall be subject to inspection by the City prior to use. The Contractor shall provide the City with shop drawings, manufacturer’s specifications and certificates of materials as requested. The materials referred to herein, shall conform to the applicable provisions of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, the Kent Special Provisions and the manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. See the following Sections of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and the Kent Special Provisions: Hot Mix Asphalt ...................... 5-04.2 Cement Concrete Pavement ...... 5-05.2 Culverts ................................ 7-02.2 Storm Sewers ........................ 7-04.2 Manholes, Inlets and Catch Basins 7-05.2 Sanitary Sewer ....................... 7-17.2 Side Sewers ........................... 7-18.2 Crushed Surfacing ................... 9-03.9(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding 9-03.12(3) Gravel Borrow ........................ 9-03.14(1) Foundation Material Class I and II 9-03.17 Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill 9-03.19 7-08.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 7-08.3(1)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(1)A Trenches KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 10 If well points are used for dewatering pipe trenches, they shall be adequately spaced to provide the necessary dewatering and shall be sandpacked and/or other means used to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the sub-surface. A continual check by the Contractor shall be maintained to insure that the sub-surface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operation. Once commenced, the dewatering operation shall be continuous until construction and backfilling in the dewatered area is complete. Pump shutdown shall be accomplished in an approved gradual manner. The Contractor shall provide enough facilities and personnel to maintain continuous operation once commenced. Such continuous operation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. In the event of damage to the trench foundation as determined by the Engineer, or to the ditch walls, or other operations resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the dewatering operation, the complete cost of all repairs shall be borne by the Contractor. It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to dispose of all waters resulting from its dewatering operation. This responsibility also includes choice of method, obtaining regulatory agency approvals, complying with state water quality standards and other agency requirements. Each individual project and dewatering operation shall be evaluated individually to determine exact requirements; however, in general the following conditions will apply. 1. Disposal into the existing storm drain facilities (pipes, channels, ditches, etc.) may be acceptable if the Contractor obtains the necessary permits and approvals. 2. Discharge to existing storm drain facilities shall not result in a violation of state water quality standards for surface water, Chapter 173-203 WAC. 3. The Contractor shall monitor discharge and receiving water(s) as required to verify that water quality standards are being met. 4. If necessary to meet standards and approval requirements, the Contractor shall treat the water prior to discharge. A settling pond may be an acceptable method of treatment. Any damage, as determined by the Engineer to properties or improvements resulting from an inadequate disposal (water) operation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, including repairs, replacements and/or restoration. Where required or where directed by the Engineer, stabilization of the trench bottom shall be in accordance with Section 7-08.3(1)A of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Excavation of the unsuitable material KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 11 shall be considered as trench excavation. The unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Backfill unsuitable material excavations with Foundation Material Class I or II meeting the requirements of Section 9-03.17 of the Kent Special Provisions with the class called for in the bid proposal, on the plans or by the Engineer in the field. Trench excavation shall include the required pavement removal for construction of the trench. See Section 2-02.3(3) of the Kent Special Provisions. SECTION 7-08.3(1)C IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe Bedding shall be placed in accordance with Standard Plan B-55.20-00. Bedding material shall be in accordance with Section 9-03.12(3) of the Kent Special Provisions. Bedding material shall be tamped in layers under, around and above the pipe to adequately support and protect the pipe. The Contractor shall use compaction equipment approved by the Engineer to obtain adequate compaction of the bedding material. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, adequate compaction shall be construed to mean to at least 95 percent of the maximum density measured in accordance with ASTM D-1557. The pipe shall be protected from damage when compacting. At least two feet of cover is required over the pipe prior to using heavy compaction equipment. SECTION 7-08.3(2)B IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying - General At locations of pipe crossing between new or existing pipes the minimum vertical clearance shall be one and one-half foot unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If this clearance cannot be obtained, the Contractor shall install a 2-inch thick 1-2 PSF Styrofoam cushion between the pipes. The cushion shall be installed longitudinally with the lower pipe. The cushion width shall be equal to the lower pipe diameter and the length shall be one foot greater than the upper pipe diameter. It should be noted that field adjustment of specified slopes for storm and sanitary side sewers are permissible, if approved by the Design Engineer, to obtain the minimum clearances. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 12 External or internal grouting or repair by use of collars on the new sanitary or storm sewer line will not be an acceptable means of repair, should repair be necessary. All pipe, adaptors, tees, and other fittings shall be used for the purpose intended by the manufacturer and shall be installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations. SECTION 7-08.3(2)G IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(2)G Jointing of Dissimilar Pipe Connections of Ductile or Cast Iron Pipe to Concrete Pipe or PVC Pipe will be done by the use of Cast Transition or reducing couplings (Romac 501 or equivalent). SECTION 7-08.3(2)H IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections Where indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer, connections shall be made to the existing storm drain/sewer systems by the Contractor in accordance with applicable portions of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and Kent Special Provisions in a workmanlike manner satisfactory to the Engineer. SECTION 7-08.3(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-08.3(2)J Pipe Laying - PVC For PVC pipe, the Contractor shall maintain a cover over the pipe to prevent temperature deformation caused by the sun and shall remove such cover only for a sufficient time to allow the pipe to be installed. When making field cuts of PVC pipe, a new reference line shall be marked on the spigot end a distance of 4-5/8 inches from said end. Said end will provide a visual means of determining whether full insertion of the spigot into the bell has been made during installation. SECTION 7-08.3(4) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.3(4) Plugging Existing Pipe Existing pipes being plugged shall be plugged with concrete at both ends and shall otherwise be in accordance with Section 7-08.3(4) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. SECTION 7-08.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 13 7-08.3(5) Street Restoration Unless otherwise shown on the plans, street restoration shall be in accordance with the following requirements: Where cuts have been made in either asphalt concrete pavement, or in oil mats, the Contractor shall reconstruct the trench areas with a 3 inch thick asphalt concrete patch placed on a 2 inch thickness of crushed surfacing top course over a 4 inch thickness of crushed surfacing base course or as directed by the Engineer in the field. However, where cuts have been made in an asphalt concrete pavement section to be overlayed, the Contractor shall reconstruct the trench with a 2 inch thick asphalt concrete patch with a 2 inch asphalt overlay for a total of 4 inches of asphalt concrete pavement over 2 inches of crushed surfacing top course over 4 inches crushed surfacing base course. In all cases, the asphalt and crushed surfacing thickness for the patch shall meet or exceed the existing pavement section. Upon approval of the Engineer, Controlled Density Fill may be used to back fill the narrow trenches where it is difficult to compact crushed surfacing. In these cases the asphalt concrete layer shall increase to a minimum of 2 inches greater than the existing section. Where cuts have been made in cement concrete pavement, the Contractor shall reconstruct the trench area with a 6 inch thick cement concrete patch placed on a 6 inch thickness of crushed surfacing top course. In all cases, the cement concrete and crushed surfacing thickness for the patch shall meet or exceed the existing pavement section. Where there is an existing asphalt overlay over cement concrete pavement, the cement concrete shall be patched to original grade as above and then overlaid with an asphalt concrete patch to existing grade. All gravel shoulders shall be restored to their original condition and shape. The Contractor shall spread a 2 inch thick layer of crushed surfacing on the shoulder. The shoulder shall be finished with a grader after backfilling and compacting and before spreading the crushed surfacing. Permanent surface treatments and pavements shall not be placed until an as-built survey and testing of the new underground utilities have been completed. Verification that utility construction conforms to the line and grade requirements of Section 7-08.3(2)B of the WSDOT Standard Specifications shall be made by the Engineer prior to KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 14 authorizing paving to begin. Also, each new utility must pass all appropriate tests specified herein for the type of utility prior to paving. SECTION 7-08.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.4 Measurement Gravel backfill for foundation and gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall be measured by the ton, including haul. SECTION 7-08.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-08.5 Payment The unit contract price per ton for “Pipe Zone Bedding” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place bedding material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. Reference WSDOT Standard Plan B-55.20-00. The unit contract price per ton for “Foundation Material, Class I and II” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place foundation material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. The unit contract price per ton for “Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place the bank run gravel for trench backfill as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. The actual quantity for bank run gravel for trench backfill is unknown since selected materials will be used wherever possible. The City has entered a quantity in the proposal for the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders. The unit contract price per each for “Abandon Existing Storm Sewer Pipe” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to abandon the existing pipe as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit price bid shall include but not be limited to concrete plugging the pipe at both ends, backfilling with gravel borrow, and compaction. 7-09 WATER MAINS KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 15 SECTION 7-09.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.2 Materials All water main pipe shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Ductile Iron Water Pipe .............. 9-30.1(1) Fittings for Ductile Iron Pipe........ 9-30.2(1) The following aggregates shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Bedding Material ....................... 9-03.12(3) Foundation Material ................... 9-03.17 7-09.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 7-09.3(8) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(8) Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Materials Where required or where directed by the Engineer, stabilization of the trench bottom shall be in accordance to Section 7-09.3(8) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications except that the foundation material shall meet the requirements of Kent Special Provisions 9-03.17. Excavation and disposal of the unsuitable material shall be considered as trench excavation. The unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. SECTION 7-09.3(9) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(9) Bedding the Pipe In most cases, imported bedding is not required for water main installations. The native material shall be worked to form a continuous and uniform trench bottom for all buried pipe. Bedding material shall be tamped in layers around the pipe and to a sufficient height above the pipe to adequately support and protect the pipe, compaction shall be 95 percent of maximum dry density per ASTM D-1557. The Contractor shall use compaction equipment approved by the Engineer to obtain adequate compaction of the bedding material, so as to provide firm and uniform support for the full length of the pipe, valves and fittings. Care shall be taken to prevent any damage to the pipe or its protective coatings. Material larger than 1 1/2 inch diameter found in the trench shall be removed for a depth of at least two inches around the pipe. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 16 When specified, imported bedding material shall be used. All bedding material prior to use shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The responsibility for obtaining said approval shall rest solely with the Contractor. NOTE: Pea gravel will not be allowed as a bedding material. Bedding shall be placed 6 inches under and 6 inches over the pipe where, in the opinion of the Engineer, existing material is found to be unsuitable. SECTION 7-09-3(13) IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE LAST PARAGRAPH: 7-09.3(13) Handling of Pipe In addition, all installed lengths of pipe shall have a suitable swab or “pig” drawn continuously through them to remove all possible debris prior to flushing and disinfection. SECTION 7-09.3(19)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains Also see Appendix New Water Main Connection Procedures. Connections to existing mains which require turning off the water, shall not be made without at least five (5) working days’ notice to the Engineer, the City Water Department, and affected water customers. Prior to purchase of materials, the Contractor shall field inspect the connection points to verify the exact fittings, adaptors, etc. required to make an approved connection. The Contractor shall furnish and install materials approved by the City. The City shall not be responsible for incorrect or unapproved materials purchased by the Contractor. Where various methods are possible, or if doubt exists as to what is required, the Contractor shall coordinate with the City prior to construction. The Contractor shall not make a connection to a live water main until after satisfactory pressure and purity tests. SECTION 7-09.3(19) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-09.3(19)C Connection to Existing Concrete Cylinder Mains The connections to an existing concrete cylinder water main shall be made in accordance with the Kent Standard Plans 3-5 and 3-6 and these Kent Special Provisions. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 17 The connection shall be made by the installation of a hat flange with tapping valve onto the existing main paying particular attention to the following: 1. All welding is to be done by a certified welder. 2. The hat flange shall have a special connection flange welded to the connection end (end connecting to existing main) as shown on the details. 3. The connection flange and end of the hat flange shall be checked for proper contour of its mating surface to the existing main. Any connections required shall be made before installations. 4. The outer concrete coating on the existing main shall be cleaned away to expose the steel portion of the pipe. The extent of concrete removal shall be no more than two inches from the outer weld of the hat flange ring in its installed position. Before cutting the concrete reinforcing wire mesh the mesh shall be secured by welding it to the pipe. 5. The weld to the existing main shall be made with the main shut down and pressure released. 6. After the weld has been accepted and the reinforcing wire mesh reconnected to the pipe and hat flange, the joint area and exposed portion of the existing pipe shall be recoated with cement concrete. SECTION 7-09.3(20) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(20) Detectable Marking Tape Instead of tracer tape, 12 gage solid copper wire protected with plastic shall be installed over all non-metallic water lines including service lines. The tracing wire shall be placed as shown on Standard Plans and shall extend the full length of the line. SECTION 7-09.3(23) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test Hydrostatic pressure tests shall be made at a minimum pressure of 250 psi. SECTION 7-09.3(24) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24) Disinfection of Water Mains Following the pressure test, flushing procedure and disinfection of the pipe, the Contractor shall arrange with the Public Works Inspector for coliform (purity) tests to be taken by the Water Department. Two samples taken 24-hours apart, with no flushing between samples is required to be taken from each apparatus. The Contractor may elect to KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 18 contract with a City-approved lab for the tests. Contractor shall pay for purity tests as required by the City. The Contractor shall install corporation stops at all locations required to take bacteriological test samples. If the original test sample proves unsatisfactory, an additional charge will be assessed to the Contractor for processing each additional sample. SECTION 7-09.3(24)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24)A Flushing The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of treated water flushed from mains. The sanitary sewer shall be the preferred option for disposal of all flushed water. The City shall approve disposal into available sanitary sewers, provided that the rate of disposal will not overload the sewer. All discharges to the storm system shall be tested for total residual chlorine using a portable “HACH” kit or equivalent, prior to discharge. NO DISCHARGE TO SURFACE WATERS OR THE STORM SYSTEM IS ALLOWED AT CONCENTRATIONS OF TOTAL RESIDUAL CHLORINE ABOVE 20 UG/1 (.02 MG/1). (Because the minimum detection limit for this test is about 10 ug/1 (.01 mg/1) under ideal conditions, field testing may lack precision.) If no acceptable discharge for the treated water is identified, the Contractor shall be required to dechlorinate the water prior to discharge. Water for testing and flushing, when taken from the City water mains shall pass through an approved reduced pressure backflow valve assembly. This activity must be coordinated with and approved by the City. SECTION 7-09.3(24)B IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24)B Requirement of Chlorine All new, cleaned or repaired water mains shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA Standard C651. This Specification includes detailed procedures for the adequate flushing, disinfection, and microbiological testing of all water mains. SECTION 7-09.3(24)M IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.3(24)M Chlorinating Connections to Existing Water Mains and Water Service Connections KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 19 After the new piping has been flushed, pressure tested, disinfected, and all purity test sample results are satisfactory, connections to the existing main can be made. All closure pieces and fittings shall be swabbed with an appropriate chlorine solution (5-6 percent Cl), in accordance with AWWA Standard C651. Maximum length of swabbed section of water main pipe shall be less than 18 feet (1 section of pipe). SECTION 7-09.4 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.4 Measurement Measurement for payment of pipe for water mains will be by the linear foot of pipe laid, tested and approved and shall be along the pipe through fittings, valves, and couplings. SECTION 7-09.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-09.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per ton for “Pipe Zone Bedding for Water Main” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place bedding material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. The unit contract price per ton for “Foundation Material, Class I and II for Water Main” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place foundation material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. The unit contract price per ton for “Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill for Water Main” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and place the bank run gravel for trench backfill as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, loading, hauling, mixing, placing, shaping, and compacting. The actual quantity for bank run gravel for trench backfill is unknown since selected native materials will be used wherever possible. The City has entered a quantity in the proposal for the purpose of providing a common proposal for all bidders. The unit contract price per lineal foot for “ Inch Diameter Ductile Iron, Cl 52 Water Main Pipe” shall be complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 20 install the pipe at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The bid item price includes but is not limited to: trench excavation; unsuitable material excavation, hauling, dewatering; backfill and compaction (when native material is to be used), surface restoration, and cleanup. The bid price shall also include fittings, cement concrete thrust blocking, risers, elbows, disinfecting, flushing, testing, temporary blowoffs, tapping and corporation stops required for testing, and additional costs for overtime work when working on weekends. The unit bid price per each for “ Inch Connection to Existing Water Main” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to wet tap the main or cut into the main and make the connection, complete in place as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit bid price shall include but not be limited to excavation, dewatering, all fittings, couplings, adapters, tapping valve with tapping sleeves, concrete blocking and disinfection. Costs for connection to the ends of existing pipes (water main extensions) including removal of existing concrete blocking, and connections to existing valves, crosses, and tees and similar fittings shall be included in this bid item. The cost to coordinate this work with the City Water Department and to notify affected users of the system such as adjoining businesses and property owners shall be included as part of this bid item. Also included shall be any costs resulting in work that is required to be performed at other than normal working hours. The unit contract price per each for “2 Inch Blowoff Assembly” shall be full pay for all work to install the blowoff assembly, including but not limited to excavating, backfilling, laying and jointing the pipe, tapping the main, corporation stop, pipe and fittings, gate valve, meter box, testing, and cover and cleanup. Reference Kent Standard Plan 3-2, Temporary Hydrant Connection. The unit contract price per lump sum for “Abandon Existing Water Main” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to abandon the existing water main as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit bid price shall include but not be limited to excavation, removal of pipes, concrete blocking, or fittings, plugging and capping the main, backfilling and compaction. The cost to coordinate this work with the City Water Department and to notify affected users of the system such as adjoining businesses and property owners shall be included as part of this bid item. Also included shall be any costs resulting in work that is required to be performed at other than normal working hours. 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS SECTION 7-12.2 IS REVISED BY SUPPLEMENTING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH WITH THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 21 7-12.2 Materials The following materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Gate Valves ......................... 9-30.3(1) Valve Boxes ........................ 9-30.3(4) Valve Marker Posts ............... 9-30.3(5) Valve Stem Extensions .......... 9-30.3(6) SECTION 7-12.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-12.3 Construction Requirements All valves shall have valve boxes installed with the cover lugs parallel to the direction of water flow. SECTION 7-12.3(1) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Posts Valve marker posts conforming to Kent Standard Plan 3-4 shall be located opposite each valve as directed by the Engineer. The 18 inches of exposed post shall be painted with two coats of approved white concrete paint, and then the size of the valve, the type of valve, and the distance in feet from the post to the valve shall be painted on the face of the post, using approved black paint and stencils which produce letters 2-inches high. SECTION 7-12.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 7-12.3(2) Replace Existing Valve Box Top Section and Lid See Section 9-30.3(4) of the Kent Special Provisions for material specifications. Where shown in the plans or where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish and install new Valve Box Top Section and Lid on existing water valves in accordance with the details shown in the plans, these Kent Special Provisions or as directed by the Engineer. Lid shall be the locking type. On asphalt concrete paving and/or asphalt resurfacing projects, valve box top section and similar structures shall not be adjusted and/or installed until the pavement is completed. The center of each structure shall be relocated from previously referenced measurements, established by the Contractor. The pavement shall be cut in a restricted area and base material removed to permit removal of the old unit. The KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 22 new structure shall then be installed to proper grade utilizing the same methods of construction as specified for new construction in Section 7-12 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and the Kent Special Provisions. All valves covered by new paving shall be uncovered and adjusted to grade within 72 hours. 7-12.3(3) Adjusting Valve Boxes to Grade On asphalt concrete paving and/or asphalt resurfacing projects, valve box top section and similar structures shall not be adjusted and/or installed until the pavement is completed. The center of each structure shall be relocated from previously referenced measurements, established by the Contractor. The pavement shall be cut in a restricted area and base material removed to permit removal of the old unit. The new structure shall then be installed to proper grade utilizing the same methods of construction as specified for new construction in Section 7-12 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications and the Kent Special Provisions. All valves covered by new paving shall be uncovered and adjusted to grade within 72 hours. SECTION 7-12.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-12.4 Measurement Measurement of valve marker posts shall be incidental for new valve installations, and per each for valve marker post installed opposite an existing valve. Relocation and remarking of existing valve marker posts shall be incidental to the project. SECTION 7-12.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-12.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per each for “Adjust Existing Valve Box Top Section and Lid to Finished Grade” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to adjust the valve box top to final finished grade as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This work includes but shall not be limited to: referencing for future locates prior to overlay, excavating, backfilling, compacting, surfacing and restoration. Any adjustments made prior to the final finished elevation shall be considered incidental to this bid item. Reference Kent Standard Plan 3-7. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 23 The unit price bid per each for “Replace Existing Valve Box Top Section and Lid” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials and equipment required to furnish and install the valve box top and lid and adjust the top to final grade after the final lift of asphalt is placed. The costs of excavating, removing and disposing of the existing valve box top and lid are included in the unit bid price for replacing the valve box top and lid. Reference Kent Standard Plan 3-7. The unit bid price per each for “Replace Existing Valve Box Base Section” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, materials and equipment required to furnish and install the valve box base section per Kent Standard Plan 3-7. The costs of excavating, dewatering, removing and disposing of the existing valve box base section are included in this item. The unit bid price per each for “Valve Operating Nut Extender” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment required to furnish and install the valve nut extension per Kent Standard Plan 3-7. Valve nut extensions shall be placed where designated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The cost of valve nut extenders for new 6” or 8” gate valves shall be included in the cost of the valves. The unit bid price per each for “ Inch Gate Valve, MJ x FL or MJ x MJ or FL x FL” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment required to install the type and diameter of valve complete and in place, including but not limited to: verifying existing pipe type, location and fittings; furnishing and installing the gate valve and all necessary fitting and appurtenances; furnishing and installing the valve box top section, lid, and base section; tapping valve with tapping tee where shown on the plans; valve nut extenders where needed; trenching; dewatering; backfilling and compacting selected materials; jointing; painting; disinfecting; flushing; hydrostatic and purity testing; furnishing and installing valve box with cover and a valve marker post; running a pig through valve. Water disconnect may be required after hours or on a weekend. Additional costs for weekend work, removal of existing valves, cutting and capping existing water mains shall be included in this item. The unit contract price bid per each for “2 Inch Air Release Valve with Chamber” shall be full pay for all work to supply and install the air release valve with chamber, including but not limited to excavating, backfilling, laying and jointing the pipe, tapping the main, corporation stop, pipe and fittings, gate valve, discharge riser, vault, testing, and cover and cleanup. Reference Kent Standard Plan 3-20. Payment for valve marker posts shall be incidental to the installation of new water valves, unless a specific bid item is included in the project proposal. The unit contract price per each for “Valve Marker Post” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials and KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 24 equipment necessary or incidental to the installation of water valve marker posts. Payment for the relocation and remarking of existing valve marker posts shall be incidental to the project. DIVISION 7 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-13 ADJUSTING WATER MAINS 7-13.1 Description This work shall consist of adjusting water mains where shown on the plans or as staked by the Engineer to avoid conflicts with existing or proposed improvements. 7-13.2 Materials All materials shall meet the requirements of Section 7-09 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 7-13.3 Construction Details Adjusting water mains shall be accomplished by deflecting the joints of existing pipes where feasible and by standard fittings where deflection of joints is deemed not feasible by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide standard fittings and temporary or permanent blocking when required by the Engineer to safely accomplish the adjusting of water mains. Where field conditions require deflections or special fittings not anticipated by the plans, the Engineer will determine the methods to be used. Water mains shall be adjusted to the satisfaction of the Engineer, but shall generally be provided with a minimum of one-foot clearance vertically and two-foot clearance horizontally. Use of lesser clearances will require the approval of the Engineer. Whenever it becomes necessary to cut the pipe or separate the water main at a joint, the provisions of Section 7-09 shall be met by the Contractor. 7-13.4 Measurement The actual length of water main to be adjusted as a result of constructing the new improvements is uncertain. The total length provided on the proposal or shown on the plans is an estimate based on the best information available. Measurement by the linear foot for payment will be for the actual length deemed necessary by the Engineer. 7-13.5 Payment KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 25 Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per linear foot for “Adjusting Water Main” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary or incidental to the adjustment of water mains including but not limited to scheduling water main shutdowns, costs for after hours or weekend work as required, trench excavation, bedding, laying and jointing pipe, standard fittings, backfilling, concrete thrust blocking, testing, flushing, disinfecting the pipeline, restoration and cleanup. When special fittings are required to meet field conditions, additional payment will be made as provided in Section 1-09.6 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 7-14 HYDRANTS SECTION 7-14.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-14.2 Materials The following materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Fire Hydrants ................... 9-30.5 Hydrant Dimensions ......... 9-30.5(2) Fire Hydrant Guard Posts ... 9-30.5(6) 7-14.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 7-14.3(1) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FOURTH PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING IT WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants After all installation and testing is complete, the exposed portion of the fire hydrant shall be painted with one field coat of metal primer and two coats of oil based white colored paint. The white hydrant paint shall be Farwest Wonderglow Quickset 1100 white high gloss, oil base fast drying paint or equal approved by the Water Department. SECTION 7-14.3(2)C IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-14.3(2)C Hydrant Guard Posts Concrete fire hydrant guard posts shall be furnished and installed with fire hydrants as directed by the Engineer. Guard posts shall be buried to a minimum depth of three feet (3’). Guard posts shall not be set higher than the top of the fire hydrants, they shall be plumb, and where more than one post is used at a hydrant, they shall be set with their KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 26 tops at the same elevation. Posts shall be located to leave a minimum 3-foot radius of unobstructed working area around the face of the fire hydrant. Final location of guard posts is subject to the approval of the Engineer. The exposed portion of the guard post shall be painted with two coats of approved white concrete paint. SECTION 7-14.3(3) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING IT WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants Where existing hydrants are shown on the plans for adjustments to conform to new street alignment or grade or installation of new utilities or all three, the hydrant shall be relocated without disturbing the location of the hydrant lateral tee at the main. SECTION 7-14.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-14.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The unit bid price per each for “Hydrant Assembly” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnishing and installing fire hydrant assemblies, including, but not limited to: the 6-inch fire hydrant, the 6-inch resilient wedge gate valve, the valve box, the 6-inch diameter ductile iron pipe joining the gate valve to the fire hydrant, furnishing and installing the main line tee, all costs for shackles, rods, concrete blocking, gravel backfill, painting, guard posts and anything else required for the complete installation and testing of the hydrant assembly as specified. Reference Kent Standard Plan 3-1. The unit contract price per each for “Resetting Existing Hydrants” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, material, and equipment necessary or incidental to the resetting of existing hydrants, including, but not limited to new pipe, fittings, flushing, guard posts, disinfecting, testing, shackling, painting, and reconnecting to the main. Guard post installation for fire hydrants shall be considered incidental to fire hydrant work of all kinds, unless a specific bid item for guard posts is listed in the proposal. SECTION 7-15 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-15 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 7-15.1 Description KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 27 This work consists of installing the service connections from the water main to the customer’s service meter including meter setter; from the customer’s service meter to the property or easement line; and where shown on the plans, from the service meter to the customer’s service line. Service connections for commercial users as well as residential users are included. This work also includes replacing existing service lines including new service connections, new pipe, new meter boxes and setters as required and relocating meters or combinations thereof. Also included is abandonment and disconnection of service lines being replaced at the City main line. 7-15.2 Materials The following materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions: Saddles ........................ 9-30.6(1) Corporation Stops .......... 9-30.6(2) Polyethylene Pipe ........... 9-30.6(3)B Service Fittings .............. 9-30.6(4) Meter Setters ................ 9-30.6(5) Meter Boxes .................. 9-30.6(7) Water Meters ................ 9-30.7(8) 7-15.3 Construction Details 7-15.3(1) General Service lines from the water main to the meter setter and from the meter setter to the property or easement line shall be one piece and at least 1 inch in diameter iron pipe size (IPS). Meter setters shall be of the appropriate size for the size of the meter to be installed and reducing bushings shall be installed when the existing meter size is less than 1 inch. Pipe materials used for service lines shall be either Type K copper tubing without sweat-joints, or ultra-high molecular weight, high density polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, only. Pipe materials used for water service lines on private property, and installed by the customer shall conform to the Uniform Plumbing Code. It is the customer’s responsibility to install and maintain the service line between the property or easement line and the facility being served. The Contractor shall notify all customers affected, the City Water Department, and the Engineer at least two working days prior to working on live services. The Contractor is responsible for planning and KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 28 coordinating its work such that water service will be resumed with the least possible inconvenience to the water users. The location of existing water service laterals and service lines between the water main and the water meter shall be determined and marked in the field or otherwise located by the City Water Department. Unless otherwise approved by the City Water Department, new service lines from the water main to the meter shall be perpendicular to the water main, i.e. the meter shall be located directly opposite the corporation stop. 7-15.3(2) Flushing, Disinfection and Testing All service pipe and appurtenances shall be prechlorinated prior to installation. After installation, the service connection shall be flushed prior to connecting the meter and tested after connection to the meter. 7-15.3(3) Service Connections This work shall consist solely of connecting 1 inch or greater diameter service lines to the water main pipe by installing new corporation stops and service line adaptors at the water main pipe and shall include saddles. Corporation stops and saddles shall be of the size shown on the plans and shall be installed with a 22 degree vertical angle from the water main pipe centerline as shown in the Kent Standard Plans. Direct taps shall not be allowed, a double strapped saddle must be used as shown in the Kent Standard Plans. Particular care shall be exercised to ensure that the main is not damaged by the installation of the service line. 7-15.3(4) Relocating Existing Water Meter Assembly This work shall consist solely of disconnecting and removing the existing meter, setter and meter box (the meter assembly) from their existing location, cleaning the meter assembly, relocating the meter assembly to the location shown on the plans, and reconnecting the used meter assembly to the service line pipe. 7-15.3(5) Water Service Lines This work shall consist of installing new water service line pipes from the corporation stop at the water main pipe to the water meter setter and from the water meter setter to the water service line. Water service lines shall be the size shown on the plans, but shall in all cases be at least 1 inch in diameter iron pipe size (IPS). Water service lines shall be either copper tubing type K or polyethylene plastic (PE) pipe and shall be installed with a minimum of 2 feet of cover over the top of the line. Whenever PE pipe is installed, 12 gage solid copper tracing wire with KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 29 plastic coating shall be installed over the pipe for its entire length as shown in Kent Standard Plans 3-10 and 3-11. The wire shall be bared and connected between the corporation and the angle stop on the meter setter so as to maintain continuity. Water service line pipes shall not exceed 60 feet in length from the water main pipe to the meter setter. When water services lines are installed for future use, the work shall include a “tail run” section of service pipe two feet long from the water meter setter to the property or easement line. This “tail run” section shall have a union fitting on the end of the “tail run”, shall be indicated with a 2 x 4 stake marked with the legend “WATER” and shall otherwise be marked in conformance with Section 7-18.3(5) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. When new water service lines are to be connected to existing service lines smaller than 1 inch in diameter, the new water service lines behind the meter shall be the same diameter as the service line from the water main to the meter and shall be suitably reduced at the connection. 7-15.3(6) Water Meters Water meters 5/8 inch x 3/4 inch to 2 inch shall be provided and installed by the City Water Department. All water meters larger than 2 inch shall be provided and installed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall reinstall existing water meters where shown on the plans regardless of meter size, unless otherwise stated in the Kent Special Provisions. Water meters shall be located behind City sidewalks when sidewalks are present or scheduled for immediate construction. If in case the water meter must be located within the sidewalk, as determined by the Engineer, no portion of the water meter box shall be closer than 6 inches to any edge of the sidewalk. In the case when City sidewalks are not present or scheduled for immediate construction, new water meters shall be located 2 feet from the right-of-way or easement line and inside the right-of-way or easement. In all cases the angle stop shall be installed 9 inches below finished grade. 7-15.3(7) Compound Meter Assemblies Compound meter assemblies shall be installed where shown on the plans. Compound meter assemblies shall conform with Kent Standard Plan 3-12 in all respects and shall include a water meter of the specified size unless otherwise stated in the Kent Special Provisions. The utility vault for the compound meter and by-pass shall be sized to allow access to all gate valves when the cover is removed, shall be rated for KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 30 H-20 traffic loading, and shall otherwise conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-12. This work includes connection to the customer’s service lateral when they exist. 7-15.3(8) Excavation, Bedding and Backfilling Excavating, bedding and backfilling for service connections shall be as specified in Section 7-09-3(10). Bedding of water service lines is omitted and backfill material shall consist of selected materials, as outlined in Section 2-03.3(10), unless otherwise specified in the Kent Special Provisions or directed by the Engineer. 7-15.3(9) Meter Boxes and Vaults Water meter boxes shall be installed directly opposite the main line connection; shall be generally perpendicular to the street; and shall be within City sidewalks when they are present. Meter boxes installed within City sidewalks shall be located so that no portion of the meter box is closer than 6 inches to any edge of the sidewalk. Water meter boxes installed outside of City sidewalks shall be located within the easement or right-of-way with the near edge of the box being 1 foot from the property or easement line and set to finished grade. Water meter boxes are specified for varying meter sizes and for varying locations. Water meter boxes within driveways or other traffic areas shall meet the requirement for a H-20 traffic loading. Water meter boxes within sidewalks shall be concrete or cast iron. Water meter boxes within planting or similar nontraffic areas may be plastic. Water meter boxes shall be of sufficient size to contain the water meter. With the exception of plastic lids for plastic meter boxes, all lids and covers of meter boxes shall be steel. Water meter vaults shall be adequately sized to contain the meter assembly; shall be set flush to the finished grade; and shall be rated for a H-20 traffic loading unless otherwise shown on the plans. 7-15.3(10) Replace/Abandon Existing Water Service Where the plans call for an existing water service to be abandoned, the corporation stop at the water main line shall be exposed and shut off. The service pipe shall then be removed from the corporation stop and a plug installed on the corporation stop. For service being replaced, the procedure specified above shall be used except that the new service pipe shall be connected to the corporation stop and the stop turned on. Use appropriate adaptor, when necessary, for connecting new pipe to existing corporation stop. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 31 Should the existing corporation stop be of the improper size, it shall be abandoned as specified above and a new corporation stop shall be installed on the water main line. SECTION 7-15.4 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-15.4 Measurement Measurement of service connections, relocating existing water meters, meter setters, compound meter assemblies, water meters, meter boxes and abandon water service will be made per each. Measurement of new water service line will be made per linear foot. SECTION 7-15.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 7-15.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per each for “Service Connection Inch Diameter” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for installing the service connection to the water main pipe including, but not limited to, double strap saddle installation, installation of the corporation stop, connection to the water service line, gate valve with valve box, all excavation, backfill, restoration, pipe fittings or adaptors, testing, flushing, disinfection, and testing of the service connection. Reference Kent Standard Plans 3-10 and 3-11. The unit contract price per each for “Adjust Existing Meter Box to Finished Grade” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to adjust the meter box to final grade at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit contract price per each for “Relocating Water Meter Assembly” constitutes complete compensation for relocation of existing water meter assembly including, but not limited to, removing and cleaning the meter assembly, reinstalling the meter assembly at the location shown on the plans, reconnecting to the service line pipe, all excavation, backfill, restoration, pipe fittings or adaptors, testing, flushing, disinfection and testing of the service connection. The unit contract price per each for “Abandon Existing Water Service” shall be full pay for performing the work as specified including excavation, backfill and compaction. The Contractor shall expose, shut off, and plug the corporation stop at the main, and cap the service line. Bank run gravel, crushed surfacing and asphalt shall be paid under their appropriate contract items. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 32 The unit contract price per linear foot for “Water Service Line Inch Diameter” constitutes complete compensation for the labor, materials, and equipment necessary or incidental to the installation of new water service lines including, but not limited to trench excavation, bedding, laying pipe, fittings and adaptors, connection to existing meters and corporation stops, backfilling, restoration, marking of “tail runs”, testing, flushing, and disinfection. The unit contract price per each for “ Inch Water Meter” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary or incidental to the installation of new water meters including, but not limited to excavation, backfill, fittings and adaptors, testing, flushing and disinfection. The unit contract price per each for “ Inch Meter Setter” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary or incidental to the installation of new meter setters including, but not limited to connecting the service lines, connecting to “tail runs”, excavation, backfill, fittings and adaptors, testing, flushing and disinfection. The unit contract price per each for “Meter Box for Inch Diameter Service” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary or incidental to furnish and install new meter box and cover including, but not limited to excavation, backfill, and setting to grade. The unit contract price per each for “ Inch Compound Meter Assembly” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary or incidental to the installation of the compound meter assembly including, but not limited to excavation, bedding, meter supports, ductile iron pipe, pipe fittings and adaptors, gate valves, water meter, utility vault, connection to the service lateral, connection to the customer’s service line, testing, flushing, and disinfection. 7-17 SANITARY SEWERS SECTION 7-17.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-17.2 Materials All sewer pipe for this project shall be solid wall PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride), SDR 35, conforming to Section 9-05.12(1) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications or ductile iron pipe, Class 50 conforming to Section 9-05.13 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. All sewer pipe fittings shall be of the same materials as the pipe. 7-17.3 Construction Requirements KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 33 SECTION 7-17.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities The Contractor shall have the sole responsibility for providing and maintaining an adequate sewage bypass system through the project for the duration of the sanitary sewer construction. The adequacy of the bypass system shall be determined by the Engineer and corrected by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. The connection between the new sewers and the existing sewer mains shall be plugged and tied off to the top manhole step and left in place until the new piping and the plugged manhole have been cleaned, pressure tested, TV camera inspected, and ready for City Council acceptance. 7-17.3(2) Cleaning and Testing SECTION 7-17.3(2)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-17.3(2)A General All sewer pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove any solids or construction debris that may have entered the pipe during construction by jet cleaning or flush and pigging as approved by the City. The Contractor shall be responsible to insure that material flushed from sewers are trapped, and do not enter the downstream system. The City shall approve the Contractors method prior to cleaning sanitary sewer mains. The rate of flushing shall be such that the flow will not overload the downstream sewers. The flushing of a sewer main tributary to a lift station shall be coordinated with the Operations Division to insure that the lift station is not overloaded. City water used for cleaning sewer lines is not metered, but shall pass through an approved double check valve assembly. SECTION 7-17.3(2)F IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-17.3(2)F Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers Constructed of Non Air Permeable Materials All testing shall be verified by the City Inspector. All sewer mains and appurtenances shall be air pressure tested for leakage in accordance with Section 7-17 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications as modified by the following: Procedure for Air Testing Sanitary Sewer Lines KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 34 For PVC and Ductile Iron Pipe - The Contractor shall furnish all facilities and personnel for conducting the test under the observation of the Engineer. The equipment and personnel shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor may desire to make an air test prior to backfilling for its own purposes. However, the acceptance air test shall be made after backfilling has been completed and compacted. All wyes, tees, or ends of side sewer stubs shall be plugged with flexible-joint caps, or acceptable alternates, securely fastened to withstand the internal test pressures. Such plugs or caps shall be readily removable, and their removal shall provide a socket suitable for making a flexible-jointed lateral connection or extension. Immediately following pipe cleaning, the pipe installation shall be tested with low-pressure air. Air shall be slowly supplied to the plugged pipe installation until the internal air pressure reaches 4.0 pounds per square inch greater than the average back pressure of any ground water that may submerge the pipe. At least two minutes shall be allowed for temperature stabilization before proceeding further. Then, disconnect the air supply and wait until the pressure drops to 3.5 psig greater than the average back pressure of groundwater. The pressure shall be held to the time indicated on the attached tables. Groundwater Pressure p = 0.4332 (z) z = Distance between groundwater surface and centerline of pipe in feet. p = Average back pressure of groundwater above the centerline of the pipe in psi. If the pipe installation fails to meet these requirements, the Contractor shall determine at its own expense the source or sources of leakage, and he shall repair (if the extent and type of repairs proposed by the Contractor appear reasonable to the Engineer) or replace all defective materials or workmanship. The completed pipe installation shall meet the requirements of this test before being considered acceptable. Caution – When air testing adequate bracing is required to hold plugs in place to prevent the sudden release of compressed air. A pressure of 4 psig against an 8-inch plug will cause a force of approximately 200 lbs.; against a 12-inch plug, 450 lbs. The compressed air acts as a spring. Proper precaution must be taken to prevent this force from propelling the plug from the pipe like a bullet. For systems where groundwater is negligible, at the inspector’s discretion, pressure shall be maintained at 4.0 psig with no drop at the time indicated on the attached graphs. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 35 LENGTH OF 6 INCH PIPE (FEET) LENGTH OF 8 INCH PIPE (FEET) 0 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 0 0 18 58 98 38 78 16 0 0 10 50 90 28 68 08 48 56 00 40 80 20 60 00 38 74 72 68 50 12 50 90 30 70 90 86 82 78 00 82 22 60 00 04 98 94 90 86 50 52 92 28 18 10 04 00 96 92 00 22 40 30 22 16 10 04 00 96 50 54 42 34 26 20 14 10 04 02 00 54 44 36 28 22 18 12 08 04 Time in seconds required for decompression from 3.5 psig to 3.0 psig. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 36 LENGTH OF 6 INCH PIPE (FEET) LENGTH OF 10 INCH PIPE (FEET) 0 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 0 0 18 58 98 38 78 16 0 10 50 90 28 68 08 48 84 80 00 20 60 00 38 78 18 20 14 06 50 30 70 10 48 66 54 44 34 28 00 40 80 14 96 82 70 60 50 44 50 50 42 22 06 94 82 72 64 56 00 66 44 28 14 02 92 82 74 66 50 66 48 34 20 08 94 90 82 74 00 66 50 38 26 14 04 96 88 82 Time in seconds required for decompression from 3.5 psig to 3.0 psig. LENGTH OF 6 INCH PIPE (FEET) LENGTH OF 12 INCH PIPE (FEET) 0 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 0 0 18 58 98 38 78 16 0 58 98 38 78 16 56 96 16 08 00 16 56 96 36 76 92 76 64 54 50 76 14 54 66 44 26 10 96 86 00 34 42 12 84 66 50 34 22 10 50 80 50 24 02 82 66 52 40 28 00 80 54 32 12 96 80 66 54 44 50 80 58 38 20 04 90 78 66 56 00 80 60 42 26 12 00 88 76 66 Time in seconds required for decompression from 3.5 psig to 3.0 psig. LENGTH OF 6 INCH PIPE (FEET) KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 37 LENGTH OF 15 INCH PIPE (FEET) 0 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 0 0 18 58 98 38 78 16 0 48 88 26 76 06 46 86 76 62 00 96 34 74 14 24 96 72 52 30 50 42 82 42 04 72 46 24 04 86 00 50 04 66 32 04 80 58 40 24 50 50 12 80 52 26 04 84 66 52 00 50 18 90 66 42 22 04 88 72 50 50 22 98 76 56 36 20 04 90 00 50 26 04 84 66 48 32 18 04 Time in seconds required for decompression from 3.5 psig to 3.0 psig. LENGTH OF 6 INCH PIPE (FEET) LENGTH OF 18 INCH PIPE (FEET) 0 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 0 0 18 58 98 38 78 16 0 56 96 36 76 14 54 66 44 26 00 12 52 92 94 48 10 80 54 32 50 020 52 96 50 10 78 48 22 00 00 020 68 22 84 50 20 94 70 48 50 020 78 40 06 76 50 26 04 84 00 020 84 52 22 96 72 50 30 10 50 020 90 60 16 12 90 68 50 32 00 020 92 68 44 22 02 84 66 50 Time in seconds required for decompression from 3.5 psig to 3.0 psig. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 38 LENGTH OF 6 INCH PIPE (FEET) LENGTH OF 24 INCH PIPE (FEET) 0 00 50 00 50 00 50 00 0 0 18 58 98 38 78 16 0 34 74 12 52 92 94 48 10 80 00 268 246 156 082 020 68 22 84 50 50 360 282 214 156 106 060 020 84 52 00 360 300 246 200 156 118 082 050 020 50 360 312 268 228 190 156 124 096 068 00 360 320 282 246 214 184 156 130 106 50 360 324 292 262 232 206 180 156 134 00 360 330 300 272 246 222 200 178 156 Time in seconds required for decompression from 3.5 psig to 3.0 psig. SECTION 7-17.3(2)H IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection All new sanitary sewer extensions shall be TV camera inspected by the City Operations Division prior to acceptance. All construction must be completed and approved by the inspector prior to the TV inspection. All manholes shall be channeled, and grade rings set in place prior to TV inspection by the City. The casting and top grade ring, do not have to be mudded in until after the final grade is established. SECTION 7-17.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-17.3(2)I Vacuum Testing of Sanitary Manholes All new sanitary sewer manholes shall be vacuum tested by the City Operations Division prior to acceptance to ensure it is air-tight and not susceptible to infiltration. On projects with more than one manhole, the Contractor shall have all of the manholes ready for testing prior to scheduling the air-testing with the project inspector. Manholes will not be considered ready for testing until all grouting has been performed and the frame and cover have been grouted in place. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure all manholes are ready for testing prior to scheduling the testing through the inspector. Manholes not ready for testing shall receive a failing mark and a re-test shall be scheduled through the inspector once the manhole is ready. All retests after failure shall be at the Contractor’s expense. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 39 The Contractor shall bear all costs for correction of deficiencies found during the vacuum testing, including the actual or overtime costs of city crew for additional vacuum testing to verify the correction of deficiencies. SECTION 7-17.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-17.5 Payment “PVC Sewer Pipe, Inch Diameter” “Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe, Inch Diameter Class 52 Unlined” The unit contract price per lineal foot for the above items shall be complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install the pipe at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The bid item price includes but is not limited to: trench excavation; unsuitable material excavation, hauling, dewatering; backfill and compaction (when native material is to be used), surface restoration, and cleanup. The bid price shall also include fittings, wyes, tees, plugs, and joint materials; connection to new or existing manholes and pipes, air testing; coordination for TV inspection, additional costs for overtime work when working on other than normal working hours, and any sewage bypass systems used. 7-18 SIDE SEWERS 7-18.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 7-18.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-18.3(1) General For new construction the Engineer will contact all property owners in advance of any construction of either lateral or side sewers, and shall, for the convenience of the Contractor, locate them in the field. Such locations shall be marked by a stake or other suitable marker. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating a “tee” in the main line opposite each marker and shall construct a side sewer to terminate, as nearly as practical at the property line or permanent easement line as shown on the plans. All side sewers shall terminate as specified above and shall be capped and blocked to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the event the side sewer is a common side sewer, each branch shall be made and capped as described above. SECTION 7-18.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 7-18.3(6) Existing Side Sewers KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 7 PAGE 40 For sewer replacement projects where side sewer locations have not been indicated on the plans, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to field verify the location of existing side sewers. Also, the Contractor shall verify the actual location of existing side sewers that are indicated on the plans. Once the existing side sewer is exposed, the Contractor shall field inspect the side sewers to determine the size and type of pipe and then furnish the required pipe, adaptors, couplings and fittings that are necessary to make the reconnections. All openings to any abandoned side sewer that is exposed during construction, shall be plugged by the Contractor. The plug shall be watertight and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. SECTION 7-18.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 7-18.5 Payment The unit contract price per lineal foot for the side sewer pipe of the various kind and size specified shall be complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install the pipe at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The bid item price includes but is not limited to: trench excavation; unsuitable material excavation, hauling, dewatering; backfill and compaction (when native material is to be used), surface restoration, and cleanup. The bid price shall also include fittings, wyes, tees, plugs, and joint materials; connection to new or existing manholes and pipes, air testing; vacuum testing coordination for TV inspection, additional costs for overtime work when working on weekends, and any sewage bypass systems used. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 1 DIVISION 8 – MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION 8-01 EROSION CONTROL AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL SECTION 8-01.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.1 Description This work consists of temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures (TESCP) as shown on the construction plans, specified in these Kent Special Provisions, and ordered by the Engineer as work proceeds. The TESCP are intended to minimize erosion and sedimentation as well as protect waters of the state and the city’s municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4) as required by law. SECTION 8-01.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.2 Materials Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections of the Kent Special Provisions and the WSDOT Standard Specifications: Tackifier .............................. 8-01.3(2)E and 9-14.5(7) Seed ................................... 8-02.3(9)B and 9-14.3 Fertilizer .............................. 8-02.3(9)B and 9-14.4 Mulch and Amendments ......... 8-02.3(11)A and 9-14.5 8-01.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-01.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(1) General Preventing and controlling pollution, erosion, runoff, and related damage requires the Contractor to install temporary stormwater best management practices (BMPs) as per the plans and as directed by the City. As site conditions dictate, additional BMPs may be required. The Contractor shall anticipate the need for additional best management practices and propose necessary changes to the City. Should the Contractor fail to install the required temporary erosion and sediment control (TESC) measures or to perform maintenance in a timely manner, or fail to take immediate action to install additional approved measures, all fines, cost of cleanup, costs for delays and down time shall be borne by the Contractor. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 2 All cost for this work shall be paid for under the unit contract bid prices. The upgrading of the TESCP facilities shall not constitute a basis for additional working days for this project. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of two working days’ notice prior to clearing adjacent to any wetland, creek or other sensitive area. During the construction period, no disturbance beyond the flagged clearing limits shall be permitted. The flagging shall be maintained by the Contractor for the duration of construction. The TESC facilities shall be in accordance with and conform to the Kent Surface Water Design Manual, the WSDOT Standards Specifications, and the Ecology Construction Stormwater General Permit (if applicable), except as modified by the Kent Design and Construction Standards or these Kent Special Provisions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the City at once of any TESC deficiencies or changes in conditions such as rutting and or erosion that may occur during construction. The Contractor may recommend possible solutions to the Engineer in order to resolve any problems that are occurring. The requirements of this section shall apply to all areas of the site subject to construction activity as described in the WSDOT Standard Specifications, the Kent Special Provisions and contract plans, including Contractor construction support facilities, Contractor personnel parking areas, equipment and material storage/laydown areas, and other areas utilized by the Contractor for completion of the work. Nothing in this section shall relieve the Contractor from complying with other contract requirements. SECTION 8-01.3(1)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(1)A Submittals Prior to the start of any construction activities, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s review and approval, the following, as necessitated by the work: 1. Dewatering Plan 2. Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan 3. Stream Bypass Plan for in-water work 4. Name and contact info for Contractor’s CESCL SECTION 8-01.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 8-01.3(1)F Applicable Regulations and Criteria All construction activities are subject to applicable federal, state, and local permits. The Contractor shall comply with requirements of KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 3 applicable state and local regulatory requirements, including, but not limited to the following: 1. WAC 173-201A Water Quality Standards for Surface Waters of the State of Washington 2. RCW 90.48.080 Discharge of pollutants in waters prohibited 3. City of Kent 2017 Surface Water Design Manual 4. Construction Stormwater General Permit – WA Department of Ecology 8-01.3(1)G Water Quality Monitoring Sampling of site stormwater discharges is only required if the project is covered under the WA Department of Ecology Construction Stormwater General Permit or if there is a suspected discharge that exceeds state water quality standards. If the project is covered under the Construction Stormwater General Permit, then the Contractor shall conduct sampling as per the conditions listed in the permit. Any results that are outside the appropriate range of compliance will require immediate implementation of adaptive management as outlined in applicable permits, stormwater pollution prevention plan, and as directed by the Engineer. All sampling records shall be submitted to the Engineer by the last day of the monitoring period. All necessary adaptive management requirements shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to implement and maintain. All costs for this work shall be included in the various unit contract bid prices. SECTION 8-01.3(2)E IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(2)E Tackifiers Unless specified otherwise, wood cellulose fiber mulch per Section 9-14(5)10 of the Standard Specifications shall have tackifier incorporated into the mulch fiber during manufacture. If additional tackifier is required, the tackifier shall be organic tackifier as specified in Section 9-14.5(7)A of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. When specified, tackifiers shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 8-01.3(9) Sediment Control Barriers SECTION 8-01.3(9)D IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.3(9)D Inlet Protection KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 4 Cleaning and maintenance of inlet protection shall not flush sediment, or sediment-laden water into the downstream system. SECTION 8-01.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 8-01.3(17) Vehicle Maintenance and Storage Handling and storage of fuel, oil and chemicals shall not take place within 50 feet of waterways. Storage shall be in dike tanks and barrels with drip pans provided under the dispensing area. Shut-off and lock valves shall be provided on hoses. Fuel, oil, and chemicals shall be dispensed only during daylight hours unless approved by the engineer. Fencing shall be provided around storage area. Locks shall be provided on all valves, pumps, and tanks. Materials used to clean up fuel, oil, and chemical spills shall be disposed of as directed by the engineer. Water used for washing vehicles and equipment shall not be allowed to enter storm drains or other State waters. No processed waste water(s) of any kind shall be discharged onto the ground, to surface waters, or to stormwater conveyance systems. SECTION 8-01.5(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-01.5(2) Payment The unit contract price per acre for “Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching” shall be full pay for all labor, materials tools and equipment necessary to complete the above said hydroseeding, seeding, fertilizing and mulching at the locations shown on the plans, including the following areas: 1. All planter areas or areas disturbed by the Contractor's operations behind the sidewalk, even where it is only a narrow strip. 2. All biofiltration swales. 3. Detention pond site. 4. Other areas as directed by the Engineer. Water, fertilizer and mulch shall be provided by the Contractor as necessary to maintain and establish the seeded areas and is considered incidental to this bid item. Topsoil Type B is considered incidental to this bid item unless a specific bid item is listed in the proposal. The cost of baffling or blocking over spray as required to prevent over spray onto the sidewalk, curbing and non-planter areas is incidental to the unit price. The unit bid price per lineal foot for “Filter Fabric Fence” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, tools, materials, supplies and equipment necessary to construct and install the fence as shown on the plans, including fabric, posts and gravel to anchor fabric. This bid item also includes: maintenance throughout the project; and removal and KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 5 disposal of the fence and accumulated sediment as directed by the Engineer. The unit contract price per each for “Inlet Protection” shall be full pay for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to construct, maintain, and remove when no longer required, this temporary erosion control measure. No other further compensation will be made. The unit bid price per square yard for “Straw Mulch” constitutes complete compensation for all materials, tools, labor and equipment required for applying straw mulch on exposed soils for erosion control as directed by the Engineer. Straw shall be in an air-dried condition, and free of noxious weeds and other materials detrimental to plant life. The unit price per square yard for “Clear Plastic Covering” (6 mil polyethylene sheets) shall constitute complete compensation for furnishing, staking, maintaining and protecting, the material in place (including sand bags and stakes) on all exposed soils per the WSDOT Standard Specification and as directed by the Engineer. The unit contract price per hour for “ESC Lead” shall be full pay for all duties outlined in Section 8-01.3(1)B (Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Lead) in per hour increments. The unit contract lump sum price for “Temporary Sediment Trap” shall be full pay for furnishing all labor, tools and equipment necessary to construct, maintain, and restore to final grade this erosion control measure. No other further compensation will be made. The unit contract price per lump sum for “Stormwater Pond” shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools and supplies and equipment necessary to construct the stormwater pond as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This includes but is not limited to, excavation of bottom surface area and grading to required elevation, off site haul of unsuitable material, compaction, cultivation, and construction of berms. Construction and seeding of the pond shall be performed early in the sequence of the project such that when the pond is seeded and stabilized, as determined by the Engineer, it will be available for stormwater collection, storage and treatment during construction. Seeding shall be paid for under the appropriate bid item. The unit contract price per each for “Flow Control Structure, Type 2 Inch Diameter” shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install the flow control structure as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The unit bid price shall include but not be limited to: metal pipe, shear gate, restrictor plate, elbow restrictor, frames, grates, lids, vertical bars for the emergency overflow spillway, steps KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 6 and ladders, all connections, brackets and gaskets for a complete and fully operational system. The unit contract price per force account for “Tanker Truck” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to provide and maintain the tanker truck for stormwater collection, storage and disposal. The unit contract price per force account for “Baker Tank” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to provide, maintain, and remove the baker tank for stormwater storage and disposal. The unit contract price per force account for “Sand Filtration System” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to operate and maintain the sand filtration system. 8-02 ROADSIDE RESTORATION SECTION 8-02.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.1 Description Drawings and Specifications: Definitions: The word “provide” means “furnish and install” (for landscaping only). Dimensions and Measurements: Dimensions govern when shown. Scale is approximate. Contractor shall check all dimensions in the field and verify them with respect to adjacent or incorporated work. Any discrepancies in the drawings shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer before work proceeds further. Number of Specified Items Required: Wherever in these Kent Special Provisions an article, device or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall include as many such items as are shown on drawings or required to complete the installation. SECTION 8-02.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 8-02.1(1) Submittals The Contractor shall submit within 20 days after Notice to Proceed date a list of all plant material indicating source of supply, order invoice, size and quantity for such species or variety. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 7 All plant materials shall meet requirements of State and Federal laws with respect to inspection for plant diseases and infestations. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plant material and submitted to the Engineer. SECTION 8-02.2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.2 Materials Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections: Topsoil Type A, Type B, and Type C ... 9-14.2(1), (2), (3) Seed ............................................. 9-14.3 Fertilizer ........................................ 9-14.4 Mulch and Amendments ................... 9-14.5 Wood Cellulose Fiber ....................... 9-14.5(10) Erosion Control Devices ................... 9-14.6 Plant Materials ................................ 9-14.7 Street Trees ................................... 9-14.7(1)A Stakes, Guys and Wrapping .............. 9-14.8 Tree Ties ....................................... 9-14.8(1) Water for Plants .............................. 9-25.2 Botanical identification and nomenclature of plant materials shall be based on descriptions by Bailey in “Hortus Third” or superseding editions and amendments. 8-02.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-02.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(1) Responsibility During Construction The Contractor shall at all times keep the planted areas free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish. Upon completion of the planting work, the Contractor shall immediately remove all refuse and debris resulting from the planting activities. The project will not receive either preliminary or final approval if the cleanup does not meet with the approval of the Engineer. SECTION 8-02.3(3) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(3) Weed and Pest Control During the maintenance period, all weeds are to be removed by hand. SECTION 8-02.3(5)A IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(5)A Seeding Area Preparation KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 8 The Contractor shall excavate planting pits to a depth of three feet below the top of adjacent sidewalks, or adjacent ground if trees are not being planted in sidewalk cutouts. Tree pits shall be about three feet in diameter, and shall be neat and uniform basins around each tree. The Contractor shall then place special planting mixture into the tree basins, bringing to grade about one and one-half foot below the top of the planter by compaction by repeated watering. Refer to Section 8-02.3(4) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. SECTION 8-02.3(7) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(7) Layout of Planting, Lawn and Seeding Areas The location of plantings shall be according to the landscaping details, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall layout tree, shrub and herbaceous plant locations and receive the approval of the Engineer before planting begins. SECTION 8-02.3(8) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(8) Planting All plants shall be carefully placed in excavated holes to prevent damage to fibrous root systems during placement and backfilling operations, with burlap or container removed. Plants shall be set vertically in the center of the pits, backfilled with native soil, watered and settled so that the crown of the root ball will have the same relation to finished grade as it bore to the grade of the ground from which it was dug. All street trees shall be planted in general conformance to Kent Standard Plan 6-55. SECTION 8-02.3(8)C IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(8)C Pruning, Staking, Guying, and Wrapping Pruning shall be limited to the minimum amount necessary to remove injured twigs and branches. Only cut injured limbs to the nearest lateral bud. Do not apply tree wound paint or petroleum product to tree cuts. The Contractor shall use root ball bracing (triangle method) rather than staking or guying to support new trees. 8-02.3(9) Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching SECTION 8-02.3(9)A IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIRST THREE PARAGRAPHS AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(9)A Dates for Application of Seed KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 9 Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the final application of seeding, fertilizing, and mulching of slopes shall be performed during the following periods: West of the summit of the Cascade Range - March 1 to May 15 and August 15 to October 1. Where contract timing is appropriate, seeding, fertilizing, and mulching shall be accomplished during the spring period listed above. Written permission to seed after October 1 will only be given when physical completion of the project is imminent and the environmental conditions are conducive to satisfactory growth. SECTION 8-02.3(9)B IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(9)B Seeding and Fertilizing Topsoil and all other unpaved and unsodded areas within easements and right-of-way disturbed as part of this project shall be seeded. Hydroseeding shall be the method of seed application. Hydroseed shall consist of a slurry composed of water, seed, fertilizer, tackifier, and mulch and shall be evenly broadcast over areas to be seeded. All work shall conform in all respects to Section 8-01 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as modified herein. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 48 hours in advance of any hydroseeding operation and shall not begin the work until areas prepared or designated for hydroseeding have been approved. Following the Engineer's approval, hydroseeding of the approved slopes shall begin immediately. Hydroseeding shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise untillable. Hydroseed mixture to be applied by an approved hydro seeder which utilizes water as the carrying agent, and maintains continuous agitation through paddle blades. It shall have an operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend, and mix into a homogeneous slurry the specified amount of seed and water or other material. Distribution and discharge lines shall be large enough to prevent stoppage and shall be equipped with a set of hydraulic discharge spray nozzles that will provide a uniform distribution of the slurry. The seed and fertilizer cannot be placed in the tank more than 30 minutes prior to application. The seed and fertilizer shall have a tracer added to visibly aid uniform application. This tracer shall not be harmful to plant and animal life. If wood cellulose fiber is used as a tracer, the application rate shall not exceed 25 pounds per acre. Areas where hydroseeding is not practical, must be seeded by approved hand methods as approved by the engineer. When seeding by hand, Contractor shall incorporate seed into the top 1/4 inch of soil. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 10 The hydroseed slurry shall consist of the following materials mixed thoroughly together and applied in the quantities indicated. 1.Grass Seed: Mixture shall be fresh, clean, new crop seed. Seed to be mixed mechanically on the site or may be mixed by the dealer. If seed is mixed on site, each variety shall be delivered in the original containers bearing the dealer’s guaranteed analysis. If seed is mixed by the dealer, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer the Dealer’s guaranteed statement of the composition of the mixture and the percentage of purity and germination of each variety. Grass seed shall be purchased from a recognized distributor and shall be composed of the varieties mixed in the proportions indicated in the WSDOT Standard Specifications and Kent Special Provisions. Seed shall meet the minimum percentages of purity and germination specified in Section 9-14.3 of the Kent Special Provisions. Seed shall be applied at the rate of 120 pounds per acre. The Contractor shall protect seed from hydration, contamination, and heating during delivery, storage, and handling. Seed shall be stored in a cool dry location away from contaminants. Mix A shall be used as the standard hydroseed mix unless otherwise specified herein or on approved project plans. Mix B shall be used exclusively for seeded areas adjacent to grass lawns, within seeded medians, and within seeded traffic islands. In addition, Mix B shall be used for all seeded areas not specifically showing Mix A on the plans, or where otherwise directed by the Engineer. 2.Water: The Contractor shall begin maintenance immediately after seeding for a minimum of ten (10) weeks or longer as needed. Water seeded areas before hydroseed slurry has completely dried out. Water slowly and thoroughly with fine spray nozzle. Water the hydroseeded areas at least twice daily (in the early morning and late afternoon) until the grass is well established as determined by the Engineer. Repeat watering operation as required by climatic conditions to keep areas moist for a minimum period of 2 weeks from the day of first watering and as necessary for healthy growth. 3.Mulch: As needed to meet requirements of Sections 8-01.3(11)A and 9-14.5. 4.Fertilizer: All areas which are seeded shall receive fertilizer of the following proportions and formulation applied at the rate of 400 pounds per acre. All areas which are seeded shall receive fertilizer meeting the requirements of Section 9-14.4 of the Kent Special Provisions. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 11 Fertilizer shall not be applied on any creek sideslopes in order to avoid contamination of these creeks. 5. Hand Seeding: Seeding shall be applied at the rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet. The seed shall be applied by an approved hand held spreader. The seed shall be evenly distributed over the disturbed area. Apply seed mix after fertilizing and rake the seed into the surface soil to a depth of 1/4-inch. 6. If the slurry is used for temporary erosion control it shall be applied at the following rates: EROSION CONTROL: Seed 170 lbs/acre of “Mix A” unless otherwise directed by Engineer. Fertilizer 400 lbs/acre Wood Fiber 2,000 lbs/ acre Tackifier 80 lbs/acre SECTION 8-02.3(9)D IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(9)D Inspection Inspection of seeded areas shall be made upon completion of seeding operations, at the end of the maintenance period, and at any time during the maintenance period. The Contractor shall reseed, re-mulch or re-fertilize as required to establish a uniform, thick stand of grass. A uniform stand of grass shall be defined as any grass area with no spots greater than one square foot. Areas failing to show a uniform thick, healthy stand of grass after the maintenance period shall be reseeded consistent with the Kent Special Provisions at the Contractor's expense. Reseeded areas will be subject to inspection for acceptance. SECTION 8-02.3(9)E IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(9)E Protection and Care of Seeded Areas Protect adjacent property, public walks, curbs and pavement from damage. Do not place soil directly on paved surfaces. Locate all underground utilities prior to the commencement of work. Keep streets and area drains open and free flowing. Protect all seeding against wind, storm, and trespassing. Replace any plants that become damaged or injured. In seeded areas, treat and reseed damaged spots larger than one square foot. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 12 SECTION 8-02.3(11)A IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(11)A Mulch for Seeding Areas Wood cellulose fiber mulch conforming to Section 9-14.5(10) of the Standard Specifications shall be used where mulch is called for on this project. The application rate shall be 2,000 pounds to the acre in accordance with Section 8-01 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Mulch shall be incorporated into the slurry of seed and fertilizer. Mulch of the type specified in Section 9-14.5 shall be included in the hydroseeding process. Wood cellulose fiber used as a mulch shall be suitable for application with hydroseeders as specified in Section 8-01.3(9)B. The application of seed, fertilizer, and mulch shall be required in a single operation for all seed applications, unless otherwise directed. Mulch materials, shall be furnished, hauled, and evenly applied at the rates indicated, and shall be spread on seeded areas immediately after seeding unless otherwise specified. Distribution of straw mulch material shall be by means of an approved type mulch spreader, which utilizes forced air to blow mulch material on seeded areas. In spreading straw mulch, the spreader shall not cut or break the straw into short stalks. Straw mulch shall be applied at a rate to achieve a loose, overall thickness of three (3) inches. Areas not accessible by mulching equipment shall be mulched by approved hand methods and shall achieve similar results. Mulch sprayed on signs or sign structures shall be removed the same day. SECTION 8-02.3(11)B IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-02.3(11)B Wood Chip Mulch Revise all references in this section from bark or wood chip mulch to “wood chip mulch.” Add “A sample of the wood chip mulch shall be provided to the Engineer or project Ecologist in a 1-gallon re-closable bag at least seven (7) days prior to application.” SECTION 8-02.3(13) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment The Contractor is responsible for maintaining all trees and shrubs in a clean and thriving condition for a period of not less than two calendar years. The period of maintenance shall begin upon final installation and KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 13 inspection of work, and subsequent written notification by the Engineer. Maintenance shall include all necessary cleaning, weeding, pruning, watering, and one supplemental feeding with approved fertilizer. The Contractor shall water all trees and shrubs a minimum of once per week during the months of June through September to establish the vegetation during the dry summer months. Maintenance of this watering schedule is critical to the survival of the trees and shrubs. SECTION 8-02.3(14) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.3(14) Plant Replacement The Contractor shall replace all trees and shrubs which, in the opinion of the City Nursery Supervisor, have failed to establish themselves during the maintenance period at its sole expense. All replacement planting shall be conducted in conformance to these specifications. SECTION 8-02.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 8-02.3(17) Plant and Site Protection During Entire Construction Period The Contractor shall: 1. Protect existing trees to remain and new plants against injury and damage, including but not limited to: cutting, breaking, or skinning of roots, trunk or branches, or smothering by stockpiling construction material, or compaction by equipment. 2. Keep all heavy equipment (e.g., backhoe) outside of the drip lines of all existing trees, so as not to damage the root systems. 3. Notify Engineer immediately if a conflict arises between construction activity and the protection of trees and shrubs; alter methods as necessary and as approved by the Engineer. SECTION 8-02.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-02.5 Payment The unit contract price per each for “Street Tree Planting and Staking” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for planting and staking street trees in accordance with the plans and the Kent Special Provisions. This item includes but is not limited to root barriers, mulch, fertilizer, watering, water tubes, planting mixture, tree ties and stakes, and for watering and maintaining trees for a period of not less than two calendar years. The unit contract price per cubic yard for “Topsoil Type A” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to supply and spread the topsoil in the areas shown on the plans, or where directed by the Engineer. This item includes but is not KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 14 limited to the labor required for raking and compacting the topsoil, cleanup and complete preparation ready for seeding. The unit contract price per cubic yard for “Wood Chip Mulch” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to supply and spread the wood chip mulch in the areas shown on the plans, or where directed by the Engineer. This item includes but is not limited to the labor required for raking the wood chip mulch and cleanup. 8-04 CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SPILLWAYS 8-04.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-04.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-04.3(1) Cement Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Spillways The City will provide control staking in accordance with Section 1-05.8(6) of the Kent Special Provisions. If the curb and gutter flow line is found to deviate from the flow line shown on the plans by more than 0.03 foot, the Contractor shall remove the faulty section of curb and gutter and replace it with a new section meeting specifications. The removal and replacement shall be at no cost to the City. SECTION 8-04.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-04.5 Payment “Asphalt Extruded Curb” “Pedestrian Curb” “Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter” “Cement Concrete Extruded Curb” The unit contract price per linear foot for the above items shall be considered complete compensation for all materials, labor, tools and equipment required to install the curbs in accordance with the plans, specifications and as directed by the Engineer. 8-06 CEMENT CONCRETE DRIVEWAY ENTRANCES SECTION 8-06.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-06.3 Construction Requirements Cement Concrete Driveways shall be installed at the locations indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer. See Kent Standard Plan 6-43. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 15 Cement concrete driveways and associated cement concrete curb drops shall be constructed using a 3-day mix. In addition, the Contractor shall immediately implement temporary provisions for access so that no driveway is out of service. Also the Contractor shall not simultaneously work on more than one driveway serving a property. SECTION 8-06.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-06.5 Payment The unit contract price per square yard for “Cement Concrete Driveway, 6 Inch Depth” constitutes complete compensation for all materials, labor and equipment required to install 6” thick cement concrete driveway in accordance with the plans and specifications. Reference Kent Standard Plan 6-42. The unit contract price per square yard for “Cement Concrete Driveway, 8 Inch Depth, Reinforced” constitutes complete compensation for all materials, labor and equipment required to install 8” thick cement concrete driveway in accordance with the plans and specifications. Reinforcing steel in the driveway shall be included in this bid item. Reference Kent Standard Plan 6-43. 8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS SECTION 8-09.1 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-09.1 Description This work shall consist of furnishing, and installing new pavement markers of the type specified in the plans upon the roadway surface in accordance with applicable Kent Standard Plans and/or WSDOT Standard Plans at locations shown in the Contract or as directed by the Engineer. Removal of existing pavement markers shall be included in the unit bid price for this item unless otherwise specified. Unless otherwise noted, pavement markings shall be installed in strict conformance to Kent Standard Plans 6-73 and/or 6-74. 8-09.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-09.3(1) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-09.3(1) Preliminary Spotting The Engineer will provide control points at the locations and intervals determined necessary by the City to assist in preliminary spotting of the lines before the placement of raised pavement markers begins. The Contractor shall be responsible for preliminary spotting of the lines to be marked. Approval by the Engineer is required before the placement of raised pavement markers begins. Preliminary spotting to guide the placement of raised pavement markers is required for all longitudinal lines. Preliminary spotting for each lane of raised pavement markers KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 16 shall be provided at transition points required by Kent Standard Plan 6-73, RPM Substitution Patterns. SECTION 8-09.3(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-09.3(2) Surface Preparation In removing raised pavement markers and plastic traffic buttons, the Contractor shall: 1. Haul broken-up pieces of raised pavement markers, plastic traffic buttons and all waste material to an off-project site, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, or permitted by the Kent Special Provisions. 2. Remove all sand, or other waste materials deposited on the pavement, or within the City’s stormwater management system, as a result of the removal process selected by the Contractor. 3. Install temporary lane markings at their sole expense, unless the street is going to be remarked, or overlaid immediately after the completed removal of raised pavement markers and/or plastic traffic buttons. 4. Take suitable care so as not to damage the underlying pavement surface more than necessary, clean all underlying pavement, including the complete removal of all remaining adhesive, and fill any surface voids caused by the removal work. SECTION 8-09.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-09.4 Measurement When shown as lump sum in the plans or in the Proposal as removal of raised pavement markers and plastic traffic markings, no specific unit of measurement will apply, but measurement will be for the sum total of all items for a complete removal of the subject items. SECTION 8-09.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-09.5 Payment The lump sum contract price for “Removal of Raised Pavement Markers and Painted and/or Thermoplastic Traffic Markings” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to remove and dispose of the raised pavement markers and painted and/or thermoplastic traffic markings as described in the specifications or as directed by the Engineer. 8-12 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND WIRE FENCE SECTION 8-12.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 17 8-12.1 Description This work shall consist of installing, adjusting, removing, relocating, replacing or restoring existing property fences of all types specified in accordance with the plans, these specifications, and in reasonably close conformity with the line staked by the Engineer. 8-12.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-12.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-12.3(1) Chain Link Fence and Gates Existing fences and gates shall be restored to their former condition or to that condition acceptable to the Engineer. New materials shall meet the requirements shown in the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Security fence shall meet WSDOT Standard Plan L-40.20-01; Glare Screen Type 2 (black, vinyl coated chain link with slats) with 3 strands of black vinyl coated wire with galvanized barbs. Includes 18” wide, 6” thick, concrete mow strip with medium brush finish. SECTION 8-12.3(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-12.3(2) Wire Fence and Gates Existing wire fence and gates shall be restored to their former condition or to that condition acceptable to the Engineer. New materials shall be in general conformance to the requirements of Section 8-12 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. SECTION 8-12.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-12.4 Measurement Remove and relocate fence shall be measured by the linear foot of relocated fence, along the ground line, exclusive of openings. Gates shall be included in the fence measurement. Temporary fencing shall be measured by the linear foot of temporary fence, along the ground line exclusive of openings. Gates shall be included in the fence measurement. Remove and restore fence shall be measured along that portion of the fence which must be removed in order to perform necessary work. Measurement for payment will be between the closest posts which remain undisturbed by the work. Restoration of fence beyond the stated limits is incidental to and included in the measured length defined KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 18 above. If the Contractor removed additional fence for its convenience, restoration of the additional length of fence shall be at its sole expense. SECTION 8-12.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-12.5 Payment “Remove Fence,” per linear foot. “Remove and Relocate Fence,” per linear foot. “Remove and Restore Fence,” per linear foot. “Temporary Fencing,” per linear foot. “Install New Fence,” per linear foot. “Install New Chain Link Fence,” per linear foot. 8-13 MONUMENT CASES SECTION 8-13.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-13.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per each for “Adjust Existing Monument, Case and Cover to Finished Grade” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to adjust the monument, case, and cover to final finished grade as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This work includes but shall not be limited to: referencing for future locates prior to overlay, excavating, backfilling, compacting, surfacing and restoration. Any adjustments made prior to the final finished elevation shall be considered incidental to this bid item. Reference Kent Standard Plan 6-72. The unit contract price per each for “Install New Monument, Case and Cover to Finished Grade” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to install the new monument, case, and cover to finished grade as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This work includes but shall not be limited to: excavating, backfilling, compacting, surfacing and restoration. Reference Kent Standard Plan 6-72. 8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS SECTION 8-14.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-14.1 Description KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 19 This work shall also consist of constructing wheel chair ramps at all street intersections, curb return driveways, or other locations in accordance with these specifications and in reasonable close conformity to the dimensions and cross-sections shown in the plans and to the lines and grades as staked by the Engineer. 8-14.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-14.3(3) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-14.3(3) Placing and Finishing Concrete The concrete shall be placed in the forms and struck off with an approved straightedge. As soon as the surface can be worked, it shall be troweled smooth with a steel trowel. After troweling and before installing the contraction joints or perimeter edging, the walking surfaces of the sidewalk and ramps shall be brushed in a traverse direction with a stiff bristled broom. The curb face and top on the monolithic cement concrete curb and sidewalk and the cement concrete sidewalk with raised edge shall be smooth. Expansion and contraction joints shall be constructed as shown in the Standard plans. When the sidewalk abuts a cement concrete curb or curb and gutter, the expansion joints in the sidewalk shall have the same spacing as the curb. The expansion joint shall be filled to full cross-section of the sidewalk with 3/8-inch premolded joint filler. Sidewalk ramps shall be of the type specified in the plans. The detectable warning pattern shall have the truncated dome shape shown in the Standard Plans and may be formed by either embossing the wet concrete, adding a manufactured material after the concrete has cured, or installing masonry or ceramic tiles. When masonry or ceramic tiles are used, the Contractor shall block out the detectable warning pattern area to the depth required for installation of the tiles and finish the construction of the concrete ramp. After the concrete has set and the forms have been removed, the Contractor shall install the tiles using standard masonry practices. The two-foot wide detectable warning pattern area on the ramp shall be yellow and shall match the color of “Standard Interstate Yellow” paint as specified in Formula K-2-83. Yellow masonry paint for precast curbs, Formula H-3-83, may be used for truncated dome patterns embossed into the concrete surface. SECTION 8-14.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-14.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1 for the following bid items when included in the Proposal: “Cement Concrete Sidewalk,” per square yard “Cement Concrete Sidewalk Ramp Type ,” per each KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 20 The unit bid per square yard or per each for the above items constitutes complete compensation for all materials, labor, tools and equipment necessary to install cement concrete sidewalk and wheelchair ramps as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the Kent Special Provisions. The unit price shall include but not be limited to: restoration of areas adjacent to sidewalks and ramps that are disturbed from sidewalk forms; and all other materials, labor, tools and equipment to fulfill the requirements or as directed by the Engineer. Crushed Surfacing Top Course and Asphalt Concrete Pavement Patch, Excavation and Gravel Borrow as required shall be paid for under separate bid items. Unit price shall also include all work necessary to discontinue sidewalk panels at locations of existing power poles. Contractor shall note that some power poles will need to remain in- place until completion of the electrical conversion. This bid item shall include all costs associated with discontinuing sidewalk at pole locations, remobilization after pole removal, and completion of sidewalk system. 8-18 MAILBOX SUPPORT SECTION 8-18.3 IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-18.3 Construction Requirements THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: The existing mailboxes are to be relocated to accommodate the new construction. Within 24 hours of being removed, existing mailboxes shall be reset at a temporary or permanent location. See Kent Standard Plan 6-70. THE THIRD PARAGRAPH IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: New mailbox supports which are not to be installed within sidewalks or walkways, shall be backfilled with adjacent native material and compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Mailbox supports which are to be installed within sidewalks or walkways shall be enclosed within 8 inch diameter PVC sleeves and then backfilled with adjacent native material and compacted to the satisfaction of the engineer. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 21 8-20 ILLUMINATION, TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS, INTELLIGENT TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS, AND ELECTRICAL SECTION 8-20.1 IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-20.1 Description THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS REVISED TO READ AS FOLLOWS: Unless otherwise noted in the plans, the locations of traffic signal poles, controller cabinets, and street light standards are exact. The locations of junction boxes, conduits and similar appurtenances shown in the plans are approximate; and the proposed locations will be staked or similarly marked by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 8-20.2 Materials SECTION 8-20.2(1) IS REVISED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO PARAGRAPH 3, FOLLOWING ITEM 2: 8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings 3. Photometric curve data provided in electronic format IES format files provided on a 3 1/2 inch diskette or CD-ROM disk. 4. Photometric calculations showing that the proposed luminaire meets the minimum street lighting requirements of the City. 5. Catalog Cuts and/or ordering information clearly showing selected luminaire options. 8-20.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-20.3(5) IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-20.3(5) Conduit THE SECOND PARAGRAPH IS REPLACED IN ITS ENTIRETY WITH THE FOLLOWING: The size of conduit used shall be that size shown in the plans. Conduits smaller than 2-inch electrical trade size shall not be used. No conduit run shall exceed 225 degree total bends in any run without prior approval of the Engineer. THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH IS ADDED AFTER THE SECOND PARAGRAPH: The Contractor shall install 1/4 inch diameter nylon pull rope in all conduit runs. A tracer wire terminating within junction boxes shall be installed in all conduits intended for future use. The tracer wire shall be uninsulated #8 AWG stranded copper. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 22 THE FOLLOWING CHANGES APPLY TO THE NUMBERED ITEMS FOLLOWING THE WORDS “Galvanized steel conduit shall be installed at the following locations:” Item 1. Change to read “All State highway roadbed crossings” Item 3. Contents are deleted, leaving it BLANK THE THIRD PARAGRAPH OF SECTION 8-20.3(8) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-20.3(8) Wiring All splices in underground illumination circuits and induction loops circuits shall be installed within junction boxes. The only splice allowed in induction loop circuits shall be the splice connecting the induction loop lead in conductors to the shielded home run cable. Splices for illumination circuits, including two way, three way, four way and aerial splices, and splices for induction loop circuits shall be spliced with copper crimped solder-less connectors installed with an approved tool designed for the purpose to securely join the wires both mechanically and electrically. Splices shall then be wrapped with moisture sealing tape meeting the requirements of Sections 9-29.12(1) and 9-29.12(2) of the Kent Special Provisions to seal each splice individually, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. In no case shall epoxy splice kits be permitted. SECTION 8-20.3(10) IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-20.3(10) Service, Transformer, and Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) Cabinets THE LAST PARAGRAPH OF THIS SECTION IS DELETED IN ITS ENTIRETY. SECTION 8-20.3(14)C IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-20.3(14)C Induction Loop Vehicle Detectors THE LAST SENTENCE IN ITEM 2 IS REVISED TO READ: Each additional loop installed in the lane shall be on 12 foot centers. ITEM 4 IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 4. All content after the first sentence is DELETED. ITEM 9 AND ITEM 10 CONTENTS ARE DELETED, LEAVING THEM BLANK. SECTION 8-20.3(14)C IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE END OF THIS SECTION: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 23 Loop sealant shall be CrafcoTM Loop Detector Sealant 271, or approved equal. Installation shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations. SECTION 8-20.3(14)D IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-20.3(14)D Test for Induction Loops and Lead-In Cable SPECIFIED TESTS ARE REVISED AS FOLLOWS: Test B – A megger test at 500 volts DC shall be made between the cable shield and grounding, prior to connection to grounding. The resistance shall equal or exceed 200 megohms. Test C – A megger test shall be made between the loop circuit and grounding. The resistance shall equal or exceed 200 megohms. SECTION 8-20.3(14)E IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-20.3(14)E Signal Standards ITEM 8 IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8. All tenons shall be field installed using Astro-BracTM AB-3008 Clamp Kits, or pre-approved equal. SECTION 8-20.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-20.5 Payment The unit contract price per each for “Adjust Existing Junction Box to Finished Grade” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to adjust the specified structure to final finished grade as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. This work includes but shall not be limited to: referencing for future locates prior to overlay, excavating, backfilling, compacting, surfacing and restoration. Adjusting the grade by adding or removing risers, rings, or sections as required will be included in this bid item. Any adjustments made prior to the final finished elevation shall be considered incidental. The lump sum contract price for “Traffic Signal at ,” shall be full pay for the construction of the complete signal system, modifying existing systems, and removal of existing systems, as shown in the Plans as described in Section 8-20.1 of the Kent Special Provisions and as herein specified including but not limited to: excavation, backfilling, concrete foundations, conduit, controller, controller cabinet, service cabinet, battery backup unit and cabinet, signal interconnect, conduit, wiring, loops, junction boxes, restoring facilities destroyed or damaged during construction, removing the existing signal system including demolishing of the existing pole foundations, salvaging existing KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 24 materials, making all required tests, and Labor and Industries electrical inspection. All additional materials and labor, not shown in the plans or called for herein and which are required to complete the signal system, shall be included in the lump sum contract price. The contract price shall also include equipment, tools, materials and labor necessary for the temporary operation of the existing traffic signal system during installation of the new system as well as removal and disposal/salvage of the existing traffic signal system. The lump sum contract price for “Illumination System” constitutes complete compensation for all materials, labor and equipment required to install the illumination system as shown on the plans including but not limited to: aluminum lighting standard, luminaire including hardware, photoelectric control, conduit, wiring to the fuse holder, fuse kits, breakaway coupling, concrete foundation, excavation, backfilling compacting and other items as specified. Also included in this bid item is the trenching, conduit, wiring, trench backfill, connection to the service cabinet, modifying and removal of existing systems. Labor and Industries electrical, and any other items required for the fully functional Illumination System. Payment under this item shall include compensation for testing and miscellaneous items necessary to provide a complete and fully operational lighting system. 8-21 PERMANENT SIGNING 8-21.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-21.3(4) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE 4TH SENTENCE AND BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-21.3(4) Sign Removal Wood signs, wood sign posts, wood structures, metal sign posts, windbeams, and other metal structural members shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project. Aluminum signs shall remain the property of the City. The Contractor shall bundle and band the signs, and deliver the signs to the Sign Shop at the City Maintenance Facility located at 5821 South 240th Street (a.k.a. West James Street). All signs shall be delivered to the Sign Shop prior to physical completion of the project. The Contractor shall be charged $2.00 per square foot for any signs that are lost or are rendered unusable as signs by the Contractor’s operation. Also see Section 2-02.3 of the Kent Special Provisions. SECTION 8-21.3(5) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-21.3(5) Sign Relocation KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 25 Relocated signs shall be installed on new wood posts unless otherwise specified on the plans, or by the Engineer. SECTION 8-21.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-21.5 Payment The unit contract price per lump sum for “Removal of Traffic Signs” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, supplies and equipment necessary to remove, dispose, salvage, or deliver the traffic signs shown on the plans and described in the specifications. 8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING SECTION 8-22.1 IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 8-22.1 Description THE TEXT UNDER CROSSWALK STRIPE IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: A series of pairs of parallel SOLID WHITE lines, 8-feet long, 8 inches wide, aligned parallel with the direction of traffic, with an 8 inch space between the lines. Pairs are located as shown in Kent Standard Plan 6-75. THE TEXT UNDER TWO WAY LEFT TURN STRIPE IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: A SOLID YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, with a BROKEN YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, separated by a 4 inch space. The broken or “skip” pattern shall be based upon the City’s 12-foot line and a 30-foot space, except where the existing paint markings use a different pattern in which case the existing pattern will be used. The solid line shall be installed to the right of the broken line in the direction of travel. THE FOLLOWING NEW PAVEMENT MARKING IS ADDED: Yellow Painted Curb A SOLID YELLOW stripe, just wide enough to completely cover the concrete curbing. SECTION 8.22.2 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-22.2 Materials Material for pavement and curb markings shall be white or yellow paint as noted in the Proposal and Bid Item Descriptions. All paint, including the paint for the concrete curbs, shall be described in the Qualified Products List as “Temporary Pavement Marking Paint – Low VOC Solvent Based.” Paint and sprayed material shall be applied with a top dressing of glass beads. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 26 All Paint shall comply with the specifications for no heat, instant dry pavement markings. Glass beads shall be AC-110 Highway Street Spheres, or pre-approved equal. Material for pavement markings shall be paint, plastic or Raised Pavement Markings (RPMs) as noted in the bid item. Paint and plastic shall be selected from materials listed in the Qualified Products list (QPL). Material for RPMs shall meet the requirements for Section 8-09.2. 8-22.3 Construction Requirements SECTION 8-22.3(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH TO THE END OF THIS SECTION: 8-22.3(2) Preparation of Roadway Surfaces The preparation of roadway surfaces related to the installation of RPMs shall meet the requirements of Section 8-09.3(1). SECTION 8-22.3(3) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-22.3(3) Marking Application The Contractor is responsible for providing traffic control and traffic control devices as necessary to direct vehicular traffic away from freshly painted traffic stripes until such time as the marking paint has completely dried. Failure to ensure reasonable protection for the undried paint stripes will result in the Engineer’s decision to adjust the method of payment for damaged paint stripes. The Engineer’s decision regarding the means of payment adjustment for vehicle damaged paint stripes is final in this matter. Type 2 markers may be warmed prior to setting by heating to a maximum temperature of 120 F for a maximum of 10 minutes. The second coat of yellow paint applied to concrete curbs shall have glass beads applied at the rate of 12 pounds per 100 linear feet of curbing. SECTION 8-22.3(5) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions RPMs shall be installed per the requirements of Section 8-09.3(4). KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 27 SECTION 8-22.3(6) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 8-22.3(6) Removal of Pavement Markings Where required for the construction of the project or where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove pavement markings. The pavement marking shall be obliterated until blemishes caused by the pavement marking removal conform to the coloration of the adjacent pavement. Painting is not an acceptable method for obliteration or removal of pavement markings. Where the project involves overlay or pavement, paint stripes do not have to be obliterated unless specifically called for on the Project Plans, or Traffic Control Plans. All plastic letters, plastic arrows, plastic stripes of all types, plastic buttons, and plastic lane markers shall be removed prior to any overlay of pavement or where the roadway is being rechannelized or where specified on the Plans. Also see Section 8-09.3(1) of the Kent Special Provisions. The City has not shown the existing pavement markings on the plans. The bidder shall visit the site to determine the extent, location and type of items to be removed. SECTION 8-22.4 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-22.4 Measurement Painted yellow curb, white edge line paint stripe, double yellow center paint stripe, and two way left turn stripe shall be measured by the completed linear foot. The measurement for all painted stripes will be based upon a marking system capable of simultaneous application of two 4-inch lines with one 4-inch space between the two lines. No deduction will be made for the unmarked area when the pavement marking includes a skip stripe; and no additional measurement will be allowed when more than one line can be installed on a single pass of the marking system. Measurement of raised pavement markers will be units of one hundred for each type of marker furnished and set in place. SECTION 8-22.5 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-22.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for each of the following bid items that are included in the Proposal: “Painted Yellow Curb,” per linear foot. “White Edge Line Paint Stripe,” per linear foot. “Double Yellow Center Paint Stripe,” per linear foot. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 28 “Two Way Left Turn Paint Stripe,” per linear foot. The unit contract price per lump sum for “Permanent Channelization” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to furnish and install permanent channelization at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. 8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS THE FIRST PARAGRAPH OF SECTION 8-23.1 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 8-23.1 Description The work shall consist of furnishing, installing and removing temporary pavement markings. Temporary pavement markings shall be provided where noted in the plans and for all lane shifts and detours resulting from construction activities. Temporary pavement markings shall also be provided when permanent markings are eliminated because of construction operations. Temporary pavement markings shall be maintained in serviceable condition throughout the project until permanent markings are installed. Temporary pavement markings that are damaged shall be repaired or replaced immediately. Edge lines shall be installed unless otherwise specified in the Contract. DIVISION 8 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTIONS: 8-26 BOLLARDS 8-26.1 Description This work shall consist of pick-up and transport of the City supplied fixed or removable bollards from the City Parks Maintenance Office at 5821 South 240th Street 253-856-5120, then installing them at the locations shown on the plans and described by the specifications and details. The Contractor shall notify and make arrangements for pickup with the Parks Department a minimum of 2 weeks prior to installing the bollards. 8-26.2 Materials Foundation shall be cement concrete class 3000 and rebar shall be A60 steel. Bedding shall be 5/8 inch crushed gravel. If the Contractor damages the painted finish of the bollards, the Contractor shall retouch the bollards with a paint type specified by the design detail. 8-26.3 Construction Requirements The bollard shall be installed plumb, plus or minus 1 1/2 degrees, and spaced a minimum of 3 feet or a maximum of 5 feet apart. The KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 29 foundation shall not be less than 12 inches in diameter and 24 inches deep. If the Contractor damages the bollards during pickup, transport, or installation, the Contractor shall repair or replace the bollards to a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. 8-26.4 Measurement Fixed or removable bollards shall be measured per each bollard furnished and installed. 8-26.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per each for “Install City Supplied Fixed or Removable Bollard” shall be full compensation to furnish all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to install the fixed or removable bollards as shown on the plans and described in the specifications and details. 8-27 HANDRAILS 8-27.1 Description Aluminum handrails shall be installed at locations as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. 8-27.2 Materials The handrail shall be constructed of 1–1/2 inch I.D. Schedule 40 #6063-T6 Aluminum structural pipe. All connections shall be joined together by using Nu-rail or equivalent fittings with cadmium-plated steel alloy screws. 8-27.3 Construction Requirements The handrail posts shall be placed in a vertical position and shall be spaced 8 feet (center-to-center) apart. Spacing shall be measured parallel to the slope of the sidewalk. Post shall be slipped into the 2 inch barrel in the foundation and held secured with 1/4 inch galvanized bolt and nut. See Kent Standard Plan 6-41. The foundation shall be of 5 sack Cement Concrete mix (Class 3000) and the diameter shall not be smaller than a post-hole digger and at least two feet deep. The 2 inch I.D. barrel shall be cast at the center of the foundation. 8-27.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when they are included in the Proposal: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 30 The unit contract price per lineal foot for “Handrail” shall be full compensation to furnish all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to install the handrail as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. Reference Kent Standard Plans 6-4. 8-28 POTHOLE UTILITIES 8-28.1 Description This work shall consist of potholing utilities at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, a minimum of 24 hours before the pothole work is performed, to coordinate the work with Survey. Each pothole shall include standby time to allow Surveyors to accurately measure the location and depths of existing utilities. 8-28.2 Materials Backfill and surfacing material shall match conditions of pothole location. Pothole work located in asphalt concrete pavement, shall be backfilled with gravel borrow and crushed rock, then patched with asphalt cold mix. Pothole work located in cement concrete shall be backfilled with gravel borrow, then patched with cement concrete. Pothole work not on paved surfaces shall be backfilled with native material. 8-28.3 Construction Requirements The pothole shall be of sufficient size and depth to expose existing utilities to determine potential conflicts and verify compatibility with designs. Excavation; hauling, dewatering; backfill, compaction, surface restoration, and cleanup are included with this work. 8-28.4 Measurement Pothole utilities shall be measured per pothole work performed. 8-28.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The contract price per each for “Pothole Utilities” constitutes complete compensation for all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary to pothole utilities at the locations shown on the plans and described in the specifications. 8-30 PROJECT SIGNS 8-30.1 Description KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 31 This work shall consist of providing all posts, braces, and hardware and installation and maintenance of City-furnished project signs where shown in the plans or where directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall pick up signs at the City Maintenance Shop on West James Street, telephone 253-856-5600. Contractor shall provide two weeks’ notice to the Shops prior to installation to schedule pickup. All project signs become the property of the City at the end of the project, and the Contractor shall return project signs to the same facility when so directed by the Engineer. 8-30.2 Materials Sign posts shall be 4 inch x 6 inch Fir. 8-30.3 Construction Requirements 8-30.3(1) Erection of Posts All posts shall be set reasonably vertical, and deep enough to sustain sign and expected wind loads as determined by the Engineer. 8-30.3(2) Design A Three (3) vertical 4 inch x 4 inch Fir posts shall be attached to the sign board as shown in Kent Standard Plan . Three horizontal 2 inch x 4 inch Fir braces shall be attached to the back of the sign board, one each on the top, the bottom, and in the middle. Attachment of posts and bracing shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 8-30.3 Installation Fasten two (2) vertical 4 inch x 6 inch Fir posts evenly spaced at the back of the sign board. Posts shall be of break-away design with no more than 12.25 square inches of drilled shear area at a point 2 inches above the ground, or as directed by the Engineer. Attachment of posts and bracing shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 8-30.4 Measurement Project signs will be measured by the installed and maintained unit. Failure of the Contractor to adequately maintain the project signs, as determined by the Engineer, shall be deemed noncompliance with this Specification. 8-30.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when included in the Proposal: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 32 The unit contract price per each for “Project Sign Installation” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor and materials, to pick up sign(s) from the City Shops, installation and maintenance of project sign(s) for the life of the project and removal and delivery of sign(s) back to the City Shops. Failure to adequately maintain and return project signs to the City Maintenance Shop shall be deemed reasonable grounds for the Engineer to adjust the payment made under this bid item. Said adjustment shall be determined solely by the Engineer and is not negotiable except at the Engineer’s discretion. 8-31 BORED OR JACKED CROSSINGS 8-31.1 Description The Contractor shall jack, drive or auger a casing pipe where shown on the plans in accordance with applicable portions of the following specifications except as herein modified or supplemented: “Jacking Culvert Pipe Through Fills”, prepared by the American Railway Engineering Association and published in 1962 (or current edition). The specified utility pipe shall then be installed within the casing pipe. 8-31.2 Materials The casing pipe shall be watertight and capable of withstanding an H20 highway load or an E80 railroad load and the backfill load. Minimum inside diameter of the casing pipe shall be as shown on the plans. Exact wall thickness and diameter shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the City. The joints of the steel casing shall be welded 360°. 8-31.3 Construction Requirements The casing pipe shall be jacked, driven or augered through the grade at a distance below the surface of the ground as shown on the plans. The casing pipe shall extend to the limits as shown on the plans. During jacking, augering, or tunneling operations, care shall be exercised to prevent caving ahead of the pipe which will cause voids outside the pipe. If voids occur, the Contractor shall backpack the voids with sand and pea gravel and fill the voids with a pumped Portland cement grout. All voids shall be filled to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If the liner plates are used, they shall be assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and specifications and in accordance with accepted tunneling methods using poling plates or shield of a strength equal to that of the liner plates. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 33 The pipe shall be skidded into position inside the casing pipe and blocked into position. The annular space between the pipe and the casing pipe or tunnel liner shall be filled by sluicing or blowing sand, pea gravel or fly ash into the space. Care shall be exercised to insure that the entire space is filled and that the pipe is not disturbed during the placement of the backfill between the pipe and the casing. The Contractor shall remove the pipe and reinstall it if the pipe is not within the tolerances shown on the drawings and as specified. 8-31.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when they are included in the Proposal: The lump sum price bid for the “Bored or Jacked Crossing of ” for the location specified shall constitute complete compensation for all work, materials, and equipment required for installing the crossing as shown on the plans. Specifically included, but not limited to, the cost of the casing pipe and its installation and any costs involved in setup and receiving pits, shoring, maintaining and/or protecting traffic, vehicular and pedestrian detours, pavement or other improvements, private or public utilities or structures which may be affected in any way by construction. The cost of installing the utility pipe shall be paid under the appropriate bid item. 8-32 UNDERGROUNDING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES 8-32.2 Materials The backfill material for trench and vault excavations shall conform to the requirements of Gravel Borrow except, the maximum size stone shall not exceed 4 inches. 8-32.3 Construction Requirements 8-32.3(1) Vault Excavation See Section 2-09 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications, except as herein modified and/or supplemented. Where indicated on the plans or where directed by the Engineer, excavation and foundation preparation required for the installation of electrical and telephone vaults and electrical and telephone handholes by the serving utility, shall be performed by the Contractor. The foundation shall consist of a six (6) inch thick layer of crushed surfacing top course (5/8 minus) compacted to 95 percent maximum density measured in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)D of the KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 34 WSDOT Standard Specifications by use of compaction equipment specified in Section 2-09 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. The excavation shall be backfilled in conformance with the requirements of Section 2-09 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. 8-32.3(2) Trench Excavation and Backfill for Electrical, Telephone and TV The excavation required for the installation of electrical, telephone and TV conduit and cable to be installed by the serving utility shall be performed by the Contractor. The trenches shall not be excavated wider than necessary for the proper installation of the electrical, TV and telephone appliances. The excavation shall be backfilled in conformance with other applicable requirements as outlined elsewhere in these Kent Special Provisions and WSDOT Standard Specifications. Typical trench details are shown on the plans. The Contractor shall use the native trench excavation for backfill when in the opinion of the Engineer, it is suitable for that purpose and shall dispose of all excess material as directed by the Engineer. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate its work with the serving utility prior to and during construction and shall protect the owner against any and all damages arising therefrom. 8-32.3(4) Backfill for Electrical, Telephone and TV Trench Wherever a trench is excavated in a paved roadway, sidewalk or other areas where minor settlement would be detrimental and where the native excavated material is not suitable for compaction as backfill, the trench shall be backfilled with the specified granular backfill, as the Engineer may direct. The backfill material shall be placed in successive layers, not exceeding twelve (12) inches in loose thickness, each layer shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D-1557. 8-32.3(5) Trench Restoration For undergrounding outside of the street construction limits, pavement patching shall be accomplished in accordance with applicable portion of these WSDOT Standard Specifications and General Special Provisions. The Contractor shall also restore to a condition equal to the original condition, improvements such as pavement markings, trees, signs, sidewalks, curbs and other underground utilities, etc., which were damaged or removed during construction in accordance with the section for general restoration of the General Special Provisions. 8-32.3(6) Removal of Overhead Electrical Distribution System KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 8 PAGE 35 The Contractor should be aware that once the underground electrical distribution system is energized, the adjacent property owners have ninety (90) days from date of their notification to convert to the underground system. Removal of the overhead electrical distribution system cannot take place until all respective service conversions have been completed. No compensation will be granted to the Contractor for delays attributed to the conversion. 8-32.5 Payment Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid items when they are included in the Proposal: The unit contract price per cubic yard for “Utility Trench and Vault Excavation” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies and equipment necessary to excavate and backfill for trenches and vaults as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The bid item price includes but is not limited to: trench and vault excavation; unsuitable material excavation, hauling, dewatering; backfill and compaction (when native material is to be used), surface restoration, and cleanup. Cost to coordinate with utilities to place their facilities in the trench or vault shall be included in this bid item. The unit contract price per ton for “Gravel Borrow for Backfill for Utility Trench and Vault Excavation” constitutes complete compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, supplies, and equipment necessary for furnishing, hauling, placing, and compacting the material as shown on the plans and described in the specifications. The bid item price includes but is not limited to: preparing the gravel base in the excavated trench for placement of conduits at their appropriate depths, and preparing the gravel base in the excavated pits for placement of utility vaults to the final finished grade. Cost to coordinate with utilities to place their facilities in the trench or vault shall be included in this bid item. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 1 DIVISION 9 – MATERIALS 9-03 AGGREGATES 9-03.12 Gravel Backfill SECTION 9-03.12(3) IS REVISED BY DELETING THE GRAVEL SPECIFICATION AND REPLACING IT WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-03.12(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding Pipe bedding shall be 5/8 inch minus crushed rock. Pea gravel is not allowed. All material shall conform with the following gradation: Sieve Size Passing 3/4 Inch 100% 5/8 Inch 95 - 100% 1/4 Inch 45 - 65% US No. 40 6 - 18% US No. 200 7.5 max. % % Fracture 75 min. Sand Equivalent 40 min. L.A. wear 500 rev. 35 percent max., degradation 25 percent min. Free from wood waste, bark and other deleterious material. 9-03.14 Borrow SECTION 9-03.14(1) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-03.14(1) Gravel Borrow Gravel Borrow material shall consist of pit-run granular material conforming to the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 3 Inch* 100 3/4 Inch 65 - 100 U.S. No. 4 25 - 70 U.S. No. 10 10 - 50 U.S. No. 40 0- 30 U.S. No. 200 0 - 5 Sand equivalent 50 min. The maximum passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve is limited to five percent (5%) based on the minus #4 inch fraction. Sieve analysis shall be used to verify that this requirement is met. Recycled materials such as broken concrete or asphalt, shall not be allowed unless specifically authorized in advance by the Engineer. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 2 Where additional materials are required to formulate the street sub- base to the cross section denoted in the plans, said additional material shall be Gravel Borrow. * The maximum size of stone for geosynthetic reinforced walls or slopes shall be 100 percent passing 1 1/4 inch square sieve and 90 to 100 percent passing 1 inch square sieve. All other sieve values continue to apply. SECTION 9-03.17 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-03.17 Foundation Material Class I and Class II Foundation Material Class I and Class II shall be used to replace unsuitable material removed from unstable pipe trench bottoms. Foundation Material Class I and Class II shall conform to the following gradations: Percent Passing Sieve Size Class I Class II 6” square 100 --- 4” square --- 100 2” square 0 65-85 1” square --- 40-70 1/4” square --- 20 max All percentages are by weight. In addition, all rock shall be sound, angular ledge rock or recycled cement concrete pavement meeting the following specifications. Suppliers of recycled cement concrete products shall have a quality assurance program reviewed and approved by the City. Each rock or piece of recycled cement concrete pavement shall have at least two fractured faces. Adsorption 3% max (Corps of Engineers CRD-C-107) Accelerated Expansion (15) days 15% max Soundness 5% max loss Density (solid volume) 155 pcf min Specific Gravity 2.48 min 9-03.21 Recycled Material SECTION 9-03.21(1)D IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 3 9-03.21(1)D Recycled Steel Furnace Slag Steel Furnace Slag shall not be used for any purposes. 9-13 RIPRAP, QUARRY SPALLS, SLOPE PROTECTION, AND ROCK FOR EROSION AND SCOUR PROTECTION AND ROCK WALLS SECTION 9-13 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-13.8 Rock for Ditches Rocks for ditches shall meet the following requirements for grading: Sieve Size Percent Passing 12” 95 to 100 6” 40 to 60 3” 10 to 20 3/4” 0 to 5 9-14 EROSION CONTROL AND ROADSIDE PLANTING 9-14.2 Topsoil SECTION 9-14.2(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-14.2(1) Topsoil Type A Topsoil Type A (Compost Amended Planting Soil) shall consist of 50 – 67% sand and/or sandy loam and 33 – 50% composted organic material by volume. Total organic matter shall be at least 5% by dry weight for areas where turf will be installed, and at least 10% by dry weight for all other landscape areas. Organic matter shall be determined by Loss-on-Ignition test. Acceptable tests include the most current version of ASTM D2974 “Test Methods for Moisture, Ash, and Organic Matter of Peat and Other Organic Soils,” and TMECC 05.07A “Loss-On-Ignition Organic Matter Method.” Compost-Amended Planting soil shall not contain any viable seeds or roots capable of sprouting any State-listed noxious weed, or invasive root-propagating plants including but not limited to horsetail, ivy, clematis, knotweed, Scot’s broom, reed canary grass, Himalayan blackberry, etc. Soil found to contain these prohibited viable plant materials shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. A. The soil shall meet the following requirements. 1. The mixed soil shall meet the following gradation: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 4 Screen Size * Percent Passing 2 inch 100 1 inch 99-100 5/8” 90 – 100 1/4" 75-100 *Maximum particle length of 6 inches B. Shall have a pH range between 5.5 and 8.5. The pH shall be determined by soil test. C. Organic material shall consist of composted yard debris or organic waste material composted for a minimum of 3 months. Compost shall consist of 100% recycled content and meet all requirements for compost in Section 9-14.5(8) of the Standard Specifications. D. Submit a certified laboratory analysis from an accredited soils testing laboratory indicating the Material source and compliance with all planting soil and compost specifications to the Engineer or project Ecologist for approval no less than seven (7) days before delivery to the Project Site. The analysis shall be with a sample size of no less than 2 pounds. E. Site specific soil testing (after placement of material) may be required for projects requiring more than 50 cubic yards of compost-amended planting soil A Contractor provided accredited laboratory approved by the Engineer shall make recommendations for amendments required for optimum growth at no cost to the owner. The Contractor will be allowed five (5) Working Days to complete the testing from the time of written notice given by the Engineer. F. A sample of the compost amended planting soil shall be provided to the Engineer or project Ecologist in a 1-gallon re-closable bag at least seven (7) days prior to application. SECTION 9-14.2 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-14.2(4) Sandy Loam Sandy loam shall consist of soil having a maximum clay content of ten percent by weight. In addition, soil particles shall meet the following requirements for grading: Passing 1 inch sieve (square opening) ......... 100% Passing 1 mm sieve ................................. 80% minimum Passing 0.15 mm sieve ............................. 15% maximum KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 5 SECTION 9-14.3 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-14.3 Seed Hydroseed: Seed shall be “Blue Tag” or certified quality. The Contractor shall deliver in unopened containers with mixture seed content and inert material content plainly marked on the outside of the container. Grasses used shall meet the following specifications: Use Seed Mix B if your project is on or adjacent to a park Mix A (Roadside and Erosion Control Grass): Weight Proportion Seed Mix “A” Ingredient Min. % Pure Seed Min. % Germination Max. % Weed Seed 40% Perennial Ryegrass 98% 90% 0.5% 40% Creeping Red Fescue 98% 85% 0.5% 10% Colonial Bentgrass 98% 90% 0.5% 10% White Dutch Clover (Pre- inoculated) 98% 90% 0.5% Mix B (Landscaped Area Grass): Weight Proportion Seed Mix “B” Ingredient Min. % Pure Seed Min. % Germination Max. % Weed Seed 15% Creeping Red Fescue 95% 90% 0.5% 10% Chewings Fescue 95% 90% 0.5% 40% Perennial Ryegrass 95% 90% 0.5% 20% Alta Tall Fescue 95% 90% 0.5% 15% Annual Ryegrass 95% 90% 0.5% The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the manufacturer's Certificate of Conformance for seed. A complete analysis of the seed shall be submitted to the City for approval including percent of pure KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 6 seed, germination, other crop seed, inert and weed and the germination test date. The City reserves the right to reject any or all plant material at any time until final inspection or acceptance. The Contractor shall remove rejected plants immediately from site. The Contractor shall produce upon request sales receipt for all nursery stock and certificates of inspection. SECTION 9-14.4 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-14.4 Fertilizer Fertilizer for trees: Fertilizer shall consist of slow-release commercial fertilizer (6-10-8). Fertilizer for upland seeded areas: Lilly Miller or approved equal to provide the following nutrients: All areas which are seeded shall receive fertilizer of the following proportions and formulation: Total available Nitrogen .................. 16% of weight (of which 50% is derived from ureaform) Total available Phosphorous ............ 16% of weight Total available Potassium ................ 16% of weight Fertilizer for wetland seeded areas: All areas which are seeded in wetlands or in detention ponds shall receive fertilizer of the following proportions and formulation: Total available nitrogen............ 21% (Analyzed as N) Available phosphorous ............. 0% (Analyzed as P205) Available potassium ................ 10% (Analyzed as K20) Above percentages are proportioned by weight. The Contractor shall deliver fertilizer to the site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, trade mark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information. 9-14.5 Mulch and Amendments SECTION 9-14.5(8) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-14.5(8) Compost KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 7 Compost shall not contain any sawdust, straw, green or under- composed organic matter, under-sterilized manure or toxic or otherwise harmful materials. SECTION 9-14.5 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-14.5(10) Wood Cellulose Fiber Wood cellulose mulch shall be specially processed 100 percent virgin wood fiber containing no growth or germination-inhibiting ingredients. It shall be manufactured in such a manner that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with water, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogenous slurry. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the material shall allow the absorption and percolation of moisture. Wood cellulose fiber shall be Weyerhaeuser Silva-Fiber Plus w/Tackifier or approved equal. Organic matter content shall be at least 93 percent on an oven-dry basis as determined by ASTM D 586. The moisture content shall be no more than 15 percent as determined by oven dried weight. Each package of the cellulose fiber shall be marked by the manufacturer to show the dried weight content. 9-14.7 Plant Materials 9-14.7(1) Description SECTION 9-14.7(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-14.7(1)A Street Trees The following table provides both the list of approved street tree species, and some of the characteristics associated with each street tree species at maturity: Common Name Scientific Name Height (feet) Width (feet) Shape Min. Spacing (feet) Small Street Trees For planting under powerlines 30’ or less Trident Maple Acer buergeranum 20’ 20’ Round, low spreading 30’ Flame Maple Acer ginnala ‘Flame’ 20’ 20’ Round w/ spreading low branches 30’ KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 8 Flamingo Box Elder Acer negundo ‘Flamingo’ 20’ 15’ Oval to round 25’ Apollo Maple Acer saccharum 25’ 10’ Narrow to columnar 20’ Tatarian Maple Acer tataricum 25’ 20’ Oval to round, often low branched 30’ Lavalle Hawthorn Crataegus x lavallei 28’ 20’ Irregular vase shaped 30’ Washington Hawthorn Crataegus phaenopyrum 25’ 20’ Broadly oval to round 30’ Golden Desert Ash Fraxinus excelsior ‘Aureafolia’ 20’ 18’ Rounded, compact 30’ Leprechaun Ash Fraxinus pennsylvanica ‘Johnson’ 18’ 16’ Dense, compact, round 25’ Amur Maackia Maackia amurensis 25’ 20’ Vase shaped becoming round 30’ Golden Raindrops Crabapple Malus transitoria ‘Schmidt cutleaf’ 20’ 15’ Upright, vase shaped 25’ Red Barron Crabapple Malus ‘Red Barron’ 18’ 8’ Narrow, columnar 20’ Red Jewel Crabapple Malus ‘Jewelcole’ 15’ 12’ Upright, pyramidal 25’ Tschonoskii Crabapple Malus tschonoskii 28’ 14’ Upright, narrowly oval 25’ Cascade Snow Cherry Prunus ‘Berry’ 25’ 14’ Upright, spreading 25’ Amanogawa Cherry Prunus serrulata ‘Amanogawa’ 20’ 6’ Columnar, fastigiate branches 20’ Red Cascade Mountain Ash Sorbus Americana ‘Dwarfcrown’ 18’ 8’ Compact oval 20’ Fragrant Snowbell Styrax obassia 25’ 15’ Pyramidal to upright narrow oval 25’ Ivory Silk Japanese Syringa reticulata ‘Ivory Silk’ 20’ 15’ Upright spreading becoming round 25’ Medium Street Trees Plant when powerlines are not present 30’ to 45’ trees Armstrong Maple Acer rubrum ‘Armstrong’ 45’ 15’ Narrow, upright columnar 25’ Queen Elizabeth Maple Acer campestre ‘Evelyn’ 35’ 30’ Upright, becoming round 40’ Medium Street Trees Plant when powerlines are not present 30’ to 45’ trees Sensation Box Elder Acer negundo ‘Sensation’ 30’ 25’ Rounded 35’ KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 9 Pacific Sunset Maple Acer truncatum x Acer plantanoides ‘Warrenred’ 30’ 15’ Upright spreading, rounded crown 25’ Frans Fontaine Hornbeam Carpinus betulus ‘Frans Fontaine’ 30’ 15’ Columnar 25’ American Hornbeam Carpinus caroliniana 25’ 25’ Oval 35’ Tricolor Beech Fagus sylvatica ‘Roseo – Marginata’ 30’ 20’ Pyramidal when young, rounding w/ age 30’ Raywood Ash Fraxinus oxycarpa ‘Raywood’ 35’ 25’ Oval, dense crown 35’ Imperial Honeylocust Gleditsia triacanthos ‘Impcole’ 35’ 35’ Rounded 45’ Galaxy Magnolia Magnolia ‘Galaxy’ 30’ 15’ Pyramidal to oval 25’ Edith Bogue Southern Magnolia Magnolia grandiflora ‘Edith Bogue’ 30’ 15’ Pyramidal tight 25’ American Hophornbeam Ostrya Virginiana 40’ 25’ Upright oval 35’ Spire Cherry Prunus x hillieri ‘Spire’ 30’ 10’ Upright columnar, narrowly vase shaped 20’ Columnar Sargent Cherry Prunus sargentii ‘Columnaris’ 35’ 15’ Upright columnar, narrowly vase shaped 25’ Edgewood Pear Pyrus calleryana x betulaefolia ‘Edgewood’ 30’ 25’ Rounded 35’ Capital Pear Pyrus calleryana ‘Capital’ 35’ 12’ Columnar 20’ Chanticleer Pear Pyrus calleryana ‘Glen’s Form’ 40’ 15’ Columnar, narrowly pyramidal 25’ Crimson Spire Oak Quercus alba x Quercus robur ‘Crimschmidt’ 45’ 15’ Columnar, tightly fastigiated 25’ Skyrocket Oak Quercus robur ‘Fastigiata’ 45’ 15’ Narrow, fastigiated 25’ Musashino Zelkova serrata ‘Musashino’ 45’ 20’ Very narrow, upright vase shaped 30’ 9-14.8 Stakes, Guys, and Wrapping SECTION 9-14.8 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-14.8(1) Tree Ties Tree ties shall be patent “Tre-Ties” sufficient in size and number to adequately support the trees as determined by Quentin Poil, Nursery Supervisor at 253-856-5127. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 10 9-16 FENCE AND GUARDRAIL 9-16.1 Chain Link Fence and Gates SECTION 9-16.1(1)B IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-16.1(1)B Chain Link Fence Fabric Chain link fabric shall consist of 9 gage wire (0.148-inch diameter) for all fences unless specified otherwise. The fabric wire shall be: Galvanized steel wire conforming to ASTM A 392. Galvanizing shall be Class I performed by the hot dip process. The wire shall be woven into approximately 2-inch diamond mesh. The width and top and bottom finish of the fabric shall be as shown in the plans. 9-28 SIGNING MATERIALS AND FABRICATION SECTION 9-28.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-28.1 General All signs shall be reflectorized except for City Project Signs. ALL PERMANENT SIGNS, EXCEPT “NO PARKING ANYTIME” SIGNS SHALL HAVE VIP SIGNS AND CLASS A TEMPORARY DIAMOND GRADE RETRO- REFLECTORIZED SHEETING, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN THE PLANS. “NO PARKING ANYTIME” signs shall have engineer grade retro- reflectorized sheeting. 9-28.14 Sign Support Structures SECTION 9-28.14(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-28.14(2) Steel Structures and Posts Truss chords, struts, and diagonals, end posts, and end post struts and diagonals for sign bridge structures and cantilever sign structures shall conform to either ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 53 Grade B Type E or S. The nominal pipe diameter and the pipe wall thickness shall be as specified in the plans or Standard Plans. All other structural steel for sign bridge structures and cantilever sign structures shall conform to ASTM A 36. Truss member connection hardware shall conform to Section 9-06.5(3). Pipe members for bridge mounted sign brackets shall conform to ASTM A 53 Grade B Type E or S, and shall be Schedule 40 unless otherwise specified. All other structural steel for bridge mounted sign brackets shall conform to ASTM A 36. U bolts, and associated nuts and washers, shall be stainless steel conforming to Section 9-28.11, and shall be fabricated hot. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 11 Anchor rods, nuts and washers for sign bridge structure foundations shall conform to Section 9-06.5(4). Anchor rods for cantilever sign structure foundations shall conform to ASTM F 1554 Grade 104, including the appropriate supplemental requirements for grade and manufacturer’s identification, and charpy impact testing (15 foot- pounds minimum at 40F). Nuts and washers for cantilever sign structure foundations shall conform to AASHTO M 291 Grade DH and AASHTO M 293, respectively. Anchor rods for sign bridge structures and cantilever sign structures shall be galvanized after fabrication a minimum of 1’-0” at the exposed end in accordance with AASHTO M 232. Anchor rod templates shall conform to ASTM A 36, but need not be galvanized. Steel sign structures and posts shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111, unless noted otherwise in the plans. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 232. Unless otherwise specified in the plans or Kent Special Provisions, metal surfaces shall not be painted. Minor fabricating and modifications necessary for galvanizing will be allowed if not detrimental to the end product as determined by the Engineer. If such modifications are contemplated, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval six copies of the proposed modifications, prior to fabrication. 9-29 ILLUMINATION, SIGNAL, ELECTRICAL SECTION 9-29.1 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH TO THE BEGINNING OF THIS SECTION: 9-29.1 Conduit, Innerduct, and Outerduct Unless otherwise specified on the Street Lighting or Traffic Signal Plans, all conduits for street lighting, traffic signals and traffic signal interconnect cables for projects within the city limits of Kent shall be Schedule 80 PVC conduit, minimum size 2 inches. 9-29.2 Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes SECTION 9-29.2(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING SENTENCE TO THE END OF THESE SECTIONS: 9-29.2(1)A Standard Duty Junction Boxes Box frame and lid shall be hot dip galvanized only. 9-29.2(1)B Heavy-Duty Junction Boxes Box frame and lid shall be hot dip galvanized only. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 12 9-29.3 Fiber Optic Cable, Electrical Conductors, and Cable SECTION 9-29.3(2)I IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.3(2)I Twisted Pair Communication Cable Replace “AWG 22” with “#AWG 19”. THE LAST SENTENCE IN THE FIRST PARAGRAPH HAS BEEN REVISED TO READ AS FOLLOWS: This cable shall be filled with a gel compound to resist water penetration and migration unless otherwise specified by the plans. 9-29.6 Light and Signal Standards SECTION 9-29.6(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRPH AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS SECTION: 9-29.6(2) Slip Base Hardware Unless otherwise specified on the Street Lighting Plans, street light standards shall not have slip bases. SECTION 9-29.6(5) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH TO THE END OF THIS SECTION: 9-29.6(5) Foundation Hardware Breakaway supports for street light standards shall conform to Precisionform Inc. model PFI 200-1A Breakaway Supports, or approved equal. SECTION 9-29.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-29.6(6) Aluminum Light Standards Pole shafts shall be constructed of seamless extruded tubes of 6063 aluminum alloy per ASTM B221 and shall be full-length heat treated after welding on the base flange to T-6 temper. The shaft shall be free of longitudinal welds. The pole shaft cap, when required, shall be cast aluminum 443 or 356F aluminum alloy and attached utilizing stainless steel screws. Pole base flanges shall be one piece cast socket of aluminum alloy 356 per ASTM B 26 or B108. The base flange shall be joined to the pole shaft by means of complete circumferential welds; externally at the top of the flange and internally at the bottom of the shaft tube. Single arm members shall be tapered and ellipsized from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy tubing. Arms shall be welded to an extruded mounting plate of 6063-T6 aluminum alloy and attached to the pole shaft by means of four 1/2 inch diameter stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers. A grommeted 1 1/4 inch cable entry (1 inch I.D. rubber grommet) shall KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 13 be provided in the pole shaft at the arm mounting location. Arms shall have 2 inch N.P.S. slipfitters at least 8 inches in length. 9-29.10 Luminaires SECTION 9-29.10(1) IS REVISED BY REPLACING THE FIRST SENTENCE OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-29.10(1) Conventional Roadway Luminaires All luminaires shall come equipped for IES type III, medium cutoff light distribution unless otherwise specified on the Street Lighting Plans and/or Traffic Signal Plans when those signals include street lighting luminaires. THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPHS ARE ADDED TO THE END OF THIS SECTION: The only pre-approved street lighting luminaires for this project are as follows: For LED Equivalent of the 400 Watt HPS Luminaire: ATBM H MVOLT R3 NL P7 For LED Equivalent of the 250 Watt HPS Luminaire: ATBM D MVOLT R3 NL P7 For LED Equivalent of the 200 Watt HPS Luminaire: ATBM C MVOLT R3 NL P7 For LED Equivalent of the 100 Watt HPS Luminaire: ATBS E MVOLT R3 NL P7 For LED Equivalent of the 100 Watt HPS Lumec DSX Luminaire: S56C1-55W32LED4K-R-ACDR-LE3-240-SFX-FN1-GN8TX For LED Equivalent of the 100 Watt HPS King Luminaire: K118R-B2PR-III-60-SSL-1042-120-K18-PEBC-SST-GN-#1 Other street lighting luminaires may be submitted for approval, PROVIDED that they possess the same serviceability characteristics as the pre-approved models, and the submittal is accompanied by KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 14 photometric calculations showing that they are photometrically equivalent to the approved products. 9-29.12 Electrical Splice Materials SECTION 9-29.12(1) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-29.12(1) Illumination Circuit Splices Aerial splices may employ split bolt connectors. Below grade splices and taps shall be made with solderless crimp connectors to securely join the wires both mechanically and electrically. They shall employ the following moisture-blocking insulation. ScotchTM 2200/2210 Vinyl Mastic products, followed by an overwrap with a minimum of two half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic electrical tape, and a final layer of consistently- applied ScotchkoteTM 054007-14853 Electrical Coating. SECTION 9-29.12(2) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-29.12(2) Traffic Signal Splice Material Induction loop splices shall be made with solderless crimp connectors to securely join the wires both mechanically and electrically. Equipment and methods shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the splicing materials. Each solderless crimp connector splice shall be wrapped with Scotch™#06147 Electrical Moisture Sealant, or approved equal. SECTION 9-29.13 IS REVISED BY REPLACING THE LAST SENTENCE WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-29.13 Control Cabinet Assemblies Traffic Signal Control Cabinet Assemblies shall meet the requirements of NEMA TS2 Specification. SECTION 9-29.13(1) IS REVISED BY REPLACING THE THIRD SENTENCE WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9.29.13(1) Environmental, Performance, and Test Standards for Solid-State Traffic Controller Assemblies NEMA control assemblies shall meet or exceed current NEMA TS 2 Environmental Standards. SECTION 9-29.13 (2) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9.29.13(2) Traffic Signal Controller Assembly Testing Each traffic signal controller assembly shall be tested as follows. The Contractor shall: 1.Prior to shipping, arrange controller cabinet testing with City of Kent Transportation. 2.If the traffic signal control assembly passes all testing, the Contractor will be notified the cabinet is ready for pick-up. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 15 3.If the traffic signal control assembly fails testing, the Contractor has 7 calendar days to repair or replace the failed components. Once all repairs are completed, the testing will resume. SECTION 9-29.13(3) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9.29.13(3) Traffic Signal Controller The traffic-actuated controller for all City traffic signals shall be a Econolite Corp. Cobalt Controller. SECTION 9-29.13(4) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9.29.13(4) Traffic-Signal Controller Software Controller shall be provided with the most current software release that operates fully with the City’s Central System Software. Current version of controller maintenance and operation documentation shall be provided with each controller in an electronic format. SECTION 9-29.13(5) IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.13(5) Flashing Operations ADD THE FOLLOWING TO THE END OF THE FIRST PARAGRAPH: When the cabinet is commanded to Flashing mode, the DC supply voltage shall be removed from all loadswitches. The flash transfer relays shall be de-energized during flashing operations. REPLACE THE LAST SENTENCE IN ITEM 2 WITH THE FOLLOWING: When the flash-automatic switch is changed to the automatic position, the controller shall resume normal automatic operation with the display and timing as it existed before the flash mode was enabled. DELETE THE SECOND SENTENCE IN ITEM 3. DELETE ITEM 4 IN ITS ENTIRETY. REVISE ITEM 5 BY DELETING “at the beginning of major street green” IN THE LAST SENTENCE. SECTION 9-29.13(7) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING TO THE END OF THE SECTION: 9-29.13(7) Wiring Diagrams The cabinet wiring drawing shall also be provided in AutoCAD v2008 file. All cabinet wiring, and layout shall fit on (1) E1 size sheet, multiple pages shall not be allowed. Component cut sheets and equipment operating manuals shall be provided for devices used within the controller cabinet. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 16 SECTION 9-29.13(10)A IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.13(10)A Auxiliary Equipment for NEMA Controllers ITEM 2 IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 2.Type P-1 controller cabinets shall include a fully-wired 16-position back panel / load bay. Printed circuit-type load bay design is not acceptable. The load bay shall be of the tilt down style requiring no tools to swing it down; giving access to the back of the load switches and all wiring behind the load bay. The cabinet shall include the following additional components: twelve solid- state load switches that conform to NEMA TS-2 specifications, sixteen 4 channel half width detectors (Eberle Design, Inc Model LMD624H or Reno A+ETM Model Y/2-200-ss or approved equal), one TS2 Cabinet Power Supply rated at 5Amps (Eberle Design, Inc Model PS250 or approved equal), six TS2 half width Bus Interface Units (Eberlie Design, Inc Model BIU700H or approved equal), One Opticom phase selector (Global Traffic Technologies Model 764 or approved equal), twelve red output jumpers to short pin 1 to pin 3 on the loadswitch sockets and auxiliary accessories to provide a complete and functional traffic signal control system. ITEM 3c. IS SUPPLEMENTED AT THE END WITH THE FOLLOWING: A minimum of twenty AC neutral termination points shall be available for field wire termination in the lower portion of the cabinet. ITEM 3f. IS SUPPLEMENTED AT THE END WITH THE FOLLOWING: A minimum of ten earth ground unused termination points shall be available for field wire termination in the lower portion of the cabinet. ITEM 4 IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 4.A police panel located behind the police panel door shall be equipped with a flash-automatic switch. See Section 9-29.13(5) (above) for operational requirements. ITEM 5 IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 5.An auxiliary control panel located inside the controller cabinet with a Flash-Automatic switch, a Controller On-Off switch, and a Stop Time switch. The Flash-Automatic switch shall put the signal on Flash without applying Stop Time. The Stop Time switch shall provide for application of stop time or disabling ALL other stop time inputs. A ground fault interrupter-protected double outlet shall also be provided on the panel. The panel shall be side or bottom-hinged. ITEM 6 IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 17 6.The conflict monitor shall be a Eberle Design Inc. EDI MMU2- 16LE(ip), or approved equal. See Section 9-29.13(2) of the Kent Special Provisions for operational requirements. The unit shall monitor conflicting signal indications at the field connection terminals. The unit shall be wired in a manner such that the signal will revert to Flash if the conflict monitor is removed from service and the cabinet door is closed. Supplemental resistor loads, not to exceed 10 watts per monitored circuit, shall be provided to prevent monitor actuation caused by dimming or lamp burnout. Supplemental loads shall be installed on the control side of the field terminals, for the odd numbered phases and overlaps. DELETE ITEM 7 IN ITS ENTIRETY. ITEM 10 IS SUPPLEMENTED WITH THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH AT THE END: 10.No more than one wire shall be permitted per crimped terminal lug. All terminals shall be identified in conformance to the cabinet wiring diagram. All equipment input and output functions shall be terminated on terminal blocks for easy access. The cabinet shall contain a spare door indicator switch (normally closed contacts) which will be wired to a terminal block for future use. SECTION 9-29.13(10)C IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.13(10)C NEMA Controller Cabinets ITEM 1 IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1.The controller cabinet shall be a 44-inch wide Type P-1 and shall be constructed of aluminum. Cabinets shall be finished inside with an approved finish coat of exterior white enamel. The outside of the aluminum cabinet shall be unfinished. ITEM 2 IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 2.The cabinet shall contain shelving, brackets, racks, etc., to support the controller and auxiliary equipment. All equipment shall set squarely on shelves or be mounted in racks and shall be removable without turning, tilting, or rotating or relocating one device to remove another. The cabinet shall be provided with two (2) shelves that are reinforced with a welded V channel, fabricated from 5052- H32 0.125-inch thick aluminum with double flanged edges rolled front to back. Slotted or round holes shall be provided on front and back flanges for the purpose of tying off wire bundles. One detector rack shall support (16) channels of loop detection, (1) Buss Interface Unit (BIU) and (4) channel of Opticom™. This rack shall be capable of using half width 4-channel loop amplifiers, half width Buss Interface Unit (BIU) and both two channel or four channel Opticom™ cards. The other three detector racks shall support (16) channels of loop detection using half width 4-channel loop amplifiers and one (1) half width Buss Interface Unit (BIU). KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 18 9-29.16 Vehicular Signal Heads, Displays, and Housing SECTION 9-29.16(2)A IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-29.16(2)A Optical Units 1. Light emitting diode (LED) light sources are required for all signal displays. a. Wattage (maximum): 35 watts. b. Voltage: The operating voltages shall be between 85 VAC and 130 VAC. c. Temperature: Temperature range shall be –35 C to +70 C. d. LED Types: Red balls shall be DialiteTM, part number 433- 1210-003XL15, or approved equal; red arrows shall be DialiteTM, part number 432-1314-001XOD15, or approved equal; green balls shall be DialiteTM, part number 433-2220- 001XL15, or approved equal; green arrows shall be DialiteTM, part number 432-2324-001XOD15, or approved equal; yellow balls shall be DialiteTM, part number 433-3230-901XL15, or approved equal; yellow arrows shall be DialiteTM, part number 431-3334-901XOD15 or approved equal. e. Enclosure: The enclosure for the LEDs and associated circuitry shall be dust and water-resistant. f. Lens: The lens shall be a polycarbonate lens. The lens shall be free from bubbles, flaws, and other imperfections and shall not be diffused. g. Warranty: A fifteen-year written manufacturer’s warranty from date of installation on parts and materials will be provided. h. Label: A label shall be provided on the LED housing. The Contractor shall mark the label with a permanent marker to note the installation date. SECTION 9-29.16(2)B MODIFIES THE 3RD AND 4TH SENTENCES IN THE FIFTH PARAGRAPH AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.16(2)B Signal Housing In the third sentence of paragraph 5, all words following the words “stabilized polycarbonate plastic” shall be deleted. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 19 The fourth sentence in paragraph 5 is replaced with “Visors shall be flat black in color inside and shall be dark green on the outside.” SECTION 9-29.16(3) POLYCARBONATE TRAFFIC SIGNAL HEADS IS DELETED IN ITS ENTIRETY. SECTION 9-29.19 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-29.19 Pedestrian Push Buttons Where noted in the contract, pedestrian push buttons of substantially tamper-proof construction shall be furnished and installed. They shall consist of a 2-inch nominal diameter plunger and be ADA compliant. ADA push buttons shall be Campbell Company, AdvisorTM (AGPS) or Campbell Company, GuardianTM type assemblies or approved equal. The pedestrian push button assembly shall be constructed as shown in the plans. The assembly shall be constructed so that it will be impossible to receive an electrical shock under any weather conditions. SECTION 9-29.20 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-29.20 Pedestrian Signals Pedestrian signals shall be (filled in) Hand/Man with Countdown Display, containing LED type optics only. Countdown pedestrian signals shall be (Gelcore part number PS7-CFF1-01A-18 or approved equal). SECTION 9-29.21 IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.21 Flashing Beacon Delete the words “12 inch yellow displays shall be dimmed 50% after dark”. SECTION 9-29.24 IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.24 Service Cabinets ITEM 9. IS REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9.All service enclosures shall be fabricated from 0.125 inch (minimum) 5052 H 32 ASTM designator or B209 aluminum. The exterior of the aluminum service panel shall be unfinished. SECTION 9-29.24(2) IS REVISED AS FOLLOWS: 9-29.24(2) Electrical Circuit Breakers and Contactors REPLACE THE SECOND PARAGRAPH WITH THE FOLLOWING: Mercury contactors shall not be permitted. SUPPLEMENT THE END OF THIS SECTION WITH THE FOLLOWING THREE PARAGRAPHS: KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 20 Electrical service will be 120 / 240 volts, 60 Hz. AC where and as noted on the Street Lighting and/or Traffic Signal Plans, and include a meter base to allow installation of a power meter. Service conductors shall be stranded copper wires. The smallest service wire shall be #2 AWG USE from the Puget Sound Energy (PSE) connection to the service cabinet. The electrical service cabinet and service point shall be installed by the Contractor where shown on the Street Lighting and/or Traffic Signal Plans. The service panel shall consist of a 2 pole, 240 VAC, 100 amp Main Breaker for control of all power. The panel shall be equipped with a single 1 pole, 120V, 30 amp branch breaker for a traffic signal, four 2 pole, 240 VAC, 20 amp branch breakers for the lighting circuits, a single 1 pole, 120 VAC, 15 amp lighting control breaker, and a single 1 pole, 120 VAC, 20 amp breaker for the GFI receptacle. See Kent Standard Plan 6-96 for service cabinet information. The service panel shall include a switch to bypass the photocell for street light testing. The electrical service cabinet shall be weather tight. The cabinet shall be equipped with a blue core BestTM lock in the cabinet door. See Kent Standard Plans 6-96 for additional information. SECTION 9-29 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-29.26 Traffic Signal Battery Backup Power Unit 1.Features: Insert new feature specifications. 9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS 9-30.1 Pipe SECTION 9-30.1(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe Pipe for water mains shall be cement mortar lined ductile iron Class 52 and conforming to the latest revisions to the ANSI specifications. Connections shall be mechanical or push-on joint with rubber gaskets unless otherwise specified on the plans. 9-30.2 Fittings SECTION 9-30.2(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.2(1) Ductile Iron Pipe Cast or ductile iron pipe fittings shall have the same coating, lining and strength as the pipes to which they are connected. Fittings shall be flanged or mechanical joint. Mechanical joint fitting gaskets shall be vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber gaskets (SBR) in accordance with KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 21 the most current version of AWWA standard C111/A21.11. Flanged joint fitting gaskets shall be full face synthetic rubber gaskets appropriate to meet the required pressure rating in accordance with the most current version of AWWA standard C115/A21.15. 9-30.3 Valves SECTION 9-30.3(1) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 to 16 Inches) Gate valves shall be resilient wedge gate type as manufactured by Clow, American Darling, Waterous, Dresser M&H, Mueller or an approved equal, with epoxy-coated valve interiors. They shall conform to AWWA specifications C-509, and shall have a working pressure rating of 250 psi, unless otherwise specified in the Kent Special Provisions. They shall be iron bodied bronze mounted, non-rising stem, and counterclockwise opening. Valve stems shall be provided with O-ring seals. SECTION 9-30.3(4) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(4) Valve Boxes Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried valves and conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-7. The box shall be of cast iron, 2-piece design with a base corresponding to the size of the valve and the top section. The box shall be coal-tar painted by the manufacturer using industry standards. The valve box top section shall be an Olympic Foundry No. 940. The cover shall be an Olympic Foundry deep skirt No. 940 DS, have the word “WATER” cast into it, and shall be of the non-locking type, unless a locking cover is specifically called for in the Kent Special Provisions or shown on the plans. The bottom section shall be an Olympic VB-1C or approved equal. A 3 feet x 3 feet x 6 inches concrete pad, flush with finish grade, shall be poured around each valve box top section not located within asphalt or concrete finished areas. Valve box covers shall have the lugs or stainless cap screws installed parallel to the direction of water flow. SECTION 9-30.3(5) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts Valve marker posts shall be constructed of Class 3000 cement concrete; shall be 4-inches by 4-inches by 42-inches long with a 6-1/4 inch by 4-inch base; shall contain one number 3 reinforcement bar; and shall otherwise conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-4. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 22 The exposed portion of the marker posts shall be coated with two coats of WHITE concrete paint. The FOG-TITE valve marker post is the pre-approved marker post. SECTION 9-30.3(6) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.3(6) Valve Stem Extensions Valve stem extensions shall conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-7. Valve stem operating nuts shall be no shallower than one and one-half (1 1/2) feet. Valves with an operating nut more than 3 feet below finished grade shall have a solid steel valve stem extension rod assembly, with a rock guard, installed on the operating nut. SECTION 9-30.5 IS REVISED BY DELETING THE FIRST PARAGRAPH AND REPLACING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.5 Hydrants Fire hydrants shall be compression type, break-away (traffic model) hydrants conforming to AWWA C502 except as modified herein. Hydrant types shall be, Clow Medallion, M & H 929, or Mueller Super Centurion. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 23 SECTION 9-30.5(2) IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions Hydrants shall conform with Kent Standard Plan 3-1. Valves and Nozzles – Fire hydrants should have a bottom valve size of at least five inches, one 4-1/2 inch pumper nozzle and two 2-1/2 inch nozzles shall have NST threads, with 1-1/4 inch pentagonal nuts. Painting - Public owned hydrants shall be painted with two (2) coats of Farwest Wonderglow Quickset #1000 (white gloss alkyd enamel). Private hydrants shall be painted with two (2) coats of Farwest Wonderglow Quickset #X 3472 (case yellow gloss alkyd enamel). SECTION 9-30.5(6) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.5(6) Guard Posts Guard posts shall be constructed of Class 3000 cement concrete; shall be 6-feet long and 9-inches in diameter; shall have 5 equally spaced number 3 reinforcement bars with a minimum of 1-1/2 inch cover; and shall otherwise conform to Kent Standard Plan 3-3. The FOG-TITE hydrant guard post is the pre-approved guard post. All other posts require the approval of the Engineer. SECTION 9-30.6 IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6 Service Connections 9-30.6(1) Saddles The body casting of saddles for service connections shall be of malleable or ductile iron, extending at least 160 degrees around the circumference of the pipe at the maximum range and at least 180 degrees when the saddle is tightened on the water main. The saddle body and/or straps shall be stamped with the size range of the saddle. The saddle shall have a groove for the neoprene or nitril gasket in order to prevent gasket movement. The saddle is to be tapped with an I.P. thread. The “U” straps shall conform to the outside diameter of the range stamped on the saddle. The service saddle shall be manufactured by Smith Blair, Romac, or Mueller. Service saddles shall be either double strapped or stainless steel full circumference band. 9-30.6(2) Corporation Stops All corporation stops shall be Ford ballcorp style. The following Ford model numbers shall be used for the respective sizes stated. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 24 Ford Corporation Stops Size Ford Model Number 3/4 inch FB500-3 1 inch FB500-4 1 1/2 inch FB500-6 2 inch FB500-7 Connection to service pipes shall be by Ford pack joints (Section 9-30.6(4)) only. SECTION 9-30.6(3)B IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe Polyethylene service pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) ultra-high molecular weight, high density polyethylene plastic meeting or exceeding the following standards: ID ASTM D-2239, SIDR-7, and PE 3408, AWWA C-901, AWWA C-800, and National Sanitation Foundation Standards and conforming to all other applicable standards. This polyethylene pipe shall be rated at or above a working pressure of 200 psi. Polyethylene plastic pipe shall have a manufactured stainless steel insert stiffener at all compression pack joints. Driscopipe 5100 Ultra-Lien water pipe is an approved product meeting the above specifications. All other products require approval of the City Water Department after submittal of a sample length of pipe and the manufacturer’s product literature. The City is not responsible for the purchase of materials not meeting the above specifications. SECTION 9-30.6(4) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6(4) Service Fittings Ford Pack Joint Couplings (hereinafter Ford Pack Joint Couplings or Pack Joint Couplings) shall be used to connect the service line pipe to the corporation stop and meter setter at both ends. When the plans call for the installation of a new service line from the water main to the setter and/or new setter, the connection between the new service line on the private side of the setter and the existing private service line the Contractor shall use an adaptor. If the existing service line is long enough to connect to the setter directly without the need of an adaptor, a pack joint coupling shall be used for the connection to the setter. Pack joint couplings shall make a tight and permanent joint on type K copper tubing or polyethylene plastic pipe as appropriate. Pack joint couplings shall be made of bronze, and shall have a gasket or O-ring. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 25 Fittings used for copper and/or polyethylene tubing shall be Ford pack joint type only. Ford stainless steel stiffeners shall be used when utilizing compression fittings on polyethylene tubing. Insert Stiffeners The following table is a summary of the insert stiffeners that shall be utilized for the respective pipe sizes stated. Ford Insert Stiffeners Size Ford Model Number 3/4 inch Insert-71 1 inch Insert-72 1 1/2 inch Insert-74 2 inch Insert-75 Pack Joint Couplings The following table is a summary of Ford pack joint couplings that shall be utilized for the respective pipe sizes and types stated. Ford Pack Joint for Straight CTS Pipe Ford Model Number Male Iron Pipe P.J. for CTS C84-34 3/4 inch 1 inch C84-44 1 inch 1 inch C84-66 1 1/2 inch 1 1/2 inch C84-77 2 inch 2 inch Ford Pack Joint for Polyethylene Pipe Ford Model Number Male Iron Pipe P.J. for PEP C86-34 3/4 inch 1 inch C86-44 1 inch 1 inch C86-66-IDR7 1 1/2 inch 1 1/2 inch C86-77-IDR7 2 inch 2 inch SECTION 9-30.6(5) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6(5) Meter Setters Meter setters shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with all applicable parts of AWWA C800. Meter setters shall have dual-purpose end connections for iron pipe thread male adapters on both ends. The meter setter shall have a brace pipe eye to hold the KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 26 setter vertical. The setter shall be equipped with an angle shut off valve with padlock wings, and on the outgoing side a check valve to prevent backflow. The check valve shall be spring loaded, of brass and stainless steel construction with a removable back for maintenance purposes. In no case shall residential meter stops be equipped with a bypass. The following meter setters shall be used for the respective size meter setter listed: Meter Setter Size Type 3/4 inch Ford VH72-15W-11-33 1 inch Ford VH74-15W-11-44 1 1/2 inches Ford VBH76-15B-11-66 L/BP 2 inch Ford VFH77-15B-11-77 L/BP SECTION 9-30.6(7) IS DELETED AND REPLACED WITH THE FOLLOWING: 9-30.6(7) Meter Boxes Meter box requirements vary with respect to water meter size and location of the meter box. Meter boxes shall be as follows: Meter Box Meter Size Location Type 3/4 inch 1Planters Carson 1220-12 Sidewalks, driveways, pavements or adjacent to vehicle turning areas Olympic Foundry #SM29 Meter Box Meter Size Location Type 1 inch 1Planters Carson 1220-12 Sidewalks, driveways, pavements or adjacent to vehicle turning areas Olympic Foundry #SM30 1 1/2 inch to 2 inch 1Planters Carson 1730-15 Sidewalks, driveways, pavements or adjacent to vehicle turning areas Olympic Foundry #SM30 KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 27 3 inch and larger Concrete vaults per Kent Standard Plan 3- 12 1 All plastic boxes shall be constructed of black polyethylene. Irrigation Box DCVA or PRV Size Type 3/4 inch to 1 inch and all PRV’s Carson 1324-15G Green solid lid 1324-2L Extension Boxes - 6 inch Carson 1324B-1L 1 1/4 inch to 2 inch Carson 1730C-1B for 15 inch high Carson 1730D-1B for 18 inch high Green solid lid 1730-P2L SECTION 9-30.6 IS SUPPLEMENTED BY ADDING THE FOLLOWING NEW SECTION: 9-30.6(8) Water Meters Water meters 5/8 inch x 3/4 inch to 2 inch shall be provided and installed by the City Water Department. The City Water Department will not provide or set the water meter(s) until the Contractor has obtained the necessary permit(s), paid all associated fees, and receives a request from the project inspector. All water meters larger than 2 inch shall be provided and installed by the Contractor. All 5/8 x 3/4 and full 3/4 meters shall be the short pattern. All water meters regardless of their respective size shall register in cubic feet. The following table is a list of respective meter sizes and meter types. Meter Size Type 5/8 inch x 3/4 inch Invensys SR 3/4 inch Invensys SR 1 inch Invensys SR 1 1/2 inch Invensys SR 2 inch Invensys SR 3 inch to 6 inch Invensys SRH Compound Compound meters for service connections 3 inches and larger shall be installed within a concrete vault and be constructed in accordance with Kent Standard Plan 3-12. After installation of the compound meter, a certified testing laboratory shall certify the accuracy of the meter. A copy of the certification report shall be provided to the Kent Water Department. KENT SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 9 PAGE 28 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT STANDARD PLANS KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 1 KENT STANDARD PLANS The Kent Standard Plans supplement all other plans which have been prepared for this project, and are considered to be a part of the project plans. The Kent Standard Plans can be obtained online at Standard Plans | City of Kent (kentwa.gov) (https://www.kentwa.gov/city-hall/public- works/construction-projects-and-project-design/kent-design-construction-standards-manual/standard-plans). WATER 3-1 Standard Fire Hydrant 3-2 Temporary Hydrant Connections 3-3 Guard Post 3-4 Valve Marker Post 3-5 Connection to Concrete Cylinder Main (4” to 12”) 3-6 2” Connection to Concrete Cylinder Main 3-7 Valve Box and Operating Nut Extender 3-8 Not used 3-9a Concrete Blocking (sheet 1 of 2) 3-9b Concrete Blocking (sheet 2 of 2) 3-10 Service Connection 1” Service 3-11 Service Connection 1 ½” and 2” Service 3-12a Compound Water Meter with By-Pass (sheet 1 of 2) 3-12b Compound Water Meter with By-Pass (sheet 2 of 2) 3-13 New or Retrofit Pressure Reducing Valve with Box for ¾”, 1”, 1-1/2”, or 2” Service Lines 3-14a Premises Isolation Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly Less Than 3” Diameter 3-14b Premises Isolation Reduced Pressure Backflow Assembly 3” Diameter and Larger 3-15 Irrigation Service Installation 3-16 Single-Family Residential Domestic Waterline/Fireline 3-17 Multi-Family Residential Domestic Waterline/Fireline Up to 2” Demand Size 3-18a Double Check Detector Assembly Above Ground (Demand Greater than 2”) (sheet 1 of 5) 3-17b Double Check Detector Assembly and Vault (Demand Greater than 2”) (sheet 2 of 5) KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 2 3-18c Double Check Detector Assembly Inside Building (Demand Greater than 2”) (sheet 3 of 5) 3-18d Double Check Detector Assembly and Vault Parts List (sheet 4 of 5) 3-18e Double Check Detector Assembly and Vault notes (sheet 5 of 5) 3-19 Standard 6” Blowoff Assembly 3-20 2”, 4” and 6” Combination Air/Vacuum Valve and Vault 3-21 Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assemblies 3-22 Typical Water Main Trench 3-23 Combination Air Valve and Enclosure 3-24 Water Main Crossing Other Utilities 3-25 Water Pipe Encasement Requirements 3-26 Sampling Station SEWER 4-1 Sanitary Sewer Manhole Type 1 48” & 54” 4-2 Special Shallow Manhole 4-3 Not used 4-4 Private Sanitary Sewer Manhole Cover 4-5 Manhole Grade Ring, Safety Steps & Ladder 4-6 Ductile Iron Drop Connection 4-7 6” Cleanout 4-8 Side Sewer Stub Connection 4-9 Residential Side Sewer Connection 4-10 Low Pressure Grinder Pump 4-11 1,500 Gallon Grease Interceptor 4-12 Inside Drop Sanitary Sewer Manhole 4-13 Adjustment of New and Existing Utility Structures to Finish Grade 4-14 Deflected Water Main installation for Gravity Sewer Only STORM 5-1 Catch Basin Type I 5-2 Catch Basin Type II 5-3 Misc. Details for Drainage Structures 5-4 20”x24” Catch Basin Frame 5-5 20”x24” Vaned Grate KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 3 5-6 20”x24” Bi-Directional Vaned Grate 5-7a Through–Curb Inlet Frame 5-7b Through-Curb Inlet Installation 5-8 18”x24” Solid Catch Basin Cover 5-9 20”x24” Solid Catch Basin Cover 5-10 Not used 5-11 Private Round Catch Basin Cover 5-12 15”x22” Rolled Curb Frame and Grate 5-13 Beehive Grate 5-14 20”x24” Rectangle Beehive Grate and Catch Basin Frame 5-15 Debris Cage 5-16 Extended Debris Cage 5-17 Catch Basin with Oil/Water Separator 5-18 Not used 5-19 Beveled End Pipe Section 5-20 Trash Screen 5-21a Shear Gate (sheet 1 of 2) 5-21b Shear Gate (sheet 2 of 2) 5-22 Chain Link Fence, Type I for Ponds Only 5-23 Driveway and Walk Gate for Ponds Only 5-24 Tree Planting 5-25 Shrub Planting 5-26 Trench Infiltration System 5-27 Flow Spreader Option Catch Basin with Beehive Grate 5-28 Critical Area Sign 5-29 Split Rail Fence 5-30 Sample TESC Site Plan 1 Acre and Smaller 5-31 Filter Fabric Fence 5-32 TESC Sediment Trap Earth Berm 5-33 TESC Interceptor Ditch with Rock Check Dams 5-34 TESC Pipe Slope Drain 5-35 Temporary Stockpiling 5-36 Pond Illustration 5-37 Storm Drain Markers KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 4 5-38 Sidewalk Drain for Building Downspout Type 1 5-39a Sidewalk Drain for Building Downspout Type 2 (sheet 1 of 2) 5-39b Sidewalk Drain for Building Downspout Type 2 (sheet 2 of 2) 6-40 Stormwater Pond Sign STREET 6-1 Intersection Geometry Reference 6-2 Principal Arterial Street 7 Lane Section 6-3 Principal Arterial 5 Lane Section and Minor Arterial Street 6-4 Industrial Collector Arterial Street 6-5 Residential Collector Arterial Street 6-6 Residential Collector 6-7 Industrial / Commercial Local Street 6-8 Downtown Overlay – Minor Arterial Street 6-8a Downtown Overlay District Boundary Map 6-9 Downtown Overlay Residential Collector Arterial Street 6-10 Downtown Overlay Industrial/Commercial Local Street 6-10b Naden Avenue from Meeker Street to Willis Street 6-11 Residential - Parking One Side Local Street 6-12 Residential - Parking Both Sides Local Street 6-13 Public Residential Half-Street 6-14 Alley 6-15 Private Street 6-16 Porous Pavement Cross-Section 6-17 Street Median 6-18 Standard Cul-de-Sac Bulb on Residential Street 6-19 Urban Eyebrow on Residential Street 6-20 Typical Elbow on Residential Street 6-21 Standard Hammerhead Private Street Only 6-22 Temporary Cul-de-Sac 6-23 Intersection Landing 6-24a Traffic Calming Traffic Circle (sheet 1 of 2) 6-24b Traffic Calming Traffic Circle (sheet 2 of 2) 6-25 Traffic Calming Gateways 6-26 Traffic Calming Residential Intersection Neckdowns KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 5 6-27 6-28 6-29a 6-29b 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41a 6-41b 6-41c 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 Traffic Calming Arterial/Residential Intersection Neckdowns Traffic Calming Chokers Traffic Calming Speed Cushion (sheet 1 of 2) Traffic Calming Speed Cushion (sheet 2 of 2) Traffic Calming Raised Intersection Bike Route Trail Cement Concrete Curbs Curb and Sidewalk Joint Example Expansion and Contraction/Control Joints Downtown Sidewalk - APPENDIX C Downtown Overlay District Crosswalk - APPENDIX C Curb Ramp Locations - APPENDIX C Cement Concrete Sidewalk Transition to Asphalt Shoulder Sidewalk Thickened Edge and Raised Back of Sidewalk Pedestrian Railing (sheet 1 of 3) Pedestrian Railing Notes (sheet 2 of 3) Pedestrian Railing Base Plate Details (sheet 3 of 3) Residential Cement Concrete Driveway Approach Commercial Cement Concrete Driveway Approach Industrial Cement Concrete Driveway Approach Depressed Sidewalk Alternate Driveway or Private Road Approach Private Street Approach Serving 9 Lots or Less Joint Use Driveway Tract Driveway Slope Example Site Plan Clear Zones Clearance of Roadside Obstacles for Utilities on Existing Shoulder Type Road Intersection/Driveway Sight Triangle Pedestrian Sight Lines Street Tree Locations Street Tree Planter - APPENDIX C Sidewalk Bollard with Receptacle - APPENDIX C KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 6 6-57 Site Grading 6-58 Minor Fills Around Trees 6-59 Cuts or Fills Around Trees 6-60 Walls in Cut Section Public ROW 6-61 Walls in Fill Section Public ROW 6-62 Walls Under Sidewalk Public ROW 6-63 Height Measurement for Perimeter Wall Location 6-64 Flexible Pavement Patching Transverse Cut 6-65 Portland Cement Pavement Patching Transverse Cut 6-66 Flexible Pavement Patching Longitudinal Cut 6-67 Portland Cement Pavement Patching Longitudinal Cut 6-68 Not used 6-69 Pavement Restoration for Window Cuts or Pot Holing 6-70a Mailbox Installation Type 1 (sheet 1 of 3) 6-70b Mailbox Installation Type 2 (sheet 2 of 3) 6-70c Mailbox Installation Type 1 and 2 (sheet 3 of 3) 6-71a Roadway Barricades (sheet 1 of 2) 6-71b Roadway Barricades (sheet 2 of 2) 6-72a Standard Monument, Monument Case, Cover and Riser 6-72b Alternate Diameter Monument Case Riser 6-73 Typical RPM Lane Markings 6-74 Typical Lane Markings 6-75 Thermoplastic Crosswalk Markings 6-76 Thermoplastic Arrows, Stop Bars & Only Legend 6-77 Fire Lane Marking 6-78 Railroad Warning Pavement Markings 6-79 Typical Pavement Markings 6-80 Symmetrical Left Turn Pocket Layout 6-81 Left Turn Pocket at End of Two Way Left Turn Lane Layout 6-82a Sign Post Installation Type A 6-82b Sign Post Base Plate Installation Type B 6-83 Street Name Sign Post Installation 6-84 Ground-Mounted Street Name Signs 6-85 Mast Arm Mounted Street Name Sign KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 7 6-86 City Light Standard 6-86a Strain Relief Detail 6-87 City Post Top Fixture Light Standard 6-88 Downtown Overlay District Gullwing Fixture Light Standard 6-89a Light Standard Foundation and Junction Box 6-89b Eccentric Light Standard Foundation and Junction Box 6-90 Junction Box and Street Light Wire Runs 6-91 Street Light Trench for Conduit Runs 6-92 Example Street Light Schedule 6-93 Not used 6-94 Not used 6-95 Not used 6-96 Service Cabinet, Concrete Base and One-Line Diagram 6-97 Traffic Signal Controller Cabinet Base 6-98 Induction Loop Details 6-99 Induction Loop Installation Notes 6-100 Induction Loop Placement 6-101 Turning Template AASHTO Type P Vehicle 6-102 Turning Template AASHTO Type SU Vehicle 6-103 Turning Template AASHTO Type BUS-40 Vehicle 6-104 Turning Template AASHTO Type WB-62 Vehicle KENT STANDARD PLANS PAGE 8 (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) WASHINGTON STATE PREVAILING WAGES KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE) State of Washington Department of Labor & Industries Prevailing Wage Section - Telephone 360-902-5335 PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540 Washington State Prevailing Wage The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On public works projects, worker's wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements are provided on the Benefit Code Key. Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 05/13/2022 County_ Trade Job Classification Wage Holiday Overtime Note *Risk Class King Asbestos Abatement Workers Journey Level $54.62 5D 1 H View King Boilermakers Journey Level $72.54 5N 1C View King Brick Mason Journey Level $63.32 7E 1 N View King Brick Mason Pointer -Caulker -Cleaner $63.32 7E 1 N View King Building Service Employees Janitor $27.23 5S 2F View King Building Service Employees Traveling Waxer/Shampooer $27.68 5S 2F View King Building Service Employees Window Cleaner (Non -Scaffold) $31.18 5S 2F View King Building Service Employees Window Cleaner (Scaffold) $32.18 5S 2F View King Cabinet Makers In Shop). Journey Level $22.74 1 View King Carpenters Acoustical Worker $68.19 15J 4C View King Carpenters Bridge, Dock And Wharf $68.19 15J 4C View Carpenters King Carpenters Carpenter $68.19 15J 4C View King Carpenters Floor Finisher $68.19 15J 4C View King Carpenters Floor Layer $68.19 15J 4C View King Carpenters Scaffold Erector $68.19 15J 4C View King Cement Masons Application of all Composition $67.41 15J 4U View Mastic King Cement Masons Application of all Epoxy $66.91 15J 41J View Material King Cement Masons Application of all Plastic $67.41 15J 4U View Material King Cement Masons Application of Sealing $66.91 15J 4U View Compound King Cement Masons Application of Underlayment $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Building General $66.91 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Composition or Kalman Floors $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Concrete Paving $66.91 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Curb Ft Gutter Machine $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Curb Et Gutter, Sidewalks $66.91 15J 41.1 View King Cement Masons Curing Concrete $66.91 15J 41.1 View King Cement Masons Finish Colored Concrete $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Floor Grinding $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Floor Grinding/Polisher $66.91 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Green Concrete Saw, self- $67.41 15J 4U View powered King Cement Masons Grouting of all Plates $66.91 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Grouting of all Tilt -up Panels $66.91 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Gunite Nozzleman $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Hand Powered Grinder $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Journey Level $66.91 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Patching Concrete $66.91 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Pneumatic Power Tools $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Power Chipping Et Brushing $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Sand Blasting Architectural $67.41 15J 4U View Finish King Cement Masons Screed Et Rodding Machine $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Spackling or Skim Coat $66.91 15J 4U View Concrete King Cement Masons Troweling Machine Operator $67.41 15J 4U View King Cement Masons Troweling Machine Operator on $67.41 15J 4U View Colored Slabs King Cement Masons Tunnel Workers $67.41 15J 4U View King Divers Et Tenders Bell/Vehicle or Submersible $122.46 15J 4C View Operator (Not Under Pressure) King Divers Et Tenders Diver $122.49 15J 4C 8V View King Divers Et Tenders Diver On Standby $81.04 15J 4C View King Divers Et Tenders Diver Tender $73.60 15J 4C View King Divers Et Tenders Manifold Operator $73.60 15J 4C View King Divers Et Tenders Manifold Operator Mixed Gas $78.60 15J 4C View King Divers Et Tenders Remote Operated Vehicle $73.60 15J 4C View Operator/Technician King Divers Et Tenders Remote Operated Vehicle $68.64 15J 4C View Tender King Dredge Workers Assistant Engineer $73.62 5D 3F View King Dredge Workers Assistant Mate (Deckhand) $73.05 5D 3F View King Dredge Workers Boatmen $73.62 5D 3F View King Dredge Workers Engineer Welder $75.03 5D 3F View King Dredge Workers Leverman, Hydraulic $76.53 5D 3F View King Dredge Workers Mates $73.62 5D 3F View King Dredge Workers Oiler $73.05 5D 3F View King Drywall Applicator Journey Level $68.19 15J 4C View King Drywall Tapers Journey Level $67.91 5P 1 E View King Electrical Fixture Maintenance Journey Level $35.19 5L 1 E View Workers King Electricians - Inside Cable Splicer $97.21 7C 4E View King Electricians - Inside Cable Splicer (tunnel) $104.49 7C 4E View King Electricians - Inside Certified Welder $93.91 7C 4E View King Electricians - Inside Certified Welder (tunnel) $100.86 7C 4E View King Electricians - Inside Construction Stock Person $47.03 7C 4E View King Electricians - Inside Journey Level $90.59 7C 4E View King Electricians - Inside Journey Level (tunnel) $97.21 7C 4E View King Electricians - Motor Shop Journey Level $48.68 5A 1 B View King Electricians - Powerline Cable Splicer $88.89 5A 4D View Construction King Electricians - Powerline Certified Line Welder $81.65 5A 4D View Construction King Electricians - Powerline Groundperson $52.91 5A 4D View Construction King Electricians - Powerline Heavy Line Equipment $81.65 5A 4D View Construction Operator King Electricians - Powerline Journey Level Lineperson $81.65 5A 4D View Construction King Electricians - Powerline Line Equipment Operator $70.02 5A 4D View Construction King Electricians - Powerline Meter Installer $52.91 5A 4D 8W View Construction King Electricians - Powerline Pole Sprayer $81.65 5A 4D View Construction King Electricians - Powerline Powderperson $60.75 5A 4D View Construction King Electronic Technicians Journey Level $59.10 7E 1 E View King Elevator Constructors Mechanic $103.81 7D 4A View King Elevator Constructors Mechanic In Charge $112.09 7D 4A View King Fabricated Precast Concrete All Classifications - In -Factory $18.25 5B 1R View Products Work Only King Fence Erectors Fence Erector $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View King Fence Erectors Fence Laborer $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View King Flaggers Journey Level $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View King Glaziers Journey Level $72.41 7L 1Y View King Heat Et Frost Insulators And Journey Level $82.02 15H 11C View Asbestos Workers King Heating Equipment Mechanics Journey Level $91.83 7F 1 E View King Hod Carriers Et Mason Tenders Journey Level $57.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Industrial Power Vacuum Journey Level $14.49 1 View Cleaner King Inland Boatmen Boat Operator $61.41 5B 1 K View King Inland Boatmen Cook $56.48 5B 1 K View King Inland Boatmen Deckhand $57.48 5B 1 K View King Inland Boatmen Deckhand Engineer $58.81 5B 1 K View King Inland Boatmen Launch Operator $58.89 5B 1 K View King Inland Boatmen Mate $57.31 5B 1 K View King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Cleaner Operator, Foamer $31.49 1 View Sewer Et Water Systems By Operator Remote Control King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Grout Truck Operator $14.49 1 View Sewer Et Water Systems By Remote Control King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Head Operator $24.91 1 View Sewer Et Water Systems By Remote Control King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Technician $19.33 1 View Sewer Et Water Systems By Remote Control King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Tv Truck Operator $20.45 1 View Sewer Et Water Systems By Remote Control King Insulation Applicators Journey Level $68.19 15J 4C View King Ironworkers Journeyman $80.28 7N 10 View King Laborers Air, Gas Or Electric Vibrating $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View Screed King Laborers Airtrac Drill Operator $56.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Ballast Regular Machine $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Batch Weighman $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Brick Pavers $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Brush Cutter $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Brush Hog Feeder $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Burner $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Caisson Worker $56.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Carpenter Tender $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Cement Dumper -paving $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Cement Finisher Tender $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Change House Or Dry Shack $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Chipping Gun (30 Lbs. And $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Over) King Laborers Chipping Gun (Under 30 Lbs.) $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Choker Setter $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Chuck Tender $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Clary Power Spreader $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Clean-up Laborer $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Concrete Dumper/Chute $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Operator King Laborers Concrete Form Stripper $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Concrete Placement Crew $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Concrete Saw Operator/Core $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Driller King Laborers Crusher Feeder $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Curing Laborer $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Demolition: Wrecking Et Moving $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View (Incl. Charred Material) King Laborers Ditch Digger $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Diver $56.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Drill Operator (Hydraulic, $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Diamond) King Laborers Dry Stack Walls $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Dump Person $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Epoxy Technician $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Erosion Control Worker $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Faller Et Bucker Chain Saw $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Fine Graders $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Firewatch $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Form Setter $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Gabian Basket Builders $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers General Laborer $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Grade Checker Et Transit Person $57.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Grinders $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Grout Machine Tender $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Groutmen (Pressure) Including $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Post Tension Beams King Laborers Guardrail Erector $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (Level $56.31 15J 4V 8Y View A) King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (Level $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View B) King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (Level $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View C) King Laborers High Scaler $56.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Jackhammer $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Laserbeam Operator $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Maintenance Person $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Manhole Builder-Mudman $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Material Yard Person $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Motorman -Dinky Locomotive $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers nozzleman (concrete pump, $57.31 15J 4V 8Y View green cutter when using combination of high pressure air Et water on concrete Et rock, sandblast, gunite, shotcrete, water blaster, vacuum blaster) King Laborers Pavement Breaker $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Pilot Car $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Pipe Layer (Lead) $57.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Pipe Layer/Tailor $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Pipe Pot Tender $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Pipe Reliner $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Pipe Wrapper $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Pot Tender $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Powderman $56.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Powderman's Helper $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Power Jacks $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Railroad Spike Puller - Power $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Raker - Asphalt $57.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Re-timberman $56.31 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Remote Equipment Operator $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Rigger/Signal Person $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Rip Rap Person $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Rivet Buster $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Rodder $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Scaffold Erector $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Scale Person $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Sloper (Over 20") $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Sloper Sprayer $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Spreader (Concrete) $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Stake Hopper $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Stock Piler $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Swinging Stage/Boatswain $46.29 15J 4V 8Y View Chair King Laborers Tamper Et Similar Electric, Air $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Et Gas Operated Tools King Laborers Tamper (Multiple Et Self- $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View propelled) King Laborers Timber Person - Sewer (Lagger, $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Shorer Et Cribber) King Laborers Toolroom Person (at Jobsite) $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Topper $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Track Laborer $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Track Liner (Power) $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Traffic Control Laborer $49.50 15J 4V 9C View King Laborers Traffic Control Supervisor $52.45 15J 4V 9C View King Laborers Truck Spotter $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Tugger Operator $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $142.82 15J 4V 9B View Worker 0-30 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $147.85 15J 4V 9B View Worker 30.01-44.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $151.53 15J 4V 9B View Worker 44.01-54.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $157.23 15J 4V 9B View Worker 54.01-60.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $159.35 15J 4V 9B View Worker 60.01-64.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $164.45 15J 4V 9B View Worker 64.01-68.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $166.35 15J 4V 9B View Worker 68.01-70.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $168.35 15J 4V 9B View Worker 70.01-72.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work -Compressed Air $170.35 15J 4V 9B View Worker 72.01-74.00 psi King Laborers Tunnel Work-Guage and Lock $57.41 15J 4V 8Y View Tender King Laborers Tunnel Work -Miner $57.41 7A 4V 8Y View King Laborers Tunnel Work -Miner $57.41 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Vibrator $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Vinyl Seamer $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Watchman $42.08 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Welder $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Well Point Laborer $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers Window Washer/Cleaner $42.08 15J 4V 8Y View King Laborers - Underground Sewer General Laborer Et Topman $54.62 15J 4V 8Y View Et Water King Laborers - Underground Sewer Pipe Layer $55.62 15J 4V 8Y View Et Water King Landscape Construction Landscape $42.08 15J 4V 8Y View Construction/Landscaping Or Planting Laborers King Landscape Construction Landscape Operator $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Landscape Maintenance Groundskeeper $17.87 1 View King Lathers Journey Level $68.19 15J 4C View King Marble Setters Journey Level $63.32 7E 1 N View King Metal Fabrication In Shop). Fitter/Certified Welder $42.17 151 11 E View King Metal Fabrication In Shop). General Laborer $30.07 151 11 E View King Metal Fabrication In Shop). Mechanic $43.63 151 11 E View King Metal Fabrication In Shop). Welder/Burner $39.28 151 11 E View King Millwright Journey Level $69.74 15J 4C View King Modular Buildings Cabinet Assembly $14.49 1 View King Modular Buildings Electrician $14.49 1 View King Modular Buildings Equipment Maintenance $14.49 1 View King Modular Buildings Plumber $14.49 1 View King Modular Buildings Production Worker $14.49 1 View King Modular Buildings Tool Maintenance $14.49 1 View King Modular Buildings Utility Person $14.49 1 View King Modular Buildings Welder $14.49 1 View King Painters Journey Level $47.70 6Z 213 View King Pile Driver Crew Tender $62.69 15J 4C View King Pile Driver Crew Tender/Technician $62.69 15J 4C View King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - $85.00 15J 4C View Compressed Air Worker 0-30.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - $90.00 15J 4C View Compressed Air Worker 30.01 - 44.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - $94.00 15J 4C View Compressed Air Worker 44.01 - 54.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - $106.50 15J 4C View Compressed Air Worker 64.01 - 68.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - $108.50 15J 4C View Compressed Air Worker 68.01 - 70.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - $110.50 15J 4C View Compressed Air Worker 70.01 - 72.00 PSI King Pile Driver Hyperbaric Worker - $112.50 15J 4C View Compressed Air Worker 72.01 - 74.00 PSI King Pile Driver Journey Level $68.64 15J 4C View King Plasterers Journey Level $64.14 7Q 1 R View King Plasterers Nozzleman $67.64 7Q 1 R View King Playground Et Park Equipment Journey Level $14.49 1 View Installers King Plumbers $ Pipefitters Journey Level $94.69 6Z 1G View King Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Plant Operators $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Assistant Engineer $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Barrier Machine (zipper) $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Batch Plant Operator: concrete $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Boat Operator $76.87 7A 11 H 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Bobcat $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Brokk - Remote Demolition $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Equipment King Power Equipment Operators Brooms $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Bump Cutter $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Cableways $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Chipper $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Compressor $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Concrete Finish Machine - $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Laser Screed King Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump - Mounted Or $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Trailer High Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure King Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump: Truck Mount $76.77 15J 11G 8X View With Boom Attachment Over 42 M King Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump: Truck Mount $76.09 15J 11G 8X View With Boom Attachment Up To 42m King Power Equipment Operators Conveyors $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Cranes Friction: 200 tons and $79.20 7A 11 H. 8X View over King Power Equipment Operators Cranes, A -frame: 10 tons and $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View under King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 100 tons through 199 $77.63 7A 11 H 8X View tons, or 150' of boom (including jib with attachments) King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 20 tons through 44 $76.19 7A 11H 8X View tons with attachments King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 200 tons- 299 tons, or $78.44 7A 11 H 8X View 250' of boom including jib with attachments King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 300 tons and over or $79.20 7A 11 H 8X View 300' of boom including jib with attachments King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 45 tons through 99 $76.87 7A 11 H 8X View tons, under 150' of boom(including jib with attachments) King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Friction cranes through $78.44 7A 11 H 8X View 199 tons King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: through 19 tons with $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View attachments, a -frame over 10 tons King Power Equipment Operators Crusher $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Deck Engineer/Deck Winches $76.09 15J 11G 8X View (power) King Power Equipment Operators Derricks, On Building Work $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Dozers D-9 Et Under $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Drill Oilers: Auger Type, Truck $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Or Crane Mount King Power Equipment Operators Drilling Machine $77.53 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Elevator and man -lift: $72.20 15J 11G 8X View permanent and shaft type King Power Equipment Operators Finishing Machine, Bidwell And $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Gamaco Et Similar Equipment King Power Equipment Operators Forklift: 3000 lbs and over with $75.50 15J 11G 8X View attachments King Power Equipment Operators Grade Engineer: Using Blue $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Prints, Cut Sheets, Etc King Power Equipment Operators Gradechecker/Stakeman $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Guardrail Punch $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Hard Tail End Dump $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Articulating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. Et Over King Power Equipment Operators Hard Tail End Dump $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Articulating Off -road Equipment Under 45 Yards King Power Equipment Operators Horizontal/Directional Drill $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Locator King Power Equipment Operators Horizontal/Directional Drill $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Operator King Power Equipment Operators Hydralifts/Boom Trucks Over $75.60 7A 11H 8X View 10 Tons King Power Equipment Operators Hydralifts/boom trucks: 10 $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View tons and under King Power Equipment Operators Leverman $78.33 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Loader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Not Including 8 Yards King Power Equipment Operators Loaders, Overhead Under 6 $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Yards King Power Equipment Operators Loaders, Plant Feed $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Locomotives, All $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Material Transfer Device $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Mechanics: All (Leadmen - $77.53 15J 11G 8X View $0.50 per hour over mechanic) King Power Equipment Operators Motor Patrol Graders $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Mucking Machine, Mole, Tunnel $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Drill, Boring, Road Header And/or Shield King Power Equipment Operators Oil Distributors, Blower $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Distribution Et Mulch Seeding Operator King Power Equipment Operators Outside Hoists (Elevators and $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Manlifts), Air Tuggers, Strato King Power Equipment Operators Overhead, bridge type: 100 $77.63 7A 11 H 8X View tons and over King Power Equipment Operators Overhead, bridge type: 45 tons $76.87 7A 11 H 8X View through 99 tons King Power Equipment Operators Pavement Breaker $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Pile Driver (other Than Crane $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Mount) King Power Equipment Operators Plant Oiler - Asphalt, Crusher $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Posthole Digger, Mechanical $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Power Plant $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Pumps - Water $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Quad 9, Hd 41, D10 And Over $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Remote Control Operator On $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Rubber Tired Earth Moving Equipment King Power Equipment Operators Rigger and Bellman $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Rigger/Signal Person, $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View Bellman(Certified) King Power Equipment Operators Rollagon $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Roller, Other Than Plant Mix $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi -lift $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Materials King Power Equipment Operators Roto-mill, Roto-grinder $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Saws - Concrete $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Scraper, Self Propelled Under $76.09 15J 11G 8X View 45 Yards King Power Equipment Operators Scrapers - Concrete Et Carry All $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Scrapers, Self-propelled: 45 $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Yards And Over King Power Equipment Operators Service Engineers: Equipment $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Shotcrete/Gunite Equipment $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe, $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe: $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Over 30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes, $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: $77.53 15J 11G 8X View Over 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: $78.33 15J 11G 8X View Over 90 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators Slipform Pavers $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Spreader, Topsider Et $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Screedman King Power Equipment Operators Subgrader Trimmer $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Tower Bucket Elevators $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Tower Crane: over 175' through $78.44 7A 11 H 8X View 250' in height, base to boom King Power Equipment Operators Tower crane: up to 175' in $77.63 7A 11 H 8X View height base to boom King Power Equipment Operators Tower Cranes: over 250' in $79.20 7A 11 H 8X View height from base to boom King Power Equipment Operators Transporters, All Track Or Truck $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Type King Power Equipment Operators Trenching Machines $75.50 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Truck crane oiler/driver: under $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View 100 tons King Power Equipment Operators Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Welder $76.77 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Wheel Tractors, Farman Type $72.20 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators Yo Yo Pay Dozer $76.09 15J 11G 8X View King Power Equipment Operators- Asphalt Plant Operators $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Assistant Engineer $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Barrier Machine (zipper) $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Batch Plant Operator, Concrete $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Boat Operator $76.87 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Bobcat $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Brokk - Remote Demolition $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Equipment King Power Equipment Operators- Brooms $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Bump Cutter $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Cableways $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Chipper $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Compressor $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Concrete Finish Machine - $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Laser Screed King Power Equipment Operators- Concrete Pump - Mounted Or $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Trailer High Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure King Power Equipment Operators- Concrete Pump: Truck Mount $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water With Boom Attachment Over 42 M King Power Equipment Operators- Concrete Pump: Truck Mount $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water With Boom Attachment Up To 42m King Power Equipment Operators- Conveyors $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes Friction: 200 tons and $79.20 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water over King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes, A -frame: 10 tons and $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Ft Water under King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 100 tons through 199 $77.63 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water tons, or 150' of boom (including jib with attachments) King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 20 tons through 44 $76.19 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water tons with attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 20 tons through 44 $76.19 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water tons with attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 200 tons- 299 tons, or $78.44 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water 250' of boom including jib with attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 300 tons and over or $79.20 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water 300' of boom including jib with attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 45 tons through 99 $76.87 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water tons, under 150' of boom(including jib with attachments) King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: Friction cranes through $78.44 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water 199 tons King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: through 19 tons with $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water attachments, a -frame over 10 tons King Power Equipment Operators- Crusher $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Ft Water King Power Equipment Operators- Deck Engineer/Deck Winches $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water (power) King Power Equipment Operators- Derricks, On Building Work $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Dozers D-9 Et Under $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Drill Oilers: Auger Type, Truck $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Or Crane Mount King Power Equipment Operators- Drilling Machine $77.53 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Elevator and man -lift: $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water permanent and shaft type King Power Equipment Operators- Finishing Machine, Bidwell And $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Gamaco Et Similar Equipment King Power Equipment Operators- Forklift: 3000 lbs and over with $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Forklifts: under 3000 lbs. with $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Forklifts: under 3000 lbs. with $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water attachments King Power Equipment Operators- Grade Engineer: Using Blue $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Prints, Cut Sheets, Etc King Power Equipment Operators- Gradechecker/Stakeman $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Guardrail Punch $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Hard Tail End Dump $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Articulating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. Et Over King Power Equipment Operators- Hard Tail End Dump $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Articulating Off -road Equipment Under 45 Yards King Power Equipment Operators- Horizontal/Directional Drill $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Locator King Power Equipment Operators- Horizontal/Directional Drill $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Operator King Power Equipment Operators- Hydralifts/boom trucks: 10 $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water tons and under King Power Equipment Operators- Hydralifts/boom trucks: over $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water 10 tons King Power Equipment Operators- Leverman $78.33 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Loader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Not Including 8 Yards King Power Equipment Operators- Loaders, Overhead Under 6 $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Yards King Power Equipment Operators- Loaders, Plant Feed $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Locomotives, All $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Material Transfer Device $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Mechanics: All (Leadmen - $77.53 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water $0.50 per hour over mechanic) King Power Equipment Operators- Motor Patrol Graders $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Mucking Machine, Mole, Tunnel $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Drill, Boring, Road Header And/or Shield King Power Equipment Operators- Oil Distributors, Blower $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Distribution Et Mulch Seeding Operator King Power Equipment Operators- Outside Hoists (Elevators and $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Manlifts), Air Tuggers, Strato King Power Equipment Operators- Overhead, bridge type: 100 $77.63 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water tons and over King Power Equipment Operators- Overhead, bridge type: 45 tons $76.87 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water through 99 tons King Power Equipment Operators- Pavement Breaker $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Pile Driver (other Than Crane $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Mount) King Power Equipment Operators- Plant Oiler - Asphalt, Crusher $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Posthole Digger, Mechanical $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Power Plant $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Pumps - Water $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Ft Water King Power Equipment Operators- Quad 9, Hd 41, D10 And Over $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Remote Control Operator On $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Rubber Tired Earth Moving Equipment King Power Equipment Operators- Rigger and Bellman $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Rigger/Signal Person, $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Bellman(Certified) King Power Equipment Operators- Rollagon $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Roller, Other Than Plant Mix $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi -lift $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Materials King Power Equipment Operators- Roto-mill, Roto-grinder $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Ft Water King Power Equipment Operators- Saws - Concrete $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Scraper, Self Propelled Under $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water 45 Yards King Power Equipment Operators- Scrapers - Concrete Et Carry All $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Scrapers, Self-propelled: 45 $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Yards And Over King Power Equipment Operators- Shotcrete/Gunite Equipment $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe, $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe: $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Over 30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes, $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: $77.53 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Over 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: $78.33 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Over 90 Metric Tons King Power Equipment Operators- Slipform Pavers $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Spreader, Topsider Ft $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Ft Water Screedman King Power Equipment Operators- Subgrader Trimmer $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Bucket Elevators $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Crane: over 175' through $78.44 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water 250' in height, base to boom King Power Equipment Operators- Tower crane: up to 175' in $77.63 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water height base to boom King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Cranes: over 250' in $79.20 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water height from base to boom King Power Equipment Operators- Transporters, All Track Or Truck $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water Type King Power Equipment Operators- Trenching Machines $75.50 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Truck Crane Oiler/Driver: 100 $76.19 7A 11H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water tons and over King Power Equipment Operators- Truck crane oiler/driver: under $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water 100 tons King Power Equipment Operators- Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Welder $76.77 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Wheel Tractors, Farmall Type $72.20 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Equipment Operators- Yo Yo Pay Dozer $76.09 15J 11G 8X View Underground Sewer Et Water King Power Line Clearance Tree Journey Level In Charge $57.22 5A 4A View Trimmers King Power Line Clearance Tree Spray Person $54.32 5A 4A View Trimmers King Power Line Clearance Tree Tree Equipment Operator $57.22 5A 4A View Trimmers King Power Line Clearance Tree Tree Trimmer $51.18 5A 4A View Trimmers King Power Line Clearance Tree Tree Trimmer Groundperson $38.99 5A 4A View Trimmers King Refrigeration Et Air Journey Level $90.01 6Z 1G View Conditioning Mechanics King Residential Brick Mason Journey Level $63.32 7E 1 N View King Residential Carpenters Journey Level $36.44 1 View King Residential Cement Masons Journey Level $46.64 1 View King Residential Drywall Applicators Journey Level $68.19 15J 4C View King Residential Drywall Tapers Journey Level $36.36 1 View King Residential Electricians Journey Level $48.80 1 View King Residential Glaziers Journey Level $28.93 1 View King Residential Insulation Journey Level $28.18 1 View Applicators King Residential Laborers Journey Level $29.73 1 View King Residential Marble Setters Journey Level $27.38 1 View King Residential Painters Journey Level $23.47 1 View King Residential Plumbers Et Journey Level $94.69 6Z 1G View Pipefitters King Residential Refrigeration Et Air Journey Level $90.01 6Z 1G View Conditioning Mechanics King Residential Sheet Metal Journey Level $91.83 7F 1 E View Workers King Residential Soft Floor Layers Journey Level $51.91 5A 3-1View King Residential Sprinkler Fitters Journey Level $53.04 5C 2R View .(Fire Protection). King Residential Stone Masons Journey Level $63.32 7E 1 N View King Residential Terrazzo Workers Journey Level $58.71 7E 1 N View King Residential Terrazzo/Tile Journey Level $24.39 1 View Finishers King Residential Tile Setters Journey Level $21.04 1 View King Roofers Journey Level $59.05 5A 3H View King Roofers Using Irritable Bituminous $62.05 5A 3H View Materials King Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level (Field or Shop) $91.83 7F 1 E View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Boilermaker $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Carpenter $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Crane $39.58 7V 1 View Operator King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Electrician $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Heat Et Frost $82.02 15H 11C View Insulator King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Laborer $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Machinist $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Operating $39.58 7V 1 View Engineer King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Painter $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Pipefitter $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Rigger $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Sheet Metal $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Shipfitter $39.58 7V 1 View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction $39.58 7V 1 View Warehouse/Teamster King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair New Construction Welder / $39.58 7V 1 View Burner King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Boilermaker $47.45 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Carpenter $47.35 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Crane Operator $45.06 7Y 4K View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Electrician $48.92 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Heat Et Frost $82.02 15H 11C View Insulator King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Laborer $47.35 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Machinist $47.35 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Operating Engineer $45.06 7Y 4K View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Painter $47.35 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Pipefitter $47.35 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Rigger $47.45 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Sheet Metal $47.35 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Shipwright $47.35 7X 4J View King Shipbuilding Et Ship Repair Ship Repair Warehouse / $45.06 7Y 4K View Teamster King Sign Makers Et Installers Journey Level $53.62 0 1 View .(Electrical). King Sign Makers Et Installers (Non- Journey Level $34.42 0 1 View Electrical), King Soft Floor Layers Journey Level $54.41 5A 3J View King Solar Controls For Windows Journey Level $14.49 1 View King Sprinkler Fitters (Fire Journey Level $89.49 5C 1X View Protection). King Stage Rigging Mechanics (Non Journey Level $14.49 1 View Structural). King Stone Masons Journey Level $63.32 7E 1 N View King Street And Parking Lot Sweeper Journey Level $19.09 1 View Workers King Surveyors Assistant Construction Site $75.60 7A 11 H 8X View Surveyor King Surveyors Chainman $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View King Surveyors Construction Site Surveyor $76.87 7A 11 H 8X View King Surveyors Drone Operator (when used in $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View conjunction with survey work only) King Surveyors Ground Penetrating Radar $72.30 7A 11 H 8X View Operator King Telecommunication Technicians Journey Level $59.10 7E 1 E View King Telephone Line Construction - Cable Splicer $38.27 5A 2B View Outside King Telephone Line Construction - Hole Digger/Ground Person $25.66 5A 2B View Outside King Telephone Line Construction - Telephone Equipment Operator $31.96 5A 2B View Outside (Light) King Telephone Line Construction - Telephone Lineperson $36.17 5A 2B View Outside King Terrazzo Workers Journey Level $58.71 7E 1 N View King Tile Setters Journey Level $58.71 7E 1 N View King Tile, Marble Et Terrazzo Finisher $49.54 7E 1 N View Finishers King Traffic Control Stripers Journey Level $50.51 7A 1 K View King Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix Over 16 Yards $69.95 15J 111 8L View King Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix To 16 Yards $69.11 15J ill 8L View King Truck Drivers Dump Truck $69.11 15J 111 8L View King Truck Drivers Dump Truck Et Trailer $69.95 15J 111 8L View King Truck Drivers Other Trucks $69.95 15J ill 8L View King Truck Drivers - Ready Mix Transit Mix $69.95 15J 111 8L View King Well Drillers Et Irrigation Pump Irrigation Pump Installer $17.71 1 View Installers King Well Drillers Et Irrigation Pump Oiler $14.49 1 View Installers King Well Drillers Et Irrigation Pump Well Driller $18.00 1 View Installers APPENDIX A - D KHERSON PARK REDEVELOPMENT (INTENTIONAL BLANK PAGE)     APPENDIX A Geotechnical Report and Addendum Geotechnical Engineering Services Report City of Kent—Kherson Park Improvements Kent, Washington for J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC March 29, 2021 Geotechnical Engineering Services Report City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements Kent, Washington for J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC March 29, 2021 1101 South Fawcett Avenue, Suite 200 Tacoma, Washington 98402 253.383.4940 Geotechnical Engineering Services Report City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements Kent, Washington File No. 0410-214-00 March 29, 2021 Prepared for: J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC 2701 1st Avenue, Suite 510 Seattle, Washington 98121 Attention: Drew Coombs Prepared by: GeoEngineers, Inc. 1101 South Fawcett Avenue, Suite 200 Tacoma, Washington 98402 253.383.4940 Clinton J. Lindgren Staff Geotechnical Engineer Lyle J. Stone, PE Associate Geotechnical Engineer CJL:LJS:mce Disclaimer: Any electronic form, facsimile or hard copy of the original document (email, text, table and/or figure), if provided, and any attachments are only a copy of the original document. The original document is stored by GeoEngineers, Inc. and will serve as the official document of record. 3/29/2021 March 29, 2021 | Page i File No. 0410-214-00 Table of Contents 1.0 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT UNDERSTANDING ......................................................................................... 1 2.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES .............................................................................................................. 1 3.0 SITE CONDITIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 1 3.1. Surface Conditions...................................................................................................................................... 1 3.2. Geologic Literature Review ......................................................................................................................... 1 3.3. Subsurface Conditions ............................................................................................................................... 2 Soil Conditions ................................................................................................................................. 2 Groundwater Conditions ................................................................................................................. 2 4.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS .................................................................................................... 2 4.1. General ........................................................................................................................................................ 2 4.2. Site Development and Earthwork .............................................................................................................. 3 General ............................................................................................................................................. 3 Clearing, Stripping and Demolition ................................................................................................. 3 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control............................................................................. 4 Temporary Excavations and Cut Slopes ......................................................................................... 4 Permanent Cut and Fill Slopes ....................................................................................................... 5 Temporary Groundwater Handling Considerations ....................................................................... 5 Surface Drainage ............................................................................................................................. 5 Subgrade Preparation ..................................................................................................................... 5 Subgrade Protection and Wet Weather Considerations ............................................................... 6 4.3. Fill Materials ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Select Granular Fill .......................................................................................................................... 7 Crushed Rock .................................................................................................................................. 7 Gravel Backfill for Walls and Drains ............................................................................................... 7 On-Site Soils and Materials ............................................................................................................. 7 4.4. Fill Placement and Compaction ................................................................................................................. 8 General ............................................................................................................................................. 8 Area Fills and Pavement Bases ...................................................................................................... 8 Backfill Behind Retaining Walls ...................................................................................................... 8 Fill in Non-Structural Areas ............................................................................................................. 8 4.5. Shallow Foundations .................................................................................................................................. 8 General ............................................................................................................................................. 8 Footing Bearing Surface Preparation ............................................................................................. 9 Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure ..................................................................................................... 9 Foundation Settlement ................................................................................................................... 9 Lateral Resistance ........................................................................................................................... 9 4.6. Conventional Retaining Walls and Below Grade Structures ................................................................. 10 Drainage ........................................................................................................................................ 10 Design Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 10 4.7. Stormwater Infiltration Feasibility Assessment ...................................................................................... 11 General .......................................................................................................................................... 11 Infiltration Feasibility .................................................................................................................... 11 March 29, 2021 | Page ii File No. 0410-214-00 5.0 LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................................................... 11 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1. Vicinity Map Figure 2. Site Plan APPENDICES Appendix A. Subsurface Explorations and Laboratory Testing Figure A-1 – Key to Exploration Logs Figures A-2 through A-4 – Logs of Hand Auger Figure A-5 – Sieve Analysis Results Appendix B. Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use March 29, 2021 | Page 1 File No. 0410-214-00 1.0 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT UNDERSTANDING This report presents the results of our geotechnical engineering services for the City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements project. The project site is located in the downtown Kent area at 307 West Gowe Street, as shown in the Vicinity Map, Figure 1. Our understanding of the project is based on discussions with the project team and provided information including a “Concept Plan” prepared by J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC, dated November 6, 2019 and a topographic survey prepared by Pacific Geomatic Services, Inc., dated January 25, 2021. We were also provided the updated “Kherson Park” site plan prepared by J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC dated July 14, 2020. We understand that proposed development consists of constructing a new “Lunar Rover-themed” park. New park features include play structures, picnic tables, planters, concrete walls, and concrete paver pathways and hardscape areas. We also understand that stormwater infiltration is preferred, if feasible. Stormwater facility types have not been developed at this time but may include bioretention and permeable pavement. Stormwater handling for the project will be developed in accordance with the City of Kent Surface Water Design Manual (SWDM). 2.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES The purpose of our services is to complete subsurface explorations at the project site and provide our geotechnical engineering recommendations pertaining to the proposed improvements. Our services have been completed in accordance with our signed agreement for this project executed on March 1, 2021. A list of our authorized services is provided in the signed agreement. 3.0 SITE CONDITIONS 3.1. Surface Conditions The project site consists of a relatively level, irregular-shaped parcel that encompasses about 9000 square feet. The property is bounded by developed and undeveloped commercial properties to the north, 2nd Avenue South to the east, West Gowe Street to the south and a gravel parking lot to the west. The existing park consists of maintained grass areas, vegetated planters and paved walkways. Deciduous trees are located along the southern perimeter of the property. 3.2. Geologic Literature Review We reviewed the Geologic Map of the Tacoma 1:100,000-scale Quadrangle, Washington (Schuster et al., 2015) and the Geologic Map of the Renton Quadrangle, King County, Washington (Mullineaux, 1965). According to both maps, soils at the site consist of artificial fill (Qf or afm), which are described to vary in composition and thickness. Alluvium (Qa or Qaw) is mapped surrounding the artificial fill and typically underlies the fill in the site vicinity. Alluvium is described as loose, moderately to well sorted silt, sand and gravel. March 29, 2021 | Page 2 File No. 0410-214-00 3.3. Subsurface Conditions We explored subsurface conditions at the site by advancing three hand auger explorations (HA-1 through HA-3) at the approximate locations shown on the attached Site Plan, Figure 2. Exploration locations and depths were constrained by existing structures and site infrastructure. Details regarding the subsurface exploration program, including summary logs of the explorations, and our laboratory testing program are provided in Appendix A. Soil Conditions At the surface of each exploration, we observed about 2 to 9 inches of landscaping bark, gravel or sod surfacing. Underlying the surficial material, we observed what we interpret to be two general soil units at the site: (1) fill and (2) alluvium. Each soil unit is described below. 3.3.1.1. Fill Fill material was encountered in all three hand auger explorations. Fill typically consisted of loose to medium dense silty sand with variable amounts of gravel, cobbles and debris. Debris encountered consisted of plastic waste, nails, concrete fragments and brick. Fill material extended to depths between 2 and 2.5 feet below the ground surface (bgs). HA-3 met refusal within the fill material on an apparent brick layer at approximately 2 feet bgs. 3.3.1.2. Alluvium Below the fill in HA-1 and HA-2, we observed what we interpret to be native alluvium. Alluvium typically is comprised of loose to medium dense sand with variable silt content to soft to medium stiff silt with variable sand content. HA-1 and HA-2 were completed within alluvial soils at depths of about 6 and 6.5 feet bgs, respectively. Groundwater Conditions We observed moderate groundwater seepage in HA-1 and HA-2 at depths of 5 and 5.5 feet bgs, respectively. The observed groundwater levels are consistent with those reported in reviewed well logs in the site vicinity. Based on our observations and experience in the area, we anticipate that static groundwater in the project vicinity is relatively shallow, on the order of 5 to 10 feet bgs. We expect that groundwater levels will fluctuate throughout the year typically being at the highest during the winter and spring months. In addition to static groundwater, perched groundwater could also be present at the site. It is common for perched groundwater to be present near contacts, where soil that is more permeable overlies soil that is less permeable (e.g., sand or gravel fill over silt or sand alluvium). The quantity and location of perched groundwater is dependent on the infiltration of surface water. Site grading and fill placement can affect infiltration and therefore, the quantity and location of perched groundwater. 4.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1. General Based on our understanding of the project, observations during our explorations and our experience with similar projects, it is our opinion the proposed improvements can be constructed generally as envisioned with regard to geotechnical considerations. A summary of the primary geotechnical considerations for the project is provided below and is followed by our detailed recommendations. March 29, 2021 | Page 3 File No. 0410-214-00 ■ Based on our explorations, we anticipate two soil units at the project site: (1) fill and (2) alluvium. We expect that the thickness and composition of the fill material at the site varies. Due to variable soils anticipated at foundation elevations, we recommend that new structures be founded on a minimum 1-foot of select granular fill overlying existing soils that have been proof-compacted to a firm and unyielding condition. ■ It is our opinion that due to the presence of intermittent fine-grained soils and relatively shallow depth to wet season static groundwater levels, large scale infiltration at this site is likely not feasible. Even shallower and more dispersed stormwater management, such as bioswales or permeable pavement could require special considerations such as in-situ infiltration testing (Pilot Infiltration Tests [PITs]) and mounding analyses to establish a design infiltration rate. 4.2. Site Development and Earthwork General We anticipate site development and earthwork activities on site will include: clearing and stripping vegetated areas; demolition of existing hardscaping and foundations; site grading; establishing subgrades for paved walkways and small-scale structure foundations; and placing and compacting fill and backfill materials. We expect the site grading and earthwork can be accomplished with conventional earthmoving equipment, although breaker attachments could be required for demolishing old foundations and hardscaping. Clearing, Stripping and Demolition Building areas should be cleared and stripped of all vegetation and organics prior to site development. Based on conditions observed in our explorations, minimum stripping depths at the site will likely be on the order of 4 to 9 inches. However, greater stripping depths could be required to remove localized zones of loose or organic-rich soil, especially in areas of the site currently planted with trees. During clearing and stripping, stumps and primary root systems of shrubs and trees should be completely removed. Voids caused by removal of stumps and/or root systems should be backfilled with compacted structural fill. Based on our explorations, we anticipate soils exposed after stripping could have a high fines content and, thus, be susceptible to disturbance when wet. Care should be taken to avoid allowing these soils to become saturated and disturbed. We provide recommendations for subgrade protection in the “Subgrade Protection and Wet Weather Considerations” section below. Cobbles were occasionally observed in our explorations. Large debris including concrete pieces and brick was also encountered in the fill. The contractor should be prepared for the presence of cobbles, boulders and/or fill debris in areas to be excavated or re-graded. Boulders may be removed from the site or used in landscape areas. Voids caused by obstruction removal should be backfilled with structural fill. Structural elements of the previous buildings and pavements within the footprint of the new improvements should be demolished. Concrete and asphalt can be recycled on site and incorporated into fill soils, provided the resulting concrete, asphalt and soil mixture meets the requirements of fill as described below. During demolition, excessive disturbance of surficial soils may occur, especially if left exposed to wet conditions. Disturbed soils may require additional remediation during construction and grading. March 29, 2021 | Page 4 File No. 0410-214-00 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control Erosion and sedimentation rates and quantities can be influenced by construction methods, slope length and gradient, amount of soil exposed and/or disturbed, soil type, construction sequencing and weather. Implementing an erosion and sedimentation control plan will reduce the project impact on erosion-prone areas. The plan should be designed in accordance with applicable city, county, and state standards. The plan should incorporate basic planning principles, including: ■ Scheduling grading and construction to reduce soil exposure; ■ Re-vegetating or mulching denuded areas; ■ Directing runoff away from exposed soils; ■ Reducing the length and steepness of slopes with exposed soils; ■ Decreasing runoff velocities; ■ Preparing drainage ways and outlets to handle concentrated or increased runoff; ■ Confining sediment to the project site; ■ Inspecting and maintaining control measures frequently. Some sloughing and raveling of exposed or disturbed soil on slopes should be expected. We recommend disturbed soil be restored promptly so that surface runoff does not become channeled. Temporary erosion protection should be used and maintained in areas with exposed or disturbed soils to help reduce erosion and reduce transport of sediment to adjacent areas and receiving waters. Permanent erosion protection should be provided by paving, structure construction or landscape planting. Until the permanent erosion protection is established and the site is stabilized, site monitoring may be required by qualified personnel to evaluate the effectiveness of the erosion control measures and to repair and/or modify them, as appropriate. Provisions for modifications to the erosion control system, based on monitoring observations, should be included in the erosion and sedimentation control plan. Temporary Excavations and Cut Slopes Based on our explorations, it is likely that shallow excavations could experience minor caving. Excavations deeper than 4 feet should be shored or laid back at a stable slope if workers are required to enter. Shoring and temporary slope inclinations must conform to the provisions of Title 296 Washington Administrative Code (WAC), Part N, “Excavation, Trenching and Shoring.” Regardless of the soil type encountered in the excavation shoring, trench boxes or sloped sidewalls will be required under Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA). We recommend the contract documents specify that the contractor is responsible for selecting excavation and dewatering methods, monitoring the excavations for safety and providing shoring, as required, to protect personnel and structures. In general, we recommend that for planning purposes all temporary cut slopes be inclined no steeper than about 1.5H to 1V (horizontal to vertical). This guideline assumes all surface loads are kept at a minimum distance of at least one-half the depth of the cut away from the top of the slope and that seepage is not present on the slope face. Flatter cut slopes will be necessary where seepage occurs or if surface surcharge March 29, 2021 | Page 5 File No. 0410-214-00 loads are anticipated. Temporary covering with heavy plastic sheeting should be used to protect these slopes during periods of wet weather. Permanent Cut and Fill Slopes We recommend permanent slopes be constructed at a maximum inclination of 2H to 1V to manage erosion. Where 2H to 1V permanent slopes are not feasible, protective facings and/or retaining structures should be considered. To achieve uniform compaction, we recommend fill slopes be overbuilt and subsequently cut back to expose well-compacted fill. Fill placement on existing slopes steeper than 5H to 1V should be benched into the slope face. The configuration of benches depends on the equipment being used and the inclination of the existing slope. Bench excavations should be level and extend into the slope face at least half the width of the compaction equipment used. Exposed areas should be re-vegetated as soon as practical to reduce the surface erosion and sloughing. Temporary protection should be used until permanent protection is established. Temporary Groundwater Handling Considerations We observed moderate groundwater seepage at approximate depths between 5 and 5.5 feet bgs in HA-1 and HA-2. We anticipate groundwater levels will vary throughout the year and will generally be highest during the wet season, typically October through May. We expect that groundwater will be encountered if site excavations extend deeper than about 5 feet bgs; however, groundwater could be encountered at shallower depths, depending on the time of year. Groundwater handling needs will typically be lower during the late summer and early fall months. We anticipate that groundwater handling for the proposed improvements can be handled adequately with sumps, pumps and/or diversion ditches, as necessary. Proactive handling of surface water (i.e., grading to reduce ponding) can reduce groundwater handling needs. If site excavations are anticipated to extend deeper than about 5 feet bgs, we should be contacted to address more substantial groundwater handling methods. Ultimately, we recommend the contractor performing the work be made responsible for controlling and collecting groundwater encountered. We can provide more detailed groundwater dewatering methods upon request. Surface Drainage Surface water from roofs, hardscape and landscape areas should be collected and controlled. Curbs or other appropriate measures such as sloping pavements, sidewalks and landscape areas should be used to direct surface flow away from structures, erosion sensitive areas and from behind retaining structures. Roof and catchment drains, if present, should not be connected to wall or foundation drains. Subgrade Preparation Subgrades that will support structures and pavements should be thoroughly compacted to a uniformly firm and unyielding condition on completion of stripping and demolition and before placing structural fill or pavement base fill. We recommend subgrades for structures and pavements be evaluated, as appropriate, March 29, 2021 | Page 6 File No. 0410-214-00 to identify areas of yielding or soft soil. Probing with a steel probe rod or proof-rolling with a heavy piece of wheeled construction equipment are appropriate methods of evaluation. If soft or otherwise unsuitable subgrade areas are revealed during evaluation, which cannot be compacted to a stable and uniformly firm condition, we recommend: (1) the unsuitable soils be scarified (e.g., with a ripper or farmer’s disc), aerated and recompacted, if practical; or (2) the unsuitable soils be removed and replaced with compacted structural fill, as needed. Subgrade Protection and Wet Weather Considerations Site soils encountered in our explorations contain a significant amount of fines and will be susceptible to disturbance during periods of wet weather. Soil with high fines content is very sensitive to small changes in moisture and is susceptible to disturbance from construction traffic when wet or if earthwork is performed during wet weather. When the moisture content of the soil is more than a few percent above the optimum moisture content, this soil can become unstable and it will be challenging to meet the required compaction criteria. The wet weather season generally begins in October and continues through May in western Washington; however, periods of wet weather can occur during any month of the year. In our opinion, earthwork will be most efficient during the summer months or during periods of extended dry weather. If wet weather earthwork is unavoidable, we offer the following recommendations: ■ The ground surface in and around the work area should be sloped so that surface water is directed away from the work area. The ground surface should be graded so that areas of ponded water do not develop. Measures should be taken by the contractor to prevent surface water from collecting in excavations and trenches. Measures should be implemented to remove surface water from the work area. ■ Earthwork activities should not take place during periods of heavy precipitation. ■ Slopes with exposed soils should be covered with plastic sheeting. ■ The contractor should take necessary measures to prevent on-site soils and other soils to be used as fill from becoming wet or unstable. These measures may include the use of plastic sheeting, sumps with pumps and grading. The site soils should not be left uncompacted and exposed to moisture. Sealing exposed soils by rolling with a smooth-drum roller prior to periods of precipitation will help reduce the extent to which these soils become wet or unstable. ■ Construction traffic should be restricted to specific areas of the site, preferably areas that are surfaced with working pad materials not susceptible to wet weather disturbance. ■ Construction activities should be scheduled so that the length of time that soils are left exposed to moisture is reduced to the extent practical. ■ Protective surfacing such as placing asphalt-treated base (ATB), cement treated base (CTB), cement treated subgrades, or haul roads made of quarry spalls or a layer of free-draining material, such as well- graded pit-run sand and gravel may be necessary to protect completed areas from construction traffic. Typically, minimum gravel thicknesses on the order of 24 inches are necessary to provide adequate subgrade protection. Foundation bearing surface protection should also be considered. We provide additional recommendations in the “Shallow Foundations” section of this report. March 29, 2021 | Page 7 File No. 0410-214-00 4.3. Fill Materials Our recommendations for various earthwork materials for use on site are presented below. We recommend GeoEngineers review contractor submittals for earthwork materials to be used on site. Select Granular Fill Select granular fill should consist of well-graded sand and gravel or crushed rock with a maximum particle size of 6 inches and less than 5 percent fines by weight, based on the minus ¾-inch fraction. Organic matter, debris or other deleterious material should not be present. In our opinion, material with gradation characteristics similar to Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) Specification 9-03.9 (Aggregates for Ballast and Crushed Surfacing), or 9-03.14 (Borrow) is suitable for use as select granular fill, with the additional requirement that the fines content is limited as described above and the exception that the maximum particle size can be up to 6 inches. Crushed Rock Crushed surfacing base course (CSBC) and crushed surfacing top course (CSTC) should conform to applicable sections of 4-04 and 9-03.9(3) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. We recommend that crushed rock used as structural fill consist of material of approximately the same quality as CSBC. For pavement sections, CSTC may be used where fine grading or grade control is desired. Gravel Backfill for Walls and Drains We recommend material used for footing drains and in wall drainage zones be of approximately the same quality as “Gravel Backfill for Walls” described in Section 9-03.12(2) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. Alternative materials, such as washed rock, may also be considered provided the fines content is limited to that similar to “Gravel Backfill for Walls.” On-Site Soils and Materials Based on our subsurface explorations and experience in the area, it is our opinion that existing site soils, including existing fill, may be considered for use as structural fill, provided they can be adequately moisture- conditioned, placed and compacted, as recommended, and do not contain organics, debris or other deleterious material. Based on our experience, the silty sand and silt materials present at the site are extremely moisture sensitive and will be very difficult or impossible to properly compact when wet. If earthwork occurs during the wet season, or if the soils are persistently wet and cannot be dried back to near optimum moisture content due to prevailing wet weather conditions, we recommend the use of select granular fill as described above. In our opinion, on-site materials to include recycled concrete and asphalt can be reused as structural fill, provided the material meets the gradation requirements stated above and can be properly placed and compacted. In the case of recycled materials, the resulting mixture should also meet the requirements listed in Section 9-03.21 of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. There could be more stringent limitations on recycled materials in and around landscape areas and bioswales. Topsoil strippings may be placed on site, provided they are placed in non-structural areas that can tolerate significant long-term total and differential settlements. Settlement of organic-rich soils are highly variable and difficult to quantify. Settlement could continue for several years after construction is completed as the organics break down and decompose. Alternatively, topsoil strippings can be hauled off site. March 29, 2021 | Page 8 File No. 0410-214-00 4.4. Fill Placement and Compaction General To obtain proper compaction, fill material should be compacted near optimum moisture content and in uniform horizontal lifts. Lift thickness and compaction procedures will depend on the moisture content and gradation characteristics of the soil and the type of equipment used. The maximum allowable moisture content varies with the soil gradation and should be evaluated during construction. Compaction should be achieved by mechanical means. In general, 8- to 12-inch-thick loose lifts are appropriate for steel-drum vibratory roller compaction equipment. During fill and backfill placement, regular testing of in-place density should be conducted to verify adequate compaction is being achieved. Area Fills and Pavement Bases Fill placed to raise site grades and materials under pavements and structural areas should be placed on subgrades prepared as previously recommended. Fill material placed below structures and footings must be compacted to at least 95 percent of the theoretical maximum dry density (MDD) per ASTM International (ASTM) D 1557. Fill material placed less than 2 feet below pavement sections must be compacted to at least 95 percent of the MDD. Fill placed deeper than 2 feet below pavement sections must be compacted to at least 90 percent of the MDD. Fill material placed in landscaping areas should be compacted to a firm condition that will support construction equipment, as necessary, typically around 85 to 90 percent of the MDD. Backfill Behind Retaining Walls Backfill behind retaining walls should be compacted to between 90 and 92 percent of the MDD. Overcompaction of fill placed directly behind retaining walls should be avoided. We recommend use of hand-operated compaction equipment and maximum 6-inch loose lift thickness when compacting fill within about 5 feet behind retaining walls. Fill in Non-Structural Areas Areas that will not support structures or pavements and can tolerate moderate total and differential settlements will not require structural fill. To limit long-term settlements that could affect site drainage, we recommend fill placed in these non-structural areas be compacted to at least 85 percent of the MDD and generally contain no more than 10 percent organic material by weight. 4.5. Shallow Foundations General We anticipate the proposed structures can be adequately supported on small-scale shallow foundations and slabs-on-grade. Based on the variability of soils observed in our explorations, we recommend footings be founded on a minimum of 1 foot of select granular fill extending to proof-compacted, uniformly firm and unyielding existing fill material or alluvium. Exterior footings should be established at least 18 inches below the lowest adjacent grade. Interior footings should be founded a minimum of 12 inches below the top of the floor slab. Continuous footings should have a minimum width of 18 inches. Isolated column footings should have a minimum width of 24 inches. March 29, 2021 | Page 9 File No. 0410-214-00 Footing Bearing Surface Preparation The foundation bearing surface must be confirmed or compacted, as necessary to a firm, non-yielding condition. Loose or disturbed materials present at the base of footing excavations must be removed or compacted. If soft or otherwise unsuitable areas are revealed during evaluation that cannot be compacted to a stable and uniformly firm condition, the following options may be considered: (1) unsuitable soils be moisture-conditioned and recompacted; (2) unsuitable soils be overexcavated and replaced with compacted structural fill, as needed; or (3) it may be possible to push, seat and compact quarry spalls into soft soils to stabilize the subgrade. Prepared foundation bearing surfaces should be evaluated by a GeoEngineers representative to confirm bearing surfaces have been prepared in accordance with our recommendations. Foundation bearing surfaces must not be exposed to standing water. If water pools in the base of the excavation, it should be removed before placing structural fill or reinforcing steel. During periods of wet weather, concrete should be placed as soon as practical after preparation of the footing excavations. If footing excavations are exposed to extended wet weather conditions, a lean concrete mat can be considered for subgrade protection. Allowable Soil Bearing Pressure For footings prepared as described above bearing on a minimum of 1-foot of select granular fill extending to proof-compacted firm and unyielding existing fill or alluvium, we recommend shallow foundations be designed using an allowable downward soil bearing pressure of 1,500 pounds per square foot (psf). Higher bearing pressures can be achieved on a case-by-case basis with more stringent footing sizing and bearing surface preparation criteria. If this is required or would be advantageous to the design, please contact us for details. This recommended bearing pressure applies to the total of dead and long-term live loads and may be increased by one-third when considering total loads, including earthquake or wind loads. This is a net bearing pressure. The weight of the footing and overlying backfill can be ignored in calculating footing sizes. Foundation Settlement We estimate settlement of footings designed and constructed, as recommended, will be less than 1 inch with differential settlements of less than ½ inch between comparably loaded isolated column footings or along 50 feet of continuous footing. Settlement is expected to occur rapidly as loads are applied. Settlements could be greater than estimated if loose or disturbed soil is present beneath footings. Lateral Resistance The ability of the soil to resist lateral loads is a function of frictional resistance, which can develop on the base of footings and slabs and the passive resistance, which can develop on the face of below-grade elements of the structure as these elements tend to move into the soil. For footings founded in accordance with the recommendations presented above, the allowable frictional resistance on the base of the footing may be computed using a coefficient of friction of 0.40 applied to the vertical dead-load forces. The allowable passive resistance on the face of the footing or other embedded foundation elements may be computed using an equivalent fluid density of 250 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) for undisturbed site soils March 29, 2021 | Page 10 File No. 0410-214-00 or structural fill extending out from the face of the foundation element a horizontal distance at least equal to 2.5 times the depth of the element. These values include a factor of safety of about 1.5. The passive earth pressure and friction components may be combined, provided that the passive component does not exceed two-thirds of the total. The passive earth pressure value is based on the assumptions that the adjacent grade is level and that groundwater remains below the base of the footing throughout the year. The top foot of soil should be neglected when calculating passive lateral earth pressure, unless the area adjacent to the foundation is covered with pavement or a slab-on-grade. 4.6. Conventional Retaining Walls and Below Grade Structures Drainage Positive drainage is imperative behind retaining walls unless the walls are designed to resist hydrostatic forces. We recommend a zone of free-draining material behind the retaining structure with perforated pipes to collect seepage water. Most of the site soils encountered in our explorations contain a significant percentage of fines (material passing the US No. 200 sieve). Fine soils are susceptible to particle migration, potentially clogging the drainage. We recommend one of the following options for drainage behind retaining walls: ■ Drainage material consisting of “gravel backfill for walls” described in Section 9-03.12(2) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. The drainage zone should extend horizontally at least 24 inches from the back of the retaining structure. ■ Drainage material consisting of material similar to “gravel backfill for drains” described in Section 9-03.12(4) of the WSDOT Standard Specifications. The drainage zone should extend horizontally at least 12 inches from the back of the retaining structure. A filter fabric designed for separation should be placed between the gravel backfill and native site soils to prevent soil migration. ■ Waffle boards or drainage mats specifically designed for this application. We recommend that we review drainage mat submittals and plan details if drainage mats are to be used. In below-grade areas where dry interiors are critical, drainage mats can also be combined with gravel backfill. A perforated, smooth-walled, rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe with a minimum diameter of 4 inches should be placed at the bottom of the drainage zone along the entire length of the retaining structure with the pipe invert at or below the elevation of the base of the footing. The drainpipes should collect water and direct it to a tightline leading to an appropriate disposal system. Cleanouts should be incorporated into the design of the drains in order to provide access for regular maintenance. Roof downspouts, perimeter drains or other types of drainage systems must not be connected to drain systems for retaining walls or below-grade structures. Design Parameters Footings for retaining structures should be designed in accordance with the “Shallow Foundations” recommendations above. We recommend retaining structures that are free to deflect at least 0.001H, where H is the height of the retaining structures, and be designed for active earth pressures using an equivalent fluid unit weight of 35 pcf for the level backfill condition. If the retaining structures are restrained March 29, 2021 | Page 11 File No. 0410-214-00 against deflection, we recommend they be designed for an at-rest equivalent fluid unit weight of 55 pcf for the level backfill condition. These values do not include hydrostatic forces. Uniform surcharge loads applied closer than one-half of the retaining structure height may be considered as uniformly distributed horizontal pressures equal to one-third of the distributed vertical surcharge pressure. If the structure will be designed for seismic loads, a uniform seismic pressure of 13.5H psf, where H is the height of the retaining structure, can be included when designing permanent retaining structures for seismic loads. Typically, only retaining walls greater than 10 feet tall or retaining walls that support or could impact inhabited structures are designed for seismic loads. 4.7. Stormwater Infiltration Feasibility Assessment General Stormwater facilities on site will be designed in accordance with the City of Kent SWDM, which generally refers to the 2016 King County Surface Water Design Manual (KCSWDM) regarding determination of infiltration rates. It is our understanding that stormwater infiltration, if feasible, will likely consist of relatively shallow infiltration facilities, such as rain gardens or bioswales. Infiltration Feasibility High groundwater levels at the site will likely impact infiltration potential of on-site facilities. According to the KCSWDM, there is a 3- to 5-foot minimum separation distance between the bottom of an infiltration facility and the maximum wet-season water table. We understand that proposed site improvements will be construed at or near existing grades. Typically, infiltration facilities are established at least 3 to 4 feet below surrounding grade. Based on this understanding and the groundwater levels observed at the site (groundwater on the order of 5 feet bgs), it does not appear that it would be practical to maintain the minimum groundwater separation distance. Because the minimum groundwater separation requirement is not likely to be met, it is our opinion stormwater infiltration facilities are not feasible at this site. If stormwater infiltration is planned for the proposed improvements, in-situ infiltration testing such as a PIT will be required per the KCSWDM. Additionally, we anticipate that groundwater mounding analysis may also be required. We can complete a PIT and/or groundwater mounding analysis to support design of facilities, if requested. 5.0 LIMITATIONS We have prepared this report for J.A. Brennan Associates, PLLC for the City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements project in Kent, Washington. J.A. Brennan Associates, PLLC may distribute copies of this report to the owner (City of Kent) and owner’s authorized agents and regulatory agencies, as may be required for the Project. Within the limitations of scope, schedule and budget, our services have been executed in accordance with generally accepted practices for geotechnical engineering services in this area at the time this report was prepared. The conclusions, recommendations and opinions presented in this report are based on our professional knowledge, judgment and experience. No warranty, express or implied, applies to the services or this report. March 29, 2021 | Page 12 File No. 0410-214-00 Please refer to Appendix B titled “Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use” for additional information pertaining to use of this report. FIGURES µ SITE Vicinity Map Figure 1 Kherso n Park Improvem entsKent, Washington 2,000 2,0000 Feet Data Sour ce: ESRI Stre et Map Notes:1. The locations o f a ll fea tures shown are appr oximate.2. This dr awin g is for information p urposes. It is intende d to assist in showing fea tures discussed in an a ttache d do cumen t. G eoEngin eers, Inc. cann ot guar antee the acc uracy an d content of electron ic files. Th e master file is stored by GeoEn gineers, Inc. and will serve as th e official reco rd of this co mmu nication. Projec tion : NAD 1983 UT M Zo ne 1 0N \\geoengineers.com\wan\Projects\0\0410214\GIS\MXD\041021400_F01_VicinityMap.mxd Date Exported: 03/18/21 by alarson HA-1 HA-2 HA-3 Figure 2 Kherson Park Improvements City of Kent Site Plan P:\0\0410214\CAD\00\Geotech\041021400_F02_Site Plan.dwg TAB:F02 - Site Plan Date Exported: 03/18/21 - 13:55 by gregisterW E N S Notes: 1.The locations of all features shown are approximate. 2.This drawing is for information purposes. It is intended to assist in showing features discussed in an attached document. GeoEngineers, Inc. cannot guarantee the accuracy and content of electronic files. The master file is stored by GeoEngineers, Inc. and will serve as the official record of this communication. Data Source: Aerial from Bing dated 07/2020. Background from j.a. Brennan Associates PLLC dated 07/14/2020. Projection: Washington State Plane, North Zone, NAD83, US Foot Feet 0 Legend 20 20 Hand Auger by GeoEngineers, Inc., 2021 APPENDICES APPENDIX A Subsurface Explorations and Laboratory Testing March 29, 2021 | Page A-1 File No. 0410-214-00 APPENDIX A SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS AND LABORATORY TESTING Subsurface Explorations Soil and groundwater conditions in the project area were explored by advancing three hand augers (HA-1 through HA-3) on March 10, 2021. Locations of the explorations were determined relative to existing site features and are shown on the Site Plan, Figure 2. The locations and elevations of the explorations should be considered approximate. Exploration locations were constrained to some degree by existing utilities and site infrastructure. Explorations were advanced by a GeoEngineers representative using hand auger techniques and a 3-inch- diameter sampler. Hand augers were advanced to depths between 2 and 6.5 feet below the existing ground surface (bgs). The hand augers were backfilled using the soil cuttings generated during excavation. During the exploration program, our field representative continuously monitored the explorations, obtained representative soil samples, classified the soils, maintained a detailed log of each exploration and observed groundwater conditions. Samples were retained in sealed plastic bags to prevent moisture loss. The soils were classified visually in general accordance with ASTM International (ASTM) D 2488 and Figure A-1, Key to Exploration Logs. Summary logs of the explorations are included as Figures A-2 through A-4. Laboratory Test Results Soil samples obtained from the explorations were transported to the GeoEngineers’ laboratory. Representative soil samples were selected for laboratory tests to evaluate the pertinent geotechnical engineering characteristics of the soils and to confirm our field classification. The following paragraphs provide a description of the tests performed. Particle Size Gradation – Sieve Analysis (SA) Sieve analyses were performed on selected samples in general accordance with ASTM Test Method D 6913. This test method covers the quantitative determination of the distribution of particle sizes in soils. Typically, the distribution of particle sizes larger than 75 micrometers (µm) is determined by sieving. Figure A-5 presents the results of our sieve analyses. Percent Fines (%F) Selected samples were “washed” through the US No. 200 sieve to estimate the relative percentages of coarse- and fine-grained particles in the soil. The percent passing value represents the percentage by weight of the sample finer than the US No. 200 sieve (fines). Tests were conducted in general accordance with ASTM D 1140. Test results are presented on the exploration logs at the respective sample depths. Moisture Content (MC) The moisture content of selected samples was determined in general accordance with ASTM Test Method D 2216. The test results are used to aid in soil classification and correlation with other pertinent engineering soil properties. The test results are presented on the exploration logs, as indicated for the sample tested. SYMBOLS TYPICAL DESCRIPTIONS GW GP SW SP SM FINE GRAINED SOILS SILTS AND CLAYS NOTE: Multiple symbols are used to indicate borderline or dual soil classifications MORE THAN 50% RETAINED ON NO. 200 SIEVE MORE THAN 50% PASSING NO. 200 SIEVE GRAVEL AND GRAVELLY SOILS SC LIQUID LIMIT LESS THAN 50 (APPRECIABLE AMOUNT OF FINES) (APPRECIABLE AMOUNT OF FINES) COARSE GRAINED SOILS MAJOR DIVISIONS GRAPH LETTER GM GC ML CL OL SILTS AND CLAYS SANDS WITH FINES SAND AND SANDY SOILS MH CH OH PT (LITTLE OR NO FINES) CLEAN SANDS GRAVELS WITH FINES CLEAN GRAVELS (LITTLE OR NO FINES) WELL-GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL -SAND MIXTURES CLAYEY GRAVELS, GRAVEL - SAND -CLAY MIXTURES WELL-GRADED SANDS, GRAVELLYSANDS POORLY-GRADED SANDS, GRAVELLYSAND SILTY SANDS, SAND - SILT MIXTURES CLAYEY SANDS, SAND - CLAYMIXTURES INORGANIC SILTS, ROCK FLOUR,CLAYEY SILTS WITH SLIGHTPLASTICITY INORGANIC CLAYS OF LOW TOMEDIUM PLASTICITY, GRAVELLYCLAYS, SANDY CLAYS, SILTY CLAYS,LEAN CLAYS ORGANIC SILTS AND ORGANIC SILTYCLAYS OF LOW PLASTICITY INORGANIC SILTS, MICACEOUS ORDIATOMACEOUS SILTY SOILS INORGANIC CLAYS OF HIGHPLASTICITY ORGANIC CLAYS AND SILTS OFMEDIUM TO HIGH PLASTICITY PEAT, HUMUS, SWAMP SOILS WITHHIGH ORGANIC CONTENTSHIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS SOIL CLASSIFICATION CHART MORE THAN 50% OF COARSE FRACTION RETAINED ON NO. 4 SIEVE MORE THAN 50% OF COARSE FRACTION PASSING ON NO. 4 SIEVE SILTY GRAVELS, GRAVEL - SAND -SILT MIXTURES POORLY-GRADED GRAVELS,GRAVEL - SAND MIXTURES LIQUID LIMIT GREATER THAN 50 Continuous Coring Bulk or grab Direct-Push Piston Shelby tube Standard Penetration Test (SPT) 2.4-inch I.D. split barrel NOTE: The reader must refer to the discussion in the report text and the logs of explorations for a proper understanding of subsurface conditions. Descriptions on the logs apply only at the specific exploration locations and at the time the explorations were made; they are not warranted to be representative of subsurface conditions at other locations or times. Blowcount is recorded for driven samplers as the number of blows required to advance sampler 12 inches (or distance noted). See exploration log for hammer weight and drop. "P" indicates sampler pushed using the weight of the drill rig. "WOH" indicates sampler pushed using the weight of the hammer. Key to Exploration Logs Figure A-1 Sampler Symbol Descriptions ADDITIONAL MATERIAL SYMBOLS NS SS MS HS SYMBOLS Asphalt Concrete Cement Concrete Crushed Rock/ Quarry Spalls Topsoil GRAPH LETTER AC CC SOD Sod/Forest Duff CR DESCRIPTIONS TYPICAL TS %F %G AL CA CP CS DD DS HA MC MD Mohs OC PM PI PL PP SA TX UC VS Groundwater Contact Measured groundwater level in exploration, well, or piezometer Measured free product in well or piezometer Graphic Log Contact Distinct contact between soil strata Approximate contact between soil strata Material Description Contact Contact between geologic units Contact between soil of the same geologic unit Laboratory / Field Tests Percent fines Percent gravel Atterberg limits Chemical analysis Laboratory compaction test Consolidation test Dry density Direct shear Hydrometer analysis Moisture content Moisture content and dry density Mohs hardness scale Organic content Permeability or hydraulic conductivity Plasticity index Point load test Pocket penetrometer Sieve analysis Triaxial compression Unconfined compression Vane shear Sheen Classification No Visible Sheen Slight Sheen Moderate Sheen Heavy Sheen 2 inches landscaping bark Gray fine to medium sand with silt (loose, moist) (fill) Gray-brown silty fine to medium sand with gravel and occasional cobbles (medium dense, moist) Gray-brown silty fine sand with occasional organic matter (fine wood fragments, charcoal) (loose, moist) (alluvium) Grades to brown-gray with iron-oxide staining Grades to wet Gray silt with fine sand (soft, moist) BB SP-SM SM SM ML 1 SA 2%F 3 37 28 Moderate groundwater seepage observed at 5 feet;moderate caving observed from 5 to 6 feet bgs 44 28 Notes: See Figure A-1 for explanation of symbols. The depths on the hand-augered boring logs are based on an average of measurements across the hand-auger and should be considered accurate to ½ foot. Coordinates Data Source: Horizontal approximated based on . Vertical approximated based on .Date:3/29/21 Path:\\GEOENGINEERS.COM\WAN\PROJECTS\0\0410214\GINT\041021400.GPJ DBLibrary/Library:GEOENGINEERS_DF_STD_US_JUNE_2017.GLB/GEI8_TESTPIT_1P_GEOTEC_%FSheet 1 of 1Project Number: Project Location: Project: 0410-214-00 Log of Hand Auger HA-1 Figure A-2 Kherson Park Improvements Kent, WashingtonElevation (feet)414039383736Depth (feet)1 2 3 4 5 6 Testing SampleGraphic LogSAMPLE MATERIAL DESCRIPTION GroupClassificationSample NameTestingMoistureContent (%)REMARKS FinesContent (%)Date Excavated Surface Elevation (ft) Vertical Datum Coordinate System Horizontal Datum Easting (X) Northing (Y) Total Depth (ft)3/10/2021 6 42 NAVD88 1293065 142171 WA State Plane North NAD83 (feet) CJL Checked By LJS See "Remarks" section for groundwater observed See "Remarks" section for caving observedEquipment Hand Auger Logged By Excavator GeoEngineers, Inc. Gray fine gravel with silt and sand (medium dense, moist) (fill) Dark gray-brown silty fine to medium sand with occasional gravel and debris (plastic, nail) (medium dense, moist) Brown-gray with occasional iron-oxide staining silty fine sand (medium dense, moist) (alluvium) Grades to gray with occasional organic matter (fine wood fragments), loose Grades to wet GP-GM SM SM 1 2SA 3 15 5/8-inch minus crushed rock Moderate groundwater seepage observed at 5½ feet;moderate caving observed from 5 to 6 feet bgs 16 Notes: See Figure A-1 for explanation of symbols. The depths on the hand-augered boring logs are based on an average of measurements across the hand-auger and should be considered accurate to ½ foot. Coordinates Data Source: Horizontal approximated based on . Vertical approximated based on .Date:3/29/21 Path:\\GEOENGINEERS.COM\WAN\PROJECTS\0\0410214\GINT\041021400.GPJ DBLibrary/Library:GEOENGINEERS_DF_STD_US_JUNE_2017.GLB/GEI8_TESTPIT_1P_GEOTEC_%FSheet 1 of 1Project Number: Project Location: Project: 0410-214-00 Log of Hand Auger HA-2 Figure A-3 Kherson Park Improvements Kent, WashingtonElevation (feet)414039383736Depth (feet)1 2 3 4 5 6 Testing SampleGraphic LogSAMPLE MATERIAL DESCRIPTION GroupClassificationSample NameTestingMoistureContent (%)REMARKS FinesContent (%)Date Excavated Surface Elevation (ft) Vertical Datum Coordinate System Horizontal Datum Easting (X) Northing (Y) Total Depth (ft)3/10/2021 6.5 42 NAVD88 1293100 142208 WA State Plane North NAD83 (feet) CJL Checked By LJS See "Remarks" section for groundwater observed See "Remarks" section for caving observedEquipment Hand Auger Logged By Excavator GeoEngineers, Inc. 5 inches sod Brown silty fine to medium sand with gravel, occasional cobbles and occasional debris (concrete, plastic and bricks) (medium dense, moist) (fill) SOD SM Lawn netting at bottom of sod Hand auger met refusal on apparent red brick layer at2 feet bgs Notes: See Figure A-1 for explanation of symbols. The depths on the hand-augered boring logs are based on an average of measurements across the hand-auger and should be considered accurate to ½ foot. Coordinates Data Source: Horizontal approximated based on . Vertical approximated based on .Date:3/29/21 Path:\\GEOENGINEERS.COM\WAN\PROJECTS\0\0410214\GINT\041021400.GPJ DBLibrary/Library:GEOENGINEERS_DF_STD_US_JUNE_2017.GLB/GEI8_TESTPIT_1P_GEOTEC_%FSheet 1 of 1Project Number: Project Location: Project: 0410-214-00 Log of Hand Auger HA-3 Figure A-4 Kherson Park Improvements Kent, WashingtonElevation (feet)4140Depth (feet)1 2 Testing SampleGraphic LogSAMPLE MATERIAL DESCRIPTION GroupClassificationSample NameTestingMoistureContent (%)REMARKS FinesContent (%)Date Excavated Surface Elevation (ft) Vertical Datum Coordinate System Horizontal Datum Easting (X) Northing (Y) Total Depth (ft)3/10/2021 2 42 NAVD88 1293155 142185 WA State Plane North NAD83 (feet) CJL Checked By LJS Groundwater not observed Caving not observedEquipment Hand Auger Logged By Excavator GeoEngineers, Inc. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0.0010.010.11101001000PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS U.S. STANDARD SIEVE SIZE 2” SAND SILT OR CLAYCOBBLESGRAVEL COARSE MEDIUM FINECOARSEFINE Hand Auger Number Depth(feet)Soil Description HA-1 HA-2 2.25 3.5 Silty sand (SM) Silty sand (SM) Symbol Moisture(%) 37 15 3/8”3”1.5”#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #1003/4”Figure A-5Sieve Analysis ResultsKherson Park ImprovementsKent, Washington0410-214-00 Date Exported: 03/17/2021 Note:This report may not be reproduced,except in full,without written approval of GeoEngineers,Inc.Test results are applicable only to the specific sample on which they were performed,and should not be interpreted as representative of any other samples obtained at other times,depths or locations,or generated by separate operations or processes. The grain size analysis results were obtained in general accordance with ASTM C 136.GeoEngineers 17425 NE Union Hill Road Ste 250,Redmond,WA 98052 #2001”#140 APPENDIX B Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use March 29, 2021 | Page B-1 File No. 0410-214-00 APPENDIX B REPORT LIMITATIONS AND GUIDELINES FOR USE1 This appendix provides information to help you manage your risks with respect to the use of this report. Read These Provisions Closely It is important to recognize that the geoscience practices (geotechnical engineering, geology and environmental science) rely on professional judgment and opinion to a greater extent than other engineering and natural science disciplines, where more precise and/or readily observable data may exist. To help clients better understand how this difference pertains to our services, GeoEngineers includes the following explanatory “limitations” provisions in its reports. Please confer with GeoEngineers if you need to know more how these “Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use” apply to your project or site. Geotechnical Services are Performed for Specific Purposes, Persons and Projects This report has been prepared for J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC and for the Project specifically identified in the report. The information contained herein is not applicable to other sites or projects. GeoEngineers structures its services to meet the specific needs of its clients. No party other than the party to whom this report is addressed may rely on the product of our services unless we agree to such reliance in advance and in writing. Within the limitations of the agreed scope of services for the Project, and its schedule and budget, our services have been executed in accordance with our Agreement with J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC dated March 1, 2021 and generally accepted geotechnical practices in this area at the time this report was prepared. We do not authorize, and will not be responsible for, the use of this report for any purposes or projects other than those identified in the report. A Geotechnical Engineering or Geologic Report is based on a Unique Set of Project-Specific Factors This report has been prepared for the City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements project in Kent, Washington. GeoEngineers considered a number of unique, project-specific factors when establishing the scope of services for this project and report. Unless GeoEngineers specifically indicates otherwise, it is important not to rely on this report if it was: ■ not prepared for you, ■ not prepared for your project, ■ not prepared for the specific site explored, or ■ completed before important project changes were made. For example, changes that can affect the applicability of this report include those that affect: ■ the function of the proposed structure; 1 Developed based on material provided by GBA, GeoProfessional Business Association; www.geoprofessional.org. March 29, 2021 | Page B-2 File No. 0410-214-00 ■ elevation, configuration, location, orientation or weight of the proposed structure; ■ composition of the design team; or ■ project ownership. If changes occur after the date of this report, GeoEngineers cannot be responsible for any consequences of such changes in relation to this report unless we have been given the opportunity to review our interpretations and recommendations. Based on that review, we can provide written modifications or confirmation, as appropriate. Environmental Concerns are Not Covered Unless environmental services were specifically included in our scope of services, this report does not provide any environmental findings, conclusions, or recommendations, including but not limited to, the likelihood of encountering underground storage tanks or regulated contaminants. Subsurface Conditions Can Change This geotechnical or geologic report is based on conditions that existed at the time the study was performed. The findings and conclusions of this report may be affected by the passage of time, by man-made events such as construction on or adjacent to the site, new information or technology that becomes available subsequent to the report date, or by natural events such as floods, earthquakes, slope instability or groundwater fluctuations. If more than a few months have passed since issuance of our report or work product, or if any of the described events may have occurred, please contact GeoEngineers before applying this report for its intended purpose so that we may evaluate whether changed conditions affect the continued reliability or applicability of our conclusions and recommendations. Geotechnical and Geologic Findings are Professional Opinions Our interpretations of subsurface conditions are based on field observations from widely spaced sampling locations at the site. Site exploration identifies the specific subsurface conditions only at those points where subsurface tests are conducted or samples are taken. GeoEngineers reviewed field and laboratory data and then applied its professional judgment to render an informed opinion about subsurface conditions at other locations. Actual subsurface conditions may differ, sometimes significantly, from the opinions presented in this report. Our report, conclusions and interpretations are not a warranty of the actual subsurface conditions. Geotechnical Engineering Report Recommendations are Not Final We have developed the following recommendations based on data gathered from subsurface investigation(s). These investigations sample just a small percentage of a site to create a snapshot of the subsurface conditions elsewhere on the site. Such sampling on its own cannot provide a complete and accurate view of subsurface conditions for the entire site. Therefore, the recommendations included in this report are preliminary and should not be considered final. GeoEngineers’ recommendations can be finalized only by observing actual subsurface conditions revealed during construction. GeoEngineers cannot assume responsibility or liability for the recommendations in this report if we do not perform construction observation. March 29, 2021 | Page B-3 File No. 0410-214-00 We recommend that you allow sufficient monitoring, testing and consultation during construction by GeoEngineers to confirm that the conditions encountered are consistent with those indicated by the explorations, to provide recommendations for design changes if the conditions revealed during the work differ from those anticipated, and to evaluate whether earthwork activities are completed in accordance with our recommendations. Retaining GeoEngineers for construction observation for this project is the most effective means of managing the risks associated with unanticipated conditions. If another party performs field observation and confirms our expectations, the other party must take full responsibility for both the observations and recommendations. Please note, however, that another party would lack our project- specific knowledge and resources. A Geotechnical Engineering or Geologic Report Could Be Subject to Misinterpretation Misinterpretation of this report by members of the design team or by contractors can result in costly problems. GeoEngineers can help reduce the risks of misinterpretation by conferring with appropriate members of the design team after submitting the report, reviewing pertinent elements of the design team’s plans and specifications, participating in pre-bid and preconstruction conferences, and providing construction observation. Do Not Redraw the Exploration Logs Geotechnical engineers and geologists prepare final boring and testing logs based upon their interpretation of field logs and laboratory data. The logs included in a geotechnical engineering or geologic report should never be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings. Photographic or electronic reproduction is acceptable but separating logs from the report can create a risk of misinterpretation. Give Contractors a Complete Report and Guidance To help reduce the risk of problems associated with unanticipated subsurface conditions, GeoEngineers recommends giving contractors the complete geotechnical engineering or geologic report, including these “Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use.” When providing the report, you should preface it with a clearly written letter of transmittal that: ■ advises contractors that the report was not prepared for purposes of bid development and that its accuracy is limited; and ■ encourages contractors to conduct additional study to obtain the specific types of information they need or prefer. Contractors are Responsible for Site Safety on Their Own Construction Projects Our geotechnical recommendations are not intended to direct the contractor’s procedures, methods, schedule or management of the work site. The contractor is solely responsible for job site safety and for managing construction operations to minimize risks to on-site personnel and adjacent properties. Biological Pollutants GeoEngineers’ Scope of Work specifically excludes the investigation, detection, prevention or assessment of the presence of Biological Pollutants. Accordingly, this report does not include any interpretations, recommendations, findings or conclusions regarding the detecting, assessing, preventing or abating of Biological Pollutants, and no conclusions or inferences should be drawn regarding Biological Pollutants as March 29, 2021 | Page B-4 File No. 0410-214-00 they may relate to this project. The term “Biological Pollutants” includes, but is not limited to, molds, fungi, spores, bacteria and viruses, and/or any of their byproducts. A Client that desires these specialized services is advised to obtain them from a consultant who offers services in this specialized field. Information Provided by Others GeoEngineers has relied upon certain data or information provided or compiled by others in the performance of our services. Although we use sources that we reasonably believe to be trustworthy, GeoEngineers cannot warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of information provided or compiled by others. GEOENGINEERS� 1101 South Fawcett Avenue, Suite 200 Tacoma, Washington 98402 253.383.4940 January 13, 2022 J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC 2701 1st Avenue, Suite 510 Seattle, Washington 98121 Attention: Drew Coombs Subject: Report Addendum Geotechnical Engineering Services City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements Kent, Washington File No. 0410-214-00 1.0 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT UNDERSTANDING This report addendum presents stormwater infiltration rate recommendations for the City of Kent – Kherson Park Improvements project in Kent, Washington. We prepared a Geotechnical Engineering Services Report for this project dated March 29, 2021 (2021 Report). Our additional services for this addendum have been performed in general accordance with our Additional Geotechnical Services agreement dated December 17, 2021. In our 2021 Report, we concluded that large scale on-site facilities achieving full infiltration were likely infeasible due to relatively shallow groundwater at the site (on the order of 5 feet below ground surface [bgs]). Based on discussions with you and the project civil engineer (LPD Engineering PLLC), it is our understanding that permeable paver best management practices (BMPs) are planned for the project and will require a design infiltration rate. It is our understanding that the proposed BMPs will be on the order of 12 inches deep and will not require that full infiltration of all generated stormwater is achieved. It is also our understanding that any stormwater that does not infiltrate will be routed to an overflow discharge location. 2.0 STORMWATER INFILTRATION RATE 2.1. General Stormwater facilities on site will be designed in accordance with the City of Kent Surface Water Design Manual (SWDM), which generally refers to the 2016 King County Surface Water Design Manual (KCSWDM) regarding the determination of infiltration rates. Per the KCSWDM, it is our understanding that stormwater facilities requiring full infiltration must be designed using rates obtained from in situ infiltration testing. J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC | January 13, 2022 Page 2 File No. 0410-214-00 Since full infiltration will not be required for the proposed BMPs at this site, in our opinion estimated design infiltration rates based on grain-size analysis correlations and our experience at nearby sites with similar soil conditions (including in situ infiltration testing) is appropriate for design. Our 2021 Report included three hand auger explorations to observe subsurface conditions at the project site. Based on discussions with LPD Engineering PLLC, it is our understanding that the proposed BMPs are planned to be located nearest our HA-3 exploration location. An obstruction that we interpreted to be a brick pavement layer was encountered in HA-3 at about 2 feet bgs. This layer or other similar debris or slabs would inhibit infiltration at that location. We recommend that this be further investigated during construction by excavating test pits to a depth of at least 3 feet below current site grades and extending through any existing fill. If slabs or other debris are present, they should be removed over the footprint of the proposed BMPs prior to construction. We recommend the project construction budget carry a contingency for this additional excavation and debris removal. 2.2. Grain-Size Analysis Infiltration Rate Correlation To provide an estimate of the infiltration rate of the soils observed in the hand auger explorations completed for our 2021 Report, we used the Soil Grain Size Analysis Method (Massmann 2003). Table 1 summarizes corrected long-term infiltration rates based on grain-size characteristics of the samples tested. The long- term rates include the following correction factors and have been adjusted based on our experience. ■FTesting = 0.4 for soil grain size method. ■FGeometry = 1.0 for the proposed infiltration facility widths and depths ■Fplugging = 0.7 (for loams and sandy loams) TABLE 1. LONG-TERM INFILTRATION RATE SUMMARY Exploration Sample Depth (feet) USCS Soil Type Percent Fines Estimated Long-term Infiltration Rate (inches/hour) HA-1 2.25 SM 44 0.3 HA-2 3.5 SM 16 1.5 Note: 1 Infiltration rate based on Soil Grain Size Analysis Method (Massmann 2003) and includes correction factors described in this report. The natural alluvial soils in the project area are variable and soil types should be expected to change over relatively short distances and elevations. Accordingly, we recommend that design of the proposed BMPs be completed using the lower estimated rate shown in Table 1, 0.3 inches per hour. This rate is based on the results of grain-size analysis correlations. We previously completed in situ field infiltration testing (PITs) at a site located less than about ½-mile southwest of this project. Soil conditions at that project were generally similar to those observed at this site and presented in Table 1. The nearby study compared infiltration rates measured in the PITs to those predicted using grain-size correlations at the PIT depths, and it appeared that the grain-size correlations provided a reasonable estimate of the infiltration rate for soils with higher fines content (SM) such as the soils observed at this site. J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC January 13, 2022 Page 3 3.0 LIMITATIONS We have prepared this report addendum for J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC for the City of Kent -Kherson Park Improvements project in Kent, Washington. J.A. Brennan Associates PLLC may distribute copies of this report addendum to the owner (City of Kent) and owner's authorized agents and regulatory agencies, as may be required for the Project. Within the limitations of scope, schedule and budget, our services have been executed in accordance with generally accepted practices for geotechnical engineering services in this area at the time this report was prepared. The conclusions, recommendations and opinions presented in this report addendum are based on our professional knowledge, judgment and experience. No warranty, express or implied, applies to the services or this report addendum. The limitations presented in our 2021 Report apply to this addendum. Please refer to Appendix B titled ·�Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use" of our 2021 Report for additional information pertaining to use of this report addendum. Sincerely, GeoEngineers, Inc. �+ Clinton J. Lindgren Staff Geotechnical Engineer � Lyle J. Stone, PE Associate Geotechnical Engineer CJL:US:mce One copy submitted electronically Disclaimer: Any electronic form, facsimile or hard copy of the original document (email, text, table and/or figure), if provided, and any attachments are only a copy of the original document. The original document is stored by GeoEngineers, Inc. and will serve as the official document of record. ■ GEOENGINEERS C) File No. 0410-214-00 APPENDIX B Cre8tePlay – Fabrication Drawings 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 110295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Site Prep - Cover Page 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 210295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Site Prep - Plan View KHERSON PARK SITE PLAN VIEW A 2 MISSION CONTROL LUNAR LANDER USE ZONE ASTRONAUT LUNAR ROVER LUNAR LANDER 28'-1" 33'-4" 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 310295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Site Prep - Concrete KHERSON PARK CONCRETE PLAN VIEW A 3 7'-2" 2'-3" 6'-10" 2'-8" 6" 31'-3" 1 1/2” DIAMETER CONDUIT (MISSION CONTROL) QTY: 3 POWER IN 100VAC 20AMP DEDICATED GFI CIRCUIT, INSTALLED BY LICENSED ELECTRICIAN. MUST COMPLY WITH LOCAL CODES. 1 1/2” RIGID CONDUIT BY OTHERS 1 1/2” DIAMETER CONDUIT (LUNAR ROVER) 6'-8" 4 PLACES 9'-5" 9'-5" 9'-5" 9'-5" SEE NEXT PAGE FOR CONCRETE SECTIONS 1 1/2” DIAMETER CONDUIT (LUNAR LANDER) 6'-0" 5'-5" 3'-10" 6'-7" 7'-7" LUNAR LANDER CONCRETE PIERS MISSION CONTROL CONCRETE SLAB ASTRONAUT CONCRETE SLAB LUNAR ROVER CONCRETE PIERS 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 410295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Site Prep - Concrete Sections KHERSON PARK CONCRETE SECTION ELEVATION A 4 1'-3" LUNAR ROVER BASE MISSION CONTROL LUNAR LANDER LUNAR LANDER LEGS LUNAR LANDER LEGS Ø1 1/2” CONDUIT (BY OTHERS) 8" 6" POWER IN PAVERSPAVERS 6-1/2” THICK IMPACT ATTENUATING SURFACING 6 1/2" 8” THICK CONCRETE SLAB TYPICAL (VERIFY FOR LOCAL CONDITIONS) MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE WITH #4 (1/2”) REBAR GRID (16” OC) DOUBLE MATS OF REBAR CENTERED IN THE SLAB -OR- FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE MIX EQUIVILENT IN STRENGTH TO MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE WITH #4 (1/2”) REBAR GRID (16” OC) DOUBLE MATS OF REBAR CENTERED IN THE SLAB SUB-GRADE Ø1'-6"Ø4'-0"Ø1'-6" Ø4’-0” X 4’-0” DEEP CONCRETE PIER TYPICAL (VERIFY FOR LOCAL CONDITIONS) MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE WITH REBAR CAGE (SEE NOTES) CENTERED IN THE SLAB Ø1’-6” X 4’-0” DEEP CONCRETE PIER (4 PLACES) TYPICAL (VERIFY FOR LOCAL CONDITIONS) MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE -OR- FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE MIX EQUIVILENT IN STRENGTH TO MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE 4'-0" CONCRETE CURB #4 (1/2”) VERTICAL REBAR 8 PLACES Ø3’-0” RING #4 (1/2”) REBAR 10” (OC) 2'-4 1/2" Ø1’-6” X 4’-0” DEEP CONCRETE PIER (4 PLACES) TYPICAL (VERIFY FOR LOCAL CONDITIONS) MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE -OR- FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE MIX EQUIVILENT IN STRENGTH TO MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE 2” THICK IMPACT ATTENUATING SURFACING 4” THICK CONCRETE SLAB TYPICAL (VERIFY FOR LOCAL CONDITIONS) MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE WITH 6 X 6 WIRE MESH W2.9 X W2.9 W.W.F. FLAT SHEETS, CENTERED IN THE SLAB -OR- FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE MIX EQUIVILENT IN STRENGTH TO MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE WITH 6 X 6 WIRE MESH W2.9 X W2.9 W.W.F. FLAT SHEETS, CENTERED IN THE SLAB ASTRONAUT CONCRETE CURB CONCRETE CURB CONCRETE CURB 3'-0" 1'-6"1'-6" 3'-0" Ø1’-6” X 3’-0” DEEP CONCRETE PIER TYPICAL (VERIFY FOR LOCAL CONDITIONS) MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE -OR- FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE MIX EQUIVILENT IN STRENGTH TO MIN 3,500 PSI CONCRETE 1"2" 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 510295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Site Prep - Deck Heights and Elevation TOP OF BASE UNIT TOP OF MAIN UNIT OVERALL HEIGHT TOP OF WALK THE PLANK LUNAR LANDER ELEVATION A 5 LUNAR LANDER PLAN VIEW B 5 15'-0" 21'-5" 5’-10” (DIMENSION FROM PROTECTIVE SURFACING) 2’-0” (DIMENSION FROM PROTECTIVE SURFACING) TOP OF IMPACT ATTENUATING SURFACING 6 1/2" 2'-8 1/2"2'-6 1/2" 10'-6" 11'-10" 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 610295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Site Prep - Deck Heights and Elevation LUNAR ROVER ELEVATION A 6 ASTRONAUT ELEVATION B 6 6'-1" 5" 2” 1" 2” CONCRETE SLAB TOP OF IMPACT ATTENUATING SURFACING TOP OF IMPACT ATTENUATING SURFACING 2'-3 1/4" 1'-8 1/4" 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 710295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Installation Instructions - Components - New RAMP MISSION CONTROL (650 LBS) MAIN UNIT (3200 LBS) HATCH DOOR ANTENNA LEG 1 (110 LBS) LEG 2 (110 LBS) LEG 4 (130 LBS) LEG 3 (110 LBS) BASE UNIT (150 LBS) WALK THE PLANK PW P/N: ZZCH8536 UNITY PLUNGE SLIDE PW P/N: BPL3177 COLOR: BLUE UNITY PLUNGE SLIDE FOOT BUCK UNITY PLUNGE SLIDE PLATE PW P/N: BFC3867 COLOR: BLUE *WEIGHTS ARE APPROXIMATE 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 810295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Installation Instructions - Components - Existing ASTRONAUT LUNAR ROVER VEHICLE 12/23/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 910295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 7Lifting Instructions LIFTING STRAPS ROUND OR WEB SLING RATING: >9,000 LBS. VERTICAL RATING: >7,200 LBS. CHOKER 1”-8 LIFTING EYE RATING: 9,000 VERTICAL Allow time for the concrete to completely cure before continuing. When lifting the component using the 1” lifting eyes (supplied), ensure the rigging, lifting eyes and straps are rated for the weight of the component. lift as close to straight up as possible. Add rated strapping or rated chainif the acute angle formed by the eyebolt connection is less than 45 degrees (see above). Never lift across the plane of the lifting eyebolt. Ensure the lifting eyebolts are fully seated with the shoulder tight to the component. INCORRECT 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 110295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander - Cover Page SURFACING: 4 1/2” LUNAR LANDER PERSPECTIVE A 1 LUNAR LANDER PERSPECTIVE B 1 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 210295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Overall Dimensions SURFACING: 4 1/2” 2'-4 5/8" 10'-4" 11'-8 1/4" 2'-6 3/8" 4 1/2" PROTECTIVE SURFACE TOP OF BASE UNIT OVERALL HEIGHT TOP OF MAIN UNIT TOP OF WALK THE PLANK LUNAR LANDER ELEVATION A 2 LUNAR LANDER PLAN VIEW B 2 15'-0" 21'-5" 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 310295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Components SURFACING: 4 1/2” HATCH DOOR ANTENNA LEG #3 LEG #4 LEG #1 BASE UNIT LEG #2 RAMP MAIN UNIT SLIDE ROTOMOLDED POLYETHYLENE WALK THE PLANK FRAME: STEEL WELDMENT POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH TOP: POLYETHYLENE COPOLYMER THERMOPLASTIC 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 410295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Installation Connection Details SURFACING: 4 1/2” ALL LEGS TO MAIN UNIT CONNECTION TOP OF RAMP TO MAIN UNIT CONNECTION HARDWARE BOTTOM OF RAMP TO LEG CONNECTION HARDWARE WALK THE PLANK TO MAIN UNIT CONNECTION ANTENNA TO MAIN UNIT CONNECTION HARDWARE BASE UNIT TO MAIN UNIT CONNECTION 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BARREL NUT 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER X2 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” NYLOCK NUT HATCH DOOR TO MAIN UNIT CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BARREL NUT 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BARREL NUT BASE UNIT, WALK THE PLANK, AND SLIDE FRAME TO CONCRETE SLAB CONNECTION 5/8” CONCRETE ANCHOR ALL LEGS TO CONCRETE SLAB CONNECTION 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BARREL NUT1/2” WEDGE ANCHOR 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BARREL NUT SLIDE TO LEG CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BARREL NUT SLIDE TO MAIN UNIT CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 510295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Component Breakdown SURFACING: 4 1/2” BASE UNIT PERSPECTIVE A 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL WELDMENT POLYUREA COATING RAMP PERSPECTIVE B 5 3/4” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 4 TOTAL Ø1” STRUCTURAL TUBE POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH HATCH DOOR PERSPECTIVE - FRONT D 5 3/4” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE ALUMINUM ALLOY HANDLE 3/4” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE HATCH DOOR PERSPECTIVE - BACK E 5 Ø3/4” STRUCTURAL TUBE 4 TOTAL ANNTENA PERSPECTIVE C 5 GALVANIZED CAST IRON FITTINGS 1” SCH40 GALV PIPE Ø16” X 11 GAGE STEEL POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” ALUMINUM CHERRYMATE RIVET ALUMINUM ALLOY HANDLE CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER X2 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” NYLOCK NUT Ø1” STRUCTURAL TUBE CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER CONNECTION HARDWARE DETAILS Ø1/2” VINYL COATED ROMEX 1LB EPS FOAM POLYUREA COATING 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 610295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Legs Breakdown SURFACING: 4 1/2” LEG #1 PERSPECTIVE A 6 LEG #2 PERSPECTIVE B 6 LEG #4 PERSPECTIVE D 6 ALL 4 LEGS CONSTRUCTED AS THE SAME SCH40 PIPE WELDMENT WITH A YELLOW ZINC PLATING FINISH LEG #3 PERSPECTIVE C 6 SCH 40 CAST STEEL REDUCERS 6 EACH LEG Ø1 1/4” STRUCTURAL TUBE LADDER Ø20” X 16 GAGE STEEL 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 710295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Main Unit Breakdown SURFACING: 4 1/2” MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE A 7 GALVANIZED CAST IRON FITTINGS 1” SCH40 GALV PIPE 2” POLYPROPYLENE WEBBING MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE B 7 11 GAGE STEEL YELLOW ZINC PLATING FINISH Ø1” HOLES STAGGERED @ 1 1/4” OC 58% OPEN 3 TOTAL 11 GAGE STEEL YELLOW ZINC PLATING FINISH 5 TOTAL MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE E 7 WEB CLIMBER PERSPECTIVE D 7 GEAR PANEL PERSPECTIVE C 7 MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 3MM ALUMINUM CLAD HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONNECTION HARDWARE 11 GAGE STEEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 3MM ALUMINUM CLAD HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/16” ALUMINUM LARGE HEAD RIVET ±6” OC 3/16” ALUMINUM LARGE HEAD RIVET ±6” OC 1/8” ALUMINUM RIVET ±3” OC GALVANIZED CAST IRON FITTING CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BARREL NUT GEAR PANEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER X2 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” NYLOCK NUT STRUCTURAL STEEL WELDMENT POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH CONNECTION HARDWARE DETAILS 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 810295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Main Unit Breakdown cont. SURFACING: 4 1/2” 11 GAGE STEEL POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH 16 GAGE STEEL BRACKETS POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE A 8 CONNECTION HARDWARE DETAILS 11 & 16 GAGE STEEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” ALUMINUM CHERRYMATE RIVET ±6” OC MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE B 8 3/4” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE FRAME 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE FRAME CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BARREL NUT 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REMOVABLE PANEL 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REMOVABLE PANEL 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REMOVABLE PANEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 16 GAGE STEEL POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH Ø1/2” HOLES STAGGERED @ 11/16” OC 48% OPEN 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 910295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Main Unit Breakdown cont. SURFACING: 4 1/2” MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE A 9 11 GAGE STEEL POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH CONNECTION HARDWARE DETAILS 11 & 16 GAGE STEEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” ALUMINUM CHERRYMATE RIVET ±6” OC MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE B 9 16 GAGE STEEL BRACKETS POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH 3/16” LEXAN 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE FRAME 3/4” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE FRAME CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BARREL NUT 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REMOVABLE PANEL 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE REMOVABLE PANEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BARREL NUT 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 1010295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Main Unit Breakdown cont. SURFACING: 4 1/2” MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE A 10 CONNECTION HARDWARE DETAILS MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE B 10 INTERCOM TO MISSION CONTROL RESCUE/FIRE SERVICE PUSH TO TALK 2 WAY INTERCOM 12 VDC, WEATHER RESISTANT HAND GRIPS CAST TEXTURED URETHANE HANDHOLD DYNAFLEX CAST RUBBER CAST ALUMINUM 16 GAGE STEEL BRACKETS POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH 16 GAGE STEEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” ALUMINUM CHERRYMATE RIVET ±6” OC 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 3/4” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE HANDHOLD CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BARREL NUT HAND GRIP CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BARREL NUT INTERCOM CONNECTION HARDWARE 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 1110295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 11Material Specification Drawing - Lunar Lander Main Unit Breakdown cont. SURFACING: 4 1/2” MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE B 11 WEB CLIMBER PERSPECTIVE C 11 GALVANIZED CAST IRON FITTINGS 1” SCH40 GALV PIPE 2” POLYPROPYLENE WEBBING CONNECTION HARDWARE DETAILS GALVANIZED CAST IRON FITTING CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” BARREL NUT MAIN UNIT PERSPECTIVE A 11 HAND GRIPS CAST TEXTURED URETHANE HANDHOLD CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/8” BOLT 3/8” FLAT WASHER 3/8” LOCK WASHER 3/8” BARREL NUT HAND GRIP CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER HANDHOLD DYNAFLEX CAST RUBBER CAST ALUMINUM 3/4” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE ALUMINUM ALLOY HANDLE CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER X2 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” NYLOCK NUT ALUMINUM ALLOY HANDLE 16 GAGE STEEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” ALUMINUM CHERRYMATE RIVET ±6” OC 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 110295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 4Material Specification Drawing - Mission Control - Cover Page SURFACING: N/A MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE A 1 MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE - BACKSIDE B 1 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 210295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 4Material Specification Drawing - Mission Control - Overall Dimensions SURFACING: N/A MISSION CONTROL ELEVATION A 2 MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE - BACKSIDE C 2 2'-6 3/4" 7'-1" 2'-3 1/4" 2'-7 1/2" 4'-3/4" MISSION CONTROL PLAN VIEW B 2 BACK PANELS TEMPORARILY REMOVED DURING INSTALLATION TO ANCHOR MISSION CONTROL TO CONCRETE 1/2” CONCRETE ANCHOR 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 310295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 4Material Specification Drawing - Mission Control Breakdown SURFACING: N/A MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE A 3 MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE B 3 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONNECTION HARDWARE 3/16” ALUMINUM RIVET ±10” OC MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE C 3 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE BACK PANELS CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER CONNECTION HARDWARE DETAILS MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE D 3 3MM THICK ALUMINUM PANEL POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH 6MM THICK ALUMINUM PANEL POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH 1/4” BOLT 1/4” FLAT WASHER 1/4” LOCK WASHER 1/4” NYLOCK NUT 3MM & 6MM ALUMINUM PANEL CONNECTION HARDWARE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE 1/2” THICK MARINE GRADE HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE BACK PANEL STRUCTURAL STEEL WELDMENT POLYESTER POWDER COAT FINISH 11/15/2021 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2021, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 410295 - Kherson Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 4Material Specification Drawing - Mission Control Breakdown cont. SURFACING: N/A MISSION CONTROL PERSPECTIVE A 4 ALUMINUM ALLOY HANDLE QTY: 4 LENTICULAR PRINTED POLYCARBONATE PAYPHONE ROTARY DIAL QTY: 2 INTERCOM TO LUNAR LANDER RESCUE/FIRE SERVICE PUSH TO TALK 2 WAY INTERCOM 12 VDC, WEATHER RESISTANT LENTICULAR PRINTED POLYCARBONATE ELECTRONIC MEMORY/REACTION GAME LED LIGHTS & SOUND FOR OUTDOOR USE 12 VDC VOLUME KNOB QTY: 9 PUSH BUTTON SWITCH QTY: 2 110˚ WORKING LED LIGHTS 12 VDC, IP65 QTY: 6 WET LOCATION WORKING MOMENTARY TOGGLE SWITCH 12 VDC, IP65 QTY: 10 BACKPRINTED GRAPHIC POLYCARBONATE INOPERABLE HOUR METER BACKPRINTED GRAPHIC POLYCARBONATE LED ILLUMINATED MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON 12 VDC, IP65 BACKPRINTED GRAPHIC POLYCARBONATE LED ILLUMINATED MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON 12 VDC, IP65 SELECTOR SWITCH 9272 Lunar Rover Owner’s Manual 09/03/2019 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 19272 - Lunar Rover PREPARED BY: DVB of 1Components FRONT CAMERA LCRU HIGH GAIN ANTENNA MID CAMERA LOW GAIN ANTENNA CONTROL PANEL TOOLS LUNAR ROVER FRONT BASE BACK BASE Product Disclaimer.  Designs, images, plans  and concepts shown and/or developed during the design phase are intended to indicate general type and quality only. Products offered by Cre8Play, LLC are individually handcrafted and not factory manufactured. The Customer acknowledges that the final product may have subtle variations from the designs, images, plans and concepts and may differ slightly from one piece to another due to material characteristics and handcrafting. These minor variations may include slight color and pattern variations. Therefore, each piece has its own desired uniqueness. All images and concepts are Copyright © 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved - 5121 Winnetka Ave., North. Suite 108. New Hope, MN. 55428. www.cre8play.com Project Number 9272 Project Name: Lunar Rover Kent, Washington Date: October 18, 2019 Cre8Play 5121 Winnetka Ave., North. Suite 108. New Hope, MN 55428. 612-670.8195. info@cre8play.com 10/15/2019 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 19272 - Lunar Rover Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 5Installation Instructions - Lunar Rover Vehicle - Cover Page LUNAR ROVER VEHICLE PERSPECTIVE A 1 10/15/2019 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 29272 - Lunar Rover Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 5Installation Instructions - Lunar Rover Vehicle - Components LUNAR ROVER VEHICLE PERSPECTIVE B 2 FRONT ANTENNA PERSPECTIVE A 2 MIDDLE CAMERA PERSPECTIVE C 2 FRONT CAMERA PERSPECTIVE D 2 FRONT BASE PERSPECTIVE E 2 BACK BASE PERSPECTIVE F 2 10/15/2019 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 39272 - Lunar Rover Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 5Installation Instructions - Lunar Rover Vehicle Move Base halves in place, lifting with the Fork Pockets.Using hardware kit #8-01 (4 places), rig Lifting Straps through the eyebolts. Slide the Back Base up against the Front Base. Bases connect together at 3 places, see above. Remove and save hardware kit #8-01 (4 places). Using the Lifting Fork Pockets, attach the Lifting Straps (qty 4) as shown above. Slide the Rover onto the Bases, lining up the framing inside the wheels and the framing on the Bases. Note the orientation the Front Base is labeled with an “F”, see above. Unstrap from the Rover and save the Lifting Fork Pockets and Lifting Straps. STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 BACK BASE CONNECTION DETAIL BOTTOM VIEW ROVER STRAP LOCATION (4 PLACES) LIFTING FORK POCKET STRAP LOCATION (4 PLACES)LIFTING STRAPS (QTY 4) ROVER BASES LIFTING FORK POCKETS FRONT BASE BACK BASE CONNECTION POINT 3 PLACES FRONT BASE ROVER ON THE BASES - AFTER INSTALLATION FORK POCKETS BASE HALF HARDWARE KIT #8-01 4 PLACES F = FRONT 10/15/2019 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 49272 - Lunar Rover Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 5Installation Instructions - Lunar Rover Vehicle Slide the Middle Camera over the Console Bar. Fasten together using hardware kit #8-02. Use Blue Loctite on fastener. Line up the Weld Nuts on the bottom of the Front Camera with the Front Camera Base attached to the Rover. From the bottom side of the Front Camera Base, fasten together using hardware kit #8-03 (4 places). Use Blue Loctite on fasteners. Slide the Black Muffler from hardware kit #8-05 onto the Front Antenna as shown above. Then slide the Front Antenna into the Front Antenna Bracket on the Rover. Fasten together using hardware kit #8-04 (2 places). Then slide the Black Muffler from hardware kit #8-05 down until flush with the top of the Front Antenna Bracket. From the backside, fasten Black Muffler from hardware kit #8-05 to the Front Antenna Bracket using hardware kit #8-05 (2 places). Use Blue Loctite on fasteners. STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6 CONSOLE BAR MIDDLE CAMERA HARDWARE KIT #8-02 WELD NUTS ON BOTTOM SIDE OF FRONT CAMERA 4 PLACES FRONT CAMERA BASE FRONT CAMERA HARDWARE KIT #8-03 4 PLACES FRONT ANTENNA BLACK MUFFLER FROM HARDWARE KIT #8-05 HARDWARE KIT #8-04 2 PLACES HARDWARE KIT #8-05 2 PLACES FRONT ANTENNA BRACKET BLACK MUFFLER FROM HARDWARE KIT #8-05 FRONT ANTENNA BRACKET SMALL SCREW HOLES ORIENTED DOWN 10/15/2019 All images and concepts are Copyright © 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified. PAGE: 59272 - Lunar Rover Park PREPARED BY: DAS of 5Installation Instructions - Lunar Rover Vehicle - Hardware LUNAR ROVER VEHICLE - HARDWARE HARDWARE KIT 8-01 1” LIFTING EYE BOLT X4 HARDWARE KIT 8-02 1/4” X 1 1/4” BUTTON HEAD, PIN-IN, SS BOLT X1 1/4" BARREL NUT, SS X1 HARDWARE KIT 8-03 3/8” X 6” BUTTON HEAD, PIN-IN, SS BOLT X4 3/8" FLAT WASHER, SS X4 3/8" LOCK WASHER, SS X4 HARDWARE KIT 8-04 1/4” X 1 1/2” BUTTON HEAD, PIN-IN, SS BOLT X2 1/4" BARREL NUT, SS X2 HARDWARE KIT 8-05 BLACK MUFFLER X1 #6-32 X 1/2” OVAL HEAD MACHINE SCREW X2 BLUE LOCTITE BOTTLE X1 EXTRA HARDWARE X1 HARDWARE KIT #8-01 EYE BOLT APPLICATION HARDWARE KIT #8-02 THROUGH BOLT APPLICATION HARDWARE KIT #8-04 THROUGH BOLT APPLICATION BH BOLT BARREL NUT BARREL NUT BH BOLT EYE BOLT ABCDBack of PanelACDB10/02/2019All images and concepts are Copyright 2019, Cre8Play, LLC - All rights reserved. Drawings are not to scale unless otherwise specified.9272 LRV Panel Wiring DiagramTerminal Block Location8-AA Battery Pack (12VDC)(Can be hard wired with 12vdc x 2a)5.5mm ConnectorTerminal Block All maintenance recommendations listed by CRE8PLAY are intended to be a guide only. How frequently you inspect your play space will depend on its type of equipment, usage, environment, weather conditions, local or state regulations, or insurance requirements. While the purpose of this overview is to make you aware of considerations in your routine maintenance program, it is not to be considered an all inclusive list. We do not want you to rely upon this overview in lieu of the normal safety inspections you might otherwise conduct. Please do not construe our failure to either itemize any particular maintenance activity or list any particular condition as a statement that none is needed or requires attention. We volunteer these comments in the interest of safety while, at the same time, advising you of the restricted context in which they are given. The entire surrounding area of the play environment should be incorporated into your maintenance and inspection program. It is important to establish a routine maintenance and inspection program, and follow it. There are several different levels of maintenance and inspections that you could plan for: daily/weekly maintenance, periodic maintenance (bi-monthly) and annual inspections. For maintenance you may want to designate specific members of your staff. As for inspections, you may want to consider a certified playground inspector or to train a member of your maintenance staff. A certified playground inspector can be found through your play-equipment company or The National Program Safety Program. It is highly recommended that the maintenance person or department have the proper training. Below are two available resources for training: National Recreation & Park Association (NRPA) NPSI Program Coordinator La Jolla Office (main) 1020 Prospect Street, Suite 250 La Jolla, CA 92037 Tel: 858-551-9916 www.activeparks.org National Program for Playground Safety (NPPS) School of Health, Physical Education & Leisure Services WRC 205, University of Iowa Cedar Falls, IA 50614-0168 Tel: 1-800-554-PLAY www.playgroundsafety.org The current standard of care is primarily determined by two organizations. It includes the United States Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) and the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Both organizations have created guidelines for these inspections, along with certification classes in order to become a trained inspector. The CPSC is responsible for issuing the Handbook for Public Playground Safety, Publication Number 325. You can download this document at www.cpsc.gov or call 1-800-638-2772. In addition to the CPSC standards, the ASTM has developed voluntary safety standards for playground equipment. ASTM document F1487 “Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use” lays out these standards. Visit www.astm.org to obtain this document. There may also be state or local requirements that need to be followed for your type of facility. The following are examples of specific areas to be inspected, but a complete inspection should include all aspects of the current CPSC Guidelines and ASTM Standards. Daily/Weakly Maintenance: A daily inspection is a frequent visual check on the play space and its general surroundings. This should include, but not limited to: x Note and report any loose fasteners, broken equipment, splinters and incidents of vandalism. x Ensure that safety zones are free of hazards like trash, bottles, etc. x Pick up litter or trash. x Check loose-fill safety surfacing in and around the play equipment, with particular attention to high-use areas such as swings, slide exits and climbers. It helps to spend a few minutes raking loose-fill surfacing evenly. Routine Maintenance: It is suggested that you have a weekly maintenance of your play space, along with your daily maintenance. Weekly maintenance is very similar to a daily maintenance, but should be a more in- depth review of your play space. Some things to consider for routine inspections are: x General environment and upkeep. x General hazards. x Equipment deterioration. x Security of bolts, nuts, and fasteners. Annual Inspection: Playgrounds will need the following inspection on an annual basis, as well as the routine maintenance throughout the year. A trained professional is best equipped to perform this function. . x Inspect key areas for signs of wear, tear, and vandalism. x Check and tighten all bolts, nuts, and fasteners. x Lubricate any moving parts. x Measure, evaluate, and make recommendations on the condition and depth of safety surfacing. x Review any specific requirements for maintenance from the play-equipment supplier. x Inspect for non-compliant safety issues.  All equipment should be installed over an impact attenuating surface material. NEVER INSTALL PLAY EQUIPMENT ON CONCRETE OR ASPHALT. A fall on a hard surface can result in serious injury to the equipment user. xNever modify or add components not intended for use with this product. xRegular maintenance is necessary on this and all park and recreational equipment to ensure the safety of the user. xProper maintenance of CRE8PLAY equipment requires regular tightening of all bolts, nuts, and set screws. xCheck the entire playground area for miscellaneous debris or litter. xCheck for any damage to equipment or other playground features caused by vandalism or weara major factor in injury-causing situations; for example, check for any broken or missing handrails, guardrails, protective barricades, or steps and rungs on ladders and climbers. Also look for any damage to fences, benches or signs on the playground. xCheck the condition of the rules/age appropriate signage. Is it present, visible and in good condition? Custom Play Environments cre8play.com | 612.670.8195 WARNING INSTALLATION OVER A HARD SURFACE SUCH AS CONCRETE, ASPHALT, OR PACKED EARTH MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH FROM FALLS. WARNINGTHE REMOVAL OF HELMETS, HOODS, DRAWSTRINGS, AND ACCESSORIES AROUND THE NECK IS RECOMMENDED TO PREVENT ENTANGLEMENT AND STRANGULATION. 2-5 years old. Adult supervision is strongly recommended. This play equipment has been designed for children ! PLAY EQUIPMENT AND/OR SURFACING MAY BE HOT. ® Custom Play Environments cre8play.com | 612.670.8195 WARNING INSTALLATION OVER A HARD SURFACE SUCH AS CONCRETE, ASPHALT, OR PACKED EARTH MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH FROM FALLS. WARNINGTHE REMOVAL OF HELMETS, HOODS, DRAWSTRINGS, AND ACCESSORIES AROUND THE NECK IS RECOMMENDED TO PREVENT ENTANGLEMENT AND STRANGULATION. 2-12 years old. Adult supervision is strongly recommended. This play equipment has been designed for children ! PLAY EQUIPMENT AND/OR SURFACING MAY BE HOT. ® Custom Play Environments cre8play.com | 612.670.8195 WARNING INSTALLATION OVER A HARD SURFACE SUCH AS CONCRETE, ASPHALT, OR PACKED EARTH MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH FROM FALLS. WARNINGTHE REMOVAL OF HELMETS, HOODS, DRAWSTRINGS, AND ACCESSORIES AROUND THE NECK IS RECOMMENDED TO PREVENT ENTANGLEMENT AND STRANGULATION. 5-12 years old. Adult supervision is strongly recommended. This play equipment has been designed for children ! PLAY EQUIPMENT AND/OR SURFACING MAY BE HOT. ® x Check for adequate loose fill safety surfacing under and around all play equipment, and for surfacing materials that have deteriorated. x Inspect rubber surface areas for damage or deterioration. x Check all equipment and other playground features for any hazards that may have emerged. Check for sharp points, corners, and edges; for example, check the slides and sliding surface of slide chutes for sharp or rough edges caused by deterioration. x Check for protrusions and projections. x Check for missing or damaged protective caps or plugs. x Check for potential clothing entanglement hazards, such as open S-hooks. x Check for crush and shearing points or exposed moving parts. x Check for areas where a child’s head or body parts may be entrapped. x Check for trip hazards, such as exposed footings on anchoring devices and rocks, roots, or any other environmental obstacles in the play area. x Check all equipment and other playground features for rust, rot, cracks, and splinters, with special attention to possible corrosion where structures come in contact with the ground. x Check for unstable anchoring of equipment. 
 Sure Klean® Light Duty Concrete Cleaner Cleaning Specification Specifier Note: The information provided below is intended to guide the Architect in developing specifications for products manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc. and should not be viewed as a complete source of information about the product(s). The Architect should always refer to the Product Data Sheet and MSDS for additional recommendations and for safety information Specifier Note: Paragraph below is for PART 1 GENERAL, Quality Assurance. Test Area Test a minimum 4 ft. by 4 ft. area on each type of masonry. Use manufacturer’s application instructions. Let the test panel dry 3 to 7 days before inspection. Keep test panels available for comparison throughout the cleaning project. Specifier Note: Paragraphs below are for PART 2 PRODUCTS, Manufacturers and Products. Manufacturer: PROSOCO, Inc., 3741 Greenway Circle, Lawrence, KS 66046. Phone: (800) 255-4255; Fax: (785) 830-9797. E-mail: CustomerCare@prosoco.com Product Description Sure Klean® Light Duty Concrete Cleaner is a general-purpose, non-etching acidic cleaner that removes rust, mud, atmospheric dirt, mortar smears and other stains without altering the surface texture. Light Duty Concrete Cleaner removes common construction and atmospheric staining from smooth architectural and engineered concrete. Light Duty Concrete Cleaner adds depth to colors, brightens white matrices and exposed aggregate. Technical Data FORM:&Pale&yellow&liquid SPECIFIC&GRAVITY:&1.129 pH:&0.976&(at&1:2&dilution) WT/GAL:&9.39&pounds TOTAL&SOLIDS:&not&applicable VOC&CONTENT:&not&applicable FLASH&POINT:&not&applicable FREEZE&POINT:&12&degrees&F&(&T11&degrees&C) SHELF&LIFE:&&3&years&in&tightly&sealed,&unopened&container Limitations •Acidic contents may damage polished masonry, some non masonry and acid-sensitive surfaces. •Not for use on treated low-E glass; acrylic or polycarbonate sheet glazing; and glazing with surface-applied reflective, metallic or other synthetic coatings and films. Specifier Note: Paragraphs below are for PART 3 EXECUTION, Installation. Application Before applying, read “Preparation” and “Safety Information” sections in the Manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet for Light Duty Concrete Cleaner. Dilute Light Duty Concrete Cleaner concentrate with 2-6 parts water. Refer to Product Data Sheet for recommended dilution for intended use. 1. Always prewet surface with fresh water. When cleaning vertical surfaces, keep lower areas wet to avoid streaks. 2. Apply diluted cleaning solution directly to surface with recommended masonry brush or low-pressure spray. 3. Let cleaner stay on the surface for 3-5 minutes or until stains are gone. 4. Reapply cleaner and rinse thoroughly with fresh water to get all residues off the surface. If pressure-rinsing equipment is not available, brush the surface while rinsing with clean water. The best combination of rinsing pressure and water volume is provided by masonry washing equipment generating 400-1000 psi with a water flow rate of 6-8 gallons per minute delivered through a 15-45 degree fan spray tip. Equipment should be adjustable to reduce water flow rate and rinsing pressure as required for controlled cleaning of more sensitive surfaces. See also “Equipment” section of the Product Data Sheet. Note: Multiple applications may etch acid-sensitive surfaces. Cleanup: clean tools and equipment using fresh water. DozenDirtyDozenDirtyThe 12 playground hazards In the time it will take you to read this pamphlet, a child will be severely injured and admitted to an emergency room as a result of a playground-related accident. It is estimated that, each year, over 200,000 such injuries occur and approximately 15 children will die from playground related injuries. As parents and caregivers, we are responsible for providing safer play opportunities for our children. The National Recreation and Park Association (NRPA), through its National Playground Safety Institute (NPSI) has identified 12 of the leading causes of injury on playgrounds. By familiarizing yourself with the ‘Dirty Dozen Checklist’, you can inspect your local playground for safety hazards. Should you identify any of the following hazards on your child’s playground, notify the owner/operator about the condition of the play area, so that they may take steps to eliminate the hazard(s). The Dirty Dozen: 12 Playground Hazards Are they hiding in your child’s playground? About NRPA The National Recreation and Park Association (NRPA) is a national not-for-profit organization dedicated to advancing park, recreation and conservation efforts that enhance quality of life for all people. Through its network of some 20,000 recreation and park professionals and citizens, NRPA encourages the promotion of healthy lifestyles, recreation initiatives and conservation of natural and cultural resources. Headquartered in Ashburn, Va., NRPA works closely with local, state and national recreation and park agencies, citizen groups and corporations to carry out its objectives. Priorities include advocating favorable legislation and public policy; continuing education for park and recreation professionals and citizens; providing professional certification, university accreditation, research and technical assistance; and increasing public awareness of the importance of parks and recreation. For more information, visit www.nrpa.org. About NPSI NRPA’s National Playground Safety Institute (NPSI) promotes children's rights to play in a safe environment and to nationally promote the importance of play in their development. NPSI promotes the latest public playground industry standards and guidelines as the most desirable standard of care for public-use playgrounds. For a listing of playground related publications and information available through NRPA, visit www.nrpa.org/npsi. International Playground Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) The International Playground Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) is a non-profit organization whose mission is to promote the importance of play in the development of children, to encourage the creation of safer play environments and to provide a voluntary third-party certification program to validate conformance to the ASTM 1487 Playground Equipment Standard and the ASTM 1292 Playground Surfacing Standard. The Dirty Dozen is presented in partnership with IPEMA. IPEMA 4305 N. 6th Street, Ste. A Harrisburg, PA 17110 888.944.7362 www.ipema.org American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) The American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) developed a standard for the manufacturing of public playground equipment, Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use. For a copy of this standard, contact the ASTM and ask for the F 1487-01 Standard. ASTM 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 610.832.9500 www.astm.org U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) For a free copy of the Consumer Product Safety Commission's Handbook for Public Playground Safety (No.325), contact: U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission Washington, D.C. 20207 800.638.2772 www.cpsc.gov Are you looking for more information on playground safety? Check out these recommended sources: Improper Protective Surfacing The surface or ground under/around the playground equipment should be soft enough to cushion a fall. A fall onto one of these hard surfaces could be life threatening and there are many surfaces that offer protection from falls. Acceptable Surfaces: Unacceptable Surfaces: •Engineered Wood Fiber •Concrete •Wood Chips •Blacktop •Sand / Pea Gravel •Packed Earth •Synthetic / Rubber Tiles •Grass •Shredded Rubber •Mats •Poured-in-place rubber Most loose-fill surfacing must be maintained at a depth of 12 inches and be free of standing water and debris. Inadequate Use Zone A use zone is the area under and around playground equipment where a child might fall. A use zone should be covered with protective surfacing material and extend a minimum of six feet in all directions from the edge of stationary play equipment, such as climbers and chin-up bars. Slide Use Zone •For slides six feet or less in height, the use zone at the bottom of the exit area should extend a minimum of six feet from the end of the slide. •For slides between six feet and eight feet high, the use zone at the exit of the slide is equal to the height of the platform or entrance to the slide. •The maximum exit use zone, regardless of height, is eight feet. School-Age Belt Swing Use Zone •Swings require a much greater area for the use zone. •The use zone should extend two times the height of the pivot or swing hanger in front of, and behind the swing’s seats. •The use zone should also extend six feet to the side of the support structure. Tot Swing Use Zone •A fully enclosed tot swing requires less of a use zone than school-age swings. •Measure the vertical distance from the bottom of the seat to the pivot point or swing hanger and multiply by two for the use zone in front and back of the swings. did you know? Improper surfacing material under playground equipment is the leading cause of playground-related injuries. Over 79 percent of all accidents on playgrounds are from children falling. ChecklistThe Dirty Dozen 1 2 The Top 12 Safety Hazards in America’s Playgrounds Protrusion & Entanglement Hazards A protrusion hazard is a component or piece of hardware that is capable of impaling or cutting a child, if a child should fall against the hazard. Some protrusions are also capable of catching strings or items of clothing worn around a child’s neck. This type of entanglement is especially hazardous because it might result in strangulation. Examples of protrusion and entanglement hazards include: •Bolt ends that extend more than two threads beyond the face of the nut •Hardware configurations that form a hook or leave a gap or space between components •Open “S” type hooks •Rungs or handholds that protrude outward from a support structure may be capable of penetrating the eye socket Also, special attention should be paid to the area at the top of slides and sliding devices. Protruding hardware and some gaps may act as a hook and catch clothing. Ropes should be anchored securely at both ends and not be capable of forming a loop or a noose. Entrapment in Openings Enclosed openings on playground equipment must be checked for head entrapment hazards. Children often enter openings feet first and attempt to slide through the opening. If the opening is not large enough, it may allow the body to pass through the opening but entrap the head. Generally, there should be no openings on playground equipment that measure between 3.5 to 9 inches. Where the lower boundary of the opening is formed by the protective surfacing, the opening is not considered to be hazardous. Pay special attention to: •Openings at the top of a slide •Openings between platforms •Openings on climbers where distance between rungs might be less than nine inches •Partially bounded openings such as seen on the top of a picket fence 6’ minimum Protective Surfacing Material Guardrails and enclosures on elevated platforms Enclosed openings measuring between 3.5” and 9” should be checked for head entrapment hazards Check for entanglement hazards at the entrance to the slide bedway Avoid strangulation hazards 4 3 did you know? The U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission does not recommend the use of drawstrings on children’s outwear because of the potential strangulation hazard. Bolt ends should not protrude Increased diameter creates a hook 6’ minimum 6’ minimum 8’ maximum Insufficient Equipment Spacing Improper spacing between pieces of play equipment can cause overcrowding of a play area, resulting in unsafe play conditions. Each item of play equipment has a use zone around it where protective surfacing material is applied. These use zones may overlap for certain types of equipment. •Equipment less than 30 inches in height may overlap use zones with six feet in between. •Equipment higher than 30 inches must have nine feet in between each structure. •The to-fro area of swings, the exit area of slides, standing rocking equipment and merry-go-rounds may not overlap use zones. This provides room for children to circulate and prevents the possibility of a child falling off of one structure and striking another. •Swings and merry-go-rounds should be located near the boundary of the playground. Trip Hazards Trip hazards are created by play structure components or items on the playground. Common trip hazards often found in play environments include: •Exposed concrete footings •Abrupt changes in surface elevations •Tree roots •Tree stumps •Rocks Lack of Supervision The supervision of a playground environment directly relates to the overall safety of the environment. A play area should be designed so that it is easy for a parent or caregiver to observe the children at play. Young children are constantly challenging their own abilities, often not being able to recognize potential hazards. Parents must supervise their children at all times on the playground! did you know? It is estimated that over 40 percent of all playground injures are directly related to lack of supervision. 16’ minimum 6’ minimum8’ pivot point 16’ minimum Front-to-rear use zones may not overlap Side use zones may overlap Use zones in front and to the rear of swings should be twice the height of the pivot point of the swing. An 8’-high swing should have a 16’ use zone in both directions. Equipment Spacing and Use Zones 7 6 5 6’ minimum Age-Inappropriate Activities Children’s developmental needs vary greatly from age two to age 12. In an effort to provide a challenging and safe play environment for all ages, it is important to make sure that the equipment in the playground setting is appropriate for the age of the intended user. The U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission does not recommend the following for preschool users – free-standing arch climbers, free-standing flexible climbers, chain and cable walks, fulcrum seesaws, log rolls, track rides or vertical sliding poles. Lack of Maintenance In order for playgrounds to remain in “safe” condition, a program of systematic, preventative maintenance must be present: •There should be no missing, broken or worn-out components •All hardware should be secure •The wood, metal or plastic should not show signs of fatigue or deterioration •All parts should be stable with no apparent signs of loosening •Surfacing material must be maintained •Check for signs of vandalism Crush, Shearing and Sharp Edge Hazards Components in the play environment should be inspected to make sure there are no sharp edges or points that could penetrate skin. Moving components such as suspension bridges, track rides, merry-go-rounds, seesaws and swings should be checked to ensure there are no moving parts or mechanisms that might crush a child’s finger. Platforms with No Guardrails Elevated surfaces such as platforms, ramps, and bridges should have guardrails or barriers to help prevent accidental falls. Preschool age children are more at risk for falls; therefore equipment intended for this age group should have: •Guardrails on elevated platforms higher than 20 inches •Protective barriers on platforms higher than 30 inches Equipment intended for school-age children should have: •Guardrails on elevated platforms higher than 30 inches •Protective barriers on platforms above 48 inches Equipment Not Recommended for Public Playgrounds Accidents associated with the following types of equipment have resulted in the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission recommending that they not be used on public playgrounds: •Heavy swings such as animal figure swings •Multiple occupancy/glider type swings •Free swinging ropes that may fray or form a loop •Swinging exercise rings and trapeze bars did you know? It is recommended that areas for pre-school age children (2-5) be separate from areas intended for school age children (5-12). 12 11 10 9 8 did you know? Overhead hanging rings that have a short chain (7") are allowed on public playground equipment. Playground Safety:It’s Not Just For Kids22377 Belmont Ridge Rd. Ashburn, VA 20148-4501703.858.07847-1-1 for hearing and speech impairedwww.nrpa.org 5121 Winnetka Ave N., Suite 108 New Hope, MN 55428 | 612.670.8195 | info@cre8play.com Cre8Play Warranty Order Number: Project Name: Issue Date: January 1, 2019 1 of 3 Limited Warranty Cre8Play, LLC warrants its products to the original customer to be free from structural failure, due to defect in materials or workmanship during normal use and installation in accordance with our published specifications. The warranty shall commence on the date of the signed warranty form and terminate at the end of the period stated below. The warranty is valid ONLY if the products and structures are; installed properly, conforms with the layout plan and installation instructions as provide by Cre8Play, using approved parts, maintained and inspected annually with written documentation and or in accordance with Cre8Play instructions; subjected to normal use for the purpose for which the products were designed; not subject to vandalism, misuse, neglect, accident or unauthorized addition or substitution of parts; not moved, in whole or in part, after its initial installation; and not modified, altered, or repaired by persons other than approved Cre8Play installers or designees. This warranty does not cover; •Cosmetic damage or defects, such as surface scratches, dents, marring, fading, discoloration, corrosion, warping of recycled plastic lumber, and cracking or peeling •Damage due to normal wear and tear •Damage due to “Acts of God”, such as, but not limited to; hail, flooding, lightning, tornadoes, sandstorms, earthquakes, and windstorms •Damage due to “Environmental Factors”, such as wind-blown sand, salt water, salt spray, or airborne emissions from industrial sources •Accidents, injuries or liabilities which result from the use of CRE8PLAY products and services •Damage caused during shipment •Damage which results from incorrect installation that does not conform to CRE8PLAY instructions and specifications •Exposure to sand or pea gravel safety surfacing under and around the product •Acts of terrorism To make a valid claim under the terms of this Warranty, the Customer shall submit; a written statement of claim, (including description of defect), along with a copy of the original invoice, all maintenance records, all inspection records, and supporting photographs. Customer shall submit this claim within fifteen, (15), days of discovering the defect. Cre8Play shall correct such defect, either by repairing, replacing or making available a replacement part, at Cre8Play’s option. Cre8Play shall deliver parts provided, under the terms of its Limited Warranty, to the site free of charge, but will not be responsible for providing labor or the cost of labor for the removal of the defective part or parts and the installation of any replacement part or parts. Replacement parts provided under the terms of this Limited Warranty shall be guaranteed for the balance of the original part’s applicable warranty period but not thereafter. Warranty claims shall be submitted to; Cre8Play, 5121 Winnetka Ave., North. Suite 108. New Hope, MN. 55428. THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF CONDITION, DESCRIPTION, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON- INFRINGEMENT OR ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES MADE IN ANY BROCHURES, MANUALS, CATALOGS, LITERATURE OR OTHER MATERIALS OF CRE8PLAY, LLC. FURTHER, NO REPRESENTATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OF ANY CRE8PLAY REPRESENTATIVE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED OR ALTER THE EXCLUSIVE LIMITED WARRANTY.  3\UHY9V]LY 6J[VILY 5121 Winnetka Ave N., Suite 108 New Hope, MN 55428 | 612.670.8195 | info@cre8play.com Cre8Play Warranty Order Number: Project Name: Issue Date: January 1, 2019 2 of 3 Limited Warranty Time Periods Cre8Play warrants that all standard products are warranted to be free from manufacturing defects, in workmanship and materials, under normal use and service for a period of one, (1), year from the date of warranty issuance. In addition, the following products are warranted under normal use and service from the date of warranty issuance. •Fifteen (15) year Limited Warranty on aluminum and steel posts, hardware (nuts, bots, washers), against structural failure due to corrosion, deterioration or workmanship •Ten (10) year Limited Warranty on Composite Decking under normal commercial use and service conditions, Moisture Shield products shall be free from material defects in workmanship and materials, and shall not check, split, splinter, rot or suffer structural damage from termites or fungal decay •Five (5) year Limited Warranty on Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete, (GFRC), material, against structural failure due to natural deterioration or manufacturing defects. NOTE: The warranty does not cover minor chips, hairline cracks or efflorescence, which can be normal and not a defect •Five (5) year Limited Warranty on polyethylene slides, enclosures and other plastic components against structural failure due to corrosion, deterioration or workmanship •Three (3) year Limited Warranty on Flexible net climbers and ropes against natural deterioration or manufacturing defects •Any project specific warranties are shown in the addendum to this Limited Warranty Product Disclaimer. Designs, images, plans and concepts shown and/or developed during the design phase are intended to indicate general type and quality only. Products offered by Cre8Play, LLC are individually handcrafted and not factory manufactured. The Customer acknowledges that the final product may have subtle variations from the designs, images, plans and concepts and may differ slightly from one piece to another due to material characteristics and handcrafting. These minor variations may include slight color and pattern variations. Therefore, each piece has its own desired uniqueness. All images and concepts are Copyright © 2 019, Cre8Play, LLC and all rights are reserved. __________________________________ Authorized Cre8Play, LLC Representative __________________________________ Printed Name - Title  3\UHY9V]LY 6J[VILY 5121 Winnetka Ave N., Suite 108 New Hope, MN 55428 | 612.670.8195 | info@cre8play.com Cre8Play Warranty Order Number: Project Name: Issue Date: January 1, 2019 3 of 3 Warranty Claim Form Customer Name: _________________________ Project Name: ___________________________ Location Address: ________________________ City: ______________________ State: _______ ZIP Code: _____________ Contact Name: ______________________ Phone Number: _____________________ Email address: ______________________ Claim Date: ______________ Order Number: ___________ Describe warranty claim in detail, photos must be included, (photos should be taken at varies angles and distances to best illustrate the conditions). Email form to: info@cre8play.com For additional assistance, please contact Cre8Play directly at, 612.670.8195  3\UHY9V]LY 6J[VILY APPENDIX C City of Kent – Standard Plans PLAN VIEW 1"1" LEGEND: BOND BREAK JOINT EXPANSION JOINT MEDIUM BROOM FINISH 3/16" R2" WIDE TROWEL JOINT (TYP) SECTION A 3/16"6"10"PROVIDE MEDIUM BROOM FINISH WITH ALTERNATING DIRECTION OF BROOM STROKE TO CREATE A "PARQUET" PATTERN. PARQUET PATTERN TO BE CREATED IN THE FIELD WITH REGARD TO EQUAL SPACING OF ALTERNATING PATTERN BETWEEN 6" SMOOTH TROWEL FINISH BORDER. NOTE: EXCLUDE SCORE PATTERN ACROSS DRIVEWAYS AND WHEELCHAIR RAMPS 6" WIDE SMOOTH TROWEL FINISH (TYP) CONTRACTION/CONTROL JOINT 1/4" WIDE AT 5' O.C. SEE DETAIL A 3/8" X FULL DEPTH EXPANSION JOINT AT 150' MAX. O.C. AND AROUND POLES AND, POSTS AND HYDRANTS (TYP) OR AS DIRECTED BY ENGINEER, SEE DETAIL C SHINE FINISH STREET TREE, SEE KENT STANDARD PLAN 6-56 4'-0" X 4'-0" DUCTILE IRON TREE GRATE 1 3/4 X 1 3/4 X 1/4 ANGLE WITH REBAR #3 WELDED AT 45°, 10 PLACES (MIN.) HOOKS FABRICATED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR PAINTED WITH RUST PROOF PAINT (TYP. ALL 4 SIDES) MINIMUM 2" CRUSHED SURFACING TOP COURSE SEE STANDARD PLAN 6-89 FOR STREET LIGHT STANDARD FOUNDATIONS. CURB AND GUTTER PER STANDARD PLAN 6-33 24" DEEP ROOT BARRIER BELOW BOND BREAK MATERIAL AS MANUFACTURED BY "DEEP ROOT", "BIO-BARRIER" OR EQUIVALENT 10' LONG, CENTERED ON TREE DETAIL A CONTRACTION/CONTROL JOINT DETAIL B BOND BREAK NOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST.5'-0"3'-6" 4"CONTRACTION/CONTROL JOINT 1/4" WIDE x 1" DEEP, 5' O.C. FULL DEPTH BOND BREAK MATERIAL: 30 LB. ROOFING FELT, 6 MIL PLASTIC OR APPROVED EQUAL AROUND TREE WELL. SEE SECTION 1 ON THIS PLAN AND KENT STANDARD PLAN 6-55 CONTRACTION/CONTROL JOINT SIDEWALK WIDTH VARIES 5'CURB AND GUTTER TOP OF DEEP ROOT BARRIER 4" CONCRETE SIDEWALK 2" CSTC 4" CONCRETE SIDEWALK 2" CSTC DETAIL C EXPANSION JOINT 4" CONCRETE SIDEWALK 2" CSTC 3/8" X FULL DEPTH EXPANSION JOINT AT 150' MAX. O.C. (TYP) OR AS DIRECTED BY ENGINEER FULL DEPTH BOND BREAK MATERIAL: 30 LB ROOFING FELT, 6 MIL PLASTIC OR APPROVED EQUAL FULL DEPTH BOND BREAK MATERIAL: 30 LB ROOFING FELT, 6 MIL PLASTIC OR APPROVED EQUAL AA FACE OF CURB CL POINT OF TANGENT (TYP) PLAN VIEW EQ EQ 1/4" DEEP TOOLED JOINT #4 BAR @ 12" EA WAY EXISTING AC CAST-IN PLACE CONC AC OVERLAY CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1/4" NOSING RADIUS 8"REINFORCED CONCRETE CROSSWALK 4"MIN.CRUSHED SURFACING TOP COURSE BROOM FINISH DOWELED JOINT (WHEN CONCRETE INTERSECTION) 2' (TYP.) TOOLED JOINT WITH 2" WIDE MARGIN ALTERNATING BROOM FINISH EXPANSION JOINT SEE KENT STANDARD PLAN 6-35 2' TYP 12" WIDE TROWELED MARGIN 1/8" MIN. - 1/4" MAX.FINISH SURFACE AC OVERLAY NOSING DETAIL 12" TROWELED MARGIN (BOTH SIDES) DOWELED JOINT (WHEN CONCRETE INTERSECTION) OR NOSING DETAIL SECTION A REINFORCED CONCRETE CROSSWALK AND INTERSECTION DETAIL12'CURB AND GUTTER SEE KENT STANDARD PLAN 6-33 VARIES VARIES REBAR REINFORCING A FULL WIDTH ADA DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE 2' WIDE (TYP.) SEE NOTE 1 30 LB. ROOFING FELT OR POLY FULL DEPTH BOND BREAK MATERIAL WHERE CONCRETE CROSSWALK MEETS CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER AND AT BACK OF CURB (TYP.) 12" WIDE WHITE PLASTIC MARKING (TYP.) UNIFORM TACK COAT NOTE: 1.YELLOW DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE SHALL BE WSDOT F-45.10-02 AND IN COMPLIANCE WITH WSDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 8-14.2. WET EMBOSSED CONCRETE AND PAINTING IS NOT ALLOWED. A NOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. CROSSWALKS NON ARTERIAL RAMP LOCATIONS ACCEPTABLE RAMP LOCATIONS FOR RETROFIT OR ALTERATION NOTE: 1.CATCH BASIN INLETS, JUNCTION BOX AND VAULT LIDS SHALL BE OUTSIDE CURB RAMPS WITH 32" MIN. CLEARANCE FROM RAMP. 2.CARE SHALL BE TAKEN TO KEEP THE RAMP FROM CONFLICTING WITH HYDRANTS, POLES, INLETS AND OTHER UTILITIES. 3.RAMPS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH WSDOT STD. PLANS F-40.12-03 THRU F-45.10-02. 4.CROSSWALKS ARE NOT ALWAYS MARKED. 5.WHEN RAMPS ARE CONSTRUCTED ON THE SIDE OF STREET THEY SHALL BE ALIGNED WITH THE COMPANION CROSSING ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF STREET. 6.CURRENT ADA LAWS FOR LANDING SIZE, DETECTABLE WARNING PATTERNS, SKID RESISTANCE AND RAMP DIMENSIONS AND SLOPES SHALL BE COMPLIED WITH AT ALL TIMES. 7.YELLOW DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE SHALL BE WSDOT F-45.10-02 AND IN COMPLIANCE WITH WSDOT STD. SPEC. 8-14.2. WET EMBOSSED CONCRETE AND PAINTING IS NOT ALLOWED. 8.ACCESS COVERS, JUNCTION BOXES, CABLE VAULTS AND OTHER APPURTENANCES WITHIN THE SIDEWALK LIMITS MUST INCLUDE A SLIP-RESISTANT SURFACE MATCHING THE GRADE OF THE SURROUNDING SIDEWALK. SUCH APPURTENANCES SHALL NOT BE PLACED WITHIN THE SLOPES OF ADA RAMPS OR DRIVEWAY WINGS. PEDESTRIAN APPROACH 12" GUTTER 6"CURB INTERSECTION MAINTAIN FLOW LINE WITHOUT VERTICAL LIP BETWEEN GUTTER AND CURB SLOPESLOPE SECTION A-A (TYP.) 2' DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE VARIES VARIESVARIESSIGNAL CONTROLLER CABINET = 7' MIN. FROM FACE OF CURB 5' MIN. FROM C/L OF PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON POLE TO NEAREST EDGE OF CURB RAMP (TYP.) RAMPS, SEE NOTE 3 (TYP.) FULL WIDTH ADA DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE 2' WIDE (TYP.) CENTER OF DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE BETWEEN CROSSWALKS SHALL BE BLACK TO PROVIDE DIRECTIONALITY ARTERIAL RAMP LOCATIONS FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION OR STANDARD RECONSTRUCTION A A (TYP.) 7.5% MAX. 7.5 % MA X . RAMPS, SEE NOTE 3 (TYP.) RAMPS, SEE NOTE 3 (TYP.) EXTENDED PARALLEL CURB RAMP PEDESTRIAN CURB SEE KENT STANDARD PLAN 6-33 A A (TYP.) NOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. PROVIDE TRANSITION SIDEWALK, 5' MIN. WHEN TRANSITIONING TO EXISTING SIDEWALK PROVIDE TRANSITION SIDEWALK, 5' MIN. WHEN TRANSITIONING TO EXISTING SIDEWALK ROOT BALL SIDEWALK 5' MIN. TRUNK ROOTBALLTREE STAKE AND GUY WIRE PARALLEL TO WALK AND CURB 1.5" TO 2.5" CALIPER STREET TREE2-APPROVED COMMERCIAL TREE TIES ATTACHED LOOSELY TO ALLOW FOR MINOR SWAYING 2-2''x2''x12' STAKES ATTACHED TO TREE WITH LOOSELY TENSIONED APPROVED TREE TIES. INSTALL PARALLEL TO WALK AND CURB (NOT AS SHOWN) 3" LAYER OF BARK MULCH FINISHED GRADE4'-6" MIN.ROOT GUARD; "DEEP ROOT", "BIO-BARRIER" OR EQUIVALENT MIN. 10'L x 2'D CENTER LENGTH ON TREE, BOTH SIDES OF PLANTER STRIP5' MIN. (TYP)CONCRETE FRAME AROUND ALL STREET TREES WITH TREE GRATES TYPICAL 4" IRRIGATION RISER PLACEMENT OR WATERING TUBES. TWO PER TREE REQUIRED, 24" DEEP (TYP.) 3" LAYER OF BARK MULCH PLANTER STRIP 5' MIN. TRUNK 5' MIN.ATREE WELL ROOTBALL CONCRETE FRAMESIDEWALK NOTES: 1.SEE STANDARD PLAN 6-36 FOR DOWNTOWN SIDEWALKS. 2.IF TREE IS LOCATED BEHIND THE SIDEWALK, A ROOT BARRIER SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THE EDGE OF THE SIDEWALK. 3.ALL CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM TREE PITS. INSTALL 12 INCHES OF PLANTING SOIL AROUND ROOT BALL CONSISTING OF 75% SANDY LOAM AND 25% ORGANICS. FILL REMAINDER OF TREE PIT WITH NATIVE SOIL. 4.IN TREE WELLS, THE ROOT BARRIER SHALL BE PLACED ALL AROUND THE TREE PIT AND STAPLED TOGETHER. 5.FOR BURLAP GROWN TREES THE BURLAP SHALL BE REMOVED AT PLANTING TO A DEPTH OF AT LEAST THE ROOT BALL, DO NOT BURY BURLAP IN PIT. 6.FOR CONTAINER GROWN TREES ALL ROOT BOUND ROOTS SHALL BE CUT AND SEPARATED. 7.NO PRUNING OF THE TREES AT PLANTING. CL TREE SIDEWALK10'' CL TREE D.I. TREE GRATE 2'-6'' ELECTRICAL CONDUIT, WATER SERVICES, ETC. SHALL BE PLACED OUTSIDE THE TREE ROOT BARRIER FACE OF CURB 4'' DIAMETER WATERING TUBE 5' TREE WELL CURB AND GUTTER24" DEEP ROOT BARRIER BELOW BOND BREAK MATERIAL AS MANUFACTURED BY "DEEP ROOT", "BIO-BARRIER" OR EQUIVALENT, 10' LONG, CENTERED ON TREE, SEE KENT STANDARD PLAN 6-36M TREE WELL SECTION A-A TYPICAL 4" IRRIGATION RISER PLACEMENT OR WATERING TUBES. TWO PER TREE REQUIRED, 24" DEEP (TYP.) 24" DEEP ROOT BARRIER BELOW BOND BREAK MATERIAL AS MANUFACTURED BY "DEEP ROOT", "BIO-BARRIER" OR EQUIVALENT, 10' LONG, CENTERED ON TREE 2'-6''2'-6'' PLANTER STRIP SECTION A-ASIDEWALK CURB AND GUTTER 2'-6'' ROOT BARRIER (TYP.) LAG BOLT, WASHER AND TREE TIE OR METAL BAND 2X4, EACH SIDE UNDER CONC. FRAME 9.5" 10'' INSTALL 2-2X4'S UNDER CONCRETE FRAME 8'' B PLANT ROOT BALL SO THE BOTTOM OF THE TREE TRUNK IS SLIGHTLY ABOVE FINISHED GRADE 9.5" SEE NOTE 3 SEE NOTE 3 ROOT FLARE MIGHT BE VISIBLE ON CERTAIN TREES ROOT BALL SIDE COVERED WITH MULCH, NOT SOIL90%ROOT BALL 18'' DIA. TOP OF BACKFILL IS 90% OF ROOT BALL HEIGHT B ANOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. STREET TREE D.I. TREE GRATE AND FRAME SIDEWALK (1) 1" MIN. DIAMETER STEEL CONDUIT WITH 14" DIAMETER NYLON PULL ROPE INSTALL 2-#10 WIRES WITH GROUND CONDUIT TO NEXT JUNCTION BOX OR SERVICE CABINET ELECTRICAL JUNCTION BOX SIDEWALK FAIRWEATHER 4"X36" B-1 BOLLARD, 36" SURFACE MOUNT, WITH OUTLET. COLOR: BLACK, CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COLOR CHIPS. OUTLET BOX: ALUMINUM, SINGLE GANG CASE DEVISE BOX (OR EQUIVALENT) GFCI RECEPTACLE: LEVITON 8898-T, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, 2P, 3W (OR EQUIVALENT) OUTLET COVER AND GASKET PROVIDED BY BOLLARD MANUFACTURER BOLLARD SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH OUTLET COVER FACING TOWARD THE STREET TREE, AT THE CENTER OF THE TREE GRATE LEVEL BOLLARD BASE AS NECESSARY TO COMPENSATE FOR SIDEWALK CROSS SLOPE. CARLON WEATHER PROOF COVER (PART #E9UVHMC) OR APPROVED EQUAL. BOLLARD: SEE STANDARD PLAN 6-55 FOR STREET TREE INSTALLATION INFORMATION ROOT BALL 18'' DIAMETER NOTE: THIS PLAN IS NOT A LEGAL ENGINEERING DOCUMENT BUT AN ELECTRONIC DUPLICATE. THE ORIGINAL, SIGNED BY THE ENGINEER AND APPROVED FOR PUBLICATION IS KEPT ON FILE AT THE CITY OF KENT. A COPY MAY BE OBTAINED UPON REQUEST. Kherson Park Improvements  Prepared by J.A. Brennan Associates, PLLC  Draft Bid Design – 2022‐04‐12  Product Cut Sheets for Primary site finishes:  Final Bid Set Package  1.Site – furnishings a.Picnic Table b.Trash receptacle c.Bike Rack 2.Stepstone Paver 3.Core Glow Stone data 4.Sparkle Stone – Sparkle Grain 5.3‐Form Koda XT Polycarbonate data sheet 6.3‐Form hardware assembly information 7.Proposed Park Lighting a.Light Pole b.Wall Mounted Light c.Screen Wall Mounted Light d.Power Pack – Low Voltage 8.Projection Enclosure System – (Provided by Owner  ‐ Not in Contract) 9.Drainage Trench Grate Cover – Ductile Iron 10.Drainage – Area Drain Cover Ductile Iron 11.Irrigation – Cal Sense Controller 12.Electrical and Irrigation Cabinet – Strong Box 13.Poured in Place Rubber Surfacing 14.City of Kent Standard Tree Grate APPENDIX D Rozměry výrobků jsou zaokrouhlené. Výrobce si vyhrazuje právo na změnu technické specifikace bez předchozího upozornění. Rozměry spodní stavby a způsob osazení výrobku jsou závazné. Rozteče kotev rozměřovat dle rozměrů dodaného výrobku. Dimensions of the products are rounded. The producer reserves the right to amend the technical specification at any time without previous warning. The size of foundantion baseplate and the method of mounting of the product are imperative. Anchor spacing measure out by measurements of supplied product. Die Produktmaße sind gerundet. Der Hersteller behält sich das Recht an Änderungen der technischen Spezifikationen vor, ohne vorher darauf hinzuweisen. Abmessungen der Fundamentierung – Unterbau und Art des Produkteinbaus sind verbindlich. Ankerabstand gemäß der gelieferten Produktabmessungen dimensionieren. Les dimensions des produits sont arrondies. Le fabricant se réserve le droit de modifier les spécifications techniques sans préavis. Dimensions des fondations et manière de l’implantation du produit sont obligatoire. Ancre écartement dimensions á partir des dimensions du produit livré. Los datos de las dimensiones estan redondeados. El fabricante se reserva el derecho de cambio de la especificación técnica sin aviso previo. Tanto las dimensiones de las bases de cimentación como el sistema de fijación son inalterables. Hay que medir el espaciamiento de anclajes según las dimensiones del producto suministrado. LOW260 - ORBIT All rights reserved. Protection of industrial design. dimensions in mm [inch] DATE: 23. 09. 2021 V: 01 ILLUSTRATIVE PHOTO [80˝]2020 [30˝]765[18˝]465[71˝]1810 DATE: 03.09.2021 V:01 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ORBIT LOB260_ LOB261 All rights reserved. Protection of industrial design. Rozměry výrobků jsou zaokrouhlené. Výrobce si vyhrazuje právo na změnu technické specifikace bez předchozího upozornění. Rozměry spodní stavby a způsob osazení výrobku jsou závazné. Rozteče kotev rozměřovat dle rozměrů dodaného výrobku. Dimensions of the products are rounded. The producer reserves the right to amend the technical specification at any time without previous warning. The size of foundantion baseplate and the method of mounting of the product are imperative. Anchor spacing measure out by measurements of supplied product. Die Produktmaße sind gerundet. Der Hersteller behält sich das Recht an Änderungen der technischen Spezifikationen vor, ohne vorher darauf hinzuweisen. Abmessungen der Fundamentierung – Unterbau und Art des Produkteinbaus sind verbindlich. Ankerabstand gemäß der gelieferten Produktabmessungen dimensionieren. Les dimensions des produits sont arrondles. Le fabricant se réserve le droit de modifier les spécifications techniques sans préavis. Dimensions des fondations et manière de l’implantation du produit sont obligatoire. Ancre écartement dimensions á partir des dimensions du produit livré. Los datos de las dimensiones estan redondeados. El fabricante se reserva el derecho de cambio de la especificación técnica sin aviso previo. Tanto las dimensiones de las bases de cimentación como el sistema de fijación son inalterables. Hay que medir el espaciamiento de anclajes según las dimensiones del producto suministrado. Seating unit with 5 seats and wheelchair access, dimensions 2,02x2,26 m [80"x71"x89"] Versions: LOW260 free standing LOW261 anchoring onto the pavement Structure type: steel structure connected with aluminium seats and round table by stainless steel screw joints. Supporting frame: weldment made of steel tubes. Seats and top of the table: aluminium sheet. Powder coating: steel structure and aluminium sheet treated with protective zinc and powder coating. Colour options: shades of polyester powder coatings in the fine matt structure, standardly provided by mmcité. Other shades according to the RAL chart are available upon request Anchoring: anchoring on the paving into concrete foundation using threaded rods or free standing on adjustable feet. Weight: 97 kg [214 lb] Option: different than standard colour. Q_0210493_WA_TitusRailroadPark_rev.0X The product photo is for illustrative purposes only. Dimensions are in mm [and inches] and can be rounded.Orbit LOB240 Q_0210493_WA_TitusRailroadPark_rev.0X The product photo is for illustrative purposes only. Dimensions are in mm [and inches] and can be rounded. 1'-54564"4502'-712" 800 6'-1116" 1846 2'-51732"750LOB241 LOB441 6'-2964"18833'-64164" 10833'-5932"10492' - 5 3 16" R 7 4 2 3'-64164"10833'-1114" 1200 7'-5164" 2261 1'-54564"4502'-51732"750LOB261 LOB461 4'- 1 0 6364" 1498 7'-6 15 32"22983'-12364" 949 5'- 4 23 32"164 4 3'-123 64"R94 9 1'-54564"4505'-26364" 1600 8'-8316" 2646 2'-51732"750LOB281 LOB481 1'-334" 400 3'-64164"10836'-2964"18836'-2964" 1883 8'-94164" 2683 2'-5316"7423'-5932"10497'-55764" 2283 2'-712" 800 2'-5316"R7422'-5316"7424'-102564"148373164"1902564" 10PRŮMĚR VRTÁNÍDRILL DIAMETERBOHRDURCHMESSER 1'-334" 4001'-334"40022364"60DLAŽBA / PAVEMENT / PFLASTERUNG PODSYP / GRAVEL SUB-BASE / KIES UNTERGRUND CHEMICKÁ KOTVA M8x200 [7,87] CHEMICAL ANCHOR CHEMISCHER ANKER BETON / CONCRETE C12/15 DATE: 18.5.2021 V 01 Minimal load-bearing capacity of the soil 150kPa dimmensions in mm [inch] LOB2x1, LOB4x1 - ORBIT All rights reserved. Protection of industrial design. mmcite.com Rozměry výrobků mají informativní charakter. Výrobce si vyhrazuje právo na změnu technické specifikace bez předchozího upozornění. Rozměry spodní stavby a způsob osazení výrobku jsou závazné. Minimální únosnost základové půdy 150kPa. Rozteče kotev rozměřovat dle rozměrů dodaného výrobku.All product sizes have an informative character. The producer reserves the right to amend the technical specification at any time without previous warning. The size of foundantion baseplate and the method of mounting of the product are imperative. Minimal load-bearing capacity of the soil 150kPa. Anchor spacing measure out by measurements of supplied product.Die Abmessungen der Produkte sind informativ. Der Hersteller behält sich das Recht an Änderungen der technischen Spezifikationen vor, ohne vorher darauf hinzuweisen. Abmessungen der Fundamentierung – Unterbau und Art des Produkteinbaus sind verbindlich. Minimum tragfähigkeit des Bauuntergrundes 150 kPa. Ankerabstand gemäß der gelieferten Produktabmessungen dimensionieren.Dimensions des produits sont à titre informatif seulement. Le fabricant se réserve le droit de modifier les spécifications techniques sans préavis. Dimensions des fondations et manière de l’implantation du produit sont obligatoire. La capacité portante du sol 150 kPa (minimale). Ancre écartement dimensions á partir des dimensions du produit livré.Las dimensiones de los productos tienen carácter informativo. El fabricante se reserva el derecho de cambio de la especificación técnica sin aviso previo. Tanto las dimensiones de las bases de cimentación como el sistema de fijación son inalterables. Capacidad portante mínima del suelo 150kPa. Hay que medir el espaciamiento de anclajes según las dimensiones del producto suministrado. Q_0210493_WA_TitusRailroadPark_rev.0XGeneral Information Q_0210493_WA_TitusRailroadPark_rev.0XGeneral Information Q_0210493_WA_TitusRailroadPark_rev.0XGeneral Information PRODUCT DATA page 1 of 1 | Rev. 01-15-20 DISPATCH™ LITTER & RECYCLING RECEPTACLE © 2020 Forms+Surfaces® | All dimensions are nominal. Specifications subject to change without notice. For the most current version of this document, please refer to our website at www.forms-surfaces.com. T 800.451.0410 | www.forms-surfaces.com TECH BRIEFPRODUCT DATA DISPATCH™ LITTER & RECYCLING RECEPTACLE PRODUCT DATA page 1 of 3 | Rev. 01-15-20 DISPATCH™ LITTER & RECYCLING RECEPTACLE © 2020 Forms+Surfaces® | All dimensions are nominal. Specifications subject to change without notice. For the most current version of this document, please refer to our website at www.forms-surfaces.com. T 800.451.0410 | www.forms-surfaces.com Dispatch combines distinctive design, robust materials and a versatile array of waste stream management options. Receptacles are made of heavy cast aluminum with a hinged side-access door for easy servicing. Available with 36- and 45-gallon capacities in single-stream and split-stream versions, openings can be configured for the following: litter-only, bottles & cans-only, paper-only, or for combined litter and recycling. Attractive, durable and highly adaptable, Dispatch is an ideal litter and recycling solution for any public space. MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION DETAILS INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE BODY AND LID CONFIGURATION OPTIONS LID GRAPHICS BASES & INSTALLATION • Body and lid are made of solid cast aluminum with a powdercoat finish. • See the Forms+Surfaces Powdercoat Chart for details. Custom RAL colors are available for an upcharge. • Due to the inherent nature of metal castings, gloss powdercoats are not offered for cast components. • Receptacles are available in 36- and 45- gallon configurations. • Single-stream receptacles use a single 36- or 45-gallon liner. • Split-stream configurations are divided by an internal baffle plate to create two separate litter and/or recycling streams. 36-gallon receptacles use two 16-gallon half liners; 45-gallon receptacles use two 20-gallon half liners. • Instructional graphics are applied to two sign plates, which are mechanically fastened to the top of each lid. • Sign plates are stainless steel with a Satin finish; instructional graphics are black vinyl. • Receptacles can be used freestanding with a TENSL ultra high performance concrete (UHPC) base or surface mounted with or without a TENSL UHPC base. • Anchors and stainless steel mounting screws are provided for surface mounting. RECYCLING OPENINGS SIDE ACCESS DOOR AND LATCH LINERS MAINTENANCE • Openings can be limited to a particular type of recyclable. Along with the standard full litter opening, round bottles & cans and slotted paper openings are available. See details on page 2. • Receptacle opens in a clamshell fashion with half of the cast body serving as a swing-out door. • Two stainless steel latch options are available: lift lever or screwdriver-operated recessed access. • Both single-stream and split-stream receptacles use independent, replaceable internal liners designed to be used with or without plastic litter bags. • Liners are molded from durable black polyethylene with UL94HB fire rating. • Metal and TENSL UHPC surfaces can be cleaned as needed using a soft cloth or brush with warm water and a mild detergent. Avoid abrasive cleaners. NOMINAL DIMENSIONS MODEL OVERALL HEIGHT*OVERALL WIDTH OVERALL DEPTH WEIGHT INTERNAL CAPACITY SLDIS-136 43.0" (1092 mm)25.5" (648 mm)21.8" (554 mm)112 lbs (50 kg)36 gallons (136 liters) SLDIS-216 43.0" (1092 mm)25.5" (648 mm)21.8" (554 mm)112 lbs (50 kg)32 (2 x 16) gallons (121 liters) *NOTE: TENSL UHPC base adds 3" to overall height. Overall Width Overall Height* Overall Depth PRODUCT DATA page 2 of 3 | Rev. 01-15-20 DISPATCH™ LITTER & RECYCLING RECEPTACLE © 2020 Forms+Surfaces® | All dimensions are nominal. Specifications subject to change without notice. For the most current version of this document, please refer to our website at www.forms-surfaces.com. T 800.451.0410 | www.forms-surfaces.com NOMINAL DIMENSIONS (Continued) MODEL OVERALL HEIGHT*OVERALL WIDTH OVERALL DEPTH WEIGHT INTERNAL CAPACITY SLDIS-145 45.3" (1151 mm)26.8" (681 mm)22.9" (582 mm)125 lbs (57 kg)45 gallons (170 liters) SLDIS-220 45.3" (1151 mm)26.8" (681 mm)22.9" (582 mm)125 lbs (57 kg)40 (2 x 20) gallons (150 liters) *NOTE: TENSL UHPC base adds 3" to overall height. LID OPENING OPTIONS OPENING DIMENSIONS (36 GALLON)DIMENSIONS (45 GALLON) Litter 13" (330 mm) x 6.5" (165 mm)13.75" (349 mm) x 7.0" (178 mm) Bottles & Cans 4.5" (114 mm) x 4.5" (114 mm)4.5" (114 mm) x 4.5" (114 mm) Paper 8.0" (203 mm) x 2.5" (63 mm)8.0" (203 mm) x 2.5" (63 mm) STANDARD GRAPHICS Litter Litter LitterBottles & Cans LitterPaper Overall Width Overall Height* Overall Depth PRODUCT DATA page 3 of 3 | Rev. 01-15-20 DISPATCH™ LITTER & RECYCLING RECEPTACLE © 2020 Forms+Surfaces® | All dimensions are nominal. Specifications subject to change without notice. For the most current version of this document, please refer to our website at www.forms-surfaces.com. T 800.451.0410 | www.forms-surfaces.com ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS • Please refer to the Dispatch Environmental Data Sheet for detailed environmental impact information. • Dispatch Receptacle has up to 90% recycled content. • All components are fully recyclable. • Rustproof cast aluminum construction ensures a long product life cycle. • Standard powdercoat finishes are no-VOC; non-standard powdercoat finishes are no- or low-VOC, depending on color. • Low maintenance and easy to disassemble. MODEL NUMBERS AND DESCRIPTIONS MODEL DESCRIPTION SLDIS-136 Dispatch Receptacle, 36-gallon, single-stream, one 36-gallon liner SLDIS-216 Dispatch Receptacle, 36-gallon, split-stream, two 16-gallon half liners SLDIS-145 Dispatch Receptacle, 45-gallon, single-stream, one 45-gallon liner SLDIS-220 Dispatch Receptacle, 45-gallon, split-stream, two 20-gallon half liners PRODUCT OPTIONS The following options are available for an upcharge Premium Texture Colors from Forms+Surfaces Powdercoat Chart Add TENSL UHPC base Custom RAL powdercoat color Add recycling openings LEAD TIME: 6 to 8 weeks. Shorter lead times may be available upon request. Please contact us to discuss your specific timing requirements. PRICING: Please contact us at 800.451.0410 or sales@forms-surfaces.com. At Forms+Surfaces, we design, manufacture and sell our products directly to you. Our sales team is available to assist you with questions about our products, requests for quotes, and orders. Territory Managers are located worldwide to assist with the front-end specification and quoting process, and our in-house Project Sales Coordinators follow your project through from the time you place an order to shipment. TO ORDER SPECIFY: Quantity, model, powdercoat color(s), lid graphics, recycle openings (optional), latch option, freestanding or surface mount, with or without concrete base. Quote/Order Forms are available on our website to lead you through the specification process in a simple checkbox format. PRODUCT DATA POWDERCOAT CHART © 2020 Forms+Surfaces® | For the most current version of this document, please refer to our website at www.forms-surfaces.com. T 800.451.0410 | www.forms-surfaces.com page 1 of 3 | Rev. 01-31-20 All Forms+Surfaces powdercoat colors have been formulated to be ultra-durable for improved long-term wear and resistance to weathering. Our powdercoat colors are also anti-graffiti, allowing marks from paint, permanent markers, and dirt to be easily removed. All standard powdercoat finishes are no-VOC. STANDARD TEXTURES ALABASTER TEXTURE ALUMINUM TEXTURE ARGENTO TEXTURE AUBERGINE TEXTURE BLACK TEXTURE CLAY TEXTURE DARK BRONZE METALLIC TEXTURECOOL GREY TEXTURE DARK CORTEN TEXTURE DARK GREY METALLIC TEXTURE INK BLUE TEXTUREDEEP OCEAN TEXTURE MOSS TEXTURE SILVER TEXTURE WHITE TEXTURESLATE TEXTURE PRODUCT DATA POWDERCOAT CHART © 2020 Forms+Surfaces® | For the most current version of this document, please refer to our website at www.forms-surfaces.com. T 800.451.0410 | www.forms-surfaces.com page 2 of 3 | Rev. 01-31-20 STANDARD GLOSS COLORS NOTE: Due to the inherent nature of metal castings, gloss powdercoats are not offered for cast components. PRETREATMENT For improved performance, all aluminum castings go through an environmentally friendly pretreatment process. This pretreatment increases the adhesion of the powdercoat finish and creates a barrier that is highly resistant to environmental corrosion without the use of hazardous ingredients. FORMS+SURFACES POWDERCOAT FINISHES Our powdercoat finishes have been specially formulated with dirt-repelling properties and for significantly prolonged gloss retention, which decreases the frequency of cleaning and maintenance. For long-term performance, our powdercoat finishes have high resistance to environmental factors such as UV rays and humidity, industrial pollution, and other atmospheric components. WEATHER TESTING Accelerated Weathering TEST STANDARD TEST PERIOD RESULT Gloss Retention DIN EN ISO 16474-2 1000H >90% Condensation Test DIN EN ISO 6270 CH 1000H no infiltration, no bubbles Salt Spray DIN EN ISO 9227 AASS 1000H no infiltration, no bubbles Mortar resistance DIN EN ISO 12206-1 (section 5.9)24h easily removable without residues Florida Weathering TEST LOCATION TEST PERIOD RESULT Gloss Retention Florida, 5˚ south 3 years >50% BLACK GLOSS BRIGHT SILVER GLOSS SLATE GLOSS PRODUCT DATA POWDERCOAT CHART © 2020 Forms+Surfaces® | For the most current version of this document, please refer to our website at www.forms-surfaces.com. T 800.451.0410 | www.forms-surfaces.com page 3 of 3 | Rev. 01-31-20 POWDERCOAT MAINTENANCE TYPE CLEANING METHOD FREQUENCY general maintenance water and sponge once a year or as needed grease alcohol or surfactant; allow time to break down residue before removing as needed lime stains diluted solution of vinegar essence (9.6%) dissolved 1:1 with water as needed mortar residue/cement spray diluted solution of vinegar essence (9.6%) dissolved 1:1 with water as needed silicone stains/adhesive residue silicone remover as needed NOTE: The following powdercoat colors should be cleaned with water and a sponge only, once a year or as needed: Aluminum Texture, Argento Texture, Dark Bronze Metallic Texture, Dark Grey Metallic Texture, Silver Texture and Bright Silver Gloss. Do not use: Acids, lyes, strongly alkaline cleaners, abrasive cleaners, abrasive aids or cleaners that contain solvents, thinners, acetone or chlorinated hydrocarbons. LEARN MORE Our Resource Management team is dedicated to staying on top of environmental issues around the world. Wherever you are, you can rely on us to help you navigate any challenges a project may pose. For product-specific environmental data, visit forms-surfaces.com and click on the Environmental Data tab on any product page. To learn more about our company's environmental commitment and programs, visit the Environmental Sustainability section of our website. If you would like additional information on our Environmental Management System or our company environmental initiatives and policies, please feel free to contact our Sustainability Team at green@forms-surfaces.com. NOTE: Because different computers will render colors and textures differently, actual colors and finishes may vary slightly from those shown here. Product Data Sheet A simple circle hovering above ground, provides an artful solution for bicycle storage and security that meets Association of Pedestrian and Bicycle and Professionals (APBP) recom- mendations. Ring must be embedded. Ring can secure two bicycles parked parallel to the rack. The bicycles can be headed in opposite directions, or in the same direction. The rack provides two- point contact to prevent the bicycle from tipping over. A standard D-shaped bike lock can secure both a wheel and the frame. RING® STYLE DEPTH WIDTH HEIGHT PRODUCT WEIGHT Ring 1.5"25"27"13 lb Bike Rack • Capacity: 2 bikes • Bike racks made of 1.5" o.d., .120" wall stainless steel tubing, with a electropolish finish on bare stainless steel. • Ring is also available in powdercoated steel. • Ring must be embedded. • Ring can secure two bicycles parked parallel to the rack. • The bicycles can be headed in opposite directions, or in the same direction. The rack provides two- point contact to prevent the bicycle from tipping over. •A standard D-shaped bike lock can secure both a wheel and the frame. Finishes • All metal parts are finished with Landscape Forms’ proprietary Pangard II® polyester powdercoat, a hard yet flexible finish that resists rusting, chipping, peeling and fading. • Call for standard color chart. To Specify • Select bike rack style. Specify powdercoat color or stainless steel. Designed by Brian Kane, IDSA All Landscape Forms bike racks meet guidelines established by the Association of Pedestrian and Bicycle Professionals. Landscape Forms, Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Visit our landscapeforms.com for more information. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Landscape Forms supports the Landscape Architecture Foundation at the Second Century level. ©2016 Landscape Forms, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. 1 Revised December 4, 2020 | Landscape Forms Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Ring Bike Rack Material / Colors Electro Polished Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Blue Ash NutmegDusk Obsidian Onyx Matte Black Powdercoated Metal (Gloss)* Powdercoated Metal (Metallic)* Designer Palette Architectural Series (Low Sheen)* Ivy StormcloudOcean White Black ButtercupBlue Bell Cranberry Flambé Orange Grass Bronze SteelSilver Stone Titanium Mercury 2 Revised December 4, 2020 | Landscape Forms Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Ring Bike Rack Material / Colors Powdercoated Metal Powdercoated Metal Pangard II® Polyester Powdercoat is a hard, yet flexible, finish that resists rusting, chipping, peeling and fading. In addition to colors shown, a wide selection of optional and custom colors may be specified for an upcharge. * All colors and patterns shown are approximate and may vary from sample and final. Visit landscapeforms.com for more information. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Landscape Forms supports the Landscape Architecture Foundation at the Second Century level. ©2020 Landscape Forms, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. landscapeforms.com | specify@landscapeforms.com EmbeddedTools Required•Unit ships assembledHANDLE WITH CARE!Ring’s finish can be scuffed by contact with tools, concrete, or other abrasive surfaces. Protect the finish from damage during installation. Use touch‐up paint to repair any powder coat finish abrasions.INSTALLATION:1. Core drill 3” diameter (minimum) holes 6” deep.2. Prepare the holes for outdoor anchoring cement, such as Kwixset ™ or Super Por‐rok ®. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for blowing out dust, filling with water, scrubbing, and removing excess water.3. Place the bike rack back into position and fill the holes with anchoring cement.Side Elevation, showing core drill sizesInstallation GuideRing®Bike Rackwww.landscapeforms.com Ph: 800.521.2546Date: September 9, 2016Page 1 of 1Recommended spacing, according to Association of Pedestrian and Bicycle Professionals (APBP)WALL OROBSTRUCTIONRINGBIKE RACK 800.572.9029 STEPSTONEINC.COM ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS LINEARITY PAVERS HEXAGONAL HEXAGONAL PAVERS Stepstone’s six sided retro-new paver shape will enhance a patio, walkway, or most any pedestrian space with classic styling. Hexagonal pavers come in an assortment of sizes all with coordinated flat-half and point-half connecting pieces that are used to create linear transitions and finished edges to the design. 800.572.9029 STEPSTONEINC.COM ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS LINEARITY PAVERS HEXAGONAL 20 1/2”24” 16” 16”20 1/2”24” 16”20 1/2”24” Point Half Flat Half Whole SHORT FORM SPECIFICATION Sizes: 16” sizes are 2” thick, 20 1/2” and 24” sizes are 2 1/2” thick All sizes are nominal. Material: 5,000 PSI Hardrock Concrete, Type III Cement Finish: Sandblast (light, medium, or heavy; with or without slag) or Exposed Aggregate See Paver Details for more information; visit stepstoneinc.com Stepstone strongly recommends that you make your color selection using actual color concrete samples. 1810 Caramel 1410 1812 Agave 1412 1813 Porcelain 1413 1816 Brick Red 1416 1821 Kona 1421 1801 Granada White 1401 1804 French Gray 1404 1805 Iceberg Green 1405 1806 Almond 1406 1807 Cafe Brown 1407 1424 1824 Pebble 1825 Adobe 1425 PLEASE NOTE: All of our products are made by hand from natural materials. Variations in color are to be expected. To confirm color, please refer to actual concrete samples before placing order. Shipping may result in minor chipping. This is not detrimental to appearance or function. Stepstone, Inc. recommends sealing to aid in grout removal and cleaning prior to installation. Grout naturally will bond with concrete. Immediately remove any grout slurry that comes in contact with the finished face of the precast concrete pieces. All sizes are nominal. See details for further information. Available in other standard colors. See actual color concrete samples before ordering. This material is copyrighted and is intended solely for the use of customers of Stepstone, Inc.11-19 TYP. NO. 8 AGGREGATE IN OPENINGS CONCRETE PAVERS CURBIEDGE RESTRAINT WITH OUT -OUTS FOR OVERFLOW DRAINAGE (CURB SHOWN) - III—ill=III= i i III —III —III_ Q 000 oo¢.I=11I=III=11 o$ 6000 0p�p o a - BEIDDING COURSE 1 112 TO 2 IN. (40 TO 50 MMy THICK O?_Q 00 cP 04 O _�=_J1 =�1� I —_I (TYP. NO. 8 AGGREGATE) 4 � � -_--� 4 hl 1 MM THICK hl � STONE . ( 00 j IC C. 5 O 0 5 i _ OPEN -GRADED BABE o O o GEOTEXTILE ON SIDE AND TOP OF SUBBASE as � oo, - II I-1 I I I I-1 I I-1 I I I= —_ MIN• 6 IN. (1M MM) THICK III-1 I I-1 I I-1 I I—� I:III I I I I ICI I I —I I I —I I I —I I I= NO.2 STONE SUBBASE OPTIONAL GEOTEXTILE ON BOTTOM SOIL SUBGRADE NOTES: 1. 2 318 IN. (60 MM) THICK PAVERS MAY BE USED IN PEDESTRIAN APPLICATIONS. 2. NO. 2 STONE SUBBASE THICKNESS VARIES WITH DESIGN. CONSULT ICPI PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENT MANUAL. DRAWING NO. PERMEABLE PAVEMENT WITH FULL ICPI-68 0 EXFILTRATION TO SOIL SUBGRADE SCALE NO SCALE 206-583-0620 Chloe Myaskovsky Job Contact 206-583-0620PHONE FAX COMPANY JOB SITE: ATTN:JOB PHONE DAVIDSALES PERSON J.A. BRENNAN ASSOCIATES 2701 FIRST AVENUE, SUITE 510, SEATTLE WA 98121 Chloe Myaskovsky KHERSON PARK IN KENT, WA COMMERCIAL PROJECT KENT WA 123035ID: THIS PROPOSAL CONTAINS PAGES . 4 STEPSTONE, INC. 17025 SO. MAIN ST. GARDENA, CA 90248 310-327-7474 310-217-1424--FAX 285231PROPOSAL #: 10/13/2021DATE: PROPOSAL STEPSTONE, INC. IS A MANUFACTURER OF PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS 285231 Per your request we are pleased to submit the following proposal for the precast concrete products at your upcoming project. Please see the following pages for an itemized breakdown of the material and costs. Please note all quantities and sizes need to be confirmed by buyer. DESCRIPTION:All products by, Stepstone, Inc. to be made with a Type III cement. Concrete strength to be a minimum of 5,000 psi CalArc (California Architectural Precast Concrete). Color: #1801 - GRANADA WHITE / #1804 - FRENCH GRAY / #1813 - PORCELAIN Surface Finish: SANDBLASTED All products are hand formed of natural materials, and therefore some variation in color and thickness is to be expected. SHIPPING:Precast concrete products will be on pallets. This price is F.O.B. Jobsite by common carrier, off-loading by others Stepstone, Inc. cannot be held responsible for delays in transit. Shipping price to be confirmed upon order. EXCLUSIONS:#1] Stepstone, Inc. will provide no testing or inspection other than their own standard procedures. All other testing and inspection to be paid for by buyer. #2] Shop Drawings provided for Stepstone Products only. ENGINEERING: Stepstone does not provide custom engineering. Customers are responsible for the, performance, acceptability, durability and any liability that may occur for any changes they request to the standard engineering. All inserts, plates, reinforcing, additives or designs etc. provided by the customer are the sole responsibility of the customer. The Stepstone warranty does not apply to engineering changes requested to our standard products. Stepstone retains the right to deny any requests for changes in engineering. SCHEDULE INFORMATION:To be confirmed upon award of contract. Orders will be confirmed or scheduled upon receipt of signed drawings for treads and custom jobs. STORAGE FEES:Your order will be stored free of charge for 30 days after notification by Stepstone of its availability to ship. If the order is not shipped within 30 days, you agree to pay a storage fee of $0.50 per pallet PER DAY. The storage fee is due 10 days after mailing of a storage fee invoice by Stepstone and must be paid prior to shipment by Stepstone. The attached price is based upon quantities to be confirmed by customer. The buyer will provide Stepstone, Inc with the actual quantity required. The proposed price is based upon a per unit price and the actual quantity ordered will determine the final price. These products are not returnable. PRICE GOOD FOR 30 DAYS. Complete Product Specifications and Product data Sheets are available on Stepstone Inc's website at: www.stepstoneinc.com This proposal must be SIGNED ON EVERY PAGE and RETURNED, and any required deposit must be paid to Stepstone, Inc. before any order is started. Stepstone is a made to order company, and by signing this proposal, you are agreeing to purchase this material. You are also agreeing that you have received and read our standard LIMITED WARRANTY and FREEZE- THAW RECOMMENDATIONS that was attached to this proposal. Once the order is placed, the order can not be canceled, nor is this material returnable. Very truly yours, STEPSTONE, INC. Accepted Signature: ______________________________________ DATE:______________ Name: Chloe Myaskovsky Line Items QTY SIZE ITEM PIECE PRICE TOTAL Page 2 of 4 Pages Line 206-583-0620 Chloe Myaskovsky Job Contact 206-583-0620PHONE FAX COMPANY JOB SITE: ATTN:JOB PHONE DAVIDSALES PERSON J.A. BRENNAN ASSOCIATES 2701 FIRST AVENUE, SUITE 510, SEATTLE WA 98121 Chloe Myaskovsky KHERSON PARK IN KENT, WA COMMERCIAL PROJECT KENT WA 123035ID: STEPSTONE, INC. 17025 SO. MAIN ST. GARDENA, CA 90248 310-327-7474 310-217-1424--FAX 285231PROPOSAL #: 10/13/2021DATE: PROPOSAL STEPSTONE, INC. IS A MANUFACTURER OF PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS 285231 CAL ARC PAVERS, HEX, SANDBLASTED, LIGHT SANDBLAST, SAND SET, PEDESTRIAN USE, #1801 - GRANADA WHITE 284 sqft 16 X 18 3/8 X 2190 18.00 3,420.00#1 CAL ARC PAVERS, HEX, SANDBLASTED, LIGHT SANDBLAST, SAND SET, PEDESTRIAN USE, #1804 - FRENCH GRAY 284 sqft 16 X 18 3/8 X 2190 18.00 3,420.00#2 CAL ARC PAVERS, HEX, SANDBLASTED, LIGHT SANDBLAST, SAND SET, PEDESTRIAN USE, #1813 - PORCELAIN 284 sqft 16 X 18 3/8 X 2190 18.00 3,420.00#3 Budget pricing for materials only – per Stepstone , Inc. standard details and specs. Verification of project required quantities, dimensions, color & finish is the responsibility of the buyer prior to placing order. Stepstone, Inc. recommends sealing their products surface and joint material with a breathable penetrating sealer. #4 This proposal must be SIGNED ON EVERY PAGE and RETURNED, and any required deposit must be paid to Stepstone, Inc. before any order is started. Stepstone is a made to order company, and by signing this proposal, you are agreeing to purchase this material. You are also agreeing that you have received and read our standard LIMITED WARRANTY and FREEZE- THAW RECOMMENDATIONS that was attached to this proposal. Once the order is placed, the order can not be canceled, nor is this material returnable. Very truly yours, STEPSTONE, INC. Accepted Signature: ______________________________________ DATE:______________ Name: Chloe Myaskovsky Line Items QTY SIZE ITEM PIECE PRICE TOTAL Page 3 of 4 Pages Line 206-583-0620 Chloe Myaskovsky Job Contact 206-583-0620PHONE FAX COMPANY JOB SITE: ATTN:JOB PHONE DAVIDSALES PERSON J.A. BRENNAN ASSOCIATES 2701 FIRST AVENUE, SUITE 510, SEATTLE WA 98121 Chloe Myaskovsky KHERSON PARK IN KENT, WA COMMERCIAL PROJECT KENT WA 123035ID: STEPSTONE, INC. 17025 SO. MAIN ST. GARDENA, CA 90248 310-327-7474 310-217-1424--FAX 285231PROPOSAL #: 10/13/2021DATE: PROPOSAL STEPSTONE, INC. IS A MANUFACTURER OF PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS 285231 It is important to note that installations, pedestal set, mortar-set, permeable set, or sand-set should be designed with a slight slope to provide good, consistent drainage throughout the pavement. Do not allow water to pool on top, and below pavers and joints. Drainage should flow in the direction of the low point. NOT RECOMMENDED FOR VEHICULAR #5 Stepstone tolerances are +/- 1/8'' in length, width, and height. Price includes F.O.B. shipping to customer. Off loading is the responsibility of the buyer. Forklift and driver is needed. Due to fluctuating Freight Costs, Freight Costs will be automatically updated on date of order. #6 This proposal must be SIGNED ON EVERY PAGE and RETURNED, and any required deposit must be paid to Stepstone, Inc. before any order is started. Stepstone is a made to order company, and by signing this proposal, you are agreeing to purchase this material. You are also agreeing that you have received and read our standard LIMITED WARRANTY and FREEZE- THAW RECOMMENDATIONS that was attached to this proposal. Once the order is placed, the order can not be canceled, nor is this material returnable. Very truly yours, STEPSTONE, INC. Accepted Signature: ______________________________________ DATE:______________ Name: Chloe Myaskovsky Line Items QTY SIZE ITEM PIECE PRICE TOTAL Page 4 of 4 Pages Line 206-583-0620 Chloe Myaskovsky Job Contact 206-583-0620PHONE FAX COMPANY JOB SITE: ATTN:JOB PHONE DAVIDSALES PERSON J.A. BRENNAN ASSOCIATES 2701 FIRST AVENUE, SUITE 510, SEATTLE WA 98121 Chloe Myaskovsky KHERSON PARK IN KENT, WA COMMERCIAL PROJECT KENT WA 123035ID: STEPSTONE, INC. 17025 SO. MAIN ST. GARDENA, CA 90248 310-327-7474 310-217-1424--FAX 285231PROPOSAL #: 10/13/2021DATE: PROPOSAL STEPSTONE, INC. IS A MANUFACTURER OF PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS 285231 10,260.00SUB-TOTAL TAX SHIPPING 10,260.00GRAND TOTAL US$ TAX ABLE @ 0 % PAYMENT:Stepstone, Inc. to be paid: A 25% DEPOSIT , balance NET PRIOR TO SHIPMENT, in accordance with the unit prices stated herein. Stepstone, Inc. accepts no retention. Stepstone, Inc. is to be paid for material produced and stored in our yard awaiting shipment to the jobsite. Deposit 2,565.00 Balance Less Deposit 7,695.00 Proposal Total US$ 10,260.00 This proposal must be SIGNED ON EVERY PAGE and RETURNED, and any required deposit must be paid to Stepstone, Inc. before any order is started. Stepstone is a made to order company, and by signing this proposal, you are agreeing to purchase this material. You are also agreeing that you have received and read our standard LIMITED WARRANTY and FREEZE- THAW RECOMMENDATIONS that was attached to this proposal. Once the order is placed, the order can not be canceled, nor is this material returnable. Very truly yours, STEPSTONE, INC. Accepted Signature: ______________________________________ DATE:______________ Name: Chloe Myaskovsky Stepstone, Inc. Recommendations Regarding Sealing for Protection Against Freeze-Thaw and De-icing Chemical Damage. Effective December 1, 2010 1] All Stepstone, Inc. wet-cast, precast concrete products destined for regions where freeze-thaw is a concern are cast with an air-entraining admixture. The admixture results in small air bubbles that provide miniscule spaces where any absorbed water can freeze and expand without damaging the concrete’s structure. Our mix designs and production methods are designed to deliver on average 5% entrained air (with no individual piece under 4%) in products for these areas. 2] In all direct sale products Stepstone, Inc. incorporates an integral admixture that helps minimize water intrusion for the life of the product. Our concrete made with this integral admixture will have a water absorption rate of on average no more than 5% (with no individual piece greater than 6.0%). 3] At the factory, Stepstone, Inc. may apply a single coat of a water-based penetrating water repellant sealer to minimize water absorption. Reduced water absorption means less chance of absorbed water freezing, expanding and cracking the concrete. For Stepstone’s standard limited warranty to remain in effect, maintenance of this sealer coating is required. At least annual testing for water repellency and re-application of sealer as testing results dictate. Please refer to sealer manufacturer’s recommendations. 4] Stepstone, Inc. recommends that customers in aggressive freeze thaw environments or where de- icing chemicals will come in direct contact with the concrete’s surface apply, after installation, and maintain additional sealer(s) to protect their products. Stepstone, Inc. recommends the joints, either sand or grout, be sealed after installing as well as the pavers. 5] The Stepstone, Inc. factory applied water based sealer is generally compatible with additional sealers. However, customers must test compatibility of additional sealers in a small area before applying additional sealer to the entirety of their project. If necessary Stepstone, Inc. can supply sealed 3.5” x 3.5” samples for your tests. 6] Each region will have different sealers available. Stepstone, Inc. recommends our customers consult with local masonry materials distributors to acquire localized information. Stepstone, Inc. can suggest nationally distributed sealer manufacturers on request. Stepstone, Inc. Precast Concrete Products Limited Warranty Stepstone, Inc. provides this warranty for our Precast Concrete Products against failure from manufacturing defect for 5 years from date of purchase. When placing an order please request a complete, product and project specific copy of this warranty. Defect is defined as failure to meet or maintain the following manufacturing specifications: •Compressive strength minimum average of 5,000 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. •Freeze thaw resistance to maintain a maximum average of selected samples of 1% loss when tested in accordance with ASTM C 666 at 50 cycles. •Stepstone, Inc. published product specifications. This warranty will not cover failure caused by, but not limited to the following: Abuse or abnormal use, natural disasters, inadequate or faulty structure design, improper installation, excessive bearing loads, vandalism or malicious mischief, lack of reasonable care by owner in maintaining the installation, chemical action regardless of the origin of the chemical. Incidental chipping that occurs during shipping and handling and does not constitute a challenge to the functional integrity of the product will not be considered failure. Precast Concrete Products should be kept covered and out of the rain and free of outside water intrusion until ready to install. Water which would not stain a finished Precast Concrete Product will leave stains when the Precast Concrete Products are stacked atop each other prior to installation. Stepstone, Inc. does not warrant against fade or color change. All colors will fade a minimum of 10%. Stepstone shall have no liability for the cost of removing or staining faded Precast Concrete Products. Precast Concrete Products exposed to freeze-thaw conditions must be sealed before installation and that sealer coating must be maintained to sealer manufacturer’s specification for this warranty to remain in force. If for any reason, you believe the Precast Concrete Products to be defective, do not install. Contact your Stepstone, Inc. salesperson. Stepstone, Inc. is not responsible for claims arising from installation of defective product. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES 1. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN UNDER "LIMITED WARRANTY," THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 2. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, ALL PRODUCTS ARE SOLD"AS IS." LIMITATION ON DAMAGES Manufacturer's liability under this warranty is limited solely and exclusively to the replacement of defective Stepstone, Inc. PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS and in no event shall manufacturer be liable for removal, reinstallation, freight, taxes or any other charges related to the defective product. Further, manufacturer shall not be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, consequential, exemplary or other damages of any kind whatsoever, whether any such claim is based upon theories of contract, warranty, negligence, tort, strict liability or otherwise. No person is authorized to alter this warranty orally. This agreement is for the benefit solely of the original owner of the installation on which Stepstone, Inc. Precast Concrete Products is applied. The above warranty represents Stepstone, Inc.’s entire warranty and is independent of any other warranty made by any other individual, firm, or entity. Stepstone, Inc. reserves the right to investigate any claims, and to test any Precast Concrete Products units prior to replacement and/or repair. Proposal #: 285231 I have read and understood the above. _________________________________________________________________________________________ Signature Print Name Company Date SCIENCE | SUSTAINABILITY | LIGHT Everything you need to know about core glow CORE GLOW | 2019 F e a t u r i n g C o r e G l o w C o m m e r c i a l G r a d e M a r b l e (N a t u r a l S t o n e ) "the electric light did not come from the continuous improvement of candles" - OREN HARA RI SCIENCE | SUSTAINABILITY | LIGHT What can I do with Core Glow? Core Glow is great for emergency lighting , municipal projects , and innovative , eco-friendly interior and exterior design . Bike paths , terrazzo flooring, road signs , spa bathtubs , meditation rooms , sidewalks , pathways , hot tubs , murals , patio flooring , nightlife , night lights , and so much more. Check out our project gallery and follow us on Pinterest , Instagram , Facebook, and Twitter for more incredible project inspiration . Think of Core Glow as a small, rechargeable battery that operates on light rather than electricity. Core  Glow electricity -free lighting is based on the incredible phenomena of photoluminescence . Certain crystal structures are able to absorb and then 'host ' the energy of light (photons ) in the form of excited electrons for extended periods of time . The stored energy is gradually re-emmitted at a specific wavelength , which gives the incredible bright colours of glow we offer at Core Glow ; Hot Green at 520nm, Aqua Blaze at 480nm , and Ethereal Blue at 420nm . photoluminescence CORE GLOW | 2019 SCIENCE | SUSTAINABILITY | LIGHT Section 1 | Quick Info Sheet Section 2 | Chemistry of Glow Section 3 | Product Comparison Section 4 | Mythbusters Section 5 | Industry Standards Section 6 | Project Guide Section 7 | Testing Section 8 | Warranty Section 9 | About Us SCIENCE | SUSTAINABILITY | LIGHT IN this Document CORE GLOW | 2019 Material Description: CORE Glow Natural Stones* are a photo-luminescent aggregate ideal for embedding into cement surfaces, terrazzo flooring, exposed aggregate, or scattering throughout gravel for a subtle effect during the day and an incredible glow at night. CORE Glow Natural Stones will glow 10-12 hours, initially extremely bright, slowly fading to a gorgeous 'ambient glow' as the night wains. Aggregate Types / Sizes: •Glow Sand: Fine Sand: 6-18 mesh •Glow Stone: 3-8mm, 8-15mm •Customs Sizes: Available Colours: •Day Colour: off-white •Glow Colours: Hot Green, Aqua Blaze, and Ethereal Blue Luminosity Performance: •Luminosity at 10 min: 380-960 mcd/m2 (depending on colour and product) •Glow Duration: 12+ hours •Lifetime: 20+ years Project Ideas: Exterior: Exposed concrete, stamped concrete, concrete bike paths, concrete pedestrian paths, asphalt pavement, terrazzo flooring, GFRC, precast concrete slabs, patio stones, pavers, stair treads, wall-cladding, furniture, pool surrounds, decks etc. Interior: Floors, tiles, emergency markings, countertops, flooring, vanities, fireplace surrounds, walls, stair treads, wall-cladding etc. Let Core Glow inspire your creativity. Limitations: CORE Glow™ requires specific conditions to give off its best glow, ideally bright during the day, and dark at night, with no competing light sources. Create your gorgeous, low-light oasis with Core Glow, and check our project guide for creative ideas around your light conditions. Sustainability: Environmental benefits: non-toxic, decrease in the use of electricity, decrease in light pollution, renewable ambient light source, extremely durable, excellent for indoor & outdoor uses. LEED Points: • MR Credit #4 - Materials and Resources: Recycled Content •ID Credit #1.1 - Innovation in Design: Exceptional Performance •EA Credit #1 - Innovation in Design: Exceptional Performance Tests/Examinations: •CORE Glow™ stones work between -4O°C to +25O°C. •Does not discolor under 3OO-watt high mercury lamp for 1 OOOhrs. @ 4O°C w/8O% humidity. •Stable with use in combination with: water, stains, pool chemicals and epoxies etc. *Data based on CORE Glow™ Quantum Glow (40% glow pigment by volume) CORE GLOW™ - Tel: 1.855.777.2673 Fax: 1.250.871.0591 Email: info@coreglow.ca Web: www.coreglow.ca Core Glow Quick Sheet Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone) Core GlowTM Chemistry of Glow: Strontium Aluminate SrAl2O4:Eu2+ Glow in the dark materials are phosphorescent and always contain a ‘phosphor’. There is a quick light absorption and slow light emission which results in the glow in the dark phenomena. Strontium Aluminate: solid powder, nonflammable, pale yellow, monoclinic crystalline, non-radioactive, chemically and biologically inert[2][4]. Strontium aluminate is 10x brighter and has a 10x longer glow than its dimmer predecessor, copper-activated zinc sulfide. Chemical Formula: SrAl2O4:Eu2+ Advanced glow technologies use strontium aluminate doped with europium to activate the phosphorescent properties of strontium aluminate. The europium interacts via covalent interactions with the oxygen atoms and crystal field splitting of the 5d orbital[2]. Q.What is doping? A.Purposely mixing in an impurity to activate desired properties. Q.What is europium? A.Europium is a reactive rare earth metal which readily oxidizes in air and water. It is commonly used in fluorescent lights and CRT TV displays. Q.Is strontium aluminate doped with europium toxic? A.Strontium aluminate phosphors are harmless as defined by the Laws of Chemical Substances. Our product specifically was deigned harmless under the OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Hazard Communication Standard 29 CFR 1900.1200[4]. Fig. 1. 2D crystal structure of strontium aluminate. Reactivity Data: Stability: stable Hazardous Polymerization: will not occur Conditions to Avoid: contact with acids Incompatibility: contact with acids Hazardous Decomposition Products: will not occur[4] Colours: Three colours are available. The colour emission changes with the number of oxygen atoms, which directly affects the internal crystal structure of the final material. Blue: 400nm: SrAl2O19 Aqua: 480nm: SrAl2O7 Green: 520nm: SrAl2O4 Fig. 2. Emission spectrum of various strontium aluminates. 2, 3, and 4 are available commercially. Industrial applications: Strontium aluminates are being studied as a proposed material to immobilize fission products of radioactive waste[3], to increase the efficiency of solar panels[1], and provide electricity-free illumination for road surface markings. References: [1] Hengchao, Sun, et. al. "Long Afterglow SrAl2O4:Eu,Dy Phosphors for CdS Quantum Dot-sensitized Solar Cells with Enhanced Photovoltaic Performance." Journal of Materials Chemistry 21 (2013): 6388-392. Web. 14 June 2016. [2] Katsumata, Tooru, et. al. "Characterization of Strontium Aluminate Crystals Used for Long Duration Phosphors." Journal of the American Ceramic Society 81.2 (1998): 413-16. Web. 14 June 2016. [3] Kong, Peter C. "Ceramic Hosts for Fission Product Immobilization." US Department of Energy(2010). Idaho National Laboratory. Web. 14 June 2016. [4]Product: Core Glow Glass. Material and Safety Data Sheet. Core Systems. Web. June 2012. We are continuously tweaking our formulations to bring you the highest quality glow on the market using the most eco -friendly materials. Our glow does the most with the least , and we are committed to maintaining complete transparency with our clients about what Core Glow is made of , our formulations , and all spec info . PRoduct Comparison CORE GLOW | 2019 CORE GLOW COMPETITOR LED LIGHTS LIGHT RADIOLUMINESCENCE CORE GLOW ENERGY EFFICIENCY POWER CONSUMPTION SERVICE LIFE MAINTENANCE TOXIC GOOD BETTER BEST 5 WATTS 0 0 ~5 YEARS ~10+ YEARS UNLIMITED ELECTRICAL EXPIRES LIGHT DUSTING YES YES NO full chart at the photoluminescent safety association, https://plsafety.org CORE GLOW COMPARED TO OTHER EMERGENCY LIGHT SOURCES CORE GLOW COMPARED TO OUR BIGGEST COMPETITOR We compared our commercial grade Core Glow to our biggest competitor. Core Glow is just as bright, lasts just as long , and blends in better with mixed aggregate . SCIENCE | SUSTAINABILITY | LIGHT Read our 'Mythbusters ' page to learn about the science of glow , how to determine which products are over -hyping their product, and how to gauge all glow products yourself . What does Industrial Strength, Ultra-powered, Commercial Grade, Brightest Yet, etc. even mean? All of these products use essentially the same photoluminescent pigment , in varying concentrations depending on the brand. The best glow powders and pigments on the market use the most recent innovation in photoluminescence material chemistry, a monocrystalline solid called 'Strontium Aluminate ', which is available in different chemical combinations to achieve the three available colours, Hot Green , Aqua Blaze , and Ethereal Blue . Should I believe it when a brand says that they have the 'best, newest' glow? Any difference between brands is in the formulations - ie . adding more or less pigment to their final product . Based on our R &D, we have found that adding more than 40 % pigment results in no significant increase in glow intensity and/or duration. If a company is producing a product with greater than 40 % pigment , you may be paying more for a product that does not deliver visible improvements . If there is truly a major improvement in photoluminescent chemistry we will let you know! How long is this photoluminescent pigment able to glow? This is the same for every commercial strength glow powder with similar quality photoluminescent pigments. The glow will be super bright for the first hour , then slowly fade to a gentle, ambient glow for ~12 hours . Visible differences in glow duration are due to variations in pigment concentration , ie . 10 % pigment will appear less bright than 40 %, and may appear to fade faster. Anyone claiming that another product glows for less or more time is likely trying to position their brand, rather than based on true product comparison. Always ask the company you are working with for the specifics of their products. There is a lot of information out there on the internet , so we are here to give you some pure scientific information about what 's going on in the world of glow , which you can use to compare brands for yourself. MYTHBUSTERS CORE GLOW | 2019 SCIENCE | SUSTAINABILITY | LIGHT industry Standards CORE GLOW | 2019 UL 924 – Standard for Safety of Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1994 – Standard for Luminous Egress Path Marking Systems ASTM E2072-14 – Standard Specification for Photoluminescent (Phosphorescent) Safety Markings (Note: An ASTM standard is issued under its fixed designation (here: E2072). The number immediately following (here: -14)indicates the year of its latest revision.) ASTM E2073-10 – Standard Test Method for Photopic Luminance of Photoluminescent (Phosphorescent) Markings New York City Reference Standard RS 6-1–Photoluminescent Exit Path Markings (2 fc-120 min activation) and MEA-certification–based on Local Law26 New York City Local Law 141 - derived from the IBC–International Building Code Section 1024 requirements, such as UL1994-listed (only 1 fc–60 min activation) and additional NYC specific requirements APTA SS-PS-004-99, Rev. 2–Standard for Low-Location Exit Path Marking, published October 2007 APTA SS-PS-002-98, Rev. 3–Standard for Emergency Signage for Egress/Access of Passenger Rail Equipment, published October 2007 by the American Public Transportation Association ISO 15370 – Low-Location Lighting on Passenger Ships ISO 16069 – Graphical Symbols, Safety Signs, Safety Way Guidance Systems (SWGS) DIN 67510 German Industrial Standard in 4 Parts – The standard defines the necessary terms for the evaluation of longtime after glowing pigments and products and states how those should be measured and marked.  JIS Z 9100 – Japanese Industrial Standard for Safety Signs Core Glow Photoluminescent Pigments meet the following industry standards codes and specifications SCIENCE |SUSTAINABILITY |LIGHT CORE GlowTM | Toll-free: 1.855.777.CORE (2673) Local: 1.250.871.6840 | www.coreglow.ca Core Glow Follow these instructions to accurately test CORE Glow performance IMPORTANT NOTE In order to accurately see how our CORE GLOW™ Stones perform, we suggest you create a small sample containing CORE GLOW™ stones and fully charge it under an artificial light like incandescent bulbs or fluorescent light for approximately 20 - 25 minutes or in direct sun light for approximately 10 - 15 minutes. Then place your glowing sample in a dark, windowless room. At first, the CORE GLOW™ sample will be glowing extremely bright. We call this the CORE GLOW™ Initial Glow. After a few hours the Initial Glow will begin to reduce gradually and become a stable glow level we call After Glow. The CORE GLOW™ After Glow is the longest and brightest. In order to actually see how well the CORE GLOW™ stone is performing, return to the room 4+ hours later, preferably WITHOUT turning on any lights along the way and view your sample. CORE Glow TM vs Human Eye The human eye requires between 5 to 15 minutes to adjust from a light-filled environment to darkness. In the past, we have heard from clients who charged their CORE GLOW™ sample with a light source and then immediately placed it in a dark room. They were extremely impressed by the bright Initial Glow. But after leaving their CORE GLOW™ sample in the room for another few hours, they returned and were less than impressed by CORE GLOW’s apparent lack of performance. In actuality, the CORE GLOW™ sample in question was performing as per specifications. The reason why it ‘seemed’ to be less bright was because the Observer did not allow ANY time for his/her eyes to adjust to the dark environment. After only 2-3 minutes in the dark, the Observer will witness the CORE GLOW™ stone becoming brighter & brighter until it reaches maximum After Glow level. Things to Remember •Remind your clients about their eye’s natural abilities and initial limitations. •After Glow intensity will vary based on type & volume of CORE GLOW™ aggregate used. •Competing light sources like streetlights in the area will hamper glow performance. Core Glow Project Guide: Follow these step-by-step instructions to create your own Core Glow project For a permanently beautiful surface that glows in the dark use Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone). This glow stone can be used as a substitute for gravel aggregate for mixed-aggregate approaches and can be spread over the top layer of concrete, asphalt, and other paved surfaces. Note: these tips are for the application of Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone). To determine the best type of concrete to use for your project contact a local contractor or concrete retailer for advice on how to choose the best surface medium for your project. Steps: 1. Choosing your Project Area 2. Determining the Best-Suited Core Glow Product for your Project 3. How Much to Purchase? 4. Ordering Your Product 5. Pre-Installation Testing 6.Application Methods a.loose b.embedded 1.Choosing your Project Area: Core Glow works best under certain lighting conditions. Just like a plant, Core Glow has a niche habitat where it will thrive ie. glow brightly all night long. The optimum area outdoors is in full sunlight during the day and removed from competing light sources during the night. The optimum area indoors is in a brightly lit room that can be turned completely dark at night (ie. window coverings installed). Other prime locations are where you control the light conditions: anywhere indoors, customized outdoor lighting, events, public centres, etc. Table 1. Effects of different outdoor lighting conditions on Core Glow: Light Source Core Glow Result Tips to optimize glow Full Sunlight Optimum bright glow long charge Great choice. View on nights with a new moon or fresh cloud cover and minimize competing light sources. Partial Sunlight High medium glow long charge Place Core Glow in an area that gets sunlight late in the day for a bright glow in the evening, plus extended nighttime charge. Low Sunlight Medium soft glow long charge Ensure there is little to no competing light at night so you can enjoy the soft glow of your project area No Sunlight Low soft glow reduced charge charge Core Glow will charge even in ambient light. To maximize this choose an area with plenty of natural light or consider altering your project location to ensure your glow stones will charge. Core Glow 2019www.coreglow.ca1.855.777.2673 Table 2. Effects of competing light sources on Core Glow (for outdoor projects): Note that competing light diminishes your ability to see Core Glow, not the light output of the Core Glow stone. For indoor projects you will be able to control the amount of light Core Glow receives as well as the competing light sources to achieve the best glow. Table 3. Effects of indoor lighting on Core Glow (for indoor projects): If you have a project in mind but are concerned about the light conditions please let us know and we will go over your project with you to ensure your Core Glow application results in a bright glow that lasts all night. Competing light level Example Core Glow Result Tips to optimize glow None Parks, pathways, remote and rural locations, backyards, streets with no streetlights, indoors, rarely lit locations Optimum bright glow high visibility Place glow in areas with full sunlight to ensure a bright glow and full charge. Low In town, neighbourhoods, between streetlights, occasionally lit locations High bright glow medium visibility Ensure glow gets a full charge and is preferentially placed away from bright areas. Medium Lit pathways, streets with streetlights, lit parkinglots, often lit locations Medium medium glow medium visibility Place Core Glow in areas that need a little brightening up at night such as alleyways, surprise pathways, and corridors leading passersby to a new adventure. High City centres, constantly lit locations Low medium glow low visibility Use Core Glow to light up dark areas, shady corners, surprise nooks and hideaways in city centres. Even better if surrounded by little patches of nature for urban oases. Light Source Example Core Glow Result Tips to optimize glow Broad Spectrum, directly lit Incandescent, fluorescent, CFL, Optimum bright glow long charge Aim your lights directly at the glow surface for ~10 minutes before turning them off for a super bright glow. Remove competing light sources for the full effect. Broad Spectrum, ambient light Incandescent, fluorescent, CFL, blacklights High medium glow long charge Leave lights on for 30+ minutes for a brighter immediate glow and long charge. filtered spectrum, ambient light Coloured incandescent bulbs, LED, lasers Varied soft glow long charge Filtered incandescent lights and lasers do not compete with Core Glow stones, but also do little to charge them. We suggest charging them with broad spectrum lights then turning on your coloured lights. Direct lights away from glow surface for a multi-coloured light and glow display. UV Lights** UV flashlight, UV keychain light, UV bulbs (note: requires safety gear) Special** supercharged glow Short charge UV lights are a special case. Use a handheld light to supercharge Core Glow instantly. The UV light gives an immediate bright glow, but you will need to hold light on Core Glow for 10+ minutes for a long lasting glow. Core Glow 2019www.coreglow.ca1.855.777.2673 2.Determine the best-suited product type: Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone) comes in two sizes: 3-8mm and 8-15mm, and three colours: green, aqua, and blue. Green is suited for safety and road markings as it is the brightes t glow available. Aqua is energetic and lively. Blue is mellow and ethereal. Choose one colour or a mix based on your aesthetic preferences and the desired mood for your project space. We love seeing blue used in spas, secret walkways, and oasis-like bathrooms. Aqua is great for bar countertops, dancefloors, and kitchens. Green is a hit wherever- great for outdoor adventure areas, arena entryways, and public spaces. To order a Commercial Sample Pack visit www.coreglow.ca/commercial-sample-pack/ Top left: Green Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble, Mid Left: Aqua Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble, Bottom Left: Blue Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble, Mid: Mellow and sensual glow with blue and aqua glow. Far Right: energetic nightlife mood with aqua and green glow. 3.How much to purchase? Our basic guideline is 1lb per 16 ft2 for high density dispersed coverage (see www.coreglow.ca/coverage/ for more information). Formula: (project area in square feet) = x lbs of Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone) 16 square feet Tweak the denominator up for estimates based on lower density coverage, or down for higher density estimates. 4. Ordering your Chosen Product You can order directly through our website www.coreglow.ca. We offer heavily discounted bulk pricing for 4lb bags. Simply click on your chosen product type and select the 4lb option before proceeding to checkout. If you require 100+ pounds for your project please get in touch with us for volume pricing information. Shipping is usually between 5-11 days from date of purchase. For large orders requiring factory-direct service shipping is 3-7 weeks. 5.Pre – Installation Testing We highly recommend starting with a small mock up using your chosen medium before using Core Glow. This will enable you to practice your scattering method, try out a few different coverage densities, and test how long to let your medium set before spreading Core Glow across (if embedding permanently into surface). This is what the Core Glow Commercial Core Glow 2019www.coreglow.ca1.855.777.2673 Sample Pack is intended for. Practice with the selection of Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone) in the Commercial Sample Pack, try different colours and size combinations, and decide what you like best for your project. You can also order 1lb or 4lb bags of each colour if you would like more for your project mock-up. Pro Tip: use a handheld lime spreader or similar instrument to achieve a uniform spread. Make sure to choose one which will accommodate an aggregate size of up to 15mm Measurements to take during pre test (for concrete applications): 1.Time (in minutes) to allow concrete to set pre- application of Core Glow. You need your concrete to be set enough to allow the Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone) to be pushed into the surface without sinking down. Depending on your chosen medium this time will vary. With pre-testing we recommend placing a few stones every 20 minutes until it is clear the stones will not sink. 6.Final Installation Steps There are many ways to incorporate Core Glow into your project. Simple scattering, topdressings, and edging with loose stones is a simple way to add a touch of Core Glow. For permanent applications you can using a bonding resin, top -dress a cement surface, mix with aggregate for an exposed-aggregate floor, and more. We have compiled some tips below for applying Core Glow. a)Simple scatter (topdress method): Simply toss Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stones) across you project area for a quick, easy, and gorgeous galaxy or deep-sea like surface. Pros: fast application time, changeable, broad coverage Cons: impermanent, Core Glow can be lost over time Tips: -Use a Core Path or Core Drive stabilizing system to prevent your Core Glow from sinking beneath your gravel surface. These can be found in our Merchandise section at www.coreglow.ca/merchandise/ . For commercial and public project using this method we recommend using a resin-bond to lock the glow stones in place. -Use a handheld lime spreader to achieve an even spread of your Core Glow stones b)Edging: Group Core Glow stones together to edge a path or create your own pathway in the dark. Useful for night illumination of walking areas. Pros: bright and noticeable glow, conserves Core Glow stones if project area is very large Cons: no galaxy-effect Tips: cut hole in bottom of bag (like whipped cream) to slowly pour stones along edging area c)Embed in Concrete Surface: Ensure you have your product in the correct quantity, have practiced your application method, and have the time required to wait before applying Core Glow to your surface area (we recommend determining this time in pre- testing). If your project area is very large and the window of time needed to apply the Core Glow is over an hour we suggest pouring the concrete in sections, or at a minimum keeping track of which areas were poured first to ensure your application goes smoothly. Ensure that you have proper training for the concrete installation, or are using an experienced contractor. We cannot stress enough the importance of proper site preparation! See next page for full details. Core Glow 2019www.coreglow.ca1.855.777.2673 Materials: 1.Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stone) 2.Medium of choice (concrete, ashphalt, etc.) along with supplier recommended gear and tools 3.Safety gear and tools (gloves, spreader, etc.) 4.Timer 5.Handheld lime spreader (optional) Step by step Installation Process for Top-Dress Approach 1.Pour concrete mixture 2.Allow for required setting time before applying Core Glow (determined in pre-installation testing process) 3.Spread the Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stones) across the project surface. Use a tamp or spreader to push the aggregate into the surface, ensuring a level surface area. For large projects a roller compacter is recommended (handheld or industrial sized). 4.Let the concrete set for required time as set by manufacturer 5.Use a power sander to buff down any uneven sections or stones that have become covered with concrete. 6.Complete project with concrete cure or surface treatment as required by manufacturer. Top Left: Place Core Glow Commercial Grade Marble (Natural Stones) along project surface area once allotted time has passed. Surface should be stiff but not hard. Top Right: Press stones into the cement surface. Bottom Left: Sand down surface area once cement has set. Bottom Right: Finished concrete surface with glow stones embedded permanently in the surface. Core Glow 2019www.coreglow.ca1.855.777.2673 CORE GlowTM | Toll-free: 1.855.777.CORE (2673) Local: 1.250.871.6840 | www.coreglow.ca Core Glow Limited Warranty Subject to the terms and conditions herein, CORE Glow™ warrants its glow stone products to be free from manufacturing defects and to glow under normal usage for a period of 20 years from the date of purchase and will perform as outlined in the data documents luminosity of glow and infographics. The warranty coverage is limited to the original purchaser and is not transferable. The terms of this limited warranty are subject to the exclusions, limitations and restrictions as set forth as follows: Exclusions from Warranty Coverage: CORE Glow™ will have no liability under this warranty for, and no implied warranty shall be deemed to cover, any damages or failures related to or caused by: damages caused by natural causes including but not limited to hurricane, flooding earthquake, high winds, lightening or other types of natural disaster, environmental conditions, damages caused by any act of human including applying blunt force, bomb or other force, or as a result of unforeseen circumstances , acts of negligence or product misuse or abuse, structure or structural failure, inadequate substrate or substrate related failures including cracking or excessive deflection, normal wear and tear, improper coatings, any chemical interactions, coverage or coatings which block or impede light transmission and reception, failure to comply with our technical data sheets and other written instructions, applicable building codes and regulations and standard industry practice. Special Guarantee – CORE Glow™ Natural Stones CORE Glow™ guarantees that Natural Stones is the brightest photoluminescent commercial grade stone available. Further that CORE Glow™ Natural Stones will continue to glow for over 8-10 hours after being fully charged for a minimum of 15 minutes in direct sunlight. Limitations Except for the express written warranty contained herein, CORE Glow™ makes no other warranties, guarantees or indemnities, whether express or implied, arising by law, course of dealing, usage of trade, customer or otherwise, including but not limited to the implied warranty of merchantability and implied warranty of fitness for a particular purpose and all such other warranties, guarantees and indemnities are hereby disclaimed, overridden and excluded. This limitation may not be applicable in certain jurisdictions which do not allow limitations on the length of an implied warranty. The Liabilities of CORE Glow™ are limited solely and exclusively to the obligations specifically undertaken herein, and under no circumstances will CORE GLOW™ be liable or obligated for any incidental, consequential, indirect or special, punitive or any other damages of any kind whatsoever, whether foreseeable or unforeseeable, arising out of breach or failure of express or implied warranty, breach of contract, fraud, misrepresentation, negligence, strict liability in tort or otherwise, or any other cause of action, except and only to the extent that this Limitation is specifically precluded by applicable law of mandatory application. The Liability of CORE GLOW™ with respect to this warranty shall in no event exceed the replacement of such product or refund of the original purchase price at our sole discretion. Some provinces/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from provinces to provinces or other jurisdictions. Miscellaneous This writing is understood and intended to be the final expression of the CORE GLOW™ Warranty and is a complete and exclusive statement of the terms and conditions with respect thereto, superseding all prior agreements or representations, oral or written, and all other communications relating to Product Warranty. This warranty may not be altered or amended except in a written instrument executed by CORE GLOW™. No agent, employee or any other party is authorized to make any warranty in addition to that made in this warranty and CORE GLOW ™ shall not be bound by any such statements other than those contained in this warranty. The parties agree that any legal action arising from a dispute hereby irrevocably and unconditionally attorn to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the Province of British Columbia and all courts competent to hear appeals therefrom. Core Glow is a daughter company of Core Landscape Products , a British Columbia based company that delivers the best eco-friendly solutions for homeowners , developers , and professionals . We are proud to be 100 % women - owned and operated , independent , and Canadian ! We want you to be as amazed with our glow as we were when we first saw it . About US SCIENCE | SUSTAINABILITY | LIGHT www.sparklegrain.com Post Office Box 5176 * Santa Cruz * CA * Tel (831) 457-4566 Page 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The SPARKLE GRAIN FINISH SYSTEM is an eye -catching, black or white sparkle, concrete finish for interior or exterior concrete surfaces. It is recommended where a decorative, hard, longwearing, non-slip surface is required. BASIC USES Specifically designed for light to heavy usage: sidewalks, at shopping centers, houses, garages, stores, steps, ramps, wineries, schools, and public buildings. ADVANTAGES -- Can be used in a wide range of architectural colors. -- Increased wear resistance over untreated concrete floors. -- Non-rusting -- Non-slip TECHNICAL DATA SPARKLE GRAIN is an iridescent black sil-car abrasive grit, 9 to 10 on the Moh Scale and Number 2480 on the Knoop hardness scale (next to diamond hardness). Grit size either 16 or 36. Other grit sizes on request. ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS Concrete surfaces where indicated shall be treated with the SPARKLE GRAIN FINISH SYSTEM. This system shall be installed in Shake Coat applications to newly placed and screeded concrete surfaces. Color as selected by the architect. Apply the following manufacturer directions. A sample section of concrete shall be placed prior to the installation for architectural approval of both color and texture. APPLICATION Slab shall have a maximum slump of 3” placed in temperatures below 75 degrees F. Slump should not exceed 4” when warm weather of over 75 degrees F or drying winds are anticipated. Minimum strength of heavy service slab concrete should be 3,500 psi or as ACI Design Standards indicate. Immediately after substrate surface has been leveled and wood floated, before bleed water has appeared, SPARKLE GRAIN shall be applied evenly while there is sufficient moisture in the slab to saturate at least two dust-on coats. ** Troweling must be started early enough to complete all operations without use of additional water on the surface. www.sparklegrain.com Post Office Box 5176 * Santa Cruz * CA * Tel (831) 457-4566 Page 2 Distribute the product uniformly (at the rate of 20 to 25 lbs. per 100 sq. ft.), either by hand, or mechanical spreader over prepared wet slab. Apply in two separate shake coats (at times, a third coat may be necessary). Use 1/2 of the required quantity for the first application. Apply second application lightly after first application is floated. Do not throw the SPARKLE GRAIN or broadcast with a shovel as this will promote clumping. Use an evenly distributed broadcast. This is essential for product performance. Trowel SPARKLE GRAIN uniformly into surface after each shake coat. After the second shake coat of SPARKLE GRAIN has been applied, trowel over the surface. The surface must be uniformly covered. Use a steel trowel to leave grains at surface covered with a thin film of cement paste. Follow with a light trowel to produce a smooth surface free from defects or blemishes. Finish troweling should be delayed until surface has set sufficiently to avoid burying the SPARKLE GRAIN, but must be accomplished before the surface has hardened. EXPOSING SPARKLE GRAIN -- Weather and wear should eventually expose the SPARKLE GRAIN. -- Water and a soft broom, or sponge, may be used. Allow concrete surface to set sufficiently so that light scrubbing will not cause pitting. -- Light sandblasting will expose the SPARKLE GRAIN after the concrete has cured. -- A light 5% to 10% Muratic acid washing will expose Sparkle Grain as well. Care should be taken when acid washing. CAUTION A job test sample should be performed to determine desired finish and best method to expose the SPARKLE GRAIN for architectural approval. These mock ups are also essential for finishers not famili ar with applying SPARKLE GRAIN. **NOTE** To ensure proper application and texture, a 2’x2’ sample should be constructed at the job site. This sample will be used to test for acid washing or sandblasting prior to working on the main body of the project. This sample should also be used to test sealers, if used, prior to application on the main work. PACKAGING Packaged in 50lb. moisture proof buckets. DISCLAIMER Recommendations for use for this product are based on tests we believe to be reliable. Manufacturer and seller are not responsible for results where the product is used under conditions beyond our control. Under no circumstances will Pacific Palette Concrete Products be liable for damages to anyone in excess of the purchase price of the product. NOVEMBER 23, 2020 | MATSPEC - KODA | REV 022 1 FEATURES AND BENEFITS • Form and shape to create eye-catching installations • Extremely tough, allowing for easy fabrication and maximum installed durability • Extremely versatile, enabling designers to achieve full design potential • Lightweight, half the density of glass, making for easier installation and reducing structural support requirements • Good chemical resistance, reducing potential harm incurred by cleaning agents AVAILABLE COLORS • Crystal Clear. Clear, uncolored Koda XT. • 3form XT Color Portfolio. 3form’s XT Color Portfolio can be used with Koda XT in quantities as few as one panel. TEXTURES/PATTERNS/FINISHES 3form Koda XT panels come standard with various surface finishes to enhance the durability or aesthetic requirements of the end-use application. In most cases, you can even pick different front and back finishes. Finishes include: • Patent - A high gloss finish with highest light transmission • Polish* - Glass like finish • Sandstone - A durable finish with subtle texture • Stucco - A durable finish with a pebbled texture • Vellum - A random brushed finish similar to 3form renewable matte * Polish finish is only available on Crystal Clear PANEL SIZES AND TOLERANCES 3form Koda XT panels are offered in standard 4' x 8' (1.2 m x 2.4 m) and 4’x10’ (1.2m x 3.0m) sizes. All dimensions and squareness are subject to a 3/16" (4.7 mm) tolerance. Standard thickness of Koda XT is 1/2" (12.7 mm). 1/4” (6.3mm) Koda XT is only available in Crystal Clear. Product Description 3form Koda xt offers color, durability and design freedom for the most extreme environments and applications. These panels exhibit the highest performance of any engineered resin panels. Color, finish, and translucency coupled with endless shaping options, Koda xt is the perfect medium for your exterior architectural application. A product line developed specifically for exterior projects, Koda xt has the added benefits of being constructed from polycarbonate, offering high design and performance. CRYSTAL CLEAR NOMINAL MINIMUM MAXIMUM THICKNESS ALLOWANCE ALLOWANCE GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE 1/2" (12.7 mm) 0.427” (10.85 mm) 0.500” (12.7 mm) 1/4” (6.3 mm) 0.212” (5.38 mm) 0.260” (6.6 mm) KODA XT WITH 3FORM COLOR PORTFOLIO NOMINAL MINIMUM MAXIMUM THICKNESS ALLOWANCE ALLOWANCE GAUGE GAUGE GAUGE 1/2" (12.7 mm) 0.451 (11.45 mm) 0.585 (14.86 mm) Sheet tolerance readings are based on an average of several mea- surements along both long edges of each panel. These measure- ments are taken 2-3 inches (50-75 mm) from the edges of the panel. Custom gauges of Koda XT are possible. Your 3form Sales Repre- sentative can assist you with questions regarding custom gauges for your application. FLATNESS TOLERANCE Koda XT panels shall not have distortion in the form of a wrinkle, twist or scallop along the perimeter of the sheet. Overall warp extending across the sheet is permitted to a maximum of 1/4" (6.3 mm) for each 48" (1.2 m) or fraction thereof. Panel is to be measured when laying horizontally under its own weight on a flat continuous surface. x koda xt™ NOVEMBER 23, 2020 | MATSPEC - KODA | REV 022 2 DEFLECTION 3form Koda XT will exhibit different amounts of deflection given a variety of factors; fastening techniques, loads, panel thickness and panel dimensions to list a few. The 3form Technical Help desk can assist you with general deflection guidelines for your application with the Koda XT Deflection Charts technical white paper. If your applica- tion has specific engineering requirements, please contact 3form for additional direction. HEAT FORMING/COLD BENDING 3form Koda XT can be heat formed to incorporate shape and structure into your application. Please contact 3form Technical Service for details. 3form Koda XT can be cold bent for simple bends and curved areas. As a rule, a minimum radius of 100 times thickness is acceptable for Koda XT. KODA XT THICKNESS MINIMUM COLD BEND RADII 1/2" (12.7 mm) 50" (1.27 m) 1/4” (6.3 mm) 25” (0.63 m) EDGE FINISHING Edges of 3form Koda XT panels are able to be machined or routed into a variety of different forms. In addition to a straight edge, edges may accept beveling, rounding, etc. Sanding, buffing, chemical polishing and heat/flame polishing are not recommended for exterior applications due to added stress that is imparted on the material from these techniques. SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS (STC) VALUES Measurement protocol: ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Labo- ratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements KODA XT THICKNESS STC VALUES 1/2" (0.500") 34 Specifications FLAMMABILITY & SMOKE TEST RESULTS BUILDING CODE APPROVALS Koda XT panels have been independently tested and meet the crite- ria for approved interior finishes and light transmitting resin materials as described in the 2015 International Building Code®. TEST 3FORM KODA XT RESULT ASTM D 2843 Smoke Density 48.9 PASS Below 75 ASTM D 635 Flame Spread Self extinguishing PASS CC1 ASTM D 1929 Self-ignition Temperature 1004°F PASS Greater than 650°F ASTM E84-03 Flame Spread, 1/4" thickness Smoke Developed 65v450 Class B: 26-75 Class B: ≤450 ASTM E84-03 Flame Spread, 1/2" thickness Smoke Developed 55 400 Class B: 26-75 Class B: ≤450 CAN/ULC 102.2 Flame Spread, 1/2” thickness Smoke Developed 37 280 N/A N/A NFPA 286 Ceiling only PASS PANEL WEIGHT THICKNESS (INCHES) WEIGHT PER UNIT AREA (LB/FT2) 1/2" (12.7 mm) 3.1 lb/ft2 (15.1 kg/m2) 1/4” (6.3 mm) 1.5 lb/ft2 (7.31 kg/m 2) EXPANSION/CONTRACTION ALLOWANCES Like all resin products, 3form Koda XT will expand and contract nomi- nally with fluctuations in temperature. The following formula provides allowances that should be made in framed or fitted applica tions: • Longest length of panel (inches) x temperature change of the sheet (°F) x 0.00004 = Amount of Linear Expansion/Contraction (inches) Example: • 48" x 96" panel that experiences a 100°F temperature change will expand/contract: 96 inches x 100 degrees°F x 0.00004 in/in ºF = 0.384 inches (expansion) Allowances should also be made in the following situations: • Fastening points • Channel depths in frames • Holes for standoffs and other hardware • Meeting points for multiple sheets of 3form Koda XT ULTRAVIOLET EXPOSURE PERFORMANCE 3form Koda XT panels incorporate ultraviolet stabilization technolo- gies that are proven to maintain aesthetics and performance. The following charts provide an overview of the effectiveness of the UV stabilization technology that is incorporated with 3form Koda XT panels. One important characteristic of a materials performance is the ability to maintain consistent aesthetics. The following chart demonstrates the performance of both Koda XT and unstabilized polycarbonate in terms of maintaining consistent light transmission. It is shown that the 3form Koda XT with UV stabilization exhibits excellent perfor- mance following 12,000 kJ of exposure. Another important factor to consider is the ability of a material to maintain its physical integrity after exposure to solar radiation. The following chart shows how the impact strength is maintained after 12,000 kJ of accelerated exposure of Koda XT. 3form Koda XT Property Retention - Flatwise Impact (Xenon Arc Accelerated Exposure Testing) 0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 9000 12000 Exposure (kJ)Flatwise Impact Strength (ft-lb/sq. in)Koda XT General Purpose Polycarbonate 3form Koda XT Color Stability - Light Transmission (Xenon Arc Accelerated Exposure Testing) 0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0 90.0 100.0 0 250 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 9000 12000 Exposure (kJ)Total Transmission (%)Koda XT General Purpose Polycarbonate NOVEMBER 23, 2020 | MATSPEC - KODA | REV 022 3 Selected Mechanical and Physical Properties for 3form Koda XT TYPICAL VALUE 0.118" (3 MM)0.236" (6 MM) PROPERTY*ASTM METHOD SI U.S. SI U.S. GENERAL Density D 1505 1,200 kg/m3 0.043 lb/in3 1,200 kg/m3 0.043 lb/in3 Water Absorption D 570 23°C (73°F),24h immersion 0.15%0.15%—— MECHANICAL Tensile Stress @ Yield D 638 62 MPa 9,000 psi —— Tensile Stress @ Break D 638 65.5 MPa 9,500 psi —— Elongation D 638 110%110%—— Tensile Modulus D 638 2,344 MPa 340,000 psi — — Flexural Modulus D 790 2,380 MPa 345,000 psi —— Flexural Strength D 790 93 MPa 13,500 psi —— Compressive Strength D 695 86 MPa 12,500 psi —— Compressive Modulus D 695 2,380 MPa 345,000 psi —— Shear Strength, Ultimate D 732 69 MPa 10,000psi —— Shear Strength, Yield D 732 41 MPa 6,000 psi —— Shear Modulus D 732 786 MPa 114,000 psi —— Rockwell Hardness D 785 M70/R118 M70/R118 —— Safety Glazing ANSI 97.1 PASS — Izod Impact Strength, Notched D 256 @ 32°F 747 J/m 14 ft·lbf/in.—— Impact Strength, Unnotched D 4812 @ 32°F 3,202 J/mNo Failure 60 ft·lbf/in.No Failure —— Impact ResistancePuncture, Energy @ Max. Load D 3763 @ 32°F >61 J >45 ft·lb Miami-Dade Notice of Accep-tance (NOA)NOA No. 12-0120.01 ICC-ES Listing ESL-1019 THERMAL Continuous Max Use Temperature - Standard, Koda Color and Custom Colors –132ºC 270ºF 132ºC 270ºF Continuous Max Use Temperature - C3 Colors –93ºC 200ºF 93ºC 200ºF Heat Deflection Temperature D648 @ 66psi 137.7ºC 280ºF Forming Temperature –163-182ºC 325-360ºF 163-182ºC 325-360ºF Thermal Conductivity ASTM C 177 0.195 W/m*K 1.35 Btu*in/hr*ft2*ºF 0.195 W/m*K 1.35 Btu*in/hr*ft2*ºF Coefficient of Thermal Expansion ASTM D 696 6.75 x 10-5 m/m/ºC 3.75 x 10-5 in/in/ ºF 6.75 x 10-5 m/m/ºC 3.75 x 10-5 in/in/ ºF * Unless noted otherwise, all tests are run @ 23°C (73°F) and 50% relative humidity, using specimens machined from extruded sheeting with a thickness as indicated. **Nonbreak as defined in ASTM D 4812 using specimens having a thickness as indicated. Properties NOVEMBER 23, 2020 | MATSPEC - KODA | REV 022 4 Chemical Resistance of 3form Koda XT to Select Compounds 6 DAY FULL IMMERSION TESTING @ 73ºF (23ºC) Polymer materials are affected by chemicals in different ways. Changes in performance or appearance can be attributed to fabrication methods, exposure conditions, concentration of chemical substances or exposure duration. Such factors can even influence the final effect of substances that 3form Koda XT is considered “Resistant” to under test conditions. Further details are explained below: FABRICATION Stresses generated from sanding, grinding, drilling, polishing, ma- chining, sawing and/or forming (hot or cold). EXPOSURE Exposure duration, stresses imparted during the application life-cycle due to loads, temperature changes, heat, environments, etc. APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS Application from contact, rubbing, wiping, spraying, soaking, etc. Also having an effect is the relative concentration of the chemical in question. The following data is based on complete immersion of Koda XT in the chemical or reagent shown. Samples remained immersed and were stored at 23ºC (73ºF) for a period of six days. Following the test period the samples were removed from immersion and inspected. This table represents the changes in appearance of the immersed samples over the testing period. The following table provides indicative performance of the chemical resistance characteristics of Koda XT. The following codes are used to describe the chemical resistance characteristics: R = RESISTANT 3form Koda XT is able to withstand the identified compound for long exposure periods (6 days, full immersion) LR = LIMITED RESISTANCE 3form Koda XT is only resistant when in contact with this compound for short periods at room temperature. It is advised that further determination of the effect of the substance be further tested in your particular application. NR = NOT RESISTANT 3form Koda XT is not resistant to the compound. The material will swell, craze, haze, dissolve or experience some physical change when exposed to this substance. GENERAL CHEMICALS REAGENT RESULT REAGENT RESULT Acetic Acid, 10% in water R Acetone NR Ammonia, 0.1% in water NR Ammonium nitrate, 10% in water R Benzene NR Benzine (no aromatic hydrocar- bons) R Butyl Acetate NR Carbon tetrachloride NR Chloroform NR Citric Acid, 10% in water R Dibutyl phthalate NR Diethyl ether NR Dimethyl formamide NR Dioctyl phthalate NR Dioxane NR Ethanol, 100% R Ethyl Acetate NR Ethylene chloride NR Ethylene glycol, 1:1 with water R Glycerin NR Hexane R Hydrochloric Acid, 10% in water R Hydrogen Peroxide, 30% in water R Iron (III) chloride, saturated solution R Isooctate (2,2,4-trimethyl pentane)R Isopropanol (pure)R Methanol NR Methyl Ethyl Ketone NR Methylamine NR Methylene chloride NR Nitric Acid, 10% in water R n-propanol NR Ozone, 1% in air NR Paraffin, paraffin oil, free from aromatic hydrocarbons R Phosphoric acid, 1% in water R Propane R Silicone Oil R Sodium Carbonate, 10% in water R Sodium Chloride, 10%R Sodium Hydroxide, 1% NR Sodium Nitrate, 10% in water R Styrene NR Sulfuric Acid, 10% in water R Tetrachloroethane NR Tetrachloroethylene NR Trichloroethylene NR Tricresyl Phosphate NR Triethylene Glycol R Xylene NR DISINFECTANTS* REAGENT RESULT ChemiSwiss SUIclean™R ClearSpace powered by PreventX™R Clorox Healthcare® Bleach Germicidal Wipes LR Clorox Healthcare® Hydrogen Peroxide Cleaner Disinfectant Wipes NR Clorox Healthcare® VersaSure™ Alcohol-Free Disinfectant Cleaner Wipes LR Diversey™ Avert® Disinfectant Cleaner R Diversey™ Oxivir® TB Hospital Grade Disinfectant R Diversey™ Virex® Cleaner Disinfectant TB LR Diversey™ Virex® II 256 One Step Disinfectant Cleaner and Deodorant LR Ecolab® Neutral Disinfectant Cleaner LR Ecolab® Oxycide Daily Disinfectant Cleaner R Ecolab® Quaternary Disinfectant Cleaner LR PDI® Sani-Cloth® AF3 Germicidal Disposable Wipe LR PDI® Sani-Cloth® Bleach Germicidal Disposable Wipe R PDI® Sani-Cloth® Plus Germicidal Disposable Cloth LR PDI® Sani-Cloth® Prime Germicidal Disposable Wipe LR PDI® Super Sani-Cloth® Germicidal Disposable Wipe LR *Use recommended cleaners and disinfectant products as directed by the manufacturers NOVEMBER 23, 2020 | MATSPEC - KODA | REV 022 5 Cleaning Instructions 3form Koda XT, like all thermoplastic resin materials, should be cleaned periodically. A regular, quarterly cleaning program will dra- matically help prevent noticeable weathering and dirt build-up. Rinse the sheets with lukewarm water. Remove dust and dirt from Koda XT with a soft non-abrasive cloth or sponge and a solution of mild soap and/or liquid detergent in water. A 50:50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water also works well. Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm water. Always use a soft, damp cloth to blot dry. Rubbing with a dry cloth can scratch the material and create a static charge. Never use scrapers or squeegees on Koda XT. Also avoid scouring compounds, gasoline, benzene, acetone, carbon tetrachloride, certain deicing fluids, lacquer thinner or other strong solvents. COMPATIBLE CLEANERS: • Top Job, Joy® • Palmolive Liquid® • Windex® Ammonia free [Top Job and Joy are registered trademarks of Proctor & Gamble, Palmolive is a registered trademark of Colgate Palmolive, Windex is a registered trademark of Drackett Products Company] DO NOT: • Use a squeegee. • Strong solvents, h ighly alkaline or abrasive cleaning agents. • Clean in hot sun or elevated temperatures. • Rub with a dry cloth. PRESSURE WASHING Pressure washing can also be an effective way to remove miscella- neous debris from surfaces of 3form Koda XT installations. Pre-soak panels with a light water spray to loosen and remove inci- dental surface debris. It is recommended that the water pressure for cleaning Koda XT panels be 1,500 psi or less. 3form Koda XT is a tough material but can be damaged if high pressure is concentrated in a single position too long. Use a gradual sweeping motion over the application. Never concentrate water spray in a single position. Pressure nozzle should never be positioned closer than 8" (203 mm) from the panel surface. Always test a portion of the sheet first before spraying. If test piece shows any sign of material fatigue, abrasion or delamination – discontinue pressure washing and proceed with manual cleaning instructions as described above. Coated or painted parts are not suitable for pressure washing as fin- ish may be stripped off. Pressure washing is not suitable for Koda XT panels that have been seamed or sealed. If using detergent, use mild detergents only. Rinse sheet with light water spray after washing. DO NOT: • Concentrate spray in single position. • Use more than 1,500 psi pressure. • Position pressure nozzle closer than 8" (203 mm) from panel. • Proceed with pressure washing if test piece shows detrimental effects to panel. • Pressure wash Koda XT panels that have been painted or coated to maintain coating integrity. If debris or dirt is not removed by pressure washing attempt to clean with manual procedures described in preceding section. IMPORTANT If a cleaning material is found to be incompatible in a short-term test, it will usually be found to be incompatible in the field. The converse, however, is not always true. Favorable performance is no guarantee that actual end-use conditions have been duplicated. Therefore, these results should be used as a guide only and it is recommended that the user test the products under actual end-use conditions. For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 877-649-2670. HARDWARE XT™ For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved 3form® Hardware XT systems provide versatile and elegant solutions for affixing 3form XT materials to a variety of exterior sub- strates, including concrete, Brick, CMU and under certain approved conditions steel structure. Machined or cast from of Marine Grade 316 Stainless steel and available with anti-vibration thread locking tape the Hardware XT line is ready for demanding conditions. Due to the local variations in exterior requirements, Hardware XT must be approved by 3form for each installation. 2For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ OVERVIEW 3-15-0030 1.5" diameter cap with M10 threads 3-15-0107 shoulder washer 3-15-0108 eptfe washer 3-15-0031 1.5" x 2" barrel M10 threads 3-15-0032 1.5" x 4" barrel M10 threads 3-15-0604 1 point angled XT spider 3-15-0605 2 point angled XT spider 3-15-0638 FHSCS M10x1.5, 50mm 3-15-0105 316 SS Large-Diameter Flat Washer 1/2" Screw Size 2" OD, .05"-.08" Thick XT hardware 3-15-0633 Int threaded sleeve HIT-IC M10x80 3-15-0104 M10 threaded rod with chisled end 3-15-0631 ANCHOR ADHESIVE Screen Tubes 3-3/8, 22mm OD 3-15-0094 ANCHOR ADHESIVE Screen Tubes 3-3/8 16mm OD 3-15-0636 Int threaded sleeve M10x110 General Notes For Exterior conditions, contact your 3form Representative for additional help selecting appropriate materials and hardware requirements and quantities. 3form Hardware XT is paired and supplied with anti-vibration thread locking tape. DO NOT use cyanoacrylate or solvent type thread locking materials that are not approved by 3form with 3form panels (e.g. Loctite liquids or similar). Please be aware that if caps are installed and removed many times the functionality of this tape can be degraded. Do Not overtighten Caps; Panels need to be able to expand and contract uninhibited. Hand-tighten caps until you are unable to turn more by hand, then use the cap tightening tool for an 1/4 additional turn. DO NOT use cyanoacrylate or solvent type thread locking materials with 3form panels as it can chemically damage them. 3form Hardware XT is supplied with thread locking tape approved for this purpose. Exterior Rated Hardware (XT) 3form Hardware XT is designed specifically for exterior conditions over Brick / CMU and Concrete substrate. This hardware is 1-1/2" diameter marine grade Stainless Steel (316) with available vibration-resistant thread tape and panel protecting bushings and washers. Due to variations in local conditions please contact your 3form Repre- sentative for point support quantities required per panel. Please see “Substrate Conditions” on page 3 for additional substrate conditions. 3For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ Substrate Conditions Concrete Approved with appropriate anchors, refer to Hilti Anchoring manual for additional information. CMU Approved with appropriate anchors, refer to Hilti Anchoring manual for additional information. Solid Brick Approved with appropriate anchors and appropriate brick conditions, refer to Hilti Anchoring manual for additional information. Steel Structure Conditionally approved, contact 3form Representative for anchoring requirements, 3form Hard- ware XT is threaded M10 x 1.5. Stucco or other not listed above Not Approved unless approved and engineered by third party, additional blocking or secondary structure required. Panel Fabrication Panel Fabrication requirements are as shown on diagram to right. Hole diameter needs to allow panel to expand / contract. NOTE: All exterior projects must be approved by 3form Advanced Technology Group Prior to quoting and project acceptance. 114" 31.75mm 14" 5.84mm 11 2" 38.10mm SA-0394 2" 50.80mm 11 2" 38.10mm SA-0182 13 8" 34.29mm SA-0399 1 8" 3.18mm 13 8" 35.56mmR14"7.10mm716"11.66mmSA-0401 516" 7.87mm 116" 1.27mm34"19.05mm CONTACT 3FORM REPBY MATERIAL TYPECONTACT 3FORM REPBY MATERIAL TYPEPanel Fabrication Part Specs 4For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ Point Support >> concrete Overview 3-15-0104 M10 threaded rod with chisled end 3-15-0032-K 3-15-0032 1.5 x 4” Barrel, M10 threads 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape 3-15-0031-K 3-15-0031 1.5 x 2” Barrel, M10 threads 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0030-K 3-15-0030 1.5” diameter cap with 1.5” threads 3-15-0107 Delrin Shoulder Washer 3-15-0108 Washer EPTFE Installation parts: 3-15-0101 3-15-0099 3-15-0092 3-15-0102 3-15-0096 3-15-0093 3-15-0103 3-15-0109 5For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ InstallationPoint Support >> concrete 90 mm 25 mm85 mm 3-15-0104 M10 threaded rod with chisled end Drill Ø12mm hole Using 3-15-0101, 90mm deep Brush bore hole. Use 3-15-0102+3-15-0096, brush and handle combo. repeat these 2 steps 2 or 3 times Remove drilling debris with a blowout bulb or with compressed air. Use Epoxy Adhesive HILTI HY-200-A Inject until 1/2 -2/3 full (6-8 pumps) Don’t move anchor for at least 30 min\ before installing 3form hardware. minimum (@ 68°F). Wrap threadlocking tape on anchor threads. Install the concrete insert, keep perpendicular to the wall. Twist while installing to make sure there is 25 mm of thread rod visible outside the wall. Fastener may be adjusted during gel time (3min) 3form hardware 6For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape Spider >> concrete Overview 3-15-0636 HIS-RN M10x110 A4 3-15-0605-K 3-15-0605 2 point angled XT spider 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0638 FHSCS M10x1.5, 50mm 3-15-0604-K 3-15-0604 1 point angled XT spider 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0638 FHSCS M10x1.5, 50mm 3-15-0030-K 3-15-0030 1.5” diameter cap with 1.5” threads 3-15-0107 Delrin Shoulder Washer 3-15-0108 Washer EPTFE Installation parts: 3-15-0634 3-15-0099 3-15-0635 3-15-0096 3-15-0093 3-15-0103 3-15-0092 3-15-0109 7For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ InstallationSpider >> concrete Drill hole 3/4’’ Ø, 110mm deep Use 3-15-0634 Brush bore hole. Use 3-15-0635+3-15-0096 repeat these 2 steps 2 or 3 times Remove drilling debris with a blowout bulb or with compressed air. Use Epoxy Adhesive HILTI HY-200-A Inject until 1/2 - 2/3 full (~6-8 pumps) Don’t move anchor during 30 mn minimum (@ 68°F). Wrap with threadlocking tape, then install 3form hardware Install the concrete insert so that the insert is flush with the wall surface. 3-15-0636 HIS-RN M10x110 A4 110 mm 3form hardware 8For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape Point Support >> CMU / Hollow block Overview 3-15-0104 M10 threaded rod with chisled end 3-15-0094 ANCHOR ADHESIVE SCREEN TUBE 16mm OD 3-15-0031-K 3-15-0031 1.5 x 2” Barrel, M10 threads 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0030-K 3-15-0030 1.5” diameter cap with 1.5” threads 3-15-0107 Delrin Shoulder Washer 3-15-0108 Washer EPTFE Installation parts: 3-15-0032-K 3-15-0032 1.5 x 4” Barrel, M10 threads 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0101 3-15-0099 3-15-0095 3-15-0096 3-15-0093 3-15-0103 3-15-0092 3-15-0109 9For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ InstallationPoint Support >> CMU / Hollow block 90 mm 3-15-0094 ANCHOR ADHESIVE SCREEN TUBE 16mm OD 3-15-0104 M10 threaded rod with chisled end Drill hole 5/8’’Ø, 90mm deep (through block wall) Use 3-15-0097 Brush bore hole. Use 3-15-0095+3-15-0096 repeat these 2 steps 2 or 3 times Remove drilling debris with a blowout bulb or with compressed air. Insert anchor screen tube 3-15-0094 Fill 1/2 -2/3 full (~6-8 pumps) Use Epoxy Adhesive HILTI HIT-HY270 Hybrid Adhesive (3-15-0091) Install the threaded rod intoo the mesh screen verify embedment is 85mm + 25 mm outside the wall. Check if perpendicular to the wall during first five minutes of install 25 mm85 mm Don’t move anchor for at least 30 min\ before installing 3form hardware. minimum (@ 68°F) 3form hardware 10For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape Spider >> CMU / Hollow Block, Masonry Overview 3-15-0604-K 3-15-0604 1 point angled XT spider 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0638 FHSCS M10x1.5, 50mm 3-15-0030-K 3-15-0030 1.5” diameter cap with 1.5” threads 3-15-0107 Delrin Shoulder Washer 3-15-0108 Washer EPTFE Installation parts: 3-15-0605-K 3-15-0605 2 point angled XT spider 3-15-0105 316SS Flat Washer, 2” OD 3-15-0638 FHSCS M10x1.5, 50mm 3-15-0633 Int threaded sleeve HIT-IC M10x80 3-15-0631 ANCHOR ADHESIVE SCREEN TUBE 22mm OD 3-15-0630 3-15-0099 3-15-0091 3-15-0632 3-15-0096 3-15-0093 3-15-0103 11For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ 3-15-0633 Int threaded sleeve HIT-IC M10x80 InstallationSpider >> CMU / Hollow Block, Masonry Drill hole 27/32’’Ø, 90mm deep (through block wall) Use 3-15-0630 Brush bore hole. Use 3-15-0632+3-15-0096 repeat these 2 steps 2 or 3 times Remove drilling debris with a blowout bulb or with compressed air. Insert anchor screen tube 3-15-0631 Fill 1/2 - 2/3 full (~6-8 pumps) Use Epoxy Adhesive HILTI HIT-HY270 Hybrid Adhesive (3-15-0091) Install insert intoo the mesh screen so that insert is flush with wall. Check if perpendicular to the wall during first five minutes of install clean off any excess adhesive so that hardawre will sit flush 3-15-0631 ANCHOR ADHESIVE SCREEN TUBE 22mm OD 90 mm Don’t move anchor for at least 30 min\ before installing 3form hardware. minimum (@ 68°F) 3-15-0091 3form hardware 12For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ 3-15-0030 1.5" diameter cap with M10 threads 3-15-0638 FHSCS M10x1.5, 50mm InstallationThreadlocking Tape to All Thread Points Under moderate tension wrap the tape onto the male threads in the direction of the threads (clockwise for standard right-handed threads). After wrapping with tape, profile of threads should be visible. Assemble male and female threads as required. As you assemble some rolling tape in front of the nut is evidence that the gap is adequately filled. Ensure all surfaces are clean and free from debris. Apply the threadlocking tape where there will be contact between male and female threads. For Disassembly: Remove with standard hand tools 3-15-0104 M10 threaded rod with chisled end 3-15-0109 Threadlocking Tape 13For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ General Specifications: XT Point Support Milled Stainless Steel: Including parts of; 3-15-0030-K, 3-15-0031-K, 3-15-0032-K, 3-15-0104 Specifications for Milled Stainless Steel for the Point Support XT product line are as follows; Material: Marine Grade Stainless Steel 316 Finish: Mill Finish, Raw Powdercoating available Recommended Use Exterior and Interior MSDS information Recycled content typically approx. 60%, 35% Post Industrial, 25% Post Consumer Cast Stainless Steel: Including parts of; 3-15-0604-K, 3-15-0605-K Specifications for Cast Stainless Steel for the Point Support XT product line are as follows; Material: Marine Grade Stainless Steel 316 Finish: Mill Finish, Raw Powdercoating available Recommended Use Exterior and Interior MSDS information Recycled content typically approx. 60%, 35% Post Industrial, 25% Post Consumer Zinc Plated Mild Steel: Including parts of; 3-15-0094, 3-15-0631 Specifications for Zinc Plated Steel for the Point Support XT product line are as follows; Material: Zinc Plated Mild Steel Finish: Zinc Plated Recommended Use Exterior and Interior MSDS information NA Galvanized Mild Steel: Including parts of; 3-15-0633, 3-15-0636 Specifications for Galvanized Mild Steel for the Point Support XT product line are as follows; Material: Galvanized Mild Steel Finish: Galvanized Recommended Use Exterior and Interior MSDS information NA 14For more information, please visit 3-form.com or call 800.726.0126 SEPTEMBER 2019 | MAN - 028 - HARDWARE XT | REV 007 © 2014 3form, Inc. All rights reserved HARDWARE XT™ Milled Solid Plastic: Including parts of; 3-15-0030-K Specifications for Solid Plastics for the Point Support XT product line are as follows; Material: Delrin Natural Translucent White Finish: Factory Maximum Length: NA Recommended Use: Exterior and Interior MSDS information: NA Milled Solid Plastic: Including parts of; 3-15-0030-K Specifications for Solid Plastics for the Point Support XT product line are as follows; Material: EPTFE, White Finish: Factory Maximum Length: NA Recommended Use: Exterior and Interior MSDS information: NA 1 Revised January 17, 2022 | Landscape Forms Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Typology Ring Light Spec Sheet | CQ700 Housing & Materials Cast aluminum construction. Flexible LED light engine is clamped into fixture housing with aluminum segmented arcs. Housing features a spun aluminum gloss white powdercoat reflector. All hardware is magni-coated steel. Electrical Surge protected 120V through 277V 50/60Hz electronic driver, 0-10V dimming. -40°C start temperature. Cast aluminum driver housing assembly located at top of pole. Available with optional ANSI C136.41 twist lock receptacle or Wattstopper FSP-311B photo/motion sensor. Light Engine Fully encapsulated flexible linear LED fixture delivers downward direct and indirect lighting in conjunction with the gloss white metal reflector. A RoHS compliant circuit board is included. Available in 2700K, 3000K, 3500K, and 4000K. >90 CRI across all available color temperatures. Warranty LED lighting products are warranted for six years. Certification UL Listed for Wet Location, CE, International Dark Sky Approved, Buy America Compliant, RoHS Compliant Designed by Designworks, a BMW Group company Click here for patent information related to this product. Weight: 48lbs (luminaire and driver housing) EPA: 1.64ft² TM21 L70(10k): 60,000hrs Protection Class: IP67 Photo/motion sensor Twist lock receptacle Distribution TV The Typology Collection, designed and engineered in collaboration with BMW Designworks, opens a new realm of possibility in the way the urban landscape is experienced. Intelligent, systemic engineering complements existing architecture in meaningful and practical ways - defining and connecting spaces, and intuitively guiding the movement of visitors in and among them. Typology's ring light is stunning, seemingly levitating light fixtures recognized instantly from almost a mile away. Perched atop an aluminum mast, a circular strip of LEDs creates a solid ring of ambient light that, when viewed from underneath, is like a looking glass to the sky. 35mm 1 1/2" 151mm 6" 1016mm 40" 776mm 30 1/2" 129mm 5" 35mm 1 1/2" 151mm 6" 776mm 30 1/2" 1016mm 40" 129mm 5" RING LIGHT LUMINAIRE 35mm 1 1/2" 151mm 6" 1016mm 40" 776mm 30 1/2" 129mm 5" 35mm 1 1/2" 151mm 6" 776mm 30 1/2" 1016mm 40" 129mm 5" RING LIGHT LUMINAIRE Click here to view the technical data sheet for the photo/motion sensor. 30 1/2" 776mm 5" 129mm 40" 1016mm 6" 151mm 1 1/2" 35mm 2 Revised January 17, 2022 | Landscape Forms Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Typology Ring Light Spec Sheet | CQ700 Pole Round pole is 5" diameter or stepped 6" to 5" diameter depending on height. Manufactured from seamless 6063 aluminum alloy and heat treated to produce a T6 temper. Pole is topped with aluminum driver housing assembly. Flush mounted hand hole cover includes two magni-coated fasteners. Base plate is cast aluminum A356 alloy heat treated to a T6 temper. Base options include four cast aluminum nut covers or a two-piece cast aluminum cover plate. Pole is mounted at grade with galvanized steel anchor bolts. Template and anchor hardware included. Mounting Housing is attached to a 5" diameter section of pole with a two- piece permanent mold cast compression clamp. All hardware is magni-coated steel.25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED 25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 25 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED20 FOOT TRIPLE LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES, STACKED16 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 20 FOOT DOUBLE LUMINAIRES,PATTERNED14 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE12 FOOT SINGLE LUMINAIRE 16 FOOT 2 LUMINAIRES, PATTERNED 25 ft / 7.6 m25 ft / 7.6 m 20 ft / 6.1 m 20 ft / 6.1 m 16 ft / 4.9 m16 ft / 4.9 m 14 ft / 4.3 m14 ft / 4.3 m 12 ft / 3.7 m12 ft / 3.7 m 12 ft 3.7 m CQ751-01 Clamp Detail 21 ft / 6.4 m 17 ft / 5.2 m CQ752-01 CQ753-01 CQ753-02 CQ754-01 CQ754-02 CQ754-03 CQ755-01 16 3/4" 427mm 5" 129mm Driver Housing 3 Revised January 17, 2022 | Landscape Forms Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Typology Ring Light Spec Sheet | CQ700 Model Distribution Type Drive Current Delivered Lumens System Watts Bug Rating CQ701-01 Type V 1400mA 2175 39.8 B1-U0-G1 This data is subject to change. 118 235 353 471 1 2 Maximum Candela = 470.832 Located At Horizontal Angle = 0, Vertical Angle = 52.5# 1 - Vertical Plane Through Horizontal Angles (0 - 180) (Through Max. Cd.)# 2 - Horizontal Cone Through Vertical Angle (52.5) (Through Max. Cd.) Photometric Toolbox® Copyright 2002-2019 by Lighting Analysts, Inc.Calculations based on published IES Methods and recommendations, values rounded for display purposes.Results derived from content of manufacturers photometric file. Page 2 CQ701-01 Maximum Candela=471 Located at Horizontal Angle=0, Vertical Angle=52.5 12ft single luminaire 16ft double luminaires staggered 20ft triple luminaires spiraled 10ft .1 .2 .5 1 2 10ft .1 .2 .5 1 2 4 MODEL: MOUNTING HEIGHT:10ft 4 2 1 .5 .2 .1 4 Revised January 17, 2022 | Landscape Forms Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Typology Ring Light Spec Sheet | CQ700 Product Distribution Drive Current Color Temperature *Input Voltage CQ701 ( Ring Light )01 ( Type V )140A ( Standard Output )27K ( 2700K )UV1 ( 120-277V ) 30K ( 3000K ) 35K ( 3500K ) 40K ( 4000K ) Height No. of Luminaires Pole Part Number Description Wall Thickness Pole Weight 12ft (3.7m)1 CQ751-01 5" (127mm) Straight Round Aluminum Pole; Single Luminaire at 12ft (3.7m)0.125” (3.175mm)35 lbs 14ft (4.3m)1 CQ752-01 5" (127mm) Straight Round Aluminum Pole; Single Luminaire at 14ft (4.3m)0.125” (3.175mm)40 lbs 16ft (4.9m)1 CQ753-01 5" (127mm) Straight Round Aluminum Pole; Single Luminaire at 16ft (4.9m)0.125” (3.175mm)45 lbs 16ft (4.9m)2 CQ753-02 5" (127mm) Straight Round Aluminum Pole; (2) Luminaire at 16ft (4.9m) and 12ft (3.7m)0.125” (3.175mm)45 lbs 20ft (6.1m)2 CQ754-01 5" (127mm) Straight Round Aluminum Pole; (2) Luminaires at 20ft (6.1m) and 12ft (3.7m) 180 Degree Orientation 0.156” (3.962mm)76 lbs 20ft (6.1m)2 CQ754-02 5" (127mm) Straight Round Aluminum Pole; (2) Luminaires at 20ft (6.1m) and 12ft (3.7m) with Same Orientation 0.156” (3.962mm)76 lbs 20ft (6.1m)3 CQ754-03 5" (127mm) Straight Round Aluminum Pole; (3) Luminaires at 20ft (6.1m), 16ft (4.9m), and 12ft (3.7m) in CCW Spiral Configuration with 120 Degree Orientation Offset 0.188” (4.775mm)87 lbs 25ft (7.6m)3 CQ755-01 6" (152.4mm) to 5" (127mm) Stepped Round Aluminum Pole; (3) Luminaires at 25ft (7.6m), 21ft (6.4m), and 17ft (5.2m) in CCW Spiral Configuration with 120 Degree Orientation Offset 0.188” (4.775mm)105 lbs Example: CQ701 – 01 – 140A – 27K – UV1 – Powdercoat * For Dark Sky certification, 3000K or warmer must be selected. Luminaire Pole Nut Covers Cover Plate Twist Lock Receptacle Photo/Motion Sensor* NUT CVR TW1 MS1 Example: CQ754-01 – CVR – MS1– Powdercoat * FSP-311B-S-L7-G photo/motion sensor will be used. Click here to view the technical data sheet. Base Options Control Options 5 Revised January 17, 2022 | Landscape Forms Inc. | 800.521.2546 | F 269.381.3455 | 7800 E. Michigan Ave., Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Typology Ring Light Material / Colors Sheet | CQ700 Blue Ash NutmegDusk Obsidian Onyx Matte Black Powdercoated Metal (Gloss)* Powdercoated Metal (Metallic)* Designer Palette Architectural Series (Low Sheen)* Ivy StormcloudOcean White Black ButtercupBlue Bell Cranberry Flambé Orange Grass Bronze SteelSilver Stone Titanium Mercury Powdercoated Metal Powdercoated Metal Pangard II® Polyester Powdercoat is a hard, yet flexible, finish that resists rusting, chipping, peeling and fading. In addition to colors shown, a wide selection of optional and custom colors may be specified for an upcharge. * All colors and patterns shown are approximate and may vary from sample and final. Visit landscapeforms.com for more information. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Landscape Forms supports the Landscape Architecture Foundation at the Second Century level. ©2020 Landscape Forms, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. landscapeforms.com | specify@landscapeforms.com DATE: CATALOG NUMBER LOGIC: PROJECT:TYPE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE OR SELL ANYTHING IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE OR USE WITHOUT SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. 559.438.5800 | INFO@BKLIGHTING.COM | BKLIGHTING.COMMADE IN THE USA YUKON LED (DIRECT) CATALOG NUMBER LOGIC Example: B - YK - D - LED - A2780 - MAC - V - SD - 010 - MT MATERIAL (Blank) - Aluminum B - Brass S - Stainless Steel SERIES YK - Yukon Commercial Steplight STYLE D - Direct SOURCE LED - Linear Array LED TYPE A2780 - 10W/2700K/80CRI A2790 - 10W/2700K/90CRI A3080 - 10W/3000K/80CRI A3090 - 10W/3000K/90CRI A3580 - 10W/3500K/80CRI A3590 - 10W/3500K/90CRI A4080 - 10W/4000K/80CRI A4090 - 10W/4000K/90CRI FINISH (See page 2 for full-color swatches) Standard Finishes (BZP, BZW, BLP, BLW, WHP, WHW, SAP, VER) Premium Finish (ABP, AMG, AQW, BCM, BGE, BPP, CAP, CMG, CRI, CRM, HUG, MDS, NBP, OCP, RMG, SDS, SMG, TXF, WCP, WIR) Also available in RAL Finishes Brass Finishes (MAC, POL, MIT) Stainless Steel Finishes (MAC, POL) ORIENTATION V - Vertical H - Horizontal FACEPLATE SD - Standard LD - Louvered VR - Visor DO - Deco CO - Compass RN - Ribbon LY - Layered CONTROL TYPE ELV - 10W Dimming Driver (For use with Electronic Low Voltage Dimmer)* INC - 10W Dimming Driver (For use with Incandescent Dimmer)* 0-10 - 10W Dimming Driver (For use with 0-10 Dimmer) INPUT VOLTAGE MT - 120-277 VAC 09/11/2020 SKU-1341 *120V only Housing may be shipped ahead upon request. SUB-2819-00 DATE:PROJECT:TYPE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE OR SELL ANYTHING IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE OR USE WITHOUT SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. 559.438.5800 | INFO@BKLIGHTING.COM | BKLIGHTING.COMMADE IN THE USA Satin Black (BLP) Satin Bronze (BZP) Satin White (WHP) Black Wrinkle (BLW) Bronze Wrinkle (BZW) White Wrinkle (WHW) Ve rde (VER) Satin Aluminum (SAP) Cascade Mtn. Granite (CMG) Black Chrome (BCM) Cracked Ice (CRI) We athered Iron (WIR) Rocky Mtn. Granite (RMG) Beige (BGE) Mojave Desert Sandstone (MDS) Clear Anodized Powder (CAP) Sierra Mtn Granite (SMG) Weathered Copper (WCP) Antique Brass Powder (ABP) Cream (CRM) Aleutian Mtn Granite (AMG) Old Copper (OCP) Brown Patina Powder (BPP) Antique White (AQW) Te xtured Forest (TXF) Hunter Green (HUG) Sonoran Desert Sandstone (SDS) Natural Brass Powder (NBP) STANDARD FINISHES PREMIUM FINISHES Click Here to view larger, full-color swatches of all available finishes on our website. YUKON LED (DIRECT) * Fixture Weight 2.88lbs max 09/11/2020 SKU-1341 SUB-2819-00 DATE:PROJECT:TYPE: Accessories (Configure separately) SPECIFICATIONS THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE OR SELL ANYTHING IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE OR USE WITHOUT SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. 559.438.5800 | INFO@BKLIGHTING.COM | BKLIGHTING.COMMADE IN THE USA ELECTRICAL PHYSICAL WATTAGE 9.5W OPERATING VOLTAGE 120-277 VAC DRIVER With [1] 350mA, Class II, constant current integral driver. 50/60 Hz. >0.9 Power Factor, 5A in-rush current(typical at 120 VAC), ≤20%THD (nominal at 120 VAC full load). Output over-voltage, over-current, and short circuit protection with auto recovery. Dimming driver for use with 0-10V, Incandescent, Standard TRIAC, or ELV dimmers. 1-100% range. *TRIAC/ELV dimming at 120 VAC only. MATERIALS Furnished in copper-free aluminum (6061-T6) HOUSING Corrosion-free composite, made from high strength, thermo-formed, sheet molded polyester compound. Glass reinforced, flame retardant with knockout plugs and four (4) side flats for 1/2” or 3/4” conduit adapters. WATER MANAGEMENT Anti-condensation and corrosion vent equalizes fixture pressure and eliminates potential for damage to internal components. FACEPLATE Fully machined. Offered with non-visible, tamper-resistant set screws. WIRING 18GA Stranded, XLPE, 150°C, 600V wire. FINISH StarGuard®, our exclusive RoHs compliant, 15 stage chromate-free process cleans and conversion coats aluminum components prior to application of Class ‘A’ TGIC polyester powder coating. Brass components are available in powder coat or handcrafted metal finish. Stainless steel components are available in handcrafted metal finish. WARRANTY 5-year limited warranty. CERTIFICATION & LISTING UL tested to IESNA LM-79. UL Listed. Certified to CAN/CSA/ANSI Standards. RoHS compliant. Suitable for indoor or outdoor use, in wet locations, and for installation within 4’ of the ground. IP66 Rated. Made in the USA. 09/11/2020 SKU-1341 SUB-2819-00 YUKON LED (DIRECT) DATE:PROJECT:TYPE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE OR SELL ANYTHING IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE OR USE WITHOUT SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. 559.438.5800 | INFO@BKLIGHTING.COM | BKLIGHTING.COMMADE IN THE USA LAMP & DRIVER DATA (YUKON DIRECT - HORIZONTAL) LM79 DATA BK No.CCT (Typ.) CRI (Typ.) Input Watts (Typ.) A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 OPTICAL DATA Orientation Faceplate Accessory/ Optic Roadway Class BUG Del. Lumens Multiplier Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 304.5 0.92 Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 252.8 0.83 Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 314.5 0.95 Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 261.0 0.83 Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 334.3 1.01 Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 277.5 0.83 Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 331.0 Horizontal SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 274.7 0.83 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 447.1 0.92 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 371.1 0.83 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 461.7 0.95 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 383.2 0.83 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 490.9 1.01 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 407.4 0.83 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 486.0 Horizontal SD 2 Type III B0 U3 G1 403.4 0.83 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 122.4 0.92 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 101.6 0.83 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 126.4 0.95 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 104.9 0.83 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 134.3 1.01 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 111.5 0.83 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 133.0 Horizontal LV 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 110.4 0.83 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 182.2 0.92 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 151.2 0.83 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 188.1 0.95 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 156.1 0.83 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 200.0 1.01 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 166.0 0.83 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 198.0 Horizontal VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 164.3 0.83 L70 Data 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 DATE:PROJECT:TYPE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE OR SELL ANYTHING IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE OR USE WITHOUT SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF B-K LIGHTING, INC. IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. 559.438.5800 | INFO@BKLIGHTING.COM | BKLIGHTING.COMMADE IN THE USA LAMP & DRIVER DATA (YUKON DIRECT - VERTICAL) LM79 DATA BK No.CCT (Typ.) CRI (Typ.) Input Watts (Typ.) A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 A2780 2700 80 9.5 A2790 2700 90 9.5 A3080 3000 80 9.5 A3090 3000 90 9.5 A3580 3500 80 9.5 A3590 3500 90 9.5 A4080 4000 80 9.5 A4090 4000 90 9.5 OPTICAL DATA Orientation Faceplate Accessory/ Optic Roadway Class BUG Del. Lumens Multiplier Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 307.3 0.92 Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 255.0 0.83 Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 317.3 0.95 Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 263.4 0.83 Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 337.3 1.01 Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 280.0 0.83 Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 334.0 Vertical SD 1 Type II B0 U3 G1 277.2 0.83 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 454.5 0.92 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 377.2 0.83 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 469.3 0.95 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 389.5 0.83 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 498.9 1.01 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 414.1 0.83 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 494.0 Vertical SD 2 Type II B0 U3 G1 410.0 0.83 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 149.0 0.92 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 123.7 0.83 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 153.9 0.95 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 127.7 0.83 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 163.6 1.01 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 135.8 0.83 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 162.0 Vertical LD 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 134.5 0.83 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 161.9 0.92 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 134.4 0.83 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 167.2 0.95 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 138.8 0.83 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 177.8 1.01 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 147.5 0.83 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 176.0 Vertical VR 1 Type I B0 U2 G1 146.1 0.83 L70 Data 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 P:262.242.1420 | SPIteam@spilighting.com | Last Revised: 10/21/2021 | Design Rights Reserved | SEW12145 | 1 of 6 Styk Exterior Wall - Bracket SEW12145 2 in PROJECT DETAILS JOB NAME:   TYPE:   NOTES:   DESCRIPTION Styk was built to provide the most lumens with the smallest luminaire package, while optimizing life. Not limited to decorative lighting, effective functional lighting is provided through the optimal light control in this minimal package. It's three optical offerings enable tremendous flexibility including wall washing, wall grazing, and asymmetric lighting solutions. It is excellent at lighting signs and facades. The family features wall, ceiling, and pendant models in a variety of stylish, clean mounting options. Available in 1' to 8' lengths, Styk can be mounted individually or configured in runs. FEATURES & BENEFITS A forward throw optic, for even wall wash illumination, is standard l Symmetrical optic options are available for more volumetric illumination l Lamp body can be rotated up to 330° and locks into position for precise fixture alignment l Up to 1,450 lumens per foot delivered (with Forward Throw distribution) l Anodized finish provides durable corrosion protectionl All visible fasteners are flush mounted, providing a clean designl Handcrafted in USAl SPECIFICATIONS LIGHT SOURCE:  IP66 white LED light enginel CRI: 80+ (contact factory for 90+)l LUMEN MAINTENANCE:  L70 = >50,000 Hrs.l EFFICACY:  102 lm/W delivered (with Forward Throw distribution) l CCT:  3000K, 3500K, or 4000Kl VOLTAGE:  120-277V standardl DRIVER:  Includes remote damp listed Class 2 power supply and wet location enclosure.  36" lead length standard; black power cord standard unless otherwise specified.  Continuous runs are supplied with one power supply per fixture.  Max distance to the driver (including OAP) is: #18 AWG = 50', #16 AWG = 75', #14 l P:262.242.1420 | SPIteam@spilighting.com | Last Revised: 10/21/2021 | Design Rights Reserved | SEW12145 | 2 of 6 AWG = 100'. For extended distances, contact factory. DIMMING: 0-10V controls standard to 1%l EMERGENCY:  Emergency battery remote optionall INTEGRATED SURGE PROTECTION:  LED components are protected against minor surge events l CONSTRUCTION:  Extruded aluminum construction provides durable protection for internal components and is recyclable l FINISH:  Housing available in anodized finishes only. End caps and mounting components painted to match. l MODIFICATIONS: Consult factory for all modification requests, including RGB and static LED colors l APPROVALS:  ETL listed to UL standards (US and Canada) for use in wet locations l DIMENSIONS 1FT  L 16.4 in 41.7 cm H 1.6 in 4.1 cm D 3 in 7.6 cm MC 15.2 in 38.6 cm Mounting Weight:Approximate: 5 lb (3 kg) 2FT  L 28.2 in 71.6 cm H 1.6 in 4.1 cm D 3 in 7.6 cm MC 26.9 in 68.3 cm Mounting Weight:Approximate: 5 lb (3 kg) 3FT  L 39.9 in 101.3 cm H 1.6 in 4.1 cm D 3 in 7.6 cm MC 38.7 in 98.3 cm Mounting Weight:Approximate: 5 lb (3 kg) 4FT  L 51.4 in 130.6 cm H 1.6 in 4.1 cm D 3 in 7.6 cm MC 50.2 in 127.5 cm Mounting Weight:Approximate: 5 lb (3 kg) 5FT  L 63.4 in 161 cm H 1.6 in 4.1 cm D 3 in 7.6 cm MC 62.2 in 158 cm Mounting Weight:Approximate: 10 lb (5 kg) 6FT  L 77.2 in 196.1 cm H 1.6 in 4.1 cm D 3 in 7.6 cm MC 75.9 in 192.8 cm Mounting Weight:Approximate: 10 lb (5 kg) 8FT  L 101.2 in 257 cm H 1.6 in 4.1 cm D 3 in 7.6 cm MC 99.9 in 253.7 cm Mounting Weight:Approximate: 10 lb (5 kg) P:262.242.1420 | SPIteam@spilighting.com | Last Revised: 10/21/2021 | Design Rights Reserved | SEW12145 | 3 of 6 CONFIGURATOR To configure your spec sheet online, go to www.spilighting.com/SEW12145. Not all options are available in all configurations; consult factory for details. Required Field * Catalog SEW12145 Light Source*Primary Finish*Voltage*Lamp Options*Mounting*Linear Run Emergency Optical Distribution*Options A B C D E F G H A - LIGHT SOURCE * To ensure color consistency, SPI uses precise bin selection and strict quality processes to maintain a 3-step (MacAdam) SDCM on all white LED lampings. Published LED luminaire wattages are calculated using a typical power supply efficiency of 88%; exact wattages may vary based on application. Alternative wattages available upon request. Delivered lumens shown below are for Forward Throw distribution. 1 FOOT NOMINAL FIXTURE 1FT-L4W | White 4W LED Light Engine | Delivered Lumens: 407 1FT-L7W | White 7W LED Light Engine | Delivered Lumens: 712 1FT-L14W | White 14W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 1,424 2 FOOT NOMINAL FIXTURE 2FT-L8W | White 8W LED Light Engine | Delivered Lumens: 814 2FT-L14W | White 14W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 1,424 2FT-L28W | White 28W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 2,848 3 FOOT NOMINAL FIXTURE 3FT-L12W | White 12W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 1,220 3FT-L21W | White 21W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 2,136 3FT-L42W | White 42W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 4,271 4 FOOT NOMINAL FIXTURE 4FT-L16W | White 16W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 1,627 4FT-L28W | White 28W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 2,848 4FT-L56W | White 56W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 5,695 5 FOOT NOMINAL FIXTURE 5FT-L20W | White 20W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 2,034 5FT-L35W | White 35W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 3,560 5FT-L71W | White 71W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 7,221 6 FOOT NOMINAL FIXTURE 6FT-L24W | White 24W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 2,441 6FT-L42W | White 42W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 4,271 6FT-L85W | White 85W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 8,645 8 FOOT NOMINAL FIXTURE 8FT-L32W | White 32W LED Light Engine | Delivered Lumens: 3,254 8FT-L56W | White 56W LED Light Engine | Delivered Lumens: 5,695 8FT-L113W | White 113W LED Light Engine| Delivered Lumens: 11,492       See last page for finish options P:262.242.1420 | SPIteam@spilighting.com | Last Revised: 10/21/2021 | Design Rights Reserved | SEW12145 | 4 of 6  B - VOLTAGE * 120-277V | Universal Voltage  C - LAMP OPTIONS * Delivered lumens shown are at 4000K CCT; apply multiplier for delivered lumens at other CCT. 3000K 1 | 3000K CCT 3500K 2 | 3500K CCT 4000K | 4000K CCT 1 Apply .95 multiplier for delivered lumens 2 Apply .97 multiplier for delivered lumens  D - MOUNTING * Additional mounting structure and hardware required (by others). BRK is limited to 3" OAP. For longer projections, choose LBK. LBK mounts to standard 4" octagonal junction box. INSTALLATION NOTES: During installation the contractor is responsible to use actual fixtures to ensure accurate mounting centers from one fixture to the next along the length of the linear run. Choose a mounting from below: DF_BRK | Bracket Mount (default) LBK6 | 6.0" Fixed Bracket LBK12 | 12.0" Fixed Bracket LBK18 | 18.0" Fixed Bracket BRK LBK6 LBK12 LBK18  E - LINEAR RUN Select this option only for runs longer than 8'. RUN 3 | Continuous Run   OAL | Specify Length of Run Length:   3 For a take-off and pricing, contact factory  F - EMERGENCY EMR | Emergency Battery Remote P:262.242.1420 | SPIteam@spilighting.com | Last Revised: 10/21/2021 | Design Rights Reserved | SEW12145 | 5 of 6  G - OPTICAL DISTRIBUTION * See IES zip file for photometrics for each distribution. DF_FT | Forward Throw (default) SMA 4 | Symmetric 60 Degree Beam - 120 Degree spread SMB 5 | Symmetric 30 Degree Beam - 60 Degree spread 4 Apply .90 multiplier to Forward Throw output shown above for delivered lumens 5 Apply 1.04 multiplier to Forward Throw output shown above for delivered lumens FT SMA SMB  H - OPTIONS F | Fusing P:262.242.1420 | SPIteam@spilighting.com | Last Revised: 10/21/2021 | Design Rights Reserved | SEW12145 | 6 of 6 Available Finishes Not all finishes are available in all configurations; consult factory for details. Anodized AN04 Anodized AN08 Anodized Black Functional Devices, Inc. 101 Commerce Drive Sharpsville, IN 46068 Toll Free: (800) 888-5538 O ce: (765) 883-5538 Fax: (765) 883-7505 Email: sales@functionaldevices.com Website: www.functionaldevices.com 20200408 Blu N/C Yel C Org N/O CONTROL CIRCUIT Blk 120-277 Vac Red Neutral or Other Phase Wht/Red 24Vdc (+) Wht/Blu Control Signal Wht/Blk 24Vdc (-) # Relays & Contact Type: Expected Relay Life: Operating Temperature: Humidity Range: Operate Time: Relay Status: Power Status: Dimensions: Wires: Approvals: Housing Rating: Gold Flash: Momentary Override: One (1) SPDT Continuous Duty Coil 10 million cycles minimum mechanical -30 to 104° F 5 to 95% (noncondensing) 1.8 Seconds Red LED On = Activated Green LED On = 24Vdc out 2.30˝ x 3.20˝ x 1.80˝ with .75˝ NPT Nipple 16˝, 600V Rated UL Listed, UL916, C-UL, CE, RoHS UL Accepted for Use in Plenum, NEMA 1 No Yes Contact Ratings: 20 Amp Resistive @ 277 Vac 5 Amp Resistive @ 480 Vac 20 Amp Ballast @ 277 Vac 16 Amp Electronic Ballast @ 277 Vac (N/O) 10 Amp Tungsten @ 120 Vac (N/O) 770 VA Pilot Duty @ 120 Vac (N/C) 1100 VA Pilot Duty @ 277 Vac (N/C) 2 HP @ 277 Vac 1 HP @ 120 Vac LR21BPP5 Universal Voltage Power Pack, 120-277 Vac Power Input, 20 Amp SPDT, 24Vdc @ 210mA Power Output Power Input: 250 mA @ 120 -277 Vac DC Output: 24 Vdc @ 210mA, Class 2 POWER PACK SPECIFICATIONS OCCUPANCY SENSOR APPLICATION The LR21BPP5 can be used to provide power to an occupancy sensor and control a lighting load based on the status of the occupancy sensor. The white/red and white/black wires can be used to power an occupancy sensor with 24Vdc. When the white/blue wire is connected to the white/red wire through the occupancy sensor contact, the relay will activate, switching the lighting load On or Off. Blu N/C Yel C Org N/O RIB21BPP10 Blk 120-277 Vac Red Neutral or Other Phase Wht/Red 24Vdc (+) Wht/Blu Control Signal Wht/Blk 24Vdc (-) OCCUPANCY SENSOR LIGHTING LOAD Neutral or Other Phase 120-277 Vac LR21BPP5 Functional Devices, Inc. 101 Commerce Drive Sharpsville, IN 46068 (800) 888-5538 (765) 883-5538 (765) 883-7505 Toll-free: Office: Fax: sales@functionaldevices.com www.functionaldevices.com Email: Website: 1. OFFER, GOVERNING PROVISIONS AND CANCELLATIONS: This document constitutes an offer or counter-offer by Functional Devices, Inc. or any of its affiliates (“Seller”) to sell various products as agreed by Seller (“Products”) to the buyer named on the reverse side of this document or in other applicable print or electronic documentation (“Buyer”) in accordance with these terms and conditions. This writing is not an acceptance of any offer made by Buyer. This offer or counter-offer is expressly conditioned upon Buyer’s assent to these terms and conditions and no others. Buyer is deemed to have assented to these terms and conditions (including Seller’s warranty) when the first of the following occurs: A. Buyer signs and delivers to Seller an acknowledgement copy of any of Seller’s quotation, order acknowledgement or invoice forms; B. Buyer gives to Seller (orally or in writing) specifications of quantity and/ or type, assortments thereof, delivery dates, shipping instructions, instructions to bill, or the like as to all or any part of the Products; C. Buyer receives delivery of any of the Products; or, D. Buyer has otherwise assented to the terms and conditions hereof. Where an attachment to this Agreement or separate document referencing this Agreement consists of a quotation, the quotation remains open for acceptance for a period of thirty (30) days or such other period as specified in the quotation. Seller hereby rejects any additional or different terms or provisions contained in any purchase order, acknowledgment or other communication heretofore or hereafter received from Buyer. Seller’s delivery of Products does not constitute an assent to any terms proposed by Buyer. Except for an officer of Seller, no representative of Seller has any authority to waive, alter, vary, amend, or add to the terms hereof. THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE CONSTITUTE THE ENTIRE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) BETWEEN SELLER AND BUYER WITH RESPECT TO THE MATTERS ADDRESSED HEREIN. 2. PRICES: The prices for the Products are based on the terms and conditions herein, including the limitations of liability and warranties, and all such terms and conditions are material to the sale of the Products. In the event Seller fails to provide a price quote and/or terms prior to the acceptance of the order, Buyer will pay Seller’s then-current list price for such Products. All quotations and invoices show the net selling price of each item quoted. In the event of a mathematical error, the quoted price per Product governs. 3. TERMS OF PAYMENT: Buyer will pay the fees specified in each invoice provided by Seller in United States Dollars within thirty (30) calendar days after the invoice date unless otherwise agreed to in writing by an authorized representative of Seller. Any amount due under this Agreement that remains unpaid after its due date will bear interest from the date that such payment became delinquent until the date it is paid in full at the lower of 1.5% per month, which equals an annual percentage rate of 18%, or the maximum rate permitted by law. Seller reserves the right to establish, revoke or modify credit terms for Buyer at any time. No discounts are allowed unless otherwise agreed to in writing by an authorized representative of Seller. Buyer will pay any collection fees, legal fees, or court costs incurred by Seller to collect past due amounts. No offsets or setoffs of payments due to Seller hereunder are allowed with respect to any other agreement between the parties. Seller hereby retains a lien on the goods sold for unpaid purchase money as herein provided. 4. TAXES AND OTHER CHARGES: In addition to the prices quoted or invoiced, Buyer will pay any sales tax, excise tax, use tax, value added or consumption tax, customs duty (that is assessed on the delivery of Product(s) to a destination outside of the U.S.A.), fee or charge of any nature whatsoever imposed by any governmental authority on or measured by the transaction between Seller and Buyer. In the event Seller is required to pay any amount, Buyer will reimburse Seller therefore; or provide Seller, at the time the order is submitted, an exemption certificate or other document acceptable to the authority imposing the same. Seller does not accept and will not pay any fines, penalties or chargebacks from Buyer for any reason. 5. DELIVERY, RISK OF LOSS, CLAIMS AND FORCE MAJEURE: A. All prices quoted for products are Ex-Works (Incoterms 2010) at a shipping facility determined by Seller, unless otherwise noted by Seller (“Seller’s Shipping Facility”). Risk of loss or damage, and beneficial ownership, of the Products are transferred to Buyer when the Products are made available to Buyer at Seller’s Shipping Facility. All delivery dates are approximate. B. Buyer will only make written claims to Seller for damages, shortages or other delivery errors within seven (7) calendar days after receipt of shipment. All Products received by Buyer, or Buyer’s clients, customers, or agents, that are not rejected within such time will be deemed accepted. Failure to provide such written notice constitutes a waiver of all such claims regarding such shipment by Buyer. Buyer will not revoke acceptance. C. Seller is not liable for any damage as a result of any delay or failure to deliver due to any act of God, act of Buyer, embargo or other governmental act, regulation or request, fire, accident, power outage, strike, civil unrest, weather, slowdown or other labor difficulties, war, riot, act of terrorism, delay in transportation, defaults of common carriers, inability to obtain necessary labor, materials or manufacturing facilities or, without limiting the foregoing, any other delays beyond Seller’s control. Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedy for any delays or for Seller’s inability to deliver Products for any reason, in each case, that persists for more than ninety (90) days, is to cancel the order pursuant to Seller’s Order Policies and Guidelines available upon request. 6. WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER. Products are warranted to be free from manufacturing defects under normal use and conditions for five (5) years (the “Warranty Period”). The warranty does not apply to: (a) Damage caused by accident, abuse, mishandling, or dropping; (b) Products which have been subjected to unauthorized repair, opened, or taken apart; (c) Products not used in accordance with direc- tions; (d) Damages exceeding the cost of such Product; and (e) Damages caused by lightning, water, or condensation. If warranty service is required during the Warranty Period, and if examination shall disclose to Seller’s satisfaction that such Product was originally defective, then Seller will at its option repair or replace the product without charge upon prepaid delivery of such Product to Seller’s facility with proof of date of purchase. Corrections of such defects by repair to or supplying of replacements for defective parts shall constitute fulfillment of all obligations of Seller. Seller shall not be liable for loss, damage, or expense directly or indirectly caused from the failure of Products to perform as expected. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH HEREIN, SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ANY WAR- RANTY ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE. NO PERSON (INCLUDING ANY AGENT, DEALER OR REPRESENTATIVE OF SELLER) IS AUTHORIZED TO MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY CONCERNING PRODUCTS EXCEPT TO REFER BUYER TO THIS AGREEMENT. BUYER WARRANTS THAT BUYER HAS NOT RELIED ON ANY OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS CONCERNING THE PRODUCTS OR THIS AGREEMENT. For warranty service, call factory for RA number and send such Product prepared with sales receipt to: FUNCTIONAL DEVICES, INC., 101 COMMERCE DRIVE, SHARPSVILLE, IN 46068. 7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: SELLER WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SUFFERED OR SUSTAINED BY BUYER FOR ANY REASON. EXCEPT FOR CLAIMS OF DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY, IN NO EVENT WILL SELLER’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY TO BUYER ARISING UNDER OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LIABILITY ARISING FROM NEG- LIGENCE OR ON THE BASIS OF STRICT LIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID BY BUYER TO SELLER HEREUNDER FOR ANY PRODUCT GIVING RISE TO A CLAIM UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. 8. RETURNS: Unless otherwise approved by Seller in writing in its sole discretion, except in the case of a non-conforming shipment or a warranty issue, Buyer may not return Products. If Seller approves the return of Products pursuant to the preceding sentence, such returned Products must be returned within ninety (90) days from date of invoice and will be subject to a 25% restocking fee. In the event of a non-conforming shipment or a warranty issue, Buyer may return Products, but only if Buyer first: (a) provides notice to Seller as required in this Agreement, (b) obtains prior authorization from Seller, and (c) all Products or containers for which return is properly authorized have been marked with a return authorization number supplied by Seller. Buyer will make all returns via a traceable form such as Federal Express, UPS or insured mail and in resalable condition. Buyer will pay all return shipping charges and any other charges associated therewith. 9. CANCELLATIONS: Cancellation or deferment of all or part of an order is subject to acceptance by the Seller. If accepted, any reduction in quantity of any item to less than 85% of the original item quantity is subject to a 15% cancellation charge. If an order cancellation is accepted, the Buyer will make delivery and pay for all material manufactured and in stock or in process at time of notice for such order, and for any special materials on orders for which the Seller must take delivery. 10. EXPORTS. Buyer agrees that it will comply with any and all U.S. Export Controls and will not pay for, resell, transfer or knowingly sell Products in violation of U.S. Export Controls. If Buyer resells Products within or exports Products to a country or region which imposes upon Seller and/or Buyer an obligation to fund or undertake reuse, recycling, composting, recovery of Products, or any similar obligation (e.g., the European Union’s Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive, EC 2002/96/EC) (the “Obligations”), Buyer shall wholly under- take the Obligations or duties and shall be entirely responsible for all associated costs therewith. Seller shall have no obligation to reimburse Buyer for execution of the Obligations. In the event that Seller is named in a proceeding based upon the Obligations, Buyer shall indemnify, defend and hold Seller harmless from all actions related thereto, including all civil and governmental actions. 11. MISCELLANEOUS. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of Indiana, without giving effect to its conflict of laws principles. Buyer hereby irrevocably consents and submits to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of the state and federal courts in Marion County, Indiana. The United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is explicitly excluded. Each provision contained in this Agreement constitutes a separate and distinct provision severable from all other provisions. If any provision (or any part thereof) is unenforceable under or prohibited by any present or future law, then such provision (or part thereof) will be amended, and is hereby amended, so as to be in compliance with such law, while preserving to the maximum extent possible the intent of the original provision. Any provision (or part thereof) that cannot be so amended will be severed from this Agreement; and, all the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain unim- paired. No modification, addition or deletion, or waiver of any rights under this Agreement is binding on a party unless made in a non-preprinted agreement clearly understood by the parties to be a modification or waiver, and signed by a duly authorized representative of each party. TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE F2700 2.1.2020 Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures 5-15K Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures Blizzard 52.150.LS with projector slide. Use 52.150 models for most projectors 12-15,000 ANSI lumens. Blizzard 52.150.U Enclosure for most projectors 12-15,000 ANSI lumens fitted with Ultra-Short- Throw lenses. Blizzard UST enclosures may be installed to project either up or down. Blizzard 52.050.P Portrait enclosure, for most projectors 4-7,000 ANSI lumens that allow portrait orientation. Tip: most of the enclosures shown here are in Tempest’s standard light bronze finish, but black, white, or any RAL color are available to order. Blizzard 52.100.LF Landscape, with fixed projector mount. Suitable for most projectors 8-10,000 ANSI lumens. Landscape The standard configuration — projector may be configured tabletop or ceiling style, with your choice of fixed or sliding projector mount. Portrait Blizzard portrait versions are available in all four sizes. Speci- fy projector and lens type when ordering. Ultra-Short-Throw Blizzard is ready for the UST revolution — now you don’t need to own the plot across the street to project on the front of your building! UST models may be configured to project either up or down, for ground or roof-level installation. Specify projector and lens type when ordering. Blizzard is the world’s most popular midsized outdoor projector enclosure family for permanent installation in any climate, for video mapping, outdoor attractions, advertising and outdoor movies. Now Blizzard comes with all the new features you’ve asked us for: • Optional Projector Tray slides out either side for easy installation and service access • Tabletop or ceiling projector mount • Stackable • Loads of rigging accessories • Optional Ethernet-based monitoring • New midsize 52.125 models for wider midrange projectors All Blizzard models feature Tempest’s patented Digital Enclosure Control system (DEC4TM), now available with op- tional remote monitoring over your TCP/IP network or with RDM over RS485. Blizzard models come in four sizes, and three configurations, to suit any outdoor projection application: Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures Removable security panel protects user interface Lockable hinged side doors for easy access and security DEC4 Enclosure Control with patented GoldilocksTM OS and remote monitoring options DEC4TM User Interface, for customized setup and system monitoring. May be monitored remotely with optional comms card The Exhaust Cowl‘s integral insect screen keeps rain — and bugs — away from your equipment. For additional protection against saline air and other pollutants, specify Blizzard’s Positive Pressure option. (52.PP) Large, easy-access wiring compartment for easy installation, with choice of wiring knockouts on the back and bottom surfaces Ultra-strong lightweight aluminum chassis Rigging points at each corner, top and bottom (M10-1.5 x 40mm stainless steel bolts supplied) Tempered low-iron optical grade port glass for strength and perfect imaging Adjust projector position using projector feet, then clamp firmly in place Blizzard’s hydrophobic HEPA inlet filter keeps out dust, oil and salt fog. Replacement access from below or inside Projector slide option features heavy duty stainless steel slides. Specify left (shown here) or right slide when ordering Landscape Powerful AC exhaust fan runs when the controller detects the projector lamp is on, or if internal temperatures rise during the day. Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures Blizzard Portrait enclosures incorporate an adaptable projector mount to suit most projectors. The projector attaches to the mounting frame with screws provided. Some tilt adjustment is available (max tilt angle depends on prpjector size) Portrait Ultra Short Throw Blizzard UST outdoor enclosures allow you to paint a wall with video without having to own the block across the street! UST enclosures are typically wider than standard landscape enclosures, to allow for the extreme width of the projection beam without clipping. Blizzard UST enclosures may be configured to mount above the image (projecting down) or below it (projecting up). Please note that, due to the differing characteristics of available UST optical systems, all UST enclosure orders are treated as custom or semi-cus- tom. Tempest will collaborate with the projector manufacturer in each case to arrive at the optimal solution. Mounting hardware may differ between projectors, so we need to know the projector you’re using when you order. Specify left (shown here) or right projector slide, or fixed projector mount when ordering. Not all lamp-based projectors may be used in portrait mode. Some may be used in portrait mode but only in one orientation — check with your projector manufacturer before ordering. There are several different optical solutions competing for your ultra-short-throw business. Tempest works with all major projector manufacturers to create effective solutions that work for you. This one takes the innovative Epson periscopic lens. Tip: The thermal insulation option, shown here lines all available top, front, back and side surfaces with high-quality melamine foam with UL94 V-O (EN45545-2) fire ratings. Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures Vertical Pole Hanger Kit Hang Blizzard safely on a vertical pole 50mm [2”] OD. Allows up to 30° tilt, 5° roll and unlimited pan adjustment. Note: Not recommended for Blizzard 52.125 or 150 models. Horizontal Pole or Truss Kit Hang Blizzard safely on any truss or horizontal pipe with OD 50mm [2”]. The Truss kit allows you to: • Tilt the enclosure by pivoting on the supplied truss clamps, +/- 30° • Pan the enclosure up to 45° left or right • Roll the enclosure +/- 5° Angle Mounting Kit Use this handy kit to mount any Blizzard enclosure at any angle between 15-55°. Using stainless steel low-profile Unistrut and all-stainless steel fittings, this kit can be used on the ground projecting up, or from above projecting down. Stacking Kit Stack two or more Blizzard en- closures of the same type using this stacking kit. Male and female parts attach to the threaded corner holes, and are simply joined together using a stainless steel clevis pin. See also Swivel Stacking Kit, next page) Drop Arms Use with a Stacking Kit to hang a lower Blizzard enclosure at an angle up to 60 degrees down. Max Angles: Blizzard 52.050 60° Blizzard 52.100/125 51° Blizzard 52.150 41° All Blizzards come with four M10 threaded sockets — one at each corner — top and bottom. See the CAD drawings and 3D CAD blocks at Tempest.biz for precise dimensional data. Stainless steel bolts are pro- vided for attachment to any suitable support structure. Tempest recommends only the use of stainless steel hard- ware for installing enclosures outdoors. The following rigging options are available for most Blizzard enclosures: Rigging Options Blizzard 52.100 Portrait with 52.XV.100P Vertical Pole Hanger Kit Blizzard 52.150 Landscape with 52.XH.150L Horizontal Pole/Truss Hanger Kit A pair of Blizzard 52.150 Landscape enclosures with 52.SK Stacking Kit. The kit maintains the required 75mm airflow gap between the two enclosures ...just add the 52.DA Drop Arms Kit to angle the lower enclosure This all-stainless steel angle mounting kit lets you mount any Blizzard enclosure at any angle from 15-55°. Use as shown here, projecting up, or on the edge of a flat roof, projecting down with the enclosure reversed. Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures Rigging Options 52.SH.xxxx Sun Shade attaches easily to the Blizzard’s top rigging points. Note that the xxxx matches the enclosure part number, eg 52.SH.100L for the Blizzard 52.100 landscape enclosures shown here. Swivel Kits work with either Landscape or Portrait enclosures. Swivel Stacking Kit Stack two Blizzard enclosures (must be the same model), and angle them up to 40 degrees apart (20° either side of center) — great for short-throw edge blending jobs. Stainless steel stacking kits at- tach to the M10 rigging points, and locking bolts are provid- ed to secure pan angle when aligned. Unistrut Kit Easy attachment to any struc- ture using these two Unistrut rails. Simply use industry standard channel nuts to bolt to your structure, without worrying about precise hole locations. Unistruts may be mounted bot- tom (shown here with Cyclova- tor) or top. Cyclovator Set a projection angle up to 60° up or down. Perfect for roof- tops when shooting down or at ground level when projecting up at a tall building. Stack up to two landscape Blizzards on each Cyclovator. Requires Unistrut Kit 52.UR.xxx. A pair of Blizzard 52.150 Landscape enclosures mounted on a Cyclovator. Note that the bottom Blizzard requires a 52.UR.150 Unistrut kit to mount to the Cyclovator, and for angles more than about 35 degrees an Inlet Cowl (51.IC.15 here) keeps rain off the inlet filter. Feet Up Kit Sometimes, you may need to flip the projector feet- up, to get more vertical shift on to an object below the enclosure. The Blizzard Feet-Up Kit (52.FU) works in any Landscape Blizzard (fixed or slide projector mount), supportig the projector and raising it either 25, 50 or 75mm (1, 2 or 3 inches) to get the projection angle you need. Be sure to include the height of the Feet-Up kit when choosing the correct Blizzard model for your project. GoldilocksTM How do we keep projectors from roasting when it’s 50°C and there’s no shade? And prevent condensation from destroying your projector overnight? Tempest’s unique GoldilocksTM Operating System (patents pending) brings enclosure control to a new level. Goldilocks keeps the air temper- ature inside your enclosure just right, removing heat from the projector when the lamp is on or when the enclosure is heated by the sun. We’re changing the air every few seconds. Goldilocks uses a heater to maintain a minimum tempera- ture in cold climates. And Goldilocks tracks tempera- ture and humidity 24/7, keeping relative humidity inside your enclosure just right by using heaters to raise the air temper- ature when needed, adapting constantly to prevent deadly condensation. Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures Sun Shade (52.SH.xxxx) This aluminum panel mounts easily on the top of any Blizzard enclosure to provide extra daytime protection in hot, sunny climates. The cover not only deflects sunlight, but also provides a 75mm air gap between the shade and the enclosure top, promoting convective air movement. Recommended in conjunction with 52.TI thermal insulation in sunny areas with daytime temperatures frequently above 40°C [104°F]. Thermal Insulation Kit (52.TI.xxxx — factory fitted) The thermal insulation kit adds 25mm of thermal insulation on the inside of the enclosure, conserving heat and reducing energy costs in cold climates, and moderating daytime temperatures in hot weather. Climate Options Positive Pressure and Salt Air (52.PP — factory fitted) We do a lot of cruise ship jobs, as well as beach resorts and attractions where salt air can be a real problem. Now all Tempest G4 outdoor enclosures can be supplied with a Constant Positive Pressure setting that runs the enclosure fan(s) all the Sakuya Lumina, Osaka, Japan. Picture courtesy of Moment Factory, Montreal. time at low power, maintaining sufficient positive pressure to prevent salt or other pollutants entering the exhaust fan when the projector is not running. Desert Filter Baffle (51.DFB.xx) Wind-blown dust and sand can rip a filter apart in no time in a bad dust storm — so slow it down with this handy accessory. The Desert Filter Baffle replaces the filter clamp under the enclo- sure body, and requires 100mm (4”) clearance plus 75mm (3”) airflow clearance below the enclosure. Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures What to do when it’s HOT Showtime — Tempest AC Assist Tempest has traditionally avoid- ed the use of active air-condi- tioning to cool video projectors, due to the high risks of damag- ing condensation. But there are cases where some help is need- ed, and that’s where Tempest AC Assist comes in: Tempest AC Assist We now offer AC Assist to lower projector operating tempera- tures for projectors with low temperature limits and for extremely hot locations. Consider AC Assist if Showtime temperatures are either: • Normally very high, >35°C, or: • Within 5°C of your projec- tor’s environmental limit. So, for a projector with 35°C environmental limit, consider AC Assist if show- time temperatures regular- ly exceed 30°C We use the latest in spot cool- ing technology to blend cool air with local ambient air, and bring down the temperature of projector environment by as much as 15°C. By blending incoming air in this way, and by controlling the cold air source so that it is never operating when the projector lamp is not running, we avoid the conden- sation risks associated with traditional closed-circuit AC systems. This means that during the day the enclosure is kept to a safe temperature using a combina- tion of thermal insulation, sun shade and forced air cool- ing, while at night when the projector is running, AC Assist actively reduces the projector temperature and assures a long, trouble-free operating life in the hottest (and the most humid) environments. Our System Engineers will design your AC Assist installa- tion on a project-by-project basis. Contact Tempest with specifics for your project and we will be happy to design an AC Assist system for your next project. Download the ACAssist data sheet from www.tempest.biz Rendering: A group of four Blizzard 52.150 enclosures, with AC Assist Cooler and flexible hose manifold. The cooler may be located anywhere within 5m (16ft) of the enclosure air inlet. Allow at least 500mm (20in) below the enclosure(s) for the cooler hose and its bend radius. Don’t panic! Tempest enclosures have been in use for years in some very warm places — think Singapore, Dubai, Las Vegas. In most cases our standard enclosures will protect your equipment without problems. Outdoor projection, by defini- tion, is used at night. So you need to think about daytime and showtime temperatures quite separately: Daytime — Warm Locations In hot locations (anywhere with daytime temperature regularly exceeding 30°C), we strongly recommend specifying the Blizzard Thermal Insulation option (52.TI.xxxx). This is a factory-fitted thermal insulation lining to the enclosure that effectively moderates daytime temperatures, reducing stress on your equipment and pro- longing fan life. Daytime — Hot Sun If your enclosures will be reg- ularly exposed to hot sun, the Blizzard Sun Shade (52.SH.xxx) is a simple, low-profile alumi- num cover, that protects the enclosure from the midday sun and creates a 75mm (3in) air gap above the enclosure body. This protects the enclosure and its contents from the worst of the sun anywhere in the tropics or in desert conditions. Read the Small Print The conversion from lamps to laser light sources is now complete, we may never build another lamp-based enclosure, and that’s generally a Good Thing. But you need to study those laser projector specs very carefully — for example: Environmental The spec says 45ºC (113ºF) so we’re good, right? Not necessarily. Read on and you may well find that light output is limited above, say, a 25ºC (77ºF) ambient. This might not be a big deal if it only happens a few nights of the year in your location, but if it’s hot where you are, then it might... Altitude Most outdoor jobs are at or not far from sea level, but what if you’re in the mountains? Check the effect of altitude on light output and environmental specs... Doing your homework at the planning stage can save a lot of time and trouble on the job site... Tip: Blizzard Outdoor Projector Enclosures Tempest System Manager 2. Ethernet in each Enclosure Specify the 51.EN Ethernet option and connect each enclo- sure to the network. Tempest System Manager is a Windows app running on a local PC connected to your enclo- sures over a local area network. TSM discovers any Tem- pest enclosures present on the network at initializa- tion, and monitors system attributes in real time, including lamp, fan and heater status, temperature, relative humidity and more. TSM may also be used to upload firmware updates to enclosure controllers over the network, without having to visit each enclo- sure. The TSM license includes 12 months unlimited user support from Tempest electronics partner JESE, and continuing support is available for a modest annual fee. Monitoring Connections There are two ways to connect enclosures to the TSM PC: TEMP Protocol Tempest also publishes a simple protocol for use by integrators wishing to monitor enclosures over an existing control network. Connection options are the same as for System Manager. Download the TEMP Developer Guide here: 1. RS485 and Ethernet Daisy-chain a group of Cyclone enclosures together with an RS485 cable, and use a 51.EN Ethernet board at the end of the line to connect to the network. 51.EN Ethernet Option 51.EN Ethernet Option51.EN Ethernet Option RS485 Daisy Chain (use CAT5 Cable) Set line termina- tion switch in last enclosure of each RS485 run Local PC TSM Dongle TSM Model Numbers 51.TSM.10 Up to 10 enclosures 51.TSM.25 Up to 25 enclosures 51.TSM.50 Over 25 enclosures Landscape Portrait Ultra-Short Throw CAD drawings, CAD blocks and user manuals at www.tempest.biz Blizzard Ordering Guide Model Orientation Dimensions (lwh)Weight Projector Max (lwh)3 Shipping Dimensions (lwh)/Weight 52.050.L Landscape 29x28x13.5in 737x711x345 59lb/27kg 22x22.5x9in 559x572x229mm 800 Watts 36x36x24in/910x910x610 94lb/43kg 52.050.P1 Portrait 29x17x27in 737x432x686 64lb/29kg 36x36x24in/910x910x610 99lb/45kg 52.100.U2 Ultra Short Throw Custom - consult factory 36x36x24in/910x910x610 99lb/45kg 52.100.L Landscape 34x30x14.5in 867x762x368 85lb/39kg 27x24.5x10in 686x622x254mm 1,250 Watts 36x36x24in/910x910x610 120lb/55kg 52.100.P1 Portrait 34x17x29in 867x432x737 95lb/43kg 36x36x24in/910x910x610 130lb/59kg 52.100.U2 Ultra Short Throw Custom - consult factory 36x36x24in/910x910x610 130lb/59kg 52.125.L Landscape 34x34x14.5in 867x867x368 94lb/43kg 27x28.5x10in 686x724x254mm 1,250 Watts 36x42x24in/910x1100x610 129lb/59kg 52.125.P1 Portrait 34x17x33in 867x432x838 104lb/47kg 36x42x24in/910x1100x610 139lb/63kg 52.125.U2 Ultra Short Throw Custom - consult factory 36x42x24in/910x1100x610 139lb/63kg 52.150.L Landscape 42x30x16.5in 1067x762x419 106lb/48kg 35x24.5x12in 890x622x305 1,800W 52x34x20in/1300x840x610 151lb/69kg 52.150.P1 Portrait 42x19x31in 1067x483x787 118lb/54kg 52x34x20in/1300x840x610 163lb/74kg 52.150.U2 Ultra Short Throw Custom - consult factory 52x34x20in/1300x840x610 163lb/74kg 1 Please specify projector and lens make and model when ordering portrait enclosures 2 All UST versions are custom or semi-custom. Please consult factory for details 3 Remember to include lens, plus connectors and cable bend radius in projector dimensions All Blizzard Portrait and UST products are built to order. Please consult factory for lead times. All sales are subject to Tempest Lighting, Inc. Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale, available for download at www.tempest.biz. All Schedule B Export Code: 9405.99.0000 _ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ . _ _ Electrical Standard US 100-120V, NEMA standard North America, Japan IN 230V, CE Standard International example: 52.100.LF.IN Format L Landscape P Portrait U UST2 5 2 Model # (eg: 52.100) Projector Mount F Fixed S Slide (landscape and portrait only) Options and Accessories Options Item #For Model:Description 52.TI.xxxx Any Blizzard Thermal Insulation Kit, recommended for hot or cold climates 52.PP Any Blizzard Blizzard Positive Pressure Option 51.EN Any Blizzard Ethernet Communications 51.TSM.xx Any Blizzard Tempest System Manager 55.AC Any Blizzard AC Assist Option - Consult Factory 0000.CL Any Blizzard Custom Color - specify black, white or any RAL #, plus desired gloss % Accessories Item #For Model:Description 55.C2 Blizzard 150 Tempest Cyclovator Tilt Kit 52.UR.xxx ‘xxx’ = model #Unistrut Mounting Rails (required with 55.C2) 52.XH.xxxL ‘xxx’ = model #XYZ Hanger Kit for horizontal pole/Truss, Landscape Blizzard 52.XH.xxxP ‘xxx’ = model #XYZ Hanger Kit for horizontal pole/Truss, Portrait Blizzard 52.XV.xxxL ‘xxx’ = 050 or 100 XYZ Hanger Kit for vertical pole, Landscape Blizzard 050 or 100 only 52.XV.xxxP ‘xxx’ = 050 or 100 XYZ Hanger Kit for vertical pole, Portrait Blizzard 050 or 100 only 52.AM.xxx ‘xxx’ = model #Angle Mount Kit (same item # for landscape and portrait Blizzards) 52.SK Any Blizzard Blizzard Stacking Kit 52.DA Any Blizzard Blizzard Drop Arms Kit (requires Stacking Kit) 52.SH.xxxL Landscape 050-150 Blizzard Sun Shade Kit, Landscape 52.SH.xxxP Portrait 050-150 Blizzard Sun Shade Kit, Portrait 52.SS.xxxx ‘xxxx’ = model #Blizzard Swivel Stacking Kit (Landscape or Portrait) 51.IC.08 Portrait 050-125 Inlet Cowl (Order 2 per enclosure) 51.IC.16 Portrait 150 Inlet Cowl (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.IC.11 Landscape 050-125 Inlet Cowl (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.IC.15 Landscape 150 Inlet Cowl (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.DFB.08 Portrait 050-125 Desert Filter Baffle (Order 2 per enclosure) 51.DFB.16 Portrait 150 Desert Filter Baffle (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.DFB.11 Landscape 050-125 Desert Filter Baffle (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.DFB.15 Landscape 150 Desert Filter Baffle (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.HF.08 Portrait 050-125 Replacement Salt Fog Inlet Filter (Order 2 per enclosure) 51.HF.23 Portrait 150 Replacement Salt Fog Inlet Filter (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.HF.11 Landscape 050, 100 Replacement Salt Fog Inlet Filter (Order 1 per enclosure) 51.HF.15 Landscape 150 Replacement Salt Fog Inlet Filter (Order 1 per enclosure) CAD drawings, CAD blocks and user manuals at www.tempest.biz Custom Colors All the enclosures in this brochure are shown in our pop- ular standard light bronze finish. White, Black or any RAL color are available to special order. 762 30.00 41916.50 1067 42.00 91 3.59 102 4.00 512.00 291.14Wiring Access User Interface Exhaust Cowl Alternate Conduit Entries 991 39.00 68627.00 Rigging Points:M10-1.5, 4 placestop and bottom 1024.00 32 1.25 28 1.1 0 356 14.00 35714.04 89 3.50 Power & Signal Conduit EntriesInlet Filter - do not obstruct W L H Maximum Projector Dimensions: L: 890 (35in)W: 622 (24.5in)H: 305 (12in) Power: 1,800W D C B AA B C D 12345678 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES TOLERANCES: FRACTIONAL ANGULAR: MACH BEND TWO PLACE DECIMAL THREE PLACE DECIMAL INTERPRET GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING PER: MATERIAL FINISH DRAWN CHECKED ENG APPR. MFG APPR. Q.A. COMMENTS: DATENAME TITLE: SIZEB DWG. NO.REV SCALE: 1:10 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED: 06 4/29/2020 Blizzard 52.150 Landscape Enclosure SHEET 1 OF 1 52.150.Lx.xx DO NOT SCALE DRAWING TB Tempest Lighting, Inc., 11845 Wicks Street, Sun Valley, CA 91352, USA www.tempest.biz info@tempest.biz t: +1 818 787 8984 f: +1 818 252 7101 ©Tempest Lighting, Inc., September 2021 In the interest of continuous product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice Made in the USA Blizzard Configurator Name Company Email Phone Project Name Projector & Lens Model # Projector:Lens: Blizzard Model 52. ______________ Quantity Destination Country Install Date Enclosure Type Landscape  Portrait  Ultra Short Throw  Projector Mount Slide  Fixed  Projector Orientation Landscape/UST: Feet Down  Feet Up  Portrait: Feet Left  Feet Right  Options & Accessories BlizzardCool Yes  No  Model: ______________ Thermal Insulation Yes  No  (included with BlizzardCool) Inlet Cowl Yes, Qty ______ No  Desert Filter Baffle Yes, Qty ______ No  Positive Pressure Yes, Qty ______ No  Sun Shade Yes, Qty ______ No  Feet-Up Kit Yes, Qty ______ No  Angle Mount Kit Yes, Qty ______ No  Cyclovator Yes, Qty ______ No  Unistrut Kit Mounting: Top  Yes, Qty ______ No  Bottom  Stacking Kit Yes, Qty ______ No  Drop Arms Kit Yes, Qty ______ No  Swivel Stacking Kit Yes, Qty ______ No  XYZ Kit, Horizontal Yes, Qty ______ No  XYZ Kit, Vertical Yes, Qty ______ No  (Blizzard 050-125) Ethernet 51.D4.23 (TSM)  Yes, Qty ______ No  51.D4.15 (TEMP)  Please complete one sheet for each Blizzard type required and email to us at info@tempest.biz Spare Inlet Filter Yes, Qty ___________ No  Color Standard, Light Bronze  Custom, RAL # ___________________ Gloss Level ___________________% Custom Requests: UST Lens Configuration: 90deg Up 90deg Down  90deg Right 90deg Left  Periscopic A  Periscopic B  Straight, Vshift Up Straight, Vshift Down  Factory Use Only: SO Number Date Electrical IEC  NEMA  150.LS.US 1 USA 2 11845 Wicks Street Sun Valley, CA 91352 USA info@tempest.biz tel: (818) 787-8984 fax: (818) 252-7101 Tempest Lighting, inc. No. 1998 Date (mm/dd/yy) 4/4/2022 Incoterms EXW Created By Felipe Hermosillo BILL TO City of Ken 307 West Gowe Ken, WA 98032 SHIP TO CONTACT Drew Coombs Drew Coombs Drew@jabrennan.com (206) 583-0620 Currency Terms Lead Time (Weeks)Customer Job 50/50 upon shipment 6 LINE NO.ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY PRICE EXT.UOM 1 52.150.LS.US Blizzard 5, 150 Landscape, Projector Slide, 100- 125V 1.00 10,354.23 10,354.23 EA 2 52.TI.150L Blizzard 150L Thermal Insulation Kit 1.00 876.17 876.17 EA 3 52.UR.150 Pair of Unistrut Rails and hardware kit 1.00 545.54 545.54 HR 4 51.D4.15 DEC4 Ethernet Board 1.00 510.40 510.40 EA 5 51.HF.15 Tempest Salt Fog Filter 15.5' x 15.5' ( 395 x 395mm)1.00 280.50 280.50 EA 6 0000.CL Custom Color Lot Charge 1.00 1,095.00 1,095.00 HR 7 EXW Incoterms: EXW Sun Valley, California (buyer is responsible for all freight charges) 1.00 0.00 0.00 EA Memo :Subtotal 13,661.84 Taxes 0.00 Total Amount 13,661.84 All sales are subject to Tempest Lighting, Inc. Standard Terms and Conditions, available for download at www.tempest.biz Wire Information: First Citizens Bank, Raleigh, NC Account# 001064667108 Tempest Lighting Inc Swift Number FCBTUS33 Tax ID: 06-1531948 - Country of Origin: USA - HS Code: 9405.99.0000 Validity of Quotation: 30 Days QUOTATION 4/4/2022 12:22:23 PM Page 1 of 2 ISOMETRIC VIEW TOP VIEW END VIEW SIDE VIEW 574c Industrial Way N. Dallas, GA 30132 PH: 770-505-6575 www.trenchdrain.net MATERIAL LOAD RATING STANDARD TOLERANCES 0 = +/-0.25 0.0 = +/-0.25 0.00 = +/- 0.13 COATING LOCKING ADA / HEEL GUARD 05CR24DI-R50 5" DUCTILE IRON RADIUS GRATE R1 DUCTILE IRON 65-45-12 E-COATED BLACK BOLT AND TOGGLE DIN CLASS D YES 23 7/8@ in 3/4 inGRATE SEAT: 1 1/8 in 4 7/8 in 5/16 in 2 1/2 in RECESSED AREA FOR LOCKING DEVICE DURABLE BLACK E-COATING ADA COMPLIANT & HEEL PROOF OPENINGS FOR PEDESTRIAN SAFETY 22.8 SQ IN / LF OPEN AREA TRACTION NUBS INCREASE FRICTION NOTE: THE RADIUS OF THE GRATE WILL VARY PER PROJECT. RADIUS SHOWN IS FOR GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION ONLY. URBAN ACCESSORI E S 12" [+/-]34" THICKSOLID GRATINGTYP. 12" OPENINGSAT TOP OF GRATESPECIFICATIONS465 E. FIFTEENTH ST.TACOMA, WA 98421(877) 487-0488sales@urbanaccessories.comwww.urbanaccessories.comFounded 1972ofDate:Drain Grate12" Rd. AnglePage114/16/12Section A-A'Plan- Material will be high quality 100% recycled grey iron; ASTM A48 class 35b or better; hardness 170-223 brinnell (unless specified otherwise; see below). Material:Ŀ*UH\LURQ$670$ VWDQGDUG Ŀ$OXPLQXP$670%Ŀ'XFWLOHLURQ UHTXLUHGIRUDOOORDG ratings higher than pedestrian) ASTM A536 class 65-45-12.Ŀ1LFNHOEURQ]H $670% Ŀ%URQ]H $670% - Finish will be natural patina of raw iron (unless specified otherwise; see below). Finish:Ŀ5DZ VWDQGDUG Ŀ5XVWFRQGLWLRQHUĿ3RO\HVWHU3RZGHU&RDW Ŀ/LTXLG&RDW ZHWSDLQW Color: *Please specify standard UA color or mfr. name and color code.Ŀ%UXVK EURQ]HQLFNHODOXPLQXPRQO\ Ŀ3ROLVK EURQ]HQLFNHODOXPLQXPRQO\ Ŀ*DOYDQL]HG JUH\LURQDQGGXFWLOH iron only)Ŀ2WKHU- Dimensions are nominal.Notes1) Grate is 34" thick at edge.2) No openings greater than 12", in conformancewith ADA Accessibility Guidelines.3) 27.2 sq. in. open area per grate.Comments: CS3000 The Calsense CS3000 is a powerful resource management system offering an easy and effective way to manage water and labor costs. Controllers not only communicate with one another to share information, but are also accessible anywhere, anytime from any internet-connected device including PCs, laptops, tablets, and smart phones. The CS3000 options are modular which means stations, lights, points of connections, and weather options can be added or removed in the field. A transient protection board is included protecting the controller and attached options against high voltage. A 2-Wire option allows a single controller to manage up to 128-independent valves, anywhere along a 7,000 foot cable run. Decoders are available as a 2-station POC decoder. By combining multiple 2-Wire POC decoders, a single controller can manage multiple points of connection, as well as operate a two or three-level bypass manifold. Features Technical - Central communications using Ethernet, Wi-Fi - Support for up to 128 stations when using both conventional and 2-Wire or just 2-Wire - Options are field-replaceable - Simple to use ‘groups’ to assign similar characteristics to multiple stations at once - Easy terminal connections for field wiring - When using FLOWSENSE® programming changes can be made from any controller on the chain - 10-year limited warranty Input requirement: 120VAC single phase, 1 amp Station outputs: 24VAC, 2.0 amps max (short protected) Power Height: 16.25” Color: Medium Gray Width: 14.50” Depth: 7.25” Material: 16 gauge, powder-coated stainless steel Physical Communications Options CS3-GR: 4G LTE CS3-EN: 10/100 Mbps Ethernet CS3-WEN: IEEE 802.11ac (Wi-Fi) CS3-SR: 900 MHz Spread Spectrum Radio CS3-LR: 450-470 MHz Licensed Radio CS3-M-KIT: Wire-linkable to share communication with multiple controllers Other Options CS3-2W-OPT: Interface for 2-Wire CS3-FL: FLOWSENSE® CS3-W-KIT: Weather Interface for ET Gage, Tipping Rain Bucket, and Wind Gage CS3-HUB-OPT: Interface to share central communication CS3-8STA-KIT: 8-station card plus terminal CS3-L: 4-light outputs CS3-POC-KIT: Card and terminal calsense.com 760-438-0525 Specifications Page 1 of 2 Address:2075 Corte del Nogal, Suite P Account Name:Kent, City of Estimate Number:00005526 Carlsbad, CA 92011 Contact Name:Estimate Name:Kherson Park Phone:Date Created:02-16-2022 Prepared By:Erin Hagen Email:Expiration Date*:12-30-2022 Phone:Contact Address: Email:erinh@calsense.com , Location Product Description Notes Unit Price Qty Total Price CS3-2W-WM 2-Wire base model CS3000 with wall-mount enclosure, transient protection, and field-replaceable modules. Supports up to 128-stations using 2-Wire Station Decoders.$2,695.00 1 $2,695.00 CS3-L-KIT CS3000 lights card and terminal board. Allows operation of up to 4- independent light circuits.$620.00 1 $620.00 CS-2W-POC CS3000 2-Wire POC decoder with 1 flow meter input and 1 master valve output $430.00 1 $430.00 TP-110 AC line protection for CS3000 irrigation controllers.$235.00 1 $235.00 CS3-GR-KIT 4G LTE Cellular modem for CS3000 to provide communication with cloud- based Command Center Online web application. Includes GR-STUBBY antenna. Requires Calsense cellular data plan, purchased separately.$2,105.00 1 $2,105.00 COMM-5YR-2 5-year prepaid data plan for 1-cellular modem communicating with 1 or 2 controllers (billed every 5-years). Non-cancellable and non-refundable. If renewing an existing plan, existing phone number required. For new orders, must include customer/job location; renewals must include existing phone number to renew. Replaces COMM-5YR.$795.00 1 $795.00 OPT for Rain Switch CS3-POC-KIT CS3000 POC card and terminal board. Used to add a conventionally-wired POC (master valve and flow meter) to a 2-Wire controller.$620.00 1 $620.00 QTY TBD CS-2W-2ST CS3000 2-Wire station decoder with 2-station outputs $245.00 1 $245.00 Size TBD FM 1B 1" brass tee-mounted Flow Meter $705.00 1 $705.00 Subtotal:$8,450.00 *Pricing expires at the end of the calendar year unless otherwise changed by Calsense Freight:Included **Sales tax to be determined at time of sale Tax**:TBD Estimated Total:$8,450.00 Additional Notes: “A” CS3-2W-WM/CS3-POC-KIT/CS3-GR-KIT/COMM-5YR-2/CS3-L-KIT/CS-2W-2ST(QTY TBD)/CS-2W-POC(1)/TP-110/FM 1B Terms & Conditions End-users: All pricing is preliminary and based on list pricing, for budgetary purposes. Please work with your local distributor for final pricing and to order. Go to https://www.calsense.com/where-to-buy/ for a list of Calsense distributors. Distributors: Please send Purchase Orders referencing Estimate Number 00005526 to orders@calsense.com. Page 2 of 2 Prices include standard shipping within the contiguous United States; from Calsense’s factory to the respective distributor’s facility. This is an estimate on the goods named, subject to any noted conditions. All radio communications proposals are preliminary and not final until a complete radio test is done by Calsense. All controllers must be properly installed and grounded, as per Calsense’s installation guidelines. All computer hardware, software, and cellular data plans are non-returnable and non-refundable. All cable lengths are estimated and are not final until measured. Cellular data service plans may be non-taxable. Customer to provide state and regional guidelines. See https://www.calsense.com/warranty/ for warranty information. All sales are subject to the sales terms found at https://www.calsense.com/sales-terms/. Rev January 10, 2022. 120 VAC conduit box with optional GFI receptacle and ON/OFF switch Allow 15” this side for fully opened door 2” PVC conduit for field wiring 5/8” by 8’ copper ground rod #6 bare copper wire to ground rod Optional Calsense TP-110 surge protection device 3/4” PVC conduit for ground wire 1-1/4” PVC conduit for communication cable, 2-wire cable, sensors Calsense CS3000 controller box Optional Stubby antenna(s) 110 VAC connection and grounding per National and Local electric codes Top of box to be 67.25 inches above ground plus/minus 2 inches 2” PVC conduit for field wiring 14.25"16.25" 13 HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURES SPECIFICATIONS FRONT ENTRY ENCLOSURE MODELS: SB-18SS, SB-1852SS, SB-18DSS, SB-24SS, SB-24DSS, SB36SS This front entry enclosure is a vandal and weather resistant enclosure formed entirely of stainless steel. The main housing is louvered to allow for cross flow ventilation with filter screens to deflect against water spray, insects and dust. A removable stainless steel backboard is provided for mounting various types of equipment and is secured with four stainless steel bolts. The door is hemmed to eliminate sharp edges and secured with a stainless steel, continuous piano hinge and a three point locking mechanism with provisions for a padlock. A continuous drainage channel around all sides of door face provides a water-tight seal with the tear drop shaped, hollow center, thermoplastic door seal. The inside door also provides adequate storage for instructions or plans. This enclosure is NEMA 3R rated and UL 508A listed. 1. Controller enclosure 2. Automatic controller 3. Controller sub-assembly (CSA) includes GFI & terminal strips with placards 4. 120 volt service in conduit 5. Optional pedestal riser INSTALLATION DETAILS SPECIFICATIONS Double Door Side View Single Door Side View 6. PVC conduit out to control valves 7. Poured concrete base, 6” min. thickness extending 4” beyond outside dimensions of enclosure with 1/2% slope for drainage 8. Finish grade 9Telephone (800) 729-1314 n FAX (888) 310-3946 n www.vitproducts.com METERED ENCLOSURES STAINLESS STEEL COMBINED COMMERCIAL METER SOCKET WITH THE ULTIMATE ENCLOSURE •Compact, double door, front and back design, provides viewing and programming convenience •100% stainless steel construction assures long-term, rust-proof durability and additional strength •Chameleon effect of the natural brushed stainless steel finish provides an unobtrusive quality METER SECTION •UL listed, E.U.S.E.R.C. approved commercial meter socket, 100 amp rated, with test block bypass provision •Hinged viewing window provides convenient access for metering agency •100 amp load center •120v and 240v models available SB-24SS/120V Metered Enclosure 120 Volt •24” Wide, 48” High, 29” Deep •120 Volt Meter Socket •Test Blocks •8 Position Load Center •Double Door Design •12” Deep Storage on Back Side •100% Stainless Steel •Weather & Vandal Resistant •Three-Point Locking System •Removable, Predrilled Backboard •Large Door-Mounted Storage •Louvered For Ventilation •UL Listed •NEMA 3R Rated ENCLOSURE SECTION •Removable, predrilled backboard provides for easy installation and an attractive finished product •Large door-mounted storage area provides easy access to plans and scheduling information •Side louvers at bottom and top allow crossflow ventilation •Ten year limited warranty •Weather & Vandal Resistant •Three-Point Locking System •Removable, Predrilled Backboard •Large Door-Mounted Storage •Louvered For Ventilation •UL Listed •NEMA 3R Rated SB-24SS/240V Metered Enclosure 240 Volt •24” Wide, 48” High, 29” Deep •240 Volt Meter Socket •Test Blocks •8 Position Load Center •Double Door Design •12” Deep Storage on Back Side •100% Stainless Steel No Fault Safety SurfaceTraditional Poured-in-Place for Playgrounds www.nofault.com COLOR CHART Available Colors:Standard Color Blends50% Blue 50% Black 50% Terra Cotta 50% Black50% Tan 50% Black 50% Green 50% Black Brown Yellow Light Green Tan Gold Green Teal Light Blue Terra Cotta Purple Blue Orange The color as shown on the color chart will not be an exact match to the product in the field. NOTES' I THILHEN INTERIOR BORDER AB NEEDED FOR STR(/LTlNAL STRENGTH /0 NNE BOBBER SHOl2B MT L-IT TEXTUIE APPL�O. ' Z OPENINGS MAY NOT EXCEED "ADA"REGULATIONS. l/. GRATE SHALL BE PLACER NTO A /-//4" X /-% 4' X //4" ANGLE FRAW 3 ADJUST BORDER DESIGN TO /NCORRORA TE 'BOL T-DOWN" LAPANL/TY. /2. TOP OF GRATE MUST BE FLUBH WITH TOP CF ANGLE FRAME WHEN INSTALLED. SLIGHTLY RAISED R/OGE IN DESIGN. / Y 6 ALTERATIONS MAY BE MADE /N DESIGN DURING LONBUL TA NON WITH y FABRICATOR AND APPROVAL BY THE ARTIST. Y EDGES OF LEA ✓ES SHOULD BE ROUNDED LSMOO THEOI/N FABR/LA SIGN. B. CROSS BARS ARE 3/B" WIDE, WHILE INNER BANDS ARE INTENDED NOT i TO EXCEED I/4". 9. MEASUREMENTS AND BPA LING WITHIN DRAWING IS NOT EXACT AAD ,.,... SHOULD BE MOOIF/EG /N FA— T/ON SO THAT SAID lS FIXED AM19 _ STANDARD/ZED. q,_ORIP , i \ A �- -- i III is �� X LELGRATE -COMPLETE GRATE F , / - PIECES o �� • C�4y Off G3[GI4 ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT DOWNTOWN SIDEWALK REHABILITATION PHASE 2 TREE GRATE DETAIL NO. - -2 FT. A OF--L-- nFvrtOVFo m s N D z c) o\ �00 ^o N C z - o F- c) Cl) Cn D m v n Z �/ 0 -o n O c � K 0 m x m m z vzI co m- n D m N 0 � v r0* m v (n 3 r v 0 v m 00 _ r v \ D r � z > > v c� x 00 00 — 00 �x WW o D z Ih l�Ihg I I o g,n / /1 l/^�J FTI < < D N 00 O D Co > > r 0vz Cn rn 4 C o z D z \ D m W D � m A 0 m �iw 48 3/4" SQ. OVERALL 0 Fn —i a-u OW N D CO m m O D 0 Cb z N 0 CO ITl m N � O o M O mm <